Outdoor Gear | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/outdoor-gear/ Awe-inspiring science reporting, technology news, and DIY projects. Skunks to space robots, primates to climates. That's Popular Science, 145 years strong. Fri, 20 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2.2 https://www.popsci.com/uploads/2021/04/28/cropped-PSC3.png?auto=webp&width=32&height=32 Outdoor Gear | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/outdoor-gear/ 32 32 The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-bird-feeder-cameras/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580793
four of the best bird feeder cameras sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

Bird feeder cameras allow you to see your feathered friends in new ways.

The post The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the best bird feeder cameras sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A blue Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder filled with seed against a white background with a gray gradient. Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder
SEE IT

The Bird Buddy offers stylish design, quality images, and a fun app with real-time notifications.

Best for hummingbirds A blue BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera against a white background with a grey gradient. BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera
SEE IT

The nectar attachment of this feeder can be swapped out to hold seed as well.

Best budget A white WYZE Cam v3 against a white background with a gray gradient. WYZE Cam v3
SEE IT

This budget option lets you see the birds without any extras.

Bird feeder cameras make documenting our feathered friends fun and easy, but they aren’t created equally. Some are best for bird-watching in your own backyard, while others are better suited to remote locations. More expensive models have features like solar panels, video options, and smart bird identification, while basic, budget models make feeder photography accessible for just about everyone. No matter what you are looking for, the best bird feeder cameras will allow you to capture quality images of the birds who call your area home. 

How we chose the best bird feeder cameras

There are dozens of bird feeder cameras on the market. Though many of them have the same basic features, they don’t all offer the same level of important features like durability, battery life, and accuracy of species detection. 

To arrive at our top picks, we relied on our own assessment of each device, including hands-on experience with multiple models. Because bird feeder cameras must be durable, weatherproof, and offer long-lasting performance, we also leaned heavily on user experiences and favored well-reviewed products. 

Features like accurate bird identification, solar panel availability, and useful accessories also helped push some models into the limelight. Other options like real-time notification and color night vision were nice to have but not essentials. Still, they didn’t tend to figure into our final decision simply because of their somewhat limited value for bird photography. 

The best bird feeder cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Choosing a bird feeder camera can be tough. There are dozens of available models, and the prices can range from less than $50 all the way up to $400 or more. The key to finding the right bird feeder camera is not necessarily shopping by price but knowing which features are must-haves and which are not. Not everyone will benefit from AI, for example. You may even prefer to use your own knowledge to identify the birds in your photographs. Below are our favorite options, suitable for a range of situations and users. 

Best overall: Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies more than 1,000 bird species 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 5-megapixel photos, 720p video
  • Battery: 4000 mAh rechargeable lithium-ion battery, optional solar panel

Pros

  • Sharp images with a 120-degree field of view
  • Weatherproof from -5°F to 120°F
  • The smartphone app allows you to see feeders all over the world
  • Compatible with an optional solar panel and lots of accessories
  • Three mounting options

Cons

  • No local storage, so it can’t be used without Wi-Fi
  • Video resolution is lower than some competitors

The Bird Buddy bird feeder camera is relatively new, but it has much to offer, so it earns our top spot. The bird feeder is attractively designed, so it will look nice in your yard or on your deck with some solar lights, which is an important feature for many. It’s available in blue or vibrant yellow, so you can choose an option that fits your style best. I really enjoy the look of the blue Bird Buddy on the side of my porch, which is a big plus. 

The camera module is removable, which is important when it comes time to clean the feeder. It can take five-megapixel photos or offers 720p live-streamed video. The image quality won’t be that of your dedicated mirrorless or DSLR camera, but it is nicely detailed and properly exposed even in backlit situations. And being able to tune in to watch live as a bird chows down is pretty neat. 

The camera’s 120-degree field of view is wide enough to capture birds hanging out on the feeder’s side. You can also buy multiple accessories through Bird Buddy to extend the perch or feed different species. With the solar roof (the model we thoroughly tested and reviewed), you’ll never need to think about charging the camera. Without the solar roof, you’ll need to charge the camera every 5 to 15 days.

The Bird Buddy relies on AI to automatically recognize over 1,000 species of birds. The Bird Buddy app notifies you when you have new visitors to your feeder, which is always exciting. You can even browse other Bird Buddy devices all over the world to see species that you wouldn’t otherwise encounter. Plus, the images from your device contribute to migration information for conservation databases. You’ll be helping science progress while getting fun images of your feathered friends. 

Best trail camera: TECHNAXX Full HD Birdcam TX-165 

TECHNAXX

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: None
  • App compatibility: N/A, no app available
  • Resolution: 8-megapixel photos, full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 4 AA batteries give it a working time of up to 6 months

Pros

  • Sturdy trail-cam style feeder
  • 6-month battery life
  • Removable water basin means it can be a feeder or a birdbath
  • Captures slow-motion video

Cons

  • No smartphone app or bird identification features
  • Memory card storage is less convenient than Wi-Fi or Bluetooth

This hybrid bird feeder camera is as tough as any trail camera. However, unlike most trail cameras, it can focus as close as 2 to 6 inches and offers a 100-degree field of view. This means you’ll get much better images of visiting birds than you would with a typical trail cam. The TX-165 takes standard AA batteries but has a working time of up to 6 months. You can leave it in a secure, remote location for a long time without worrying about the battery going flat.

The TX-165 also has a few features you won’t find on other bird feeder cameras. You can fill it with birdseed or fill the removable basin with water and turn it into a birdbath camera. It also takes impressive eight-megapixel images and full HD 1080p video. It’s also capable of 25 frames per second for slow-motion videos. 

Best for bird boxes: Hawk Eye HD Nature Cam

Hawk Eye

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: None
  • App compatibility: N/A, no app available
  • Resolution: 700 tvl (television lines)
  • Battery: None (includes a 75-foot power cable)

Pros

  • Compact, so you can hide it almost anywhere
  • Night vision lets you capture clear images in poor light 
  • Durable and temperature-tolerant to between 35°F and 105°F

Cons

  • Only shoots video 
  • Not waterproof
  • Needs to be plugged into a power supply

Birds do a lot more than just eat birdseed, so at some point, you might want to step up to a birdhouse camera. Because the Hawk Eye Nature Cam isn’t built into a feeder, it’s much more flexible than most bird cams. Its small size means you can put it anywhere—on treetops, fence posts, or even in animal burrows (though please exercise caution when putting it down a snake hole). Or it can be wired discreetly into a bird box for a 24/7 look at growing bird families, from egg to fledgling. 

The Hawk Eye Nature Cam is meant for live-streaming to your television set. The video resolution is clear and sharp, with 700 tvl (television lines) and 10 infrared diodes. This lets you view clear video even in the darkened environment of a typical bird box. Note, however, that you will need an RCA to USB adapter if you have a modern TV. 

The Hawk Eye does have a few drawbacks. It has no battery, so you’ll have to mess with a long extension cord to get it set up. It also isn’t waterproof. If you want to attach it to an unsheltered location, you’ll have to build waterproof housing or limit your use to dry weather. Finally, you can connect the camera to your PC and use additional software to grab photos and video segments from the live stream, but it’s not designed to capture high-resolution stills.

Best for hummingbirds: BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera

BirdDock

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies species and alerts you when birds approach 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 2-megapixel photos, full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 6400 mAh rechargeable batteries provide 20 to 30 days of operating time 

Pros

  • AI can recognize around 5,000 different species, including hummingbirds
  • Rechargeable batteries provide 20 to 30 days of use
  • Hummingbird attachment is removable

Con:

  • Still photos are much lower resolution than those shot by similar feeders 
  • The app is clunky and difficult to use

The BirdDock is a flexible bird feeder camera that isn’t limited to just capturing photos of seed-eaters. It also offers a removable hummingbird attachment featuring five flower-shaped feeding ports with 0.16-inch holes to keep bees and other insects out.  When you want to switch to photographing songbirds, you can remove the hummingbird feeder and fill the device with seeds. 

Like other AI feeders, the BirdDock will identify species and alert you when one is approaching the feeder. It has night vision, too, which could help you identify other critters that visit your feeder overnight. This bird feeder camera features a 160-degree field of view and can be used with or without an SD memory card. It provides an impressive battery life of up to 30 days. You can also purchase a separate solar panel to keep the device charged in sunny weather.

The BirdDock has two primary drawbacks: It captures still photos at a relatively low resolution of only two megapixels (though it does also capture full HD 1080p video). It also doesn’t have an especially user-friendly app. Some users complain that the bird identification feature isn’t accurate and that the app frequently disconnects from the camera.

Best for bird identification: Netvue Birdfy Pro

Netvue

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies more than 6,000 different species 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: Full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 5000 mAh rechargeable batteries 

Pros

  • Can identify more than 6,000 different species 
  • Long battery life (the manufacturer claims up to six months of use)
  • Extra features like squirrel recognition and color night vision

Cons

  • The bird identification service costs extra
  • Storing photos on the cloud requires a subscription

The Netvue Birdfy rivals the Bird Buddy with features like ease of use, durability, and photo quality. It has an impressive array of extra features like color night vision. The AI can recognize squirrels, and the built-in microphone lets you yell at them when they’re caught robbing the feeder. You can also upgrade your feeder with add-ons like a solar panel, hummingbird feeder, and perch extension.

The Birdfy has the same features as most other feeders, including automatic capture/motion detection and real-time notification. It takes clear video at close range, provides a 135-degree field of view, and even offers 8x magnification if you want to study the fine details.

Birdfy has an impressive database of 6,000 species, though reviewers note that it isn’t always accurate. When it does misidentify a bird, you have the option to submit a report via the app. This is evidence that Netvue is constantly working to improve its software. 

The primary drawback of the Netvue bird feeder camera is you may have to pay for various subscriptions depending on what features you want access to. For example, if you want to take advantage of the bird identification feature, you must pay for a subscription. Likewise, a subscription is required if you want to store photos on the Netvue Cloud for longer than 30 days. 

Best budget: WYZE Cam v3

WYZE

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: No species identification
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 1080p full HD video
  • Battery: No battery

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Weatherproof 
  • Compact for easy mounting

Cons

  • Minimum focus distance is around 12 inches
  • No battery; needs to be plugged into a power supply

Bird feeder cameras with all the bells and whistles can be expensive. A $200 feeder might be outside your budget, or you may not need all the features that expensive bird feeder cameras offer. The WYZE Cam v3 is essentially an outdoor security camera. You won’t be able to fill it with birdseed or attach a hummingbird accessory. But you can mount this sturdy little camera next to any commercial bird feeder or install it close to a high-traffic part of your backyard. 

The WYZE Cam v3 offers all the basic features you need in a bird cam. It’s weatherproof with an IP65 rating. It takes photos when it senses motion, and it has an app so you can see what’s happening outside in real-time. 

The WYZE Cam does have a few drawbacks. One of these is the focus distance. While most dedicated bird cams can focus on subjects as close as a few inches, the WYZE Cam isn’t designed for closeups. You’ll have to mount it at least a foot away from your feeder, meaning you won’t see a lot of detail in your photos. 

The WYZE Cam is also wired. It comes with a weatherproof six-foot USB cable, so you’ll have to install it close to your home. On the plus side, once installed, you won’t have to worry about changing or recharging the battery or losing your video stream on a cloudy day.

Things to consider before buying a bird feeder camera

If you love bird watching but don’t want to sit waiting with your binoculars, a bird feeder camera will allow you to capture photos and videos of birds even when you aren’t around.

A bird feeder camera is meant for permanent outdoor use. This means it needs features you probably don’t consider when shopping for other photography gear. Here are some of the most important things you’ll want to think about when shopping for a bird feeder camera.

Durability

Bird feeder cameras can be subject to some serious abuse. The sun’s UV rays and hot temperatures can degrade plastic casings over time. These devices must also withstand storms and sprinklers, remaining waterproof from season to season. Of course, they should also be tough enough to handle the beaks and claws of visiting critters—not just the birds they’re intended for but other potential visitors like squirrels and mice.

Image quality

The image quality of bird feeder cameras is dependent on a few things. Resolution is the first thing most think of, and indeed, it is important with these devices. If you want clear, sharp images, look for bird feeder cameras with higher resolution. These compact cameras won’t offer numbers you may be used to in smartphones or mirrorless cameras, though. Five to eight megapixels for stills and 1080p for video tend to be the highest available at the moment.  However, if you aren’t concerned with high levels of detail, you could save some money and opt for a device with a less impressive resolution. 

The second factor of image quality is close focusing distance. The majority of shots taken by a bird feeder camera will be up-close. As a result, look for a device capable of getting clear photos at a very short distance. Even as close as a few inches is ideal.  Finally, birds don’t tend to sit still for long. Because of this, the camera should be able to freeze action, even in low light conditions like early morning or cloudy days. 

WiFi connectivity

WiFi isn’t necessarily a critical feature, but it’s something to consider if you’re going to keep your feeder close to your house. Most people don’t want to trek outside daily to download photos or swap out a memory card. A WiFi connection will let you see what your camera captured at any time of day in any weather. Treating it like a smart-home device will save you from having to venture into the cold, heat, or rain unless you need to change the battery or add birdseed.

Pay attention to the range of the device, too. Shy birds won’t approach your device if it is too close to your home. If it’s too far away, you won’t be able to view your photos without exiting your home.

Mounting options

Each bird feeder camera will have somewhat different requirements for how you install them. Some require a pole, some can be mounted to a fence post, and others can be hung. Depending on where you want the feeder and what tools you have available for installation, some of these options may be better than others for your particular needs.

Battery life

Some bird feeder cameras take basic replaceable AA batteries; others rely on solar panels to power internal rechargeable batteries. Either way, you’ll want to pick a camera that isn’t power-hungry. A good battery will ensure you aren’t constantly changing batteries or missing photos because your camera goes dark on a cloudy day. 

Choosing a camera with motion detection is a good place to start. These cameras only activate when there’s something to take a photo of, which helps the battery last longer.

FAQs

Q: How do bird feeder cameras work?

Most bird feeder cameras are triggered by motion. When a bird visits the feeder, the camera will capture a still photo or record video, depending on its design. Some smart bird feeder cameras can also identify species by comparing photos to thousands of stored images of each individual bird species.

Q: What color bird feeder attracts more birds?

A 2017 study found that green or silver bird feeders tend to attract the most visitors, but color preference also seems to be species-specific. Robins in the study, for example, preferred black feeders, while greenfinches and starlings didn’t seem to care about color at all. 

Q: Where should I put a bird feeder camera?

Bird feeders should be placed in open spaces but not too far from potential cover. The Humane Society recommends placing feeders 12 feet from brush and trees. This prevents predators from hiding near the feeder and gives the birds cover to fly to if they feel threatened.

Q: Do infrared cameras bother birds?

Infrared light is invisible to birds, so a camera inside a bird box will give you clear pictures while the bird remains in darkness. 

Final thoughts on the best bird feeder cameras

Once limited to nature photographers with long telephoto lenses and lots of patience, bird feeder cameras have made bird photography nearly effortless and available to almost anyone. That doesn’t necessarily mean any camera will do, though. Thinking about what you want to get out of your investment is an important first step in choosing a feeder. If you’re hoping to get up-close, detailed shots, pay attention to the example shots provided by the manufacturer and uploaded by users. Consider how important good battery life is to you, and ask yourself if you really need a camera that will identify already familiar local birds.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-telescopes-under-500/ Mon, 27 Jun 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=451591
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

Looking to stargaze on a budget? We’ve got the goods on the best affordable telescopes.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ is the best overall telescope under $500. Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ
SEE IT

A solid build and specs, paired with smartphone-guided sky recognition technology, makes this telescope perfect for starry-eyed explorers.

Best for viewing planets Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope is the best for viewing planets. Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope
SEE IT

This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for checking out neighboring orbs.

Best for kids Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit is the best for kids. Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit
SEE IT

The entire package is designed to inspire kids during the window where they stare curiously out of the windows.

Telescopes under $500 can provide a passport to the universe without emptying your wallet. In their basic function, telescopes are our connection to the stars. For millennia, humankind has gazed skyward with wonder into the infinite reaches of outer space. And as humans are a curious bunch, our ancestors devised patterns in the movements of celestial bodies, gave them names, and built stories around them. The ancient Egyptians, Babylonians, and Greeks indulged in star worship. But you don’t have to follow those lines to geek out over the vastness of the night sky. It’s just so cool. Fortunately, whatever your motivation for getting under the stars, there is an affordable option for you on our list of the best telescopes under $500.

How we chose the best telescopes under $500

The under-$500 telescope market is crowded with worthy brands and models, so we looked at offerings in that price range from several well-known manufacturers in the space. After narrowing our focus based on personal experience, peer suggestions, critical reviews, and user impressions, we considered aperture, focal length, magnification, build quality, and value to select these five models.

The best telescopes under $500: Reviews & Recommendations

To get the best views of the stars, planets, and other phenomena of outer space, not just any old telescope will get the job done. There are levels of quality and a wide range of price points and features to sort through before you can be sure you’re making the right purchase for what you want out of your telescope, whether it’s multi-thousands, one of the best telescopes for under $1,000, or one of our top picks under $500.

Best overall: Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ

Celestron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Solid build and specs, paired with the remarkable StarSense Explorer app, make this telescope a perfect introduction to celestial observation.

Specs

  • Focal length: 650mm
  • Aperture: 130mm, f/5
  • Magnification: 65x, 26x

Pros

  • App aids in finding stars
  • Easy to operate
  • Steady altazimuth mount

Cons

  • Eyepieces are both low power

Newbies to astronomy today can have a decidedly different experience than beginners who started stargazing before smartphones were a thing. Instead of carting out maps of the night sky to find constellations, the StarSense Explorer series from Celestron, including the DX 130AZ refractor, makes ample use of your device to bring you closer to the stars. 

With your smartphone resting in the telescope’s built-in dock, the StarSense Explorer app will find your location using the device’s GPS and serve up a detailed list of celestial objects viewable in real time. Looking for the Pleiades cluster? This app will tell you how far away it is from you and then lead you there with on-screen navigation. The app also includes descriptions of those objects, tips for observing them, and other useful info. 

The StarSense Explorer ships with an altazimuth mount equipped with slow-moving fine-tuning controls for both axes so you can find your target smoothly. And for those times you want to explore the night sky without tethering a smartphone, the scope’s red dot finder will help you zero in on your targets. The two eyepieces, measuring 25mm and 10mm, are powerful enough to snag stellar views of the planets but not quite enough to see the details a high-powered eyepiece would deliver.

Best for viewing planets: Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope

Sky-Watcher

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for viewing planets.

Specs

  • Focal length: 1300mm
  • Aperture: 102mm, f/12.7
  • Magnification: 130x, 52x

Pros

  • Great for viewing planets and galaxies
  • Sharp focus and contrast
  • Powerful

Cons

  • Not ideal for deep-space viewing

Let’s be real—most consumers in the market for a moderately priced telescope are in it to gain spectacular views of the planets and galaxies, but probably not much else. And it’s easy to see why. Nothing makes celestial bodies come alive like viewing them in real time, in all their colorful glory.

If that sounds like you, allow us to direct you to the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, a refracting telescope specializing in crisp views of objects like planets and galaxies with ample contrast to make them pop against the dark night sky. The Skymax 102 is based on a Maksutov-Cassegrains design that uses both mirrors and lenses, resulting in a heavy-hitting scope in a very compact and portable unit. A generous 102mm aperture pulls in plenty of light to illuminate the details in objects, and the 1300mm focal length results in intense magnification.

Two included wide-angle eyepieces measuring 25mm and 10mm deliver 130x and 52x magnification, respectively. The package also includes a red-dot finder, V-rail for mounting, 1.25-inch diagonal viewing piece, and a case for transport and storage. Look no further if you’re looking for pure colors across a perfectly flat field in a take-anywhere form factor.

Best for astrophotography: William Optics GuideStar 61 

William Optics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Top-notch specs and an enviable lens setup make this telescope ideal for astrophotography.

Specs

  • Focal length: 360mm
  • Aperture: f/5.9
  • Magnification: 7x (with 2-inch eyepiece)

Pros

  • Well-appointed specs
  • Sturdy, durable construction
  • Carrying case included

Cons

  • Flattener is an extra purchase

Sometimes you want to share more than descriptions of what you see in the night sky, and that’s where this guidescope comes in, helping you to focus on the best full-frame image. You can go as deep into the details (not to mention debt) as your line of credit will allow in your quest to capture the most impressive images of space. Luckily, though, this is a worthy option at a reasonable price. 

The Williams Optics Guide Star 61 telescope is a refracting-type scope with a 360mm focal length, f/5.9 aperture, and 61mm diameter well-suited to capturing sharp images of planets, moon, and bright deep-sky objects. The GS61 shares many specs with the now-discontinued Zenith Star 61, including focal length, aperture, and diameter, as well as the FPL53 ED doublet lens for high-contrast images.

The scope’s optical tube is about 13 inches long and weighs just 3 lbs.—great for traveling with the included carrying case—with a draw-tube (push-pull) focuser for coarse focusing and a rotating lens assembly for fine focus. Attaching a DSLR camera to the Guide Star 61 is a fairly easy job, but note that the flattener for making that connection is a separate purchase.

Best for kids: Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit

Orion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The entire package is designed to get kids exploring space right out of the box.

Specs

  • Focal length: 700mm
  • Aperture: 60mm, f/11.7
  • Magnification: 70x, 28x

Pros

  • Capable of detailed views of moon and planets
  • Lightweight construction
  • Lots of handy accessories

Cons

  • Not enough optical power to reach deep space

Parents have a limited window of time to recognize and develop their kids’ interests, so kindle a fascination with the stars through a star projector and then fan it with a telescope. That’s what makes the Orion Observer II such a great buy. Seeing the craters on the moon or the rings of Saturn for the first time can affirm your kids’ curiosity about space and expand their concept of the universe—and they can get those goosebumps while learning through this altazimuth refractor telescope.

The Orion Observer II is built to impressive specifications, with a 700mm focal length that provides 71x magnification for viewing the vivid details of planets in our solar system. True glass lenses (not plastic) are a bonus at this price point, and combined with either included Kellner eyepieces (25mm and 10mm), the telescope delivers crisp views of some of space’s most dazzling objects. 

Kids and parents can locate celestial objects with the included red-dot finder. The kit also includes MoonMap 260, a fold-out map that directs viewers to 260 lunar features, such as craters, valleys, ancient lava flows, mountain ranges, and every U.S. and Soviet lunar mission landing site. An included copy of Exploring the Cosmos: An Introduction to the Night Sky gives a solid background before they go stargazing. And with its aluminum tube and tripod, the entire rig is very portable, even for young ones, with a total weight of 4.3 pounds. Find more options for the best telescopes for kids here. (And/or go the opposite direction with a microscope for kids—a love of science begets more science.)

Celestron

SEE IT

EDITOR’S NOTE: Popular Science has teamed up with Celestron on a line of products. The decision to include this model in our recommendations was made by our reviewer independently of that relationship, but we do earn a commission on its sales—all of which helps power Popular Science.

Why it made the cut: With its feature set, portability, and nice price point, this scope is ready for some serious stargazing without a serious investment.

Specs

  • Focal length: 400mm
  • Aperture: 70mm, f/5.7
  • Magnification: 168x

Pros

  • Bluetooth remote shutter release
  • Ships with two eyepieces
  • Pack included

Cons

  • Lacks optical power for deep space

Getting out of town, whether camping in the wilderness or driving in the countryside, is one of the attractions of stargazing. Out in the great wide open, far away from streetlights, the stars explode even to the naked eye. Add a handy telescope like the Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope—our pick for the best portable telescope under $500—and you’ll see much farther into space. The fact that it’s as affordable as it is moveable just adds to the value.

The Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope is a well-equipped refractor telescope built for backpacking and adventuring but without skimping on cool gadgets. Whether you’re gazing at celestial or terrestrial objects, the smartphone adapter will aid you in capturing images with your personal device, with an included Bluetooth remote shutter release.

Designed with portability and weight in mind, the entire package fits into an included pack with a total of 3.3 pounds—that includes the telescope, tripod stand, 20mm and 10mm eyepieces, 3x Barlow lens, and more. Download Celestron’s Starry Night software to help you get the most from your astronomy experience. 

Here are some other options from the Celestron and Popular Science collaboration:

What to consider when buying the best telescopes under $500

Optics

There are three types of optics available on consumer telescopes, and they will help you achieve three different goals. Refractor telescopes use a series of glass lenses to bring celestial bodies like the moon and near planets into focus easily. Reflector telescopes—also known as Newtonian scopes for their inventor, Sir Isaac Newton—swap lenses for mirrors and allow stargazers to see deeper into space. Versatile compound telescopes combine these two methods in a smaller, more portable form factor, with results that land right in the middle of the pack. 

Aperture

Photographers will recognize this: The aperture controls the amount of light entering the telescope, like on a manual camera. Aperture is the diameter of the lens or the primary mirror, so a telescope with a large aperture draws more light than a small aperture, resulting in views into deeper space. F-ratio is the spec to watch here. Low f-ratios, such as f/4 or f/5, are usually best for wide-field observation and photography, while high f-ratios like f/15 can make deep-space nebulae and other bodies easier to see and capture. Midpoint f-ratios can get the job done for both.

Mounts

All the lens and mirror power in the world won’t mean much if you attach your telescope to a subpar mount. In general, the more lightweight and portable the tripod mount, the more movement you’ll likely get while gazing or photographing the stars. Investing in a stable mount will improve the viewing experience. The two common mount types are alt-az (altitude-azimuth) and equatorial. Altazimuth mounts operate in the same way as a camera tripod, allowing you to adjust both axes (left-right, up-down), while equatorial mounts also tilt to make it easier to follow celestial objects.

FAQs

Q: What is the most powerful telescope for home use?

The most powerful telescope for home use from this list is the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, which tops out at 130x magnification with its included eyepieces.

Q: Is a 90mm telescope good?

Yes, a 90mm telescope is good for viewing planetary features like the rings of Saturn and the Great Red Spot on Jupiter.

Q: How much does a telescope cost?

The cost of a telescope varies depending on the brand, model, and construction but there are plenty of affordable options—like the ones on this list.

Q: How powerful does a telescope have to be to see planets?

A telescope with a minimum 60mm aperture has enough power to see planets.

Q: What size telescope do I need to see the rings of Saturn?

You can see the rings of Saturn with as low as a 60mm aperture. 

Q: What size telescope do I need? 

The telescope size you need depends on what you want out of it. This list of best telescopes under $500 gives a good rundown on telescope types, sizes, and uses.

Final thoughts on the best telescopes under $500

Although this group of sub-$500 scopes is fairly diverse, the Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ stands out in our best telescopes under $500 as the best place to start your interstellar journey due to its versatility and sky recognition app, which make for a fun evening of guided tours through the star patterns, no experience necessary. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-elderly/ Mon, 19 Sep 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=470538
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let the snow ruin your day.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The SnowMaster 824 QXE will power through rough snow with ease. Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE
SEE IT

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Best single-stage Clear your driveway before breakfast. Toro Power Clear 721
SEE IT

The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Best two-stage The snow has got to go with the Storm 2420. Troy-Bilt Storm 2420
SEE IT

The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Snow blowers can make quick work of clearing snowy walkways and long driveways after a major snowstorm. They make snow removal easier for everyone but can be especially helpful for older homeowners struggling with shoveling. Using one takes less time, strength, and stamina than using a shovel, which can be especially risky for anyone with joint and/or back problems. The best snow blowers for elderly people will ensure you can safely clear snow accumulation to access your car and walkways quickly.

How we chose the best snow blowers for elderly people

I’ve been writing about gear and gadgets for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best gallon water bottles to the best smoke detectors.

To determine how to select snow blowers for elderly people specifically, we contacted medical experts, including Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, to understand what qualities, if any, might make a snowblower better or worse for older people. We found that snowblowers are easier to use than shovels when clearing large areas.

From there, we drew on our past research when recommending the best snow blowers and best snow shovels to find the most reliable options from the best brands. We also drew on recent reviews from experts and user impressions to ensure our recommendations are up to date before the coming winter season.

The best snow blowers for elderly people: Reviews & Recommendations

It can be hard to balance picking a snow blower that’s powerful enough to handle any situation and one that will actually make clearing snow safer and easier. There are a lot of variables at play, from the size of your property to the amount of snowfall you get annually, so you’ll have to use your best judgment when choosing what works best for you. That said, we think our picks for the best snow blowers for elderly people will make it easier to clear snow no matter what.

Best overall: Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 55.4 x 25.4 x 43 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 131 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Wide clearing width
  • Comparable to some two-stage models
  • Personal Pace system

Cons

  • Expensive

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE is a single-stage gas-powered snow blower that features a clearing width of 24 inches and a push-to-start button. We like this model because of its “Personal Pace” system, which matches your walking speed with the speed of the blower’s wheels. It sounds unnecessary, but it allows you to set the tempo of your snow blowing and keep your footing. Personal Pace also makes it easier to stop the snow blower instantly. 

The SnowMaster 824 QXE is also relatively light at 131 pounds, making it easy to maneuver, and features a 252 cc engine for plenty of power. Meanwhile, Toro’s snow blower offers an adjustable chute and a unique auger design capable of throwing snow up to 40 feet.

Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

Greenworks

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This snow thrower from Greenworks will keep your walk clear and won’t cost a fortune.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 31 x 21.6 x 37 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 30 Pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Width: 20 inches
  • Power source: Corded electric

Pros

  • Corded electric design means unlimited runtime
  • Adjustable chute
  • Easy push-button start

Cons

  • Cord could get in the way

Snow blowers can be expensive, especially if you need something heavy-duty. If you live somewhere that only gets light snowfall, the GreenWorks 13 Amp is a more affordable snow blower with a clearing width of 20 inches that can throw snow up to 20 feet. For small walkways and driveways, it’s enough to keep things clear. It also includes a push-button start, an adjustable chute, and LED lights. Best of all, it’s only 32 pounds, so it’s very easy to move around. At around $200, it’s a solid deal.

Best single-stage: Toro Power Clear 721

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 48 x 21 x 42 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 84 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 21 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Simple, effective design
  • Push-button start
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Only works well on pavement

Like our best overall pick, the Power Clear 721 gets high marks because of Toro’s Personal Pace system, an adjustable chute, and an electric start button. The gas-powered engine is a less powerful 212cc, but it also weighs slightly less at 125 pounds. Even with a little less power, it can still easily clear wet, heavy snow and toss it up to 40 feet. 

Best two-stage: Troy-Bilt Storm 2420

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 49 x 25 x 33 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 191 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • More powerful two-stage design
  • Self-propelled drive
  • Larger tires

Cons

  • Big and heavy

The Troy-Bilt Storm 2420 combines a 12-inch serrated steel auger and a 12-inch impeller, enabling it to plow through deep, heavy snowfall. It has a clearing width of 24 inches, so users should be able to clear a driveway quickly. The machine also comes equipped with 13- by 4-inch X-Trac tires, giving it better traction and mobility over heavier, icier snow. Plus, of course, it has some of our favorite quality-of-life features, including an adjustable chute and an electric start button.

Best electric: Ryobi Brushless 18-inch Single-Stage Snow Blower

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The cordless design, compact size, and additional features make the Ryobi Brushless Whisper an electrifying option. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 51.5 x 18.5 x 38.25 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 46 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 18 inches
  • Power source: Battery

Pros

  • Cordless operation
  • Folds up for compact storage
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Narrower clearing width

Electric snow blowers aren’t as powerful as gas-powered models, but they require much less maintenance and run quietly. (It also means you don’t need to keep gas cans around in case it snows.)

Ryobi’s compact electric single-stage blower features an 18-inch clearance width and 10-inch clearance depth, making it the perfect size for lighter snowfall. It’s cordless, powered by a 40-volt (V) battery, so it’s just as maneuverable as a gas-powered model. (There are, in fact, plug-in electric snow blowers.) It has an adjustable chute for controlled snow throwing, a push-button start, and an LED light for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. The Ryobi 18-inch snow blower can also throw snow about 25 feet and, as a bonus, its battery is compatible with other 40V products in Ryobi’s lineup.

Best gas-powered: Toro Power Max HD 828

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With a 28-inch clearing width, adjustable chute, and two-stage design, the Power Max HD 828 was born to clear snow.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 58 x 29.5 x 31.5 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 310 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 28 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Anti-clogging system
  • 28-inch clearing width
  • LED headlights

Cons

  • Very expensive

With a wide 28-inch clearing width, gas-powered engine, and adjustable chute, the Toro Power Max HD 828 is a monster snow blower built for clearing large areas after big storms. The two-stage operation can toss snow up to 45 feet, and the machine is self-propelled, so all users need to do is guide the Power Max over the areas that need clearing. It also includes features that make it easier to use, including an electric start button and an LED headlight. As with all gas-powered models, the Power Max is loud. That said, its wide clearing width and self-propelled engine ensure you’ll get the job done quickly.

Snow removal is serious business

Snow removal is a normal part of life for homeowners in large swaths of North America, so it’s easy to dismiss the fact that it’s a very taxing activity that can become quite dangerous for people with health issues. The combination of cold temperatures and intense physical exertion while shoveling a driveway can lead to an increased risk for a heart attack, according to the American Heart Association, particularly if you have high blood pressure or cholesterol. Your risk of a catastrophic health event is also higher for people with conditions like diabetes, smokers, and those of us who don’t get to the gym enough.

Ideally, older adults diagnosed with heart or physical health issues should avoid snow removal entirely. If you can, hire someone to shovel your driveway and walkway. According to Dr. Claire Ankuda, clearing snow is always a risky move for older people with physical limitations.

If that’s not an option, use a snow blower to remove as much snow from your walkways and/or driveway as possible. It minimizes the risk of muscle and back strain (or worse) and can clear a large area more efficiently while limiting your exposure to the elements. Best of all, it doesn’t require as much physical exertion as a shovel. Even then, Ankuda still advised caution:

“It’s important to physically warm up with stretching, to wear appropriate boots to reduce the chance of slips, and to take frequent breaks,” She said. “The majority of injuries that are related to snow blowers have been due to hand or finger injuries, from people reaching in to clear blockages in the discharge chute. This can be avoided by using a tool or a stick to unclog the machine.”

What to look for when picking the best snow blowers for elderly people

A good snow blower is fast, effective, and easy to use—but that’s just the baseline, the bare minimum. There are a few technical factors to keep in mind when picking out the gear that will help you get through every winter storm for the foreseeable future. For starters, there are three kinds of snow blowers; you should know which one you want. From there, keep an eye on its size and weight to ensure you can easily move them around. You should also note its clearing dimensions, which describe the swatch of snow you can remove in a single pass.

Types of snow blowers

Snow blowers come in three categories, divided by the number of mechanisms they use while clearing snow. “Single-stage,” “two-stage,” and “three-stage” snow blowers each have their advantages and disadvantages.

Single-stage snow blowers are compact, easy to maneuver, and feature simple controls, making them better suited for elderly people. They feature a spinning metal auger at the front of the machine that scoops up light-to-moderate snowfall and discharges it through a chute. Single-stage snow blowers are simple, making them the ideal option for people with physical limitations. That said, their auger blades may skim the ground during operation, which could pick up rocks and toss them out of the chute, possibly damaging nearby vehicles. You should definitely avoid single-stage mowers if you have a gravel driveway.

Two-stage snow blowers have a fan-like mechanism called an impeller, which helps throw snow out of the chute, as well as the auger found in a single-stage blower. The combination amps up the power, making a two-stage blower capable of clearing up to 23 inches of snow and ice over all types of terrain (even gravel driveways). They also feature a self-propelled transmission with forward and reverse speeds, which assists with pushing the snow blower through thick, icy snow accumulation.

A three-stage snow blower features an auger, an impeller, and adds an accelerator, which grinds chunks of ice into slush and spits it out with the snow. It’s best for moving heavy, compacted snow and ice up to 23 inches deep. In addition to being more powerful than one- and two-stage models, a three-stage snow blower should work well over unpaved surfaces and/or steep inclines. While you can find them for sale at hardware stores, three-stage snow blowers are generally considered commercial machines. We’d consider them overkill in most situations.

If you’re looking to minimize physical exertion, a single-stage snow blower is a logical choice. It’s the easiest to use and should be able to handle light-to-average snow. If your health is a concern, you should call a professional when you get heavy snow overnight, regardless of what gear is in your garage.

Size and weight

To ensure the snow blower is easy to use, we recommend looking at its size and weight. A heavier snow blower may be harder to set up and put away at the start and end of the season.

Single-stage blowers are more compact, lightweight, and easier to handle, making them an excellent choice for elderly people. Likewise, electric snow blowers tend to be light, between 30 and 65 pounds. Gas-powered models can weigh a lot more—100-300 pounds. While these models are more capable of clearing large areas of snowfall and ice, they’re also some of the biggest, heaviest snow blowers on the market, so they’re not ideal for older adults.

Clearing width and depth

Clearing width and depth indicate how much snow a blower can clear in one pass. Clearing width describes how wide a path the snow blower will create, while clearing depth tells you how high a snow pile it can process. A typical single-stage blower can clear a path that’s 11-22 inches wide through up to 8 inches of snow. A two-stage snow blower can clear a patch up to 23 inches deep and 30 inches wide in a single pass, which is great for longer driveways. 

We recommend most people use a single-stage blower for its more compact size, but a two-stage snow blower’s greater clearing width and depth might be necessary if you get a lot of snow each season. A two-stage snow blower makes sense if you need to clear a larger area with denser and possibly icy snow. 

Surface type

The surface you’re clearing will affect the type of snow blower you need. A single-stage blower is excellent for clearing flat, paved walkways and driveways. However, as we mentioned, they’re not suited for clearing gravel surfaces because they tend to pick up and throw loose rocks. A two-stage snow blower can clear diverse terrain and generally feature larger, more durable wheels that can gain better traction on icy snow. Two-stage blowers may also feature engine-driven wheels capable of handling uneven and sloped surfaces, making them far easier to push in challenging conditions.

Extra features

Beyond the core mechanisms, snow blowers can come with lots of bells and whistles that can make your experience easier and/or safer. Some of them, like an automatic safety cutoff, can prevent injuries. Others, like an adjustable throw chute, may make it easier to move snow efficiently.

Older adults may specifically want to look for a snow blower with features that make it easier to handle. Some snow blowers have power steering to reduce resistance when turning. Many electric snow blowers have a power button instead of the traditional ripcord found on gas-powered models. Some even have headlights for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. These features aren’t standard, so you’ll likely find them on more expensive models, but we think it’s worth the extra expense if they may make clearing snow easier.

FAQs

Q: How much do snow blowers cost?

Snow blower prices vary greatly depending on what you’re looking for. A single-stage snow blower generally costs around $500, with prices going up or down depending on whether you get one that’s gas-powered, electric, corded, or cordless. Two-stage snow blower prices start at around $1,000. Remember that snow blowers are heavy-duty appliances, on par with a lawn mower, which is mostly to say that they are expensive but built to last.

Q: Is an electric snow blower better than gas?

Electric snow blowers are easier to maintain and generally lighter than gas-powered models. They’re also smaller and lighter, making them easier to handle. That said, you must either charge a battery before using them or plug them into an outlet, potentially limiting their range (unless you have a portable power station). They’re also generally less powerful, so you may be unable to move as much snow.

Q: What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

There’s no difference! A “snow thrower” is another name for a single-stage snow blower.

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for elderly people

Older adults with health issues should avoid clearing their own snow. If you have to do it yourself, however, using one of the best snow blowers for elderly people will make digging out much easier and safer. Besides, who wants to actually shovel snow, anyway?

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best tire chains of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-tire-chains/ Tue, 07 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517417
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

Protect yourself from getting caught in a snow or ice storm.

The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Peerless Auto Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Chains are the best tire chains overall. Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain
SEE IT

Peerless Auto-Trac chains offer excellent traction while being one of the easiest sets of tire chains to install.

Best for trucks Security Chain Company Quik Grip are the best tire chains for trucks. Security Chain Company Quik Grip
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy duty pickup trucks.

Best budget The Security Chain Company SUper Z6 is the best tire chain at a budget-friendly price. Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy-duty pickup trucks.

When driving on snowy and icy roads, often the one thing that can keep you from getting stuck is a good set of tire chains. These vehicle accessories consist of metal chains that install around the wheels of your vehicle to maximize traction in snowy and icy conditions, making them a necessity for those who live in regions that see extreme winter weather each year. In fact, some states even require snow chains if traveling in certain mountainous areas during extreme winter weather. Finding the right set can be challenging, as not all tire chains are identical. They come in different sizes, materials, and tread patterns to suit different types of vehicles and varying severities of winter weather. Many models are designed to be easy to install, reducing the time one has to spend out in the cold. Learn what features are vital to consider when shopping for these winter weather vehicle accessories and find out why the models below are some of the best tire chains on the market.

How we chose the best tire chains

In reviewing more than 25 sets of tire chains for this article, we considered what sets best suit vehicles ranging from smaller cars to large SUVs and heavy pickup trucks, keeping the following considerations in mind:

Traction: Although traction isn’t the only thing, it’s clearly the most important factor in tire chains. We chose only models that provided ample traction.

Durability: I only included chains made from steel alloys that could hold up to supporting the weight of a vehicle in difficult weather conditions. This included traditional tire chains and those that use steel rollers or coils.

Installation: Tire chains are typically installed in extreme winter weather on the side of a road or in a snow-covered driveway. With this in mind, we only chose tire chains that one could capably install in these conditions. Tire chains with self-tightening features outranked those that required manual tightening.

The best tire chains: Reviews & Recommendations

Whatever kind of vehicle you drive, you don’t want to go out in the winter without the best tire chains, because even the best heated gloves, socks, and vests (even a battery-powered electric blanket) don’t keep you as comfortable as getting home and out of the storm safely. We’ve rounded up the best options on the market. from heavy-duty to budget-friendly picks.

Best overall: Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain

Peerless Auto Trac

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: This pick eliminates the major headache with tire chains—putting them on—with an innovative design that essentially automates the installation process, making them one of the most user-friendly options on the market.

Specs

  • Material: Manganese alloy chain
  • Shape: Diamond
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Easy to install
  • Excellent traction with a diamond-shaped pattern
  • Durable steel alloy construction

Cons

  • A little on the heavy side

Tire chains generally aren’t user-friendly. Most require you to jack the car up to properly tighten them to the wheel, which often involves paying someone else to do the work. That’s not the case with Auto-Trac’s Peerless tire chains, which use a tensioning system that automatically tightens the chains to the wheel. To install, simply attach the internal cable to the tighteners that run around the outside sidewall of the tire and begin driving to activate the ratcheting system that tightens the chains.

The diamond pattern of this set of chains not only facilitates the automatic ratcheting system, creating a tight grip around the tires, but it also makes for better performance by creating more surface area and improving traction.

In addition to being easy to install, this set is durable, thanks to its manganese steel alloy construction and heavier gauge chain links. Of course, that gauge also makes these chains on the heavy side at 15 pounds for the set. With sizes ranging from 14 to 20 inches, this set of chains is one of the more versatile options on the market, capable of fitting light trucks, SUVs, and cars.

Best heavy-duty: AutoChoice 6 Packs Car Snow Chains

AutoChoice

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: The thickness and coverage of these chains take the traction one can get from a set of tire chains to another level. And while the installation may take longer, it’s less complicated.

Specs

  • Material: Steel
  • Shape: Squares
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Heavy-gauge chains provide optimal traction
  • Separate pieces make them easier to install
  • Fits a wide variety of tire sizes

Cons

  • Installation is more time-consuming
  • Expensive

One look at this set of tire chains from AutoChoice, and one can see that they are much beefier than other models, thanks to sets of six thick chains for each tire. With their thicker gauge and square design, these chains dig into snow and ice to provide ample traction. The chains are divided into six separate pieces per wheel—a six-pack—which attach independently. The chains have thick straps that consist of tendon material that thread through the rims and tighten to the wheel in a similar fashion to ratcheting tie-down straps.

This design has both positives and negatives. By having separate pieces, they’re easier to install, as there is no need to untangle and line up a single stretch of chain or jack up the wheel. Simply apply one set, then move on to the rest. On the flip side, attaching six separate sets of chains to each wheel is time-consuming.

While this set of tire chains is on the pricier side—you’ll need to buy a set of six per wheel—it does include some useful extras, including two pairs of gloves, a long hook to help with mounting, and a fiber-absorbent towel.

Best low-profile: Glacier Passenger Cable Tire Chain

Glacier

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Although there is a trade-off in traction, we love the low-profile design of this set of chains, which makes them suitable for most cars.

Specs

  • Material: Steel rollers
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Fits type S low-profile vehicles
  • Lighter weight makes them easier to install
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Traction isn’t as good as standard tire chains

Tire chains can be tricky with passenger vehicles with S clearance, which means there is limited space between the wheel well and the tire. Adding the additional thickness of snow chains can damage the car as the chains scrape against the wheel well when the suspension flexes. In fact, some car manufacturers will even void warranties if they find that a car has used chains that are too bulky for the wheel well.

Glacier solves that problem by creating tire chains that aren’t really chains at all. Glacier’s tire chains actually consist of a set of hardened steel rollers that run perpendicular to the tire treads and secure to a thick gauge wire cable that runs the circumference of the tire’s outer sidewall.

The result is a tire chain with a low enough profile that it can fit S-clearance passenger vehicles. And, at 6 pounds, these chains are also easier to install than heavier sets. Keep in mind that there is a trade-off. While these roller-style chains will improve vehicle traction for snowy weather, they don’t provide the same traction as a set of traditional tire chains.

Best for trucks: Security Chain Company Quik Grip

Security Chain

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Though they may be tougher to install, you can’t argue with the fact that these chains offer the superior traction and durability that heavy-duty trucks driving on snow-covered roads require.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel chain
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 15-20 inch

Pros

  • Durable all-chain construction
  • CAM tightening system makes installation easier
  • Thicker gauge chains provide superior traction

Cons

  • Harder to install than other types
  • Won’t work with low-clearance vehicles

Larger trucks and SUVs require heavy chains that won’t break under intense weight or extreme conditions. Thanks to their durability, these thicker steel alloy manganese chains are one of the best options for full-size trucks. They’re even rated to work with farm equipment and dual-wheeled trucks.

Security Chains’ tire chains have a square configuration design, which provides maximum start-up traction. We like this set in particular because of the integrated CAM tightening system that eliminates the need to use tensioners to tighten the chains. The Quik Grip chains that don’t have this feature are less expensive, but we think it’s worth the additional cost to save the hassle of purchasing tensioners separately.

Even with the CAM tightening system, these chains are more difficult to install than other options, but the superior durability and traction they offer make them a must-have for heavy-duty trucks that face severe winter weather. Remember that these chains won’t fit trucks with S-class clearance requirements.

Best budget: Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain

Security Chain

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: These tire chains are inexpensive and versatile, capable of fitting most cars, trucks, and SUVs. We also like the design, which makes them easier to install than other tire chains by eliminating the need for manual tightening.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel coils
  • Shape: Diagonal
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • No need to manually tighten
  • Low profile makes them compatible with most vehicles
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Steel coils do not provide as much traction

This versatile set of tire chains from Security Chain is easy to install, affordably priced, and will fit vehicles with restricted clearance around the wheels. They consist of alloy steel traction coils thinner than standard chains, making them compatible with most cars. They only require a quarter-inch of sidewall clearance, so they’re suitable for most cars and SUVs as well as trucks.

These tire chains are also easier to install than other models thanks to rubber connectors that hold the coils taught, eliminating the need to tighten the chains manually.

This set of chains also preserves handling better than bulkier chains while preserving such important safety features as anti-lock brakes, traction control, and all-wheel drive. Keep in mind there is a trade-off. The low profile and limited coverage of the coils do provide less traction than larger sets of tire chains.

Things to consider before buying tire chains

Traction

Perhaps the most important trait to consider is how well the chains will keep you from getting stuck. The rule of thumb is rather straightforward when it comes to traction. The thicker the chain and the more coverage on the tire tread, the better the traction. Chains with heavier gauge steel links will dig into snow better than coils or rollers, providing better traction. Keep shape in mind as well: Square-shaped chains may provide better traction for getting started but diamond-shaped chains provide better directional traction, which means better handling.

Material

Please pay attention to what the chains are made from, which will determine their durability. Generally speaking, a steel alloy with manganese is considered “high strength” steel, which can better withstand the pressures exerted on it when functioning as a tire chain. While chains may have superior strength, steel alloy rollers and coils are also quite strong. In addition to the chains, pay attention to other materials they use to hold them in place. While rubber and thick nylon straps may be durable enough for cars and light trucks, heavy-duty trucks require all-chain construction.

Size

Size is important because the tires must be compatible with the size of the tires on your vehicle. Tire chains are not one size fits all. Most models of tire chains come in a broad range of sizes to suit different tire sizes. Tire chain manufacturers include size charts that correspond to the model numbers of their products. Check the size of your tires (printed on the sidewall of each tire) and match that size to the right model tire chain.

Installation

Most likely, you’ll be installing tire chains in inclement weather, so it’s important to purchase chains that you can install as quickly as possible. If you have a car or small truck, consider purchasing a set of tire chains that are self-tensioning. Self-tensioning chains take a little more work to install initially, but they don’t require you to tighten (and retighten) the chains manually.

FAQs

Q: Do you need tire chains for all four tires?

Legally, you only need to have one set of tire chains to travel in mountainous areas during the wintertime. However, if you have a 4×4 vehicle, it’s a good idea to have two sets. Even with a two-wheel-drive vehicle, two sets of chains can improve traction.

Q: Do chains damage tires?

When there is ice and snow, tire chains dig into them and don’t put pressure on your tires. However, driving on bare roads for long stretches can cause the chains to dig into your tires and damage them (as well as the road itself). Chains can also damage tires if they are not properly installed.

Q: Is it hard to drive with snow chains?

Although snow chains will improve traction and help prevent your car or truck from getting stuck, it is still hazardous to drive in snowy conditions. When driving with snow chains, you should never exceed 30 miles per hour.

Final thoughts on the best tire chains

Choosing the right tire chains requires finding a product balancing good traction and easy installation. The Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain excels on both fronts, making it one of the best all-around tire chains you can put on your car or truck. If you’re looking for a set of chains to outfit your heavy-duty pick-up truck, then consider going with Security Chain Company Quik Grip, which offers superior traction and durability.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated slippers in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-slippers/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 18:40:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-slippers/
Four pairs of slippers laid out next to each other in a cutout pattern
Amanda Reed

When the big chill moves in, heated slippers guarantee you’ll be comfy from top to bottom.

The post The best heated slippers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four pairs of slippers laid out next to each other in a cutout pattern
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall ActionHeat makes some of the best heated slippers. ActionHeat Rechargeable Battery Heated Cable Knit Slippers
SEE IT

These comfy wool slippers come with a mobile charger you can take with you.

Best microwaveable Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties
SEE IT

These microwaveable slippers help soothe arthritis pain with heat and aromatics like lavender and peppermint.

Best indoor/outdoor Heated Slipper by Volt Heated Slipper by Volt
SEE IT

These versatile slippers can provide up to 12 hours of warmth on a single charge.

When it’s cold out, slip into a pair of heated slippers to keep your feet as toasty as possible. You’ll get instant relief from cold floors and drafty indoor air. But it’s not just about the heat this footwear provides. Winter weather can leave feet dry, chapped, and constantly in need of an emergency pedicure. The best heated slippers also moisturize your feet while warming them up, so say goodbye to scaly roughness!

How we chose the best heated slippers

Heated slippers come in a variety of forms. Microwaveable slippers can be nuked right up to a comfortable lounging temperature. Some heated slippers warm up in the same way as heated socks, using a battery-operated module. Another type of electric foot warmer uses an internal heating pad that you power up via a USB cable. Once the slippers have reached a full charge, you can unplug them and start walking—or lounging—for hours.

Another option is foot warmers that work like a heating pad. They feel just like house shoes when you slip your feet inside. The only difference is these boots aren’t made for walking. They’re best when you’re parked in one spot, on the couch, or sitting at your desk. Your feet will be cozy and comfortable as long as the heat is on. In making our recommendations, we looked for options from top brands that spanned a variety of power sources and price levels.

The best heated slippers: Reviews & Recommendations

It’s hard to go wrong with a good pair of the best heated slippers, but the style you end up going for should depend on what you do during a typical cold day or night around the house. Or maybe you’ll be wearing them outside, too. In that case, think waterproof and non-slip. If you’ll have them on mostly while you’re working or bundled up on the couch and mobility is less important, a pair of heated slippers that you can wear and charge at the same time will get extra credit for providing warmth 24/7.

Best overall: ActionHeat Rechargeable Battery Heated Cable Knit Slippers

ActionHeat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Included rechargeable ActionHeat batteries 
  • Sizes: S/M, L/XL, XXL
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Attractive design
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Long-lasting battery

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Batteries only available through ActionHeat

These fuzzy wool slippers won’t leave your feet waiting long for heat. The soles are wear-resistant, non-slip, and lightweight. Each one weighs less than half a pound. These slippers bring the heat at three levels, ranging from high (150 degrees F, which lasts more than three-and-a-half hours) to low (115 degrees F, which lasts up to five hours). They also come with a mobile power supply that you can take with you when you venture from an outlet.

Best USB-heated: Wirziis USB Heated Slippers

Wirziis

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: USB connection
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: One

Pros

  • Convenient
  • Affordable
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Have to be attached to power source for them to work
  • Can’t adjust temperature level

Not a fan of slippers with batteries that will eventually run out? Wirziis USB Heated Slippers are designed with a replaceable heating pad that can be powered directly by any device with a USB-C connection, such as a computer, car charger, power bank, or plug. These comfy wool slippers heat up within three minutes and are available in black, gray, and brown. That said, you can’t really adjust the temperature, but you can keep the rest of your body warm with one of the best heated blankets.

Best indoor/outdoor: Heated Slipper by Volt

Volt

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Two included USB 5V VB550 batteries
  • Sizes: Small-3XL
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Lasts for up to 12 hours on a single charge
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Comes in multiple sizes for men and women
  • Can wear indoors and outside

Cons

  • Only come in one color
  • Heating pad may not provide a lot of warmth

Volt is one of the first brands to design heated slippers, and the company has continued to innovate since coming out with its first pair 10 years ago. These comfy slippers are heated with included rechargeable batteries. They provide three levels of heat (high, medium, and low) and can last up to 12 hours on a single full charge. Best of all, you can wear them indoors or outside. You can also pair them with some of the best heated gloves for extra warmth.

Best microwaveable: Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties

Mars

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Microwave or freezer
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: Hot and cold

Pros

  • Provide both heat and cold relief
  • Incorporate aromatherapy
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Some users say they come off easily
  • Not easy to clean

Could your tootsies use a little TLC? These plush booties are ideal for arthritis and other foot ailments or just nice to slip into after a long day on the go. They contain 12 natural aromatic ingredients, including lavender and peppermint, and they can be used to warm up your feet after heating them in the microwave, or you can chill them in the freezer before pulling them on to cool down your feet. And they come in three colors (mauve, gray, and espresso).

Best with memory foam: Kamlif Heating Slipper Shoes

Kamlif

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Rechargeable batteries
  • Sizes: Small and large
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Memory foam remembers feet
  • Three levels of heat
  • Less expensive than other models

Cons

  • Some users say they don’t provide a lot of heat

These heated slipper shoes feature memory foam to remember your foot for maximum comfort. Designed for both indoor and outdoor use, they’re equipped with toe warmers and can provide three levels of heat: high, medium, and low. Powered by rechargeable batteries, these slippers can last up to five hours in low mode on a single charge. They also provide infrared-ray warmth of these slippers that can encourage circulation, and help relieve foot fatigue. They also pair well with the best heated vests.

Best budget: HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Air-activated heat packs
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: One

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Inexpensive
  • Provides up to nine hours of heat

Cons

  • Some users said they don’t provide a lot of warmth
  • Not sustainable

If you’re looking for a quick solution to keep your feet toasty that doesn’t require you to spend a lot of cash, HotHands Insole Foot Warmers may be just the ticket. Open the package, slip these air-activated insoles into your shoes or boots, and these heated insoles can provide warmth for up to nine hours. The peel-and-stick adhesive backing keeps them secure in place inside your shoe. Although you must discard them after each use, 16 pairs ensure that one package will keep your feet warm for a week or two (and you can pick up some similar hand warmers while you’re at it).

Things to consider when shopping for the best heated slippers

Buying a pair of heated slippers is more of an investment than your average pair of bunny slippers. You’ll want to keep in mind where you want to wear them, the level of heat you’re seeking, and whether you want to move around with them. Here’s how to narrow down your options.

Do you want USB charging?

When you spend a lot of time working at your computer or just browsing the Internet, cute and comfy slippers that plug into your laptop with a USB connection are a convenient choice. Although you can wear these heated slippers while puttering around the house for at least several hours at full charge, if you are tied to your computer, you can work and wear them while they’re charging. There’s no need to worry about replacing batteries.

Even if you aren’t the workaholic type and will be spending long days just vegging out on the couch, you can charge these heated slippers anywhere near a power bank. By the time you’re ready to get up and move around, they’ll be fully charged and ready to keep your feet warm for at least a few hours.

Need warm slippers for the outside as well?

If you live in an apartment, you’ll probably be happy with a good pair of heated slippers designed for walking around and relaxing indoors. For those living in houses with backyards who need warm slippers for the outside as well, a pair that travels is in order, especially when the forecast calls for rain or snow.

For those short trips outside, you’ll need slippers that are made of sturdy enough fabric to withstand the elements. The soles should be wear-resistant and non-slip. Rubber ones ensure they provide enough traction for both indoor and outdoor wear. Since your backyard is likely to be wetter than inside, be sure you opt for a fabric that’s waterproof. You don’t want your heated slippers to be soaked and useless just when you need them most.

Heated slippers can help with medical conditions like arthritis

Like heated socks, heated slippers have benefits beyond keeping your feet from freezing. Foot warmers and slippers can help with some medical conditions too! Ones that are heated by the microwave can offer foot relief if you suffer from arthritis or if you have stiff muscles, pain, or circulation issues. Some are infused with cloves, cinnamon, eucalyptus, and other ingredients that create moist heat and soothe achy feet.

Although it sounds like you just put your house shoes in the microwave, the process can be more civilized than that. Wrap them up in a towel before nuking them to avoid leaving your microwave smelling like feet. And if that still sounds too unorthodox, some aromatherapy booties come with a scent pouch that you warm up in the microwave before placing it inside the slippers. It’s like an at-home DIY spa treatment for your feet.

Love the slippers you already have? Try heated insoles

Heated slipper insoles are another surefire way to keep your feet warm in cold weather, and they can fit right inside a pair of slippers you already own. You can get ones that are battery- or microwave-powered, and they’re available in both single-use options and ones that you can wear over and over.

These aren’t technically heated slippers since they are separate items, but they do just as good a job of heating up your feet. Another bonus is that you can wear them with multiple footwear, not just your house shoes. If you’re going to be inserting them into your outdoor boots, make sure they’re waterproof in case you encounter rain, sleet, snow, or pesky puddles.

FAQs

Q: How much do heated slippers cost?

Although they may sound like a pretty big financial investment, you can still enjoy warm and fuzzy slippers on a budget. In fact, you can scoop up a new pair at a wallet-friendly price that’s well below $100. As with all things, the quality will vary, but you don’t have to go high-end to keep your feet well-heated. There are plenty of excellent options for under $50.

Q: How do heated slippers work?

Heated slippers work in a variety of ways. Some are heated by a battery-operated pad, while others are USB-powered. You can also get a pair that will heat right up in the microwave.

Q: How long will the slippers stay warm?

Heated slippers will stay warm for at least a few hours. If you get a pair that works with USB charging, you can wear them while they charge without worrying about them going cold.

Q: Can you wash heated slippers?

You can wash heated slippers; just don’t do it in the washing machine or submerge them in water. Spot drying is generally a safe option, but to keep everything fully functioning, carefully follow the cleaning instructions included with your pair.

Final thoughts on the best heated slippers

Heated slippers do an excellent job of keeping your feet extra warm around the house (and even outside) when the temperature dips, and you don’t have to be a big spender to get a good pair. These warm and comfy slippers come in several styles—including USB- or battery-operated and microwaveable—that cover a number of household activities, from doing chores to working at the computer to just sitting around watching television. And if you intend to wear yours outside to get fresh air in the backyard, non-slip rubber soles will take you there and back safely.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated slippers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated gloves in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-gloves/ Fri, 12 Aug 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=461459
Best heated gloves sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let frozen fingers spoil your fun.

The post The best heated gloves in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best heated gloves sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves are the best overall. Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves
SEE IT

Savior’s heated leather gloves bring the heat, along with touchscreen-friendly fingertips and a removable battery.

Best for cycling Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycling Glove product image Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycle Glove
SEE IT

The Sealskinz heated cycle glove offers maximum protection from the elements.

Best for work Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves are the best for work. Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves
SEE IT

Volt Resistance’s Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves have extra padding and cold-weather protection.

If you, like me, still enjoy spending time outdoors in below-freezing temperatures, you’ve probably considered purchasing heated gloves. I resisted for years, relying instead on chemical hand warmers and plastic bags. But, since winters seem to be getting colder and I start feeling the chill in my bones quicker than ever, I finally decided to see what all the hubbub was about. In the dead of winter, you want to keep your fingers toasty for a long time, whether you’re working up a sweat or just trekking out to the store. The best heated gloves are comfortable without impeding manual dexterity in your fingers, so you can ski, cycle, or do whatever you want in the freezing cold.

How we chose the best heated gloves

Living in New York City, I do not own a car, and while I have nothing against the city’s subway system, I prefer my bicycle as my mode of transportation. I ride/commute all year long, even through the winter. The only thing that keeps me off the bike is an active blizzard. I’ve also been lucky enough to spend months at a time cycling or trekking in remote mountain environments, like the Pamirs in Tajikistan and the Karakorum in northern Pakistan. I’ve been testing and writing about outdoor gear for over a decade for a variety of outlets, including HuffPost, BBC Travel, and Adventure Cycling. I am on a perpetual quest for cold-weather gear that works well and makes me forget that I’m even wearing it.

I tested these battery-operated heated gloves by using them like any other pair: taking them out on a bike ride or two. Cycling actively tests a glove’s grip, warmth, and wind resistance. You get to know a pair of gloves very well when you have a sustained stream of frigid wind blowing on your hands. I specifically noted how easy it was for me to operate my bike, the glove’s flexibility, and, when appropriate, their water resistance.

The best heated gloves: Reviews & Recommendations

As an outdoor and adventure lover whose hands and feet get cold easily, I feel as if I’ve spent an inordinate amount of time (and money) trying out a wide range of gear and techniques. While I admit to occasionally resorting to the wool socks and plastic bags on my feet method of combating freezing temperatures (I should try heated socks), my glove choices trend toward the more high-tech, as maintaining mobility and grippiness is almost as important as keeping warm. Here are some of the best heated gloves we’ve found for a variety of outdoor activities, and they’re a big step up from basic hand warmers in your mittens.

Best overall: Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These Savior gloves are very warm and have all the features we could want for a cold day out.

Specs

  • Heating elements:  Far-infrared fiber
  • Temperature range: 113°F (low) – 150°F (high)
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Soft lambskin and polyester; cotton inner layer
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive index finger and thumb, anti-slip material on palms
  • Sizes: XS-3X

Pros

  • Soft and flexible
  • Anti-slip
  • Versatile
  • Warm even without heating element turned on

Cons

  • Not as effective in temperatures below 10°F
  • Not waterproof

Savior’s rechargeable heated gloves provide the best, most versatile protection from the cold that we’ve felt in a pair of gloves. They are well suited for a variety of outdoor adventures and reasonably priced, to boot.

In a field full of very similar products from companies with little reputation, they serve as a good example of what to look for in a pair of heated gloves. First and foremost, they’re quite warm with or without the heat turned on. They have three temperature settings, water-resistance and windproofing, heating elements that cover the back of your hand and fingertips, and touchscreen-sensitive material. Meanwhile, a leather palm ensures you won’t lose your grip when you need it the most.

They’re a bit on the thick side but still flexible enough for shifting gears on a bicycle or holding ski poles. My one personal complaint about these gloves is that the “on” indicator light is oddly bright when it’s on in the dark—but I’ve always had issues with bright lights in darkness being distracting.

All in all, it’s exactly what you’re looking for, and you don’t need to spend too much to get it.

Best for cycling: Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycle Glove

Sealskinz

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Made specifically for cycling, the Sealskinz waterproof heated cycle gloves keep your hands dry like no other.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Carbon fiber
  • Temperature range: N/A
  • Power source: 4-volt polymer rechargeable batteries
  • Battery life: 2200mAh
  • Material: Soft goatskin leather and polyester, Primaloft synthetic insulation
  • Special features: Waterproof, reflective details
  • Sizes: XS-XXL

Pros

  • Lifetime product and waterproof guarantee
  • Designed specifically for cycling
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Sizing runs small so make sure to purchase a size larger than normal

I first learned about Sealskinz products on an uncharacteristically cold, windy, and rainy group bicycle ride across the French countryside. Of the fifteen of us on the ride, all but one of us ended up with painful frozen fingers. The one guy whose hands were fine had a pair of Sealskinz waterproof gloves. I bought my own pair soon thereafter.

Many cold-weather cycling gloves do remain waterproof under sustained wet conditions, but Sealskinz’s cycling gloves keep your hands dry no matter how long you stay out. I have biked through rain, snow, and sleet storms (driving, relentless sleet for up to an hour), and very little moisture permeated the three-layer bonded construction. It features an insulation layer and a reflective layer that directs the body heat you’re generating back into the glove, keeping you extra warm. The integrated heating element produces heat for up to six hours.

A properly heated cycling glove is, in general, a rare find. Most heated gloves, while plenty warm, are often too bulky for gear-shifting and make braking cumbersome. They may also make it hard to grip your handlebars long-term properly. Sealskinz’s cycling gloves have a cycling-friendly design with a leather palm, enabling a better grip, and plenty of reflective details. (You can never have too many when commuting on dark, winter mornings.) In so many ways, it is the perfect winter cycling glove.

Best for motorcycling: Kemimoto Heated Gloves

Kemimoto

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Kemimoto’s heated gloves are very warm and durable, making them an excellent choice for motorcycle rides in the blustery cold.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Thin wires woven into fabric
  • Power source: 7.4V rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2500mAh 
  • Material: Faux leather
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips, waterproof
  • Sizes: S-XL

Pros

  • Long-lasting heat—up to 9 hours on lowest setting
  • 3 heating levels
  • Good price

Cons

  • Thick

Kemimoto’s heated gloves really emphasize the “heated” facet of the heated glove. They feature 2,500MaH batteries that can last up to nine hours on the lowest setting. Kemimoto gloves offer three heating levels.

Looking at the glove itself, it features a water- and windproof outer layer. The wrist buckle and velcro closure at the cuff allow for a secure fit that will block out a cold wind no matter how fast you’re going. These feature an anti-grip palm and have protective knuckle guards and reflective coating.

Best for work: Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves

Volt Resistance

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Volt Resistance’s 7v Work gloves are much more durable and made for working outside in extreme cold.

Specs

  • Heating elements: “Zero layer” heat system: Thin wires bonded to the lining fabric
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2500 mAh
  • Heat settings: 4
  • Material: Leather, tricot lining
  • Special features: Extra leather on palm for durability
  • Sizes: S-XXL

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Padded palms for added comfort
  • Heats entire hand

Cons

  • A bit bulky around the fingers

I grew up in northern Ohio near Lake Erie. My dad did a lot of work outside, including many wood-cutting expeditions to my Grandparents’ woods to procure fuel for our wood-burning stove. He had this amazing pair of yellow leather, fleece-lined work gloves that he’d wear on these trips. I liked to wear them around the house because I was fascinated with how they’d molded themselves into the exact shape of his hands and with how small my own hands felt inside them.

Constructed from durable yellow-stained leather with padded, reinforced palms, these heated work gloves from Volt Resistance remind me of the ones my dad wore. Heating wires extend through the entire glove, including the fingers, thumbs, and palms to provide full coverage across your hand. There’s a clear window on the back of the glove near the wrist that clearly shows how much power remains in the batteries. 

I bought a pair for my dad last Christmas. His review: “Wow, what will they think of next? You know, back in the day, we just put plastic bags on our hands under our gloves. These are definitely way better than that.”

Best for fingertips: Savior Thick Electric Heated Mittens

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re a mitten person, this heated version from Savior is the warmest pair we’ve found. 

Specs

  • Heating elements:  Far infrared fiber heating wires
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester, neoprene, cotton
  • Special Features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: XXS-XXL

Pros

  • Great for winter sports
  • Soft and flexible
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Battery is bulky at the base

This updated version of Savior’s heated mittens has double the heated wires and elements in the thumb area as the previous model. My thumbs are always the first of my digits to be affected by the cold, but these kept me warm during an ice canyon tour and skating on Mildred Lake in Jasper, Alberta, in February.

I wouldn’t use these for cycling or any other activity where flexibility and dexterity are super important. Still, they’re cozier than most gloves and a perfect fit for low-key outdoor events.

Best for skiing: Akaso Heated Gloves

AKASO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The anti-slip surface of these splashproof and breathable Akaso gloves makes them perfect for gripping ski poles.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Carbon fiber heating panels
  • Power source: 7.4V rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 3200mAh 
  • Heating levels: 3
  • Material: Faux leather, cotton
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips, waterproof
  • Sizes: S-XL

Pros

  • Splash proof
  • Breathable
  • Reflective strip
  • Warm up quickly

Cons

  • Limited long-term waterproofing

Featuring a layer of 3M Thinsulate material that retains heat 1.5 times better than down, anti-slip gripping material on the palms, and a cuff drawstring to secure them around your wrist, these Akaso heated gloves offer the right kind of protection for skiers and snowboarders.

Carbon fiber heating panels cover the back of the hand, fingers, and thumb (not the palm). The heating elements are covered by water-repellent nylon and the 3M Thinsulate, which keeps your hands warm with or without the electric heat on. They’re warm and comfortable in good weather but don’t fare as well in the rain or snow. With a steady stream of precipitation, you will eventually feel moisture penetrate the outer layer and start to pool inside the glove. That said, they’re perfect for clear, sunny, ski days.

Best thin: Sun Will Heated Glove Liners

Sun Will

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These heated glove liners from Sun Will are so light you’ll almost forget you have them on.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Far infrared fiber heating wires
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester, lycra, fleece
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: XXS-XXL

Pros:

  • Thin and light
  • Soft
  • Can wear under another pair of gloves
  • Great for arthritis and blood circulation

Cons:

  • Not as durable as thicker, bulkier gloves

Made from lycra and fleece, these gloves are intended to fit close to your hand and be worn under a waterproof glove shell when needed. If you already have a favorite pair of waterproof gloves you wear while hiking or skiing, add these as an underlayer on particularly blustery days. You can, of course, also wear them on their own. 

Thin heated gloves are also especially useful if you suffer from chronically cold hands, even when indoors. They’re excellent for stimulating blood circulation, whether you need to warm up from the cold or need help with symptoms caused by arthritis or Raynaud’s Syndrome.

Best budget: Hot Hands Heated Fleece Glove/Mittens

HotHands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you want to keep your hands warm without spending much money, a pair of cheap gloves and hand warmers will do the trick.

Specs

  • Heating elements: iron powder, salt, water, activated carbon. Oxygen reacts with the iron and salt to form iron oxide, which releases heat
  • Power source: Chemical air-activated hand warmers
  • Battery life: N/A
  • Heating levels: N/A
  • Material: Fleece, leather palm
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: M/L-L/XL

Pros

  • No batteries or charging required
  • Inexpensive
  • TSA approved
  • Made in USA

Cons

  • Not very breathable
  • Not waterproof

Chemical hand warmers are the original, low-tech way to keep your hands (and feet) warm while out in adverse conditions. Working on outdoor TV productions in cold weather, we buy them in bulk and dole them out to cast and crew like candy. Any actor you see filming outside on a blustery day very likely has a hand warmer shoved into each of their pockets.

These fleece hybrid glove/mittens from Hot Hands, one of the biggest names in hand warmers, have a handy pocket to insert a warmer and hold them in place. Each individually sealed warmer is air activated when removed from its package and stays warm for 10 hours. That’s as long as you’ll get from any battery-powered heated glove. On the other hand, you’ll have to buy more hand warmers after using the single pair that comes with the gloves. A box of 40 additional warmers costs about $22.00, though, so you’re still spending less than you would on our top pick.

The gloves themselves are the kind with fingers and a foldable mitten you can pull over your fingers when needed. They’re made from toasty warm fleece with a TruGrip leather palm. Are they as warm as our other picks? No. Do they offer the same wind and water resistance? Not really. But they’re very affordable, and those hand warmers will keep you warm in a pinch.

What to consider when buying heated gloves

While the majority of heated gloves available offer similar features, each one feels slightly different than the others and performs differently when worn out in the elements. Everyone also has their own personal criteria when evaluating apparel. I personally look for a pair of gloves that I don’t have to think about too much while I’m out in the cold. With that in mind, here are some things you should look for when buying your next pair of heated gloves.

How do heated gloves work?

Heated clothing has ultra-thin metal wires or fibers built into it that warm up when electricity passes through them. These wires or far-infrared fibers, most commonly made from carbon or a metal composite, are woven or fused directly into or onto an internal fabric layer. The voltage of batteries used in heating clothing like slippers and insoles and vests is low enough that there is no chance of electrical shock.

Fit and size

To ensure your glove provides maximum warmth without restricting manual dexterity, you should measure your hand and make sure you get the right size. Gloves are not one-size-fits-all. Moreover, the measurements for each size vary from manufacturer to manufacturer, so that you may require a medium from one brand and a large one from another.

In a properly fitted glove, your fingertips should reach just shy of the end of the glove—about a ¼ to 3/8 of an inch—so you have a full range of movement. The wrist portion of the glove should run far enough up your arm to tuck into or extend over a jacket sleeve, preventing cold air from getting under it.

Most manufacturers will have a size chart on their websites, showing you how to measure your hand and find the right size with each brand.

Waterproofing

To waterproof or not to waterproof? That is the question. Waterproofing measures generally make clothing less breathable so that body sweat will get trapped inside. In other words, your waterproof gloves may soak up sweat and start to smell more quickly than a less water-resistant pair. On the other hand, you don’t want to get completely soaked and end up with gloves full of water. 

Many heated gloves have a waterproof fabric on the outside part of the glove and something breathable on the palm area, giving you the best of both options (kind of like how packable rain jackets sometimes have strategically more breathable panels). Breathable fabric on the underside of your hand reduces the chances of sweat building up in your palms, which could affect your ability to grip a ski pole or climbing rope. Having waterproof fabric on the outside of your gloves—the part that is most often exposed directly to snow and rain—means excess water won’t be able to penetrate the glove. As a general rule, if you’re likely to find yourself outside when it’s actively snowing or raining, go with a waterproof option.  

Battery life

Most heated gloves are powered by 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries, which usually last between 2 and 8 hours, depending on the temperature setting and other factors. Rather than presenting battery life estimates, which can vary quite a bit, we recommend looking at the raw battery capacity, measured in milliamp hours (mAh), which should give you a general idea of how long it should last compared to other gloves.

Some, but not all, heated gloves feature removable, replaceable battery packs. If you plan on being outside for extended periods of time, we recommend choosing gloves with replaceable batteries so you can swap them out as needed.

Touchscreen capability 

Gloves and smartphones don’t always get along. Between the padding and materials, capacitive touchscreens don’t pick up taps and swipes as easily when your fingers are covered. Having to take a glove off while in inclement weather in order to use your phone is annoying at best, and excruciating in extreme cold.

Some gloves have an outer layer over your fingertips with a special material made from copper fiber conductive yarn, making it easier to use a touchscreen without removing your gloves. Essentially, the copper in the fabric allows the gloves to interact with the electrical current produced by touchscreens. Most commonly, the material is used only on the tips of one or two fingers in a small enough area that overall warmth isn’t really affected. 

At this point, these features are fairly common, but you should check for them when picking a cheaper glove or something from a less technical brand.

FAQs

Q: How much do heated gloves cost?

Most of our favorite heated gloves cost around $100. There are alternatives, like our budget pick, which cost considerably less. That said, there isn’t too much variation between major and minor brands, so you should expect to spend $100 or more for high-quality heated gloves.

Q: Where do I recycle my heated gloves?

Recycle heated gloves anywhere that takes clothing and textiles as long as you remove the batteries beforehand. To recycle rechargeable lithium-ion batteries properly, you will need to find a local recycling center that’s certified in handling electronic waste. Check with your local recycling and waste disposal service to find out where.

Q: Are heated gloves or mittens better?

It’s largely a matter of personal preference. Gloves are the obvious choice if you’re doing something where you need your fingers to move individually. If you’re doing nothing, literally standing still, mittens may be better because your fingers keep each other warm. That said, the materials and design in modern technical gloves and mittens both keep your hands very warm.

Q: Are heated gloves worth it?

Heated gloves are definitely worth it if your fingers are always cold and you enjoy outdoor activities in the winter months. Frozen, stiff fingers will spoil the fun every time—and could be potentially dangerous. Heated gloves don’t really cost more than conventional winter gloves without a heating element, and are more convenient to carry around than a heated blanket

Final thoughts on the best heated gloves

Heated gloves are great when you need to work or want to play out in extremely cold weather. By giving these naturally warm gloves a nice, battery-powered boost, you can keep your hands toasty for hours on end. There are plenty of extra warm gloves out there, though, so you have tons of options.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated gloves in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated socks in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-socks/ Tue, 15 Feb 2022 16:30:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-socks/
A lineup of the best heated socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

When the weather outside is frightful, these socks will ensure your feet feel delightful.

The post The best heated socks in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiiing SNOW DEER Heated Socks SNOW DEER Heated Socks
SEE IT

The cozy heated socks will keep your feet warm and dry throughout even the chilliest ski day.

Best battery-powered The VELAZZIO Heated Socks are the best battery-powered heated sock VELAZZIO Heated Socks
SEE IT

These high-powered socks heat up in less than 30 seconds—so you don’t need to wait to stop your cold feet.

Best budget Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women Electric Heated Socks Thermal Insulated Socks
SEE IT

Heated socks can be a hefty investment, but with this budget pair you can have toasty toes without breaking the bank.

Whether you’re adventuring in snowy mountains, shoveling the driveway, or snuggling up at a chilly cabin, a quality pair of socks can stop freezing toes in their tracks, and heated socks will warm you from the bottom up. Heated socks provide a toasty barrier between your feet and any cold surface they walk on and make outdoor activities in frigid temperatures feel like a breeze. If the warmth these special winter socks provide isn’t enough to convince you to spring for a pair, consider this: The socks can also improve your circulation, which will help stop your feet from going numb from the cold in the first place. And while everyday winter socks are nice when you’re mostly inside, you’ll want to take things up a notch when you plan to be outdoors for an extended period. Heated socks are suitable for almost every winter situation—and make the most frigid months of the year much more bearable and enjoyable. They may require a bit more TLC than your normal wash-and-tumble-dry pairs, but if your feet are the first thing to go cold in winter, the best heated socks are well worth the investment.

How we chose the best heated socks

Heated socks are an investment in your comfort during colder months—so we wanted to be sure your money was well-spent on quality socks that suit a variety of needs. We compared over 40 heated socks while looking at reviews, battery life, design, thickness, and price. We also have reported on heated insoles and heated slippers to keep you toasty till you get back to your heated blanket, so we used knowledge from those topics and applied it here.

The best heated socks: Reviews & Recommendations

You can wear heated socks while at home, or you can wear them with your shoes to keep cold winter air away from your feet when you go outside. And with slim battery packs designed to look like your average pair of socks, you might even forget you’re wearing super-charged protection against blustery winter weather. All of these picks have the reliability and warmth to help you endure frigid temperatures.

Best overall: VOLT 3V Heated Socks

Volt Resistance Heated Clothing

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Moisture-wicking micro polyester and up to 10 hours of warmth keep your feet warm and dry.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester; spandex
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 3 hours on high; 8 on low
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove batteries first)

Pros

  • Long battery length
  • Battery-powered or rechargeable
  • Machine washable

Cons

  • Expensive

These extra-thin heated socks provide all-day heat on a single charge and fit like a glove thanks to spandex interlocking fabric. The sock’s moisture-wicking micro polyester keeps your feet dry for extra comfort—no swamp foot here. The socks come with two rechargeable 2 oz. lithium batteries, a dual charger, and a wireless remote to cozy up without bending down. The battery tucks into the sock’s small storage pocket. And a hook-and-loop closure ensures it won’t end up in the snow as you traverse the tundra. They may be on the pricier side, but we think the quality—and warming up your feet—is worth the price. If you’d like longer heating time, the company sells a 3.7V/5000 mAh battery that provides more than 8 hours of heat on high and more than 20 hours of heat on low. You can purchase them on Amazon or directly from the company on their website.

Best machine-washable: Gobi Tread Heated Socks

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: After getting 12 hours of warmth, simply throw these socks in the wash the next time you use them.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (113°F-140°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 12 hours
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Separate keychain remote
  • Slim battery pack
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Expensive

With a range of heat settings from a balmy 113 degrees to a toasty 140, these machine-washable heated socks from Gobi can last up to 12 hours on the lowest charge. The toes are designed with their own individual heat zone to keep your pinky from feeling frozen, plus the slim battery is easy to tuck into your boot or shoe.

Best for skiing: SNOW DEER Heated Socks

Snow Deer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Heating elements on both sides of your feet mean you can hit the slopes without getting cold feet.

Specs

  • Material: Cool Max polyester, elastic; spandex
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (100°F-131°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 4 hours on high; 10 hours on low
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove batteries first)

Pros

  • Heats top and bottom of foot
  • Secure pocket for batteries
  • Rechargeable batteries

Cons

  • Could be longer-lasting

Aside from the battery pocket at the top, these rechargeable, heated socks could pass for any attractive pair of socks. They come in four different sizes, but since the included rechargeable lithium polymer batteries last only up to six and a half hours on a full charge on the lowest setting, if you like to turn the heat up high (four hours of power), you might want to bring along a few extra back-up sets just in case.

Best for lounging around the cabin: Men’s Thick Heat Trapping Insulated Boot Thermal Socks

DG Hill

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Show off your style in the ski lodge with 17 design options to choose from.

Specs

  • Material: Acrylic blend
  • Power level settings: N/A
  • Approximate heat time: N/A
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Powered by your body heat
  • Insulated
  • Stylish

Cons

  • Not for extremely cold climates

Back at the ski lodge? Slip into these cozy heated socks. They have a winter-wonderland look, and the synthetic-fiber blend provides the ultimate heating benefits. They’re ribbed at the top, so they won’t slip inside your shoes and let in cold air. Feel free to take them outside for a hike, a sleigh ride, or a few trips down the slopes.

Best with the thinnest heating module: ActionHeat 3.7V Rechargeable Battery Heated Socks 2.0

ActionHeat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Strategically placed heating panels don’t interfere with walking, running, hiking, or even lounging around.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton blend
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (up to 145°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 7 hours on the lowest setting
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Thin
  • Comfortable to walk in
  • Wide heat settings

Cons

  • Expensive

The batteries for these electric socks are thinner and slightly curved for a more comfortable fit, and the heating panels located at the toes use advanced ultra-fine fibers so they won’t interfere with your walking, hiking, or skiing. The heat can go up to 140°F, while battery power lasts up to seven hours on the lowest setting.

Best battery-powered: VELAZZIO Heated Socks

VELAZZIO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get warm feet in less than 30 seconds thanks to a nanofiber heating wire and two-zone heating.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 4.5 hours on high; 7.5 on low
  • Machine washable: No

Pros

  • Remote controlled
  • Fast heating
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Pocket not completely secure for batteries

Made for men and women, these heated socks have a design that’s a bit on the simple side, so you’re going to get function (a lot of it) over fierceness. They come with three different heat settings and warm up in less than 30 seconds. They pull up over the calf, and you can tuck the battery packs into the pocket in the inner top cuff. The best part is that the heat will last. The fully charged batteries can last up to 7.5 hours when worn on the lowest heat setting. And they include a remote that lets you control the heat without hiking up your pant leg.

Best for hiking: Autocastle Unisex Battery Powered Heat Insulated Socks

Autocastle

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Cotton allows your foot to breathe, and the 6.5-hour battery life on low keeps your tootsies warm from Raynaud’s to Rainier.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 3.5 on high; 6.5 on low
  • Machine washable: Yes, but remove batteries beforehand

Pros

  • Rechargeable
  • Machine washable
  • Not bulky

Cons

  • Pocket not completely secure for batteries

The knee-high design and cotton makeup of these hiking socks mean they won’t be uncomfortably bulky by the boot opening. There are three different heat settings, which makes them an ideal fit for even your chilliest hikes. You can turn the heat up as you ascend or it gets colder. These have decent battery life, too—up to 3.5 hours on the warmest setting and up to 6.5 on the coolest.

Best budget: Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women

MGOGO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Don’t break the bank to be warm all winter long with these electric socks.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: 95°F-113°F
  • Approximate heat time: N/A
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove battery packs)

Pros

  • Unisex
  • Cotton for breathability; fleece for warmth
  • Have a supportive arch

Cons

  • Not a wide range of temperature settings

These unisex heated socks come in three different sizes that can fit men with shoe sizes from 6 to 15 and women from 8 to 13. The fleece material provides breathability and sweat absorption as well as warmth even when the heat isn’t on. Each sock requires three AA alkaline or rechargeable batteries, which are not included. While they may not have bells and whistles, they can keep your feet warm for short outdoor activities.

What to consider when buying the best heated socks

Although electric socks will not be the cheapest ones you ever buy, they’ll definitely be the warmest socks you ever own. Plus, you can make the best snow boots even warmer. With so many to choose from, where do you begin making your choice? Fabric is a good place to start. Cotton, merino wool, and synthetics are all warm options. Still, since the first two hold moisture (look out for fungal infections!), we recommend synthetic fibers like nylon and lycra to keep your feet warm, dry, and free of microbial pests. As for other important variables to look for when shopping for the best heated socks, snag your winter hat and read on.

Pick the right pair of socks to match your winter adventure

Although you’re perfectly welcome to wear your heated socks while hibernating at home all winter long, if you’re the adventurous type who lives to hit the slopes, you’re in luck. Depending on what you like to do once you’re up in the snowy mountains, you can choose between heated ski socks and cabin socks.

The latter can be pretty much the same warm socks you wear when you’re lounging at home. But for going down the slopes, you’ll want a pair of heated socks with long-lasting batteries in a fabric that will continue to keep your feet warm even if the batteries run out. These cozy socks should also be thick enough to fill out your boots and, most importantly, comfortable.

Choose heated socks that put comfort first

The heating modules of the best heated socks will add a bit of volume, but they don’t have to be obtrusive. Most of the battery packs are slim enough that you won’t even notice them tucked away in the little pocket that sits right under the cuff. The wires that connect the batteries to the heating panels in the sock may be more noticeable underfoot, but you can get a pair with ultra-thin wires that you’ll hardly feel.

Size matters; the more sizes the socks come in, the merrier your feet will be. The one-size-fits-all design of some of the cheaper brands might leave you with too much wiggle room for your feet or not enough. If you don’t want to reach down to change the heat setting constantly, some heated socks come with a remote control for temperature adjustment, and others can be controlled with your smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. If one foot tends to get colder than the other, look for one with an app control that allows you to adjust the heat of each sock individually.

Decide how much battery life you need your heated socks to have per wear

Time matters when it comes to heated socks, and if you are going to be doing activities where recharging batteries isn’t an easy option, you should look for a pair with batteries that last longer on a full charge. Unfortunately, that often means the battery pack will be bulkier and less comfortable—and you may have to dish out more money, too. The key is finding the right balance to suit your needs and always having a good backup plan (extra batteries). That said, if your socks are thick and warm on their own, you’ll still have ample foot protection if your batteries die on you while you’re gliding down the slopes.

Pack your warmest heated socks for a winter hike

If your snow boots are made for hiking, the best heated socks can be, too. Since hiking can be rough on your feet, you’ll need heated socks that are as durable as they are warm. The best winter hiking socks should also be high enough to provide a complete barrier between your feet/lower legs and your shoes. Other things to consider are cushioning, fit, and fabric. Wool, polyester, nylon, silk, and spandex are the most popular materials for hiking socks. There are pros and cons with each one, so to get the optimal benefits, it’s best to go with a blend that will offer comfort, warmth, and durability.

Don’t feel like you have to blow your budget on heated socks

The best socks are going to cost you more than a bargain-rack three-pack, but they don’t have to leave you broke. That said, you’ll have to pay a bit more for some of the features that will make them more comfortable and functional (like long battery life and Bluetooth connectivity). The ones you can get for $40 or so will do what they are supposed to do, but they may have extra bulk or come in only one size. If you want a pair of socks with all the trappings, be prepared to pay up to a few hundred bucks for them. They might end up costing more than your snow boots, but if you get the right pair, they can last just as long. Still, you can find cheap heated socks that will do the trick and keep your toes warm and toasty.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated socks cost?

The best heated socks cost between $20-$200 based on materials and battery life.

Q: How do heated socks work?

Heated socks work by a heating panel hidden in the soles, heels, or toes that connects via wiring to a battery pack that acts as a miniature thermostat. The wires are separated by a waterproof membrane to make them safe when the socks become damp. If you don’t want to bend to adjust the heat, some allow you to do it with a remote control or a smartphone app with a Bluetooth connection to your socks.

Q: How long do heated socks last?

All good things must come to an end, but if you buy heated socks made of sturdy fabric and take care of them by following the washing instructions to the letter, heated socks last a couple of years—and even as long as your favorite snow boots.

Q: How do you wash heated socks?

Since stinky, fungus-infected feet are just as bad as cold ones, it’s important to know how to wash heated socks. After detaching the battery pack, a thorough hand-cleaning followed by air-drying in a well-ventilated area will do the trick. Never wring them (which can damage the wiring) or throw them into the washing machine or dryer.

Final thoughts on the best heated socks

The best heated socks will cost you a bit more than the cheap socks you wear during summer, but the warmth they provide—and the improved circulation as well as relief from arthritis and joint pain—make them worth the investment. If you get a pair with ultra-fine wires and a slim battery compartment that rests above the top of your boots, the only difference you might notice from regular socks will be the increased comfort and warmth that’ll make them much more comfortable as you enjoy the great wintry outdoors.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated socks in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best projectors under $200 in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-projectors-under-200/ Thu, 14 Apr 2022 19:00:02 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=433292
the best projectors under $200 composited
Stan Horaczek

Turn any wall into a window to other worlds with a portable projector.

The post The best projectors under $200 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best projectors under $200 composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

best overall WiFi Bluetooth Projector, DBPOWER is the best overall projector under 200. DBPOWER WiFi Bluetooth Projector
SEE IT

Excellent all-around performance with HD video and a good warranty.

Best bright image Projector, GooDee 2022 is the best projector under 200. GooDee 2023 Projector
SEE IT

With an extra bright image, this is a solid outdoor movie night option.

Best portable Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector is the best portable projector under 200. Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector
SEE IT

Palm-sized but still potent, this tiny pocket projector offers big entertainment.

Projectors do wonders at making any room—even minuscule city apartments—feel like a home theater. And not all projectors require a big investment to open up a huge new window of immersive entertainment. If you’re ready to expand your laptop binges and smartphone scrolling to the size of your wall, you can explore the world of streaming content at a surprisingly affordable price. You shouldn’t expect top-tier performance at this price point, but the best projectors under $200 can still provide a satisfying experience if you choose the right model and do a little prep work. 

How we chose the best projectors under $200

Having spent countless nights watching YouTube with my girlfriend’s cat at the foot of the bed purring and curled up around the projector’s exhaust fan, I know the joys of a simple-to-use home projector. For this best-of list, I evaluated leading projectors from numerous manufacturers, looking for the magic combination of a few factors that add up to make some truly great picks. We narrowed down this list from dozens based on intensive research, editorial reviews, and spec comparisons. 

The best projectors under $200: Reviews & Recommendations

These projectors offer surprisingly capable combinations of tech features that capitalize on crisp definition, Apollonian illumination, dynamic sound, and the connectivity you need for nightly use. Most hook into your laptop using an HDMI cable, while some pair wirelessly through a WiFi network. For audio, many pair with powered speakers (or an AV receiver) via aux connections and sometimes support Bluetooth. At the $200 price point, few projectors may be completely cord-free or the perfect pairing for your premium sound systems, but they could be a great partner to that new portable party speaker. Still, today’s budget projectors offer versatility and delivery that would have been unthinkable at this price a decade ago.

Best overall: DBPOWER WiFi Bluetooth Projector

DBPOWER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With native HD, 9,000 lumens, and WiFi connectivity, this is a versatile and powerful projector, but it’s the customer support that makes it the best overall.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,000 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, WiFi, Bluetooth (sound), TV stick, USB, AV port, 3.5mm audio

Pros

  • Really nice picture with good definition and bright luminance
  • Solid connectivity options
  • Allows viewers to screencast from their phones

Cons

  • Bluetooth connection is only sound, advertising is misleading
  • Some high-end sound systems won’t connect

This projector hits all the basics with aplomb: It offers 1080p definition without much warping along the edges, delivers 9,000 lumens to be visible in half-light conditions, and features impressive connectivity options. That connectivity lets you pair your devices to the projector via WiFi to screencast from a phone, or connect a sound system via Bluetooth. However, it will not deliver video via Bluetooth. That’s typical, but the product listings make it slightly confusing. 

The projector also delivers a few special features, such as a zoom function that allows you to shrink the image to 75% via the remote. Built-in speakers create a modicum of surround sound illusion. However, we think you’ll be best served by connecting to a separate Bluetooth speaker device.  

Best bright image: GooDee 2022 Projector

GooDee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With 1080p native resolution, 9,500 lumens, and two speakers to create a modicum of surround sound, this projector is more than capable of achieving most of what most users want.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: 2 HDMI, VGA, 2 USB, AV, TF card

Pros

  • Two speakers for true stereo sound
  • Extra bright LED luminance
  • Decent connections

Cons

  • Build quality is a bit cheap
  • Edges get somewhat fuzzy

At the sub-$200 price point, it can be hard to find a projector with really excellent brightness. The GooDee 2022 distinguishes itself here. Offering 9,500 lumens with a 3,000:1 contrast ratio and a max screen size of 230 inches, this budget projector emphasizes going big. A pretty perfect option for backyard movie nights, this might be the best outdoor projector under $200, hitting a nice sweet spot of big image and lightweight build. 

The GooDee does have a little trouble with warping and fuzziness around the image corners. However, that’s nothing rare at this price point. The device also suffers from a somewhat cheap-feeling build. It doesn’t feel super solid and primed for longevity. Still, the brightness and resolution may compensate for this for most users.

All in all, GooDee delivers a projector that yields a pretty bright, crisp image, with good contrast and resolution. It’s especially suited for backyard movie parties.

Best portable: Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector

KODAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With support for 1080p signal and a two-hour battery charge, this super-petite projector fits in a pocket and makes for a perfect companion for campers with kids or travel.

Specs

  • Luminance: 25 ANSI lumen
  • Definition: 640 x 320 (capable of displaying images meant for 1080p)
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, MicroSD

Pros

  • Ultra-portable
  • Makes a great camping projector

Cons

  • Battery often dies in under two hours

Ready to bring your projector camping? The Kodak Ultra Mini projector does some amazing things, considering its size. At about 3 inches square and only 150 grams, the Kodak lives up to its title as a true “ultra-mini” projector housed in that tiny body is a decent projector that hooks up to most smartphones and portable devices.

With such a tiny size and low price, the Ultra-Mini will require you to make some sacrifices. While it can receive a 1080p signal, it only outputs at 640 x 320, meaning the 1080p video entering the projector will be downscaled to a much lower native resolution. It’s quite a drop from HD, so don’t expect crisp, beautiful video that perfectly represents contemporary cinema. Additionally, the brightness isn’t anything to write home about. Still, it’s nothing to sneer at on a dark tent wall. One other issue with the device is its short battery life. It generally won’t make it past two hours, so don’t expect any Lord Of The Rings marathon binges here.

If a miniature portable projector is something you’re after and you decide you can afford the bells and whistles, Kodak’s more expensive Luma 350 could be worth exploring. For its small price and equally tiny size, however, the Kodak Ultra Mini is the best mini projector under $200. It’s worth a look, even if it could be a good idea to get your expectations in order before you spring for it.

Best for home theater: Wsky HD Projector (Refurbished)

Wsky

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a native 1080p HD resolution and a significantly higher-than-average 5,000:1 contrast, this projector puts its double-dense LED tech to work.

Specs

  • Luminance: 7,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, audio port, USB, MHL

Pros

  • 84 LEDs double the standard LED count in a projector and achieve greater detail, contrast, and less fuzziness on the exterior of the image
  • Value priced

Cons

  • Sound quality isn’t great

For a sub-$200 cinephiles projector, look no further than the Wsky HD Projector. This projector puts the work in on image quality using a higher-than-average LED count. The 5,000:1 contrast is noticeably better than much of the competition, and the 1080p HD coverage looks great, even with new movies. With better-than-average corner coverage achieved via the keystone wheel, Wsky also doesn’t suffer from as much of the edge blurriness that might make subtitles illegible on some projectors.

The Wsky’s sound won’t rack up any bonus points, however. While it advertises Dolby sound, the two speakers aren’t powerful enough. However, plugging speakers into the audio jack can mitigate this sound deficiency. Sadly, no Bluetooth audio connection is available. However, those who stump for Bluetooth speakers may be able to pair them to a device that’s sourcing video (such as your laptop, though there might be sync issues). 

With its impressive video capabilities, the Wsky HD Projector is worth consideration for anyone who wants a projector that yields a great picture.

Best with DVD player: BIGASUO Upgrade HD Bluetooth Projector

BIGASUO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For folks with a legacy DVD collection who might want to skip all the wires, this projector has a built-in DVD player and does a decent job at all the rest.

Specs

  • Luminance: 5,500 lumens
  • Definition: 720p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, AV, USB, Bluetooth (sound), TF SD card

Pros

  • DVD player built in
  • Decent connectivity, including Bluetooth for sound

Cons

  • Resolution and brightness are both somewhat low
  • Sound is nothing to write home about

Are you itching to tuck into the entire Lassie television series on DVD box set? The BIGASUO Upgrade HD projector with a built-in DVD player might be your best bet. The BIGASUO projector is remarkable for its connections and legacy media opportunities. 

The Bluetooth connection for sound is particularly useful in concert with the built-in DVD player. Often with contemporary laptops, Bluetooth sound on a projector is redundant since most laptops can pair to a Bluetooth speaker while casting video through HDMI. However, since this device acts as its own DVD player, the Bluetooth connection can be important for those skipping the laptop entirely. This means you can natively watch DVDs from the device while simultaneously paired with a Bluetooth speaker for sound.

Outside of its DVD player, this is an unremarkable projector. It downscales HD video to its native 720p definition, which falls short of similarly priced native HD projectors. Its brightness similarly lags the competition somewhat.

If you’re looking for a capable all-in-one DVD player/projector hybrid, the BIGASUO Upgrade HD is a good pick. Otherwise, you may want to move on.

Best with screen: YABER WiFi 9000L

Yaber

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Yaber boasts an impressive 10,000:1 contrast, supplemented by an included SCT screen that improves the image.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, VGA, AV, audio, TF card

Pros

  • Includes projection screen, which is primed for contrast
  • Decently bright
  • Lightweight and portable at just over two pounds

Cons

  • Resolution could be better

Pay for a projector, get the whole shebang? You’ll get just that with the YABER WiFi 9000L, which features a projection screen included in the box. While lots of folks use their projectors on a blank wall, you can demonstrably get a better image with a specially designed projection screen.

The rest of the YABER’s specs are average. It features a 1080p native resolution, and its brightness is better than average but not outstanding. It uses two speakers for decent sound. The WiFi connectivity is a nice touch that may sway some buyers. That, coupled with the 10,000:1 high definition, makes for a good all-around projector that’s a perfect addition to some households.

Best for gaming: WiMiUS S26 Projector

WiMiUs

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This HD projector isn’t actually true 4K, but it does deliver 1080p video at gaming speeds, extra bright 480 ANSI lumens, 20,000:1 contrast ratio, and extra nice keystone correction. 

Specs

  • Luminance: 480 ANSI lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, AV, 1 audio output

Pros

  • Great video quality with very bright and detailed image
  • Relatively low lag makes it worthy of games
  • With a wider-than-average keystone correction capability, you’ll get a more balanced picture

Cons

  • “4K” claim refers to 4K video input, which is standard and downgraded to HD
  • Edges of the picture remain fuzzy

Available for a solid sale price more often than not, the WiMiUS S26 fits within the $200 mark for our purposes. While the false 4K advertising is certainly a turn-off, the projector is still a good enough deal to highlight on this list. 

This projector has a classic HD 1920×1080 resolution, make no mistake. The 4K claim simply refers to the projector’s ability to accept 4K video and downscale it to HD, which is common. Still, this projector throws a nice-looking image: It has the highest contrast ratio of any projector on this list, with about 1,152 LED lumens (480 ANSI lumens) that should appeal to gamers. That said, the image has some issues; its edges tend to blur, with the middle properly focusing and the corners getting fuzzy.

In the end, this is a pretty capable extra bright projector. But don’t be fooled by the advertising … this isn’t a magical unicorn 4K projector for under $200.

Best budget: Vamvo Mini Movie Projector

Vavmo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its two built-in speakers, 720p resolution, and under 1-pound weight, Vamvo dishes up a budget projector that does a really decent job. 

Specs

  • Luminance: 3,500 lumens
  • Definition: 720p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, SD/TF, AV, USB and RC

Pros

  • Better sound delivery than most at this price
  • Lightweight build makes it a great choice for a portable option
  • Decently bright

Cons

  • Non-HD picture is a bit blurry

For a truly low price for its capabilities, the Vamvo Mini Movie Projector is the value pick for budget projectors. This 720p projector still delivers a decent enough high-contrast picture that’s adequately bright in dark rooms at 3,500 lumens, so that it’s effective in moderately dark to very dark spaces. While it advertises its support for 1080p HD, the 720p resolution will mean that high-end pictures do downgrade and lose detail. If you’re just watching the occasional movie in a dark backyard on a DIY screen or sheet, that may not matter very much.

The projector’s speakers certainly fall short of outstanding. Still, you can’t knock the performance here for the price point. It does a better job than most at this level. Overall, Vamvo is a true budget projector. While none of its components outpace the best equipped of the competition, if a low price is your most important metric, then it’s worth real consideration for its decent treatment of all the basics. At about just under a pound, this Vamvo is portable, reliable, and very cheap.

Things to consider when shopping for the best projectors under $200

You won’t get a chance to try out these projectors before you take the leap and buy one, but you can get a good idea of what you’re getting by comparing the specs. Here are some essential features to look for when trying to pick the best model for you. 

Do you need 4K?

4K is all the rage (until 8K finally establishes itself), and while I type this article on a laptop with a 4K screen, the resolution difference between 1080p and 4K at that scale is subtle. However, a top-tier projector is arguably one of the best applications of 4K resolution. Since projectors often cast their image onto large surfaces, the more pixels the projector displays, the better it looks at visual detail. That said, true 4K resolution is currently prohibitively expensive for an “under $200” list.

The difference between 1080p and a resolution like 720p is quite drastic. With a difference of 1080 lines of pixel dots versus 720 lines of pixel dots, you will notice the difference, especially if you’re projecting large. Generally, a substantive price difference separates the standard resolution brackets. So unless you are dedicated to getting the most portable projector out there, the choice should generally come down to budget vs. resolution. Go for the 1080p model unless image quality really isn’t important to you.

Read the fine print

Yeah, you want to believe that companies are being transparent about their products, but there’s a lot of bluster in the budget projector market. Often companies will claim their product supports HD in a header, then reveal that it has a native resolution of 720p, accepting HD video and downscaling it. It’s important to fully examine the specs of the projector you’re considering purchasing to ensure that it’s really the right one for you.

Keystone effect

Keystone correction refers to the illusion that’s created when your projector casts a square image onto a wall at an angle, creating a trapezoid. The shape created looks like the crowning keystone a mason would use to construct an arch. 

Today’s projectors compensate for the keystone effect by including a control that skews the image. This control usually takes the shape of a ring or nob by the focus control. Keystone correction can also be added digitally. 

Some projectors are better at keystone correction than others. But all projectors can benefit from supplementing keystone compensation with proper alignment of the projector against the wall. For permanent installation, getting the projector alignment right the first time is usually a good idea. Whether your projector will be installed permanently, or be moved around the house (or beyond), it’s worth understanding Keystone controls before you make a final decision.

Screen or wall?

Screens can make a huge difference in the image quality you get from your projector. Painted walls often contain more bumps and crevasses than you would expect. Not only do projector screens deliver a flat uniform surface, but they also often come primed with materials that help your projector do its work. Some projectors ship with a screen in the package. Many others would benefit from one. It’s worth considering whether you want to invest in a projector screen.

Luminance

Most of the time, projectors with the highest luminance are better than others for most users. Since projectors work by casting light onto a wall, higher luminance equals a brighter, more visible image, that will show up in half-light settings and on surfaces that aren’t primed for contrast. Usually, companies describe luminance in terms of lumens, which is the International System of Units standard for measuring total light emission over a unit of time. Sometimes, projectors advertise their brightness using the term “ANSI lumens,” a (generally) more accurate metric created by the American National Standards Institute for measuring total light emitted from a projector. While ANSI lumens aren’t directly convertible to lumens without accounting for a few additional factors (such as room temperature and surface color), 400 ANSI lumens roughly translates to a little under 1000 lumens. For this article, we prioritized higher luminance in most cases.

Picture quality and definition 

We’re in the era of 4K, and while a 4K resolution projector is rarely achievable for less than $200 (though we’ve got some great choices starting at $500), HD has become the bottom line in most cases. Many projectors still offer less than 1080p resolutions, and some are still worth considering, especially if you’re stumping for ultra-portability (or ultra-cheap prices). Still, most of the time, 1080p HD is the baseline we look for in a model designed for watching content. It creates a detailed image that does justice to your Criterion Collection binges. Definition isn’t the whole story, though: some projectors warp or blur image edges, skewing the picture. Other factors like contrast and color reproduction can also affect quality. This list prioritizes projectors that achieve image quality that displays the worlds you escape in how the director (or game designer) envisioned them.

Connectivity

At the sub-$200 price point, most projectors use HDMI cables for video connection. A few offer WiFi connections to supplement this. A few even offer Bluetooth connectivity. I factored in a projector’s connection offerings when I evaluated it and highlighted any that stand out from the crowd.

FAQs

Q: Which brand is best for projectors?

At the sub-$200 price point, DBPOWER is the most all-around capable projector. You also get solid support along with your purchase. 

Q: What should I look for in a good projector?

Great projectors under $200 offer solid brightness, which usually delivers 5,000 lumens and up, HD video, good connectivity, and reliable customer service. 

Q: How many lumens do I need for outdoor projector?

No projector can keep up with the luminance of the sun. Projectors that deliver the maximum possible lumens do the best outdoors; in the under $200 category, look for projectors that deliver 7,000 lumens and up, and 9,000-9,500 would be best.

Q: How many lumens is a good projector?

Certain mini portable projectors that emphasize small size can justify low brightness and still qualify as good quality. However, generally, 5,000 lumens and up makes a good projector brightness.

Q: What are the best projectors under $100?

The Vamvo Mini Movie Projector dishes up lean, mean video for under $100. With HD video, 3,5005-lumen brightness, and good connectivity, it’s a steal.

Q: What projectors under $200 work well with PS5?

The WiMiUS S26 Projector is a powerful gamer-ready projector. Its impressive video does justice to the PlayStation 5’s graphics. At just under $200, it’s a great choice. If you’re moving up to the PS5, though, you might want to consider larger, albeit more expensive projectors, or you’re just wasting all that next-gen game engine.

Q: How long does a projector last?

While so many components factor into the lifespan of your tech. Companies often advertise the lifespan of the LEDs or other light sources that power their projectors. Some are primed to last for 10 years, while others may only deliver about a year.

Final thoughts on the best projectors under $200

The best projectors under $200 offer tuned combinations of value and performance. You’ll find HD video, bright high-lumen LEDs, and solid connectivity at the price point. You can also find ultra-mini projectors capable of projecting from a phone or tablet and easily fit into a shirt pocket. For one of the best value projectors around, the Vamvo Mini Movie Projector delivers good video and brightness at a super-budget price. The Wsky HD Projector, with its impressive LED tech, is our favorite for home theater, though you might want to pair it with external speakers. DBPOWER, on the other hand, was the clear choice for the overall best projector under $200 for its HD video, good brightness, connectivity, and a customer service plan and warranty that goes far beyond most on this list. Whatever you pick, enjoy the new dimensions of video and picture quality that your projector will bring to your home media. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best projectors under $200 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best leaf mulchers in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-leaf-mulcher/ Tue, 23 Mar 2021 17:13:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278407
Spend less time raking and more time composting with the help of one of the best leaf mulchers.

We'll help you find the best leaf mulcher to tackle your fall cleanup.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Spend less time raking and more time composting with the help of one of the best leaf mulchers.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The WORX 12 TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum is the best leaf mulcher overall. WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum
SEE IT

This 3-in-1 model lets you mulch, vacuum, and blow your leaves with one powerful tool.

Best gas landworks gas powered leaf mulcher Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher
SEE IT

If you need to chop wood, this machine can handle branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

Best budget BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum BLACK+DECKER 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower
SEE IT

This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher.

Fall is gorgeous, but it’s also a grueling period for yard work, so a good leaf mulcher can come in handy. As stunning foliage falls from the trees, homeowners are faced with the Sisyphean task of clearing their yard of endlessly dropping debris. This step of lawn maintenance, important in preventing disease from hijacking your grass under the cover of wet leaves during the winter months, will be much easier if you have appropriate outdoor power equipment for the job. We’re here to help you identify the best leaf mulchers to clear your lawn and dispose of autumn debris.

How we chose the best leaf mulchers

Depending on your location, leaf disposal can be tricky. Some towns have a service for leaf pickup, but it often comes with a fee attached and the responsibility of tracking down a specific type of leaf bag. Other towns have a set location for residents to drop off their bagged leaves, which can be difficult if you don’t have a pickup truck to transport the hefty bags. 

A better option? Make leaf mulching a part of your yard maintenance. The process simply involves loading the leaves into a leaf shredder that cuts them up into tiny pieces, greatly reducing the heft of the load. Once shredded, leaves can be mulched around your plants and trees to retain moisture, protect from frost, and suppress weeds. 

Once you find the best leaf mulcher for your lawn care, disposing of leaves is a breeze. In compiling our recommendations, we looked at top brands and weighed a range of factors, including versatility, power, mulch ratio, ease of use, and price.

The best leaf mulchers: Reviews & Recommendations

Like any piece of outdoor power equipment, like a cordless leaf blower, an overwhelming number of leaf mulchers with different features are available for purchase. A little bit of research can ensure that your machine is tailored to your specific lawn care needs and worthy of space in your storage shed. We’ve gathered our recommendations and provided some tips below to consider when making your purchase.

Best overall: WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum

WORX

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 16:1
  • Weight: 9 lbs.

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Contains mulcher, blower, and vacuum
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Some users had problems with attachments

Why invest in three different tools when you can blow your leaves, mulch, and vacuum with one device? WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum is lightweight at 9 pounds, and changes functions with the turn of a dial. The lightweight, handheld tool features a metal impeller with a shredder blade that provides a 16:1 leaves-to-mulch ratio. Once the mulch is collected, the bag is easy to detach for removal. This tool also provides a powerful 600 CFM (cubic feet per minute) for leaf blowing and switches between two speeds. So ditch the rake and dispense with your leaves quickly and easily with this versatile option.

Best electric: WORX 12 Amp 3-in-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum

WORX

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 18:1
  • Weight: 9.3 lbs.

Pros

  • Versatile with mulcher, blower, and vacuum
  • Handheld
  • High mulch ratio
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Some users say suction is weak

This corded electric three-in-one model is lightweight but powerful. A simple switch quickly flips from blower to vacuum to mulching mode, and two speeds are available to accommodate different functions. It boasts an 18:1 mulching ratio, consolidating 18 bags of leaves into just one. As an electric device, this model is muted and environmentally friendly. 

Best gas: Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher

Landworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Gas
  • Voltage: N/A
  • Mulch ratio: 15:1
  • Weight: 9.3 lbs.

Pros

  • Can handle heavy branches
  • Powerful engine
  • Professional quality

Cons

  • Expensive
  • No other tools
  • Not environmentally friendly

This Landworks machine has a mulching ratio of 15:1, and is able to tackle branches of up to 3 inches in diameter. You can adjust the discharge chute anywhere between 90 to 145 degrees for easy and efficient disposal. The 7HP engine takes 87 octane gas with no ethanol. This mulcher doesn’t have the versatility but can handle harder jobs.

Best standalone: SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher

SuperHandy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 17:1
  • Weight: 46.5 lbs.

Pros

  • Can handle branches, leaves, and grass
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Affordable
  • High mulch ratio

Cons

  • Some users said it gets clogged
  • May not last long

The SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher is a smaller version of the SuperHandy Wood Chipper. While the mulcher can’t handle the sizable branches that the Wood Chipper can, it comes at a fraction of the price and is perfect for yearly leaf maintenance. It has a high 17:1 mulching ratio, and its electric belt-driven motor is quiet and eco-friendly. 

Best heavy-duty: Patriot Products 14 Amp Electric Wood Chipper/Leaf Shredder

Patriot Products

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 110V
  • Mulch ratio: N/A
  • Weight: 95 lbs.

Pros

  • Chops branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Only one function
  • Heavy

This Patriot Products wood chipper/leaf shredder offers versatile performance for various levels of yard maintenance. A larger piece of outdoor power equipment, this electric mulcher remains smooth and quiet as it shreds leaves and chips branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter. Simply slide your debris into the top of the feeder, and the mulch spits out the side.

Best budget: BLACK+DECKER 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 10:1
  • Weight: 8.1 pounds

Pros

  • Easy on the wallet
  • Includes mulcher, vacuum, and blower
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Low mulch ratio
  • Some users say it didn’t last long

This blower has options for more attachments, but even the bare-bones model is a blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. The corded electric blower is lightweight and easy to use, and it shreds 10 bags of leaves into one. This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher. 

Things to consider when buying the best leaf mulchers

With so many variations of leaf mulchers available, first narrow your options down by deciding what style mulching machine you’re looking for: handheld or stand-alone. Stand-alone mulchers are stationary machines into which you feed collected leaves for shredding. You can carry a handheld machine around the yard, and vacuum leaves straight into the machine. Handheld mulchers usually function as a leaf blower as well.

Also, think about what power source is best for you. A gas-powered mulcher is an excellent choice if you want more power and want to avoid plugging in the device or charging batteries, but that comes at the cost of a heavier machine. An electric or battery-powered mulcher leaves you at the mercy of your power source (so maybe keep a portable power station handy)—but can be significantly lighter and easier to maneuver. 

Lastly, pay attention to the mulching ratio of your leaf shredder. The mulch ratio basically tells you how much the shredder will cut down your leaves: the highest ratio of 18:1 will reduce 18 bags of leaves to fit into one bag. When choosing the best leaf mulchers for your needs, consider how many bags of leaves you typically have in the fall and what you plan to do with them after they’re shredded—larger shreds are fine for mulching around your trees, while smaller shreds are better for composting.

Electric vs. gas

A handheld mulching machine gives you the benefit of turning the two steps of gathering the leaves and then mulching them into one step. Most models can blow, vacuum, and shred, so one swift trip around the yard completes the entire cleanup. 

Electric leaf mulchers are significantly lighter than their gas-powered counterparts. Collecting leaves is done with relative ease, and while you’ll need a battery or connection to a power source, you can use a long extension cord or keep an extra battery charging.

For extended use without a power cord or having to stop and recharge batteries, gas-powered mulchers keep going for a lot longer than an electric model. Gas-powered models tend to be more expensive than electric, but you get what you pay for with more power and faster cleanup—just remember to keep extra gas in the shed so you can start with a full tank. 

Handheld vs. standalone leaf mulchers

The majority of the best leaf mulchers are handheld and come with blower and vacuum functions, but a standalone leaf mulcher has only one function: shred leaves. This is perfect for handling heavier loads, and if you go for a higher-end model, you’re ultimately purchasing a wood chipper that can even deal with small tree limbs. We found smaller and heavy-duty models for more extreme yard work. 

Versatility

If you’re willing to fork over some more green for a more versatile machine, a heavier-duty leaf shredder can reduce twigs, branches, and acorns. This is optimal for cleaning up debris after storms and heavy winds knock limbs into your yard. These powerful devices can make yard maintenance quick and efficient and leave you with aesthetically pleasing mulch for your landscaping.

Price

If your fall yard maintenance tends to be a small and simple job, the best leaf mulcher for you shouldn’t have to break the bank. While cheap mulchers often coincide with a smaller capacity for collection and a less powerful engine, we’ve found inexpensive models on the market that are still strong and efficient. 

FAQs

Q: What leaves are not good for compost?

The leaves that won’t compost well are higher in lignin, a polymer that makes them feel rigid, almost wooden. High-lignin leaves include those found on beech trees, oaks, and sweet cherry trees. Also, avoid black walnut, eucalyptus, and poison ivy leaves, as they can be toxic. The best leaves for mulching have high levels of calcium and nitrogen and are low in lignin, like poplar, maple, and ash leaves.

Q: What is the best way to shred leaves?

If you don’t have many trees around the yard and your fall blanket is minimal, a lawn mower could work as a leaf shredder in a pinch—simply mow over the leaves and collect them in the mower’s bag attachment. However, with several price-friendly options on the market, it’s better to take the easier route and buy a leaf mulcher. A specialized leaf vacuum and mulcher does a more thorough job picking up the leaves and shreds smaller than a mower can. 

Q: What is the best 3-in-1 blower, vacuum, and mulcher?

DeWalt and Husqvarna are both popular outdoor equipment brands, and each has excellent 3-in-1 leaf machines, but our favorite is the WORX WG518, a 12-amp 2-speed leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher. This is a corded model, so you’ll need a power source, but in return it’s lightweight and easy to carry. Its mulch ratio is on the higher end at 16:1, so if you have a large amount of leaves to consolidate, this machine does the trick. 

Final thoughts on the best leaf mulchers

Finding the best leaf mulcher to clean up your lawn this fall will take a lot of heavy lifting, and raking, off your shoulders. The 3-in-1 models are especially efficient and can operate as a leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. Removing the bed of leaves from your yard is an essential part of your yard maintenance schedule, as it keeps the leaves from molding and suffocating your lawn or becoming a breeding ground for debris. Find yourself the best leaf mulcher for your needs, and in no time, you’ll have your yard cleaned up and ready for next spring.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best trekking poles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-trekking-poles/ Tue, 13 Sep 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=469199
best trekking poles sliced header
Tony Ware

The best tools for keeping you upright on all manner of hikes, treks, and scrambles.

The post The best trekking poles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best trekking poles sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole. Black Diamond Alpine FLZ
SEE IT

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole.

Best carbon fiber These MSR poles feature a “Dynalock” mechanism that shores up their durability.
MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon
SEE IT

The MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon is a versatile, sturdy, and comfortable pair of poles.

Best aluminum Leki Makalu Lite Leki Makalu Lite
SEE IT

The Leki Makalu Lite will hold up through months-long treks over all sorts of terrain.

Many dedicated backpackers consider a quality pair of trekking poles essential gear for hiking. They help you hike and keep your balance over steep hills, rocky paths, and slippery snow-covered trails. Like their predecessor, the humble walking stick, a quality pair of hiking poles are sturdy enough to put your entire weight on them, yet light enough that they do not feel like a burden after a long day on the trail. They ease the strain on your knees and back, especially if you’re carrying a heavy pack. There are a dizzying number of poles to choose from. They’re made from different materials, feature different designs, and, of course, some are more expensive than others. We’ve tried a whole bunch of popular options, taking them on runs, hikes, climbs, and scrambles to find the best trekking poles for all your outdoor adventures.

How we picked the best trekking poles 

I’ve been writing about outdoor gear and my often dubious adventure travel for decades at publications like Hearst, HuffPost, BBC Travel, Fodor’s, Adventure Cycling, Input, and many others. My criteria for experiencing new places usually include how many people visit (the fewer the better), and if it has a reputation as a “challenging” journey. Over the years, I’ve traveled across all kinds of terrain and environments, many of which required a good set of trekking poles to navigate.

I’ve spent a good deal of time testing trekking poles—walking, running, climbing, scrambling, and sometimes falling—all over the world. Over the years, I’ve found a few favorites. I’ve also compared notes and talked for hours with trekkers, hikers, and adventurers about gear around countless campfires and well-worn tables in questionable bars.

The best trekking poles: Reviews & Recommendations

Like most outdoor gear, trekking pole preference can vary from person to person. Given that, our recommendations span a variety of options made from different materials and covering a wide range of prices. All of them, however, have a clear edge over similar poles in important qualities like durability and weight.

Best overall: Black Diamond Alpine FLZ

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a highly versatile pole that packs down small, making it a prime choice for all kinds of activities.

Specs

  • Weight: 18 ounces
  • Maximum length: 43, 49, or 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 14, 15, or 16 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Foldable
  • Tips: Carbide tips, trail baskets, snow baskets, rubber tips (sold separately)

Pros

  • Versatile
  • Comfortable handles
  • Packable

Cons

  • Heavy

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is an incredibly versatile trekking pole. The small packable size and durable aluminum construction make it an optimal pole for most everything including rugged trekking, multi-day backpacking, steep hiking, and even backcountry skiing. The cork handles become increasingly more comfortable over time as well as a secondary foam grip.

While a telescoping pole is inherently stronger than a foldable one, I’ve found the Alpine FLZ holds up extremely well in a variety of precarious situations including nefarious water crossings and muddy sheer drop-offs. They feature Black Diamond’s patented Flicklock pro locking mechanism, which uses a lever to secure the pole length with an inner adjustable tension dial that requires a small Allen key to adjust.

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is far from the fanciest pair of trekking poles out there but has proven that it can get the job done in difficult situations, and feels comfortable on easy trail hikes.

Best carbon fiber: MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon

MSR

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon is a versatile, sturdy, and comfortable pair of poles that work for a wide variety of adventures.

Specs

  • Weight: 17 ounces
  • Maximum length: 47 inches or 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 14.25 inches or 17.5 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: EVA foam
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Winter and summer baskets

Pros

  • Comfortable grip
  • Versatile
  • Small pack size

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy for a carbon pole

My friend Ben has been almost everywhere on the globe and he always travels with his MSR Dynalock Ascent carbon poles, which he considers an extension of himself and one of the best gear spurges he’s ever made (it may also be the only one).

The Dynalock Ascent poles have comfortable, contoured foam grip handles and padded straps. Each one folds down to a very packable 14.25-17 inches, depending on which size you get. Unlike most other poles where most of the tips are sold separately, these come with both winter and summer basket tips. 

They also feature MSR’s signature Dynalock mechanism, which consists of a thick aluminum lever and an inner metal dial that allows you to tighten or loosen with ease as well as providing exceptional sturdiness. It also locks each section into place with metal buttons on the sides. As someone who often has “Final Destination”-type scenarios running through my brain, I appreciate both of these components. 

REI

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Leki Makalu Lite is one of the most durable poles I’ve tried.

Specs

  • Weight: 17.3 ounces
  • Maximum length: 54 inches
  • Collapsed length: 26 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips, summer basket

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Extremely durable
  • Moderate price

Cons

  • Large packed size

If you’re planning to use your trekking poles on a weeks-long adventure, Leki’s Makalu Lite poles are among the most durable we’ve found. Despite the name, they’re slightly thicker than most other poles, making them tremendously strong, as well as fairly heavy.

The Makalu Lite features Leki’s very comfortable “Aergon Air” grip—a cork design with a hollow core and wide support at a lightly tilted ergonomic angle. Like all Leki poles, these use the company’s durable “Speed Lock” system, which combines a lever lock with a small dial to tighten spring tension by hand.

A pair of Makalu Lites is overkill for your average day hike, but their durability is worth the extra weight on a long trip where you’ll traverse mountains or glacial ice for weeks or months.

Best for hiking: Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork is an incredibly sturdy carbon pole with a very comfortable grip.

Specs

  • Weight: 17 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 24 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips and trail baskets included; snow baskets sold separately

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Excellent locking mechanism
  • Durable

Cons

  • Not as packable as other options
  • Expensive

I prefer cork handles over rubber and foam because they mold to your hands over time so, eventually, feel like a seamless extension of your body. The cork handles on Black Diamond’s Alpine carbon poles are quite comfortable right out of the box and improve exponentially over time. Like most trekking poles, they have a secondary foam grip beneath the handles, which gives you a comfortable place to grab when you need to lower your grip, as well as wide wrist straps.

They are amazingly durable and sturdy for a carbon pole, thanks to their thicker shafts and Black Diamond’s patented “Flicklock” mechanism, which flips into place with a robust snap. The “Flicklock” system has its disadvantages: The locking mechanism requires a tiny Allen key to adjust, which isn’t ideal since it’s easily misplaced. Not being the most graceful person, (especially when hiking) I routinely get my poles stuck between boulders requiring intense back-and-forth movement to dislodge. Despite this, I have yet to break them.

The collapsed length of these poles means they’re not well-suited to be stowed in a backpack during a technical climb but for most activities, including trekking over rock and snow in remote regions of the world, these poles are a solid choice that will last for years.

Best for backpacking: Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork is a solid, affordable option that’s durable enough to handle most backpacking trips.

Specs

  • Weight: 18 ounces
  • Maximum length: 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 27 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips, trekking baskets, and snow baskets

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Versatile
  • Reasonable mid-range price

Cons

  • Doesn’t pack down as small as other options

Black Diamond’s Trail Ergo Cork trekking poles are a great pick for new hikers. They’re sturdy, comfortable, and reliable—a great fit for most backpacking and thru-hiking. Plus, at less than $150, they don’t cost a fortune.

 The cork handles are tilted forward slightly for a more natural, ergonomic wrist alignment. They also have padded straps and a foam secondary grip, making them easy to hold. Like the other Black Diamond hiking poles on our list, these feature the company’s patented “Flicklock” system, ensuring they don’t come loose while you’re walking.

Collapsing to a fairly large 27 inches, they are longer than the majority of other poles when packed away. Unless you’re taking them on a plane, though, that probably shouldn’t be too much of an issue.

Best ultralight: Gossamer Gear LT5 Three Piece Carbon

gossamer gear

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Gossamer Gear LT5 is one of the lightest trekking poles available.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.6 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 23.5 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: EVA foam
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Ultralight
  • Extremely durable for their weight

Cons

  • Expensive

For situations where every ounce (or even gram) counts, the ultralight Gossamer Gear LT5 carbon trekking poles streamline your experience better than any other poles. Despite weighing less than 11 ounces, they’re incredibly durable. I used them on a multi-week thru-hike over mixed terrain through a good portion of northern Spain one summer where I was intent on carrying as little weight as possible, both emotionally and physically, and they didn’t let me down.

The twist-lock mechanism is easy to set; you simply rotate the sections for a secure lock. The wrist straps sport comfortable padding and the EVA foam handles have proven to be comfortable enough (though I am partial to cork handles).

The LT5s also serve as great support for ultralight tents that use trekking poles as part of the structure, thus providing a super lightweight sleep system.

Best budget: Trekology Trek-Z

TREKOLOGY

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Trekology Trek-Z is an incredibly inexpensive pole that doesn’t sacrifice comfort or durability.

Specs

  • Weight: 26 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 15 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Foldable
  • Tips: Carbide, rubber, snow baskets, mud stops, rubber feet

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Durable
  • Folds down small

Cons

  • Heavy

Made from aerospace-grade 7075 aluminum alloy, the Trekology Trek-Z is an inexpensive pair of poles that come complete with carbide tips, rubber tips, snow baskets, mud stops, and rubber feet, making them highly adaptable and a huge bargain. They feature a metal flip-lock mechanism that’s easy to operate, though you may not use it often since they offer a very limited 7-inch range. They do collapse into a very compact 15-inch package, though.

For less than $50, the Trek-Z is one of the most affordable poles we’ve seen. Unsurprisingly, they’re also among the heaviest. We wouldn’t recommend them for alpine climbing, mountain running, or speed hiking, where you want to be quick and nimble. For those sticking to the trail and not too concerned about their performance, they’re an excellent option for not a lot of money.

One thing to keep in mind: Trekology makes a new “Trek-Z 2.0” with EVA foam grips instead of cork. In general, I prefer cork grips because of the material’s moldable properties, so we’re sticking with the original. Just keep in mind that it may become harder to find in the coming months.

What to consider when buying trekking poles

Finding the perfect trekking pole can be a daunting task. As with all outdoor gear, there are a variety of options to consider. More often than not, finding the “best” choice requires you to balance different strengths and weaknesses based on your personal needs and taste. The lightest trekking poles will rarely be the absolute sturdiest. The strongest poles will likely not be the most packable. To help you figure out what you need, let’s talk about the most important elements of any trekking pole set.

Sizing up your poles

Trekking poles come in different lengths so that any person can find a pair that feels right. At standing position, the grip of the pole should line up with your elbow or, more precisely, with your hands when your elbows are bent at a 90-degree angle. If you’re shopping at home, look for poles that are adjustable to within 20-24 inches shorter than you. For example, I’m 5 feet 6 inches, or 66 inches, so I want poles that you can set to a height between 42-46 inches.

Most modern trekking poles are adjustable to some degree, so there’s a lot of wiggle room if you aren’t sure about what will feel right. Some companies also make fixed-height poles, as they are technically stronger. All of our recommendations are adjustable, though, as we find them to be much more versatile than fixed-length poles. In general, I usually shorten my poles when ascending a steep incline and lengthen them when descending. Collapsible and foldable trekking poles allow the user to change the overall length of the pole as the terrain and situation merit.

Collapsible poles feature a telescoping design, where increasingly narrow sections slide and fit inside each other. Foldable poles have a reinforced cord running through them that holds the sections together when pulled apart while allowing them to fold—like the pole technology used in most lightweight tents. 

Telescoping poles will be stronger than their foldable counterparts because, in most cases, the pole overlaps and slides into itself at a greater distance than foldable ones. A fixed-length pole will be the most durable option, though, as there are no weak points or breaks in the shaft. Many poles now feature one telescoping section coupled with two folding sections to offer more precise adjustment options.

Pole material

Most trekking poles are made from either high-grade aluminum or carbon fiber. Carbon fiber produces a lighter pole, while sacrificing a bit of durability. Under intense stress, a carbon fiber pole will likely snap. Aluminum poles, by contrast, will usually bend before they break, giving you a bit of a warning that you should navigate out of that particular situation right away if at all possible. 

If you’re looking for speed and/or the ability to go long distances, a carbon pole is probably your best choice. If you’re okay with a slightly heavier pole (and we’re usually talking ounces here, not pounds), an aluminum pole may be a better fit for difficult terrain and will last a bit longer.

Check the grip

You’re going to spend a long time holding your trekking poles’ grips, so you want to make sure that they’re comfortable. You should take a look at the grip and, ideally, give it a squeeze to see how it feels in your hand.

Most pole grips are made from cork, foam, or rubber. I prefer cork because the material molds to the shape of your hand over time. Grips made with EVA foam are also often quite comfortable and weigh a bit less than cork. Rubber grips absorb shock exceptionally well, but can get sticky and cause blisters when it’s hot and humid out.

Tips

Trekking poles come with different kinds of tips on the end, which can help you move across different kinds of terrain. Many poles, including our recommendations, either come with multiple sets of pole tips or give you the opportunity to buy alternate tips or replacements when you need them. (You should replace your tips every 1,500-2,000 miles.) Most pole tips have a screw-on mechanism, so it’s easy to change them on the fly, so it’s nice to have multiple options on your trip. Here are some of the most common choices:

Rubber tips provide extra grip on wet surfaces, as well as shock absorption on paved surfaces. Since they’re softer and less pointy, rubber tips don’t tear up trails as much as carbide tips, but also don’t provide as much traction.

Carbide tips are extremely durable. They don’t wear down as quickly as rubber versions. With a sharper point, they grip well on rock, dirt, and ice, allowing you to really dig into surfaces. They’ll also rip up soft dirt, so they may damage hiking trails.

Rubber feet have a shape that resembles a small foot. With a wider footprint, they allow you to move faster without losing your balance.

Mud baskets attach a few inches above the tip of your poles and prevent your poles from sinking down too far into soft, muddy earth. They can also prevent some of the mud from splattering onto your calves. Like carbide tips, though, they can damage plant life on trails, so you should reserve them for appropriate terrain.

Snow baskets are a wider version of mud baskets made for snow. They function like snowshoes, keeping your poles near the surface of deep snow.

Locking mechanism

If you follow my lead and go with adjustable poles, you should take a closer look at how it opens and closes. Most adjustable trekking poles feature a locking mechanism with a lever that opens or closes to slide the pole length up or down, coupled with a push button lock or spring-loaded twist lock. Many also include an inner dial in the lever to increase or decrease tension. When considering a pole, check to make sure it’s easy to adjust the poles and operate the lock with or without gloves. If you buy poles that require special tools to change spring tension, make sure those are included. You want a pole that you can easily adjust when out on the trail but also locks securely.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best trekking poles cost?

Most trekking poles cost $50-$250, depending on what they’re made from, versatility, comfort, durability, and weight. Generally speaking, the lighter the pole, the higher the price tag. When choosing hiking poles, remember that they need to be light enough to lift and carry all day without tiring you out on a hike, but strong enough to support your body weight.

Q: Where do I recycle my trekking poles?

If they are in good working condition without structural damage, you can often recycle a pair of trekking poles through a gear trade-in program like the one offered by REI. If they aren’t reusable, you can put aluminum poles out with your household metal recycling.

Carbon fiber trekking poles aren’t recyclable. There are companies who are developing ways to recycle it, but it’s not a process that is easy or currently available to the general public.

Q: Are trekking poles bad for trails?

Trekking poles can be bad for trails as they have the potential to tear up soft soil and damage plants growing along the trailside. Pay close attention to where you place your poles, and stick to hiking best practices, including the following:

Don’t use your poles when you don’t need them. Use rubber tips as much as possible. In an area with tense vegetation, avoid using baskets that will rip up plant life. And finally, make sure to leave no trace.

Q: Do carbon fiber trekking poles break?

Carbon trekking poles can break, though it’s usually a result of extreme pressure. It doesn’t happen often enough for them to be considered unsafe. 

Originally developed for the aerospace industry, carbon fiber is lightweight, strong, and stiff made from woven fibers held together with resin. It is stronger than even steel of the same thickness while also being much lighter which is why it’s used to make things like trekking poles and bicycles.

Final thoughts on the best trekking poles

Outdoor gear companies are always finding ways to build sturdier, lighter trekking poles, but I find that you don’t need to get too worried about the particulars. As long as you get a pair that’s sturdy, comfortable to hold, and light enough to use all day, you shouldn’t worry too much about optimizing for the “best” experience. More than anything, you want something reliable. All of the poles included here are durable and comfortable with the potential to be that favorite piece of gear you don’t leave for an adventure without.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best trekking poles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best insulated water bottles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-insulated-water-bottles/ Tue, 26 Jul 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458191
Best insulated water bottles sliced header
Stan Horaczek

Hydrate in style—and save some plastic—with these durable steel bottles that will keep water cold for hours.

The post The best insulated water bottles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best insulated water bottles sliced header
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall YETI Rambler 26-ounce Bottle is the best insulated water bottle overall. YETI Rambler 26-ounce Bottle
SEE IT

A variety of sizes and mouthpieces mean you can build your best bottle.

Best with straw Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid is the best insulated water bottle with straw. Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid
SEE IT

An included silicon bumper protects from dings and dents.

Best 64 oz. Stanley Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug is the best 64 ounce insulated water bottle. Stanley Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug
SEE IT

No refills are necessary with this easy-to-carry bottle.

The hottest accessory of the season (or maybe it’s the coolest, depending on the contents) is an insulated water bottle. Although that sounds a little zany to say in a world of Amazon and Etsy, the #emotionalsupportwaterbottle tag on TikTok has 45.1 million views, with hundreds of videos of people showing off their rotation of reusable water bottles—plural—in a variety of colors, sizes, and brands. Those looking for this level of attachment—something trustworthy and always at your side, much like an emotional support animal—often turn to insulated varieties, which can keep drinks frosty for hours sans condensation, making them perfect travel companions. The best insulated water bottles go the distance when it comes to keeping drinks icy in style, and here are our picks.

How we chose the best insulated water bottles

As a former field hockey player and marching band kid, I know the importance of a water bottle that can go from class to sports practice to band rehearsal without breaking a sweat—literally. Although I was both an average athlete and slightly better musician, I can say with confidence that I’m a water bottle expert (hydration is very important to me, a water sign). Although my current hydration MVP is a pink 32-ounce Nalgene plastic water bottle I was excited to rescue from my college bookstore’s lost & found, I’ve had insulated water bottles from Yeti, Hydro Flask, Stanley, and Kleen Kanteen in my rotation. I also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and conducted first-hand testing to separate the bad bottles from the rest of the bunch. The only thing we don’t like to keep bottled up at PopSci is our feelings on the best buys. 

How do insulated water bottles work?

One of the biggest reasons to opt for one of the best insulated water bottles and not something like the BPA-free Tritan plastic in my Nalgene bottle is the vacuum insulation—a small gap of air between the bottle walls to reduce conduction, keeping liquids hot or cold for several hours. Additionally, this also prevents the outer layer from sweating and causing water marks on some surfaces. Plastic may be durable and is less likely to dent in a fall, but it will warm up if left in a hot car. Beyond temperature retention, there are certain things to keep in mind when picking an insulated water bottle.

The best insulated water bottles: Reviews & Recommendations

These insulated water bottles will leave you feeling refreshed—hydration-wise and “this water bottle is a nice step-up from the other things I’ve used”-wise.

Best overall: YETI Rambler 26-ounce Bottle

YETI

SEE IT

Also available on Amazon

Why it made the cut: Throw it in your backpack and then throw it in the dishwasher—this bottle is meant to keep up with busy lifestyles. 

Specs

  • Sizes: 12, 18, 26, 36, 46, 64 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 12-24 hours for iced drinks; 12 for hot
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth with removable Chug Cap

Pros

  • Tough
  • Dishwasher safe
  • Lots of mouthpiece accessories are available

Cons

  • 5-year warranty
  • A bit more expensive compared to other reusable water bottles

There was stiff competition to name the best overall water bottle. However, the Yeti Rambler takes home the top prize. It’s more durable than other contenders like Hydro Flask, and the powder coating has a great feel and grip to it. The bottle itself comes in a plethora of fun colors (with equally fun names like “Bimini Pink” and “King Crab”), and the number of accessories you can get for your bottle is astonishing. We think the included Chug Cap is a happy medium between wide-mouth ease and narrow-mouth accessibility; you can remove the Chug Cap for washing and ice insertion and put it back on for spillage-free sips. 

The handle on the bottle feels sturdy and is grabble—an important feature for slippy-fingered people like myself. Even the straw cap warrants major kudos—you don’t have to touch the straw part to flip it up, and the handle is offset, so you can sip without any logistical problems. Yeti advertises 12-24 hours for keeping iced drinks cold, but we think it can keep drinks cold for closer to 36 hours. Although the five-year warranty is great in theory, other comparable brands feature a lifetime warranty on their bottles. And, although the price is great in the long run, you can technically get an insulated water bottle that will last just as long (with more dings and dents) but is cheaper. However, we think Yeti is worth the investment.

Best sustainable: Klean Kanteen TKWide

Klean Kanteen

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Insulated water bottles are already sustainable, but Klean Kanteen’s 90% post-consumer 18/8 stainless steel composition goes the extra eco-friendly mile.

Specs

  • Sizes: 12, 16, 20, 32, 64
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 46-47 hours for iced drinks, depending on cap; 14 hours hot with cafe cap
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth

Pros

  • Steel straw in twist mouthpiece is more luxurious and eco-friendly than plastic
  • Twist cap straw design is stylish and prevents germs
  • Innovative internal thread design
  • Lots of accessory options

Cons

  • Straw cap not recommended for hot liquids due to stainless steel straw
  • Mouthpieces have more crevices than other bottles
  • Handle could be more robust

If you thought your reusable water bottle was saving the planet, wait until you meet the Klean Kanteen TKWide line. The company states that 95 percent of its products will be made from recycled steel by 2023; however, the TKWide line is explicitly made from recycled steel right now. 

We love the innovative twist cap straw design, which hides the straw mouthpiece completely until use, meaning it’s only exposed to the world when you want it to be. The internal thread design uses a series of rounded bumps rather than a line of threads to create a better seal, keeping your drinks cooler for longer. There are multiple cap options available to turn your TKWide into a tumbler for iced coffee or transform it into athletic mode with the sport cap. If you’re looking for a bottle with a sleek handle, the TKWide metal loop cap is for you. It’s easy to snag with two fingers, but it might not be for you if you’re looking for something truly grabbable.

Best with straw: Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid

Takeya

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A large, flexible handle, included silicon bumper, and leakproof design are all game-winning features.

Specs

  • Sizes: 32, 40, 64 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature times: 24 hours cold; 12 hours hot
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth with straw lid

Pros

  • Large handle
  • Included silicone bumper
  • Leakproof 

Cons

  • Reviews note pink bottle looks different in the product photo than in real-life

When looking for an insulated water bottle with a straw cap, we like to see some specific features: a durable handle that isn’t in the way of the straw itself; a ridge to easily flip up the straw so it doesn’t come in contact with sweaty or dirty hands; and a leakproof design. The Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid checks off all these boxes, with an included silicone bumper to prevent damage. A powder coating makes this bottle durable and easy to hold, and the large handle makes it easy to clip onto a backpack or carry around. 

These bottles are also cheaper than others on this list of a similar size—for example, a 32-ounce Hydroflask retails for $44.95, depending on where you purchase it. This bottle retails for $39.99, which is a steal considering it comes with a silicone bumper, which other companies sell separately. We think everyone is sleeping on this Japanese brand. If you’re looking for a serious step-up option, check out the Titanium Aurora Bottle from Snow Peak, a Japanese outdoors brand founded out of the snowy mountains that crafts elevated everyday items.

Best for kids: Hydro Flask 12-ounce Kids Wide Mouth Straw Lid

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight bottle has an included silicone boot for extra protection.

Specs

  • Sizes: 12 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes 
  • Temperature times: 24 hours for cold drinks
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth

Pros

  • Perforated silicone boot for extra protection
  • Kid-friendly features like a place to write a name
  • Straw doesn’t need to be open all the way to take a sip

Cons

  • Handle design not the most comfortable to hold
  • Not leakproof

It was tough to choose between this and the Yeti Rambler Jr. as best for kids. However, the included silicon boot—which other companies sell as a separate accessory—and kid-specific features like a place to write their name edged it out. It’s also lighter than the Yeti Rambler Jr., clocking in at 9.6 ounces compared to 1 pound.

The straw doesn’t need to be opened all the way to take a sip, which is a blessing and a curse: it’s easier to drink out of, but it’s not leakproof. Additionally, the handle is out of the way from taking a sip but is a little uncomfortable to hold since it requires you to hook your fingers rather than allow for a full grab. The company does sell water bottle slings separately, which can keep everyone hands-free. If this bottle doesn’t tickle your kid’s hydration fancy, check out our other picks for the best kid water bottles.

Best with a filter: LifeStraw Go Stainless Steel Water Filter Bottle

LifeStraw

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Clean water is all around you with this fabulous filtered bottle.

Specs

  • Sizes: 24 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes, only with filter and carbon capsule removed
  • Temperature times: 24 hours cold; not recommended for hot liquids
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth with straw mouthpiece

Pros

  • Included carabiner
  • Clean water anywhere
  • Dishwasher safe

Cons

  • One size only
  • Heavy
  • Doesn’t fit in standard cupholders

Finding clean water in the great outdoors is a struggle. Heck, even finding clean water in cities is difficult—looking at you, suss outdoor water fountain in the park. The LifeStraw Go Stainless Steel Water Filter Bottle gets rid of this drinkable debacle thanks to its included Titan Renew and membrane microfilters, which protect against parasites, microplastics, chlorine, organic chemical matter, dirt, sand, and cloudiness, while also improving taste. 

Specifically, LifeStraw’s membrane microfilter removes 99.999999% of bacteria, 99.999% of parasites, 99.999% of microplastics, silt, sand, and cloudiness. It meets NSF 42 standard for chlorine reduction and meets U.S. EPA & NSF P231 drinking water standards for the removal of bacteria and parasites. This means you can also have access to clean water internationally. The carbon filter costs around $10 to replace, and the replacement two-stage membrane filter costs around $25. However, these filters only need replacing every 1,000 gallons—that’s a lot of lake water. Although it’s heavier than other insulated water bottles, doesn’t fit in standard cup holders, and only comes in one size, we think the benefits of clean water outweigh these cons. If you’re looking for a bottle with UV light filtering, consider the LARQ PureVis Bottle, which is also self-cleaning.

Best 64 oz.: Stanley Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug

Stanley

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This jug is easy to carry and keeps drinks cold for hours, making it easy to drink more water.

Specs

  • Sizes: 64 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature times: cold for 20 hours; 4 days with ice
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth with straw lid

Pros

  • Extra large moveable handle 
  • Leakproof straw
  • Insulated lid doubles as a cup

Cons

  • Heavy when filled

Stanley Adventure Quencher travel tumblers are currently every TikTok drink girlie’s must-have item. A TikTok drink girlie is a person (girlie is gender neutral) who has at least three beverages on their person at once, one of them being some sort of chaotic Utah soda concoction or an iced coffee. Stanley makes a mean water bottle as well, and its 64-ounce Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug is our favorite. Unlike other jugs, which come with a narrower mouthpiece for chugging, this water bottle comes with a straw for easy sipping—no one wants to recreate the water-chair scene in Flashdance IRL, at least not unintentionally. 

Its temperature control is also unbeatable—four days with ice is a long time! The large, moveable handle allows you to carry the (objectively heavy) jug with ease. I have an older model of this jug with a fixed handle, and I’m debating swapping it out for this model. Although it won’t fit in your cupholder, you can throw it on the floor of your car without worrying about it tipping over—and if it does, you’re less likely to experience any spills.

Best budget: Igloo 36-ounce Vacuum-Insulated Bottle

Igloo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to sacrifice quality for price with this bottle, which has the same cooling times and features as more expensive varieties. 

Specs

  • Sizes: 26, 36 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature times: 48 hours cold; 12 hours hot
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth

Pros

  • Ergonomic handle
  • Great price for how long it can keep drinks cold
  • Powder coating for durability

Cons

  • Reviewers note the bottle leaking despite closing it tightly

If you’re looking for quality on a budget, look no further than cooler-aficionado Igloo. Although the company doesn’t sell any accessory mouthpieces—you’re kinda stuck with the wide mouth bottle with twist cap—you might be able to get away with finding an accessory cap from another company (which we are obligated to say, do this at your own risk). This bottle features similar specs as our best overall, the Yeti Rambler, at a fraction of the price. The products even have almost identical dimensions and handle shapes. Which is to say we love this bottle for the same reasons we love the Rambler: a powder coat finish for durability, an ergonomic handle, and lasting cooling power.

What to consider when buying the best insulated water bottles

Size: Insulated water bottles bring plenty of bounce to the ounce; the water bottles on this list range from 18 ounces all the way up to 64 ounces. Shop for a size based on your water intake. If you’re a frequent hydrator or athlete, you might want to consider a bottle that is 32 ounces and up. For on-the-go use, I personally enjoy a water bottle in the 24- to 32-ounce range—it’s not too small that I need to refill it constantly, but not a complete lug to haul around. However, I have a 64-ounce water bottle for the sole purpose of getting in my daily water intake without having to refill. Those looking for super-extra hydration should consider a gallon water bottle. Tiny tykes who don’t need that much water should aim for a 12-ounce bottle.

Dishwasher friendliness: You should wash your stainless steel water bottle after every use, regardless of what was in the bottle. Not all stainless steel bottles are dishwasher safe, however. Warm, soapy water and a sponge does the trick for bottles that require handwashing. If you have a bottle with a narrower opening or one that has hard-to-reach crevices—which equals a stinky, smelly, stainless steel bottle—look for a bottle brush or bottle-cleaning tabs to take care of the job. All of the bottles on our list are dishwasher safe.

Sip preferences: Wide-mouth water bottles are great if you want a cup-like sipping experience or want to throw in some ice hassle-free. However, you might get some spillage on your shirt and face in public, which is humbling, to say the least. A narrow mouth prevents that but is harder to load up with ice. A flip-up straw lets you sip your water as you please, but can be harder to chug based on the model. Companies often sell separate cap accessories to customize a sipping experience to your liking. 

Weight & durability: Stainless steel vacuum-insulated water bottles tend to be light and durable, thanks to 18/8 stainless steel, which refers to its elemental composition: 18% chromium and 8% nickel. However, there is still a possibility for dings during use since some bottles have a thinner outer layer of stainless steel compared to others. This makes them lighter in weight but more prone to dents. And, like phone screens, you never know if your bottle will survive a short fall on concrete or a 3-foot tumble down a mountain. 

Additionally, the bottle’s paint coating affects its durability. Powder-coated bottles are less prone to scratches and peeling than liquid-coated bottles. The powder coating also gives the bottle more grip, which prevents it from slipping out of your hands. Handles, slings, and silicon sleeves can add personality and keep your bottle ding-and-dent-free. 

Thankfully, you can allegedly fix a dented bottle with some hot and cold water or a hairdryer and dry ice. This is all to say that a bottle with a thicker outer layer and a powder paint coating will typically experience fewer dents. 

FAQs

Q: Is drinking from stainless steel harmful?

No. Stainless steel (and titanium) water bottles are made from food-grade material resistant to corrosion and oxidation. Unlike aluminum bottles, they do not need a protective inner coating. And, unlike plastic bottles, they do not leach chemicals when exposed to warm beverages or heat. In fact, using a stainless steel water bottle is your safest bet when it comes to drinking receptacles.

Q: How do I clean my insulated water bottle?

If it’s dishwasher safe, just place it in the dishwasher on the left or right of the top rack, upside down. If it’s handwash-only, some warm, soapy water, a sponge, and some elbow grease are perfect. Bottlebrushes can help clean bottles with narrow openings or crevices. Bottle-cleaning tablets work in a pinch or on stubborn stains. 

Q: Can I bring an insulated water bottle on a plane?

Per TSA, insulated water bottles are allowed in carry-on bags as long as they’re empty before entering security. If you walk through security with an insulated water bottle that’s filled, you will risk confiscation or getting pulled aside. It’s best to make the TSA agent’s life easier by filling up your bottle after passing security. 

Q: How long do insulated water bottles last?

With proper use and care, you can get 10-12 years out of your insulated water bottle. Considering most high-quality insulated water bottles are in the $25-$60 range, that means you’re helping the environment while getting excellent cost-per-use. 

Q: How much should an insulated water bottle cost?

Most insulated water bottles cost around $30, although you’ll have to pay a little more if you want one in a larger size.

Final thoughts on the best insulated water bottles

Choosing the best insulated water bottle doesn’t have to dry out your spirit. You can find high-quality bottles to fit your liking and lifestyle across all price points. Handles, different mouthpieces, accessories, stickers, and fun colors can help you personalize your water bottle so it matches your personality. Hydration is essential, but who says it should be boring?

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best insulated water bottles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Best Amazon Prime Day deals on sheds and outdoor storage—Keter, Arrow, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/shed-outdoor-storage-amazon-prime-day-deals-october-2023/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 16:36:06 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=578306
A green shed on a white background
Amanda Reed

Protect your lawn equipment with a new shed or outdoor storage box, on sale as part of October Prime Day.

The post Best Amazon Prime Day deals on sheds and outdoor storage—Keter, Arrow, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A green shed on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

A garage is a perfectly acceptable place for storage, but sometimes your tools just need a little house of their own. If you’ve wanted to incorporate a shed or other form of outdoor storage into your backyard, consider now a great time to do so: Prime Big Deal Days gives you up to 30% of savings on Arrow Select, Handy Home, Keter Factory, and more.

Note: You’ll have to be an Amazon Prime member to take advantage of most of these deals, so be sure you’re signed up before making a purchase.

Handy Home Products Rookwood 10 X 8 Do-it-Yourself Wooden Storage Shed $1,318.70 (Was $1,899)

Handy Home

SEE IT

Harken back to the times of Sears catalog houses with this build-it-yourself shed from Handy Home. It has enough vertical storage for ladders, racks, shovels, and more, and its strong wood withstands wind and snow. Extra-large wide doors on galvanized steel hinges give you easy access, and it comes ready to paint out of the box. It comes with or without a floor for custom foundations, and you can even turn it into your own little office away from the house.

Here are more shed and outdoor storage deals happening this Prime Big Deal Days:

Accessorizing other activities? Take a look at our ongoing list of Big Deal Days discounts.

Want more deals delivered to your inbox weekly? Sign up for PopSci’s Deals newsletter and save money on stuff you’ll really use.

The post Best Amazon Prime Day deals on sheds and outdoor storage—Keter, Arrow, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Amazon Prime Day fitness: Save $500 on a Hydrow Rower and more Prime Day deals https://www.popsci.com/gear/fitness-amazon-prime-day-deals-october-2023/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 11:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577989
Increase your fitness with the help of these Amazon Prime Day deals,

Think of these discounts as an added investment in your health.

The post The best Amazon Prime Day fitness: Save $500 on a Hydrow Rower and more Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Increase your fitness with the help of these Amazon Prime Day deals,

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Sure, you can get lots of amazing deals on laptops, vacuums, TVs, speakers, and other electronics on Amazon Prime Day. And, believe me, we enjoy sitting in front of a nice flatscreen and soundbar combo as much as the next gadget geek. But it’s also a great opportunity to save on fitness equipment. Whether you like to row virtually led by Olympic-caliber athletes or just pedal under your desk during the workday, we’ve rounded up lots of discounts on fitness equipment to help keep you healthy without emptying your wallet.

Note: You’ll have to be an Amazon Prime member to take advantage of most of these deals, so be sure you’re signed up before making a purchase.

Hydrow Connected Rowing Machine $1,995 (was $2,495)

If the promise of rowing virtually through some of the world’s most storiedwaterways appeals to you, consider the Hydrow Connected Rowing Machine. This premium rower features a 22-inch touchscreen and speakers that help bring the experience to you. With the required $44 monthly subscription, you’ll also gain access to more than 3,000 classes, from rowing technique for beginners led by world-class rowers to yoga and HIIT workouts to round out your fitness. You can also sign up for live sessions and through the Hydrow app, and track your progress compared to other Hydrow rowers. And this rowing machine is $500 off this Prime Day. If you’re looking for a comparable model for less, consider the Hydrow Rower, which is more compact and is also on sale for $1,495 (down from $1,895).

Prime Day deals on home gym equipment

Prime Day deals on Garmin health-monitoring multisport GPS smartwatches

Prime Day deals on bikes

Prime Day deals on kayaks and hiking equipment

Prime Day deals on earbuds, water bottles, and other fitness accessories

Accessorizing other activities? Take a look at our ongoing list of Big Deal Days discounts.

Want more deals delivered to your inbox weekly? Sign up for PopSci’s Deals newsletter and save money on stuff you’ll really use.

The post The best Amazon Prime Day fitness: Save $500 on a Hydrow Rower and more Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best October Prime Day deals on solar generators from Jackery, Bluetti, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/solar-generators-amazon-prime-day-deals-october-2023/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 11:05:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577903
October Prime Day solar generator deals tiled
Stan Horaczek

Keep the juice flowing even during a power outage with these portable solar generators.

The post The best October Prime Day deals on solar generators from Jackery, Bluetti, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
October Prime Day solar generator deals tiled
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

You likely won’t know just how much you’ll appreciate a solar generator until you really need one. These robust portable backups offer huge batteries that can power full-sized appliances in a pinch. That’s crucial during a blackout or a camping trip. Unlike the gas-powered competition, they run silently and are often highly portable. Plus, they can draw power directly from the sun with optional solar panel attachments. These power stations require some investment, which makes them a perfect purchase during Amazon’s October Prime Day sale. Save more than $1,000 on some models. You’ll be so glad you did next time everything goes dark.

Note: You’ll have to be an Amazon Prime member to take advantage of most of these deals, so be sure you’re signed up before making a purchase.

Jackery solar generator deals

Anker solar generator deals

Bluetti solar generator deals

Accessorizing other activities? Take a look at our ongoing list of Big Deal Days discounts.

Want more deals delivered to your inbox weekly? Sign up for PopSci’s Deals newsletter and save money on stuff you’ll really use.

The post The best October Prime Day deals on solar generators from Jackery, Bluetti, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Make fall cleanup a breeze with 20% off Greenworks tools at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/greenworks-fall-cleanup-amazon-deal/ Wed, 04 Oct 2023 17:20:31 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577101
A Greenworks leafblower on a purple and pink gradient background
Amanda Reed

Don't let your leaves turn into a soppy, buggy mess with these Greenworks tools at Amazon.

The post Make fall cleanup a breeze with 20% off Greenworks tools at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Greenworks leafblower on a purple and pink gradient background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Fall leaves are fun to jump into, but it’s an entirely different story when it rains and you’re left with a pile of soggy detritus that doubles as a five-star hotel for bugs. Stop the development of the bug hotel with up to 20 percent off Greenworks tools at Amazon.

Greenworks 7 Amp 160 MPH/150 CFM Single Speed Electric Blower $29.50 ($49.99)

Greenworks

SEE IT

This lightweight leafblower produces a formidable 160 MPH wind speed to easily remove debris and dust from your yard and garage. There’s virtually no vibration for better handling and less fatigue compared to gas-powered leaf blowers. A cord lock prevents accidental unplugging, and a three-year warranty covers any factory-based problems.

Don’t let this deal blow away from you—take advantage of it before it disappears.

Here are more tool deals that will help make your yard the envy of the neighborhood:

The post Make fall cleanup a breeze with 20% off Greenworks tools at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-bug-zapper/ Wed, 14 Jul 2021 07:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=374553
The best outdoor bug zappers will help keep inspects at bay.

Fight the bite and keep away the insects that would like to bug you with these outdoor bug zappers.

The post The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor bug zappers will help keep inspects at bay.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Black+Decker Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper overall. BLACK+DECKER Bug Zapper
SEE IT

The BLACK+DECKER is large, sturdy, and powerful.

Best budget The Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb is the best outdoor bug zapper at a budget-friendly price. Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb
SEE IT

Ninonly provides one of the best bug-zapping light bulbs that you can find.

Best handheld The Anne Diary Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper that's handheld. Anne Diary Electric Bug Zapper Racket
SEE IT

With the ability to swivel the killing racket head, you can effectively cover the target insect on any surface.

When you’re ready to head outside, the last thing you want to do is get bitten or swarmed by insects, so having an outdoor bug zapper is a good idea. They make your insect-fearing companions feel more at ease and can give your uncovered food and drink a standing chance against buzzing bugs. But there are many styles to choose from that, and it can be hard to pick out which bug zapper best suits your needs. To do our part, we compiled this list of the best outdoor bug zappers.

How we selected the best outdoor bug zappers

Bugs aren’t just pesky; they can sometimes be dangerous. When it comes to outdoor bug zappers, you want something that works, but you also want ingenuity. The location of the zapper, its shape, and its functional style all matter. And, despite being weapons of death against our exoskeleton-having foes, the best outdoor bug zappers don’t look like death themselves. As a result, the following list of the best outdoor bug zappers represents a variety of styles and forms of zappers that also happen to be attractive to the eye.

The best outdoor bug zappers: Reviews & Recommendations

Purchasing one of the following outdoor bug zappers should make your yard less insect-friendly. As most have lights, these insect repellents should also improve the visibility of your porch or patio a bit. However, we still recommend these solar deck lights for a brighter, more sustainable option for that purpose. Be sure to check over the whole list to find a style that suits your needs.

Best overall: BLACK+DECKER Bug Zapper

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a large size and tough exterior, this will get the job done easily.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 32 x 12 x 32 inches
  • Target species: Fly, moth, mosquito, gnat, wasp

Pros

  • Can choose between hanging or putting on table
  • Cleaning-free option
  • Tough, waterproof exterior

Cons

  • Dead bugs sometimes stick to zapping element

For a quick-killing machine with a hard, weather-resistant exterior, the BLACK+DECKER is a great choice. It can hang on your patio or sit on a table. This choice is important, too, because it’ll change how you choose to use the zapper. While on a table, you’ll want the collection tray placed in. However, if you hang the BLACK+DECKER over grass, you can leave the bottom collection tray off so bugs will fall to the ground directly, reducing cleaning. However, this is a powerful zapper, so sometimes a bug will burn directly on the element, meaning you’ll have to do a little cleaning (with the supplied brush) periodically.

Best cordless: BURLAN Solar Bug Zapper

Burlan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You’ll never need a cord if you let the sun do most of the work.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 9.4 x 5.1 x 5.1 inches
  • Target species: Fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Charges via solar power or USB plug-in
  • Bright lamp on top adds to the ambiance
  • Quiet, 25dB zaps
  • IP66 water and dustproof

Cons

  • Needs consistent sun exposure

If plugging something in and dealing with cords bothers you, turn to the power of the sun. This is the best outdoor bug zapper with a solar charging panel that we could find. On a full charge—which can be achieved in 12 hours of direct sunlight—the top lantern, lighting, and mosquito killer can work for between 4 and 12 hours, depending on mode of operation.

Best for mosquitoes: Elechome Bug Zapper

Elechome

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This machine puts out a ton of special mosquito-attracting light.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 5.35 x 5.35 x 11.6 inches
  • Target species: Mosquito, gnat, fly, moth, wasp, spider

Pros

  • Scientifically designed for mosquito attraction
  • Large killing area
  • IP66 dust and water resistant

Cons

  • Must USB-C charge

According to Pfizer, mosquitos kill more than 700,000 people each year. While we’re waiting for advanced mosquito control to deactivate their reproductive process, there are other things to try. While some are washing up with a soap mosquito repellent, others are turning to special wavelengths that attract mosquitos, which the Elechome Bug Zapper puts out in extreme degree. It’s also got a larger killing area than most lantern types, with its top exposed, allowing for more bug killing.

Best for patio: Endbug Bug Zapper

Endbug

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The bottom-facing light on this zapper is a plus for any patio.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 5.7 x 5.7 x 10.6 inches
  • Target species: Mosquito, gnat, fly, moth, wasp, etc.

Pros

  • Includes a bright light on the bottom to light your patio
  • Is IPX6 waterproof to ward off rain issues
  • Excellent bug attraction ability

Cons

  • Loud

The Endbug Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper for your porch or patio, as it provides excellent lighting for you and powerful killing for bugs. It’s a powerful 4,200V, so it kills quite effectively but is rather loud. Our advice is to hang it up high near the middle of your porch or patio area so you can get the maximum benefit from the provided light. However, if you do choose to put it closer to the edges, it’ll still be safe in the rain as it has IPX6 water resistance.

Best handheld: Anne Diary Electric Bug Zapper Racket

Anne Diary

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The racket head swivels, letting you cover the scariest bugs safely.

Specs

  • Form: Racket
  • Size: 17.5 x 9.7 x 1.5 inches
  • Target species: Wasp, bee, fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Long handle keeps you away from dangerous pests
  • Auto zap mode while in stand
  • Swivel head provides maximum safety
  • Simple USB-C charging

Cons

  • Auto zap mode depletes battery in 5 hours

If you have really scary insects like bees, wasps, or hornets, you’ll want to be more proactive in your killing. Waiting for the bug to mosey into a light just won’t cut it. That’s why you should try out the best bug-zapping racket, this one from Anne Diary. You can swivel the zapping head to be parallel with the surface the offending insect has lit on, then cover it. This method keeps you safe and gives the insect no escape. When not in active use, you can turn on a passive zapping mode as well, but we only recommend this if the Anne Diary is plugged in, as the power drains after about five hours.

Best indoor/outdoor: PRODCA Bug Zapper

Prodca

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The small size of this bug zapper makes it great to tuck into a kitchen or bedroom corner, too.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 3.8 x 3.8 x 5.5
  • Target species: Mosquito, fly, gnat, bee, moth, etc.

Pros

  • Small size fits anywhere
  • Can be made to be discreet
  • Lamp light for better outdoor vision
  • IP66 water- and dust-resistant

Cons

  • Not great for all indoor pests (such as fruit flies)

Though a lot of the best outdoor bug zappers could technically be used indoors, you wouldn’t necessarily want them to be there. They’re big, can’t be placed just anywhere, and scream to others that you have an insect problem. As a result, we like the more discreet nature and size of the PRODCA, which can do great work on the porch, but also be tucked away in a kitchen corner when you want it to be.

Best budget: Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb

Ninonly

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the best bug-zapping light bulb you can get.

Specs

  • Form: Light bulb
  • Size: 3.14 x 3.14 x 6.3 inches
  • Target species: Fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Small, convenient form
  • Sloping trap stays clean
  • Multiple modes
  • Long lifespan

Cons

  • Must be put into a lamp

Most of the best outdoor bug zappers cost between $35 and $60 apiece, depending on current deals available. That can be frustrating if you want many of them or aren’t ready to spend a lot on bug zapping. Light bulb-style bug zappers, then, are a great option, though they tend to have worse functionality. The Ninonly has high-quality zapping, multiple lighting modes, and a sloping inside that helps bugs fall out after death. As a result, it is one of the best cheap outdoor bug zappers… if you have a lamp available.

What to consider before buying outdoor bug zappers

Outdoor bug zappers might seem relatively straightforward, and they are, but there are still some things to consider before buying one. The most important thing to consider is the form of the zapper.

  • Lantern styles are the most popular as they can be hung or placed on tables, add light and ambiance to the area, and are good passive killers that work well on porches and while camping.
  • Handheld “electric fly swatters” are another style, great for targeted killing, but suffer in that they typically are made for consistent pest removal.
  • Finally, light-bulb bug zappers are cheaper and simple to install, but these mini zappers typically don’t have as much killing power as the other styles.

You should also consider how easy the zapper will be to clean. The best outdoor bug zappers typically have at least one mode or feature that allows bugs to fall out of the zapping area, reducing cleaning. Powerful bug zappers may also burn insects directly to the zapping element, requiring you to clean it directly. It is highly recommended to review real customer experiences with cleaning if this is a concern for you.

FAQs

Q: How much does an outdoor bug zapper cost?

An outdoor bug zapper will cost anywhere from $20 to $65. You should expect to pay about $35 on average for the best outdoor bug zappers if you are willing to wait for a sale and about $55 otherwise.

Q: Can I leave a bug zapper on all night?

You can leave a bug zapper on all night in most cases. Typically, they are made to be used for the whole night. Please read the instructions of your bug zapper to double-check your specific case, however. You may also wish to bring your bug zapper inside at night when it is storming if yours does not have high-quality weather resistance.

Q: How long does a bug zapper last on average?

A bug zapper should last five or more years on average. Obviously, the quality of the build, the environmental conditions of where it is placed, and usage frequency will affect the overall lifetime of the product. Most bug zappers also have replaceable bulbs, which will extend the lifetime of the product.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor bug zappers

The best outdoor bug zappers all have one thing in common; they will remove pests from your environment eventually. Whether you go for a powerful light source that attracts insects quickly or a handheld racket that lets you seek them out, you should feel more secure in your outdoor environment with one of the above products.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best water filters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-water-filters/ Fri, 29 Sep 2023 09:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=575759
four of the best water filters sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We filtered through the best options for clean drinking water on the go and at home.

The post The best water filters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the best water filters sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher against a white background Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher
SEE IT

This tried and tested pitcher offers long lasting filters and a BPA-free design.

Best faucet A green PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System
SEE IT

The PUR faucet filter will give you clean water on-demand.

Best water bottle LifeStraw Go 1L filtered water bottle LifeStraw Go Series
SEE IT

The two-stage filter in the LifeStraw Go water bottle will provide safe drinking water no matter where you are.

Water filters may seem like devices that mostly come up when people talk about travels to the backcountry or other countries, but they can be important tools everywhere. Tap water goes through a fantastic journey from rivers and reservoirs through pipes of many sizes to flow through your faucet. Drinking water in the U.S. from public water systems is among the safest in the world, but many households opt for additional filtration. Filtering often focuses on removing funky tastes, smells, and sediment, though many filtration systems also reduce other potentially harmful chemicals. We dove into specifications and certifications of small portable systems up to countertop water dispensers to surface the best water filters for a glass of fresh-tasting H2O.

How we chose the best water filters

Water filters come in as many sizes and shapes as you can imagine. However, we winnowed our list of portable and affordable options for households looking to improve their water taste. We kept our renting readers in mind, so homeowners may want to explore permanently installed options like under-sink water filters or whole-house water filters. We’re not a lab, so we opted for products that meet or are certified to standards set by NSF International/American National Standards Institute and the Water Quality Association.

The best water filters: Reviews & Recommendations

The type of water filter that’s best for you depends on how much you want to treat at a time, how long that takes, what you’re treating it for, and how often you’re replacing filters. Are you looking to remove basics like chlorine and sediment? Is a lead a concern? Different filters target a range of contaminants, such as chlorine, particulates, lead, heavy metals, microbes, bacteria, viruses, or PFAS, more commonly known as “forever chemicals.” Some even filter out microplastics, which is a growing concern for many. 

Best overall: Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher

Brita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.7  x 5.4 x 10.1 inches 
  • Weight: 1.3 pounds
  • Capacity: 10 cups
  • Filter: Brita Elite filters (proprietary active filtering agents)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 120 gallons or about 6 months

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Flip top for easy refilling
  • Long-lasting filter
  • Electronic filter indicator
  • BPA-free container
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • Slow filtering
  • Frequent refills for thirsty/large households

Our pick for the best overall water filter is an update on a classic. The Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher is the best for most people because of its low cost (about $35), ease of use, and improved filter. Most of us have likely used a Brita pitcher at one point. This model makes some notable design improvements. Instead of removing the whole lid to refill, simply pop open the flip-top. 

The spout features a color-coded system to indicate when to replace a filter. Green is good, yellow indicates replacement is coming up, and red shows it’s time to change. The rest of the form is familiar: The tap water goes into an upper tank, and clean water slowly filters into the bottom reservoir. This model boasts a 10-cup capacity, but households that fill many water bottles daily may find themselves refilling—and waiting—a lot.

The essential improvement in this model is the Brita Elite filter, which catches more contaminants than the standard model and lasts three times longer. You only need to replace the filter once every six months instead of every two, minimizing cost and trash. The filter still results in the crisp, chlorine-free taste Britas are known for and is certified to reduce lead (99 percent), Cadmium, Mercury, Benzene, Asbestos, and more. Many reviewers note that the Elite does have clogging issues, so you may find yourself changing more frequently than the six-month replacement window. Still, the extra protection over Brita’s standard filters seems worth the extra few bucks.

All pitchers have downsides. They don’t purify water, so always start with potable water—and make sure it’s cold or room-temperature, never hot. They’ll need thorough hand washing regularly to keep clean, but most are made of a brittle plastic that chips, clouds, or cracks with age. But they are abundant, readily available, and affordable. Remember to factor in buying and replacing filters as part of the overall expense.

Best pitcher: Brita Large Stream Filter as You Pour

Brita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.75 x 5.6 x 10 inches 
  • Weight: 1.4 pounds
  • Capacity: 10 cups
  • Filter: Brita Stream filters (activated carbon in a BPA-free housing)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 40 gallons or about two months

Pros

  • Low upfront costs
  • Filters as you pour
  • Flip top for easy refilling
  • Electronic filter indicator
  • BPA-free container
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42 and 53

Cons

  • Taste/odor-focused filtering
  • Frequent filter replacement

Usually, a water filter pitcher has an inner reservoir that you fill, and it slowly drips clean water into the bottom half. You have to wait until gravity does its job before taking a sip. The Brita Large Stream Filter as You Pour bucks that trend. The 10-cup pitcher forces water through an activated carbon filter before pouring out of the spout. Admittedly, waiting a few minutes for filtered water to drip from the reservoir to the rest of the pitcher isn’t the most significant inconvenience—but it is annoying if you’re the person who always seems to grab the pitcher when there’s only half a glass left. (And obviously, we’re often that person.)

This Brita water filter pitcher removes chlorine taste and smell but retains fluoride, minerals, and electrolytes. The filter clicks into a cage that then twists into place on the lid. The lid also houses an electronic indicator to remind you to change filters, which is about every 40 gallons or every two months. Brita Stream replacement filters run about $9 to $10 each, a few bucks more per filter than Brita Standard filters but on par with the longer-lasting Brita Elite filter.

Best faucet: PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System

PUR

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.8 x 2.9 x 5.2 inches 
  • Weight: 1.3 pounds
  • Capacity: N/A
  • Filters: PUR PLUS faucet filters (activated charcoal)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 100 gallons or 3 months

Pros

  • Small form factor
  • Installs and removes without tools
  • Filter change light
  • Can switch between filtered/unfiltered water
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • May not fit all faucets, especially pull-out or handheld faucets
  • Frequent filter replacement
  • Doesn’t filter microbes

Installing a PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System is a low-cost, low-effort filtration system that quickly filters drinking and cooking water. No tools are required: Remove the faucet’s original aerator and washer and replace them with the PUR PLUS Faucet Mount system with the PUR PLUS filter inside. For around $30 to $40, the filtration system helps reduce chlorine taste, odors, and 70 other contaminants, including lead, mercury, and some pesticides. However, the filter does not remove microbes. 

The PUR PLUS filter includes activated carbon from coconut shells and a mineral core to replace some natural minerals—like calcium and magnesium—for a fresh taste. The benefit of a faucet filter is that you can pour directly into a pot or a giant gallon water bottle without repeatedly refilling a filtering pitcher or dispenser. And it filters instantly, so you don’t need to wait around. The PUR PLUS Faucet Mount filters last longer than most pitchers, stretching to 100 gallons or every three months. The faucet system comes in several colors, and the horizontal filter positioning looks sleek.

Best water bottle: LifeStraw Go Series

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: ‎‎3.54 x 3.54 x 10.79 inches
  • Weight: 9.9 ounces
  • Capacity: 1 liter
  • Filter: 2-stage filter system (membrane microfilter and activated carbon)
  • Filter lifespan: Membrane microfilter: 1,000 gallons (roughly 5 years), carbon filter: 26 gallons (roughly 2 months)

Pros:

  • Easy to carry
  • Available in many colors and 22-ounce capacity
  • Cap covers mouthpiece
  • Meets NSF/ANSI Standards 42 and P231

Cons:

  • Large size doesn’t fit in cupholders or some backpack pockets
  • Two filters will have different replacement schedules

Here at PopSci, we are very much into on-the-go hydration. And carrying a water bottle with a built-in filter can bring peace of mind whether refilling for everyday adventures or traveling to exotic locales. We’ve loved the LifeStraw Go Series for a number of reasons, but largely because of how effective the two-stage filter system is. 

The activated charcoal filter helps keep water tasting fresh and smelling, well, not smelling. The membrane microfilter catches little nasties like bacteria, parasites, sand, dirt, and microplastics—all things that could seriously ruin a vacation. It’s important to note that the charcoal filter lasts about two months (26 gallons), while the membrane lasts for five years (or more than 1,000 gallons). There’s no clear way to track both, so you’ll just have to remember.

The plastic version of this water bottle is BPA-free, made of 50 percent recycled plastic, and comes in 1-liter or 22-ounce sizes. The lightweight materials are ideal for hiking or travel. However, if you want to minimize your plastic use or want insulation, the Go Series also comes in a stainless steel version in 24-ounce or 1-liter capacities. The double-walled bottle keeps water cool—a huge part of hitting your daily water goals—but it’s not for hot beverages. All versions include a cover that keeps the mouthpiece clean, which we definitely appreciate when traveling. 

Best backpacking: Sawyer Products SP129 Squeeze Water Filtration System

Sawyer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 5.5 x 1.9 x 1.9 inches 
  • Weight: 2.5 ounces
  • Capacity: N/A, but filters up to 32 ounces at a time
  • Filter: Hollow fiber filter
  • Filter lifespan: Indefinite

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Includes attachments for different uses
  • Lifetime warranty
  • Filters down to 0.1-micron absolute filtration
  • Reduces bacteria, protozoa, and microplastics
  • Can be cleaned and used nearly indefinitely

Cons:

  • Not for chemical contaminants or viruses
  • Reviewers warn not to let pouches freeze
  • Squeezing and rolling can wear out the pouches
  • Occasional backwashing is needed to restore flow rate

PopSci previously identified the Sawyer Products SP129 Squeeze Water Filtration System as a reliable, portable water filter system for backpackers, hikers, and other adventurers. The tiny size makes it easy to throw in your pack without adding excessive weight, which is a must when backpacking. 

It’s also very simple to use. To clean water, fill a pouch, attach it to the palm-sized filter, and squeeze the water into your mouth. But that’s just one way the kit works. It also includes a straw and a hydration pack adapter to filter inline. Plus, the filter can attach to most standard water bottles, so you don’t need to fuss with the pouches on trips. Reviewers often suggest avoiding the “squeeze” and letting gravity pull dirty water through the filter to prevent wear and tear. 

The system removes most bacteria, protozoa, cysts, and microplastics. In fact, the Sawyer squeeze filter is the only filter on the market that can claim 0.1 absolute microns (every fiber is 0.1 microns in size). For perspective, no harmful bacteria are smaller than that; therefore, none can slip through the filter. As long as you keep the filter clean, this device should last forever. In fact, there are no filters to replace. However, Sawyer recommends periodically backwashing if the flow rate slows, which should restore 98 percent of the flow rate. 

And remember, there are right and wrong ways to handle camping water filter storage.

Best countertop: Brita Hub

Brita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12 x 9.5 x 15 inches 
  • Weight: 8 pounds
  • Capacity: 96 ounces
  • Filter: Brita Hub filter (carbon block)
  • Filter lifespan: 120 gallons or 6 months

Pros

  • Water reservoir position can change
  • No tools for installation
  • Frees up fridge space
  • Pours 12 or 20 ounces at a time, with one free-flow option
  • Filter lasts up to 6 months
  • Certified for NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • Dispenses room-temperature water only
  • Requires counter space
  • Higher upfront costs

For fast-filtered water and less frequent filter changes, check out the Brita Hub. No installation or plumbing is required for this countertop filter system. Simply plug in the sleek, white Hub, fill the 12-cup water reservoir, and instantly get filtered water free of chlorine tastes or odor. The tradeoff for a filter on the counter is that it will only serve up room-temperature water. But it’s a solid option for people who don’t have the fridge space for clunky pitchers or large dispensers.

The carbon block filters (about $30 each) last up to six months, and an indicator light will give a heads-up when it’s time for a change. The Brita Hub is certified to reduce 70 contaminants, such as lead, some forever chemicals, and select pesticides. The main downside is that a unit will run about $180 (at the time of writing), which is more upfront cost than other options on this list. But if you want a large-capacity option for your counter, the Hub is a great choice. 

Best budget: PUR PLUS 30-Cup Dispenser

PUR

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 11.2 x 6 x 16.1 inches 
  • Weight: 4.2 pounds
  • Capacity: 30 cups
  • Filter: PUR PLUS faucet filters (activated charcoal)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 40 gallons or 2 months

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Filter change indicator
  • Slim design
  • Large capacity
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • Heavy when full
  • Frequent filter replacement

One of the better bargains for water filters is getting a high-capacity dispenser in your fridge. You can snag a PUR PLUS 30-Cup Water Filter Dispenser for the same price as some water filter pitchers. The slim, deep design doesn’t take as much space in a fridge as it feels like it should, though it can be heavy and awkward to put on a shelf when it’s full. 

A spigot allows easy access, even if the system is still filtering. The dispenser uses the same activated carbon filters as the PUR PLUS faucet mount system, reducing 70 contaminants, such as lead and microplastics. It’s good for chronically parched or large households, though the filter must be swapped out every two months. Like most water-filtering pitchers, this dispenser isn’t a purifier. It refines already drinkable water and doesn’t remove microbes.

What to consider when buying the best water filters

Choosing water filters depends on where and how much water you plan to drink or use for cooking. That said, you could surround yourself with many options, like a pitcher for home use and a water bottle for running around during the day. While all these options will result in crisp, clean-tasting water, consider if you want your filter to offer additional protection.

Cost

We stuck to products with relatively low-cost products, but the ongoing cost of each replacement must be factored into the long-term cost of ownership. There’s no hacking a filter: They must be replaced regularly to remain effective. Most use proprietary filters, so you’ll need to stick with the specific filter made for your product. 

Water consumption vs. filter capacity

Compare how much water you drink with how long the filter is supposed to last. Many options above require changes as frequently as two months or 40 gallons. If you’re attempting to drink a gallon per day, that shortens the filter’s lifespan to just over one month. Finding a water filter system that handles a higher volume of water with a longer-lasting filter may be time-saving and cheaper.

Filter type

Most of the filters in this round-up rely on activated carbon, which can absorb chlorine and reduce asbestos, lead, mercury, and volatile organic compounds. Other products use other filtration processes like reverse osmosis, ion exchange, and distillation, which you should consider if installing an under-the-sink or whole-home filter or if you have serious concerns about water quality.

Filtration efficiency

Filter effectiveness varies, so we looked at NSF/ANSI standards. We prefer certified products, which means that NSF International or the Water Quality Association tested and verified the company’s claims. Certification is time-consuming and costly for a company, so we also indicated where outside labs found products that “meet the standards” but aren’t certified.

Here’s what some of the standards mean, but review the manufacturer’s performance data to see the specific contaminants a filter is effective against:

  • NSF/ANSI Standard 42: This is a common standard, which indicates a filter can remove chlorine taste and odor or chloramines.
  • NSF/ANSI Standard 53: Another common standard that indicates the reduction of some heavy metals like lead, arsenic, and mercury, as well as some pesticides and herbicides.
  • NSF/ANSI Standard 401: This indicates the filter removes or reduces up to 15 kinds of “emerging impurities,” such as bisphenol A (BPA), ibuprofen, DEET, microplastics, and some pesticides and herbicides.
  • NSF/ANSI Standard P231: This is where purification comes in. This standard means microbiological contaminants like bacteria, viruses, and cysts are reduced or removed. 

FAQs

Q: Do I need a water filter?

Whether you need a water filter should be a straightforward yes or no answer, but it’s not. The U.S. drinking water supply is considered safe, and the Environmental Protection Agency regulates public water systems (this excludes wells). You can check annual water quality reports on EPA’s website, but systems can also experience contamination after leaving a treatment plant or have an acute issue due to recent natural disasters or climate change. Plus, some pollutants aren’t regulated yet, like forever chemicals, which the EPA issued proposed rules for in March. Not sure what may be in your water? You can also look up your zip code on The Environmental Working Group’s database of what’s been measured in tap water or get an at-home water quality test.

Q: What contaminants do water filters remove?

What contaminants water filters remove depends on the individual water filter. Most of the filters in this guide are activated carbon, which can absorb chlorine and reduce asbestos, lead, mercury, and volatile organic compounds. You’ll need to review performance data to see what specific pollutants a filter reduces or removes.

Q: How often should I replace my water filter?

How often you should replace your water filter depends on the filter. Always check the manufacturer’s recommendations, but other factors may reduce the filter’s life. For example, a particularly active or large household may filter 40 gallons of water through a pitcher well before two months. 

Final thoughts on the best water filters

Anyone looking for the best water filters has plenty of affordable options to cover a variety of needs, whether lugging around a reliable system in the woods or covering a household’s drinking and cooking needs. It’s hard to go wrong with the filters we recommend from well-known, longtime brands like PUR and Brita. Both brands’ filters are readily available and carry multiple certifications. And don’t rule out getting multiple items—you never know when you’ll be thirsty next.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best water filters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best winter jackets for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-winter-jacket/ Thu, 29 Apr 2021 16:52:48 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=361987
The best winter jackets will keep you warm and stylish.

A solid winter jacket will help you get the most out of your favorite cold-weather activities.

The post The best winter jackets for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best winter jackets will keep you warm and stylish.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best men's overall The North Face McMurdo Parka The North Face McMurdo Parka
SEE IT

Brave the elements during quick trips to the supermarket or longer excursions outdoors.

Best stylish for women Rossclair Parka Heritage Canada Goose Women's Rossclair Parka
SEE IT

This women’s winter jacket combats harsh winds and offers many comforts.

Best budget A man wearing a long thick winter jacket in a light grey color and posing with it. Columbia Horizons Pine Interchange Jacket
SEE IT

An interchangeable jacket that won’t break the bank.

It’s always winter in some hemisphere, so it’s a good idea to supply yourself with a fantastic jacket to keep you warm wherever and whenever you might need it. An absolute essential for anyone who lives in or travels to a colder climate, the best winter jacket will mesh well with your personal style while providing top-notch protection from wind, rain, sleet, and snow. Whether you are looking for a lightweight running jacket, a simple, stylish parka jacket for errands, or a down-filled design perfect for vacations exploring the backcountry, you want to find the best blend of form and function. Plenty of options are available, so we’ve curated this selection to help you find the best winter coats to add to your wardrobe.

How we chose the best winter jackets

When choosing the best winter jacket for you, the most important thing to consider is climate, followed closely by activity. You’ll likely have to choose between a casual or performance coat. Casual winter clothing is designed for errands, walks about town, or keeping warm during your commute to work. These coats might be a bit heavier, but they are super warm and crafted with style and silhouette in mind. A performance jacket is designed for athletic activities like hiking, running, or cycling. They are lightweight and will provide increased mobility while protecting for long periods in the cold. For example, if you live in a super snowy place and need a jacket suitable for a long hike, you’ll need a well-insulated waterproof model with a lightweight fill to keep you warm without dragging you down. If you live in a city with cold winds, a versatile jacket with a sleek shell and fur-lined hood is a stylish way to stay warm and keep the wind out of your eyes. 

The fill material and its effect on price is the next thing to consider. Winter jackets can be quite expensive, for a reason. They are your first line of defense for brutally cold days, offering excellent insulation and heat retention. Pricing can depend on many things, but one of the most common structures correlates to the fill material and power. A jacket’s fill is the material stuffed between the outer and inner layers, directly responsible for trapping heat and keeping out the cold. The most popular fill is down, which is the light undercoating that lies beneath the feathers of ducks and geese. Synthetic down is also available, typically made from ultrafine polyester fibers that perform well even when wet. Each jacket is given a fill-power number to reflect the loftiness of the down. The higher the fill power, the better the down will be at trapping air, generating an effective warmth-to-weight ratio, and quickly compressing when it’s time for summer storage. 

The best winter jackets: Reviews & Recommendations

Now that you’re prepped with the logistics, let’s dive deeper into our favorite picks and a few more tips for selecting the best winter jackets. We’ve also covered other winter gear—like the best heated gloves, socks, and insoles—so we know something about staying cozy in frigid situations.

Best men’s overall: The North Face McMurdo Parka

The North Face

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A loose fit and 600-fill goose down makes for a warm and stylish jacket.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Insulation: 600-fill recycled down
  • Weather-proofing: Waterproof,
  • Machine washable: No, dry clean only

Pros

  • Waterproof
  • Down fill for light warmth
  • Light

Cons

  • Dry clean only

The North Face McMurdo winter jacket will help you brave the elements during quick trips to the supermarket or longer excursions outdoors. It has a two-layer DryVent waterproof shell, 600-fill-power recycled down, and weighs a little over 3 pounds. The hood has an emergency gaiter to prevent any snow from sneaking in, plus the faux-fur trim is removable, so you can even customize your coat a bit. While North Face doesn’t have a women’s winter jacket that’s the exact same model, The North Face Arctic Parka II, shares many of the features of the men’s winter jacket, including fill power and DryVent technology.

Best women’s overall: The North Face Metropolis Parka III

The North Face

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A fitted silhouette and 550-fill goose down make for a warm and stylish jacket.

Specs

  • Material: 100% recycled polyester plain weave with non-PFC durable water-repellent finish
  • Insulation: 550-fill goose-down
  • Weather-proofing: Water-repellent
  • Machine washable: No

Pros

  • Long design keeps you warmer
  • Removable hood
  • Collar lining is soft brushed-tricot
  • Very warm

Cons

  • Hood detaches too easily

A long jacket is the way to go if you want ultimate warmth. The North Face Women’s Metropolis offers an ideal length that keeps your tush and waist warm even as you move around. It helps keep the drafty, biting wind at bay as well. But it isn’t so long that it’s difficult to walk or move around in, which is ideal for your winter commutes or playing outside with your kids. 

This winter jacket uses 550-fill goose down for ultimate warmth. The down is certified to the Responsible Down Standard (RDS), which we like to see. The exterior is made with a water-repellent finish and 100 percent recycled materials. It will keep you dry and comfortable even during a strong snowstorm. The North Face lined the collar with a soft brushed-tricot material, which keeps your neck, chin, and cheeks from getting stretched or rubbed even when you have it zipped all the way up. 

There’s not much to dislike about this puffy. The main complaint is that the hood comes off too easily, which makes it liable to get lost. But if you want an all-around excellent winter jacket for those extra cold days, you can’t go wrong with this one. 

Best lightweight: Ibex Women’s Wool Aire Hoodie

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This super-lightweight jacket is insulated with merino wool that adjusts to your body temperature to keep you warm.

Specs

  • Material: Nylon, polyester
  • Insulation: Merino wool
  • Weather-proofing: Waterproof and wind-resistant
  • Machine-washable: Yes

Pros

  • Ultra lightweight
  • Insulation adjusts to body temperature
  • Comes in its own bag
  • Easy to pack

Cons

  • Not designed for super-cold conditions
  • Doesn’t cover lower body

Layering is one of the secrets of keeping warm in the winter, and the Ibex Women’s Wool Aire Hoodie is designed for just that. This extremely lightweight nylon jacket weighs just 10 ounces but is insulated with merino wool that adjusts to your body temperature to keep the heat in. The materials also make the jacket breathable and help wick moisture away. 

Designed with a hood you can pull tight around your face, this jacket is also water- and wind-resistant. Zipped pockets on the side and the interior help you keep your hands warm and your keys and phone safe from the elements. This jacket is comfortable to wear throughout the year, but keep in mind that it runs small, so you may want to go a size up if you plan to wear it over layers. 

The Aire hoodie comes in a cute bag that makes it easy to pack, and it’s available in seven colors: Aqua Blue, Black, Bloodstone, Midnight Navy, Deep Ocean Orange, Dark Green, and Evergreen.

Best for warmth: Nobis Supra Men’s Performance Puffer 

Nobis

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This jacket withstands temperatures as low as -20 degrees Fahrenheit, ensuring you’ll feel cozy in even the iciest of conditions.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Insulation: Duck down insulation
  • Weather-proofing: Windproof, waterproof
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Underarm vent system
  • Performs in incredibly low temperature
  • Machine washable

Cons

  • Hood is non-removable

The Supra Men’s Performance Puffer makes a great winter statement. Filled with premium Canadian Origin White Duck Down, down-filled hood and ribbed cuffs that seal in heat, this men’s winter jacket will keep you warm in temperatures as low as -30 degrees Fahrenheit. The waterproof material will keep you dry during a snowstorm, and its seam seal tape beefs up its ability to protect you from the elements. Plus, a 10,000mm windproof laminated membrane fends off gusts and gales.

You can protect your phone or keys in its flap pockets at the waist or the zipped pocket on the left bicep. And there’s no need to spend extra money to maintain the jacket—just toss it in the washing machine. The men’s winter jacket is available in a variety of colorways so that you can find your perfect match. 

Best outdoor performance: Arc’teryx Gamma Lightweight Hoody

Arc’teryx

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t need a thick, bulky jacket to stay snug while hiking or running outdoors.

Specs

  • Material: Fortius DW 1.0 87% nylon/13% elastane
  • Insulation: None (soft shell)
  • Weather-proofing: Wind-resistant, water-repellent, UPF 50+
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Very lightweight
  • Fabric is breathable and moves well
  • Durable materials
  • UPF 50+ protection

Cons

  • More water resistance would be ideal

If you’re moving around in the mountains, you won’t want a bulky winter jacket. Instead, layers are key. That’s where a shell like the Arc’teryx Gamma Lightweight Hoody comes in handy. This softshell jacket is breathable and lightweight for those warm, sunny winter days in the mountains. Then, when the temperature drops, the regular fit allows you to layer underneath for added warmth. 

The Gamma Lightweight Hoody is made of 43 percent recycled content. It stretches nicely, allowing you to move freely even when you have layers underneath. The Fortiu 1.0 softshell fabric is highly durable, making this a good choice for technical hikes on rugged terrain. It is wind resistant and provides UPF 50+ protection, an important feature for high alpine environments. The main downside is that this jacket is only water-repellent, not waterproof. You won’t want to get caught in extremely wet conditions with this one. But for treks that would benefit from layering, the Gamma Lightweight Hoody definitely fits the bill.

In general, if you’re off on an alpine adventure, Arc’Teyrx has protective, packable layers that have got your back (literally) from pavement to peak. For instance, the Alpha Lightweight Parka has RDS-certified 850-fill goose down warmth and a windproof, weather-resistant, breathable GORE-TEX INFINIUM with an abrasion-resistant Hadron face—perfect for base camp at upper elevations. You can layer underneath it and put a shell on top—like the Gamma if traveling light or the thermally insulated GORE-TEX Beta Insulated jacket or minimalist but rugged Alpha SV GORE-TEX PRO shell in colder climbing conditions—if the weather turns severe. While the brand’s jackets are an investment, they can be relied on no matter the environment.

Best stylish for women: Canada Goose Women’s Rossclair Parka

Rossclair

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a tailored fit and finish, this women’s winter jacket combats harsh winds and offers many comforts.

Specs

  • Material: Company’s Arctic Tech fabric, a blend of polyester and cotton
  • Insulation: 625-fill duck down
  • Weather-proofing: Water resistant
  • Machine washable: No, dry clean only

Pros

  • Fusion fit great for more petite bodies
  • Not boxy
  • Adjustable waist for A-line silhouette

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Dry clean only

Canada Goose is known for producing the best winter coats with Arctic Tech fabric, a blend of 83% Polyester and 17% Cotton with a water-repellent finish that will hold up in the freezing cold. The Rossclair parka is a Canada Goose jacket that delivers 650 fill power in a streamlined, slim fit that eliminates any boxiness, plus adjustable exterior waist straps mean you can get a sleek cinch. Available in nine colors, each with a two-way adjustable hood with removable fur ruff, plus recessed rib-knit cuffs, this women’s winter jacket combats harsh winds and offers many comforts.

Best budget: Columbia Horizons Pine Interchange Jacket

Columbia

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A quality winter jacket doesn’t have to cost an arm and a leg—and this one from Columbia is proof.

Specs

  • Material: Nylon and polyester
  • Insulation: Thermal insulation
  • Weather-proofing: Waterproof
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Removable hood
  • Interchangeable layers mean you can customize it depending on temperature
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Not windproof
  • Runs large

An interchangeable jacket that won’t break the bank, this model from Columbia utilizes a combination of heat-reflective and air-permeable waterproof technology to dissipate moisture while keeping the heat in and the cold out. As it gets warmer, you can settle on just the shell, or if it’s still quite cold, but the snow has stopped, you can comfortably get away with the inner layer alone. 

What to consider when buying the best winter jackets

Looking for an everyday, casual jacket that will keep you toasty at all times?

A truly great winter jacket is comfortable, and cozy, and can last for seasons to come. It should stand up to snow and sleet without weighing you down, protect and insulate without any Achilles heel, and have a stylish yet neutral design to pair with any outfit you own. If you’re not looking for a thin, lightweight outdoor activity jacket, you might find it comforting to buy a model with a little more weight and slightly lower fill power. You’ll know for sure that you won’t get cold, plus you’ll feel more protected. A fill power of 500 and above should be perfectly adequate for walks about town, taking the train to work, or heading out to dinner with friends on a below-freezing winter evening. 

If you live in a place that gets a fair amount of snow or winter rain, ensure your winter jacket is waterproof or has a waterproof shell. We recommend selecting a coat that will fall at or around the upper/mid-thigh for maximum coverage without any extra bulk. It also doesn’t hurt to wear a hood for additional shielding around the face. Once you’ve found an option with the right amount of fill for your locale’s weather, all you need to do is decide on the color and—bam—you’ll have the best winter coat around town.

Do you want something that will be on-trend without sacrificing warmth?

Winter coats are known to be boxy, bulky, or simply uncool. But that doesn’t have to be the case. While you can undoubtedly find a sleek, streamlined wool coat, hip bomber jacket, or trendy oversized teddy designs, you may find yourself shaking if things get too frigid. If you live in a freezing climate, we recommend having at least one really well-insulated coat to keep on hand when your other options just won’t cut it. A long parka jacket with a fur-lined hood is one of our favorite popular styles (there’s a reason, say, a Canada Goose jacket is coveted). If you select a top-notch jacket from a reputable brand, you won’t need to invest in a new coat for years to come. They will give you the look of winter royalty and ensure you stay protected against the elements.

Want a jacket that can transition from the sidewalk to the hiking trail?

While some prefer to have two different jackets for outdoor pastimes—one for, say, trail walking, and one for shorter excursions like running to the store or walking the dog—there are many great options for those looking to have it all. A combination casual/performance winter coat is the way to go if you want maximum flexibility. For an easy transition from snowshoeing to a drink slopeside, go for a jacket with a high fill power: something around the 700 mark should do the trick. This will ensure your jacket is light enough to keep you moving without overheating, with a bit of puff to provide maximum coziness and comfort when you’re not exercising. Of course, you’ll want to make sure the shell is water and wind-resistant, so you’re not soaked through or chilled to the bone if the weather suddenly changes. Unlike a purely casual jacket, we recommend lifting the hemline a bit so that it rests at or around your hips. This length will still keep you warm, but it will free up your lower half and increase mobility. A combination casual and performance jacket will set you up nicely for anything the colder months can throw at you.

Do you need a winter jacket for running and other outdoor exercises?

Cold weather doesn’t mean you must stop enjoying the great outdoors and everything it offers. If you’re lucky enough to live in or visit a place where winter running and cycling are available to you, make sure you’re equipped with the best winter jacket available. A winter running jacket made for running outdoors will rely less on down fill and more on a thin yet insulated design to ensure you don’t overheat. The key to outdoor exercise is layering. You’ll notice that many winter jackets are significantly thinner than their casual or even trekking counterparts; this is because they are designed to fit over other pieces of moisture-wicking clothing, like long-sleeve shirts or lightweight fleece. Having the option to shed or add a layer can be a game-changer when it comes to a challenging run. If you know your first few layers can be quite thick, think about sizing up your jacket. You can also opt for a heated vest if you don’t need a full jacket, but would still like some warmth.

As with all our favorite jackets, it’s important to find a waterproof hooded model, but you’ll also need to think about breathability. While you can still consider a high fill power (something around 750 will do nicely), you should pay even more attention to the construction and material. A material like Gore-Tex repels water without trapping in sweat, making it great for all-weather use and ensuring your cool down won’t leave you shivering. 

So, what’s the best winter jacket I can get for under $200?

An excellent winter jacket is certainly an investment and can set you back more than just a pretty penny. However, you can definitely find a few more reasonably priced winter jackets if you’re not ready to shell out a grand for a Canada Goose jacket quite yet. Ultimately, you’ll want your winter coat to last for more than one season, which can help explain the price. If you want an outer layer that costs under $100, there is a good chance you’ll find yourself looking for a replacement within a year or two. However, if you pay apt attention to the fill quality (synthetic or natural) and overall construction, you may be able to find a great quality jacket for less.

FAQs

Q: How do you wash a winter jacket?

When it comes time to wash a winter jacket, many can be loaded into your washing machine and tumble-dried on low for a quick and easy clean. However, we don’t recommend doing this more than a few times per season. If you get dirt, salt, or other schmutz on the outer shell, you should be able to simply wipe away debris with a cloth towel and warm water. Read the fabric care labels before washing for the first time, as some coats require dry cleaning.

Q: How should a winter jacket fit?

A winter jacket should fit snugly without being too tight. If the coat is too small, the down might become compressed and less effective, plus your mobility will be restricted. You’ll know it’s too tight if you can’t easily give yourself a hug, arms touching your shoulder blades. The jacket should never rise above your belly, and the shoulder seams should not be resting mid-bicep. Feel free to size up in winter jackets, especially if you plan on layering, but make sure you can still perform daily activities without the bulk of the coat getting in the way.

Q: What are other types of winter jackets?

There are many other types of winter jackets to choose from, especially if you don’t need a waterproof jacket. Lined leather jackets, wool peacoats, and fleeces are a great way to supplement your waterproof, down-filled staple. You can find a ton of styles and colors suitable for various weather conditions to maximize outfit options. 

Related: Need a warm, comfortable hat? Head on over to this winter accessories guide.

Final thoughts on the best winter jackets

The best winter coats and jackets are wardrobe essentials for anyone who will experience cold weather. The best winter jacket for you will suit your climate and won’t prohibit you from participating in your favorite outdoor activities. Water and wind resistance are certainly must-have features, and we recommend never saying no to a removable hood. Choose a casual coat for everyday wear and a performance coat for more demanding activities like trail running, or select a combination for a great winter jacket that will keep you cozy during the winter seasons to come.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best winter jackets for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow blowers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snow-blower/ Fri, 25 Feb 2022 15:59:49 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/story/uncategorized/best-snow-blower/
Best snow blowers header sliced
Tony Ware

Snow piling up? Dig in here so you can dig out in a hurry with a snow blower to clear your driveway in no time.

The post The best snow blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers header sliced
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The PowerSmart Two Stage Snow Blower is the best two-stage PowerSmart PSSAM24 Snow Blower
SEE IT

A reliable and heavy-duty pick to handle serious winter conditions.

Best electric Snow Joe SJ623E Electric Single Stage Snow Thrower Snow Joe Electric Blower
SEE IT

Skip the hassle of maintenance and choose sustainably with this electric, yet high-powered option.

Best budget Home photo Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower
SEE IT

Save your money while still clearing snow effectively.

There’s nothing more beautiful than the calm after a blizzard—until you remember that you’re responsible for cleaning up all that snow. Thankfully, it’s easy to turn an impenetrable winter wonderland into something you can actually navigate when you pick up one of the best snow blowers.

While your small walkway or porch might only need a quick shovel (as long as you do it safely), in some places the task of hauling snow over your shoulder can be nothing short of back-breaking. With the right snow blower, you can clear your driveway, street, or sidewalk in a matter of minutes without much more effort than pressing a button or pulling a cord. However, picking the right one can feel a little overwhelming. Luckily, we’re here to take the guesswork out of snow removal. And while you’re outfitting yourself to tackle those drifts, check out our roundups of the best snow bootsheated socks, heated insolesheated vests, and winter hats to help you get the job done more comfortably (and when you get back inside, grab your heated slippers). OK, ready to clear a path through the snow? Check out our picks:

How we chose the best snow blowers

When selecting the best snow blowers to make winter storms a whole lot more bearable, we reviewed each unit’s cost, power source, reviews, and displacement to select only the best products. We considered over 40 products and 10 brands to ultimately narrow it down to this list of the best six. Our final range includes blowers designed for different climates—as those who only need to clear a few inches won’t need the same kind of power as those who get hit with more serious snowfall. Whether you’re on a budget or want a high-end option with plenty of bells and whistles, we’ve included a product pick for you.

The best snow blowers: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re in a long-term relationship with blizzards that always seem to come back as soon as you thought they were over, or a more casual but chaotic once-in-a-blue-moon entanglement, our handy guide will help you find the best snow removal equipment for whatever your needs may be.

Best overall: PowerSmart PSSAM24 Snow Blower

Why it made the cut: This powerful two-stage pick offers chute control, multiple speed settings, and a four-cycle engine to get through any storm.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 212 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: 40 feet

Pros

  • Steel auger cuts through snow
  • 8 total speeds
  • Non-slip treaded tires

Cons

  • Heavier design

So much for snow days. This snow blower is a reliable, durable, and powerful machine equipped to clear most snowfalls. The gas-powered, two-stage blower beats electric and one-stage models when it comes to forcing, and the steel auger slices through even heavy or icy snow buildup to provide a 24-inch wide, 20-inch deep clearing capacity. The PowerSmart has an energetic 212cc engine, 13-inch-height tires to dig deep into terrain, 180 degrees of chute control (with a 40-foot throw), and eight total speeds (six forward, two reverse), giving you a range of options to choose from when clearing your unique driveway, sidewalk, or street.

Best gas-powered: Ariens Deluxe 30-inch Two-Stage Snow Blower

Lowes

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This gas-powered pick can cut through even the most abominable snow buildup with snow blows of up to 50 feet.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 306 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: 50 feet

Pros

  • Dual belts for more power
  • Auto-turn steering
  • All steel frame for durability

Cons

  • If not maintained well the steel can rust

Save yourself the hassle of making pass after pass after pass with this powerful Ariens snow blower. Capable of clearing a 30-inch-wide path and cutting through 21 inches of piled-up snow, this two-stage snow blower will be your new best friend if you have a lot of ground to cover. Auto-turn steering also means no tricky levers or triggers to manipulate—just press the electric push button and start carving. The dual belt system also allows your engine to output more power where it matters, so clearing even heavy snowfall can be a breeze.

Best full-sized electric: EGO Power+ SNT2112 21-Inch 56-Volt Lithium-Ion Cordless Snow Blower

EGO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Battery
  • Throw distance: 40 feet

Pros

  • Strong steel auger
  • Comes with extra batteries
  • Quieter than many gas-powered models
  • Low vibration
  • Extremely easy to start

Cons

  • Not self-propelled

Electric snow blowers used to be wimpy machines that could barely handle a dusting. That’s no longer true and EGO’s powerful snow moving machine is proof. It comes with a pair of batteries and a dual-outlet charger so you can keep them both ready to go for when the snow falls. It’s electric, so it starts very quickly and easily with no cord to pull. Once it’s running, it’s noticeably quieter than its gas-powered pals.

Up front, a steel auger chops through snow and ice with aplomb. It measures 21 inches wide, which is wide enough to make quick work of a full-sized driveway, but still nimble enough to clear narrow walkways and other paths. Two charged batteries provide enough power to clear a 12-car driveway of eight inches of snow. If you want a simple, effective way to move snow without a ton of maintenance or effort, this is a great option. It’s not self-propelled, so you’ll have to push it, but the auger is so good at its job that it won’t be a heavy lift.

Best compact electric: Snow Joe SJ627E Electric Walk-Behind Snow Blower

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Simply charge up and get snow blowing with this eco-friendly-meets-affordable pick, which clears an impressive amount of snow despite its lightweight and compact design.

Specs

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • Engine displacement: 840 lbs/min
  • Throw distance: 25 feet

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Sustainable
  • Lightweight design

Cons

  • Not suited for large driveways

Powered with a rechargeable 100-volt, 5.0 Ah lithium-ion battery, this electric snow blower can clear a path that’s 22 inches wide and 13 inches high. This model comes with a battery and charger, but you can add an additional battery (sold separately) if thirty minutes of run time isn’t enough. And with dual 5-Watt LED lights, you’ll be able to see where you’re going even when the sun is down. Unlike gas models, the Snow Joe requires no maintenance, so your snow blower won’t malfunction if it goes untouched for months in the garage. Despite its more compact size, this pick can also move 840 pounds of snow per minute, making it a workhorse worthy of a try.

rounded option.

Best compact: Troy-Bilt Squall 21-inch Single-Stage Gas Snow Blower

Why it made the cut: Clear up to 13 inches of snow off your sidewalks in one go with this powerful gas-powered pick.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 208 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: 21 inches

Pros

  • Remote chute control
  • Space-saving design
  • Powerful gas engine

Cons

  • Less powerful than two-stage option

With a foldable ergonomic handle, this single-stage snow blower is a great option if you don’t have tons of extra storage space. As long as the snow hasn’t climbed above six inches, this Troy-Bilt snow blower will easily cut a 21-inch-wide path. While it’s slightly less powerful than a two-stage snow blower, the four-cycle gas engine with electric start still makes this machine formidable against snowfall. It’s also equipped with dual LED headlights and a 190-degree adjustable chute to make cleaning easier.

Best two-stage: Briggs & Stratton Dual-Stage Snow Blower

Briggs & Stratton

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This high-quality option has a powerful motor and two-stage design to tackle the heaviest snowfalls.

Specs:

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 208 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: Up to 40 feet

Pros

  • Easy electric push start
  • Heated hand grips
  • Non-slip treaded tires

Cons

  • Heavier design

This powerful gas two-stage snow blower can easily tackle snowfalls that are up to 20 inches and move 208 cubic cm of snow, making it one of the best machines to clear areas hit with serious snowfall. While considerably more expensive than the other options in the article, this gas snow blower will cut through just about anything you put in its way and you give total control over where it ends up. The dual-trigger steering also allows you to cut tight turns and clear snow precisely, which ultimately makes for a faster process overall.

Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Snowblowers tend to be quite the investment, but you don’t have to spend a ton to save time clearing drifts—this Greenworks pick has quite the power, despite its more compact size and affordable pricing.

Specs:

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • Clearing depth: 10 inches
  • Throw distance: 20 feet

Pros

  • Affordable pick
  • Lightweight design
  • Easy electric start

Cons

  • Requires extension cord

If you live somewhere that only sees light, sporadic snowfall, there’s absolutely no reason to shell out big money on a snow blower with features you don’t need. This Greenworks electric snow blower will clear a path that’s 20 inches wide and 10 inches deep. Since it’s AC-powered, you’ll never run out of juice as long as you can reach an outlet. Convenient to store and easy to start, this is a great snow thrower if you don’t want to spend too much money.

What to consider when buying the best snow blowers

They say that every snowflake is unique, and snow blowers are no different. Depending on your individual needs, you may want a fairly no-frills device or the latest technology. Check out these five things to consider before buying the best snow blower, and then let the snowfall where it may.

For long driveways and big clean-ups, power your snow blower with gas

Generally speaking, gas-powered snow blowers tend to be more powerful than even the best electric models. So, if you have to clean up a long driveway or city block, you’ll probably want your snow blower to run on gas.

Gas models do have their downsides: for example, you’ll need to change the oil from time to time and make sure that you’re using the right type of gasoline. Other upkeep will include changing or cleaning the filters as needed and occasionally replacing a burnt-out spark plug. However, when the inches start piling up, the maintenance a gas-powered snow blower requires will be more than worth it.

For convenience and ease of use, there’s no beating an electric snow blower

In addition to being more environmentally friendly than their gas-powered counterparts, electric snow blowers are easier to use and require less upkeep. Depending on the model, all you’ll need to do is plug them in (or charge the battery) and you’ll be ready to go.

Unfortunately, electric snow blowers tend to be less powerful than gas-powered ones, so if you have a huge amount of snow to clear, you might find yourself making multiple passes or cursing when the battery runs out. “Less powerful” doesn’t mean “not powerful,” though, and a well-made electric model might be exactly what you’re looking for provided the conditions you’ll be using it in aren’t terribly inclement.

A two-stage snow blower is the best choice for clearing large areas and really deep snow

If you live in an area that gets pummeled with snow, a one-stage snow blower just isn’t going to cut it. The difference between a one-stage and two-stage snow blower comes down to how much heavy lifting the “auger” (the part that sucks up the snow) is being asked to do—and in a one-stage model, it’s being asked to do everything.

Put simply, in a one-stage model, the auger sucks up the snow and spits it out, while in a two-stage model, the auger only has to suck it up while another part (the “impeller”) is responsible for blowing it somewhere else. If you’re looking to clear more than 8 inches of snow, a two-stage model is the only type that will get the job done. Electric models are all one-stage, so if you live in a place that gets lots of snow, a gas-powered, two-stage model is a must.

The best snow blowers will come with a few bells and whistles

Not all snow blowers are built equally and picking one with some extra features can save you a lot of time and frustration. For example, if you can’t wait for the sun to come out to clear a path to your car, you’ll definitely want to consider a snow blower with a built-in light. Want more control over where the snow you throw lands? Some models come equipped with remote chute control, so you don’t make another mess cleaning up the first one.

FAQs

Q: How long should a snow blower last?

Depending on the brand, style, use time, how they’re stored, and how well you care for the machine, snow blowers can last between 10-30 years. This means that, in order to get more winters out of your snow blower, you will need to give it some love and care in the off-season with some maintenance. This includes draining the gas, replacing sparkplugs, oiling the wheels, and cleaning it. A basic parts inspection every 20 hours of use is a good rule of thumb to follow.

Q: Do you need hearing protection when using a snow blower?

You don’t need to wear hearing protection when using a snow blower, but you should, as they can be loud. For example, gas snow blowers can reach up to 85 decibels. Eight hours of exposure to that decibel level is considered safe. However, at 100 decibels, the safe exposure time drops to 15 minutes. Although snow on the ground isn’t permanent, hearing loss is. If you’re looking for hearing protection that you can use year-round, check out our best earplugs for concerts. You can rock them under your hat when you’re outside using your brand new snow blower, and rock out with them when seeing your favorite band in town.

Q: Do snow blowers work on heavy snow?

It depends on the kind of snow blower you buy. Single-stage and two-stage blowers can handle up to a foot of snow. Three-stage snow blowers can handle 16 inches. Two- and three-stage snow blowers also remove a wider swath of snow in a pass compared to single-stage snow blowers. If you get frequent, heavy snows, a two- or three-stage snow blower is worth the investment since it will be easier—and less time-consuming—to clear your driveway.

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers

The best snow blowers vary widely in price, power, and performance. Depending on your needs, features like LED lighting and remote chute control can be extremely helpful or totally superfluous. Bottom line: the best snow blower is the one that’s suited to your area’s weather conditions and the amount of area you’ll need to clear. Think gas-powered and two-stage models for blizzard-prone climates, and smaller electric units for more fair-weather locales.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best dog leashes of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-dog-leash/ Fri, 10 Dec 2021 16:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=364478
A dog walking down a wooden bridge on one of the best dog leashes.
Stan Horaczek

The best dog leash will set you free to enjoy a great walk, or run, with your loyal companion

The post The best dog leashes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A dog walking down a wooden bridge on one of the best dog leashes.
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best retractable tug retractable dog leash and a dog on a sidewalk best overall retractable dog leash TUG 360° Heavy-Duty Retractable Dog Leash 
SEE IT
Best hands-free Light blue hands free dog leash with wrist strap Fable Running Leash
SEE IT
Best for two dogs Gray double dog leash for two dogs iYoShop Dual Dog Leash
SEE IT

The right dog leash can mean the difference between a calm adventure with your pup and a total catastrophe. Leashes in different lengths, materials and even colors affect how they function, and many pet parents need more than one. A reflective leash for evening walks, a long leash for training or a hands-free leash for runs could easily make life with your dog easier. 

Leashes also come in various designs, like double leashes and slip leads that function as a collar and leash. If you live where it’s wet or your dog loves water, you may need a waterproof leash, while those with a dog that pulls may need a model with a cushioned handle. The dog’s age, breed, and size will factor into the decision, too. For example, small breeds don’t need a thick, heavy leash, and puppies may need the leash training help offered by a long dog leash. The best dog leash has the durability, length, and extra features that you need to maintain control and keep your dog safe. 

Use the best dog leashes to maintain control and enjoy walks with your dog

Leashes are an absolute necessity for most dog owners to safely exercise their dog, take the pup to the vet, and maintain control in public places. The best dog leash for you and your dog depends on the activities you do together and the dog’s personality and size. Designs vary from embossable leather models to retractable leashes that provide extra freedom for dogs to sniff and explore. 

The dog’s size affects the best leash thickness and length. Large breeds may need a heavy, long option for added durability. However, small toy breeds could get weighed down by a 10 -foot-long, heavy leash. Nylon is the most common material for leashes because it’s inexpensive, durable, and comes in various colors. They’re made in flat or round/rope designs. However, depending on the nylon’s quality, it might not be strong enough for heavy pullers or chewers. Dogs who can’t help but chew probably need a leather one. Leather stands up to the wear and tear of a rambunctious dog who chews or pulls better than nylon, but you’ll pay a little extra. 

Some leashes have extra handles and extra clips for extra configuration options or to help you keep control when crossing the street. Options with extra D-rings or clips also offer a means to connect storage for other dog supplies like poop bags or treats. 

Related: Best dog collar for every pup

The best dog leashes: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: TUG 360° Heavy-Duty Retractable Dog Leash  

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

The TUG 360° Heavy Duty Retractable Dog Leash comes in four sizes and six colors. The different sizes work for dogs under 26 pounds and up to 110 pounds. Dogs get 16 feet to explore, while owners get a comfortable hand grip with an easy sliding push-button lock/unlock thumb control. A specially designed opening on the housing prevents the leash from tangling and gives 360 degrees of control. 

Best for two dogs: iYoShop Dual Dog Leash

iYoShop

SEE IT

The iYoShop Dual Dog Leash takes the double dog leash into heavy-duty territory. The padded handle keeps the grip comfortable, while the double ones attach with a 360-degree swivel and are made of bungee cord to offer some tension and pressure relief for active dogs. This 35-inch leash comes in two sizes and six colors. 

Best hands-free: Fable Running Leash 

fable

SEE IT

The Fable Running Leash’s versatile design includes adjustable length with clips and stoppers that transform it from a traditional leash to a hands-free option that attaches to the waist or wrist. Depending on the configuration and which of the two sizes are used, this leash reaches 40 to 80 inches and comes in six colors. 

Best reflective: Bark Reflective Leash 

BarkShop

SEE IT

The Bark Reflective Leash features a durable, flat nylon surface with reflective material on both sides of the leash. It’s bright and visible, but the locking hook and neoprene handle offer extra security for the dog and comfort for the owner. Both of the two sizes are 60 inches long and include a D-ring on the handle to hold dog supplies like poop bags or a dog-treat pouch. 

Best budget: BAAPET Strong Dog Leash 

BAAPET

SEE IT

The BAAPET Strong Dog Leash comes in nine colors and three sizes, with nylon rope widths ranging from ⅓ to ½ inch and lengths of 4, 5, or 6 feet. With reflective threads weaved into the rope, it’s visible and durable. For the owner’s comfort, a cushy foam covers the handle. 

Best leather: Fairwin Leather Dog Leash

Fairwin

SEE IT

The Fairwin Leather Dog Leash comes in four widths—½ inch, 5/8 inch, ¾ inch, and 1 inch—to accommodate dogs of different sizes and strengths. The leather thickness varies from ⅙ of an inch to ⅕-inch thick. A high-tensile copper clasp and heavy-duty buckle keep the dog secure. This leather option also includes a 60-day unconditional return policy. 

Things to consider when buying the best dog leashes

Give your dog extra freedom to explore with a retractable dog leash

Retractable leashes offer adjustable lengths that range from 5 to 30 feet. They have plastic housings with an ergonomic handgrip that protects the retracted nylon leash. Your thumb usually controls a locking mechanism that releases or stops retraction, putting easy control within your hands.  

However, retractable models tend to be a polarizing topic among dog owners—either you love them or you hate them. For some pet parents, they’re the perfect solution to balance the dog’s need to explore with the owner’s need to keep their pet safe. 

Retractable leashes are a great choice if you walk your dog in an area where he’s not likely to run into traffic or other dangerous obstacles. It’s also a good solution for dogs who like to explore. The dog’s personality matters with a retractable leash. A dog who will pull no matter the leash length might be too out of control for a retractable model. However, if your dog gets frustrated because he wants to sniff off of the walking trail where you’d prefer to stay, a retractable leash becomes a compromise that keeps you both happy.

Double the trouble, double the fun with two dogs on one double dog leash

The more dogs you have, the more leashes you have to untangle. A double leash offers a simple solution for well-behaved dogs. These leashes feature a single handle connected to two leashes. Sometimes the handle has a single cord that extends 2 or 3 feet, then splits or has a D-ring that connects to two short leads, so you can walk two pups with one leash. 

If you’re walking two dogs with separate leads, they inevitably get tangled. Double leashes can prevent a tangle of feet, fur, and leash. However, like other designs, you have to know your dogs. If they wrestle and nip each other when they’re in close proximity, a double leash might not be the best choice. They work well for leash-trained pups who are relatively calm and get along with one another.  

Walk, run, or skip with your dog on a hands-free leash

Hands-free picks grant you extra freedom while your dog stays close by. These leashes have extra length, clips, and connectors that allow you to wear them as a belt, on your wrist, or as a traditional leash. When you’re hands-free, you’re not managing a leash while scooping poop, holding hands with young children, or balancing your way up a mountain trail.

They’re an excellent choice for active pet owners who want to take their dogs on outdoor adventures. You may need your hands-on steep trails to drink water or stay balanced when you’re pushing your own physical limits. It also can make simple evening walks more pleasant for you. If you’re going hands-free, however, the dog should be well trained. A dog that chases squirrels or becomes distracted by every passerby can pull you off your feet. However, if your pet stays by your side and loves to be with you, one of these types will give you freedom and safety to enjoy a wide range of activities together. 

Now you see it, now you…still see it with a reflective dog leash

Many models have some reflective properties built into the design, like a reflective thread woven through the nylon or tapes on the handle. Visibility is an important safety issue for walking dogs at dawn and dusk. Drivers, bikers, and other pedestrians may see you and not the dog or vice versa. Reflective leashes increase visibility for both of you. Volume matters when it comes to visibility. The more reflective material on the leash, the easier it is to see. However, these leashes need regular cleaning. Dirt and mud can cover the reflective material, reducing visibility. 

Ready to save some cash on your dog products?

Budget leashes are usually made of nylon but lower-quality nylon than more expensive models. The hardware on these leashes may be plastic or low-grade stainless steel. Cheap leashes are a great option when you’re on a tight budget or for an extra leash in the car. They’ll last longer with dogs who are well-leashed trained, don’t pull, and don’t chew. These leashes will also last longer in a dry climate, where water exposure stays to a minimum. Inexpensive leashes may be flat or round/rope designs. Thicker ropes tend to last longer, whether they’re used with a small or large breed. 

Also consider …

Dogs who chew or pull excessively can go through fabric leashes in a matter of weeks if not days. Leather options offer better, tougher durability for dogs that are hard on leashes. That doesn’t mean leather won’t get worn out with chewing and pulling, but it will last longer. And leather leashes don’t cost that much more than a high-quality fabric one but will last longer with pups who love to test their limits. 

FAQs

Q: What is the D-ring on a dog leash for? 

Some leashes have a D-ring on or near the handle. The ring can hold extra dog supplies like a poop-bag dispenser or a dog-treat pouch. You can buy a poop bag holder with a carabiner on it that clips directly to a D-ring. These designs make it easy to head out the door with everything you need to walk the dog. 

Q: Can a dog escape a slip lead?

Dogs can escape slip leads. These leashes have a ring on the end instead of a hook or clip. The handle then slides through the ring, creating a loop that secures around the dog’s neck and acts as a collar. For a dog that’s been well trained on a lead, a slip lead stays comfortably loose. However, if the dog pulls or tries to run away, the loop tightens on their neck, potentially choking them if they (or you) don’t stop pulling. A dog can escape a slip lead by staying close to the person holding the leash, causing the loop to loosen. The dog could then slip its head out. Slips leads are somewhat controversial and should only be used on dogs with plenty of obedience and leash training.

Q: What age can you leash train a puppy? 

Basic obedience and leash training can start around eight weeks old. At this age, pups begin to become more aware and have the ability to understand basic commands. Before starting, remember to be patient, keep training sessions short, and always end on a positive note.

Related: Best dog DNA kits

The final word on the best dog leashes

Different dogs and owners will find that different options work better for them than others. As you’re choosing the best for your pup, whether it’s a long leash or a hands-free leash, consider how and where you want to use the leash and the dog’s size and temperament. If you’re willing to pay a little extra for a leash with aluminum or high-quality stainless steel hardware and thick nylon, chances are it will last longer and provide a better bang for your buck. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dog leashes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best budget electric bikes for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-budget-electric-bikes/ Wed, 14 Dec 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=496637
Get started with the best budget electric bikes.

Got some speed and savings at the same time.

The post The best budget electric bikes for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Get started with the best budget electric bikes.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Ride1Up Roadster V2 Ride1Up Roadster
SEE IT

The Ride1Up Roadster V2 is an all-around great ebike that won’t break the bank.

Best mountain Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26” Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26”
SEE IT

Most electric mountain bikes cost thousands of dollars. This one’s highly capable and costs less than $700.

Best folding Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike
SEE IT

The Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike feels especially solid for a folding ebike.

Is the term budget electric bike an oxymoron? Two things are certain about ebikes: They’re really cool, and they are very expensive. They often cost upwards of $2,000, so getting one is no small investment. There are plenty of people who can’t afford one. That said, it is possible to get a decent ebike for less than $1,000. A few brands have designed relatively affordable ebikes that deliver admirable functionality at the low end of the price range. They tend to be foldable or compact versions for commuters, so they’re made for relatively light use, but there are options for trail bikers, too. Let’s examine the benefits and limitations of the best budget electric bikes.

How we chose the best budget electric bikes

I’ve been an avid outdoorsman enthusiast for my entire life, which has resulted in several years of providing gear and tech coverage for outlets like Popular Science, the Daily Beast, Runner’s World, Thrillist, the Manual, and more. My love of cycling has been a recurring theme throughout all of it.

Over the past several months, I’ve ridden dozens of electric bikes at all different price points and categories. I have come to learn what to look for when separating genuine quality from flashy marketing. In certain cases, those tests were supplemented with research collating reviews from experts and impressions from customers alike.

The best budget electric bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

The best budget ebikes span several different riding purposes and considerations. While most low-cost ebikes are often very similar, our picks offer distinctive riding experiences. They got our attention; maybe you’ll see something in them, too.

Best overall: Ride1Up Roadster V2

ride1up

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Ride1Up Roadster V2 is an all-around great ebike that won’t break the bank.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 36V 7Ah (252Wh)
  • Range: Approximately 12-20 miles (and maybe even more)
  • Motor: 350W (500W peak)

Pros

  • Solid all-purpose bike
  • Relatively good range and power
  • Classic looks
  • Smooth ride

Cons

  • Not for short riders
  • No lights

For just $1,000, the Ride1up Roadster V2 is a remarkably well-rounded and polished bike. High-powered for its price with a 350W motor, the Roadster V2 provides strong acceleration and propulsion, making it capable of reaching 24 miles per hour with pedal assist. It also has a range of 12-20 miles on average, with several riders suggesting they’ve gone 25 miles on a single charge. That’s a great range for an around-town cruiser.

It’s lightweight—only 33 pounds—and durably built. Plus, it looks very slick, with a classic aesthetic that almost doesn’t look like an ebike.

The Roadster V2 isn’t perfect, though. It’s a very tall bike, best suited for riders 5’8” and over. It also doesn’t have much in the way of accessories; there’s not even a headlight, which is pretty standard at this point.

Still, with all the core features working at or above our expectations, you’ll be hard-pressed to find an ebike that works so well for this price.

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Small but spry, the Lectric Bikes XP Lite lets you zip through crowds and doesn’t require much storage space.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 48V 7.8 Ah (374 Wh)
  • Range: 15-40 miles
  • Motor: 300W nominal, 720W peak

Pros

  • Good range and power
  • Solid build quality
  • Class 1 or 2

Cons

  • Lack of suspension is noticeable on rough roads

Started in 2019 from a garage in Phoenix, Ariz., Lectric Bikes expanded quickly because of the company’s restless spirit. Not only are the company’s ebikes intended for the intrepid—for gaining the experience points, XP, in the bike names—but the founders are continually listening to user feedback to refine the product line while maintaining affordability.

Foldable yet offroad-friendly, the core Lectric XP 3.0 model can comfortably accompany RVers and van-lifers. The less-expensive XP Lite, meanwhile, was developed as the optimal option for city dwellers needing a lighter-weight ebike that could go from closet to commute. It even shows up quickly in a surprisingly compact box. At 46 pounds, and 36- x 16- x 26-inch folded dimensions, the XP Lite is easy to tuck and transport via elevator, as shown above—or even stairs in a pinch, as shown below—while packing in a lot of features for its $799 price point.

Class 1 and 2, the XP Lite features a twist-grip throttle plus five levels of pedal assist, with slimmer tires that assist the maneuverability needed in active urban environments. The 48V lithium-ion battery can get up to 40 miles on a charge (assuming you’re using no more than intermittent pedal assist level 1). Or you can use the throttle to scoot to/from work, the store, etc., quickly with the least effort and sweat (the single-speed drivetrain makes it easy—just twist and go—but you’ll get max 15 miles in this mode).

The base XL Lite includes front & rear safety lights, and a backlit heads-up LCD screen offers trip and battery info (electrical components are IP65-rated in case you get caught in incremental weather, but don’t leave the bike out in the rain). You’ll absorb some shocks if navigating uneven asphalt, and acceleration—while appropriately fast for street navigation—isn’t always the smoothest in transition. But you can buy an optional seat with a suspension post, and you’ll appreciate the nimble nature of the bike whether you’re zipping through downtown or kicking up some dust on more developed trails. — Tony Ware

Lectric XP Lite ebike folded in a stairwell
Tony Ware

Best mountain bike: Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26”

ANCHEER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Most electric mountain bikes cost thousands of dollars. This one’s highly capable and costs less than $700. 

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 36V 10.4Ah (374.4Wh)
  • Range: 20+ miles
  • Motor: 350W

Pros

  • Good range and power
  • Solid build quality
  • Shock-absorbing fork
  • 21-speed shifter w/ throttle

Cons

  • No built-in light
  • Poor customer service from the manufacturer

It’s not uncommon for electric mountain bike prices to steer closer toward $10,000 than $1,000, making them a very hard sell. Luckily, Ancheer makes a highly capable alternative that costs less than $700.

With a 350W motor capable of cruising at 20 miles per hour, the Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike has no problem charging up inclines. It also has a substantial range, with many users reporting that it will go well over 20 miles if you’re using the throttle economically. 

Its design is also surprisingly solid for a budget electric mountain bike, inspiring several buyers to leave shining reviews after several months of hitting the trails. Shock absorbers in the fork deliver a smooth, capable riding experience. And its overall aesthetic is clean and sporty. 

Best folding: Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike

Vivi

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike feels especially solid for a folding ebike.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 36V 8Ah (288Wh)
  • Range: Approximately 14 miles
  • Motor: 350W

Pros

  • Solid all-purpose bike
  • Relatively good range and power
  • Shock absorbers
  • 21-speed shifter w/ throttle

Cons

  • Slow charging
  • Poor customer service from the manufacturer

Most folding electric bikes feel somewhat rickety, thanks to their signature hinges. Budget bike-maker Vivi somehow made a folding design that minimizes that wiggle in its 26-inch Electric Mountain Bike, and does so without charging an arm and a leg.

Its strong 350W motor will zip you up to 20 miles per hour using either throttle or pedal assist. Its 14-mile range can’t compete with high-level ebikes, but is acceptable for an $800 bike and should be more than enough for local commuters to ride their daily route on a single charge. What’s more, its Shimano 21-speed transmission makes taking on hills effortless. 

When you’re done for the day, folding the bike up to store is easy, as is reassembling it to ride. More importantly, the bike feels sturdy despite the movable points on the frame and provides a comfortable riding experience. And it has a built-in headlight that can be switched on via the handlebar control pad, which is also used to shift between three riding modes: normal bike mode, pedal-assist, and pure electric power.

While Vivi has a solid bike on its hands here, the company has earned a reputation for poor customer service when issues have cropped up. This may impact the bike’s long-term viability, but it is also a common issue with companies targeting budget products.

Best compact: Sailnovo 14-Inch Electric Bike

Sailnovo

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Salinovo 14-inch Electric Bike offers supreme portability and solid performance.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 36V 10.4Ah (374.4Wh)
  • Range: Approximately 18 miles
  • Motor: 450W

Pros

  • Strong motor
  • Relatively good range
  • Waterproof
  • Throttle and pedal assist

Cons

  • Could be more ergonomic
  • Some customers have had customer service issues

The Salinovo 14-inch Electric Bike is surprisingly powerful for a compact electric bike. Its 450W motor can quickly reach just shy of 20 miles per hour via either the throttle or pedal assist. (Salinovo claims the range goes much further, but some reviewers reported that it falls short of those claims.) Round that out with a surprisingly solid range and little flourishes like integrated head and tail lights, plus a central shock absorber, and you’ve got a pretty solid bike for around $500 bucks.

Some serious cyclists might find that compact, foldable ebikes at these prices don’t deliver the structural solidity they expect from a bike. Generally, they can feel a bit more rickety than their non-folding counterparts. With a bike like the Sailnovo, it’s important to remember that you are making a compromise, favoring affordability and portability over feel and stability. All in all, though, it’s a great little commuter or a fun way to explore a neighborhood.

Things to consider before choosing the best budget electric bikes

If you’ve come looking for the best budget electric bikes, rather than simply the best electric bikes, then we know the price is on your mind. Even cheap bikes cost a few hundred dollars, though, so you want to make sure you’re putting that money into something worth riding. There are several specific factors you should keep in mind, so you can figure out whether a budget ebike is a bargain or, for lack of a better word, junk. The best budget electric bikes will deliver in these specific ways.

Price

First and foremost, you’re here because you’re looking for an electric bike that won’t cost as much as a used car—all of the bikes on this list cost under $1,000. We also included a few compact bicycles that cost around $500. These offer somewhat limited functionality and durability compared to full-size ebikes, but they’re still great for the price.

Riding range

An electric bike that runs out of juice after a few miles isn’t worth buying, no matter the price. What good is a motor if it can’t get you from point A to point B? A large battery will ensure you get a boost from your ebike, rather than pushing it home.

Most ebikes rate their batteries in a combination of volts (V) and amp-hours (Ah), which you can combine to calculate a bike battery’s actual capacity in watt-hours (Wh). Watt-hours are the more useful specification, as they allow you to approximate how long the battery will last at a given speed.

Converting volts and amp-hours into watt-hours is easy. Simply multiply the two numbers together. A number of our picks, for example, boast 36V 8Ah batteries. 36 x 8 = 288, so we know that battery lasts for 288Wh. With this number, we can calculate how far the battery will take us by dividing the number of watt-hours by your speed to see how far you’ll go. So, at 20 miles per hour, a 288Wh bike should carry you about 14.5 miles.

“About” is an important word here. In the real world, your actual range will be affected by things like rider weight, road surface, flat vs. hilly terrain, and other factors that can demand more or less power. So, while you can’t measure and determine the minimum amount of juice you’ll need on spec, you can probably figure out if a bike can get you where you need to go.

If nothing else, remember that a bigger battery is always better.

Motor

There’s no point in having an ebike if the motor isn’t powerful enough to take the edge off your pedaling effort. Power is one of the biggest differences between less expensive ebikes and the cream of the crop. Many are so weak that you’ll barely notice the pedal assistance. However, all of the bikes on this list deliver at least 250 watts, meaning they’re capable of delivering solid pedal assistance or even propelling themselves at 20 miles per hour or higher.

Keep in mind that your actual speed will vary based on factors like payload, road conditions, stops and starts, and so on, but a high-watt motor is important, especially when looking to spend less money.

Durability

Whenever you’re going with a budget-tier version of a product, you need to pay extra attention to its overall construction. You aren’t saving money if you buy something cheap, but it breaks down after several uses. To verify the durability of our recommendations, we’ve scoured reviews from owners who can attest to the longevity of each bike.

When you’re checking out a specific bike in the real world, check over its various parts to find out if anything rattles to a worrisome degree. Some budget picks may feel more rickety than their more expensive brethren, but they should still be sturdy and comfortable to ride.

Accessories

Ebikes can come with an extremely wide range of accessories, including lights, bells, cargo carriers, and so on. While you don’t need accessories like these, they can make your riding experience safer, more fun, and more versatile.

FAQs

Q: Are electric bikes worth the money?

Electric bikes are absolutely worth the money for commuters if it allows you to cut down on expenses like gas, parking, and vehicle maintenance. They’re also incredibly fun to ride, especially when they let you blow past traffic jams. That said, they are very expensive, so we’d only recommend them for people who ride a lot. You don’t necessarily need to be a commuter, but they aren’t a worthwhile investment for people who only bike once in a while.

Q: What are the disadvantages of electric bikes?

As we’ve discussed here, money is a major hurdle for most people considering whether or not to buy an ebike. Electric bikes usually cost more than traditional bikes, and they feature more complicated machinery, which translates into more maintenance and repair costs. The range can also be an issue. Electric bikes tend to be very heavy. When they run out of juice, they can be difficult to ride without power assistance.

Q: Do you pedal an electric bike?

You can, but you don’t always need to. On Class 2 and 3 electric bikes with throttles, you can propel the ebike with zero effort. On class 1 bikes with pedal assist, you have to pedal, but the motor speeds you up and does most of the work. Technically, some companies also sell “electric bikes” without pedals. These tend to be cheaper and work similarly to using the throttle on a class 2 or 3 bike. By removing the pedals, these companies are playing with the line between an electric bike and an electric scooter or moped, so we’re not sure they fit what we think of when we talk about ebikes.

Q: How fast do electric bikes go?

Your ebike’s top speed comes down to the motor of its motor, plus several other factors, including rider weight, flat vs. hilly terrain, road surface conditions, bike weight, cargo weight, and so on. They are not so powerful that they can push their limits under any conditions. That said, we generally expect budget ebikes capable of average top speeds between 15-20 miles per hour. A top-of-the-line model should be able to go a bit faster, up to about 28 miles per hour.

Final thoughts on the best budget electric bikes

Electric bikes are an environmentally friendly, fun way to get around town, whether commuting, running errands, or simply going for a ride. While they often come with a hefty price tag, there is a price range, and you can get one that won’t cost too much. If $500-$1,000 is still too much, looking for a used or refurbished model may help you cut costs.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best budget electric bikes for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best dual-fuel generators in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-dual-fuel-generators/ Mon, 15 Aug 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=461892
Home photo
Tony Ware

When it comes to keeping a generator (and your devices) running, two fuels are better than one.

The post The best dual-fuel generators in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Home photo
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall DuroMax XP12000EH is the best dual fuel generator overall. DuroMax XP12000EH
SEE IT

The DuroMax XP12000EH delivers plenty of power for any purpose.

Best portable Westinghouse iGen4500DF is the best portable dual fuel generator. Westinghouse iGen4500DF
SEE IT

The Westinghouse iGen4500DF packs more power into a relatively portable package.

Best electric start Wen DF1100X is the best electric start dual fuel generator. Wen DF1100X
SEE IT

For an easy startup and lots of safety features, check out the Wen DF1100X.

Most people probably look for a gas generator as the easiest way to get backup power in a pinch, but a dual-fuel generator—which can run on gas or propane—provides a more flexible alternative. With two ways to power your generator, you have more options when fuel is in short supply (in conditions like a hurricane). Dual-fuel generators also give you more control over secondary factors like noise and emissions: Gas is easy to get at any station, but propane burns cleaner and quieter. The best dual-fuel generators not only offer the best of both worlds but also come equipped with slew of slick features to make your user experience easy and safe.

How we chose the best dual-fuel generators

As a tech enthusiast and camping addict, I’ve looked at a wide range of portable power stations and related accessories—such as the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core portable generator and the best home wind turbines—for the likes of Popular Science, Scientific American, The Daily Beast, and more. (And if you’re looking for things to do with all that power, consider charging one of the best ebikes I’ve written about.) I’ve researched each of these dual-fuel generators extensively via a combination of first-hand trials, input from experts, and reviews from real-world consumers.

The best dual-fuel generators: Reviews & Recommendations

Our favorite dual-fuel inverter generators span a range of purposes. Some are designed as reliable backup power sources for an entire home. Others are small and portable, giving you just enough juice for a camping trip or short blackout. Our list features generators of all shapes and sizes, so you can find something that suits your needs and budget.

Best overall: DuroMax XP12000EH

DuroMax

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With its high output and heavy-duty build quality, the DuroMax XP12000EH will keep the lights on and more.

Specs

  • Rated output: 9,500W
  • Peak output: 12,000W
  • Gas tank capacity: 8.3 gallons
  • Weight: 238 lbs
  • Volume: 74 dB
  • Starter: Electric and pull

Pros

  • Solid output
  • Outstanding build quality
  • Power Boost for bigger appliances and RVs
  • Wheel kit included

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Expensive
  • Some owners report limited customer service support

The DuroMax XP12000EH is a true workhorse of a dual-fuel generator. With a steady output of 9,500W, it’s more than powerful enough to provide electricity to an entire home, and its 12,000W peak output allows it to provide extra power if there’s suddenly a much larger need. It also has a large 8.3-gallon gas tank so that it can run for a long time on petrol alone.

What’s more, XP12000EH has a reputation for providing outstanding reliability. It was built for rugged uses, like on a work site, and its all-metal construction ensures that it can handle a bit of roughhousing. All that metal and gas capacity means it’s very heavy, though. At 238 pounds, you won’t be moving this around a lot, and forget about taking it camping. But it comes with a wheel kit, which may help ease the load over short distances. 

truction quality is clearly solid. Again, the gas tank is pretty small, but that’s actually an advantage in this case.

Best portable: Westinghouse iGen4500DF

Westinghouse Outdoor Power Equipment

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: If you need to take plenty of power camping or to the job site, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF is a great choice.

Specs

  • Rated output: 3,700W
  • Peak output: 4,500W
  • Gas tank capacity: 3.4 gallons
  • Weight: 104.7 lbs
  • Volume: 52 dB
  • Starter: Electric

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Plenty of power output
  • Quiet
  • Solid construction

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy for a “portable” generator

If you need lots of power and the ability to move your generator around, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF is the best semi-portable option we know of. It’s slightly larger than our “best small” pick and almost twice as heavy. Still, it’s significantly more compact and portable than most dual-fuel generators, with a similar 3,700-4,500W output. That’s plenty of power for a large camping expedition, an RV, or a work site. 

Best electric start: Wen DF1100X

WEN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For an easy startup and lots of safety features, check out the Wen DF1100X.

Specs

  • Rated output: 8,300W
  • Peak output: 11,000W
  • Gas tank capacity: 6.6 gallons
  • Weight: 213.8 lbs
  • Volume: 72 dB
  • Starter: Electric

Pros

  • Plenty of power output
  • CO2 shutdown safety sensor
  • Relatively quiet

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

It isn’t all that uncommon for a dual-fuel generator to have an electric start switch—all of the recommendations on this list have them, either solely or alongside a pull cord. The Wen DF1100X sets itself apart with an automatic stop mechanism that can cut power in an emergency.

The Wen DF1100X comes in several packages. However, we specifically recommend the model with a built-in CO2 shutdown sensor, which is important if you run the generator in a garage or otherwise poorly ventilated space.

With a hefty 8,300-11,000W output, above-average gas capacity, and a relatively low operating volume, the Wen DF1100X is a generator powerhouse. It’s both expensive and heavy, but if you’re looking for an easy-on, safety-off option, it’s a solid investment.

Best budget: DuroMax Duro Star DS5500EH

DuroMax

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its relatively high output, relatively low price, and solid construction, the Duro Star DS5500EH is a solid budget-conscious pick.

Specs

  • Rated output: 4,500W
  • Peak output: 5,500W
  • Gas tank capacity: 3.9 gallons
  • Weight: 124 lbs
  • Volume: 69 dB
  • Starter: Electric and pull

Pros

  • Solid output for price
  • Outstanding build quality
  • Relatively portable

Cons

  • Not powerful enough for an entire home
  • Some owners report limited customer service support

The DuroMax Duro Star DS5500EH is effectively a smaller, more affordable version of our best overall pick. At just under half the price of the DuroMax XP12000EH, the Duro Star DS5500EH delivers about half the power. A 4,500W generator gives you plenty of power if you’re charging up an RV, topping off power tools at a work site, or keeping key appliances on during a power outage.

At just over 100 pounds, it’s not exactly light, but it’s also not so heavy that you can’t get it around. It wouldn’t take too much wrangling to bring it camping, especially thanks to the inclusion of wheels.

Also worth considering: Champion Power Equipment 7,500-watt dual fuel generator

Champion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You can often find this powerful dual-fuel generator at a deep discount—it’s regularly sub-$1,000 but sometimes dips far below that mark.

Specs

  • Rated output: 7,500W
  • Peak output: 9,375W
  • Gas tank capacity: 7.7 gallons
  • Weight: 205 lbs
  • Volume: 74 dB
  • Starter: Electric and pull

Pros

  • Plenty of power for big jobs or long run times
  • Up to 10 hours runtime on gas or 5.5 on propane
  • Lots of connectivity: 120V 30A RV Locking Outlet (L5-30R), 120/240V 30A RV Locking Outlet (L14-30R), (2) Two GFCI 120V 20A Household Outlets 
  • Sturdy wheels

Cons

  • Big and heavy
  • Loud

When it comes to pure power-to-price ratio, this Champion offering makes a solid showing. It weighs just over 200 pounds and contains a 439cc 4-stroke engine. When running on gasoline, it produces 9,375 starting watts and 7,500 running watts. On propane, it churns 8,400 starting watts and 6,750 running watts. That’s plenty of power for even large jobs or whole-home backup in an emergency. Despite its size and weight, it’s relatively easy to move around thanks to sturdy integrated wheels. It starts easily with an electric system, but it also has a recoil option for use in a pinch.

What to consider when buying a dual-fuel generator

While there are plenty of dual-fuel generators on the market, they aren’t cheap, and many of them simply aren’t worth the investment. Some are poorly made and don’t last long. Others don’t deliver reliable performance, so they may not work when the lights go out. To make a wise purchase, you should keep a few things in mind to judge whether a generator is worth the cost. When it comes to connectivity, it offers ample ports. They include a 120V 30A RV Locking Outlet (L5-30R), 120/240V 30A RV Locking Outlet (L14-30R), and a pair of Two GFCI 120V 20A household outlets.

Power output

Simply put, if a generator can’t give you enough power to meet your needs, it isn’t worth buying. Manufacturers usually provide two numbers, both measured in watts (W), which will help you understand how much power a generator produces. First, a generator’s “Rated” output tells you how much power it produces at any given moment. Second, many generators also have a “peak” output spec, which refers to the maximum amount of power that a particular unit can handle blasting out in a short burst. This comes in handy if you plan to turn appliances on and off, which can cause sudden surges of electrical draw.

Ideally, you want a generator with a rated output equal to your typical power needs. If you’re simply looking to power and recharge a handful of devices alongside a simple appliance or two, 1,500W-2,000W might be all you need. If you are turning a lot of random power tools on and off, or powering an RV, look for something around 4,000W. However, if you’re looking to power a house, you’ll likely need at least 8,000W or more.

Fuel capacity

With petrol and propane, dual-fuel generators can keep the power going longer than most single-fuel power solutions. Of course, that depends on how much fuel you have in your tanks. Most dual-fuel generator gas tanks run between 2 and 10 gallons, which is pretty typical of single-fuel generators that run solely on gas. Propane is almost always stored in separate pressurized gas canisters that are attached via a hose, exactly like you would a propane grill. So the propane capacity depends on the size of your canister rather than the generator itself.

In both cases, though, you should keep in mind that more storage means more weight. If you’re looking for a portable generator, you’ll want to balance those two factors. If you’re buying a generator to back up your home’s power and plan to leave the generator in one place, weigh it down as much as you like.

Starting type

Dual-fuel generators use one of two starting mechanisms: either a recoil cord or an electric starter. With a cord, you pull the handle hard and fast to produce the rotation necessary to fire the generator. It requires more physical effort but tends to be more reliable. An electric starter is a push-button solution—no exertion is required, but it only works when its internal battery is charged.

Operating noise

Generators are pretty loud, which can be a nuisance if you keep one (or more) in or near your home. Generators tend to get louder as they generate more power. (There are exceptions, though.) If you’re going to keep your generator around your house or run it while camping in a quiet spot, you will want to keep the noise to a minimum. 

Typically speaking (but not always), higher-quality generators manage to turn the volume down thanks to the use of thick shielding and other design elements. If your priority is pure power, though, you may simply have to put up with the noise or find another way to minimize it.

Dual-fuel generators give you the advantage of running propane, which generators process more quietly than gas. Most dual-fuel generators produce between 50 dB (roughly the same as a refrigerator) and 90 dB (about the same as a small-engine motorcycle).

Size, weight, and features

There may be other logistical considerations you’ll want to keep in mind based on your specific needs and setup, such as the specific dimensions of the generator and how much it weighs. If your generator sits at home for backup power, size, and weight might not be much of an issue. For mobile uses like camping or worksites, however, you will want something you can move without too much strain.

There are also several physical features for transportation that are common but not universal, like wheels or a lift hook bar to hook onto a crane. You may also find special safety features, such as CO2 safety shutoffs, over-speed shutoffs, or high-temperature alarms. For better or worse, none of these features are ubiquitous enough to be “must-have” features across the board, but you should absolutely look for generators with specific features that feel important to you.

FAQs

Q: Are dual-fuel generators worth it?

While dual-fuel generators tend to be slightly more expensive than traditional ones, they are more fuel-efficient, lowering costs in the long run. They’re also significantly quieter when running on propane rather than gas, which is great if you plan to keep it within earshot.

Dual-fuel generators are also extremely valuable when fuel isn’t readily available. If you’re preparing for a natural disaster like a hurricane, for example, it’s better to be capable of using whatever fuel you can get your hands on.

Q: What is the most powerful dual-fuel generator?

Theoretically, the sky’s the limit in terms of power. In reality, though, the most powerful consumer-grade dual-fuel generators top out at around 12,000W.

Q: Is it better to run a dual-fuel generator on gas or propane?

Gas produces more power, but the generator runs more quietly while using propane, and it’s less damaging to the environment. Having a dual-fuel generator means you can choose or at least have access to both options.

Q: How long will a dual-fuel generator run on propane?

That depends entirely on the size of your propane tank, the generator’s engine, and the amount of power it’s generating. For example, our “best overall” pick can run for about seven hours at 25 percent power output capacity using a typical 20-pound propane tank.

Q: What is the difference between an inverter and a generator?

A generator produces the electricity, while a power inverter stores and reconfigures the energy. Virtually all consumer-grade generators have inverters integrated into them.

Q: Who makes the quietest dual-fuel generator?

The quietest dual-fuel generator you’re going to find produces around 50 dB. At 52 dB, our “best portable” pick, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF, is about as quiet as they come.

Final thoughts on the best dual-fuel generators

A dual-fuel generator can really be an asset when you’re camping or when prepping for an emergency. That said, it is a major investment, so make sure you’re buying the right size generator for whatever you’re doing. To power a whole house, bigger is obviously better. But you might be better off with something more portable for powering an RV or a casual blackout backup. Also, consider the possibility that a more environmentally friendly power solution, like a solar generator, might be able to give you the power you need with a smaller carbon footprint.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dual-fuel generators in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor saunas for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-saunas/ Wed, 08 Jun 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=448299
The best outdoor saunas
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Want to get healthier? Do sweat the small things but do it in the comfort of your own backyard.

The post The best outdoor saunas for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor saunas
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Aleko Outdoor Rustic Cedar Aleko Outdoor Rustic Cedar
SEE IT

A fantastic overall option that’s more affordable than some competition.

Best infrared Enlighten Rustic 5 Person Sauna Enlighten Rustic 5 Person Sauna
SEE IT

All the sauna effects without the high temperatures.

Best budget Sunray 3-person outdoor sauna on a plain background Sunray Grandby 3-Person
SEE IT

Get a traditional sauna experience during any season.

Saunas boast an array of health benefits and for those looking to make an investment in their wellness, an outdoor sauna provides one of the most authentic and enjoyable experiences. Outdoor saunas were traditionally used across Northern Europe as far back as 2000 BC. Today, however, many people think of Finnish saunas, which use stones heated over a fire to create steam and heat. And there’s a reason most people think of Finland when they think of outdoor saunas: they can be rejuvenating in cold weather. You can use an outdoor sauna year-round but, when the temperatures drop, saunas can really help you get through the winter and, hey, maybe actually enjoy it. Whether you’re looking for the best outdoor saunas or the best home saunas, we curated this list of options that include both traditional saunas, infrared saunas, and even wood-burning models.

How we chose the best outdoor saunas

We scoured write-ups and reviews to find the best outdoor saunas for our readers. We wanted to include a range of products that could appeal to any user, no matter how much space you have for a home install. We know that outdoor saunas can be a serious investment so, while we included products across multiple price levels, we prioritized those that had materials or features that made them worth the money. We also looked at capacity, sustainability of materials, and complexity of assembly.

Most of the products we included have a DIY option to minimize installation costs, but this can be a laborious process. We also wanted to ensure that our selections used high-quality, non-toxic materials like natural cedar. Last, we ensured that each sauna we selected—no matter how cheap—has a high-quality heating element, as these can make or break your experience. (No one wants a really slow-warming or inefficient sauna.) 

The best outdoor saunas: Reviews & Recommendations

Our guide includes a range of products that could appeal to any user, no matter your budget or how much space you have for a home install.

Best overall: Aleko Outdoor Rustic Cedar

Homedepot

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This indoor or outdoor barrel sauna fits eight people while minimizing unusable space, resulting in a relatively affordable and energy-efficient sauna. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 93” W x 72” D x 75” H
  • Materials: Western Canadian Red Cedar, tempered glass, and stainless steel
  • Type of Heater: Harvia 8kW ETL-approved electric heater for steam or dry heat

Pros 

  • Great price-to-quality ratio 
  • Can be used indoors and outdoors 
  • Free shipping or local pick up at a retailer like Home Depot

Cons 

  • Manufactured overseas 
  • The interior doesn’t have any windows, so the door is the only source of natural light 

Aleko’s outdoor sauna tops our list because it is a high-quality barrel sauna without an absurd price tag. While the exterior may not be made with premium lumber as some of our other selections, this outdoor barrel sauna comes with a comparable 8W Harvia electric heater. Harvia is a high-end Finnish brand, and you’ll see these heaters featured in other saunas below. Also, while some other sauna kits charge extra for components and accessories (like the heater, bucket, ladle, and thermometer), this includes all of these parts in one package. 

Like most traditional saunas, you can choose either dry or steam heat by adding water to the sauna stones. Many prefer this traditional experience to the hands-off infrared heating panels. We also love that the sauna heats up quickly because of the space-efficient design. Pick this up and you can have your own outdoor wood sauna in less than a week. 

Best infrared: Enlighten Rustic 5-person Sauna

enlightensauna

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This large outdoor infrared sauna is made with eco-certified, non-toxic materials and is great for cold climates, as it is insulated.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 81.5” W x 61.5” D x 86” H
  • Materials: Western Canadian Red Cedar, asphalt shingles 
  • Capacity: 5 people

Pros 

  • Insulated to retain maximum heat even in cold weather
  • Plenty of features, including a magazine rack and cup holders
  • Two full-spectrum heaters and 10 carbon far infrared heaters 

Cons 

  • You need to request a quote for the price 
  • Slightly complicated installation

This gorgeous 5-person outdoor home sauna is made with Western Canadian Red Cedar paneling and is great for a family or larger group looking for an infrared sauna, no matter where you live. Thanks to its insulation, this sauna can withstand colder climates and still provide comfy warmth even in the winter. It houses a total of 12 heaters, two of which are full-spectrum infrared, including bench and floor carbon heaters. 

Customize your experience by playing music through the built-in Bluetooth speaker or filling your space with reading material in the magazine rack—it won’t get as hot as a traditional sauna so people often extend their sessions to up to an hour. The exterior and interior materials are eco-certified and non-toxic, but the cedar still provides the feel of a more traditional sauna.

Best steam: Traditional Outdoor Country Living Barrel Sauna by Saunacore

northernsaunas

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This traditional-style steam sauna comes with a wood-burning stove option for total off-the-grid immersion. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 96” W x 72” D x 96” H 
  • Materials: Canadian Clear Western Red Cedar and tempered glass 
  • Type of Heat: Saunacore CTW-WS12 wood-burning stove or electric heater

Pros 

  • Choose either a wood-burning stove or electric heater.
  • Quick heat time because of barrel design
  • Available in both 6ft and 8ft lengths

Cons 

  • The electric heater isn’t very sightly 
  • Wood-burning stoves are not allowed in all municipalities and may come with health concerns

For those who don’t want to deal with the electrical installation or don’t have the means to hook up a sauna, this outdoor barrel sauna comes with a wood-burning stove. (However, check your local regulations to ensure wood-burning stoves are allowed in your area.) Don’t worry; unlike traditional smoke saunas, this one has an extensive ventilation system. 

It’s spacious, well-designed, and customizable to your budget and needs. You could add a porch with bench seats or substitute American Poplar wood if you need a hypoallergenic and scent-free alternative to cedar. It also comes in both 6-foot and 8-foot lengths, so it’s perfect for larger groups or community outdoor spaces. 

While the barrel design is classic, it’s also energy efficient because of the reduced volume. So, with the design and the wood-burning stove, this sauna heats up pretty quickly. Our only complaint is that you don’t get much natural light exposure from the only window on the door. 

Best barrel: Redwood Outdoors Thermowood Panorama Sauna

Redwood Outdoors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A beautiful, full-sized glass window makes this an ideal backyard sauna if you want to take in your natural surroundings. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 71” W x 73” D x 76.5” H
  • Materials: Scandinavian softwood, stainless steel components
  • Type of Heat: Harvia 8kW Clindro Electric heater for steam or dry heat

Pros 

  • Natural light from the full back window 
  • Wood sourced from PEFC-certified forests 
  • Self-assembly takes four hours

Cons 

  • Only comes with a 1-year warranty

We swooned as soon as we saw the big, panoramic back window on Redwood Outdoors’ Thermowood Panorama Barrel Saua. It is designed with classic Scandinavian principles and features an interlocking system that forms a tight, natural seal for energy efficiency. Thermowood, which is heat-treated Scandinavian softwood, is durable and resistant to heat, humidity, and fungi. It’s also naturally insulating, so you can use this sauna year-round, even when snow is falling outside. You can even add on roof shingles if you want to further weather-proof your sauna.

While the large window provides ample outdoor views, the interior is equally impressive. The included Harvia 8kW Cilindro Electric heater is absolutely gorgeous, and the bench seats have ergonomic backrests for comfy lounging. Best of all, you can easily assemble it at your house with only a few hours and some basic hand tools.

Best two-person: Clearlight Sanctuary 2

Audacia

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Feature-packed infrared sauna with Bluetooth compatibility and an integrated audio system. 

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 51” W x 46” D x 71.5” H 
  • Materials: Cedartec coating, Western Canadian Red Cedar exterior, mahogany wood interior, and ceramic/carbon heating panels 
  • Type of Heat: Full-spectrum infrared

Pros 

  • Full-spectrum infrared technology that is rare in outdoor saunas 
  • A smartphone app allows you to control it remotely 
  • Integrated Bluetooth audio system and charging station

Cons 

  • The exterior appears cheap because of Clearlight’s Cedartec coating
  • Expensive for a two-person sauna

This elegant backyard outdoor sauna from wellness brand Audacia is packed with features. If you want to listen to music or watch TV from a tablet during your session, you can do that with the Bluetooth audio system and outside tablet cradle (which also doubles as the door handle). Inside, choose between an ergonomic seat style and a flat seat by flipping over the bench to fit your comfort. 

While these features are beneficial, what really sets this Clearlight outdoor sauna apart for us is the full-spectrum infrared technology. Infrared technology eliminates the need for excessively high temperatures so that you can stay in the sauna for longer. The company’s proprietary True Wave™ heaters line the back, side walls, floor, and front wall to provide 360-coverage and powerful heat. Overall, it’s one of the best small outdoor saunas with infrared heating on the market. 

Best kit: Dundalk Leisurecraft Outdoor Luna Sauna

the hardware supply

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High-quality components, a modern design, and “choose-your-upgrades” options put this at the top of our list for best sauna kits. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 85” W x 86” D x 86” H
  • Materials: White cedar, bronze-tempered glass, stainless steel
  • Type of Heater: 6kW Saaku Electric heater for steam or dry (not included in price) 

Pros 

  • Quick, 20-minute heat-up time
  • Great design that blends modern and traditional elements
  • Upgrade the kit depending on your needs
  • Sustainably-sourced cedar 

Cons 

  • Can get pricey once you start upgrading components
  • Lengthy assembly—expect it to take the whole day if you DIY 

Somehow modern and classic at the same time, this outdoor sauna has wooed us with its incredible aesthetic design and sustainably sourced materials. The full-size door and large window really make this feel like an outdoor sauna because you’ll be able to get glimpses into your surrounding environment as you soak in the dry or steam heat. The inside has two cedar benches so that you can fit two in luxury or four comfortably. 

The price point fluctuates for Dundalk Leisurecraft’s Luna Sauna because you can customize it to fit your needs, making it a top choice for an outdoor sauna kit. Upgrade to include a front porch or lounge bench option if you want the added space and comfort, or just add some basics like an outdoor solar light and sand mount wall timer if you’re trying to minimize expenses. 

Also, while you may want to hire an electrician, many people opt to set this up themselves. The manual installation is relatively simple yet lengthy, so plan a day around it. 

Best budget: Sunray Grandby 3-Person

Homedepot

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A more budget-friendly option for an infrared sauna that heats up in minutes.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 69” W x 47 D x 83” H
  • Materials: Canadian hemlock 
  • Type of Heat: Far infrared

Pros 

  • The price tag is appealing
  • 7-year structural warranty
  • Easy to set up

Cons 

  • Not as powerful as many outdoor saunas

Okay, let’s start by addressing the obvious: home saunas are an investment, and no outdoor sauna is cheap. But this one clocks in at around $3,000, making it a more budget-friendly option than anything else on our list. It comes equipped with seven far-infrared ceramic heaters to quickly warm the room in less than 15 minutes.

The temperature maxes out at 140 degrees Fahrenheit, which is standard for infrared saunas. It comes with a built-in bench and lighting, cup holders, and a Bluetooth/USB-compatible audio player. Although this sauna can technically fit three people, it’s a better option for two people. 

Overall, this is a solid entry-level infrared sauna option with easy assembly and an aesthetic of all-wood construction.

What to consider when shopping for the best outdoor sauna

Regardless of whether it’s a larger home sauna or a portable sauna you’re seeking, there are some essential terms and features that you should know about before heading out into the market:

Price

While saunas don’t cost much to maintain, the upfront costs can be high, especially when considering installation and electrician costs. Set a budget and then determine if you’re okay with the baseline model of the sauna or if you want to add extra features. Some saunas do not come with the heater in the price tag, so check this before you buy. 

The price of the best outdoor saunas can vary widely, but if you need to prioritize one thing, prioritize the heating element in the unit. While you may be able to cut costs on a less aesthetic design or smaller footprint, you shouldn’t skimp on the heater. This is one of the most important components of the sauna’s performance.

Capacity

You can find outdoor saunas with different capacities, but they generally range from 2-person saunas to 8-person outdoor saunas. Two-person saunas have a smaller footprint but will not fit the whole family or social group.

Material

Look for outdoor wood saunas with high-quality materials to make the most of your investment. You’ll want to look for a well-constructed sauna to retain heat, a premium electric heater or infrared panels, and comfortable benches. Wood, like cedar, will smell great as the sauna heats up.

Where you live

If you live in a cold region, you will be happier in the winter if you buy a traditional sauna instead of an infrared. As infrared saunas operate at lower temperatures, they may be less enjoyable if the outdoor temperatures are too cold. Alternatively, if you live in the desert, an infrared sauna may be more enjoyable in the summer because you won’t have to withstand such high temps.

FAQs

Q: How much do outdoor saunas cost?

Outdoor saunas ran in price based on materials, size, and components. They range from around $3,000 to upwards of $12,000. You’ll also have to factor in installation (some saunas are DIY) and electrical assistance for higher-voltage units.

Q: Will I have to assemble my outdoor sauna?

Many modern outdoor saunas are “pre-fab” meaning they are pre-fabricated and ship in larger parts to go together quickly. Some outdoor home saunas have self-assembly, while others require installation. Check with each manufacturer for the complexity of installation before you purchase. Most manufacturers will recommend hiring a professional electrician to assist with the installation due to the high voltage requirements.

Q: Are outdoor saunas expensive to run?

Many outdoor saunas are designed to run extremely efficiently, ranging from 1kWh for small models to 6kWh for larger saunas. Depending on where you live, 1kWh of electricity can range in price from $0.10 to $0.34 per hour. Typically, sauna owners will not notice a change in their energy bills and will spend less than $1/hour to run their sauna.

Q: Can you use an outdoor sauna in the winter?

Winter is a great time to get warm, purifying benefits of an outdoor sauna. You can use any outdoor sauna in the winter, although barrel saunas and insulated saunas will have the highest performance in cold temperatures.

Q: How do I protect my outdoor sauna?

If you buy an outdoor sauna, it should be treated or designed to withstand the elements. Some saunas come with mildew- and UV-resistant coating, while others use naturally durable wood like cedar. If you do decide to treat the exterior, you can use wood stain with UV protection or a wood-penetrating oil to reduce the weathering of your outdoor sauna. 

For the interior, do not use any chemicals or household treatments. Maintenance is minimal, but you should clean your sauna regularly to get rid of sweat or buildup. If you’re purchasing a barrel sauna, use the cradle supports to keep it suspended off the ground, reducing its exposure to moisture.

Q: Are infrared saunas better than traditional?

Both infrared and traditional saunas have their benefits. 

Infrared saunas require lower operating temperatures because the heat penetrates your body directly rather than heating the air around you. It raises your core temperature much more effectively than a traditional sauna. Infrared saunas are great for people looking to maximize their health benefits without exposing themselves to very high temperatures or humidity.

Traditional saunas, on the other hand, use either dry heat or steam to warm the air in the sauna. They are more reminiscent of Finnish saunas and have a heating element, rocks, and water. Both dry and steam saunas can reach higher temperatures than infrared, so you can’t spend as long in the sauna as with an infrared. If you’re looking for shorter, yet intense steam or heat sessions, a traditional sauna is a better fit.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor saunas

The Aleko 4-person barrel sauna is a great introductory outdoor sauna for any backyard, as it comes with a high-quality heating system comparable to more premium models. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor saunas for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor TVs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-tv/ Thu, 11 Mar 2021 13:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-outdoor-tv/
man in a hoodie sitting in an old armchair outside watching an outdoor tv
Jordan Koons via Unsplash

Entertain guests with fresh entertainment in the fresh air with a fresh new outdoor TV.

The post The best outdoor TVs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
man in a hoodie sitting in an old armchair outside watching an outdoor tv
Jordan Koons via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall The Samsung Terrace TV Samsung 55-inch Class QLED The Terrace Outdoor TV
SEE IT

This television is IP55 rated and features 4K QLED for excellent picture quality.

Best budget Sunbrite Veranda is the best 55-inch outdoor TV. SunBriteTV 43-inch Outdoor Television for Shade
SEE IT

Its picture quality is high despite its low price.

Best for partial sun Furrion Partial Sun Outdoor TV product image Furrion Aurora Partial Sun Series Outdoor TV
SEE IT

A self-adjusting screen means more time watching TV and less time fiddling with settings.

An outdoor TV can change the entire vibe of your al fresco living space. Want to play whiffle ball while you watch Field of Dreams? No problem. Most standard TVs can’t withstand the elements, and not all outdoor TVs offer the same level of protection and versatility. Some work on covered patios and decks, while others can handle full exposure to rain and snow. Sunlight makes a difference, and most TVs will fall under one of three categories: shade, partial sun, and those that will offer great picture quality no matter what the conditions are. Other factors to consider when shopping for an outdoor TV are size, sound quality, and price. With so many options out there, choosing the right one can be a little confusing, but we’re here to help you find the best outdoor TV for all your viewing needs.

How we chose the best outdoor TVs

As pool lovers, grill geeks, and float fanatics, we’re excited about everything outdoorsy. We looked at critical reviews and consumer impressions, along with important features like weatherproofing and anti-glare technology, to narrow down the best outdoor TVs. We then took that list, culled through pages of specs and opinions from the most trusted sources, and selected the top six options we’re presenting to you.

The best outdoor TVs: Reviews & Recommendations

From enjoying America’s pastime in prime time to movie nights under the stars, the best outdoor TVs can handle it all. After plenty of research, here are our outdoor television picks. All you’ll need is some popcorn and a cooler full of drinks and you’ll be entertaining in no time.

Best overall: Samsung 55-inch Class QLED The Terrace Outdoor TV

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An IP55 rating and 4K QLED ensure durability and excellent screen quality.

Specs

  • Sizes: 55″, 65″ 75″
  • Resolution: 4K, 8K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Excellent screen quality
  • Intuitive

Cons

  • Decrease in quality at outer angles

With a 55-inch screen utilizing QLED technology, this Samsung TV is our pick for best outdoor TV overall. Equipped with smart TV technology, this TV lets you easily stream your favorite sports and movies without having to buy a separate device. Although its anti-glare technology and exceptional brightness levels mean that it works well on sunny days, you may notice a decrease in quality at the outer angles if you have very wide seating. Overall though, it’s no surprise that Oprah named The Terrace one of her favorite things in 2020.

Best with soundbar: Furrion FDUP55CSA 55″ Aurora Partial Sun Outdoor TV Bundle with 2.1-Channel Soundbar

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This outdoor television combines excellent sound quality with clear audio.

Specs

  • Sizes: 55″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Included soundbar
  • Works in a wide temperature range
  • Daytime and nighttime viewing settings

Cons

  • Pricey

While picture is important for consuming quality content, audio also plays a similarly huge role. This 55-inch outdoor TV offers all the features you’d expect out of a high-end model, including 4K, HDR, and a display that’s rated against weather, temperatures, and even impacts. It also, however, comes with a relatively powerful 75W Bluetooth soundbar that mounts directly with the TV itself. It’s easy to connect and adds serious audio oomph that will really make a difference when you’re trying to watch the latest James Bond movie and birds won’t stop screaming in your yard. Even if you’re not going to use the TV, you can hook up your phone to the soundbar and use it as an outdoor speaker for playing music.

Best for shaded areas: SunBriteTV Weatherproof Outdoor 55-inch Veranda

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A backlit 4K HDR screen and an aluminum case make it a welcome addition to your covered patio.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 55″, 65″, 75″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: No

Pros

  • Durable
  • Multiple sizes
  • Built-in speakers

Cons

  • Is not a smart TV

This model from SunBriteTV is durable enough to live in a shaded area like a covered porch but won’t get damaged by wind, rain, dust, and stray insects. The 55-inch screen is up to 50-percent brighter than your typical indoor TV and comes with excellent built-in speakers. Unlike some of its more expensive rivals, this outdoor screen isn’t a smart TV, but it’s easy to connect multiple media sources to it through its three HDMI ports and single USB port.

Best for partial sun: Furrion Aurora Partial Sun Series 43-inch 4K UHD LED Outdoor TV

Furrion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A self-adjusting screen means less time fiddling with settings and more time enjoying the sun.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 50″, 55″, 65″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Built-in fans
  • Self-adjusting screen
  • Waterproof remote
  • Streaming ready

Cons

  • Not the loudest speakers

This Furrion HDR10 LED outdoor TV is a terrific choice if you’re watching in an area that gets partial sun. In fact, the 400 nits screen will even adjust itself according to how much light it’s getting, so there’s no need to constantly fiddle with the brightness settings. It’s IP54 rated for when it does rain and has built-in cooling fans for when it’s hot. And if your weather gets a bit intense, you’ll be happy to know the screen comes equipped with enhanced protection against scratches and impacts thanks to XtremeShield IK08-rated tempered glass.

Best budget: SunBriteTV 43-inch Outdoor Television for Shade

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This television is hard on the elements but easy on your wallet.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 55″, 65″, 75″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Weatherproof media bay included
  • Powder-coated rust-proof aluminum exterior
  • Easy cable hookups

Cons

  • Sound doesn’t travel as far compared to others

The smallest and least expensive option in the SunBriteTV Veranda line, this unit is designed to be enjoyed in the shade but can withstand rain, snow, dust, insects, and whatever else Mother Nature decides to throw at it. The Ultra 4K HDR LED screen delivers a crisp picture that’s 50-percent brighter than a standard TV and is perfect for patios, screened-in porches, and covered decks. This SunBrite TV comes with a large weatherproof media bay so whatever you plug into it will be protected as well.

What to consider when buying the best outdoor TVs

Before you bust out the snacks at your next shindig, there are a couple of things you’ll need to think about when choosing the best outdoor TV for your space. For example, if you plan on watching your new set under your porch, you probably won’t need a model that offers the same level of waterproofing and anti-glare technology as a full sun option.

Placement

Sun exposure is a major consideration when choosing an outdoor TV. Partial sun models might have some glare, and some will only deliver a great picture if they’re in the shade.

However, the picture might not be the only thing that suffers if you aren’t choosy about your new TV. Models designed to be enjoyed under a covered porch may not be as resilient to extreme weather conditions as ones that are meant to live in a backyard. In some cases, it may be wise to invest in a cover, just as you would for your grill or ping pong table.

TV size

If you want to keep everyone from invading each other’s personal bubble, but don’t want your guests squinting to see the game, a huge outdoor TV will keep everyone entertained and safe at the same time. Plus, if you’re a movie buff, a large TV is terrific for simulating the fun of a drive-in without leaving your home. Just remember, the bigger the TV, the bigger the price tag.

Audio quality

When you’re shopping, make sure you pay attention to audio quality. Some models don’t come with built-in speakers, meaning you’ll have to connect them to something else unless you just plan on watching old, silent movies. Other models come with speakers but deliver less quality.

One way to make sure that you don’t end up straining your ears is to find an outdoor TV that comes equipped with a soundbar. A soundbar (also known as a media bar), is a speaker that is wider than it is tall and delivers superior audio quality when mounted above or below the TV. In a pinch, you could also pair waterproof Bluetooth party speakers with your TV, and then be ready when the party migrates to the pool.

Amount of shade and sun

If you plan on enjoying your TV on a screened-in porch or in a covered gazebo, there may not be a reason to shell out extra money on the latest anti-glare technology. The best outdoor TV is suited for where you’re watching it—there are great options that work in the shade while still offering protection from temperature shifts, rain, insects, and dust.

If you have a covered porch that receives some amount of light but isn’t directly exposed to the sun, consider a partial shade TV. These models will have brighter screens compared to shade-friendly TVs and will offer more protection against glare.

Price

Although outdoor TVs have come down in price considerably over the past couple of years, they’re still relatively expensive compared to standard models. The cheapest outdoor designs are not designed to truly live outside. In fact, some won’t work at all if they aren’t in the shade because the glare from the sun will make it impossible to see what’s on the screen.

If you’re just looking for a TV to watch on your covered deck or screened-in porch, look for options that are durable enough to be (partially) exposed to the elements. And expect to pay between $1,500 and $5,500, depending on brand, size, and features.

FAQs

Q: What is the best outdoor television?

The best outdoor television depends on where you’re going to watch it. The most important thing to consider is how much sun the television will be exposed to because glare can be a major issue if the TV is designed to only work in the shade.

Q: What is the best outdoor TV for a large viewing party?

The best outdoor TV for a viewing party depends on where and how many people are watching it. The most important consideration is sunlight, but if you’re trying to keep your friends and family socially distant, then you’ll need to consider the size of the screen. Another thing to keep in mind is what angle people will be watching it from, as some outdoor models lose quality if they’re not watched head-on.

Q: Do I need an outdoor TV enclosure?

Outdoor TV enclosures are usually designed to keep an indoor model safe when it’s used outside. Most outdoor TVs are built to be weatherproof and can withstand extreme temperatures. That being said, investing in a cover for your TV is still a good idea.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor TVs

Enjoying your television in the great outdoors can be a wonderful change of pace, especially after a year of being cooped up inside. The most important thing to consider when shopping for the best outdoor TV is where you’re going to watch it because different models can handle different conditions. A TV built for shade is not recommended for sun exposure. Likewise, one that is meant to be watched in the sun will probably be wasted sitting under a covered porch.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

More TV roundups to help you find the perfect set

The post The best outdoor TVs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric bikes of 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-electric-bikes/ Thu, 31 Mar 2022 15:32:16 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=401436
Best Electric Bikes
Stan Horaczek

Power up your bike ride!

The post The best electric bikes of 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Electric Bikes
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Ride1UP Electric Bicycle Ride1Up Rift
SEE IT

The Ride1Up Rift is an outstanding electric bicycle bike whether you’re headed to work or joyriding around town.

Fastest Best Electric Bikes Priority Current
SEE IT

The Priority Current gets up to max speed quickly and maintains that speed once it gets there.

Best budget Ancheer Blue Spark Ancheer Blue Spark
SEE IT

Offering all the basic ebike elements at a lower cost, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great budget ebike.

While electric bikes have existed in some form or another for more than a century, the modern version was properly introduced in the 1990s—to little fanfare. At the time, they were considered something of a novelty and failed to generate much interest. That changed in the 2000s, when ebikes took off in China. In the last 10 years, the rest of us have come around: There are countless ebikes now, which come in configurations to suit every rider’s needs. But with so many to choose from, how do you pick the one that will put you out in front of the pack? The best electric bikes deliver power (duh), comfort, style, and smart features, whether you’re riding for sport, for work, or simply as a way to get around.

How we chose the best electric bikes

As a lifelong outdoor and fitness enthusiast, bicycling has always been a part of my recreational repertoire. From daily commuting to work via road bike to mountain biking through the rurals of my native state of Washington, I’ve spent more than my fair share of time perched upon the pedals. When it came to electric bikes in particular, I took the testing very seriously—by which I mean I had a lot of fun riding around! At this point, I’ve ridden ebikes from an expansive range of brands—both renowned and up-and-coming—have discussed the pros and cons of different options with industry experts, and have even built several of them piece by piece straight out of the box.

I’ve written about outdoor and fitness gear, including electric bikes, for publications like Popular Mechanics, Runner’s World, the Manual, Thrillist, the Daily Beast, and the Los Angeles Times. All that testing has made me an expert at recognizing genuine quality over hype. In categories where my judgment was a tie, I looked to impressions from real-world owners to verify which ebikes deliver a truly electrifying experience.

The best electric bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

Our selections for the best electric bikes span a spectrum of budgets, from several hundred dollars to several thousand. We’ve included ebikes from a variety of categories that include a fairly wide range of features, so while which is right for you is determined largely by your specific needs, we think the options below cover the bases for most new and veteran riders.

Best overall: Ride1Up Rift

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Ride1Up’s Rift is easy to assemble and feels smooth to ride.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 52V 20 Ah
  • Range: 45-60 miles
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 2-3

Pros

  • Easy to assemble
  • Solid frame and overall construction
  • Comfortable to ride
  • Cost

Cons

  • Weight

After a few rides, I began to see Ride1Up’s Rift as wish fulfillment for anyone curious about electric bicycles. The Rift was almost fully assembled when it arrived, which is very helpful if you’ve never put together an electric bicycle. We recommend following Ride1Up’s video instructions for a step-by-step guide on putting it together. It’s possible to assemble this bicycle by yourself, but it’s far easier for two people since one can keep the Rift steady, or lift up its frame while the other attaches its front wheel. The one accessory you’ll need when assembling any eBike—beyond the correct tools—is an air compressor to fill its tires.

Once the bicycle was set up and a helmet was firmly strapped to my head, it was time to take the Rift for a ride on the suburban streets of Long Island. The area I rode in was paved but hilly, giving me the chance to test this electric bicycle’s motor. I started by riding around without any “pedal assistance” to get a feel for how the Rift handled. It’s a heavy electric bicycle, but after a couple of minutes, I had a good handle on how to take wide and sharper turns or how its fat tires would handle bumps in the road, hoses, or smaller potholes.

None of these smaller obstacles posed a problem, thanks to the Rift’s fat tires, though we wouldn’t recommend going over huge bumps just for fun. Ride1UP recommends checking the bicycle’s brakes several times before taking it for a ride to make sure they’re fully operational, and these small test rides gave me the opportunity to do so—though I also checked them before getting on the Rift for the first time.

All of the Rift’s pedal assistance features are accessible via a 2.2-inch color screen mounted on the left handlebar. It’s easy to check your trip time, power consumption, and pedal assistance level (between one and five) at a glance. You shouldn’t be spending a lot of time looking at the screen while riding, so we appreciate how cleanly this information is arranged. As its name suggests, pedal assistance will only kick in when you’re pedaling. The electric bicycle’s motor will kick on after a few seconds, which gives you time to adjust to the increase in speed. Settings one and two feel like a nice little push while you’re going up hills—enough of a boost to make them easier to climb while still requiring effort.

Cranking the Rift’s pedal assistance up to four or five will turn pedaling into a performative act. We could get up steep hills easily, but always felt completely in control of the bicycle. Yes, the Rift can up to 28 miles per hour with pedal assistance cranked up to five, but we never felt like we were going too quickly. If you’ve never used an electric bicycle before, we recommend sticking to the lower power levels to start and working your way up.

Overall, the Ride1UP Rift is a stupendously smooth ride whether you’re upgrading from a different electric bicycle or have always ridden an analog bike. It strikes the right balance between easy assembly, ease of use, comfort, and overall design.

Best moped-style: Ride1Up Revv 1

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 52V 15 Ah
  • Range: 30-60 miles
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 2-3, off-road mode

Pros

  • Available in full suspension or hardtail configurations
  • Multi-class speed system for use on and off roads
  • Very comfortable suspension and seat deliver a smooth ride

Cons

  • Relatively heavy
  • Non-adjustable seat

The Ride1Up Revv 1 is one of the most durable moped-style electric bikes we’ve tested. It offers switchable speed classes and multiple suspension options for a customizable and streamlined riding experience. The bike comes equipped with 20″ x 4″ all-terrain tires, a 750-watt motor, and a 52-volt (15 Ah) battery that offers a range of up to 60 miles on a single charge. While the Revv 1 ships ready-to-go in Class 2 mode, users can unlock a top speed of 28 miles per hour by switching into Class 3 mode using the bike’s control buttons and LCD display. For legal use on private roads, an additional off-road mode is also available to bring the bike’s top speed above 28 miles per hour. The Revv 1 sports a vaguely motorcycle-like design from its frame to its accessories. Weighing in at 93 pounds when fully assembled, it also feels like a real motorized vehicle more than a traditional bike. While it’s possible to assemble this bike on your own, we’d recommend enlisting another set of hands or even a bike shop to be safe.

The Revv 1 offers one of the most comfortable rides in the electric bike market thanks to its pillowy suspension, rugged tires, and extra large seat. We easily cruised along both pavement and fire roads without issue. Riders who normally stick to slower speeds and off-road riding may prefer the more responsive feel of the hardtail configuration. Still, the full-suspension configuration is ideal for maximum flexibility whether you’re commuting or hitting the trails. We do wish the Revv 1 offered some measure of seat height adjustment for users with longer legs; however, overall, the bike’s 32.5-inch seat height should feel comfortable enough for the majority of riders.

Best fat tire: Juiced RipCurrent S

Juiced Bikes

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: TheJuiced RipCurrent S is powerful, comfortable, and stylish.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 52V 19.2 Ah
  • Range: 40-120 miles
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 3

Pros

  • Better than average range
  • Super comfortable seating and handlebars
  • Awesome throttle
  • Rack, fenders, and powerful headlight included

Cons

  • Very heavy

Before you even start riding, the Juiced RipCurrent S delivers a favorable impression. It looks amazing, boasting an aesthetic that fuses classic road-bike elements with a modern tech edge. The seat is highly comfortable, the handlebars ergonomic, and the overall build quality is immediately evident.

Once you’ve started down the road, you’ll quickly realize why the RipCurrent S excels at the head of the pack. Its thumb-controlled throttle is smooth and powerful, capable of propelling you up to 28 MPH with minimal pedaling exertion. The 9-speed cassette gears shift crisply, and as you’re charging ahead, you’ll enjoy a supremely smooth ride.

All of that is great, but perhaps most important is the RipCurrent S’s outstanding electrical performance. With a range that spans 40 to 120 miles depending on how hard you push it, I tested the RipCurrent while riding alongside several other ebikes and this one accelerated faster than most and outlasted them all.

What’s more, with its sturdy, integrated carrying rack, an uber-bright headlight, and fenders, bell, and tail light included, the RipCurrent S has pretty much all the features any typical rider would need.

All in all, the Juiced RipCurrent S is a truly superior ebike. It’s ideal for daily commutes, and thanks to its front air suspension and fat tires, it’s even fairly off-road capable.

Best cargo: RadPower RadWagon 4

RadPower

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: RadPower’s ebikes are all solid, but their RadWagon 4 is an unparalleled cargo hauler.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 48V 14Ah
  • Range: 25-50
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 2

Pros

  • Massive cargo carrier
  • Twist-grip, motorcycle-style throttle
  • Surprisingly good acceleration
  • Highly adjustable seating and handlebars

Cons

  • All that cargo capacity does reduce the range

Generally speaking, RadPower’s electric bikes all offer the utmost in durability, comfort, adjustability, and customization options. Our favorite design, the RadWagon 4, takes things a step further by tacking on a massive cargo carrier and powerful motor. I’ve seen people carry everything from a week’s worth of groceries to musical gear to multiple child safety seats on this thing.

At the same time, the RadWagon delivers an all-around comfortable, downright fun riding experience. Its seating and handlebars are comfortable and highly adjustable to suit your preferences, and it’s got a slew of slick customization options. I’m particularly enamored by their front-end basket and the twist-grip throttle, which provides ample acceleration.

As with other cargo bikes, the extra power needed to carry its cargo translates to a shorter range than other models, but its battery life is still very solid.

Best off-road: QuietKat Jeep

QuietKat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The QuietKat Jeep delivers true go-anywhere capability.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 48V 14.5Ah
  • Range: Up to 58 miles
  • Motor: Mid-drive
  • Class: Configurable as both 1 and 2

Pros

  • Superior off-road ability
  • Outstanding suspension
  • Removable thumb throttle
  • Ultra-durable

Cons

  • Somewhat limited range

It should come as no surprise that one of the most capable (if not the most capable) off-roading ebike was inspired and cosigned by the Jeep brand, inspired by their 4×4 vehicle. With its high-grip fat tires, advanced torque sensor motor system, powerful brakes, outstanding suspension, and peak power output of 1,500 watts, the QuietKat Jeep is genuinely capable of going just about anywhere. That includes everything from hardpacked trails to soft sand and even snow.

The QuietKat Jeep is all about performance and capability. The company’s four-bar link, Fire-Link suspension system optimizes ground contact, the motor is designed to provide bursts of power and torque when pushed to overcome obstacles, and the whole thing is designed to carry plenty of weight—both human and cargo.

Speaking of cargo, one of the coolest and most unique things offered by the Jeep is its various cargo kits. The Angler’s Kit includes a gear trailer, premium suspension seat post, and Gore cargo cooler. The Overland Kit boasts a Tannus Armour Tire Liner, portable ebike solar charging system, and a bike rack tailored to fat-tire bikes. And the Ultimate Hunter Kit fuses the town, offering the tire liner, premium suspension seat post, fat tire bike rack, and a cargo trailer.

Best for speed: Priority Current

Priority Bicycles

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Priority Current seems sparse at a glance, but the more you put in, the more it puts out.

Specs

  • Battery Capacity: 48V 10.4 Ah
  • Range: 20-50 miles (in Class 1 setting)
  • Motor: Mid-drive
  • Class: 1 or 3

Pros

  • Great looks
  • Class 3 capability
  • Integrated USB charger for devices
  • Enviolo CVT shifter option

Cons

  • Limited range
  • LCD screen looks big but does little
  • No throttle

I’ll start out by saying that the use of the word “fastest” can be a little misleading with electric bikes, as the fastest any of them can go under motor power—legally—is 28 MPH. The Priority Current earns the distinction for getting up to max speed very quickly and maintaining that speed once it gets there. While the Current has no throttle, its pedal assistance is undeniably powerful. The more you put into pedaling it, the more it will put out.

The Current comes in Class 1 out of the box, but you can easily change the settings and upgrade to Class 3 via an onboard digital display. When choosing your Current, you can go with either a classic Shimano 5-gear shifter or pay a bit more for the Enviolo CVT—a super-smooth transmission system that is in gear no matter how you shift it and can be easily adjusted to suit your terrain via a little gauge indicating flatness vs. hilliness. It also has a super-durable belt drive and an integrated USB outlet for charging devices on the go.

The Current doesn’t have a top-tier range, which may be an issue for long-distance riders. Without Priority’s battery extender, it realistically tops out at around 30 miles. But the Current shines in regards to the overall design, offering an attractive, classically minimalist vibe, and a durable build quality that can go a long way with little to no maintenance.

Best budget: Ancheer Blue Spark

Ancheer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Offering all the basic ebike elements at a lower cost, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great budget ebike.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 48V 10Ah
  • Range: Up to 38 miles (in pedal-assist mode)
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 2

Pros

  • Solid motor power
  • Throttle-capable
  • Smooth transmission

Cons

  • Limited range
  • Slower charging time

If you’re looking for a solid electric bike that delivers all the standard features without paying thousands of dollars, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great pick. While there are technically ebikes out there for half its just-shy-of-$1,000 price tag, they simply don’t offer enough features to make you feel like you’re getting a quality battery-assisted ride. The Blue Spark gives you the true electric bike experience, and it does so for $1,000 or $2,000 less than similarly equipped models.

Generally speaking, the Blue Spark offers the performance you need for daily commuting or casual off-roading. Whether in pedal-assist or throttling mode, it will provide plenty of speed and adequate hill-climbing ability, and its riding experience is smooth. 

The lower price comes with caveats, as it always does: The Blue Spark suffers from a rather limited range, but its 20-38 miles capability is pretty typical for its price. And while it certainly is a fine bike for taking over light off-road trails, just be aware that it isn’t meant for anything too extreme.

Blue Spark owners who have ridden it over the long run report that it’s very durable, though, requiring less maintenance than you would expect considering its lower cost. When all is said and done, this is a great bike if you’re looking for a quality ebike but can’t fork over several grand.

Things to consider before choosing from the best electric bikes

With electric bikes available in a seemingly endless variety and wide range of price points, it can be difficult to know where to begin. Many people assume that spending more money guarantees that you get a better product: While there is an element of truth there, I’ve found that the best ebikes can excel in a few key ways without rocketing into the upper stratosphere of bike prices. Here are a few things to consider if you’re looking to ride one of the best electric bikes:

What is its riding range?

Few things make an electric bike less fun and functional than finding yourself out of juice with a long ride still ahead of you. Ebikes boast a lot of tech, which makes them heavy … and makes them a genuine pain in the keister to pedal sans power. Suddenly peddling your slick, cool tech-infused bike feels more akin to pushing an aircraft carrier through the mud.

To avoid this, get an ebike with a large battery. Look for electric bikes that boast the highest watt-hour (Wh) capacity. Ebikes are rated in volts and amp-hours, so to determine battery life in watt-hours you should be multiplying its volts and amps specs. Our best overall pick, for example, has a 52-volt 19.2 amp-hour battery which results in nearly 1,000 Wh. Generally speaking, I’ve found that most bikes offer between 500-800 watt-hours, so anything near the high end of that range is great.

To determine the range from here, you would theoretically just divide the total watt-hours by the average miles per hour. So let’s say you’re averaging 20 MPH on that 1000 Wh bike; then you’d have a range of 50 miles. If you’re looking to go on a really long ride, some companies support external battery packs that can recharge their bikes on the go.

The truth, however, is a bit more complicated. The harder your bike’s motor works—due to bike weight, load weight, speed, hilly terrain, etc.—the more power it uses. The reverse is also true. Lighter weight, flatter terrain, more laidback speed equals less power usage. So essentially, the real-world range is determined by the rider, what they’re doing, and where they’re going.

What class of electric bike do you need?

In the United States, electric bikes are divided into three classes depending on the degree of motor assistance they provide to augment your pedaling.

Class 1 electric bikes are solely pedal assist: They provide oomph to your pedaling up to 20 miles per hour. These are the most basic ebikes and they can be used everywhere traditional bikes can go.

Class 2 electric bikes feature a throttle that, at the flick of a switch, can propel you up to 20 miles per hour on their own and maintain that speed even if you aren’t pedaling. Depending on where you live, Class 2 ebikes may not be allowed on certain bike lanes and trails. The European Union, for example, has a total ban on throttled bikes.

Class 3 electric bikes usually drop the throttle in favor of pedal assist and have stronger motors capable of reaching 28 miles per hour. Regulations for Class 3 bikes vary from place to place, but they tend to be allowed on roads and bike lanes but may be restricted from mountain bike trails and multi-use paths.

Speaking broadly, commuters and professionals tend to gravitate toward Class 2 bikes, which require the least effort, or Class 3 bikes, which are faster and tend to be better equipped for carrying heavy loads.

Type of motor

Electric bikes almost always feature one of two motor types: mid-drive or hub-drive.

Mid-drive motors are positioned on the bottom bracket and their primary benefit involves the fact that they have a greater gear range, making them easier and more efficient to pedal uphill. The downside, however, is that they’re harder on the bike and can exact a heavy maintenance toll. 

Hub-drive motors, on the other hand, are usually attached to the rear hub and require little-to-no maintenance. That said, hub-drive motors do usually make it a bit more challenging to change a flat tire. 

To make a broad generalization, hub-drive motors make for better commuter bikes, while mid-drive motors are geared more toward performance riding on trails or up hills. The latter tends to be somewhat more energy-efficient, but you won’t necessarily feel the difference unless you’re riding up a lot of hills. 

Durability and build quality

It can be hard to determine unless you buy a bike and spend many years with it, but you want to make sure you aren’t buying a bike that’s going to need repairs all the time. When trying out different bikes, pay attention to whether the parts all feel firmly in place, or if some of them seem brittle or poorly fitted in any way. Check that the motor and chain system doesn’t rattle to any undue degree. Lastly, get on the bike and make sure that the design feels comfortable.

Lights, carriers, and other extras

One final thing to look for in an electric bike involves safety, convenience, and other add-on features. Many ebikes include high-quality lighting systems, integrated locks, and other safety/protective elements. Some, like the VanMoof S3, even have tracking and remote locking systems, alarms, and other tech-enabled security. 

Several brands also boast the option to trick out your ride with super-sleek integrated rear cargo carriers, front-end baskets, water bottle holders, bells, and other fun/functional accessories. Just as with a traditional bike, you can always tack on third-party products, but the best companies offer some really cool options to build out your bike from the get-go. How much do electric bicycles cost?

FAQs

Q: What are the disadvantages of electric bikes?

You might be wondering if traditional bikes have advantages over electric bikes, and the answer is yes.

Electric bikes are more expensive, heavier, and costly to maintain. Riding range can be limited, and all that extra weight can be a real pain if you run out of juice. While most of those on this list can be completely charged within 3-5 hours, some models can take a lot longer.

Q: Are electric bikes worth the money?

Now that we’ve looked at a few disadvantages, you might wonder whether ebikes are worth the money. That really depends on how you expect to use them.

For commuting to work every day, an electric bike means considerably less exertion than a traditional bike, and they require zero gas versus a vehicle. If you plan on using an ebike off-road, they can transform your experience, allowing you to enjoy the ride rather than suffer under the effort.

And they’re a lot of fun, so even if you are a more casual cyclist, they can add a lot of enjoyment to the experience. Whether or not that is worth the price is up to you.

Q: How long will electric bikes last?

An electric bike’s lifespan depends entirely on factors like a particular brand’s build quality, how often and hard you expect to use it, and how well you maintain it. That being said, many experts say that an electric bike should last around 10 years, with individual elements lasting:

Battery: 3-5 years before charge capacity begins to decline.
Motor: Approximately 10,000 miles, depending on brand and maintenance.
Brakes: 3,000-6,000 miles, depending on riding style and road conditions.
Chain: 2,000-3,000 miles, depending on brand.
Tires: 1,000-3,000 miles, depending on road conditions.

Simply put, if you take care of your bike and replace components as necessary, you can expect to get a lot of life out of it.

Q: How much do electric bicycles cost?

This depends on their range, size, battery capacity, and additional features. Most electric bicycles will cost between $1,500 and $3,000, although you can get one that costs a lot less or a lot more.

Final thoughts on the best electric bikes

Picking the right electric bike comes down to how you expect to use it. I spent an entire day testing out different ebikes with my brother and nephew, and while we all agreed on which was the best, we preferred different models based on our individual riding styles.

Knowing that, my final advice is to test out a variety of ebikes before you buy one. Reading descriptions online can be useful, but digital hype versus on-road reality can make a big difference. I had somewhat low expectations for the Juiced RipCurrent S, for example, because it was a lesser-known brand getting comparatively less attention online. Then, when we actually tried it out, my testing trio unanimously agreed that it was the best.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric bikes of 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best leaf vacuums of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-leaf-vacuum/ Tue, 25 Jan 2022 15:10:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=279082
A lineup of the best leaf vacuums on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keeping your property clean doesn’t have to be time-consuming or difficult with these handy tools.

The post The best leaf vacuums of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best leaf vacuums on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall worx electric leaf mulcher and bag WORX WG509 TRIVAC 12 Amp 3-In-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum
SEE IT

This all-in-one yard tool can vacuum, leaf blow, and mulch, and is less than nine pounds for easy maneuvering and lifting.

Best cordless greenworks leaf blower vacuum with accessories Greenworks 40V 185 MPH Variable Speed Cordless Leaf Blower/Vacuum
SEE IT

This pick offers up to 21 minutes of cordless leaf cleanup time and six speed selections for a customized user experience.

Best for pools Poolmaster Big Sucker Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum Poolmaster 28316 Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum
SEE IT

Keep your outdoor swimming space sparkling clean with this waterproof-equipped leaf vacuum.

When the weather is warm, you won’t think you need a leaf vacuum. There’s just something sublime about long summer evenings, lying in the green grass under a lush canopy, listening to bugs chirp, leaf vacuum safe and sound in the shed. That glory, however, is short-lived. Come fall, you’ll be screaming, leaf me alone, as nature’s debris accumulates and deteriorates over flowerbeds, streets, and neighbors’ yards if left unchecked. Grab that dependable leaf vacuum, however, and you can mitigate an unsightly mess and provide easy yard clean-up. Combining the best features of traditional leaf blowers with a convenient bag system, the best leaf vacuums on the market will save you a ton of effort on your next yard waste removal job and you’ll enjoy a tidy lawn again in no time.

How we chose the best leaf vacuums

We’ve previously compiled a list of the best leaf blowers and best leaf mulchers. We took our knowledge and research from those subjects and applied them here. We also looked at reviews, recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research to narrow down our list of the best leaf vacuums. After all, you want something that sucks—in a good way.

The best leaf vacuums: Reviews & Recommendations

When shopping for a yard vacuum, consider the size of the area you’ll be cleaning, as well as the volume of leaves that accumulate annually, to help determine the level of power and capacity required. Many electric leaf blower vacuums and cordless electric models are suited to medium-duty jobs, while a commercial model may be better for sustained professional or high-volume use in larger yards. From leaves in the driveway to debris in the pool, the best leaf vacuums can handle every scenario.

Best overall: WORX WG509 TRIVAC 12 Amp 3-In-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum

WORX

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An ergonomic design, different modes, and swappable bags allow for easy leaf disposal.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 20 x 15 x 9 inches
  • Weight: 8.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 75-210 mph
  • Power source: Electric, corded

Pros

  • Ergonomic
  • Easy to switch between modes
  • Expandable capacity

Cons

  • Additional bags sold separately
  • Not best for heavy jobs

This electric corded leaf blower vacuum is capable of collecting and distributing leaves and other debris with an airspeed of 75 to 210 miles per hour. This WORX leaf vacuum quickly changes modes at the flip of a switch, and the integrated dual-stage metal impeller allows for an 18-to-1 reduction in leaf volume, making this a fantastic all-around choice for light- to medium-duty jobs. Its ergonomic design weighs in at 8.6 pounds, and it comes standard with a small bag, as well as the option to expand capacity with vacuum tubes and additional bags (sold separately).

Best cordless: Greenworks 40V 185 MPH Variable Speed Cordless Leaf Blower/Vacuum

Greenworks

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Collecting leaves isn’t a struggle, thanks to this leaf vacuum’s easy-to-control design and comfortable grip.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 32.5 x 8.5 x 11 inches
  • Weight: 5.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 185 mph
  • Power source: Rechargeable battery

Pros

  • Easy to control
  • Interchangeable battery
  • Comfortable to use

Cons

  • Two-hour run time might not be long enough to clean larger yards

This 40V cordless leaf vacuum combines powerful blower action and high-performance mulching in an easy-to-control design. A six-speed dial with top airspeed of 185 miles per hour offers plenty of flexibility, and the cushioned over-mold grip brings users ample comfort during extended use. It’s designed with a durable brushless motor and includes a 4Ah battery with a charge time of 120 minutes.

Best gas-powered: Husqvarna 2-Cycle Gas Handheld Leaf Blower/Vacuum

Husqvarna

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: 170 mph blowing speeds and a 16:1 mulching ratio means you can decimate your backyard leaves.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 38.5 x 9 x 14 inches
  • Weight: 9.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 170 mph
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Creates fine mulch
  • Easy to start
  • Cruise control

Cons

  • On the heavy side

The combo Husqvarna 2-cycle gas leaf blower/vacuum is incredibly powerful, with blowing speeds of up to 170 miles per hour. When in vacuum mode, it also mulches leaves at a 16:1 mulching ratio, so you can suck up more without worrying about overfilling the bag too fast. Plus, it’s built with smart start technology to start the leaf vacuum with minimal effort. For easier handling, set the variable speed throttle with cruise control.

Best for pools: Poolmaster 28316 Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum

Poolmaster

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Say goodbye to those pesky post-storm leaves with this easy-to-use manual pool vacuum.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.58 x 3.29 x 3.29 inches
  • Weight: 1.82 lbs.
  • Air speed: N/A
  • Power source: Garden hose

Pros

  • Durable
  • Easy to maneuver
  • Won’t scratch your pool

Cons

  • Bag might need changed frequently if dealing with lots of leaves

This Poolmaster swimming pool leaf vacuum is crafted from durable ABS plastic and features eight high-pressure jets that use a standard garden hose water supply to trap debris within a secure mesh bag. It’s easy to maneuver thanks to its four multidirectional swiveling wheels on the underside and has replaceable brushes along its perimeter for dislodging leaves. Because it’s finished with a rubber bumper, you’ll never have to worry about accidentally scratching your pool. If you’d like to find more pool vacuums, check out our pool vacuums round-up.

What to consider when buying the best leaf vacuums

The best leaf vacuum available generally provides the standard features of a leaf blower while offering the ability to invert airflow to collect leaves in an attached bag for storage and removal. This dual functionality can be helpful when performing yard maintenance, as blowers require leaves and debris to be collected in piles before accumulation or disposal. And it comes in a familiar, ergonomic form for easy maneuvering without excessive bulk. Many blower/vacuum combos provide the added benefit of an integrated impeller to trap and chop debris into smaller, more manageable sizes. Not only does this feature save bag space and allow for more leaves to be vacuumed, it also prepares organic material to be redistributed and recycled as mulch and compost without requiring you to manually collect and break down debris. This feature is highly beneficial for anyone with a home garden or other plants requiring nutrients.

The best leaf blower vacuum is a cost-effective, flexible yard waste removal tool

The best leaf vacuum is a versatile lawn tool, effectively an all-in-one solution for managing leaves and debris, while saving storage space and task time. For example, combination blower-mulcher leaf vacuums use an air duct where a bag or hose can be attached for expeditious processing and collection of leaves (bags are the more portable option, but a hose to a bag or bucket is better suited to high-volume collection). The best blower/vacuum requires much less effort than a traditional rake or standard blower to complete the same amount of work. This makes collecting wet leaves after heavy rainfall—typically laborious and rage-inducing—a walk in the park.

When shopping for a blower/vacuum for yard work, look for a design that offers compatibility with both bags and hoses to assure the best results. This user-customizable feature maximizes the situations in which the blower-and-vacuum combo is useful. A built-in mulcher is also a must regardless of whether you’ll be using leaves in your flower beds, etc., as it drastically cuts down on the volume of leaves and maximizes storage space.

The best cordless leaf vacuum takes the hangups out of yard cleanup

Cordless leaf vacuum designs are championed for most yard maintenance and leaf removal jobs thanks to their portable, lightweight designs. Battery power frees users from the encumberment of cables and bulky gas tanks, while still packing ample power for most medium-duty jobs. Lighter weights also translate to better maneuverability, which is key when you’ll be gathering leaves over and around landscaping, lawn ornaments, wraparound porches, gazebos, and other obstacles. Some cordless models can even be worn like a backpack.

One thing to keep in mind is that the added convenience of cordless models does come at a price premium compared to corded models, and cordless designs also require somewhat frequent recharging. Still, investing in a cordless model can prove to be worthwhile when factoring in the greater mobility and lack of entanglement hazard.

When shopping for the best cordless vacuum, battery life is a critical consideration that can make or break this tool’s usefulness. Variable speeds are also a key feature to look for, as they allow users to conserve battery and only use the amount of power required for the moment at hand.

Got a bigger yard? Go beyond standard with a gas-powered model

A gas-powered leaf vacuum will require more maintenance than an electric model, but it makes quick work of large, leafy lawns. Most gas-powered models on the market are actually leaf blowers with the ability to convert into vacuums by attaching a suctioning tube and large vac bag. They are typically powered by two-cycle gas engines, which should be filled with a pre-mixed combination of gas and oil. 

It’s important to keep in mind that gas-powered leaf vacuums are much noisier than their electric counterparts and that two-stroke engines emit hazardous levels of hydrocarbons. In fact, to reduce environmental damage (and noise complaints), some cities have an outright ban on gas-powered machines.

For leaf removal from water, a dedicated pool leaf vacuum works swimmingly

Pool leaf vacuums are their own class of product, but they perform the same debris removal duties of traditional models … just in water. The collection of wet, submerged leaves and organic debris comes with its own unique set of challenges, so it’s crucial to use equipment designed for this specific task when cleaning out your pool or pond.

The best pool leaf vacuums are designed to function using a standard garden hose and pool pole, creating vortexes of water around a central net to divert and capture leaves and other debris. When considering which pool model is best for your needs, go with a manually operated unit for the greatest degree of control and cost-effectiveness. Many designs include bumpers to protect the bottom and side surfaces of pool interiors from scratching as well, which can save money and prevent unsightly damage.

On a budget? For small, isolated jobs, a cheap leaf vacuum is great

Because these machines are specialized pieces of lawn equipment, it’s generally difficult to find a cheaper model that performs at an acceptable level for most yards. Portability and power along with capacity add to the costs of these units, so most budget models suffer a high drop in these areas and are simply not suited to the demands of most yard work. However, users may still encounter situations in which a less expensive model performs acceptably, such as in the cleaning of an enclosed porch or the removal of leaves from a deck or courtyard.

Be aware that the best model for less is usually corded designs, which cuts down on the bulk and weight of the unit while limiting mobility somewhat. Mulching options are also not found in budget units, so leaves will pile up quicker in the bag and require more frequent emptying. Still, a cheap vacuum may be all you need for small jobs and infrequent use.

FAQs

Q: How powerful does a leaf blower need to be?

Any standard leaf blower needs to be powerful enough to dislodge and move wet leaves and other heavy debris, so a model capable of winds between 80 and 250 miles per hour is usually a good place to start.

Q: Are leaf vacuums worth it?

Having a dedicated leaf vacuum is worth it because it’s a great way to make an easy, quick, and fun task out of the typically time-consuming process of raking. Models that transform leaves directly into mulch are doubly worth it.

Q: Should I get a leaf blower or vacuum?

Leaf blowers only take care of half of the problem and don’t actually aid in the collection, mulching, or disposal process, while a dedicated leaf vacuum provides all those perks. Leaf blowers are great for moving leaves from one place to another but go with a vacuum if you’re looking to dispose of the problem altogether.

Final thoughts on the best leaf vacuums

The best leaf vacuums on the market are unparalleled in transforming unsightly debris into a mass of usable mulch. A cordless model is more of an investment than a standard leaf vacuum but is maneuverable and tends to be lighter. If you’re looking for a long-term solution to large-scale yard clean-up, a commercial lawn vacuum might be more suited to your needs. And pool cleaner models are entirely different beasts but serve a very important function if your property has water features. So when trees shed their coat, shed your yard maintenance frustrations with the best leaf vacuum you can find. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best leaf vacuums of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor storage boxes of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-outdoor-storage-box/ Thu, 29 Jul 2021 19:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=283635
A lineup of the best storage sheds on a white background
Amanda Reed

Looking to store gardening tools, cushions, trash bins, and lawn games? Declutter your deck with a storage shed.

The post The best outdoor storage boxes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best storage sheds on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Rectangular, brown outdoor storage box Suncast Resin Wicker Patio Outdoor Storage Container
SEE IT

This water-resistant poly resin pick has a capacity of up to 99 gallons to store and protect your goods from weather and water.

Best storage bench A black Keter Solana storage bench on a blue and white background Keter Solana 70 Gallon Storage Bench
SEE IT

Combine form with function in this 70 gallon storage bench box. You can seamlessly tuck away unsightly items, provide seating, and save valuable space.

Best storage shed A Rubbermaid outdoor storage shed on a blue and white background Rubbermaid Resin Weather Resistant Outdoor Storage Shed
SEE IT

This sturdy storage solution is equipped with double-walled construction, an impact-resistant floor, and weather-resistant materials so your stored items stay safe and dry year-round.

Outdoor storage boxes can be tremendously useful for a wide variety of purposes. It can be much more convenient to have a deck box within reach for outdoor items—think tablecloths, toys, sports equipment, small tools, outdoor extension cords, and pool products, to name a few—rather than having to lug them in and out of the house or shed each time you finish using them. In addition, a heavy-duty deck storage box can provide additional seating when you have guests in your backyard. Another great benefit to picking the best outdoor storage box is that they can be used to store patio furniture cushions when not in use, preserving upholstery life spans potentially by years and keeping them clean and dry in between uses. After all, you don’t want your guests to sit on cushions soiled by birds, rain, pollen, or other outdoor issues. The best outdoor storage box models are out there, but you must know what to look for. Luckily, you’ve got us and this guide.

How we chose the best outdoor storage boxes

We sorted through 50 of the top-rated outdoor storage boxes to select these top five. Between all the products, we compared prices, materials, capacity, brand, and reviews to find those that stood out from the pack. We also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and conducted heavy research to narrow down our choices.

The best outdoor storage boxes: Reviews & Recommendations

Our picks range from functional storage boxes that double as benches to storage tents that fit tight spaces, as no two storage needs are the same. These final picks are built to last through any inclement weather and keep your goods safe and secure all year long.

Best overall: Suncast Resin Wicker Patio Outdoor Storage Container

Suncast

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This large capacity pick can hold any variety of yard toys, patio cushions, or gardening tools—and will outlast inclement weather.

Specs

  • Material: Resin
  • Dimensions: 50 x 25.2 x 25.2 inches
  • Capacity: 99 gallons

Pros

  • Durable to weather
  • Large capacity
  • Warp-resistant

Cons

  • Assembly can be challenging

This large deck storage box has a rounded top that’s less likely than others to warp in the heat (a common problem with outdoor storage boxes), so the cover stays put solidly and keeps contents dry. It has a hinged top and space for a lock (though the lock isn’t included) and measures 50 inches x 25.5 inches x 25.5 inches. The dark brown wicker design has many matching pieces, so you can also buy the brand’s outdoor garbage bin, dining chairs or benches, hose reel, or other variations of storage boxes if you want your decor to match.

Best bench: Keter Solana 70 Gallon Storage Bench

Keter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pick allows you to save space while providing seating—and is durable enough to sit outside all year long.

Specs

  • Material: Resin
  • Dimensions: 23.4 x 54.6 32.8 inches
  • Capacity: 70 gallon

Pros

  • Bench included
  • Affordable price
  • Easy assembly

Cons

  • No lateral supports on the middle of the bench

This outdoor storage bench is no slouch: It holds 70 gallons, which can translate to barbeque tools, gardening hand tools, cushions, sports equipment, or many other items. It’s made of resin with a wood-grain appearance and comes in two color combinations. You can add a cushion to the outdoor storage bench seat to make it more comfortable, and there’s a place for a lock.

Best shed: Rubbermaid Resin Weather Resistant Outdoor Storage Shed

Rubbermaid

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for a no-frills pick with great capacity, this shed-style option can store larger items year-round.

Specs

  • Material: Resin, plastic
  • Dimensions: 89.75 x 45 x 20.25 inches
  • Capacity: N/A

Pros

  • Large capacity
  • Weather resistant
  • Double-walled construction

Cons

  • May warp over time

Snow shovels, garden shovels, rakes, hoes, weed trimmers, and similar tools are generally too big to fit into deck boxes—not to mention that they don’t store well piled up horizontally. At 7 feet by 7 feet, this type of outdoor storage shed is tall enough to hang them on hooks underneath the sandalwood/onyx roof so they don’t get damaged or rusty and are always easy to reach. You can also add shelving.

Best for bikes: The YardStash IV Outdoor Storage Shed Tent

YardStash

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: While this pick might be built like a tent, its heavyweight fabric seals out water and weather, making it a great place to store bikes or gardening supplies even in winter conditions.

Specs

  • Material: Vinyl
  • Dimensions: 74 x 32 x 68 inches
  • Capacity: Two adult bikes

Pros

  • Easy to move
  • Affordable option
  • Space-saving

Cons

  • May require two people to set up

If you’re looking for outdoor bike storage you can set up, take down, and move around easily, this heavy-duty vinyl tent may be your thing: it’s ready without tools in 10 minutes and is made to hold two adult bikes with some room left over. It’s meant to be fully waterproof and pest-proof, and you can use this outdoor bike storage all four seasons (the roof is made to deflect snow and rain).

Best budget: Keter Marvel Plus Resin Outdoor Storage Box

Keter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It is a great option for slimmer, lower storage.

Specs

  • Material: Resin
  • Dimensions: 17.4 x 45.9 x 22.2 inches
  • Capacity: 71 gallons

Pros

  • Affordable price
  • Sleek design
  • Easy assembly

Cons

  • Not as durable as other options

When you’re looking for a budget outdoor storage box, you’re not going to get some of the durability or special features of the higher-end ones: this one has no hydraulics or strap to help open and close the lid, and some reviewers describe it as more flimsy. But overall, it’s still a bargain for a large (71-gallon capacity) storage box that’s simple to assemble. Dark brown and plastic, it matches many other brands’ outdoor products and also provides limited seating.

What to consider when shopping for the best outdoor storage boxes

As great as an outdoor storage bin can be, it’s not always without problems. One common issue is in assembly: resin patio storage boxes often snap together in a certain way, and if you assemble the pieces incorrectly, it can be very difficult to separate them again without causing irreparable damage (this is also not generally covered under manufacturer warranties). If you have any doubts at all about any included assembly instructions, be sure you check the manufacturer’s website or YouTube for an instructional video or call the manufacturer for more specific advice. Trying to take apart pieces that have been snapped together can break connections or crack or weaken the plastic. Here are other things you should look out for when choosing an outdoor storage box:

Weather

Another concern is wind: If you don’t use some kind of lock or carabiner to keep a patio storage box closed, heavy wind can not only lift the top and expose the contents to the weather, but it may even rip the top off its hinges, which can also be an irreparable problem. Be sure to choose a storage box that you can close securely so it won’t fall apart in the first storm of the season. A lock is also a necessity if you’re storing any kind of valuable equipment, like bikes or snowblowers, or you may become an easy target for thieves in the area.

Warping

Some patio storage boxes and storage sheds have problems with roof warping. If a roof warps upwards at the ends, it can leave gaps that aren’t just unsightly and leave the items inside unprotected from moisture and bugs. Even without a warped roof, though, most outdoor storage bins are not entirely bugproof. Most are made to be waterproof or at least water-resistant, but any sort of ventilation or gap between the lid and bottom, or under or between the doors, could be enough for a variety of critters from carpenter ants to spiders. If this is an issue, you might want to use a deterrent, such as boric acid or diatomaceous earth sprinkled around the outdoor storage box, or move the box to a spot that’s away from foliage and less likely to attract bugs.

Bins vs. sheds vs. benches

Outdoor storage bins are great not only for typical backyard items, but also for other items that you might store in the front or side of your house: trash bins, recycling bins, bicycles, a snowblower, large tools (such as shovels and rakes), holiday lawn decorations, scooters, and so on. 

There are specialized outdoor storage sheds sized just right for all kinds of purposes—ones that are wide and mid-height meant specifically as outdoor bike storage, and others that are tall and narrow for full-size tools. You can often attach tall storage units to the outside walls of your house.

While most well-made storage boxes like this aren’t inexpensive, they can make your life easier and protect your investments. Bike storage sheds and trash storage sheds are meant to be easy to wheel in and out of, so the front doors swing open rather than just the tops opening like deck storage boxes. You may also use a storage tent with vinyl sides rather than a plastic or wood outdoor storage container. There are also outdoor storage benches designed with seating in mind.

FAQs

Q: What’s the best way to store outdoor cushions?

Before storing your outdoor cushions for the winter, or between uses, ensure they’re clean and entirely dry. Depending on the material, you may need to simply wipe the cushions down with a rag and some dish soap, or you may be able to spray with vinegar and water or bleach solution to remove any mildew or stains. Never put cushions away while they’re damp, or they will develop mold and mildew. Once dry, you can put them in a waterproof deck storage box or outdoor storage shed. You may want to include mothballs or other pest repellents to prevent bugs from nesting inside the safe haven of your outdoor storage container and ruining your cushions. Moths, ants, stink bugs, and many other types of nuisance bugs love hiding out in cushions—and some can eat right through just about any kind of material.

Q: What is the largest deck box?

Keter’s XXL deck storage container is the largest deck box we’ve found: It holds up to 230 gallons, with dimensions of 32.7 inches x 33.8 inches x 57.8 inches. It has a lockable top and piston opening mechanism.

Q: Are Keter storage boxes waterproof?

Keter calls their outdoor storage boxes “water-resistant,” but users rarely report any problem with water coming through. You can also buy a cover for your outdoor storage box if you have any concerns about water.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor storage boxes

You’ll have to assess your storage needs to figure out the best outdoor storage box (or boxes) for your yard: measure any cushions to make sure you’re getting a big enough outdoor storage bin, and put together anything else you’re looking to store so you can get a better idea of the dimensions you’ll need. From there, it’s a matter of deciding what kind of look you like, how handy you are in putting things together, and what kind of budget you have. The best outdoor storage box should last you many years. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor storage boxes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best wireless security cameras in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-wireless-security-cameras/ Mon, 18 Sep 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=570963
A lineup of the best wireless security cameras side-by-side
Amanda Reed

Today's wireless security cameras are easy-to-use, easy to install, and easy on your budget.

The post The best wireless security cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best wireless security cameras side-by-side
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Ring Floodlight Cam Pro on a blue and white background Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro
SEE IT

Versatile and produces excellent video.

Best with 4K resolution A Lorex 4K wireless camera on a blue and white background Lorex 4K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor Wi-Fi 6 Technology Security Camera
SEE IT

This camera can detect people, vehicles, animals, and packages.

Best budget Smart Home photo Wyze Cam v3
SEE IT

A cheap camera with a cheap cloud storage subscription.

Although security cameras have been around for more than 50 years, do-it-yourself wireless security cameras installed by consumers have only been available for a fraction of that time. Before that, most security cameras needed to be installed by professional technicians. However, a few factors have allowed wireless security cameras to evolve so that average consumers can install and use them: They’ve been designed to be easy to install, use, and understand; because of marketplace competition, DIY wireless security cameras are relatively inexpensive; and technology that interacts with wireless security cameras, like home wireless networks, as well as other technologies, are easier to use and works seamlessly with each other. The best wireless security cameras should fit the needs of almost every consumer and budget.

How we chose the best wireless security cameras

I’ve written about many types of different cameras, including wireless security cameras, for a number of publications over the years, including PCMag.com, Consumer Reports, The New York Times, Tom’s Guide, Gearbrain, and, of course, Popular Science. I’ve also written stories on wireless security systems, video doorbells, and other related security system devices. I brought my expertise in this area to help discover the best outdoor security cameras. I also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and did a lot of research to narrow down our list to find the best models. 

To find the best security cameras, I carefully considered a number of factors, including video resolution, night vision capability, audio, ease of use, versatility, and smart home compatibility.

The best wireless security cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Today, you’ll find a very wide range of wireless security cameras and smart-home security systems, which are very easy to install and use. Many of them also include cutting-edge technologies, such as artificial intelligence for detecting people, pets, and objects. They’re available at a variety of price points—from budget models that don’t require a subscription for storing and accessing video that costs as little as $30 to feature-packed models that cost more than $400. One of our picks will allow you to give you peace of mind by protecting your home, both inside and out.

Best overall: Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro

Ring

SEE IT

Specs

  • Video resolution: 1080p 
  • Field of view: 140 degrees
  • Power: Wired only
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription) 
  • Size: 12.8 x 7.8 x 8.5 inches 

Pros

  • Versatile
  • Excellent quality 1080p-resolution video
  • Comes with dual-band WiFi
  • Includes two bright adjustable LED spotlights
  • Comes with a remote-activated alarm 

Cons

  • A bit pricey
  • Lacks support for HomeKit and Google Assistant compatibility

Although it’s a bit pricey, there’s a lot to like about this Ring wireless security camera. For starters, like the company’s many doorbell cameras, it’s easy to use and set up. However, since it needs a wired connection, you may be a bit limited when mounting this model outside your home. It produces excellent quality video, assisted by HDR features to provide video footage with better contrast and detail. That can be helpful if the location you’re setting up to monitor is dimly lit during certain times of the day. Of course, that dim setting would also benefit from the two adjustable LED floodlights included on this Ring cam, rated at 3,000 degrees Kelvin and 2,000 Lumen.

There’s a variety of other useful features that also make it worth the price, like color night vision. But it also includes additional smart features, like 3D motion detection, a customizable system, and a bird’s eye view feature, which tracks a visitor (or intruder) on your property and provides you with a record of their path. It also has clear, two-way audio and a loud siren to scare away trespassers. However, in order to access videos and enable some features, you will need to subscribe to a Ring Protect plan, which starts at $3.99 a month.   

Best system: SimpliSafe 10 Piece Wireless Home Security System with Outdoor Camera 

SimpliSafe

SEE IT

Specs

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 140 degrees
  • Power: Rechargeable battery 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa and Google Assistant 
  • Storage options: Cloud storage only (for both cameras)
  • Size: 4 x 4 x 8.3 inches

Pros

  • Lets you set up a whole security system right out of the box
  • Outside cam has a very good quality video with 140 degrees field of view
  • Easy to install and use
  • Comes with a professional monitoring option
  • Compatible with Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant 
  • Includes convenient magnetic mount

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Lacks support for HomeKit 

If you’re looking to install a wireless security camera and a DIY home security system along with it, the SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System might be your best bet. It’s pricey but far less expensive than buying the components individually. But even more importantly, it lets you set up a whole security system right out of the box.

What’s in the box? In addition to the two 1080p cameras (indoors and outdoors), it also comes with a base station, keypad, motion sensors, and entry sensors. All the components, including the cameras, connect to the base station, which also includes the ability to generate a loud siren to scare off intruders. Although the inside security camera isn’t the most robust model, the outside camera offers very good quality video with color night vision. What’s also nice is that the SimpliSafe mobile app is nicely designed to let you effectively interact with your entire setup, and it comes with the option of including a professional monitoring system. However, for the price, it would be nice if both cameras had the option to store videos locally. 

Best with 4K-resolution: Lorex 4K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor WiFi 6 Technology Security Camera 

Lorex

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 4K
  • Field of view: 140 degrees
  • Power: Wired power only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant
  • Storage options: Local storage
  • Size: 3.0 x 3.0 x 3.4 inches

Pros 

  • Versatile
  • Excellent quality 4K-resolution video
  • Comes with dual-band WiFi
  • Includes WiFi 6 technology

Cons

  • Doesn’t have a battery backup

As a brand, Lorex has been making very good quality outdoor security cameras for many years. This model is no exception. It stands out because it captures very good quality 4K-resolution video and has a very good 8-megapixel sensor that lets you shoot 8-megapixel photos with more detail and data. It also comes with WiFi 6 technology, allowing faster data transmission with a compatible router to deliver impressive 4K resolution with fast loading time. Plus, it includes 2.4/5GHz dual-band coverage for better connectivity. You can also use one of two smart-motion detection features: Person, Vehicle, and Animal detection or Package detection, although both cannot be used simultaneously. 

It’s not ideal for everyone, though. It’s hardwired, so you may be more limited in where you need to place this model. It also doesn’t have a battery backup, which can be useful for units that are wired. 

TP-Link

SEE IT

Specs

  • Video resolution: 2K
  • Field of view: 104 degrees
  • Power: Wired only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant,
  • Storage options: Cloud storage or local storage 
  • Size: ‎5.6 x 4.1 x 2.5 inches

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Excellent 2K-resolution (2304 x 1296) video quality
  • Versatile 
  • Can connect wirelessly or via an ethernet connection

Cons

  • Lacks support for HomeKit 
  • Lower frame rate than other models
  • Field of view isn’t as wide as other models

Not only is this one of the most affordable security cameras on the market, but it’s also great for those who want to avoid paying extra for cloud storage since you can store video locally by inserting a microSD memory card (up to 128 GB). However, it’s also very versatile since it does offer a subscription plan if you’d rather subscribe to the brand’s cloud service for storing video (Tape Care). Overall, it captures excellent-quality video. However, it has a lower frame rate (just 15 frames per second). It also comes with night vision, but it’s only in black-and-white, and not color. 

Best with cellular: Arlo Go 2 

Arlo

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 130 degrees
  • Power: Battery powered only
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription); accepts microSD memory card for local storage
  • Size: 3.4 x 2.5 x 4.7 inches

Pros 

  • Very versatile
  • Can use either cloud or local storage
  • Includes color night vision 
  • Powerful Secure Plan features

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Need to pay extra for a cellular plan

One thing almost every outdoor security camera requires is access to your home’s wireless network. But what if you have poor reception or don’t have a WiFi network at all? If you’re one of these people, consider the Arlo Go 2. It not only lets you hook up to a WiFi network, but you can also use a cellular plan. However, if you choose the latter, you’ll have to buy both a cellular plan and SIM card. Also, it only works with Verizon, US Cellular, and T-Mobile. 

It does have color night vision and two-way talk and audio, but it’s not perfect for everyone. For instance, it provides you with the option of using cloud storage via one of Arlo’s Secure plans (plans start at $4.99), which also lets you access special features or store your videos on local storage. Still, if you use local storage, you can’t access the Secure plan features, which include 30-day video recording, person, vehicle, and animal detection (and the ability to distinguish between them), and smart activity zones, which allow you to focus motion detection on a specific area within your camera’s field of view. 

Best budget: Wyze Cam v3

WYZE

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 130 degrees
  • Power: Wired power only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription); accepts microSD memory card for local storage
  • Size: 2.0 x 2.0 x 2.3 inches 

Pros 

  • Very affordable
  • Compatible with major smart technologies
  • Cloud subscriptions are relatively inexpensive
  • Color night vision is very good

Cons

  • Lacks support for HomeKit compatibility
  • Lower frame rate than other models
  • May not be as sturdy as other models

This hardwired security camera is one of the cheapest on the market, but it performs very well, capturing very good quality video. It also provides you with the option of storing your videos in cloud storage or on local storage using a microSD memory card. 

But it’s not the perfect option for all users. For example, those looking for high-res video probably won’t be happy since it shoots just 1080p video. It also shoots at a lower frame rate than other models: For Daytime and Color Night Vision, the frame rate is 20 frames per second (fps), and with Night Vision with IR lights it’s a frame rate of 15fps. However, remember to consider your needs—you’re most likely not looking to produce cinema-quality video. You simply want your security camera to capture decent video. 

What to consider when buying the best wireless security camera

Wireless security cameras continue to evolve at a dizzying pace, with many models coming with better connectivity and cutting-edge technologies, such as artificial intelligence, to improve a host of features. However, if you’re new to these types of cameras, it can be confusing to figure out which features, specs, and capabilities are important for you and your home security system. 

The following factors will help you figure out what’s important before you purchase a wireless security camera or wireless security camera system:  

Video resolution and field of view 

You’ll often see 1080p, 2K, or 4K resolutions in outdoor security cameras. A higher resolution means you’ll get a crisper image. A higher resolution will also fill up your local or cloud storage faster. That’s a problem if your subscription plan or card has a fixed limit to its capacity. If you’re trying to balance subscription costs for cloud storage with what resolution you’ll need, consider how detailed of a picture you’ll need. If you need more detail, go with a higher resolution. 

You’ll also want to check a security camera’s field of view specification, which is measured in degrees and tells you how much of a particular scene your security camera is capturing. The higher the FOV number indicates a wider lens and lets you see more of a particular scene in front of your house.  

Lighting, power options, and storage

Light has always been incredibly important when it comes to capturing digital video and photos. That’s why if you need your outdoor security camera to capture better-quality video or photos, you should consider buying a model with flood lights. Such models not only allow for improved image quality, but they can also act as a deterrent to intruders.

When planning to set up your new outdoor security camera, you’ll need to think about where to install it. This is not as much of an issue for models that only use battery power. However, hardwired connections require a direct connection to your home or an outdoor outlet with a weatherproof cord. This limits where you can place it. You make up for the lack of creative control with video and audio quality, which is better in a hardwired connection. 

In addition to lighting and power options, consider whether you want your security camera to store the video it captures locally, on a cloud-based server, or perhaps both. Most store video in the cloud, which is convenient, but you’ll most often have to pay a fee to access them. So, if you don’t want to pay a fee for a cloud service, consider models that let you store them on a memory card. 

Other features to look for

Because there is a lot of competition in the industry, all security camera brands are continually updating models and adding new features. For example, many brands have introduced privacy features, such as two-factor authentication, to ensure devices are not compromised or hacked. Many brands are also making security cameras that integrate with smart-home features, such as voice technologies, like Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, and others. And then there are some brands that even offer professional monitoring services for an extra level of protection, but you will generally have to pay more for such services. Make sure you consider additional features that may be important to you and your family.

FAQs

Q: Can wireless security cameras work without the internet?

If you have a camera that needs to store video footage in a cloud server (via a cloud subscription plan), you’ll need a wireless connection to access the internet. However, there are a number of models that can store video locally, on a memory card, hard drive, or other local storage. Additionally, there are some models that use cellular data plans to store video footage. 

Q: How long do wireless security cameras last?

Most wireless security cameras last anywhere from three to ten years, although there are a few factors to consider: Is the camera itself constructed to last? Also, is the camera placed outdoors and exposed to harsh weather? If it’s not waterproof and it’s exposed to the elements in an outdoor setting, the camera might not last more than a few months. 

Q: What is the longest range on a wireless security camera?

Most wireless security cameras made for consumers are designed to capture more of a wide-angle view of a scene, instead of zooming in on a particular subject. That’s why most models can see subjects anywhere from a few feet up to 75 feet away. However, some models are equipped with digital zoom features, which can crop in on the sensor and give the appearance of an optical zoom lens. However, digital zoom works best if you have a higher resolution sensor (such as 2K and 4K resolution) since you’re actually cropping the video clip and losing resolution, which can degrade video image quality.

Final thoughts on the best wireless security cameras

A wireless security camera can provide you with a way to keep a watchful eye on your home, both inside and out. But before you buy, consider the actual space you need to use the security camera or cameras for and what constellation of features on those cameras will best cover that area. If you’re living in a one-room apartment, you might only need one inexpensive security camera. But if you’re looking to oversee a more expansive environment, you may want to buy more than just one security camera. And be sure to always examine the mobile apps for all models to make sure they’re easy to use.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best wireless security cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar garden lights of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-solar-garden-lights/ Mon, 18 Sep 2023 16:40:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=571430
The best solar garden lights will help you harness the power of the sun to illuminate your yard.

Use the power of the sun to illuminate your yard.

The post The best solar garden lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar garden lights will help you harness the power of the sun to illuminate your yard.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Urpower Solar Lights are some of the best solar garden lights overall. Urpower Solar Lights
SEE IT

Bright, durable, versatile, and easy to install. Ideal for security and ambience, offering auto-dusk-dawn operation with lighting mode options. Plain design but top-rated reliability.

Best string lights Brightech Ambience Pro Solar-Powered Outdoor Strong Lights are the best solar garden lights that are solar-powered. Brightech Ambience Pro Solar Powered Outdoor String Lights
SEE IT

Charming Edison bulb style, ideal for ambience at outdoor gatherings. Not the brightest but perfect for mood lighting. Limited battery life and non-expandable.

Best budget Better Homes Ellis Solar Lights are the best solar garden lights at a budget-friendly price. Better Homes & Gardens Ellis Solar-Powered Path Lights
SEE IT

Affordable, attractive lantern style, 20 lumens warm white light, auto shut-off, great for small yards, pathways, and highlighting specific areas.

Transform your backyard or patio into an extra livable space with solar-powered lights. Forget about trailing extension cords or the additional cost of lighting up your yard by opting for eco-friendly solar-generated lights. These innovative lighting solutions reduce energy use and offer the added convenience of effortless wireless illumination for your outdoor spaces. Whether you’re looking to create a cozy oasis or simply enhance the safety and ambience of your pathways, choosing the right solar garden lights can make all the difference. There’s an array of options flooding the market, however, so this guide is here to help you stay informed about the latest trends, technologies, and designs to make the best choice for your home. From dazzling string lights that create a magical atmosphere to motion-sensor security lights that keep your property safe, we’ve done the research to help you make informed choices about the best solar garden lights.

How we chose the best solar garden lights

Our recommendations for solar garden lights are based on extensive research. We surveyed peer recommendations, critical reviews, and user impressions to create a list of contenders and then put them through their paces. We drew on our experience with everything from solar landscape lights to solar deck lamps. We considered a wide variety of solar garden lights suitable for various purposes, different outdoor spaces, and user needs to develop a comprehensive list of the best solar garden lights.

The best solar garden lights: Reviews & Recommendations 

The sun is a powerful energy source, one we recommend harnessing for everything from the best solar generators to the best solar panels. Using the power of the sun to light up your garden can help illuminate and beautify your landscape while using renewable energy. Whether you are looking for floodlights, path lights, or motion sensors, we’ve rounded up a list of recommendations.

Best overall: URPOWER Solar Lights Outdoor

UrPower

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: 4-5 hours
  • Operating Time: 8-10 hours
  • Number of Lights in Set: 2

Pros

  • Bright light
  • Quick charging
  • Durable

Cons

  • Very plain design

The URPOWER Solar Lights Outdoor are our top choice as they offer bright beautiful light on specific areas of your house or yard, which are both useful as a security feature and as outdoor ambience. You can easily adjust them to direct the light 90 degrees to where you need it most, and with a bright 200 lumens of light, they provide excellent illumination.

They are very hard-wearing and durable even in cold weather and rain. Take your pick when it comes to installation; you can either attach them to the wall or use the stakes to put them in the ground, depending on your space and design aesthetics. Both types of hardware options are included in the pack. They automatically turn on and off at dusk and dawn, offering peace of mind and ease of use. Choose from either cool or warm white tones and two different lighting modes to create your ideal effect. The design is rather plain, especially compared to other prettier options on the market, but for a reliable lighting source, the URPOWER Solar Lights are a top-rated choice.

Best motion-sensor: Aloftsun Solar Motion Sensor Outdoor Lights

AloftSun

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: 1-2 days first use, then up to 8 hours on overcast days
  • Operating Time: 6-12 hours depending on use
  • Number of Lights in Set: 2

Pros

  • Great range on motion sensor
  • Easy installation
  • Good light coverage

Cons

  • Basic design

Motion-sensor solar garden lights provide a cost-effective, eco-friendly, and convenient lighting solution for outdoor spaces while improving security and curb appeal. They offer several benefits over regular outdoor lighting. They only activate when motion is detected, which helps conserve battery life, and this limited use extends the life of the LED bulbs and batteries, reducing maintenance and replacement costs. They can also deter potential intruders by illuminating areas when motion is detected, enhancing your property’s security (making them a great pairing with outdoor security cameras). 

The Aloftsun Solar Motion Sensor Outdoor Lights have three different light modes, allowing you to customize their use to your needs with either wall mounting or stake installation available. The 120-degree detection angle and a 33-foot sensing range offer peace of mind for various triggers, including visitors, animals, or cars. They give off a bright light in a cool tone and are incredibly durable and able to withstand even extreme weather conditions.

Best string lights: Brightech Ambience Pro Solar Powered Outdoor String Lights

Brightech

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: 6 hours
  • Operating Time: 5-6 hours
  • Number of Lights in Set: Comes in 27- or 48-foot options

Pros

  • Ambient pretty lights
  • Create a romantic atmosphere
  • Safe shatterproof plastic bulbs

Cons

  • Can’t connect more than one together

The Brightech Ambience Pro Solar Powered Outdoor String Lights offer pretty ambient lighting, perfect for outdoor parties or get-togethers. The Edison bulb-style lights offer a romantic look but could be brighter. They are best used for atmospheric lighting, but if used in conjunction with other lights, you could create a brighter outdoor space with accent and task lighting options, which may be more suitable for reading outdoors or even dining.

It’s disappointing that you can’t connect different cables together for larger spaces, but these string lights look great on a balcony or smaller patio. They offered the least operating time of any lights we reviewed.

Best path lights: Hampton Bay Solar Powered Black Led Outdoor Integrated 3000k Warm White Landscape Path Light

Hampton Bay

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: 10-12 hours
  • Operating Time: 8 hours
  • Number of Lights in Set: 10

Pros

  • Good value
  • Bright light
  • Attractive design

Cons

  • Only sold in sets of 10

These solar-powered path lights from Hampton Bay allow you to easily illuminate walkways, driveways, and paths, enhancing safety by preventing trips and falls in the dark. With no wires or plugs to contend with you can simply walk the route placing your lights where you like for optimum safety. They also help create a charming and inviting atmosphere in your garden or outdoor space, leading the way to doorways, seating areas, or the driveway. 

The 10-pack size offers good value and allows you to plot longer sections to illuminate. However, it also means that if you need just one or two extra lights you have to buy an entire set. These lights are very bright, and the bulb has an attractive cracked glass effect that makes them look more expensive than they are. Dusk-to-dawn operation creates a hassle-free option for your garden or outdoor pathways.

Best budget: Better Homes & Gardens Ellis Solar-Powered Path Lights

Better Homes

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: Not listed
  • Operating Time: 8 hours
  • Number of Lights in Set: 2

Pros

  • Easy to assemble
  • Long stake for maximum coverage
  • Durable

Cons

  • Not as bright as competitors

At under $30, these Better Homes & Gardens Ellis solar lights offer great value for money. They come as one unit perfect for smaller yards, patios, or for specific areas you want to highlight, like close to your front door, a particular bush or flowerbed, or to light the way to your car. An attractive lantern style with some weight to it, they look just as good in a uniform row as one-off lights. They give off 20 lumens of warm white light, and the auto shut-off helps to conserve energy. The long stake means you get good coverage, and the light produces a sunburst pattern. This is a pretty simple design featuring only an on/off switch but as a budget model, it does the job very nicely.

Things to consider when choosing solar garden lights

When choosing your solar garden lights, keep the following factors in mind:

Lighting purpose

Determine the primary purpose of your lights, whether that’s security, accent, pathway, or decorative, or a mix of different needs.

Brightness

Check the lumens rating to ensure the lights provide the desired brightness level for their intended use.

Battery capacity

Look for lights with larger battery capacities for longer runtimes, especially during cloudy days.

Weather resistance

Check for an IP rating to ensure the lights are weatherproof and withstand rain, snow, and extreme temperatures for four-season use.

Design

You may wish to choose lights that also complement your outdoor decor and landscaping style.

Expandability

If you plan to add more lights in the future, consider whether the brand offers expandable options that can be easily integrated into your current setup.

FAQs

Q: How do solar garden lights work?

Solar garden lights have photovoltaic panels that convert sunlight into electricity. This energy is stored in the batteries, which power the LED bulbs when it’s dark.

Q: Do solar garden lights need direct sunlight to charge?

While direct sunlight is optimal, most solar lights can charge in indirect sunlight or on cloudy days, albeit at a slower rate.

Q: Can I replace the batteries in solar garden lights?

Many solar lights have replaceable batteries. It’s a cost-effective way to extend the life of your lights. Check the details of the manufacturer when you purchase your lights.

Q: How do I clean and maintain solar garden lights?

Wipe clean the solar panel regularly to ensure optimal charging. Replace batteries when needed and check for loose connections or damaged parts from time to time.

Final thoughts on the best solar garden lights

Our top choice for the best overall solar garden lights is the URPOWER Solar Lights Outdoor. It scored well for its very bright light, easy installation, durability, and adjustability for optimum performance. But we hope we’ve offered enough options that your face lit up when you found the right lights for your home and budget.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar garden lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Sonos Move 2 speaker review: Welcome to the portable era https://www.popsci.com/gear/sonos-move-2-speaker-review/ Mon, 18 Sep 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=570031
Sonos Move 2
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Sonos has packed its latest audio and sustainability advancements into an on-the-go form, with few sacrifices. Sorry for your wallet!

The post Sonos Move 2 speaker review: Welcome to the portable era appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Sonos Move 2
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Sonos released its latest at-home speakers, the Era 100 and Era 300, in March 2023. Their new name signified the next chapter of Sonos’ journey into connected speakers, and the multi-driver, multi-channel 300 even introduced Dolby Atmos support into its non-soundbar speakers. With the company’s latest speaker—the creatively named Move 2, a successor to its first party speaker—Sonos seeks to bring some of its new audio standards into a device you could take anywhere.

The original Sonos Move was released in 2019, and a lot has happened in the audio world since then, especially in the increasingly competitive world of high-fidelity wireless speakers. Having spent a little more than a week with the speaker, I can confidently say the Move 2 is an excellent addition to Sonos’ lineup, taking everything I really liked about the Era 100 and cramming it into a portable speaker.

The Move 2’s release comes at an interesting time in the portable smart connected speaker world. JBL released its new premium lineup, including the Authentics 300, which is the same price as the Move 2. Bang & Olufsen’s Beosound A5, released this past spring, comes in at a whopping $1,300, which proves premium audio companies are taking portable speakers seriously. The Move 2 keeps pace and even exceeds much of its competition by offering a speaker with an inviting design, great sound, continued advancements in sustainability, and tight integration with the company’s every-growing ecosystem of speakers. Sonos, like Apple, has cultivated an active fanbase, and they’ll find a lot to like about the Move 2. Skeptics may become converts if they give the speaker a chance.

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Overview

  • The Sonos Move 2 is the second generation of Sonos’s first portable speaker, released in 2019.
  • It inherits many features found on the Sonos Era 100, including stereo sound, a USB-C port for charging and expandability, and a recessed volume slider.
  • Music lovers charmed by Sonos’ sound profile, ease of setup, and broader ecosystem should consider the Move 2 before any other mid-sized portable Bluetooth speaker.

Pros

  • Excellent sound
  • Wireless charging
  • Replaceable battery
  • Modularity (Via USB-C)
  • Built-in handle

Cons

  • $50 price increase from the original Move
  • Coating can come off

The verdict: The Sonos Move 2 is a big improvement over the original in tangible ways, including better battery life, stereo sound, and even more sustainability features. In a crowded field, it’s hard not to recommend this portable speaker to anyone who cares about ease of use, ergonomics, and great sound.

The build

It seems odd to describe a speaker as inviting, but that’s the adjective that’s continued to come into my mind during my time with the Move 2. From the front, it looks like a standard Sonos speaker: Ovular, brandished with the Sonos logo, and a pinhole-sized LED on top to let you know the speaker’s status. On top of the speaker, you’ll find a recessed well that acts as a volume slider—swiping your finger left turns audio down, right turns it up—as well as play/pause, voice assistant mute, and track selection controls.

Turning the speaker around will reveal a power button, Bluetooth button, a mic switch, and USB-C port. The USB can charge the speaker or connect the Move 2 to a Sonos dongle for additional connectivity options. There are two exposed pins at the very bottom, allowing you to wirelessly charge the Move 2 by setting it atop a charging base (a plastic loop) included in the box. The base feels solid, and the speaker immediately recognized it and began charging. This isn’t the only way to top up the Move 2, but it gives the speaker a sense of additional portability; you feel like you can grab the speaker and go at any time. Sonos more than doubled the Move 2’s battery life compared to the original version, offering up to 24 hours of use per charge instead of 11. You shouldn’t have to plug it in daily—and I certainly didn’t—though you might have to more often if you pump the volume or take advantage of its ability to be a power bank for USB-C devices. Sonos did this without dramatically increasing the speaker’s size or weight, too.

Sonos-Move-2
The Move 2’s rear cutout makes it easy to grab and go. Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

What makes the back of the Move 2 different than any other speaker I’ve tested is that those aforementioned buttons are inside a tapered recess. The top of this control panel cutout is hollow, with enough space for four of my fingers. This acts as a handle, allowing me to transport the Move 2 from place to place easily. It’s the type of industrial design feature that feels immediately natural and nicer than the straps or handles that come with many larger portable speakers. While I really like the Move 2’s sound profile—more on that later—it’s this built-in handle that charmed me the most.

Cutting a chunk out of the back of your speaker could be a recipe for disaster as it leaves less space for audio components (bigger amps and drivers are better) and a battery. Sonos seems to have accounted for this, and I never had any issues with the Move 2’s sound or lifespan. I set it down on its charging stand for testing purposes but could have gotten a week’s worth of daily use from the speaker without running the risk of having it conk out. This is not entirely unique for a speaker in the Move 2’s size class, but still nice to see.

While the Move 2’s physical design impressed, what’s on the inside really counts. Sonos outfitted the speaker with three class-D amplifiers to drive a pair of angled tweets and a single mid-woofer. This driver array allows the speaker to play music in stereo, though you might want to pair it with a second Move 2 if you’re concerned with better channel separation. My only complaint about the Move 2’s build is that part of its finish got scratched while being transported in a backpack, which feels like it shouldn’t happen so easily for a speaker intended to be lugged around. All this doesn’t take away from the Move 2’s ability to perform indoors or out; with an IP56 rating, the speaker is protected from dust and high-pressure water streams so that you can feel confident taking it from the patio to the pool, the backyard to the beach (though don’t submerge it in sand nor surf).

The setup

Sonos has streamlined the setup process to the point of virtual perfection. The Sonos app (available on both iOS and Android) immediately recognized the Move 2 and asked if I wanted to add it to my system. Tapping “yes” on the prompt initiated a setup process that happened entirely in the background. The speaker was added to my home’s WiFi network and integrated as part of the Sonos system in under a minute.

I was prompted to download a firmware update, which was just as simple, and then I was free to begin testing the speaker in earnest. Many wireless speakers have a similarly straightforward setup process, but it’s impressive that Sonos has streamlined it for one that connects over WiFi. It’s tedious to enter your WiFi password into yet another app, and I was pleased I didn’t have to.

The Sonos Move 2 (left) next to its homebound sibling the Sonos Era 100 (right).
The Sonos Move 2 (left) next to its homebound sibling, the Sonos Era 100 (right). Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

If you’re on an Apple device, like I was for testing, you can stream lossless music to the speaker over WiFi using AirPlay 2, Apple’s custom protocol. Non-Apple devices can stream music from both services and their local library through the Sonos app. If you prefer Bluetooth, you can enable this mode by pressing the Bluetooth button on the back of the speaker. The first time you do this, the speaker will enter a pairing mode, and the LED on its front side will flash blue. Once connected, you can use it like a typical Bluetooth speaker, trading more universal connectivity for more limited bandwidth and range. However, it’s important to note that you must go through the WiFi setup before taking advantage of Bluetooth; this is not a speaker intended for anyone who doesn’t have a connected household.

It’s unnecessary, but you can connect the speaker to your Amazon account via the Sonos app to use the Move 2’s microphone to access Alexa, Amazon’s smart home assistant. When connected, you can use the Move 2 to control smart-home devices and play tracks with your voice. The Move 2 ships with Sonos’ more limited smart home assistant mostly designed around music playing. The microphone can be temporarily muted by tapping a capacitive touch control on the speaker’s top.

The sound

If you’ve heard a Sonos speaker before—especially the Era 100 or recently released Ray and Beam 2 soundbars—you’ll be familiar with how the Move 2 sounds. Sonos has its own preferred tuning and makes no qualms about admitting that. The Move 2’s press page goes so far as to say the speaker’s class-D digital amplifiers are “precision-tuned for the speaker’s unique acoustic architecture.” I’m typically very critical of non-flat EQs because I’d like to hear music as close to the artist’s intentions as possible, but I admit to liking the Move 2’s sound profile a lot.

Don’t worry; Sonos hasn’t evoked the infamous “smiley face,” or U-shaped, EQ setting wherein the lowest bass and treble frequencies are jacked up while the midrange is tamped down. The speaker sounds remarkably natural, with a tasteful EQ that you’ll only notice if you’re really listening to it. If you’re listening to tracks you’re very familiar with, you may notice a little extra bass here or a little less treble there, but it’s all in favor of making audio sound pleasing.

There isn’t an identical “one-sound-fits-all” Sonos sheen applied over everything you hear, as tweaks will vary from song to song and room to room. Sonos’ audio profile is backed up with Automatic Trueplay, a software feature that adjusts the Move 2’s sound based on the environment using the speaker’s built-in microphone. This happens in real-time, and it was possible to hear a slight difference in the Move 2’s sound when moving from one location to another. The one caveat, however, is that you need to have the microphone enabled for Automatic Trueplay to work. A physical switch on the back cuts off power to the mics if you’re not into persistent monitoring, but there’s no way to create a Trueplay profile that works with the mics off.

Some speakers, like JBL’s Authentics 300, live up to their name by providing a warts-and-all presentation of music, which is great if you crave music accuracy but does rely on you having higher-quality, better-mastered source material. This was the strategy high-end audio companies employed before the powered, connected, and wireless speaker revolutions. Still, it doesn’t always square with the way people listen to music now, i.e., listening to lossy tracks on streaming services. Both paths work, but Sonos’ path of applying digital processing makes it easier to get a consistent experience.

Sonos Move 2
The Sonos Move 2 is the new way to experience digital music. Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

While listening to podcasts, I noticed the richness in each voice, regardless of its register. There was a lot of detail, while a subtle sheen was placed over the entire recording to buff out some rough edges, which were audible when listening through other speakers. Sometimes, some light processing is good; you want to enjoy a show rather than be distracted by the effects of someone broadcasting from an untreated room. This doesn’t mean poor-sounding recordings will magically sound good; it’s just that good recordings can sound even better.

I had a similar experience when listening to music. I could make out every bass note Chris Hillman played on The Byrds’ cover of Bob Dylan’s “You Ain’t Going Nowhere” as clearly as the snare drum beats laid down by Michael Clarke. Jumping ahead 55 years to Olivia Rodrigo’s “bad idea right?” I was similarly pleased that the bass—turned way up—didn’t drown out the multi-layered vocals or driving guitar solo. I tested the Move 2’s treble performance by listening to The Clash’s “Train In Vain (Stand By Me),” whose intro includes a series of cymbal hits that can sound piercing on speakers with a bright sound profile. If that’s the case, each hit will hurt your ears. The Move 2 walked right up to that line but didn’t cross over. Naturally, the mastering and resolution of the music you listen to will play a factor in your experience. Different versions of the same songs can differ pretty dramatically depending on the musician and engineer’s tastes.

Listening to tracks from different eras and genres, I continued my formal tests by listening to Earth Wind & Fire’s autumnally appropriate “September.” The song, a total bop, has a lot going on. The horns in the background, conga drums, steady drum and bass lines, and those soaring vocals. The auditory menagerie sounded well-kempt on the Move 2, on which each song element was audible if you focused on it. On the whole, the Move 2’s sound profile sounds a little bass-heavy (not uncommon for a speaker that can see outdoor use), with a lot of effort put into making sure sounds in the midrange, like vocals, sound particularly great.

I spent most of my time listening to lossless audio tracks from an iPhone over WiFi, but did pop on Bluetooth mode for testing (the baseline SBC and native-Apple AAC codecs are supported). I didn’t notice any significant quality hit switching to the more compressed format and didn’t even feel limited by its lower range most of the time. In most cases, a track’s mastering will matter much more than its resolution.

While the speaker can play songs in stereo, it can’t recreate as wide a soundstage as a pair of individual speakers or even the football-shaped Bowers & Wilkins Zeppelin. If I listen to the lopsided stereo mix of The Mamas & the Papas’ “California Dreamin’,” it still sounds pretty close to the mono mix. On the Zeppelin, I could clearly hear vocals from half the band on my left and the other half on my right. Stereo separation gets better the further away you sit, but a portable Atmos speaker, this is not. Of course, you’re not taking the Zeppelin anywhere with you, no matter how powerfully dynamic it sounds. You can pair two Move 2 speakers together for better separation to the tune of $900, but you should consider other options at that point.

The conclusion

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 9.5 x 6.3 x 5 inches (HWD)
  • Weight: 6.61 pounds
  • Battery life: Up to 24 hours
  • Connectivity: WiFi 6, Bluetooth 5.0, USB-C port
  • IP Rating: IP56
  • Voice assistants: Amazon Alexa, Sonos Voice Control
  • Price: $449
  • Release date: September 20, 2023

Sonos has been on a roll since the introduction of its first smart speaker, the One, in 2017. The Move 2 is the latest addition, and it benefits from the improvements Sonos continually makes to its audio infrastructure and product ecosystem. Some features I didn’t test, like the ability to hook the Move 2 to a turntable using an optional dongle or the user-replaceable battery, speak to Sonos’ confidence in this being your go-to portable speaker for a long time and that you may even find new ways to use it. Of course, the Move 2’s $449 price tag will put it out of reach for many people, which is why the Toblerone-shaped Sonos Roam exists for $179. But what you get with the Move 2 is similar performance to the homebound Era 100 wherever you go and a battery that keeps going and going. The Move 2 is a refined speaker that will satisfy existing Sonos fans with its familiarity and audio quality that should convert new fans if their budget allows.

The post Sonos Move 2 speaker review: Welcome to the portable era appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best satellite phones of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-satellite-phone/ Tue, 30 Mar 2021 13:28:14 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278707
best satellite phones sliced header
Tony Ware

Keep a means to communicate close in remote areas with a trustworthy satellite phone.

The post The best satellite phones of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best satellite phones sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A red and black Garmin-brand satellite communicator Garmin inReach Mini GPS
SEE IT

This tough communicator is perfect for outdoor camping trips.

Best for international travel black satellite phone out of the box Inmarsat Isatphone 2.1 Satellite Phone
SEE IT

Flat rate calling charges are included with this satellite phone, saving you money on your post-trip phone bill.

Best budget green and grey communicator ZOLEO Satellite Communicator
SEE IT

This sub-$200 option includes Iridium satellite connection just like higher-end models.

Harnessing a satellite phone connection can provide you with communication anywhere globally. Using a satellite allows you to keep in touch with friends and family, whether you’re hiking in remote areas, sailing, flying, or just want to be prepared in case of a natural disaster. While cellphones and smartphones provide connections in major cities and towns, they’re dependent on terrestrial towers. In case of a natural disaster, cellphone networks can be overloaded or subject to structural damage. With one of the best satellite phones, your connection is dependent on satellites in space, so after a disaster or even if you’re traveling to the far corners of the Earth, you’ll be able to stay connected. 

Satellite phones can be used for voice calls, text messaging, and even basic emails to keep in touch. They allow for emergency preparedness by issuing SOS distress signals, GPS locations, directions, and emergency weather alerts. Some sat phone packages come with a satellite-based WiFi hub that will allow for your smartphone to work in locations that don’t have cellphone connections. Some satellite phone packages even allow for broadband access to the internet. To compare phones and determine which is right for you, we’ve selected some of the best satellite phones on the market to keep you safe and connected.

How we chose the best satellite phones

When venturing off the beaten path, communication can mean the difference between smooth sailing and a rough misadventure. We looked at critical reviews and user recommendations, consulted outdoor enthusiasts and experts, and conducted heavy research to find the best satellite phones—because there’s comfort in knowing you can always call home.

The best satellite phones: Reviews & Recommendations

The best satellite phones can do everything from traversing craggy ledges and vast green hillsides to phoning home while traveling internationally. The following are our picks that will keep you in touch wherever you go.

Best overall: Garmin inReach Mini GPS

Garmin

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This satellite communicator is portable and packed with features, like interactive SOS calling, to ensure safety anywhere in the world.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth, ANT+
  • Battery life: 50 hours in default tracking mode; 20 days in power-saving mode
  • Battery power: Internal rechargeable lithium battery
  • Dimensions: 2 x 1.3 x 3.9 inches

Pros

  • Portable
  • Fast access to SOS
  • Lots of battery power

Cons

  • Satellite subscription required for use

Makers of top-tier hiking watches, Garmin knows GPS devices and what adventurers need. This handy mini GPS Garmin satellite phone is perfect for packing with your tent on outdoor camping trips. This satellite communicator lets you send two-way text messages using the Iridium satellite network. It is compatible with other handheld devices, and you have unlimited access to maps and aerial images through the Garmin Earthmate app to support your trip safely. Plus, it’s water-rated to IPX7 and impact-resistant, meaning it’s just as tough as your next uphill climb. Sending out an SOS message is easy thanks to 24/7 access to the GEOS emergency response team. A satellite subscription is required for use.

Best satellite messenger: Spot X with Bluetooth 2-Way Satellite Messenger

Spot X

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This simple messenger allows you to send pre-programmed messages and your GPS location to loved ones.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth, USB
  • Battery life: 10 days
  • Battery power: 1 Lithium polymer battery
  • Dimensions: 2.9 x 0.94 x 6.54 inches

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • SOV capabilities
  • Spot Mapping app gives those at home peace of mind

Cons

  • Must pay for a year of activation

Stick to the basics and stay safe with this simple satellite GPS messenger. Connect with friends by sending coordinates and pre-programmed messages via satellite and stay safe in case of emergency with GPS locators and SOS signals. It also includes Save Our Vehicle (SOV) request capabilities and a track button to send and save your location. Those at home can look at your location and progress using the SPOT Mapping app. Be aware that you’ll need to pay for a year of activation in order to use this device. 

Best for international travel: Inmarsat Isatphone 2.1 Satellite Phone

Inmarsat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Tons of battery life and dust, splash, and shock resistance mean this sat phone is reliable and tough.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: eight hours of talk time; up to 160 hours on standby
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 10 x 9 x 4 inches

Pros

  • Easy to set up and activate
  • Comes unlocked for compatibility with multiple service providers
  • Lots of coverage area

Cons

  • Better for traveling than hiking
  • Typing on phone is tedious

The Isatphone is backed by the Inmarsat satellite network and is a good option for international travel. Additional features include GPS and SOS capabilities. Activate its included Bluetooth connection to use it hands-free. It’s preloaded with eight hours of talk time, up to 160 hours on standby, and comes with chargers, cables, and adapters. The phone is also dust, splash, and shock resistant, meaning you don’t have to worry about breaking it while out and about on your international adventure.

Best bundle: Iridium GO! Standard Package

Iridium GO!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This bundle includes tons of adapters—no dead batteries here.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: 5.5 hours of talk time; 15.5 hours of standby
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 4.5 x 3.2 x 1.25 inches

Pros

  • Lots of adapters
  • Prepaid SIM card included
  • Simple user interface

Cons

  • Expensive

This ready-to-use satellite communicator connects to the Iridium global satellite network, which includes 66 operating satellites. A prepaid SIM card with 1,000 minutes of talk time, a rechargeable lithium-ion battery, travel and car chargers, international adapters, and even a convenient carrying case are all included in the bundle. The Iridium GO! satellite communicator also connects to the Iridium GO! app to connect five separate devices sans wires. And it’s dust-proof, shock-resistant, and jet-water resistant. Carry it in your travel backpack or mount it in a car.

Best budget: ZOLEO Satellite Communicator

ZOLEO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This flexible device lets you connect to a satellite for less than $200—a steal compared to other satellite communicators.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: 200 hours
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 3.58 x 2.6 x 1.06 inches

Pros

  • Flexibility in using satellite, WiFi, or cellular
  • Iridium satellite network access
  • Required monthly subscription is less than $100 for cellular, WiFi, and SOS messaging

Cons

  • Monthly subscription required

Zoleo created a small rugged device with all the essentials for keeping you safe in remote locations. Highly rated by many outdoor editors, this device allows you to use the Iridium satellite network, WiFi, or cellular service, depending on what’s available. A monthly subscription is required with cost-level options, depending on your needs.

What to consider when buying the best satellite phones

While satellite phones won’t replace your smartphone for everyday use, they step in and offer communication solutions for use when cellphone service isn’t possible. Sat phones are designed for international travel—but always check the countries’ policies ahead of time: is access allowed while off-the-grid camping and hiking or for use on boats or on recreational aircraft? The best satellite phones are designed with off-the-grid use in mind and should be rugged, waterproof, and durable. 

While connections are possible in all remote locations, the ability to receive signals can be hindered by buildings, roofs, shelters, or heavy tree coverage. Many manufacturers have solved this issue and offer packages that are designed to include antennas to use on the outside of structures or buildings, vehicles, boats, or even in the cockpit of an airplane. 

Use case

If you want to stay safe and connected when setting out for off-the-grid outdoor adventures, you will need a small, lightweight satellite phone that’s set up to offer all the features you need to stay safe. The best satellite communicator for wilderness adventures will be rugged, waterproof, and allow for easy messaging and an SOS distress call in case of emergency. 

Choosing a satellite communicator made for outdoor adventures means you’ll also have access to useful extra features. Companies like Garmin offer top-of-the-line GPS support, extra maps, topographic information, and safety advice for all types of rough terrain. Better brands offer excellent customer support as well as handy online resources.

Messaging vs. calling

When you travel or go on outside adventures, having a fully loaded SAT phone may not be necessary. Opting for a more basic satellite communication solution also means saving money. You’ve already got a smartphone—what you need is another layer of communication safety outside the cellphone zone. If you want to keep it simple, consider a satellite GPS messenger. These devices allow you to send messages to family and friends, letting them know you are safe, and also have important extra safety features like GPS location and SOS signals.

Text & voice calling bundles

The best satellite phone bundle will not only include a reliable, durable, easy-to-use phone, but it should also offer voice calling, text messaging, and email messaging. The best phones include a reliable large global network with 24/7 technical support. Packages should include all you need to use and get going without any additional purchases.

Helpful features to look for include different power adapters that allow for use in locations throughout the world. The best sat phone bundles also give you flexibility. You should be able to choose between a monthly plan or a prepaid SIM card—if you only use the phone a few months out of the year, you’re not stuck with a large monthly payment. 

International travel

Sat phones are a smart solution when traveling outside your home country. (Be sure to check the policies of the country you’re visiting before bringing one: They’re illegal in some places.) The best satellite phone for international travel is easy to set up and comes with a prepaid SIM card. That gives you the peace of mind that you can use the phone quickly no matter where you are without worrying about cellphone carriers or reception. Look for phones that offer reliable voice and call connectivity, as well as emergency signals. International travel often takes you to places where you can’t be sure what to expect, and a sat phone offers safety and protection, along with the security of knowing that you won’t be unreachable.

Budget

If satellite phone cost is a factor, consider a more basic satellite communication device. Fully loaded satellite phones can set you back around $1,000, not to mention the extra cost of SIM cards or monthly service plans. Economical solutions keep communication basic but also require a monthly subscription for service. 

The best budget satellite communicator allows you to text and receive texts, and some even offer apps that allow your phone to access the satellite WiFi network. Always look for added emergency features such as SOS alerts and GPS coordinates.

FAQs

Q: How much does a satellite phone cost?

Satellite phones and satellite communication devices range in price from $300 to over $1,000. In addition to hardware costs, you need a satellite provider to connect the phone for service and can purchase a monthly or prepaid plan from $100 to $5,000. Depending on your provider, voice calls range from $.0.15 to $2.00 a minute. Satellite calls between different satellite networks can be expensive. Review voice calls, text messaging, and incoming call costs with your selected provider.

Q: Are satellite phones illegal?

Satellite phones are not illegal in the United States, but in some countries, like China and Cuba, they are. It’s important to research and contact the government of any country you may be visiting to check their policies for use. Satellite phones have restricted use in some countries (e.g., Russia, India), and you must get permission to use these devices or risk arrest. Legal restrictions are in place to curtail any possible illegal or terrorist activities that depend on signals that can bypass censorship and wiretapping. 

Q: Can I turn my phone into a satellite phone?

It is possible to use your smartphone as a satellite phone by purchasing a SatSleeve (Satellite Sleeve) and installing the SatSleeve App. The first time you use your SatSleeve, you have to set it up to connect via Bluetooth. Some satellite providers (like Iridium Go!) offer packages that include a satellite phone and a satellite phone hotspot that allows you to connect your smartphone, tablet, or laptop to a satellite-backed WiFi hotspot. 

Final thoughts on the best satellite phones

The best satellite phones will allow you to roam around the globe and stay connected. With rugged, waterproof designs, these phones can follow you on any adventure by land, sea, or air. Connect with a prepaid SIM card, or with a monthly plan to keep safe and communicate no matter where you are. In case of emergency, sat phones will send SOS signals and GPS coordinates to make sure you return home safe. Compare phones, then get shopping.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best satellite phones of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar landscape lights of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-solar-landscape-lights/ Fri, 15 Sep 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=570740
The best solar landscape lights will illuminate your path and save energy.

Light up the landscape with the glow of these solar-powered beauties.

The post The best solar landscape lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar landscape lights will illuminate your path and save energy.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Innogear Solar Lights are some of the best solar landscape lights overall. InnoGear Solar Lights
SEE IT

Easy installation, multiple modes, and remote control make these lights sparkle more than the competition.  

Best value Lianglome Solar Lights are the best solar landscape lights for value. LIANGLOME Solar Lights
SEE IT

Save some dollars but still get a stable mount that sits close to the wall for a sleek low profile.

Best string lights Brightown Solar String Lights are the best solar landscape lights that are strong lights. Brightown Solar String Lights
SEE IT

These beautiful lights adjust to three brightness levels. They also offer change through a USB cord when sunlight is limited.

Solar landscaping lights can illuminate your favorite outdoor spaces without increasing your energy bill. Their designs range from practical to whimsical to enhance different types of outdoor spaces. Some come in strings, and others are lantern-like with shepherd’s hooks to brighten walkways. What they all have in common is their ability to harness solar energy to light the night. When making your choice, you’ll need to consider what you want the lights to accomplish, whether that’s lighting for safety or accentuating decor. And keep in mind the number of lights and the design that will best complement your landscaping. We’ve rounded up seven of the best solar landscaping lights on the market from the dozens we researched, with an eye for different types to fit the landscaping of various modern homes.

How we chose the best solar landscape lights

The right solar landscaping lights for you come down to your specific personal needs. However, when we looked at creating our list, we thought about factors that improve the chances of the lights meeting those needs.

We started with light quality. While solar lights aren’t known for longevity, we looked for models with materials and construction to last several years. Next, we considered brightness levels, and our list includes models with adjustable brightness and a few without. If you’re looking for lights that enhance safety, there are models on the list that shine bright enough for that. However, we also considered that lights that set a mood don’t need to rival a spotlight, so we included solar landscaping lights with a gentler glow, too. 

Our methods also included the lights’ control methods, from remote control to light sensors. Finally, we looked for extra features that enhance the light’s practical use, such as adjustable solar panels and multiple installation methods.

The best solar landscape lights: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re looking to illuminate the front path to your home or create a festive atmosphere with string lights, we’ve rounded up the best solar landscape lights to serve your needs.

Best overall: InnoGear Solar Lights

InnoGear

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Warm white, white
  • Water-Resistance: IP65
  • Control: Touch

Pros

  • Easy ground or wall-mount installation
  • Low and high modes
  • Automatic turns on and off
  • Comes in warm or bright white

Cons

  • Some units may dim prematurely

The InnoGear Solar Lights offer practical lighting with easy installation. We like that they come in warm or bright white to fit the mood you’re creating in your yard. They can wall-mount on a deck or fence but also come with stakes for fast ground installation. 

Once the lights are installed, you can adjust the lighting angle up to 90 degrees and the solar panels by up to 180 degrees. That adjustability lets you get the right angle for your landscaping, like highlighting a tree or other features. The adjustable solar panels ensure you get the best angle for the panels to gather solar energy. 

A light sensor detects light and controls the on/off feature so the lights can energize once the sun is up. The InnoGear lights are IP65 waterproof so that they can withstand inclement weather, though reviewers suggest angling the solar panels to shed water. The manufacturer promises 12 hours of light on low, but reviewers find that number a bit exaggerated. According to customers, the lights last for several hours but not all night long.  Additionally, some units may dim within a few months.

Best string lights: Brightown Solar String Lights

Brightown

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Warm white
  • Water-Resistance: IP44
  • Control: Remote 

Pros

  • Three lighting modes
  • Solar-powered or electric charging using a USB cord
  • Remote control
  • 180-degree adjustable solar panel

Cons

  • Automatic on/off only turns on when very dark
  • Only comes with one replacement bulb

The Brightown Solar String Lights have classic good looks, and with 54 feet of string and 25 bulbs, you can cover a decent amount of space. They made our list because of their versatile lighting, control, and charging options. Four lighting modes let you choose the mood of your outdoor space, and a remote control makes it easy to adjust the lighting or set a timer if you don’t want to rely on the light sensor for control. 

The solar panel adjusts up to 180 degrees to get the best charging angle. However, if the sun’s hiding, you can charge the battery or run the lights using a USB cord. You can set an automatic on/off, but some users report that they only turn on when it’s extremely dark. The Brightown lights also have an IP44 rating, which protects them in all but the wettest of weather. Our biggest complaint is that they only include one replacement bulb.

Best path light: Rayolon Solar Ground Lights

Rayolon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Warm light, white light
  • Water-Resistance: IP65
  • Control: Foot mount switch

Pros

  • Line walkways for better definition
  • Sit flush with the ground
  • Eight LED lights per unit enhance brightness

Cons

  • Ground stakes break easily

The Rayolon Solar Ground Lights come in packs of four, eight, 12, and 16 to line paths and walkways of different lengths. Each unit features eight LED lights, creating a ring of illumination. Each light also has its own solar panel and rechargeable battery. While you have to keep the solar panels clean, these lights charge well and offer several hours of illumination per charge. 

With an IP65 waterproof rating, they can withstand heavy rain and snow without water damage. The lights charge well in full sunlight, but it could take longer to reach a full charge in winter when there’s a lot of cloud cover. Installation isn’t difficult. However, users reported that the ground stakes break easily, with the manufacturer suggesting breaking up or digging a partial hole before installing to protect the stake.

Best post light: SOLPEX Solar Outdoor Lights

Solplex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Warm white
  • Water-Resistance: IP44
  • Control: Sensor

Pros

  • Decorative design adds character
  • Offers excellent accent light
  • Holds charge well

Cons

  • Loses ability to hold charge over time
  • Requires assembly

The SOLPEX Solar Outdoor Lights bring style and character to the garden with illumination that goes beyond practical into decorative. These lights give off a gentle light that’s not designed to overpower a walkway. Instead, they emit an accentuating glow to highlight a garden or other landscaping features. They charge in a relatively short six to eight hours and offer several hours of illumination. 

These SOLPEX lights have an IP44 waterproof rating, which means they can withstand rainstorms, though regular deluges might be a bit much. Control is a no-brainer with an automatic on/off switch controlled by a light sensor. There’s some assembly involved, and you may need to break up hard ground before installation. 

Best lantern: MAGGIFT Hanging Solar Lights

Maggift

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: cool white, warm white
  • Water-Resistance: IP44
  • Control: Sensor

Pros

  • Includes shepherd hooks for hanging
  • Easy assembly and installation
  • Attractive, decorative design

Cons

  • May lean

The MAGGIFT Hanging Solar Lights bring a touch of elegance to the outdoors. They come with the shepherd’s hooks that hold the lights high enough to disperse light but not so high that they obstruct a view or fight with the rest of the landscaping. We like how their hanging design can integrate with different types of outdoor decor. For example, you can use them to line a walkway or use separately sold hooks to hang them from eaves or outdoor structures. 

These lights come in a bright or warm white, so you can match them to the rest of your outdoor lighting. The solar panels blend into the overall design. As long as the lights are placed where they can get full sun for most of the day, they emit a gentle glow for several hours into the night. Control comes from a standard light sensor that turns the lights on as it gets dark. The downside with these lights is that the stakes on the shepherd’s hooks aren’t super stable, so they can lean if bumped.

Best step lights: JACKYLED Solar Step Lights

Jackyled

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: cool light, warm light
  • Water-Resistance: IP65
  • Control: Automatic

Pros

  • Adhesive or screws for installation
  • Installs on a wide range of surfaces
  • Light casts in three directions for better illumination

Cons

  • Adhesive strips can fail

The JACKYLED Solar Step Lights have a three-sided design that casts 270 degrees of light. They come with two installation methods: screws and adhesive strips. The screw installation may be the more complicated method, but it’s the most secure between the two. Adhesive strips are easy, but some reviewers report that they fail after a short time. However, we do like the variety of surfaces these lights can be used on, from wood fencing and concrete to siding and various decking materials

These lights cast light in three directions, which provides extra light on stairs, and better visibility means better safety. Like other solar lights, these lights run using a light sensor, so you don’t need to worry about turning them on or off. The JACKYLED lights are also IP65-rated, which means they can withstand heavy rain, snow, and sleet.

Best value: LIANGLOME Solar Lights

Lianglome

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Cold white, multi-color, warm white
  • Water-Resistance: IP65
  • Control: Automatic

Pros

  • Fun lamp head design that disperses light in patterns
  • Powerful illumination for their size
  • Excellent instructions make them easy to assemble and install

Cons

  • Packages occasionally arrive with a faulty light

The LIANGLOME Solar Lights save a few dollars without sacrificing style or illumination. The unique head design directs light for a more concentrated beam, which makes them seem brighter than they are. The manufacturer includes almost overly helpful instructions that walk you through every part of the assembly and installation. Consequently, there’s rarely an issue with getting them installed. 

The lights are controlled with a light sensor and are IP65-rated, which means they can withstand rain, sleet, and snow. They take a relatively short four to six hours to charge. While they don’t typically live up to the manufacturer’s promised eight to twelve hours of illumination, according to reviews, they can easily last four or five on a single charge. However, every now and then, a package will arrive with a light that’s dim or doesn’t work.

Best floodlights: AmeriTop LED Solar Motion Sensor Lights

Ameritop

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: One
  • Water-Resistance: IP65 Waterproof
  • Control: Remote

Pros

  • Broad coverage area of up to 270 degrees wide
  • Bright output of 800 lumens
  • Motion detection up to 26 feet

Cons

  • Panel must receive 6 to 8 hours of full sunlight to fully charge

These motion-activated solar-powered floodlights eliminate the need for a wired power source, making them well-suited for homes without outdoor wiring for standard floodlights. Each light in this set consists of 128 tiny LED bulbs divided into three adjustable heads. The LEDs put out 800 lumens, ample brightness to light up a driveway or back patio.

In addition to being among the brightest outdoor solar lights on the market, this set is also one of the most adjustable. You can set the motion sensor to detect movement up to a range of 16 to 26 feet and aim each fixture’s two side heads to cover an area as broad as 270 degrees. When the lights’ sensors detect motion, they turn on for about 30 seconds, illuminating the area while conserving battery life.

The solar panel on top of each light uses polycrystalline silicon technology, which offers a higher level of charging efficiency than older solar panel technology. Mounting brackets for the lights are included.

Best budget: Signature Garden 8-Pack Solar Garden Lights

Signature Garden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Black, bronze, silver
  • Water-Resistance: Yes
  • Control: App

Pros

  • Includes eight lights
  • Install easily with no tools required
  • Rust and corrosion-proof

Cons

  • Plastic construction is not as attractive as a metal finish

At a cost of about $5 per light, one would be hard-pressed to find a better deal than this set of solar-powered garden lights from Signature Garden. With its eight lights, the set can cover a walkway or illuminate several garden beds. The lights are black and have a simple no-frills look that suits many home exteriors. Though they lack the durability of metal, they are constructed of ABS rigid plastic, which won’t rust or corrode in wet weather and is tough enough to endure the occasional bump.

Despite their affordable price, they’re brighter than most pathway lights at 15 lumens. Small solar panels that sit on top of the light charge a rechargeable battery that keeps the light on at night for up to eight hours. Like other pathway lights, each light in this set sits on a stake. To install, simply insert the pointed end of the post into the soil and attach the lamp.

Things to consider when shopping for the best solar landscape lights

You have a few things to consider when choosing the best solar landscaping lights. Everything from the size and shape of your yard to how you want to use the lights will factor into your final decision. 

Type

Outdoor solar lights come in a variety of types. Pathway lights are commonly sold in groups of six or eight to light walkways. This type of landscaping light sits on top of a spike that you drive into the ground.

String lights are ideal for lighting outdoor living and dining areas. You can run string lights between trees or a set of poles, or weave them through a pergola.

Floodlights provide task and security lighting for driveways. Floodlights typically mount to the eaves of the home or garage via a simple-to-install mounting kit.

Spotlights are another popular form of outdoor lighting and are typically used to highlight architectural features on a home or landscaping features, such as trees, fountains, or statues. Similar to pathway lights, the spotlight typically sits on stakes that you drive into the ground.

Color and brightness

Next, think about the light color. Light color is measured in kelvins, with anything below 3000K falling on the warm side. Warm light gives off a yellowish glow. Lights that are 4000K and above are considered cool or bright white, giving off a bluish cast. Bright white lights may seem brighter, while warm lights offer more ambiance and mood. 

Although outdoor solar lights won’t be as bright as hardwired lights, they should still shine bright enough to do the job. A pathway light should produce around 10 to 15 lumens, while a spotlight should generate around 200 lumens. Floodlights designed to provide visibility and security will produce around 800 lumens.

Battery life

Outdoor solar lights are powered via a rechargeable battery that will provide a varying amount of runtime before requiring a recharge. Expect to get around eight hours for a walkway light and around six hours for a brighter spotlight. Floodlights, which can use more than 100 LEDs, will get significantly less run time due to their high-lumen output. As such, this style of light is only designed to come on for a short period when the light senses motion.

Keep in mind that solar lights need around six hours of direct sunlight each day to sufficiently recharge the batteries. Since rechargeable batteries eventually wear out and no longer hold a charge, look for solar outdoor lights with replaceable batteries.

Budget

Finally, don’t forget to consider your budget. You might be able to get two dozen lights for $20, but half of those lights may not work right out of the package. The other half may go out within a few weeks. While more expensive doesn’t always mean better, for solar landscaping lights, additional durability and quality can go a long way to help your investment. 

FAQs

Q: How do you pick outdoor solar lights?

 First, determine where you need lighting and choose a light fixture that meets that need. Choose a light that will provide the brightness and runtime you need to light the area adequately. Finally, determine where you can place the light so that its solar panel receives at least six hours of direct sunlight daily. 

Q: How long do solar landscape lights last?

The durability and lifespan of solar landscape lights vary by brand and model. Inexpensive lights may only last a year or two. Models with a sturdier build that fall into the $40 to $60 range can often last several years with proper care. Care includes cleaning off the solar panels, replacing the batteries, and protecting the lights from damage from pets and lawnmowers.

Q: Do you leave solar landscaping lights on all the time?

Yes, you generally leave solar landscaping lights on all the time. Most solar landscaping lights have light sensors that turn the lights as the sun goes down. However, some have remote controls with timers and different lighting schemes.

Q: How do you position outdoor solar lights?

Outdoor solar lights require maximum access to the sun. Direct sunlight charges the batteries so the lights can illuminate after dark. Any shade will limit the amount of power the solar panels can absorb. To maximize the light, avoid installing solar lights under trees, bushes, or in the shade of a house or other outdoor structure.

Q: Which solar lights are the brightest?

With their 15-lumen output, the Signature Garden 8-Pack Solar Garden Lights are the brightest pathway-style solar lights on the market. InnoGear Solar Spotlights put out 200 lumens each, making them the brightest solar spotlight. At the same time, the AmeriTop LED Solar Motion Sensor Lights are among the brightest outdoor lights you can buy at 800 lumens.

Final thoughts on the best solar landscape lights

The best solar landscaping lights improve safety, add character, and fit within your outdoor design plans. Whether that’s a string of lights strung through an arbor or post lights lining a walkway, these outdoor lights illuminate where you need them without gobbling up energy (and money).

Selecting a solar outdoor light is about choosing the right type of outdoor fixture for the job. Floodlights are the best option for providing visibility and security for driveways and areas around the home, while pathway lights are ideal for illuminating walkways. Once you know what type of light to choose, make sure to purchase one that provides adequate brightness to do the job with a solar cell that can capably recharge the batteries during the day.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar landscape lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Cozy up to $200 in savings on this Solo Stove portable fire pit at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/fall-solo-stove-fire-pit-amazon-deal/ Thu, 14 Sep 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=570408
Home photo
Solo Stove

Nothing says fall like a roaring fire. This smokeless pit from Solo Stove is on sale and can help you make a mean s'more.

The post Cozy up to $200 in savings on this Solo Stove portable fire pit at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Home photo
Solo Stove

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The temperature is dropping to a Goldilocks-esque perfect degree—not too cold, but not too hot. That means one thing: it’s time to get cozy while you make some s’mores and enjoy a cold beverage around a hot fire. And you can make that vibe easier to access with $200 off a Solo Stove portable fire pit at Amazon.

Solo Stove Yukon Portable Fire Pit with Stand $399.98 (Was $609.99)

Solo Stove

SEE IT

The Solo Stove Yukon is the company’s largest smokeless fire pit, coming in at 27 inches in diameter and 17 inches in height. It’s not the latest Solo Stove Yukon—that would be the Yukon 2.0—but its previous iteration has the same superior airflow and smokeless action as its updated cousin. It also lacks a removable ashtray, but it’s not a dealbreaker if you don’t mind doing a little extra work to dispose of them. We love this brand of portable fire pits and feel it will ignite your passion for evenings outdoors.

No campfire is complete without some quality tunes, of course. Play some campfire hits from the JBL Go 3, which is 20% off. It’s waterproof, dustproof, and packs a big punch despite its compact size—perfect for making all those rustic Americana guitar tones melodic as they are mournful.

Get this deal before it blows out—not all fires can last forever.

Here are other deals we’re falling for:

The post Cozy up to $200 in savings on this Solo Stove portable fire pit at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best night-vision goggles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-night-vision-goggles/ Mon, 22 Nov 2021 20:18:37 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=388318
A lineup of the best night vision goggles on a white background
Amanda Reed

Here are our picks for night vision goggles that are perfect for camping, canoeing, surveilling, and everything in between.

The post The best night-vision goggles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best night vision goggles on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Bushnell Equinox X650 Night Vision Monocular is the best overall night-vision goggles Bushnell Equinox X650 Monocular
SEE IT

Night-vision monocular with a wide array of uses and a useful field of vision.

Best for boaters SiOnyx Aurora are the best night-vision goggles for boaters. SiOnyx Aurora
SEE IT

A monocular night-vision camera that can help you navigate, even if you aren’t a wayfinder. 

Best budget The CREATIVE XP 2021 Digital Night Vision Monocular is the best budget night vision goggles CREATIVE XP Digital Night Vision Monocular
SEE IT

An excellent pair of inexpensive night-vision goggles.

You don’t have to be on a movie set or on a tour of duty to use night-vision goggles. While the most advanced NVGs are still largely reserved for those in the armed forces—as well as the exciting missions depicted by Hollywood—many of the best night-vision goggles have become affordable enough for general use. So if you’re looking to see the campsite in a new light or have a clearer view of when you have a clear shot, you can find a pair of goggles that’ll suit your needs. Still, because NVGs are so often associated with special ops, it’s understandable if you feel a little left in the dark. This guide is meant to enlighten your search for the best night-vision goggles.     

How we chose the best night-vision goggles

There’s a major difference between a cheap pair of night-vision goggles that use the term “night vision” loosely and those that are budget-friendly and tactical. To sort out the toys from the tried-and-trues, we looked at critical reviews, user recommendations, conducted first-hand testing, and performed heavy research. We also consulted experts who have contributed to outdoor publications like Field & Stream and Outdoor Life.

The best night-vision goggles: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you need night sight on the boat, on the trail, or on duty, here are the best night-vision goggles as we see them. 

Best overall: Bushnell Equinox X650 Monocular

Bushell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Reliable performance, user-friendly zoom, and daytime color controls at a great price point.

Specs

  • Battery: 4 AA batteries
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IPX4 standard
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 5X

Pros

  • Tripod mountable
  • Color daytime viewing
  • Built-in video recording

Cons

  • Does its best in ambient light/moonlight

Whether you’re hiking under the stars or hunting under the cover of darkness, the  Bushnell Equinox X650 Night Vision Monocular can improve your nocturnal adventures. The built-in columnated infrared illuminator lets you see in pitch blackness, while the 32mm objective lens lets in plenty of light and affords a field of view of 26 feet at a distance of 100 yards. The 5X zooming means that the deer you’re hunting or the owl you’re watching will look even bigger. Meanwhile, these infrared goggles are themselves nicely compact, measuring under eight inches long, under six inches wide, and clocking in at less than a pound. Once you pop the batteries in, you’ll get up hours of use that’ll let your target be seen at night.

Best for boaters: SiOnyx Aurora  

SiOnyx

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An IP67 waterproof rating adds durability in case of a spill on a near-starless, moonless night.

Specs

  • Battery: 1 replaceable, rechargeable lithium-ion battery
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IP67 rated
  • Tripod mountable: No, but can be worn around the neck
  • Optical magnification: 3X

Pros

  • Weapon-rated
  • Provides full color in darkness
  • Sync to SiOnyx app for wireless video streaming

Cons

  • No auto-focusing

With an IP67 waterproof rating, the SiOnyx Aurora camera can survive falling into the water near the shore. (The included case is waterproof, too). The camera also features GPS, as well as a compass and accelerometer, offering useful information when you’re out on the water. The infrared technology lets you see in near-starless, moonless conditions, and you can sync the camera to your smartphone to stream your night footage wirelessly. You can also save footage via the 32GB microSD card. That’s all packed into a portable night-vision monocular that weighs less than three-quarters of a pound.

Best for long distances: ATN BinoX 4K 4-16x

ATN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These wireless-enabled 4K goggles feature a 1,000-yard zoom range and a laser rangefinder, making them a strong choice for long-distance spotting.

Specs

  • Battery: One replaceable, rechargeable lithium-ion battery
  • Water-resistant: Not published
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 4-16x

Pros

  • Staggering 16x zoom range spots targets up to 1,000 yards away
  • Integrated 1080p video recording
  • Rechargeable internal battery offers up to 15 hours of operation

Cons

  • Lacks an official IP waterproof rating
  • Infrared light doesn’t reach out to goggles’ full range

If long-distance night vision is what you’re after, you’ll be hard-pressed to find a more capable option than the ATN BinoX 4K. With its eye-watering 1,000-yard maximum zoom range, integrated 1080p microSD video recording, and laser rangefinder, the BinoX 4K is built to expand the range of your outdoor adventures in a convenient binocular-style form. The goggles use a 4K UHD sensor to deliver crisp picture quality at zoom distances of up to 10x before any resolution loss, and if you’re hunting on a team, the BinoX 4K can tag and send target location information to any other ATN devices and smartphones. While the ATN BinoX 4K features an integrated infrared (IR) lamp, its effective range naturally begins to drop at a distance of around 100 yards, making it ineffective for the goggles’ full zoom range in full darkness. The goggles are also marketed as being weatherproof, but as they lack a specific IP rating you’ll want to be mindful if working in wet conditions.

Best for military precision: Armasight PVS-14 Gen 3 Multi-Purpose Monocular

Armasight

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Tactical night-vision goggles that are trusted by police forces and militaries around the world.

Specs

  • Battery: Single AA battery
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IP67 rated
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 1X

Pros

  • Military-grade and combat tested
  • Included 3-year warranty
  • Long battery life

Cons

  • Expensive

The Armasight PVS-14 Gen 3 Multi-Purpose Monoculars are used by militaries around the world, so you know right away they’re serious. Add a 40-degree field of view and infrared illuminator, and you’ll find some of the best night-vision goggles. It’s no wonder that they’re used by police officers and military units alike. These military night-vision goggles, with up to 50 hours of battery life, will automatically adjust to the brightness in your environment. Plus, they have an ergonomic design with easy-to-use controls. They are regulated under International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) guidelines, which means you can’t bring this NVG outside U.S. soil.

Best for kids: JStoon Night-Vision Goggles

JStoon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A powerful casual option for helping your young one get in touch with nature.

Specs

  • Battery: 6 AA batteries
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IP 56 rated
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 3X

Pros

  • Great for casual use or beginners
  • Adjustable night-vision brightness
  • Video recording capabilities

Cons

  • IP56 rating offers limited protection against water and dust

The JStoon Night-Vision Goggles for kids could easily be good enough for many adults. They feature 3X magnification and 4X digital zoom, an 850 nm infrared illuminator, and are capable of seeing more than 984 feet in complete darkness. Kids (and adults) still learning patience can view footage (up to an hour of 960p high-resolution video) directly on the goggles’ 2.31-inch TFT screen. The 25mm objective lens won’t let in as much detail as the larger lenses that you’ll find in the best night-vision goggles. That said, the affordable price tag also means you don’t have to get too worked up if your kid breaks them—the IP56 rating offers only limited protection against water and dust.  

Best budget: CREATIVE XP Digital Night Vision Monocular

Creative XP

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A quality budget monocular that offers high-price features at a fraction of the cost.

Specs

  • Battery: 5 AA batteries
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IP56 rated
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 3X

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Under $100
  • SD card included

Cons

  • Not military grade

The CREATIVE XP Digital Night Vision Monocular is one of the best cheap night-vision devices you can buy, letting you see up to 650 feet ahead with a 25mm objective lens. An LED illuminator provides clear vision even in complete darkness—no ambient light required. It also allows you to take photos, record soundless video, and play back what you’ve captured. It comes with a USB cable and a 32 GB microSD card, but it can handle microSD cards up to 128 GB. Best of all, at just over 10 ounces, it’s highly portable for on-the-go use.

What to consider when buying the best night-vision goggles

NVGs work by amplifying the small amount of visible light present after the sun goes down to create images that your eye can see. They rely on complicated technology that turns light into electrical current before turning it back into visible light—much like old televisions. Complicated, too, is deciding between the best night-vision goggles. Here are some of the main features to consider.   

Have you made a style choice?

Night sight comes in different forms: goggles, binoculars, and monoculars. Night-vision goggles go over both eyes and can be mounted to your head. But unlike night-vision binoculars, pure night-vision goggles offer no magnification. Night-vision monoculars are used with just one eye and are, therefore, more compact than the other two options. So binoculars are best if you want to see objects farther away, monoculars are best if you need to keep weight down in your pack, and NVGs are best if you’re looking for night sight that’s easy to use, especially when on the move.    

Do you need the next generation?

The best night-vision goggles are made in four generations of technology, numbered 1 through 4. Generation 1 is the oldest and the cheapest, and they are still the most common for hobbyists. On the other hand, military NVGs are made with generations 2 and above and can also cost 10 times as much as Gen 1 technology—though such models are still available for public sale.

The main difference lies in the strength of the light amplification. While Gen 1 tops out at about 900 times the light gain, Gen 2 and above can reach 30,000 times the light gain. Gen 1 also offers lower resolution images—1,000 compared to more than 5,000, meaning Gen 2 and above gives you images with more clarity, especially at greater distances. Gen 2 and above also work better in lower-light situations since they have more than 240 UA/lm light sensitivity, compared to Gen 1, which tops out at that rating. Gen 3 is currently used by many U.S. military units since it features more than 300 yards of range, more than 10,000 hours of use, and a ton of versatility as it can be used with scopes, camera adapters, and magnification lenses. Gen 4 offers benefits like faster adaptation to shifting light, but it’s not otherwise widely viewed as a huge advancement over Gen 3. The next innovation in night vision will likely be augmented reality.

Can you see heat?

Thermal night vision is another means of seeing images in the dark. Rather than converting light into electrical current and amplifying that signal, thermal goggles detect heat, providing outlines of the world based on what’s hot and cold. That means when you use infrared goggles, the deer you’re tracking will stand out in bright red and orange against the cold blue of the night. Thermal goggles are best in extremely low-light situations, where there truly isn’t any light to be amplified.

Do you want to relive what you see?

Some of the best night-vision goggles are also cameras, letting you capture footage and save it, rather than just viewing everything in real-time. If you’re hoping to take pictures of owls or video of the northern lights, you definitely want night goggles that can also capture content. Many such night goggles come with 32GB SD cards for storing files. Other NVGs have built-in LCD screens that let you watch what you’ve captured on the goggles themselves, without having to transfer any files. 

FAQs

Q: How much do night-vision goggles cost?

Night vision goggles can start at around $100 and can go up to $4,000 if they’re military-grade.

Q: Do night-vision goggles work in total darkness?

Yes, night-vision goggles really work. They let you see objects in total darkness, even if those objects are football fields ahead of you. Night-vision goggles work by converting the small amount of light photons that are present at night into electrical current and amplifying those electrons before converting them back into visible light. Thermal goggles detect heat energy, letting you see the shapes of images, even in situations where there truly is no light—like in a smoky building. Night-vision goggles cannot see through walls, however. And the majority are not built for daytime use—doing so can cause internal and external damage to the NVR.

Q: Why is night vision so expensive?

Night vision is so expensive for a number of reasons. One reason is the high manufacturing costs for technology that can turn nearly invisible light into something visible or for technology that can read heat. Relatively low demand is another reason for the higher prices. In addition, many manufacturers have expensive contracts for making military NVGs, thus driving up the price point. You can find affordable options, though they may come with fewer bells and whistles.

Q: Can civilians get night-vision goggles?

Yes, as there are no laws or regulations regarding owning them. However, you can’t take military-grade or tactical models out of the country without approval from the U.S. State Department.

Final thoughts on the best night-vision goggles

The best night-vision goggles can let you see after dark in a whole new light. If you’re looking for military precision, you’ll need a pair of enhanced night-vision goggles with advanced technology that can amplify low levels of light by the tens of thousands. But that technology will also cost you thousands of dollars. For a factor of ten less, you can find night goggles that’ll sufficiently brighten the campsite or your view from the hunting stand. Ultimately, finding the best night-vision goggles comes down to how well you need to be able to see and how much you want to spend.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best night-vision goggles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best neck fans in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-neck-fans/ Tue, 15 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=562654
The best neck fans provide welcome relief while going easy on your wallet.

Stay cool when the mercury is soaring with the help of these easy-to-wear devices.

The post The best neck fans in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best neck fans provide welcome relief while going easy on your wallet.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Green neck fan on a counter. JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler
SEE IT

This lightweight fan can last up to 16 hours on a single charge.

Best for cooling Torras' Coolify Air Conditioner and Fan is the best neck fan for cooling. Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan
SEE IT

This air conditioner and neck fan in one features a powerful motor.

Best budget Comlife makes the best neck fan at a budget-friendly price. Comlife Portable Beck Fan
SEE IT

This wallet-friendly model includes two fans for extra cooling.

Neck fans have already racked up millions of searches on TikTok because they’re cool. Or at least they’re cooling. These wearable fans provide a steady breeze exactly where you need it: right next to your face. They’re ideal for walks in the heat or keeping cool in the office, cost a fraction of bigger fans, and can be a stylish accessory. Here are some tips on what to look for before purchasing and our recommendations for the best neck fans.

How we chose the best neck fans

In the face of increasing heat, we’re on the lookout for ways to stay cool that don’t contribute to global warming. We looked to brands that are using the latest technology to provide relief in a package that’s lightweight and easy to use. In addition, we searched for models that would work for different uses. We considered the design, noise level, and time each charge lasted.  Finally, we included fans at a variety of price points.

The best neck fans: Reviews & Recommendations

Neck fans provide welcome relief from scorching sidewalks and on humid hikes, all while keeping your hands free. The best fans for your neck are lightweight, provide several levels of cooling breezes, and last at least 5 hours on a single charge. Here are our favorite options to help you chill.

Best overall: JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Bladeless 
  • Weight: 9.1 ounces
  • Battery: 4,000 mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 16 hours

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Stellar battery life
  • Available in five colors

Cons

  • Wayward strands of hair may get caught

The highly rated JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler is ready to go right from the box. Just connect the included USB-C cord and charge the included lithium-ion battery for up to 16 hours of use. Impressive! This bladeless fan is lightweight and felt good around my neck. This 360-degree fan features 78 vents and three speeds, providing a steady, refreshing breeze to the underside of my face without blowing my hair all over the place. This JisuLife fan is also reasonably quiet, though louder at Level 3—the highest wind speed.

That said, when I let my hair down, a few strands did get a little caught in the fan. And while this JisuLife model is great for a walk or hike on a hot day, it’s not particularly suited for running if you bounce up and down a lot as you stride. But it’s an attractive and affordable way to stay cool on the go. And it comes in five colors (dark green, dark blue, gray, green, and yellow).

Best for cooling: Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan

Torras

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Bladeless 
  • Weight: .77 pounds
  • Battery: 5,000 mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 4 hours in cooling mode; up to 8 hours in fan mode

Pros

  • Air conditioner and fan in one
  • Lightweight
  • Long-lasting battery

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Some users say battery can run hot

Why not get the best of both worlds with a neck fan and air conditioner in one? Torras’ Coolify neck fan comes with a built-in ceramic semiconductor radiator that provides air conditioning the company says can cool the skin by 18 degrees Fahrenheit in three seconds. It also features a fan with a motor that operates at a speedy 500 rpm, blowing cool air out and up to your face through 36 vents. At just .77 pounds, it’s lightweight and has a sleek design. The included lithium-ion battery charges in about 2.5 hours and lasts up to 4 hours in cooling mode and up to 8 hours in fan mode.

Best adjustable: AMACOOL Bladeless Neck Fan

AMACOOL

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Bladeless
  • Weight: 9.7 ounces
  • Battery: 5,000 mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 7 hours

Pros

  • Adjustable neck band
  • Comes with two motors
  • Features energy-saving mode

Cons

  • Some users say it’s not that powerful

A neck fan is an ingenious solution for on-the-spot cooling, but if it doesn’t feel comfortable on your neck, you’re not going to wear it. AMACOOL’s Bladeless Neck Fan was designed from silicone to be adjustable so that the neckband can fit everyone from a child to an adult with a large neck. At 5,000mAh, the battery is powerful for a neck fan. This device features two motors that power four speeds, including an energy-saving mode. It can also provide up to 9 hours of cooling (depending on the fan speed) from its 60 air vents. You can also use it with a stroller. Consider one of the best outdoor misting fans for a more comprehensive option.

Best for kids: ICEBIRDS Portable Neck Fan for Kids

ICEBIRDS

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Bladeless 
  • Weight: 9.2 ounces
  • Battery: 1,800mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 9 hours

Pros

  • Comes in animal designs
  • Affordable
  • Features three speeds

Cons

  • Battery not very powerful

Getting a kid to wear something is a lot easier if it has a fun design. ICEBIRDS Portable Neck Fan fits the bill. Designed specifically for children, these fans come in several animal-inspired models, including Bear Orange, Dinosaur Cyan, and Swan White. At 11.9 ounces, this neck fan is lightweight. It also has three speeds, though the 1,800-mAh battery isn’t particularly powerful. But depending on the speed, the charge can last for up to 9 hours. 

Best budget: Comlife Portable Neck Fan

Comlife

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Blades
  • Weight: 6.9 ounces
  • Battery: 2,600 mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 9 hours

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Features two heads 
  • Long battery life

Cons

  • Battery may get hot
  • Some users say it’s not that powerful

Comlife’s wearable fan is an ideal way to stay cool without spending a lot of cash.  This double-headed small portable fan hangs comfortably on the neck and is 360-degree adjustable. It features six fan speeds, battery life between two and 9 hours depending on use, and an included USB cable for simple charging. This necklace fan weighs just 6.9 ounces, so you can even wear it during a vigorous workout or just for a walk around the neighborhood. — Carsen Joenk

Things to consider before you buy a neck fan

Neck fans are deceptively easy to use; just charge them and put them on for instant relief. But there are some features to look for when making your decision.

Bladeless v. with blades

The makers of bladeless fans say the benefit of their design is that users’ hair won’t get caught in blades and that they’re safer for kids. While that’s generally true, sometimes longer strands can still get caught in a neck fan’s vents. But hair is easier to remove and doesn’t get tangled as it would for models made with blades.

Power

The batteries of the neck fans on this list range from 1,800mAh to 5,000mAh. The best overall one we tested provided plenty of relief, but some users have said certain models aren’t powerful enough. While a neck fan should provide a cool breeze to your face and neck, keep in mind that at their size, they’re not a replacement for more powerful portable fans.

Two-in-one functionality

Some models are designed with additional features for extra cooling, such as the Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan, which is a neck fan and air conditioner in one. You’ll appreciate the added cooling power, but remember that this more advanced technology will cost more and may be harder to repair.

Battery life

Many of the picks on this list come with USB-C cords for charging. It’s important to remember that most of the neck fans on this list can operate at three levels of wind speed. The battery will last longer (up to 16 hours) if you use a lower speed or an energy-saving mode if the fan has one.

Noise levels

You don’t want a neck fan close to your face that’s so loud you can’t hear. The range of wind speeds also results in different noise levels. Look for neck fans that are quieter, such as the JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler, which operates at about 25 decibels.

FAQs

Q: How much does a neck fan cost?

The cost of a neck fan depends on the sophistication of its features. The Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan is designed with a ceramic semiconductor radiator that allows it to act as a neck fan and air conditioner in one. It costs around $120. At the other end of the spectrum, the budget-friendly Comlife Portable Neck Fan features two small fans and will cost you about $20.

Q: How long should you charge a neck fan?

The amount of time you should charge a neck fan depends on the model. Some, like the Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan, reached a full charge in about 2 hours, while the Comlife Portable Neck Fan takes about 4 hours to charge up fully. Once your device is charged, you should remove the power source to ensure the battery doesn’t overheat.

Q: Can I leave a fan on for 12 hours?

You can leave a neck fan on for 12 hours if you have a model like the JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler, which lasts up to 16 hours. Keep in mind that you’ll have to run the fan at a lower speed for it to last that long.

Final thoughts on the best neck fans

Just as headphones and earbuds help you create a serene bubble on the go, a neck fan can help add some physical cool to that mental oasis. These adaptable options can provide targeted relief for hours, saving energy and money. As the hot days linger, a neck fan is an essential tool to add to your collection of weather-related accessories.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best neck fans in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best patio heaters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-patio-heater/ Thu, 16 Dec 2021 18:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=283668
The best outdoor heaters
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Being outdoors is a natural mood enhancer, even when the temperature drops, so pick a patio heater and get that pick me up.

The post The best patio heaters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor heaters
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Black and silver patio heater on a mushroom shape with wheels AmazonBasics 46,000 BTU Outdoor Propane Patio Heater with Wheels
SEE IT

This high-powered propane options has a slim space-saving design and a rust-resistant finish.

Best electric Black electric patio heater with remote control Sunday Living Electric Patio Heater, Outdoor Heater
SEE IT

This electric option offers modern features like a remote control, multiple power settings, and a 12-hour timer.

Best budget Mocha color patio heater Mainstay Tall Mocha Patio Heater
SEE IT

Stay cozy all year long with this affordable, yet powerful gas-powered pick.

If you’ve ever been a little underdressed for the weather at an outdoor get-together, you know the feeling of being irritated as the cold creeps in—especially after the sun goes down and there’s nary a patio heater in sight. A chill can put a damper on the fun of being with friends. However, getting fresh air is a boon to our mental and physical health, even if the sun isn’t warm. Luckily, there’s a good solution to keep you and your guests comfortable so you can socialize longer in your yard: an outdoor patio heater (or two, or three, if your wallet can handle it).

Patio heaters can enable you to stay outside later during nice weather and extend outdoor sessions into the colder seasons without worrying about your guests’ comfort. Even in wintery weather, you can get together outdoors with friends if you have ways to take the chill out. So here’s our suggestion for how to do just that: Pick the best outdoor heater below that matches your budget, preference for the type of heat, availability of an electrical outlet, how much output you need, and desired appearance.

How we chose the best patio heaters

We wouldn’t want to leave you in the cold when it comes to buying the hottest seasonal piece of backyard furniture: the patio heater. In order to separate the torches that light our fires from the lukewarm lighters, we looked at critical reviews, peer recommendations, tested them out on our own back porches, and conducted a bonfire’s worth of research.

The best patio heaters: Reviews & Recommendations

The best patio heaters should be as hot as the sixth circle of hell. We may be neutral in some aspects of life, but not here: We believe that at least one of the patio heaters we’ve listed should provide enough warmth to make guests feel cozy during a wintertime fête. Combine a patio heater with a portable fire pit, and you’ve got quite the outdoors event properly accessorized.

Best overall: AmazonBasics 46,000 BTU Outdoor Propane Patio Heater with Wheels

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This powerful patio is reasonably priced and easy to transport for hosting on the fly.

Specs

  • Power source: Propane
  • BTUs: 46,000
  • Heating coverage: 9 ft.
  • Dimensions: 32.12 x 32.12 x 91.3 inches

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Easy to transport
  • One-touch ignition

Cons

  • Need batteries for the igniter

With 46,000 BTU output and stainless steel construction, it provides strong heat and looks classy. Its wheeled base makes it easy for you to transport. The bottom has a sand or water reservoir (no sand included, though) to help keep it weighed down. Installation is not too difficult; just be aware that you’ll need batteries for the igniter.

Best pyramid-style: EAST OAK Pyramid Patio Heater

EAST OAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A piezoelectric ignition and auto-shutoff combine ease and safety.

Specs

  • Power source: Propane (electric start)
  • BTUs: 48,000
  • Heating coverage: 15 ft.
  • Dimensions: 91 x 20 x 20 inches

Pros

  • High powered
  • All stainless steel design
  • Wheels for easy movement

Cons

  • Slightly uneven heat distribution

Just over 90-inches tall, this pyramid-style outdoor patio heater comes with a wheel kit so you can move it easily wherever you need it. It’s well-designed and easy to use, with a triple safety protection system that’ll automatically shut the heater off when it’s tipped over. If its flame is accidentally extinguished, the heater will stop feeding gas to the flame. Delivering 42,000 BTUs of heat, this patio heater can cover areas of up to 15 feet. That’s ideal for a backyard gathering because nobody will feel cramped. Finally, this heater’s rust-resistant stainless steel frame will help it survive the outdoor elements.

Best wall: Briza Infrared Patio Heater

Briza

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Mount this heater on the wall or use it like a stand-up heater thanks to the included tripod stand.

Specs

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • BTUs: 3,069-5,115
  • Heating coverage: 9 ft.
  • Dimensions: 35.5 x 48 x 4 inches

Pros

  • Built-in timer
  • Three heat levels
  • Included tripod stand

Cons

  • Not as strong as a propane heater

If you’re thinking of mounting your heater to a wall outdoors, this infrared patio heater is a good pick: It can be mounted or used on the included stand, which adjusts up and down so you can find the right height. It provides instant infrared heating at an output of 1,500 watts—not as strong as most propane heaters, but simple plug-and-play use with remote control and a safety shutoff function. This infrared heater does have an IP55 rating, however, which means it can withstand harsh outdoor conditions.

Best propane: Mainstays Tall Mocha Patio Heater

Mainstay

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A matte bronze finish adds style, and 10 feet of heating coverage ensure your guests stay warm and cozy.

Specs

  • Power source: Propane
  • BTUs: 48,000
  • Heating coverage: 10 ft.
  • Dimensions: 30 x 30 x 85 inches 

Pros

  • Easy to move
  • Wide heat coverage
  • Cheaper than similar models

Cons

  • Buyers complain of dents or scratches on the base

There’s a bit of a gamble when you choose this low-priced pick: several buyers have complained about dents or scratches on the base. But if you’re up for the risk, it’s significantly cheaper than comparable models and has the same functionality: 48,000 BTU with a push-button igniter and adjustment knob. However, there is no base weight (so don’t leave it out in windy weather) and it doesn’t come with a cover.

Best budget: Sunday Living Electric Patio Heater

5 SUNDAY LIVING

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Take the chill off your porch with this patio heater that’s less than $100.

Specs

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • BTUs: 5,000
  • Heating coverage: 4 ft.
  • Dimensions: 21.5 x 9.6 x 20 inches

Pros

  • Waterproof
  • Easy-to-read digital panel
  • Wall-mountable

Cons

  • Not as powerful as other models

This highly rated outdoor electric patio heater has three power settings: 500W, 1,000W, and 1,500W. Its height is adjustable from 4.5 feet to 7.2 feet with telescoping rods; it can be tilted 15 degrees up or 20 degrees down, and it can heat an area of about 15 square feet. You can also wall-mount the heater. The unit is waterproof and comes with remote control and an easy-to-read digital front panel. 

What to consider when buying the best patio heaters

When it comes to options for outdoor heaters, there are several types that might be the choice for you: a propane patio heater, an electric patio heater, or a natural gas patio heater. You can also look for tall stand-up models that emit heat downward, tabletop patio heaters, models that heat outward vertically or horizontally, or models that mount on an outside wall or structure. There are lots of creative ways to situate your heater, depending on where you need it.

The most popular type is the one you’ll find outside of many restaurants, hotels, and other businesses: the tall, dome-topped metal heater that you stand under as the heat beams down on you like the sun. These are also known as “mushroom-type heaters.” You can get that same kind for your yard, and it comes in a variety of finishes and BTU capacities (the British Thermal Unit, a unit of heat—typically 40,000 or more for an effective patio heater). But that’s far from your only option.

When you consider the type of heat you want, you’ll also have to consider the power that’s available to you: propane means filling tanks frequently (and potentially keeping a backup tank around so you don’t run out in the middle of a gathering); electric means you have to have close access to an outdoor outlet (and deal with cord placement so your guests don’t trip); and gas means you’ll need professional installation to tap into your property’s gas line, and you won’t be able to move the unit easily once installed.

What about outdoor heater safety features?

As with any other product that produces high heat, there are risks involved with using outdoor heaters for patios, and the risks differ a bit with each product type. The main risk involved is starting a fire if the heat source touches something flammable. So, above all, make sure whatever outdoor heater you use, you keep it a safe distance away from your house, outdoor furniture and cushions or pillows, as well as trees, and make sure branches and leaves can’t fall into the heater. Never put towels or bathing suits on a heater to dry, and keep the heater off of rugs. Also, make sure that if you’re using an outdoor electric heater, it’s nowhere near a pool or other source of water. Most manufacturers caution against using an extension cord with an electric patio heater as well, so be aware of your distance from an outdoor outlet.

With propane heaters, inspect the tank and connections before each use: make sure the tank isn’t rusty, and that all connections are secure. Replace any tubing or accessories that look worn. Be sure the base is on level ground and not in danger of tipping over. When you’re done using a patio propane heater, make sure it’s not only turned off but also that the propane tank connection is shut down.

All outdoor heaters should come with built-in safety features to shut down the heat supply if the unit tips over, but don’t depend solely on that. Make sure whatever unit you buy feels very sturdy and appropriate for the ground or surface you’re using. Add weight to the bottom (usually sandbags) if that’s possible; don’t rely on the weight of a propane tank alone to steady your unit. Propane tanks aren’t heavy enough to keep your outdoor patio heater safe if a strong wind picks up.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best patio heaters cost?

The best patio heaters can cost between $80-$400, depending on what category of heat they produce, the kind of mount they use, and other built-in features.

Q: Can I put a patio heater under a gazebo?

In general, you can put a patio heater under a gazebo, roof, or another type of awning as long as there’s enough clearance. Manufacturers’ instructions should include this information, but as a rough rule of thumb, you’ll need at least two (sometimes three) feet of clearance above a mushroom-style heater if it’s going to be used under a roof. Propane and gas heaters are not meant to be used indoors or in enclosed outdoor spaces, however. Some electric heaters can be used indoors or out.

Q: How long does a patio heater tank last?

When you choose a propane patio heater, you’ll have to regularly trade in the propane tank for a full one (which you can do at many hardware and home improvement stores). Most full-size patio heaters use either 15-pound or 20-pound liquid propane tanks, and how quickly you’ll use them up depends on how high you set the temperature: setting it on high will use up the propane faster than setting it on low, naturally. A 20-pound propane tank holds approximately 430,000 BTUs. You can divide that number by the BTU rating on your patio heater to figure out approximately how long it will last on high. If your propane heater is 43,000 BTUs, you can divide 430,000 by 43,000 to find out that it will last approximately 10 hours before needing a refill.

Q: Are patio heaters safe on decks?

If you have a wood or composite deck, you might worry about whether patio heaters are safe for decks. In short: they are safe on decks, as long as you don’t leave them running unattended and as long as they’re not in an enclosed space. There is no active flame or embers as there are with a fire pit, and the bottom of a patio heater should never get hot. Tipping is a concern, though, so be sure that your heater’s base is weighed down and steady. In storms or heavy winds, move the heater indoors to a garage or shed if possible.

Final thoughts on the best patio heaters

Within the three main categories of heat (propane heaters, natural gas heaters, and electric/infrared heaters), you’ll find an array of sizes, designs, and prices. The end result is the same: the best patio heaters are a way to allow you and your guests to remain comfortable outdoors longer even when the weather isn’t perfect.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best patio heaters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Learn how to use trekking poles and improve your time on the trail https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-use-trekking-poles/ Fri, 01 Sep 2023 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=567342
person learning how to use trekking poles
Learning how to use trekking poles can make hiking easier on your joints. Владимир Брызгин / Pexels

Relieve your joints and hike faster for longer.

The post Learn how to use trekking poles and improve your time on the trail appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
person learning how to use trekking poles
Learning how to use trekking poles can make hiking easier on your joints. Владимир Брызгин / Pexels

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

If there’s one thing hikers love to debate, is the practicality and functionality of the humble trekking pole. Some say it’s just an inefficient luxury item weighing you down, while others regard it as a truly useful tool that can improve balance and speed on the trail. 

Whatever camp you’re in, science has proven time and time again that trekking poles have multiple benefits, and using them correctly on every hike can help you get the most out of them. 

The science behind trekking poles

Hiking with trekking poles can provide plenty of physiological advantages. A 2020 review published in Wilderness & Environmental Medicine found that these tools can reduce the pressure and load on your lower joints by dispersing your body weight to your arms. This is especially true when hiking downhill, which means those with knee pain will likely find picking up a pair of trekking sticks incredibly helpful.

[Related: 10 time-tested essentials that can help you survive your next hiking trip]

And even if you have no joint pain, a 2000 study in Medicine & Science in Sports & Exercise found trekking poles can make your trekking experience more comfortable. Erica Little, a hiking guide and owner of Big Bend Boating and Hiking Company in Terlingua, Texas, explains poles also provide substantial balance and stability when hiking through mud, snow, or across moving water or uneven terrain, making your hike feel easier than it is. That feel-good sensation will last even when you’re back home—several studies have found poles to be helpful at reducing delayed onset muscle soreness during challenging uphill treks

But these tools can provide more than better, more comfortable hikes. According to another study published in 2001 in Medicine & Science in Sports & Exercise, trekking poles could also help you hike faster and even increase the length and frequency of your stride. They could even help you burn more calories—a 2018 study by researchers at the University of Verona, in Italy, concluded that using your poles at an angle on flat terrain (a discipline known as Nordic walking) requires more energy than a regular walk because it invites your arms to aid in pushing you up or lowering you down. 

Trekking pole technique is everything

Carrying a stick in your hand doesn’t mean you’re automatically in for a breezier hike. In fact, learning how to use trekking poles can mean the difference between just swinging the metal sticks around and actually benefiting from them.

For starters, trekking poles need to be at the right height, says Little. When you’re on level ground (or close to it), adjust your poles so that your forearms and biceps form a 90-degree angle when your hands are on the grips, and the tips are resting on the ground a few inches away from your little toes. This will offer the most comfortable position for your arms and the best leverage for pushing yourself up.

When hiking uphill, shorten the poles by a few inches—the steeper the slope, the shorter the poles should be. If your hands are above your shoulders before taking the new step, you won’t have the leverage or power you need to push yourself up, explains Gates Richards, associate director of wilderness medicine at the National Outdoor Leadership School.

When hiking downhill, lengthen your poles by a few inches to help keep you balanced and upright, while allowing your arms to better aid in lowering you with each step, Richards adds.

Whether you’re hiking up or down, Little instructs to keep your arms and poles close to your body, ideally a few inches away from your sides while the tips rest a few inches away from your feet. It’s critical that the position feels natural to you, she says: if you keep your arms too close, you’ll lose some balance and leverage, and if you plant the tips too close to your feet, the poles could become a tripping hazard.

If you’re still unsure about your technique, Richards says there’s one easy way to tell if you’re using poles effectively: If you’re making progress easier, then they’re working.

Pro tips for using trekking poles

Once you’ve got your body-to-pole orientation down, a few tweaks will ensure maximum comfort and effectiveness. 

Start by using the wrist straps as intended: Slide a hand through each strap from the bottom up to get a little extra wrist support, says Little. Tighten the straps so they’re loose enough to easily slide your hand out again, but snug enough to keep your wrist from flexing too much.

Then, as you walk, alternate the swinging of the poles with your legs just like you would your arms when walking. This means planting the left trekking pole at the same time as you take a step with your right foot and vice versa.

On a steep uphill or downhill slope, if you need a little extra assistance raising or lowering yourself, you can also plant both poles ahead of you at the same time. This will provide a bit more stability and the combined power of both your arms.

Finally, stay safe by leaving extra space between you and the hikers in front and behind you. The tips of the trekking poles can sometimes get stuck between rocks and if the person in front of you stops abruptly to take care of it, you could collide with them. Likewise, it’s happened more than once that a hiker with trekking poles will reach back to adjust their pack without letting go of their sticks, creating a potential hiker kebab situation if the person behind them is too close.

Accessorize your trekking poles

When you purchase a new pair of trekking poles, they probably come accompanied by at least two sets of accessories. They’re both useful in specific situations, so don’t toss them out with the packaging.

The first one is a pair of rubber tips that fit over the metal points. They are multifunctional—pop them onto the ends of your poles to protect your luggage and its contents from getting stabbed while traveling. When hiking on rocky terrain or paved paths where you don’t need the traction offered by metal tips, these rubber protectors are excellent at silencing the irritating and repetitive tapping of metal on rock.

[Related: What to know before you go on your first multi-day hike]

The second accessory you’ll probably find is a pair of round, hole-peppered disks called baskets. They are designed for use in snow, mud, and sand—they’re like snowshoes to help keep your sticks on top of the soft stuff. “The bigger the basket the better. It’ll help your pole from sinking in too deep,” says Little.

Get the hang of it

If you’re new to trekking poles, you may find them awkward or unwieldy at first. That’s normal, Little says. Your first hike may feel a bit unnatural as you think too hard about when and where to place your poles with every step. Don’t worry, though: “It will become second nature,” she states.

As it does, you may choose to hike with one pole instead of two or ignore the wrist straps in favor of having the option to release the poles quickly in case of a tumble. Find what works for you and stick with it.

The post Learn how to use trekking poles and improve your time on the trail appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best trampolines of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-trampoline/ Tue, 24 Aug 2021 14:03:39 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=391462
A lineup of the best trampoline on a white background
Amanda Reed

Endless high-flying enjoyment is yours to be had with trampolines that can appeal to everyone in the family.

The post The best trampolines of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best trampoline on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Jumpzylla trampoline on a blue and white background Jumpzylla Trampoline 14FT
SEE IT

Sturdy construction and an enclosure net keep your family safe while jumping.

Best for toddlers The Little Tikes climb 'n slide trampoline on a blue and white background Little Tikes Climb ’N Slide Trampoline
SEE IT

Rugged, sturdy, and safe for the most fun jumping.

Best budget A Skywalker round trampoline on a blue and white background Skywalker Round Trampoline 10FT
SEE IT

Affordable and just as safe.

Trampolines are an excellent way to get good, solid exercise that’s not boring. There’s just something about all that jumping and bouncing that makes a body feel good. Kids love them, too. If you’re tired of paying to take your kids to the trampoline park, invest in a trampoline for your yard and let them (and you) get a fun workout whenever they want. However, there’s more to selecting a trampoline than just the fun quotient. You’ll need to consider size, for one. There’s also shape, materials, and whether it has springs or not. Some even involve water. How many people—and the size of those people, i.e., is it for adults or children—should also be on your list of things to think about. Who knew trampolines could be so complicated? Thankfully, with so many options, this means the best trampoline is out there just waiting for you and your family. 

How we chose the best trampolines

When deciding on the best trampolines currently for sale, we separated them largely by target use. A trampoline for adults will differ from a kids’ or even a toddler’s trampoline. There’s also the material that provides the bounce. While most trampolines will have springs, others are springless. Trampoline location is also a factor. A trampoline meant for outside, such as a backyard, will differ from an indoor trampoline. And while any trampoline will exercise your body, some fulfill the specific function of workout trampoline. 

Once we separated them into categories, we used personal experience, market consensus, and peer reviews to determine the best trampoline for each category. You can feel confident that all of the choices here represent the best of the bouncy best.

The best trampolines: Reviews & Recommendations

The best trampoline will meet your specific needs, whether for a single jumper or many, adults or children, or indoors or outdoors. Above and beyond this, though, as you’ll be using your trampoline to jump into the above and beyond, you should always keep safety in mind. Thankfully, the best trampolines are also assuredly safe, with plenty of protective measures to ensure harmless fun. Of course, outdoor-use trampolines are designed with the weather in mind and will be weather-resistant and fade-proof to boot.

Best overall: Jumpzylla Trampoline 14FT

Jumpzylla

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 168” L x 168” W x 103” H
  • Frame: Galvanized stainless steel
  • Weight capacity: 450 lbs.

Pros

  •  Affordable
  • Powder-coated frame to resist rust
  • Five colors available

Cons

  • Relatively short warranty period

Jumpzylla trampolines feature a modern design with five colors to choose from. They’re also on the affordable side when compared to some of their competitors, an attractive proposition for a family looking to add a trampoline to the yard.

The 14-foot Jumpzylla trampoline, with its maximum weight capacity of 450 lbs., will provide plenty of jump size and support for kids and adults alike. Construction is sturdy, with a galvanized stainless steel frame powder-coated for rust resistance. The jumping mat is made of high-quality materials and is waterproof and UV-resistant—exactly what you want for an outdoor trampoline. Plenty of padding on the frame and springs and an enclosure net ensure your family will be safe while jumping.

Best springless: Springfree 13FT Jumbo Square Trampoline

Springfree

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 156” L x 156” W x 110.4” H
  • Frame: Metal
  • Weight capacity: 1,100 lbs.

Pros

  • Unique construction ensures safety
  • Extremely durable
  • 10-year warranty

Cons

  • Pricey

As the name suggests, Springfree offers a springless trampoline design. Flexible composite rods that sit under the frame and mat, offering support and, of course, plenty of bounce. To up the safety, a proprietary FlexiNet enclosure resistant to tearing and enclosure rods that bend as you jump prevent impact injuries. The 13-foot square model works out to the same amount of jump area as a 16-foot circular trampoline.

All this advanced trampoline technology comes at a price, though. Springfree’s trampolines are considerably more expensive than spring varieties. You do get a 10-year warranty, though, which is superb.

Best indoor: Giantex 7 Ft Trampoline for Kids

Giantex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 87.6” L x 62” W x 17” H
  • Frame: Galvanized steel
  • Weight capacity: 220 pounds

Pros

  • Indoor and outdoor use
  • Sturdy U-shaped base
  • Great price

Cons

  • Foam on bars may come off after repeated use

Setting up a large trampoline in the backyard may just not be possible for some people. In this case, you will want a trampoline that can be used indoors. For this, we recommend Giantex’s 7 Ft Trampoline For Kids, a fantastically fun (and safe) jumper that works just as well indoors as out.

Safety is part of the design. The zippered enclosure net seamlessly meets the base, so there’s no place for children to become stuck. The poles are covered in EPE foam to reduce the chance of injury. The springs are encased in a waterproof pad, meaning there’s no chance of getting caught between springs. The jump mat is tear-resistant with plenty of bounce, and the 220 lb. weight limit means multiple children can enter the enclosure at the same time (under adult supervision, of course).

Best for adults: Zupapa Trampoline 14FT

Zupapa

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: Unavailable
  • Frame: Alloy steel
  • Weight capacity: 425 pounds

Pros

  • Great for adults and children
  • No-gap design prevents spring injuries
  • Comprehensive warranty

Cons

  • Some have trouble with assembly

Sometimes, adults will want to get in on the high-jumping action. In times like this, it’s beneficial to have a trampoline that is sturdy enough to support full-size bodies. The 14-foot Zupapa trampoline is excellent for adults and big kids alike.

As of 2021, its trampolines have a no-gap design, so arms and legs can’t get caught under the safety mat that covers the spring. Frames are strong and durable, with long net poles for extra sturdiness. There’s a comprehensive warranty should something go wrong, and Zupapa gets excellent marks for its customer service. Just be sure to have a few extra pairs of hands on hand for assembly.

Best for toddlers: Little Tikes Climb ’N Slide Trampoline

Little Tikes

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 84” L x 84” W x 90” H
  • Frame: Blow-molded plastic
  • Weight capacity: 105 pounds

Pros

  • Includes ladder and slide
  • Durable and weather-resistant
  • Easy to put together

Cons

  • Outdoor only

Little Tikes has been making toys for toddlers for five decades now. You have surely seen its famous Cozy Coupe Car before—maybe you even had one yourself. Its Climb ’N Slide Trampoline lives up to the company’s reputation.

This outdoor-only trampoline is rugged and sturdy, as you’d expect from Little Tikes. It has safety foam covering all exposed metal, plus a high-quality pad protector hiding the safety springs. Two zippered entrances provide access in and out of the trampoline area, and children will love the colorful ladder and slide. Adults, on the other hand, will love how easy it is to put together.

Best for exercise: BCAN Foldable Mini Trampoline

BCAN

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 40” L x 40” W x 42” H/48” L x 48” W x 58.5” H
  • Frame: Alloy steel
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds/440 pounds

Pros

  • Now stronger alloy steel
  • Adjustable handlebar
  • Foldable for storage

Cons

  • Springs attached to mat by fabric

All of the trampolines we’ve looked at so far are about recreation. However, BCAN’s Foldable Mini Trampoline is aimed at people wanting a rebounding trampoline for exercise. Available in two sizes, 40-inch and 48-inch (the larger has a higher weight limit), BCAN’s Foldable Mini Trampoline includes a high-quality steel frame, eight legs, and enough springs to ensure plenty of good bounce. The height of the safety handlebar is adjustable, while the mat is durable and waterproof. As the name suggests, the trampoline can be folded for easy storage, and you don’t even need to remove the pad. Make sure to stay hydrated, too.

Best budget: Skywalker Round Trampoline 10FT

Skywalker

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 120” L x 120” W x 110” H
  • Frame: Alloy steel
  • Weight capacity: 175 pounds

Pros

  • Sturdy construction
  • Incredible price
  • Safety net has dual zippers and a latch clip

Cons

  • Low weight capacity

Not everyone has a massive yard in which to set up a trampoline. For those with smaller gardens, we can’t recommend Skywalker’s 10-foot Round Trampoline enough. Best of all, it’s so affordable that you won’t have to dip into savings to give the kids a jumping good time. Despite the low cost, Skywalker’s Round Trampoline doesn’t skimp on safety features. The alloy-steel constructed frame is plenty strong, with four foam-covered angled poles that rise from the base. These add stability and hold the net, which keeps jumpers safely inside. Speaking of safety, Skywalker’s trampoline features a clever design that puts the springs outside the jump area. They’re covered with a pad for extra safety.

What to consider when buying the best trampolines

Like inflatable pools, you want to do some research before jumping into a particular option (all pun intended). Here’s what else you should look for when getting a trampoline:

Size

In the same way you would keep size in mind when buying a car or bed, you’ll want to do the same thing with a trampoline. A trampoline for a single person, such as a workout trampoline, will be much smaller than one for groups. If you have a large family (and a big yard) or plan to invite the neighborhood over for trampoline parties, a big-size trampoline—such as one 14 feet or larger—is what you want.

Weight limit

Along with size, you’ll need to keep the trampoline’s weight limit in mind. While larger trampolines will undoubtedly have higher weight limits, trampolines for adults will be more robust than ones for kids and toddlers. Before buying, check the single-jumper weight capacity and take it seriously to avoid possible future injuries. Although every trampoline will have its own weight specifications, in general, the following overall weight limits may apply:

  • Mini trampolines (for toddlers): around 100 lbs.
  • Rebounders (for exercise): 300-600 lbs.
  • Eight-foot trampolines: 175-200 lbs.
  • 10-foot trampolines: 200-250 lbs.
  • 12-foot trampolines: 200-350 lbs.
  • 14-foot trampolines: 200-450 lbs.
  • 16-foot trampolines: 250-450 lbs.

Safety

As with any other physical activity, it’s better to be safe than sorry—this applies doubly to trampolines. Make sure that you respect the weight limit set by the manufacturer. A safety net is necessary, especially when children use the trampoline. If there’s no net, such as on an exercise trampoline, make sure there’s a handlebar to hold onto. Be sure to jump in the center of the trampoline to avoid injuries on the springs. Additional padding to cover the springs is highly recommended. If you can afford it, spring-less trampolines are an even better choice for safety.

FAQs

Q: What trampoline size should I buy?

The size of the trampoline you buy will depend on the amount of space you have for the trampoline and the age of the people who will be using it. For the first point, measure how much space you can allot to the trampoline. Pay attention to whether you can accommodate a round or rectangular trampoline. As for the second, the ideal-sized trampoline is directly related to the age of the bouncer. Toddlers up to three years of age will do best with a mini trampoline. Four to seven-year-olds will match with six-foot to 12-foot models, while older kids will need nine or 12-foot to 14-foot models. If you have large families, 14 feet or more will be satisfactory.

Q: Are rectangular trampolines better than round ones?

Rectangular models aren’t necessarily better than round ones; however, they do offer a higher bounce. No matter where you jump on a rectangular trampoline, it will give you a bounce with equal height and power.

Q: Are springless trampolines safer?

Springless trampolines offer an alternative to the standard, spring-based trampoline. Rather than have a frame around the edge, with springs attached to the interior mat, spring-less trampolines use a unique construction with the frame below the mat fabric. Because there are no springs, users can jump on the mat all the way to the edge without risk of injury. However, springless trampolines are significantly more expensive than their spring counterparts. If safety is a large concern for you, they may be worth looking into.

Q: Are in-ground trampolines better?

There are pros and cons for in-ground models. Pros include that they are more attractive in your yard and are better for children because they can’t get their fingers caught as easily, can’t get stuck underneath, and don’t have as far to fall should they topple off. Cons are that they are pricier and a hassle to move once installed.  

Q: How do I prepare my yard for a trampoline?

Prepare your yard for a trampoline by ensuring you have the right amount of space. In order to do that, measure your yard and ensure there are at least three to four feet on each side of where you plan to place it. Ensure all brush and trees have been cleared, and find a spot within your yard that’s level.

Q: How do I get more bounce out of my trampoline?

Once you have a trampoline, you may want to hack it to get even more altitude from your bounces. While safety should be your first concern, if you really do want to increase your jump height, there are a number of things you can try. First, older trampolines will gradually lose their bounce as springs become worn down, rusty, stretched out, or even broken. Try replacing your springs to restore your trampoline to its former glory. If you still want more bounce to the ounce, you can try altering the spring pattern, criss-crossing them in X or V patterns. Be aware that this may cause the springs to wear down faster, though. You can also try adding more springs or changing the springs out for heavy-duty ones.

Q: How long should a trampoline last?

Trampolines generally last between three to eight years, depending on the frequency of use. As with many other things, regular maintenance can help extend the life of your bouncy friend. Replacing rusty, stretched, and broken springs will bring the bounce back to your trampoline. Don’t forget to keep an eye on the mat and frames as well.

Final thoughts on the best trampolines

Finding the right trampoline for you or your family can significantly improve your quality of life. It’s a great, full-body workout and—assuming your trampoline is big enough—something the whole family can do together. By following the mantra of safety first and choosing a trampoline that is appropriate for the age of the jumpers as well as the size of the area available, you’re sure to find one that is perfect for your situation. Happy jumping.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best trampolines of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor security cameras in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-security-cameras/ Wed, 30 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=566666
A lineup of the best outdoor security cameras
Amanda Reed

We take a close look at the best models that let you keep a close eye on your home.

The post The best outdoor security cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best outdoor security cameras
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall An Arlo Pro 5S 2K outdoor security camera on a blue and white background. Arlo Pro 5S 2K
SEE IT

Arlo’s powerful collection of camera-based and cloud-based features makes it well worth the cost.

Best with 4K resolution A Lorex 4K spotlight indoor/outdoor security camera on a blue and white background Lorex 4K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor Wi-Fi 6 Technology Security Camera
SEE IT

You can choose between package detection or vehicle, person, and animal detection with this camera.

Best budget A Wyze Cam v3 outdoor security camera on a blue and white background Wyze Cam v3
SEE IT

This hardwired security camera is one of the cheapest on the market.

Over the past 8 or 10 years, the outdoor security camera market has changed dramatically. What was once a small market has become massive, with reports showing even more growth in the coming years. That’s great news for consumers; market growth means there will continue to be competition, which has kept prices for security cameras pretty low. It also forces higher-end features in commercial outdoor security cameras, such as 4K resolution image sensors and AI-enhanced capabilities, to appear more quickly on lower-end DIY models. Although there’s been plenty of focus on doorbell cameras to catch package theft and indoor cameras to ensure the pets aren’t wreaking havoc in the home, outdoor security cameras give you robust peace of mind over your entire property. The best outdoor security cameras are easy to use, smart, and include important security features like two-factor authentication to protect consumer data. 

How we chose the best outdoor security cameras

I’ve written about many types of different cameras, including outdoor security cameras, for a number of publications over the years, including PCMag.com, Consumer Reports, The New York Times, Tom’s Guide, and Gearbrain. I brought my expertise in this area to help discover the best outdoor security cameras. I also looked at critical reviews, user recommendations, and did a lot of research to narrow down our list to find the best models. 

To find the best ones, I carefully considered a number of factors, including specific features such as video resolution, night vision capability, and audio, as well as more expansive qualities, like ease of use, versatility, and smart home compatibility. 

The best outdoor security cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

You’ll find a variety of outdoor security cameras on this list, which should also accommodate a wide range of budgets and needs, from inexpensive models that cost as little as $30 to more feature-packed models that cost closer to $300. One of our picks should give you a better eye on your driveway or backyard and can help complement and strengthen a home security system.

Best overall: Arlo Pro 5S 2K 

Arlo

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 2K video resolution
  • Field of view: 160 degrees
  • Power: Battery powered only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription)
  • Size: 3.5 x 2 x 3 inches

Pros 

  • Excellent video image quality
  • Has color night-vision capabilities
  • Includes built-in spotlight 
  • Dual-band WiFi (2.4GHz and 5 GHz)
  • Better battery life

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Lacks support for Apple HomeKit compatibility
  • Narrower field of view

Arlo included a few impressive improvements in this version of their Pro 5S 2K model, which is the successor to its popular Pro 4 model. Although they both can capture 2K-resolution video (2,560×1440), the newer model comes with a 12-bit image sensor, allowing you to shoot at a higher bit rate. That translates into better-quality video. The Pro 5S 2K also improved wireless connectivity; this version supports routers with dual-band WiFi (both 2.4GHz and 5GHz), while the Pro 4 only had the lower band—2.4GHz. 

You still get many of the great features found on the Pro 4, including its 160 degrees field of view, a 12x digital zoom, color night vision and black-and-white infrared night vision, a built-in spotlight, two-way audio, and the ability to use smart-home technologies like Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, and IFTTT. However, it lacks support for Apple HomeKit. 

Some might find this Arlo 5S 2K pricier than many others in its class. Plus, it also doesn’t offer any free cloud-based plans to access your video and photos. In order to access your videos stored in the cloud, you’ll need to sign up for one of Arlo Secure plans (starting at $4.99), which gives you the ability to access 30 days of your video recordings and provides you with additional features such as person, vehicle, and animal detection (and the ability to distinguish between them), and smart activity zones, which allow you to focus motion detection on a specific area within your camera’s field of view. The model is a bit pricey, but Arlo’s powerful collection of camera-based and cloud-based features makes it well worth the cost.

Best with 4K resolution: Lorex 4K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor Wi-Fi 6 Technology Security Camera 

Lorex

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 4K
  • Field of view: 140 degrees
  • Power: Wired only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant
  • Storage options: Local storage
  • Size: 3.0 x 3.0 x 3.4 inches

Pros 

  • Versatile
  • Excellent quality 4K video
  • Comes with dual-band WiFi
  • Includes WiFi 6 technology

Cons

  • 140 field-of-view is narrower than other models
  • Doesn’t have a battery backup

As a brand, Lorex has made very good quality outdoor security cameras for many years. This model is no exception. It stands out because it captures high-quality 4K-resolution video and has a very good 8-megapixel sensor that lets you shoot photos with more detail and data. It also comes with WiFi 6 technology, allowing faster data transmission to deliver impressive 4K resolution with fast loading time. Plus, it includes 2.4/5GHz dual-band WiFi for better connectivity. You can also use one of two smart-motion features: Person, Vehicle, and Animal Detection or Package Detection (both cannot be used simultaneously).

It’s not ideal for everyone, though. It has a 140-degree field of view, which is narrower than most in its class. It’s hardwired, so you may be more limited in where you need to place this model. It also doesn’t have a battery backup, which can be useful for units that are wired. 

Best wired with lights: Eufy Security S330 Floodlight Security Camera 2 Pro

Eufy

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 2K 
  • Field of view: 360 degrees (horizontal); 130 degrees (vertical)
  • Power: Wired only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant
  • Storage options: Cloud storage or local storage 
  • Size: 12.2 x 7.9 x 7.1 inches

Pros 

  • Very versatile
  • Camera can pan 360 degrees horizontally
  • Lights are moveable and adjustable
  • Camera comes with pan-and-tilt capabilities
  • Lets you store video in either the cloud or locally

Cons

  • Doesn’t have a battery backup
  • Cloud storage reduces video footage to 1080p

Although image sensors have made incredible improvements over the years, you still often need a powerful light source to capture very good-quality video. That’s why this model from Eufy is an excellent buy. It captures 2K resolution video and has flood lights to make the subjects more defined and detailed, but the lighting is adjustable—for instance, you can adjust the color temperature of the lights. Also, the camera itself can pan 360 degrees horizontally so that you can see more of the setting outside your home. And the lights aren’t fixed, so you can turn and position the lights in different directions. 

It doesn’t come with a battery backup, which can be helpful if your power goes out. Also, if you use cloud storage, it will reduce the video footage to 1080p. That’s still great video resolution, and most consumers will be quite pleased with the quality and versatility of this outdoor security camera. 

Best with cellular: Arlo Go 2

Arlo

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 130 degrees
  • Power: Battery powered only
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription); accepts microSD memory card for local storage
  • Size: 3.4 x 2.5 x 4.7 inches

Pros 

  • Very versatile
  • Can use either cloud or local storage
  • Includes color night vision 
  • Powerful Secure Plan features

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Need to pay extra for cellular plan

One thing almost every outdoor security camera requires is access to your home’s wireless network. But what if you have poor reception or don’t have a WiFi network at all? If you’re one of these people, consider the Arlo Go 2. It not only lets you hook up to a WiFi network, but you can also use a cellular plan. However, if you choose the latter, you’ll have to buy both a cellular plan and a SIM card. Also, it only works with Verizon, U.S. Cellular, and T-Mobile. 

It does have color night vision and two-way talk and audio, but it’s not perfect for everyone. For instance, it provides you with the option of using cloud storage via one of Arlo’s Secure plans (plans start at $4.99), which also lets you access special features or store your videos on local storage. Still, if you use local storage, you can’t access the Secure plan features, which include not only 30-day video recording but also person, vehicle, and animal detection (and the ability to distinguish between them) and smart activity zones, which allow you to focus motion detection on a specific area within your camera’s field of view. 

Best budget: Wyze Cam v3 

Wyze

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 130 degrees
  • Power: Wired
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription); accepts microSD memory card for local storage
  • Size: 2.0 x 2.0 x 2.3 inches 

Pros 

  • Very affordable
  • Compatible with major smart technologies
  • Cloud subscriptions are relatively inexpensive
  • Color night vision is very good

Cons

  • Lacks support for HomeKit compatibility
  • Lower frame rate than other models
  • May not be as sturdy as other models

This hardwired security camera is one of the cheapest on the market, performing very well and capturing very good quality video. It also provides you with the option of storing your videos in cloud storage or on local storage using a microSD memory card

But it’s not the perfect option for all users. Those looking for high-res video probably won’t be happy since it shoots just 1080p video. It also shoots at a lower frame rate than other models: For Daytime and Color Night Vision, the frame rate is 20 frames per second (fps), and with Night Vision with IR lights frame rate of 15fps. This means choppier video upon playback However, remember to consider your needs—you’re most likely not looking for producing cinema-quality video. You simply want your security camera to capture decent video. And for that type of video, this model fits the bill.

What to consider when buying the best outdoor security cameras

If you want to install an outdoor security camera, you’re certainly not alone. According to a 2021 report from the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, the number of installed surveillance cameras grew nearly 50 percent, from 47 to 70 million in the United States from 2015 to 2018.

Here are some important factors to think about before you purchase an outdoor security camera: 

Video resolution

You’ll often see 1080p, 2K, or 4K resolutions in outdoor security cameras. A higher resolution means you’ll get a crisper image. A higher resolution will also fill up your local or cloud storage faster. That’s a problem if your subscription plan or card has a fixed limit to its capacity. If you’re trying to balance subscription costs for cloud storage with what resolution you’ll need, consider how detailed of a picture you’ll need. If you need more detail, go with a higher resolution. 

Lights

Light has always been incredibly important when it comes to capturing digital video and photos. That’s why if you need your outdoor security camera to capture better-quality video or photos, you should consider buying a model with flood lights. Such models not only allow for improved image quality, but they can also act as a deterrent to intruders. 

Power options

When planning to set up your new outdoor security camera, you’ll need to think about where to install it. This is not as much of an issue for models that only use battery power. However, hardwired connections require a direct connection to your home or an outdoor outlet with a weatherproof cord. This limits where you can place it. You make up for the lack of creative control with video and audio quality, which is better in a hardwired connection. 

FAQs

Q: How far can an outdoor security camera be from WiFi?

This will mostly depend on the strength and quality of the wireless network you plan to use and its position in your home. You should note that physical objects, like walls, will weaken WiFi signals. Try to place your outdoor security camera as close as you can to your wireless router.  

Q: Is it better to have wired or wireless security cameras?

It depends on your setup and where you’d like to position your outdoor security cameras. For instance, if you don’t have easy access to an electrical outlet, you may want to use a battery-powered model. However, you’ll need to remember to replace or recharge the battery. Wired security cameras give you better audio and video quality, but you need access to an outside outlet or direct connection to your home’s electricity.  

Q: Which is better: 1080p or 4K CCTV?

One of the benefits of having a 4K outdoor security camera is that, depending on the model you buy, you’ll have more resolution and possibly more detail. However, the quality of the video depends mostly on the lens and sensor quality. Another thing to consider when buying a 4K outdoor security camera is that it will fill up your storage capacity more quickly. 1080p is a great option if you’re trying to balance video resolution with storage capacity. 

Q: What are the disadvantages of security cameras?

Some outdoor security cameras don’t have the highest resolution or quality, at least compared to cameras found on cellphones or stand-alone cameras. They also don’t have as many features and aren’t as versatile. 

Final thoughts on the best outdoor security cameras

Many outdoor cameras on the market today offer 4K resolution, perfect for ultra-detailed shots. Cloud storage makes it possible to keep that footage safe, secure, and easily accessible—you’ll have to pay a subscription for it, however. Otherwise, look for an option that allows for external storage, like a microSD card. Regardless of the model you choose, an outdoor security camera is a great way to watch your entire home, whether you’re away, at work, or in your house.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor security cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save up to $500 on Jackery power stations at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/jackery-power-station-generator-amazon-deal/ Wed, 30 Aug 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=566943
Jackery 2000 Plus front panel close-up
Stan Horaczek

Power your appliances in an outage with this portable Jackery solar generator, on sale at Amazon.

The post Save up to $500 on Jackery power stations at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery 2000 Plus front panel close-up
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Solar generators are an excellent, energy-efficient way to power your home during a power outage or your RV while camping. And one of the best from Jackery—who we’re fans of, for good reason—is a whopping $500 off at Amazon.

Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 2000 Plus $1,869 (Was $2,399)

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

The Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus can power current-hungry devices at up to 6000w, so even if you want to power a welder, you can. The battery will only last you about a half-hour doing this (we tried it), but it does work, and that’s more than many other models can say. We tested the Explorer 2000 Plus after a storm disrupted power—It kept our router running for several hours to maintain connectivity. You can power it even longer by daisy-chaining extra external batteries or connecting optional solar panels. The switch to lithium iron phosphate batteries (LiFePo4) means this unit will last a long time before the battery degrades beyond its usable range. The company claims it will take 4,000 cycles before the battery life degrades to 70 percent—that’s a long time.

If you’re looking for something more compact to power smaller appliances, the Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 500 can power a mini cooler for nine hours and a laptop for 30 hours.

Don’t wait until you’re already out of power to take advantage of this deal—start preparing for an outage by snagging a generator.

Here are a few other powerful portable generator deals:

The post Save up to $500 on Jackery power stations at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best portable fans of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-portable-fan/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 21:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=380827
Best Portable Fans
Stan Horaczek

You can stay cool without sacrificing outdoor fun with the best portable fans.

The post The best portable fans of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Portable Fans
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Best Portable Fans Milwaukee M18 Jobsite Fan
SEE IT

The Milwaukee M18 makes it easy to stay cool.

Best handheld The Handfan Misting fan is our pick for best portable misting fan. HandFan Misting Fan
SEE IT

This lightweight model lets you bring a cool breeze wherever you go.

Best budget The Comlife Portable Neck Fan is our pick for the best wearable fan. Comlife Portable Neck Fan
SEE IT

Portable neck fans are so hot right now.

The cooling breeze of a portable fan is a cheap and easy way to combat scorching temperatures. With the press of a button, you get an instant breeze—and sometimes a cooling mist—to keep the heat at bay. Best of all, they don’t rely on outlet power and are (mostly) small enough to transport in a purse, pocket, or backpack. Some are even made to attach to desks and strollers. The next time you leave the comfort of your AC, the best portable fans will ensure you stay cool.

How we chose the best portable fans

The temperature and humidity can get unbearable where I live, which makes doing anything outdoors uncomfortable. That’s why I’ve made it my mission to find the best portable fans to stay cool wherever I am.

Outside of my pursuit to keep cool, I write about gadgets and gear and have been doing so for over 10 years. My byline has appeared on sites like XDA Developers, Gear Patrol, and CNN Underscored. To find the best portable fans, I researched and tested everything I could get my hands on. I also looked at editorial reviews and customer feedback to give me an idea of what people value most in a portable fan.

PopSci has been writing about the best fans for years, so I also drew on previous knowledge and recommendations from colleagues.

The best portable fans: Reviews & Recommendations

To find the best portable fan, consider when and where you’ll be using it. Are you looking for something small to toss in your beach bag? Do you need something that stands on its own to cool you down at your desk? Or are you looking for a stroller fan that can cool your little one? Answering these questions will help you find the fan that fits your needs. We picked these fans for some of the most common scenarios where you need a light cooling breeze on the go.

Best overall: Milwaukee M18 Jobsite Fan

Milwaukee

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Milwaukee’s M18 Jobsite Fan provides several hours of operation and a 120-degree adjustable head.

Specs

  • Height: 10.29 inches
  • Weight: 5.2 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • 120-degree adjustable head
  • Long-lasting battery
  • 18mph max air velocity

Cons

  • Expensive

Milwaukee is well known for making some of the best tools available, so it’s no surprise it also makes a great portable fan. Made of durable plastic and capable of circulating air over 40 feet, the cordless fan features a rechargeable battery that provides up to 17 hours of runtime on the lowest setting. If you’re on a job site or a camping trip, a single charge can keep you cool all day long.

In addition to a long-lasting battery, Milwaukee’s M18 features a 120-degree adjustable head with nine stopping positions, so you can angle it almost any way you like. It also offers three-speed settings, with the highest options capable of 18mph max velocity. And if the M18’s battery does run out, the fan comes with an AC adapter to keep the breeze flowing.

Want to up the refreshment even more? If you’re looking for an industrial misting fan that’s easily transportable, try out the RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan Kit, which sits on top of a bucket (sold separately) filled with water—and ice, if you like—and provides hours of revitalizing fog. Combine either choice with a portable solar generator, and you’ve got reliable refreshment for days.

Best for neck: Jisulife Bladeless Neck Cooler

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This well-designed portable neck fan is lightweight and has three speeds to keep you cool on the go. 

Specs

  • Height: 7.8 inches
  • Weight: 9.1 ounces
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Lasts for up to 16 hours
  • Has three speeds
  • Available in five  colors

Cons

  • Wayward strands of hair may get caught

When it’s ridiculously hot outside, but you need to walk to the grocery store or want to go for a hike, a neck fan can provide welcome relief. The highly rated Jisulife Bladeless Neck Cooler is super easy to get started right from the box. Just connect the included USB-C cord and charge the included lithium-ion battery for up to 16 hours of use. 

This bladeless fan is lightweight and felt good around my neck. It’s designed with three speeds, and the steady air came both out and upward, providing a steady breeze to the underside of my face without blowing my hair all over the place. This portable fan is also reasonably quiet, though louder at Level 3, the highest speed.

It’s also worth noting that I originally had my hair up when I was testing the fan, and when I let it down, it did get a little caught in the fan. And while this Jisulife model is great for a walk or hike on a hot day, it’s not particularly suited for running if you bounce up and down a lot as you stride. But this fan is an affordable option to save energy and stay cool wherever you go. Plus, it comes in five colors (dark green, dark blue, gray, green, and yellow), making it almost as appealing a personalized accessory as a cool set of headphones. — Jen McCaffery

Best for large spaces: Big Ass Sidekick Portable Fan

Big Ass

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The 48-inch-wide Sidekick is powerful enough to cool large spaces, inside and out. 

Specs

  • Height: 58 inches 
  • Weight: 180 pounds
  • Battery-powered: No

Pros

  • Sleek design
  • Arrives assembled
  • Works indoors and outside

Cons

  • Expensive

Whether working on a construction site or in a barn, cooling a big space can be challenging, so you need a powerful fan. The Big Ass Sidekick Portable Fan is up for the job. This barrel fan is 48 inches wide, providing plenty of airflow from its six airfoils. The Sidekick comes fully assembled, and its swivel casters make it portable and lockable. With its IPX5 waterproof rating, you can roll this fan indoors or outside. And if you’re unhappy, there’s a warranty of up to three years. — Jen McCaffery

Best for stroller: Amacool Stroller Fan

AMACOOL

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Amacool Stroller Fan is easy to use and features flexible tripod legs that can attach to almost anything, particularly strollers.

Specs

  • Height: 12 inches
  • Weight: 0.43 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Flexible tripod legs
  • Also includes adjustable LED light
  • 360-degree adjustable head

Cons

  • Small battery means poor battery life

This stroller fan comes in three cute colors with a protective fan cover and flexible tripod legs that are easy for you to attach but hard for your baby to remove. It can easily adhere to the sides, tray, or hood of your stroller, as well as your little one’s car seat, playpen, or baby gym. The fan head is adjustable vertically and horizontally with 360 degrees of rotation. It even has three fan speeds so that you can customize the breeze your baby needs. The fan lasts between 2.5 and 10 hours, depending on wind speed, and can be easily recharged via USB. While this fan is safe for babies and toddlers, always make sure to have an adult on the lookout whenever it’s switched on.

Best handheld: HandFan Misting Fan

HandFan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The HandFan Misting Fan gives you a breeze and a cool spritz of water for extra relief in your personal paradise.

Specs

  • Height: 8.9 inches
  • Weight: 0.41 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Misting capabilities
  • Three speed options
  • Foldable design

Cons

  • One button design can be confusing

This rechargeable handheld misting fan from HandFan is one of the best ways to stay refreshed during a hot summer day. It can easily fit in a purse or backpack pocket, with a handle that can be adjusted from 0-180 degrees for handheld or standalone use. Choose from three different fan speeds to cool you down, no matter the weather. You can even trigger night mode, which includes a delightful array of colored lights. 

Best of all, the HandFan comes with a built-in mister and 17-millimeter water reservoir, which can produce a steady stream of gentle mist for 10 minutes at a time. All of these functions can be controlled with just one button for ultimate ease. This mini-fan weighs just 6.6 ounces and measures 4.1 by 8.9 inches, the perfect size to keep handy in your car, back pocket, or travel bag. Need something more industrial-strength to cool down a group? Check out our guide to the best outdoor misting fans.

Best for camping: Comlife 10000mAh Rechargeable Camping Fan

Comlife

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With a battery that can last up to 28 hours and a lantern with three brightness levels, the Comlife Rechargeable Camping Fan is the perfect companion for the Great Outdoors.

Specs

  • Height: 8 inches
  • Weight: 1 pound
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Featured 36 LED lights
  • Adjusts 360 degrees
  • Durable design
  • Battery can last up to 28 hours

Cons

  • No place to store remote

This Comlife camping fan is an excellent choice for anyone who likes to spend time outdoors. It features three fan speeds and a battery that can last up to 28 hours on slower speeds and a full seven hours at maximum speed. The lantern also has three brightness levels and three timer settings. You can even plug in your mobile phone or computer and use the fan’s USB-C port to charge your device. The unit itself can be charged via USB cable, power bank, car charger, laptop, and more. It comes with a flexible tripod that lets you easily attach it to a tent, bunkbed, golf cart, or even a growing system. At just 1 pound, this powerful fan will be easy to transport for on-the-go use.

Best for desk: Honeywell Turbo on the Go  

Honeywell

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Honeywell Turbo is lightweight, provides a powerful breeze, and includes a convenient handle for carrying.

Specs

  • Height: 5 inches (12 inches with handle flipped open)
  • Weight: 0.49 pounds
  • Battery-powered: AA x 4

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Handle doubles as a stand
  • Battery-powered and USB-powered

Cons

  • Needs four AA batteries

While the Turbo On the Go fan won’t replace traditional AC, it’s a fantastic way to stay cool during a hectic workday and a great small personal fan for a desk. It measures roughly 5 x 12 inches and weighs under 1 ounce, so you don’t need to worry about it taking up too much space or dragging you down if you’re on the move. This fan produces a breeze you can feel from up to three feet away with several set-up options, including standalone, hanging, or carrying. It can be powered with four AA batteries for outdoor use or via a USB-A cable, which can plug directly into your work computer.

Best budget: Comlife Portable Neck Fan  

COMLIFE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Comlife’s Portable Neck Fan can be worn like a necklace and also used on a desk.

Specs

  • Height: N/A
  • Weight: 0.43 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Also USB-powered
  • Can be worn like a necklace
  • Two fans offer double the breeze

Cons

  • Can get in the way while worn

You shouldn’t have to pause all your favorite pastimes to dab sweat away or take a break in the shade. A wearable fan, like this one from Comlife, is a magnificent way to keep moving even when the heat rises. This double-headed small portable fan hangs comfortably on the neck and is 360-degree adjustable so you can stay cool without anything getting in your way. It features six fan speeds, battery life between two and nine hours depending on use, and an included USB cable for simple charging. This mini portable fan weighs just 0.4 pounds, so you won’t be under any strain while wearing it, even during exercise. From cooking to hiking, cycling to traveling, you’ll have no trouble keeping comfortable, even during a vigorous workout.

What to consider when buying the best portable fans

We look for the same things in a portable fan as in any other cooling device. Aside from strong airflow, a portable fan shouldn’t produce much noise. On the other hand, it should be durable enough to throw in a bag and easy to clean. Here’s everything to look out for in your search.

Size and weight

Portability is an essential part of a good personal handheld fan. When researching our picks, we paid special attention to things like size and weight. Portable fans come in all shapes and sizes, and different options work better for different situations. Before making your pick, you should take a moment to figure out how and where you plan to use your fan, whether you’re traveling, sitting at your desk, or working on an engine in your garage.

Remember that the bigger the fan, the stronger the airflow. A handheld pocket fan will only generate enough wind to cool down one person. There are also larger portable fans big enough to cool down a small space, like a tent. 

Power

Portable fans use a couple of different battery types. Usually, they’ll either use built-in rechargeable batteries or require disposable cells, like AAs. Some models with built-in rechargeable batteries can also plug directly into the wall, so you can recharge the battery and use the fan simultaneously. Often, the whole point of a portable fan is to get away from outlets, but it’s still a nice perk.

A traditional battery is the most straightforward option. Just install a few AA batteries and feel the temperature drop. While single-use batteries are convenient, we generally avoid them whenever possible to minimize generating e-waste. (Of course, you always pop in some rechargeable batteries to sidestep the issue.)

A built-in rechargeable battery means you don’t need to buy batteries from the store. However, there’s always the risk of forgetting to recharge a rechargeable battery each night, which could render a portable fan useless.

Noise

No fan is competently silent, but nobody wants to use one that sounds like a buzzing insect. No matter what size portable fan you choose, you don’t want the whirring to be a distraction, especially if you’re using it as a travel fan. We focused on finding options with minimal noise, even on their highest setting. A quiet fan is particularly important if you plan to have it pointed at you from close range.

Cleaning

Keeping your fan clean is not only the sanitary thing to do, but it ensures everything works effectively and efficiently. A good fan should be relatively easy to disassemble (and reassemble) so that you can access the fan blades and remove dust and hair collected on moving parts.

Extras

For outdoor summer days, you can’t go wrong with a mini fan that can give you a cooling spritz. If you don’t want to miss out on enjoying beach trips, summer barbecues, or picnics, reach for a small, handheld fan you can easily slip into your bag or pocket—major bonus points for a model that has a small reservoir for water. With the push of a button, you’ll feel a steady spray that refreshes and cools.

There are also portable options you can wear around your neck. These portable fans sit comfortably around your neck so you can keep your hands on the steering wheel, tongs, walking stick, oar, etc. These battery-powered fans are a great way to get a breeze without taking a break from your favorite activities.

Finally, some options include flexible tripods that can attach to strollers and car seats, ensuring your little one stays cool on a warm day. Kids love to grasp and grab at just about everything, so make sure your stroller fan is sturdily attached yet adjustable, so you can angle airflow without worrying your baby will get a hold of the mini fan.

FAQs

Q: How much does a portable fan cost?

Depending on its features and functions, a portable fan starts at $20 and goes into the hundreds. The most expensive portable fan on our list is around $120.

Q: Is there a fan that blows cold air?

Some fans blow colder air, but keep in mind that they can be a bit pricier than the portable models listed above. Unlike energy-efficient air conditioners that use freon, or regular fans that circulate the ambient air, cold-air fans need to use more advanced technology to create highly concentrated, controlled pressure and super-high speeds that actively cycle and slightly chill the air. Top-notch models like the Dyson Pure Hot Cool can do more to chill the air around you. If you want actively cooled air and live in the right climate, you might be interested in trying an evaporative cooler that cycles recently evaporated, chilled water from a reservoir to cool a room.

Q: What is the quietest portable fan for the bedroom?

There are several options out there for super-quiet fans you’re sure to sleep through, and many others include a sleep or night mode to quell sound or lights further. Honeywell, Vornado, and Lasko make small portable fans that are practically noiseless. It will be a bit more challenging to find a compact, pocket-portable fan that can provide the same options when it comes to quiet modes, but that shouldn’t be as much of an issue when you’re using them on the road.   

Q: How long do portable fan batteries last?

Battery life depends on a few factors, like fan size and what setting is used. If you use lower power, most portable fans will last for several hours. Crank it up to the highest setting, and the battery may only last a couple of hours.

Q: What type of portable fan is best for the beach?

Any fan designed for outdoor use would work well at the beach, as long as you’re not taking it into the water or burying it in sand. No portable fan will completely resist the elements, so it pays to be cautious when using electronics outside.

Final thoughts on the best portable fans

While the summer heat can undoubtedly feel oppressive at times, there’s no reason why you can’t grab one of the best portable fans out there to make things more bearable, especially if you know which factors to prioritize. If you want to stay especially active, go for a mini wearable or personal handheld model. If you need some extra chill indoors, a compact desk fan or lightweight tower fan will do the trick. And for special situations, look for a fan that proudly boasts its strengths, like stroller or camping fans. Beating the heat won’t be so hard with a great portable fan in hand.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable fans of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best travel backpacks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-travel-backpacks/ Mon, 01 Aug 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458987
The best travel backpacks composited
Stan Horaczek

These are our top picks for hands-free carrying, whether you're a frequent flyer or a daily commuter.

The post The best travel backpacks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best travel backpacks composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Osprey Nebula is big enough to hold all your stuff, and gives you plenty of straps to keep the weight off your back.
Osprey Nebula
SEE IT

The Osprey Nebula is big enough to hold all your stuff and gives you plenty of straps to keep the weight off your back.

Best for laptops The Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Bag Deluxe is built to handle the heavy burden of the largest laptops. Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Backpack Deluxe
SEE IT

The Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Bag Deluxe is built to handle the heavy burden of the largest laptops.

Best for cameras You can reconfigure Peak Designs’ Everyday Backpack to fit whatever camera bodies and lens you need to carry. Peak Design Everyday Backpack 30L
SEE IT

You can reconfigure the Peak Design Everyday Backpack to fit whatever camera bodies and lens you need to carry.

Frequent flyers and daily commuters both know the value of a good travel backpack. When making subway connections or running through airport terminals, having your hands free and essential everyday gear—your laptop, a book, a water bottle, a change of clothes—makes traveling easier. Great travel bags come in all shapes and sizes, just like your trips. From big camping backpacks with room for clothing and shoes to smaller bags that snuggly swaddle your electronics, and keep them dry in an unexpected downpour, the best travel backpacks can store and protect whatever you need to bring with you on your next trip.

How we chose the best travel backpacks

As a freelance writer and editor covering adventure travel and outdoor gear, I’ve worn and worn out more than my fair share of travel backpacks. I usually travel at least once a month by air and carry my laptop everywhere to work from hotel bars and local coffee shops. I’ve spent years testing backpacks, especially bags for carrying my laptop or maximizing my carry-on-only space on nearly every airline you can imagine. 

In addition to my personal experience and testing (and general knowledge of durable materials and fabrics), I checked out consumer reviews to get a general sense of brand reputations and explored the popularity of specific products. Plus, I compared company warranties and other logistical information.

The best travel backpacks: Reviews & Recommendations

The best travel backpacks make air travel less stressful and daily commuting a bit easier. Travel backpacks are not hard to find—nearly every travel or outdoor brand makes at least half a dozen—but finding the right one for you can feel harder than it should be. Fortunately, we’ve spent weeks testing bags on the road and days scouring online reviews to help narrow down the list. 

Osprey

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Osprey Nebula is relatively affordable for a big bag and comes loaded with features we like, including a fold-out laptop sleeve, compression straps, and hip and sternum straps.

Specs

  • Weight: 2.4 lbs
  • Internal capacity:  34L
  • Size: 12.2 x 11.8 x 18.9 inches (WDH) 

Pros

  • Fold-out laptop panel 
  • Expandable outer pocket 
  • Side pockets large enough for bottles or tripods 
  • Compression straps to maximize space

Cons

  • Could be too large for daily commutes 

Simply put, the Osprey Nebula is a darn good bag. At 34 liters, its main compartment is extremely roomy, as are its external front pocket and the large side pockets. Admittedly, it’s a bit bulky, but you can slim it down with its external compression straps.

Beyond its capacity, which makes it the perfect size for long trips, the Osprey Nebula has every backpack feature you could dream of. There’s a Velcro-secured fold-out laptop sleeve so you can access your computer without opening the rest of the bag; double water bottle pockets; a removable chest strap and mesh strap padding to help distribute weight when full; a lined pocket for sunglasses; and a handful of vertical pockets for smaller items. It even has features you’d never think you needed, like pockets to hide the compression straps when not in use and a second slim pocket in the laptop area for a tablet or travel documents. 

Some daily commuters may find it to be a bit too large to lug around every day. For travel, though? It should serve most adventurers quite well, whether you’re heading out for a week or a weekend.

Best for air travel: Deuter Aviant Duffel Pro 40

Deuter

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The very packable Deuter Aviant Duffel Pro 40 holds almost as much clothing as a roller bag, allowing you to nearly double your carry-on space without paying extra fees.

Specs 

  • Weight: 2 lbs, 10 oz
  • Internal capacity: 40 liters 
  • Size: 20.5 x 13.8 x 8.7 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Works as a duffel or a backpack
  • Compression straps maximize space 
  • Variety of inner and outer pockets 
  • Waterproof, tear-resistant, and Bluesign approved 

Cons 

  • No hip strap 
  • No padded laptop pocket 

If you’re getting on a flight with nothing but a backpack, you need to make sure you can comfortably cram as much stuff as possible into it. The Deuter Aviant Duffel Pro is built specifically for that, with a duffel-style design and backpack straps making it easy to carry through airports and pass off as your personal item (just don’t pack it to the brim if you want it to look like it’ll fit under your seat). 

Of Deuter’s many Aviant bags, the Pro 40 stands apart thanks to a few extra-useful features for flyers. Its top panel fully unzips for easy packing and internal compression straps to maximize how much it can fit.  There’s a separate shoe compartment, which is very helpful if you want to avoid tracking dirt all over your fresh clothes. It also folds into its own storage pouch, making it a great backup bag if you plan to fly home with extra baggage.

Best for laptops: Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Bag Deluxe

Timbuk2

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: A slim travel backpack with a ton of storage space, the Timbuk2 Authority Deluxe features a chest strap to distribute weight and a very protective, easy-access pocket for even the largest of laptops. 

Specs 

  • Weight: 2.4 lbs
  • Internal capacity: 28 liters
  • Size: 11.4 x 5.31 x 18.9 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Fits up to 17-inch laptops
  • Pairs well with a carry-on suitcase
  • Air channel to avoid back sweat during commutes

Cons 

  • Side pockets don’t hold larger water bottles 
  • Not as deep as other bags 

I’ve been using a Timbuk2 laptop bag as my go-to carry-on personal item for a long time, returning to it even as I switch from travel bag to travel bag. The Authority Deluxe has a secure pouch that keeps up to 17-inch laptops snug and secure and has just the right amount of organizational pockets for chargers, cords, and travel accessories

The Authority Deluxe is a particularly good choice for travel, as opposed to daily carrying, because it features lots of alternative ways to quickly access your most important stuff. There’s a side access panel to pull out your laptop even if the bag is packed full or jammed under a seat. There’s also a strap allowing you to holster your bag on the handles of a carry-on suitcase for easy maneuvering through airports. There are also a few slim pockets on the outside of the bag—useful for stashing your phone, passport, or other items you’ll want to access on the go.

Best for cameras: Peak Designs Everyday Backpack 30L

Peak Design

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Peak Design’s Everyday backpack for photographers features adjustable panels to hold various lenses and bodies, plus useful features for photographers like silent clasps, side access panels, and an external tripod carry. 

Specs 

  • Weight: 4.65 lbs (with dividers)
  • Internal capacity: 22 to 30 liter (adjustable)
  • Size: 13 x 5.9 x 19.1 inches (WDH) 

Pros 

  • Durable, waterproof, weatherproof fabric 
  • Comes with camera organization dividers
  • Expandable pockets and tuck-away straps 
  • Quiet one-handed buckles 

Cons 

  • Expensive
  • Small side pockets 

The Peak Design Everyday Backpack’s subtle design hides a host of great features for photographers. Its weatherproof fabrics and rearrangeable dividers let you create perfect-fitting compartments for varying sets of camera bodies and lenses, along with a laptop and other gear. It also has other thoughtful features shutterbugs will appreciate, including a silent lock/unlock mechanism (so you don’t scare away wildlife with a loud Velcro woosh when you switch lenses), locking zippers to ensure no one steals your expensive camera gear, and a laptop sleeve.

REI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Though it packs up quite small, the Matador Beast 28 is well-suited to active days, with a waterproof coating, a hip belt to distribute weight, and a light build that’s easy to carry while sightseeing. 

Specs  

  • Weight: 1.8 lbs 
  • Internal capacity: 28 liters
  • Size: 11 x 7 x 22 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Packs into its own stuff sack
  • Flexible frame, mesh padding, and hip belt for weight distribution
  • Weather-proof 

Cons 

  • Thin material
  • Minimal pockets 

There are plenty of packable travel backpacks on the market, but most of them are flimsy, with unpadded straps that can dig into your shoulders if the bag is heavy. The Matador Beast 28 is the exception, which looks and feels like a specialty outdoor/hiking backpack. It has a flexible frame and hip belt to more comfortably distribute weight, plus a super-durable and tear-resistant outer fabric. It’s hydration compatible, so you can use a hydration reservoir/bladder when you’re hiking but remove the bladder if you just want to use it as a sightseeing bag or daypack. It also stuffs down to the grapefruit size, so it can fit in your luggage if you’d rather pack it for a flight.

Best for business: Briggs and Riley Baseline Traveler

Briggs & Riley

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A modern, minimalist travel backpack with a separate large clothing compartment, the Briggs and Riley Traveler functionality features a dedicated tech pocket, plus monogramming and fabrics that add a touch of sophistication.

Specs 

  • Weight: 3.3 lbs
  • Internal capacity: 28 liters
  • Size: 12 x 8.8 x 18 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Modern, upscale look
  • Clamshell-style opening makes smart use of space
  • Lifetime guarantee
  • Pass-through ports for charging cables 

Cons 

  • Expensive
  • Black only

There’s no shortage of commuter bags for professionals, but the Briggs and Riley Traveler is an especially good backpack for people who frequently hit the road for work. Made from water-resistant nylon, its clamshell-style design can probably hold enough to be your only bag on a quick overnight trip, storing clothing on one side and your laptop, notebooks, or papers on the other. It also features a few useful design flourishes, including a back panel to secure the bag to a carry-on and a “power pocket” with a pass-through cord slot to charge your electronics on the go. Last, but not least, it comes with free monogramming when you buy it directly from Briggs and Riley, adding a traditional touch ideal for the boardroom. 

Most sustainable: Cotopaxi Allpa 28L

Cotopaxi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Cotopaxi Allpa 28L is functional, durable, and sustainable in every way you can imagine.

Specs 

  • Weight:  2 lbs, 10 oz 
  • Internal capacity: 28 liters 
  • Size: 11 x 9 x 19 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Supports eco- and community-conscious development 
  • Opens flat for easy access to storage 
  • Compression zippers 
  • Laptop pocket 

Cons 

  • No side pockets 

Few brands take more care to make their travel bags as sustainably as Cotopaxi. The company bakes sustainability and socially conscious business practices into everything they do, from using scrap materials in 94 percent of products to donating “at least one percent” of its revenue to nonprofits working to end extreme poverty around the globe. If you’re looking for the best travel backpack to have a positive impact on communities, individuals, and the environment—and perform flawlessly while traveling, of course—it’s the Cotopaxi Allpa 28L.

The Allpa 28L travel pack features a clamshell-style opening with a full-size compartment on one side and a split pocket on the other. Both sides feature compression zippers to keep the pack’s profile as slim as possible. There’s a slide-in laptop pocket, a hip belt and sternum strap for comfortable carrying, and even a rain cover, just in case.

Opt for the Del Dia version, and you can choose your one-of-a-kind color combo; Cotopaxi makes their bags out of scrap materials and gives the staff in their factories free range to choose whatever color combos strike their fancy on any given day. 

Best budget: High Sierra Loop Backpack

High Sierra

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The High Sierra Loop isn’t going to win any beauty pageants, but it’s big, durable, and comfortable, even when full.

Specs 

  • Weight: 2 lbs 
  • Internal capacity: 33 liters
  • Size: 13.5 x 8.5 x 19 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Great price
  • Compression straps for securing gear 
  • Large capacity

Cons 

  • No padded laptop pocket
  • Bulbous design 

The High Sierra Loop backpack isn’t an impressive-looking backpack, but it’s an effective, budget-friendly travel bag. It’s large and loaded with useful features like exterior compression straps, a tablet pocket, padded straps, and easy-access external pockets for water bottles or a phone. 

What it lacks, really, is a prestigious name, along with the style and perks that tend to come with a bag from a major brand. It doesn’t come with a warranty, or any waterproof protection, so don’t use it as your primary travel bag on outdoorsy trips. Even with a few caveats, it can comfortably hold a ton of gear and keep it organized. For less than $40, that’s a pretty good bargain.

What to consider when picking the best travel backpacks

Finding a  travel backpack isn’t necessarily a make-or-break decision. It doesn’t need to be a perfect fit like a properly sized pair of hiking boots. A backpack designed for daily commuting works just fine on airplanes, and a large backpack can serve as your daily commuting bag if you prefer more space. There’s no right or wrong choice. If you’re buying a backpack for a specific type of trip, though, it helps to think about what you need, so you can get the bag you want. Here are a few things to think about while shopping around. 

Where are you going?

First and foremost, consider how often you travel. Do you bring a backpack on your daily commute? Bringing your laptop to coffee shops? Going on road trips? Flying for work or going sightseeing? There are bags designed for each of these experiences: If you know what you want, you can find one that fits perfectly into your life. You might also want to look at featured designs for various locations. For example, backpacks with built-in locks can be helpful if you’re leaving your backpack unattended briefly at coffee shops, and a pass-through sleeve can be useful if you’ll frequently be towing your backpack with a roller bag through airports.

Size and capacity

If you use your bag for daily travel, choose something on the smaller side that’s easy to pack and unpack since you’ll be doing it every day. Backpacks around 16 liters (L) should suffice. If you’re looking for a carry-on bag to hold clothing and maximize much you can pack, look for a bag with a large compartment and compression straps to pack everything as tightly as possible. These are usually in the 30-40 liter range, and won’t be allowed as a carry-on. If you want something big enough to be an overnight bag, but need it to fit under the seat in front of you, look for something between 20-30L.

Compartments

Depending on what you’re doing, the interior structure of the bag may be as important as its size and capacity. Some bags have a single open compartment. Others have special pockets for sensitive items. Still others have modular compartments that you can adjust to hold specific gear.

The most common compartment is a laptop pocket, which can be helpful. But don’t fret if your favorite travel backpack doesn’t have one, as you can use a padded laptop sleeve to protect it instead. Some larger “clamshell-style” travel backpacks open flat and usually feature a large compartment for clothing, making them helpful as an alternative to packing a suitcase.

Other types of pockets and compartments you’ll find include tech organizing pockets, external pockets for bottles, protected and lined pockets for sunglasses, and very small pockets for pens and small items like flash drives. A bag with too many pockets can be hard to navigate, but too few make it easy to lose and/or break small items. If you don’t have a preference, aim for one with a few small- and medium-sized pockets. If you find you need more structure, you can always use a packing cube or case to create more compartments.

Materials matter

There are, very literally, hundreds of materials that can be used to make travel backpacks. Rather than looking for a specific one, keep an eye out for the important qualities they offer. For example, “rip-stop”—a bag material “feature” that prevents rips and tears from growing over time—comes from how a bag material is woven, not the fabric, so you may find it on many kinds of bags. Likewise, bags that are water-resistant or “abrasion-resistant” get that trait from a collection of materials.

On the other hand, it pays to pay attention to how a bag was made. More and more manufacturers make travel backpacks from sustainable materials. Some—such as Cotopaxi, Deuter, and Timbuk2—also use “factory scraps,” which are leftover materials that would otherwise be thrown in the trash. 

When looking for a sustainable bag, look for companies that follow international, cross-brand standards like Bluesign, which certifies products for sourcing sustainable materials and for using factories with ethical labor practices. That said, there are plenty of companies that implement their own sustainable manufacturing practices. If you care about sustainability, you’ll find plenty of good options if you do a little digging. 

Water resistance

You should also look at what materials go into your bag. Specifically, consider whether or not you’d like your bag to offer some protection against water. As with materials, there are many ways to achieve various degrees of water protection. The measurements and testing are actually quite extensive and complicated but, usually, water resistance means it can withstand some level of water (like rain) without letting moisture through. Most travel backpacks will meet these criteria, although how much water they can withstand varies from product to product. Most water-resistant backpacks will use a coating called DWR—Durable Water Resistance—which usually means you’ll be fine in light rain and snow. Almost any fabric can have a DWR finish, though it wears off over time. 

Waterproof fabrics mean they can withstand extreme amounts of water; everything short of full submersion, usually. These fabrics will be much more plastic-y and solid feeling, rather than feeling like a woven fabric. If the travel backpack you like isn’t as water-resistant as you’d like, you can always add a rain cover if you’re expecting bad weather. 

If you take public transportation or live in a city, you’ll probably want a travel backpack with some level of water and weather protection. If you’re using it more like luggage, that probably won’t matter as much, and you may be able to save some money on your bag by buying one with slightly more budget materials.

FAQs

Q: How much do travel backpacks cost?

Travel backpacks can range from less than $50 to $300 or more. They vary in price based on their size, the materials they’re made from, how they’re made, and more. You can buy a very cheap backpack, akin to something for a young school student, for under $30. As you add more expensive fabrics, like leather and waterproof materials, prices go up. Likewise, many travel-centric features—like locks, padded sleeves, and durable zippers—are reserved for technical bags that cost $100 or more.

Q: What sized backpack is best for traveling?

The ideal size for your travel backpack will depend on where and how you plan to travel. If you plan to use it as a suitcase to carry clothing and shoes on planes, you’ll want the largest possible bag that meets your airline’s carry-on bag guidelines. That’s usually somewhere around 14 x 9 x 22 inches (WDH) for bags in the overhead bins and 13 x 9 x 17 inches (WDH) for a personal item (though most airlines never enforce the latter).

If you’re using your bag for daily commuting, you’ll want something more slim and narrow, especially if you take public transportation. For most people, a 13- or 16-liter bag is large enough to carry a laptop plus daily use items like a water bottle, jacket, keys, chargers, and more.

Q: How do I pack a backpack for air travel?

If you’re using a smaller bag, like a commuting laptop bag, most items will sit upright and be easy to access, so you don’t need to worry much about organization. When using a large travel backpack, I like to use packing cubes for clothing and items I won’t need mid-flight, and then I pack them at the bottom of the bag. Pack the things you’ll need during the flight last so they’re on top and easily accessible. If you have a side access panel on your bag, place your easy access gear on the side, and make sure the panel is facing up when you stow the bag under your seat.

Q: Where can I recycle a travel backpack?

Unfortunately, most local recycling centers won’t be able to process a backpack, especially one with multiple materials. There are ways to recycle or dispose of your bag responsibly, though. First, check with the brand to see if they have a warranty or repair program. If they do, you may not need to recycle their products at all. But if you’ve decided you no longer want to keep something, consider selling it on a clothing and accessory resale site (like Poshmark) or selling it back to a store; REI gives co-op members a store credit when they trade in their old gear. Finally, consider donating the backpack to a local charity, especially if it’s an appropriate size for a student.

Final thoughts on the best travel backpacks

Hit the road with any backpack, and sure, it technically becomes a travel backpack. But the best travel backpacks are quite a bit different from the school bags of yesteryear. Having the right travel backpack can protect your laptop or keep your clothing from getting soaked if you get caught in the rain. Though it may seem like a simple item, having the right backpack helps make traveling less stressful, whether you’re commuting or crossing continents.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best travel backpacks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best wool socks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-wool-socks/ Fri, 30 Sep 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=473964
A lineup of the best wool socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

Ditch your sad, hole-embedded socks and grab a pair that’s warm and moisture-wicking.

The post The best wool socks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best wool socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Smartwool Everyday Spruce Street Crew Sock are the best overall wool socks. Smartwool Everyday Spruce Street Crew Sock
SEE IT

Keep your feet dry and warm on everyday adventures.

Best for hiking Darn Tough Merino Wool Boot Sock is the best for hiking. Darn Tough Merino Wool Boot Sock
SEE IT

Like the name suggests, these socks can go from mountain to river and back.

Best for cycling A pair of black cycling socks on a blue and white background GripGrab Regular Cut Merino Cycling Socks
SEE IT

Thin enough to ensure an effient pedal stroke sans sweat.

Wool socks aren’t just for skiing or extreme cold weather situations. Combined with other materials, they can be incredibly durable, moisture-wicking, and fast-drying—all of which are incredibly important if you’re an athlete or hiker and wear shoes all day. However, wool socks can also provide everyday comfort to those who have incredibly sweaty feet. Although you might picture wool socks as thick and bulky, most are far from it. In fact, wool socks and “regular” socks are practically indistinguishable from each other. The best wool socks combine style, longevity, and comfort—because nothing as small as a sock should cause a big hassle. 

How we chose the best wool socks

I was #blessed with my dad’s sweaty feet, and I am a perpetually damp person. All of this is exacerbated by too much caffeine, very stressful boss battles, and the wrong kind of polyester. In fact, my hands are a little sweaty right now as I type this. The hyperhidrosis diagnosis remains unknown, but I do know one thing: what fabrics to wear to remain easy, breezy, and beautiful. Wool is just one of the many textiles I trust. 

With my perspiration propensity in mind, I gathered peer recommendations, looked at critical reviews and consumer impressions, performed personal testing, and conducted heavy research to find the best wool socks. No sheep were harmed in the making of this review.

The best wool socks: Reviews & Recommendations

Just like the Merino sheep they come from, no two pairs of wool socks are alike. The best wool socks are soft, durable, reliable, and machine washable. Here’s what made the cut:

Best overall: Smartwool Everyday Spruce Street Crew Sock

Smartwool

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An everyday sock that packs incredible performance power thanks to its primarily wool blend.

Specs

  • Material: 52% Merino wool; 42% nylon; 2% recycled nylon, 4% elastaine 
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 8 inches
  • Cushion: Zero cushion

Pros

  • Secure fit
  • Durable
  • Comfort welt

Cons

  • No cushion

If you’re looking to up your sock game, look no further than the Everyday Spruce Street Crew Socks from Smartwool, who claims they were the first outdoor company to make performance merino wool ski socks. Although not meant for skiing, these Smartwool socks hold up on the day-to-day and make your feet feel like a champion. Reliable and fashionable, these socks are durable thanks to Shred Shield technology that prevents your toes from ripping a hole in your sock, a la that one scene in Alien. A comfort welt helps them stay put, and the merino wool, which is ZQ-certified (an animal welfare and environmental standards audit), has all the benefits sans carbon footprint. 

Smartwool best wool socks Amanda pick
Amanda Reed

Although the top pick is a crew height with no cushion, the company has plenty of other shoppable socks, both showy and sensible, like the targeted cushion ankle socks for running combo shown above. And our assistant managing editor loves his Bike Zero Cushion Ankle Socks, Run Targeted Cushion Low Ankle Socks, and Hike Full Cushion Lolo Trail Crew Socks, using Smartwool’s numerous options to customize his cushioning and coverage for a variety of activities.

Best for hiking: Darn Tough Merino Wool Boot Sock

Darn Tough

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fine-gauge knitting gives this sock incredible durability—just like the name suggests.

Specs

  • Material: 66% merino wool; 32% nylon; 2% lycra; spandex
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 6 inches
  • Cushion: Full

Pros

  • Feels like you’re not wearing a sock.
  • Company dedicated to sustainability
  • Full cushion for shock absorption 

Cons

  • Socks can get fuzzy after washing

These socks have a lot to live up to coming from a company name like “Darn Tough.” Thankfully, these socks are truly darn tough. This sock is made using fine-gauge knitting and includes an undetectable seam for an invisible feel that’s obviously built to last. A performance fit means no slipping, bunching, or blisters while keeping your feet cool in the summer and warm in the winter. This full-cushion, boot-height sock has a lifetime warranty—there aren’t that many brands that can say the same. Additionally, the company uses Responsible Wool Standard (RWS)-certified merino wool in all of its products and incorporates recycled nylon—it’s currently looking for a recycled spandex alternative. This means you can rest easy that your socks came from happy sheep and were made with a limited impact on the environment.

Best for cycling: GripGrab Regular Cut Merino Cycling Socks 

GripGrab

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Made specifically for cycling, these tall socks have the right amount of cushion to make hours spent in cycling shoes more comfortable.

Specs

  • Material: 52% merino wool, 25% polyamide, 20% polyester, 3% elastane
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 8 inches
  • Cushion: Light

Pros

  • Odor-resistant
  • Versatile
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Might be too light for colder rides
  • Expensive

A great pair of cycling socks isn’t just a fashion statement. The socks keep you comfortable as you ride. A three-pack will cost you $54.99, but we think it’s worth it as a specialty sock. The light cushioning isn’t bulky and is in all the right places. The toe seam is practically invisible, and the cuff at the top doesn’t dig into your calves—a major problem with cyclists with thick calves from all the leg work. The balance of merino and synthetic fibers makes this sock durable with just enough of the wool benefits. It also looks classy—no one would know it’s a cycling sock unless you told them. However, reviews note that it’s better suited for warmer rides.

Best for work: Dickies Men’s Dri-Tech Work Crew Socks

Dickies

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These heavy-duty wool socks come in a bundle to keep your feet dry every day of the week.

Specs

  • Material: 48% polyester, 25% wool, 20% acrylic, 5% nylon, 2% spandex
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 6 inches
  • Cushion: Full

Pros

  • Thick but lightweight
  • Reinforced heel and toe
  • Arch compression

Cons

  • Not as soft compared to other socks
  • Might not fit smaller feet

Some jobs require steel-toed shoes, which can be tough on your feet. These wool-blend socks from Dickies regulate your foot temperature. Added Dri-Tech fights sweat for dry feet. Cushioning in the leg and foot allows for all-day comfort in constricting shoes and steel-toed boots. Compression at the arch provides support, while a special heel lock keeps the socks in place. Ventilation channels provide extra air circulation and moisture control. Also, they come in a bundle, which means you can save on getting more than one pair for work.

Best for winter: HOT FEET Mens Active Work and Outdoors Hiking Socks

HOT FEET

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These thick socks are extra cozy thanks to a thermal wool blend that won’t make your feet sweat.

Specs

  • Material: 62% polyester, 20% wool, 15% nylon, 3% spandex
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 6 inches
  • Cushion: Full

Pros

  • Reinforced heel and toe
  • Moisture wicking
  • Versatile

Cons

  • Have a tendency to fall down

If you don’t want to get a pair of heated socks or to size your shoes for heated insoles, consider these a great option. You can throw them on for lounging around the house or ski lounge, or take them outside under your favorite boots. A stretchy ribbed cuff keeps the socks in place without digging into your leg, and reinforced heels protect your feet. Also, moisture-wicking means they’ll stay dry in your ski boots. The socks are thicker, so you won’t have to worry about blisters or cold feet.

Best budget: Alvada Merino Wool Hiking Socks 

Alvada

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to break the bank for a soft, warm pair of wool socks that are great for lounging or adventuring.

Specs

  • Material: 80% Merino wool, 15% polyester, 4% nylon, 1% spandex
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 6 inches
  • Cushion: Full

Pros

  • Primarily wool construction
  • Bundle pack
  • Fuzzy on the inside

Cons

  • Heels and balls of feet wear out fast
  • Run large

If you’re looking for knit socks that aren’t expensive, look no further than this bundle-pack from Alvada. A reinforced heel and toe area allow for more durability and keep your feet blister-free. Arch compression provides support and stability, and full cushion padding gives you extra protection. Say goodbye to stinky feet thanks to ventilation channels that allow for more airflow and breathability. Plus, the socks have a great balance of wool and synthetic fibers to keep your feet dry. They wear out more than higher-priced socks and run large, but you can’t beat the price.

What to consider when buying the best wool socks

Unlike the scratchy, itchy ragg wool that makes up your mom’s sweaters from the ’80s, most wool socks are made of merino wool. This soft, thin fiber comes from Merino sheep and is known for its natural properties: It regulates body temperature, wicks moisture, and prevents odors sans bulk. It’s usually combined with other materials like polyester, nylon, cotton, and spandex for the right balance of the good stuff. Here’s what else you should know when searching for the best wool socks:

Use

A wool sock made for everyday wear is going to perform differently than a crew sock built for cycling. The same goes for those meant for hiking, running, and hunting. When you’re going to wear the sock also matters. A thinner ankle sock is going to be more comfortable than a thick crew sock in the hot, hazy throes of summer. Think about what activity your socked feet will have to endure and shop accordingly. 

Cushion

Cushioning helps prevent blisters and acts as a buffer against the shoe. Wearing a sock with low cushioning with a tough hiking boot leads to major discomfort—and you’ll have to give up halfway up the mountain. Look for a pair of wool socks with more cushioning in the toe, heel, and ankle area if you’re going to wear boots. Likewise, you can get away with less cushioning if you’re wearing extra comfy sneakers with your socks. 

Height

A tall wool sock prevents your tall hiking boots from rubbing against your calf. It also protects your legs from any nasty, gnarly brush or bugs you encounter. If you’re looking to air out your legs because you’re simply walking down the street and not fending off random detritus, choose an ankle-height or no-show sock. 

FAQs

Q: How much do wool socks cost?

Wool socks can go for $30 for a pair or $20 for a pack of three pairs. If the socks are being worn for a specialized activity, you can get away with buying a single one for a higher price. If you’re looking for socks to wear to work, a bundle can be more bang for your buck.

Q: What percent wool should socks be?

It depends on what you’re wearing them for and the kind of wool, but generally, around 40% is the standard. Other textiles, like polyester, cotton, spandex, nylon, and elastane, are added into the mix to add flexibility and durability to the sock. Almost every selection on our list has a fabric blend that includes 30-40% wool.

Q: Can you wear wool socks every day?

Yes! Merino wool is incredibly light and versatile. “Wool” tends to be synonymous with “thick” and “heavy,” and there are wool sock options that can be worn every day. Smartwool has lots of wool socks for everyday and others can also double as an everyday sock.

Q: Which wool is warmest for socks?

Qiviut wool (made of musk ox down), yak wool, and bison wool are incredibly warm. However, these textiles are expensive and difficult. Alpaca wool and merino wool are easier to source and cheaper, which is why a majority of our selections feature merino wool.

Final thoughts on the best wool socks

Wool socks can ease feet during your next big adventure but are functional enough to be worn every day. Although “wool” tends to conjure images of a shoulder-pad clad, gaudy, itchy, eau de mothball sweater that has haunted many a closet and clothing rack, the best wool socks are far from that. Our top picks, from brands like Smartwool, are soft, dependable, and practically indistinguishable from cotton socks. However, they’re more breathable and naturally antimicrobial, keeping your feet dry and your spirits high. Say goodbye to stinky, sweaty feet and hello to sheep-sponsored pleasurable podiatry.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best wool socks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best sleeping bags of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/best-sleeping-bags/ Fri, 27 Sep 2019 17:34:42 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-sleeping-bags/
Outdoor Gear photo

There are two simple keys to spending several days in the Great Outdoors: Stay warm, stay dry.

The post The best sleeping bags of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Outdoor Gear photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best head-to-toe Therm-a-Rest Space Cowboy Therm-a-Rest Space Cowboy 45-Degree Synthetic Mummy Sleeping Bag
SEE IT

This lightweight and water-repellent sleeping bacg will keep you warm and dry during those unexpected summer showers.

Best for big and tall people Coleman Big Basin Coleman Big Basin 15 Big and Tall Adult Sleeping Bag
SEE IT

This fleece-lined option suits people up to 6 feet, 6 inches tall and will keep you warm down to 15 degrees F.

Best for multiple people Sleepingo Double Sleeping Bag Sleepingo Double Sleeping Bag for Camping
SEE IT

Cozy up against the cold in this waterproof queen sleeping bag that can also be broken out into two twin sleeping bags.

When you’re out adventuring, camping, or backpacking, a good night’s rest can be the fine line between enjoying nature’s splendors and counting the hours until you’re back inside. A sleeping bag proven to keep its inhabitants warm and dry is key to a good time. It’s important to note that not all sleeping bags are built to accommodate every trip outside. Make your choice according to the climate and season. Here are some of the best sleeping bags.

The best sleeping bags: Reviews & Recommendations

Best head-to-toe: Therm-a-Rest Space Cowboy 45-Degree Synthetic Mummy Sleeping Bag

Therm-a-Rest

SEE IT

For those camping during the summer, this super lightweight mummy sleeping bag is the key to staying cool and comfortable at night. The exterior boasts a water-repellant coating and the fill dries quickly, so if you’re caught in an unexpected summer shower, you aren’t doomed to hours of sogginess. It comes in three different sizes, so choose according to your height. For those who may want extra warmth, there are loops that allow you to pair the bag with a quilt or blanket.

Best extra-warm: Marmot Trestles 15F Degree Sleeping Bag

Marmot

SEE IT

If you’re planning on camping in colder climates, this Marmot Trestles 15F Degree sleeping bag is a worthy investment. It’s lightweight enough for backpackers but doesn’t compromise on warmth or comfort. It’s stuffed with a down fill that retains its shape well in damp conditions and features a two-way zipper and a handy mesh pocket.

Best for big and tall people: Coleman Big Basin 15 Big and Tall Adult Sleeping Bag

Coleman

SEE IT

If you’re on the taller side, you have many advantages in life: easy access to top-shelf items, a great view at any concert venue, and, if you’re a man, a higher salary. But finding a sleeping bag that fits your limbs? Much harder. This large bag from Coleman will do just fine for those up to 6′6″, and can keep you warm in degrees as low as 15° F. The feet are fleece-lined for warmth, and the adjustable hood allows for extra warmth or ventilation. It’s not the lightest sleeping bag, but it is very comfortable.

Best for multiple people: Sleepingo Double Sleeping Bag for Camping

Sleepingo

SEE IT

If you enjoy sleeping next to another person, this sleeping bag allows enough space for two. It’ll keep you both warm in colder climates (down to 32° F) and comes with two travel pillows. The outer shell is waterproof, and if your relationship breaks down, this queen-size sleeping bag also can break down into a couple of twin-sized sacks.

The post The best sleeping bags of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snowboarding jackets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snowboarding-jackets/ Fri, 05 Mar 2021 19:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-snowboarding-jackets/
snowboarder on top of a snowy mountain holding a snowboard and wearing the best snowboarding jacket
Yann Allegre via Unsplash

Stay warm, dry, and show off your best moves with these stylish jackets.

The post The best snowboarding jackets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
snowboarder on top of a snowy mountain holding a snowboard and wearing the best snowboarding jacket
Yann Allegre via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall for women Patagonia Snowbelle 3-in-1 Jacket Patagonia Snowbelle 3-in-1 Jacket
SEE IT

This eco-friendly shell made from 70 percent recycled materials.

Best for pros Arc’teryx Rush Jacket - Men’s Arc’teryx Rush Jacket – Men’s
SEE IT

Designed for maximum protection from the elements while still offering breathability.

Best for kids Burton Boys Symbol Jacket Burton Boys Symbol Jacket
SEE IT

This coat that expands as you need it, so it will last kids more than one season.

If you’ve bundled up in cold and snowy conditions to hit the ski slopes, you might think that you don’t need a separate snowboarding jacket if you want to switch things up to do a few halfpipe tricks. It’s true that a ski jacket with sufficient insulation and waterproofing does provide protection against the elements—and that might be just fine for some people. However, the best snowboarding jackets offer coveted features tailored to the unique nature of the sport.

Ultimately, choosing the best snowboard jacket to match the rest of your snowboarding gear depends on your preferences, skill level, and the conditions in which you’ll be taking to the air. Snowboarding jackets can be made up of high-tech material suitable for intermediates and pros, or a variety of materials that emphasize comfort and versatility. Special features like zippered air vents, designated pockets, and taped seams can make your experience even better. Here’s what to look for to find one of the best snowboarding jackets, whether you’re hand planting or face planting.

The best snowboarding jackets: Reviews & Recommendations

The key differences between these ski jackets and showboarding jackets come down to fit and style. In many types of skiing, how fast you can make it down the mountain is a top goal. Aerodynamic designs need to fit snuggly to minimize resistance on your (hopefully controlled) descent. In contrast, the intricate movements required to stay on your snowboard as you execute flips, grab the heel or toe edges of the board, and rotate in mid-air, favor a looser fit. Even when you don’t bail in the middle of a move or unexpectedly land on your backside, you’ll also spend a lot of time seated in the snow to strap on your board, so a longer jacket is crucial to keeping your rear end from feeling the deep freeze. And with obvious parallels to the subcultures of skateboarding, snowboarding clothes are an opportunity to experiment with creative expression rather than fit into a traditional resort look.

Best overall for men: Patagonia Snowshot 3-in-1 Jacket

REI

SEE IT

The 2-layer outer shell is waterproof, water-repellent, and breathable, with a detachable hood, cuffs you can adjust to wear over or under your gloves to protect against gaps, and zippered air vents under the armpits for quick cooling. Wear the quilted and insulated inner layer by itself depending on the weather, or bundle up with the whole combo. The embedded RECCO® reflector is a nice feature in the event of an avalanche as part of a comprehensive safety plan. Plus, you can keep your feet warm and protected with some of the best snowboarding boots.

Best overall for women: Patagonia Snowbelle 3-in-1 Jacket

REI

SEE IT

The Patagonia Snowbelle is very similar to the men’s Snowshot, and is an excellent women’s snowboarding jacket that can be worn while snowboarding or skiing. The inner insulated jacket is reversible to either a smooth or quilted surface, with 60 grams of synthetic insulation that performs even in wet conditions. Design highlights include a back long enough to reach your hips and a powder skirt that can be attached to any of Patangonia’s snow pants to offer a comprehensive barrier against the weather.

Best for beginners: REI Co-op First Chair GTX Jacket

REI

SEE IT

At this price point, this is the best snowboarding jacket to acquire a high-quality shell when you’re still getting to know the sport. Stay comfortable with classic features including two-layers of Gore-Tex, a longer back hem, water-repellent zippers, and lots of room for adding insulated layers. What really makes this snowboarding jacket stand out are extra touches like the ability to detach the power skirt, a soft liner in the hand pockets, and cozy tricot fabric in the high collar to pamper your chin when you’ve tucked it in against the wind. Then protect yourself with one of the best snowboarding helmets.

Best for all-day wear: Arc’teryx Ravenna LT Jacket – Women’s

REI

SEE IT

This Arc’teryx jacket features brushed flannel on the inside for softness and warmth, plus waterproof and windproof protection courtesy of 3-layer Gore-Tex.

Enjoy the added security of RFID blocking materials to help ensure your passport and credit cards can’t be accessed by a scammer while you’re out and about. The powder skirt is removable once you’re off the slopes.

Best for pros: Arc’teryx Rush Jacket – Men’s

REI

SEE IT

The Arc’teryx Rush features a special material created in collaboration with Gore-Tex to deliver three layers of protection against water and wind. Pit-zips and pocket zips alike are fortified with their trademark WaterTight design, and the helmet-compatible hood protects while keeping maximum visibility. The sleek, color-block appearance leaves plenty of room for your awesome jumps, flips, and aerial rotation to take center stage. At just over 1.5 pounds, it’s easy to store in anticipation of your next adventure.

Best for kids: Burton Boys Symbol Jacket

Burton

SEE IT

This snowboarding jacket checks all the boxes of comfort and utility: a waist gaiter that’s compatible with Burton’s snow pants, DryRide insulation (their version of Gore-Tex) to keep kids from shivering when they work up a sweat, a hood that’s adjustable to fit a helmet, and taping of major seams for durability and protection from the elements. Their signature Room-To-Grow system makes this coat last more than one season, since you can let out the sleeves 1.5 inches when they start to get taller than you.

Best budget: Suokeni Women’s Snow Coat

Suokeni

SEE IT

The Suokeni Women’s Snow Coat is versatile enough to grab out of your closet for a brisk winter walk with friends or a trip to the slopes. Key features include adjustable cuffs for your gloves or mittens, a detachable storm hood, and a snow skirt. While it’s primarily made of synthetic material, this jacket includes a cotton filling to help retain heat. A DWR polymer coating repels water and the outer layer also protects against the wind. Consider layering for added warmth in colder temperatures.

Things to consider when shopping for the best snowboarding jackets

When you take a little time to familiarize yourself with the types of snowboarding coats on the market, you’ll be able to choose the perfect gear for your needs and budget. The best snowboarding jacket for you may change along with your relationship to the sport, but you can avoid over (or under) equipping if you understand the purpose of each feature offered as you shop.

Are you searching for versatility in a jacket?

If you’re looking to get the most for your money in a jacket you can wear at home, around town, or on the trail, gear with multiple functions is a good choice. The best snowboarding jacket for multiple functions is called a 3-in-1 jacket, which means it can be worn three different ways depending on the situation.

Look for 3-in-1 jackets with a waterproof and insulated outer layer, and an inner shell that can be easily un-zippered from the outer layer. If you’re lucky enough to hit the resort when it’s warm outside, the shell might be just what you need to stay dry and minimally exposed to the wind. Wear the insulated outer layer as an everyday coat, and both together when conditions are truly wintery.

Synthetic materials are generally the most practical option for snowboarding jackets. Down jackets may be known for their ability to retain heat, but they lose their power to insulate you when wet. You can buy down jackets meant for use in snowy conditions with additional water-resistant layers, but synthetic materials for the best snowboarding jackets have been researched, planned, and tested expressly under the powder-tasting conditions snowboarders face.

Are you new to the sport?

If you’re just starting out, purchasing a quality jacket at a lower price point allows you to learn what features are a must-have for your snowboarding style. How hot will you actually be on the trail or course when you hit your groove? What kinds of pockets will prove essential for your phone, gloves, and snacks, and whatever else you’d like to carry once you’ve left the lodge?

To get the full benefits of gear designed specifically for snowboarding as opposed to skiing, a mid-range shell jacket is a solid option. A well-designed shell with good water and windproofing gives you room to layer and doesn’t restrict your movement as you practice grabs and basic jumps.

The one feature beginners should definitely look for in a snowboarding jacket is an elongated back with a powder skirt (also called a waist gaiter), which creates a tighter fit of your jacket around your body so you don’t have the freezing sensation of snow traveling up your back when you’ve taken a spill or from loose powder in the wind. (And you will take a spill. Or three.)

Are you ready to level up?

Snow enthusiasts who are contemplating investing a significant amount of time in snowboarding should consider purchasing a shell-style snow jacket. Sometimes called technical shells, these jackets are meant to be worn with extra layers underneath in colder temperatures, and feature high-tech materials like Gore-Tex, eVent, and Omni-Tech. These materials help ensure your jacket is waterproof, breathable, and protective against the wind.

You’ll also want to think about what your days look like snowboarding. Are you a weekender who books a couple of nights at a resort and likes to ski, snowboard, and drive into town for fine dining or drinks? In that case, you might prefer a slightly bulkier shell with warmer insulation that you can keep on all day.

Remember, along with top technical fabrics for waterproofing, the best snowboarding jackets have taped seams to ensure that there is no room for leaks and that everything you’re storing in your pockets stays dry.

Are you a super-serious shredder?

There’s no question that making an investment in the best snowboarding jackets is a good idea when you’re at the pro-level —even if you never plan to compete. A comprehensive grasp of the terminology of the sport means you’ll recognize what each feature of a pro-level jacket is addressing, like spindrift, which the Avalanche Center defines as “fine grained snow being carried by wind or falling.”

Keep in mind that snowboarding jackets at the pro-level are designed for a specific purpose, rather than trying to cover all the bases of a day spent outdoors. A lighter and more portable technical shell may be excellent for water and wind protection but work best with additional specialized layers of insulation. You might also see additional layers of Gore-Tex or other highly technical insulation in pro-level jackets, and other types of fabric designed to stand up in the toughest conditions.

Expect pro-level gear to be made from the latest materials being developed for optimal mobility and protection, and subjected to rigorous testing and standards pro athletes can trust. Every detail should be thought-out carefully and questioned in the larger context of performance. You can definitely find stylish pro-level gear, but that style will be in service to the end game: ensuring you can give every run all you’ve got.

Are the kids coming with you?

With all clothing purchases for kids, there are numerous factors that come into play, many of which you can’t control. Kids lose interest in activities quickly, and grow out of clothes just as fast. Get the most from your money by seeking a coat with features that can adapt as they grow (such as Burton’s Room-To-Grow sleeves), and that they’ll want to wear to school, on snowy weekend adventures, and in the backyard building a snowman.

Unless your child is training or competing as a snowboarder, you don’t necessarily need a jacket designated only for snowboarding. After all, next week they might decide they’re going to be a downhill Olympic skier. If the jacket you choose has a waist gaiter to keep powder at bay and a hood that fits a helmet, that will go a long way towards making your time together on the mountain enjoyable.

Are you on a budget?

FAQs

Q: How do I choose a snowboard jacket?

Once you gain a thorough understanding of the common features and jacket types described in this article, you’ll want to choose a snowboard jacket that has the features you need for your skill level, fits in with your other winter gear (i.e. if you already have a 3-in-1 jacket, a technical shell will probably be next on your list), and is compatible with your budget. After you’ve narrowed down the jackets that meet these specs, feel free to have fun with style and color.

Q: Are snowboard jackets warm?

The warmth of a snowboard jacket will vary depending on the type of jacket you purchase. Lightweight technical shells will have less insulation than a 3-in-1 jacket. For many snowboarders, layering is key to enjoying boarding in all conditions. Choose a jacket based on your entire snow wardrobe, rather than based on warmth alone.

Q: What is a good waterproof rating for snowboarding?

Waterproof ratings can tell you something about your gear, but it’s a better idea to take into account the quality of the whole garment and the conditions under which it will be used. The difference between a 10,000mm waterproof rating and a 28,000mm rating may not matter at all, depending on these other factors. If you choose a top brand jacket made with technical fabrics and quality craftsmanship, you’ll likely find the number you need— but if you search based on number alone, you could end up with a jacket with leaking seams or poor durability.

A final word on shopping for the best snowboarding jackets

The most important characteristic of snowboarding gear is performance that matches what you’re capable of at the resort or in the backcountry. The best snowboarding jackets keep you warm and dry, give you plenty of room to move, and offer features like powder skirts tailored specifically for the sport. Casual snowboarders might have one great jacket for both skiing and snowboarding, and serious shredders might have several jackets depending on the weather and terrain. Once you have the right gear, you can focus on the unparalleled thrill of fresh air and exercise that in its best moments, make you feel like you’re on top of the world.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snowboarding jackets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Oru Beach LT Sport foldable kayak review: Whatever, wherever floats your boat? https://www.popsci.com/gear/oru-beach-lt-sport-kayak-review/ Thu, 24 Aug 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=564465
The Oru Beach LT Sport kayak on the shore of a lake
Abby Ferguson

Despite the lightweight and portable design, the Oru Beach LT Sport is a foldable kayak that's very stable on the water.

The post Oru Beach LT Sport foldable kayak review: Whatever, wherever floats your boat? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Oru Beach LT Sport kayak on the shore of a lake
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Kayaks have not changed significantly in general shape and materials for quite some time, and the traditional design presents some logistical issues for most of us. Most companies craft their personal-sized boats out of rigid materials like hard plastic. That makes them heavy to transport and hard to store when you’re not on the water. If you live in a smaller apartment or home, having a kayak may be flat-out impossible simply because you don’t have a place to keep it. And transporting one on your own could require Herculean strength on top of having access to a vehicle large enough to hold it. 

Enter Oru Kayak. Inspired by origami—the Japanese paper-folding technique—Oru developed a range of unique foldable kayaks, offering a much more apartment-friendly solution. The result is a lightweight, compact, and highly portable boat that isn’t at risk of deflating like pack rafts and other inflatable options. Oru sent us its Beach LT Sport Kayak to test out for a few months, and we had a blast getting to know this truly distinct boat. 

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Overview

  • The Oru Beach LT Kayak is a lightweight, open cockpit-style kayak that’s easy to store and transport.
  • Despite being foldable, it’s stable on the water.
  • It offers a rail system for mounting accessories like fishing poles or camera gear. 

Pros

  • Only weighs 28 pounds
  • Folds up to a large suitcase size for easy storage and transport
  • Extremely stable in the water
  • Easy to get in and out of
  • Rails allow for easy accessory attachment
  • Moves smoothly and quickly in the water
  • Gel cushion seat adds comfort
  • Adjustable backrest and footrest
  • Easy to maneuver around

Cons

  • Gets pushed around in windy conditions
  • Some components showed wear after just a few uses
  • Black plastic gets hot in the sun
  • Expensive

Verdict

The Oru Beach LT Sport hits a sweet spot for those who want to get out and adventure on the water but don’t have the space or transportation for a traditional kayak. It isn’t a cheap option, but it is in line with heavier fishing kayaks.

The Oru Beach LT Sport folded down and carried by a woman on a shoreline.
When folded down, the Beach LT Sport is very easy to carry by just one person. Abby Ferguson

The Oru Beach LT Sport Kayak’s design

The Oru Beach LT Sport Kayak falls roughly in the middle of Oru’s six different offerings in terms of size, price, and features. In fact, it combines features from its enthusiast-oriented Beach LT and the larger, more advanced Haven TT. Oru makes all of its kayaks out of 5mm double-layered, custom-extruded polypropylene—called OruPlast—which looks like a plastic version of corrugated cardboard. Oru coats the material with a 10-year UV treatment and claims its kayaks are puncture- and abrasion-resistant. 

The Beat LT Sport is a 12-foot-long, open-cockpit kayak, which means it leaves your legs exposed as you float but offers more room for gear. It weighs just 28 pounds but can hold up to 300 pounds. Oru says this kayak can be paddled in deep water but not in heavy wind or chop. Your best bet is to stick to calm days. It features rails on both sides for attaching fishing rod holders, cup holders, camera equipment, and more, making it the ideal Oru for fishing and other such adventures. 

A woman folds up the Oru kayak
It takes a few times to get the process down, but then setup and breakdown is easy and fast. Abby Ferguson

The Beach LT Sport’s setup

One of the main perks of Oru kayaks is that they fold down into compact packages—33 inches by 13 inches by 29 inches, in this case. But that means that they do require assembly. For help with this, it comes with a handy book with graphics and step-by-step instructions. You can also scan a QR code to pull up a video of the assembly process, which was very helpful. 

Oru specifies on its website that assembling the Beach LT Sport takes 10-15 minutes. I found that to be accurate after I put it together a few times. The first time took about 20 minutes as my husband and I figured out the process and which pieces go where. It’s worth noting that the edge of the plastic is pretty sharp, and I managed to slice myself when putting the boat together the first time. It didn’t happen again, but definitely be careful as you assemble the kayak. After I got the hang of it, assembly was really quick and simple, and I could easily knock it out myself in 10 minutes or so. 

Putting the boat back into suitcase mode was more of a challenge than assembling it and took quite a bit longer, especially the first few times. There were instructions in the book with graphics for each step, but some weren’t very clear. It also took a lot of hunting to find a video of the disassembly process. Adding to the difficulty is the fact that the plastic was extra rigid the first few times, which made it tough to bend things back the opposite way. But, after working out some of the kinks—literally and figuratively—disassembly took roughly the same amount of time as assembly. 

A person sitting in the Oru Beach LT Sport kayak on a river
The Beach LT Sport is surprisingly stable on the water, thanks partly to how long it is. And the rails for accessories like cup holders are very handy. Abby Ferguson

The Beach LT Sport’s performance

A foldable kayak may be neat and useful, but it isn’t much good if it doesn’t perform well on the water. Luckily, the Beach LT Sport was fantastic in most situations. I was really surprised at how stable it was, especially considering how lightweight it is. I could move around in the kayak—reaching behind the seat to get the sunscreen and sun hat, casting a fishing rod, reaching over to grab my husband’s boat—without the slightest worry about tipping over. I even purposefully wiggled around a lot with no issues. Oru even specifies that these are great for dogs. I didn’t bring my pooch along while testing since she doesn’t do very well in boats, but it would definitely be stable enough for all but the most rambunctious dogs. 

Since the kayak is so lightweight, it is extremely easy to maneuver in the water. It picks up speed with ease, and I could turn on a dime. The boat cuts smoothly through the water, making for a really pleasant experience. And, as you would hope, the boat was completely watertight, so the only water I had coming in was dripping from the paddle. 

The lightweight design does have its downsides, however. Both the current and wind pushed me around pretty easily, which made it tricky to stay in one spot while fishing. When I went out in a nearby river or in windy conditions, I had to repeatedly put the fishing rod down and paddle back to my spot. Granted, this is going to be the case to a certain extent with most sit-in paddle-based kayaks when compared to a sit-on peddle-drive setup, but it still got to be frustrating. I also found myself skipping out on trips on windy days because I didn’t want to fight with the wind, and Oru specifies this boat isn’t for use in heavy wind or chop.

The interior of the Oru Beach LT Sport, showing the gel seat and backrest
The Beach LT Sport comes with a gel seat cushion, which is extra comfy. Abby Ferguson

Oru Beach LT Sport comfort

Most people will be taking a kayak out for more than just a few minutes, so it needs to be comfortable to sit in for long periods. Oru clearly prioritized comfort with this model, as it includes a gel cushion seat, which is usually a separate upgrade. It’s nicely padded and comfortable to sit on. The backrest—which is lightly padded—is adjustable in height and reclining angle so that you can fine-tune your position. The adjustable footrest is just a plastic bar, but you can adjust its distance for an ideal sitting position.

I typically ventured out for a few hours at a time, and overall, I was quite happy with how comfortable the Beach LT Sport was. After an hour or so, I did get a bit restless and had to keep adjusting my position to be comfortable, but that’s true of any seated position for extended periods for me. Luckily, it’s stable enough to hold up to my wiggling around to get comfortable. 

A photo showing the rubber edging coming off of the floor panel of the Oru kayak
The rubber edging came loose from the floor panel after just a single use. Abby Ferguson

Durability

Overall, I was really impressed by this Oru kayak, but it was not without faults. While Oru kayaks are made of rugged and durable materials, the front and back fairings showed signs of wear (slight tearing near the seams) after just a few uses. I didn’t pull on them any more than I had to in order to get them on the kayak, so this was surprising to see. Also, the rubber edging on the floor piece popped off slightly the first time I used it and continued to come loose throughout my testing. It tended to collect water, which would get inside the corrugated plastic. I’m sure it could be glued on, but I was disappointed that the piece came loose so quickly. 

It’s also worth pointing out that while Oru kayaks are made of highly durable plastic, the act of unfolding and folding puts wear and tear on the joints. That’s one aspect typical kayaks don’t need to consider. Oru specifies that its kayaks are rated to 20,000 folds, which means they should last for a very, very long time, but I only tested it for about half a dozen folds and can’t speak to long-term durability.  

The Oru kayak on a grassy shoreline
The Beach LT Sport isn’t a cheap kayak, but it does have lots of perks. Abby Ferguson

So, who should buy the Oru Beach LT Sport?

I have wanted a kayak for a long time, but the idea of figuring out storage and then trying to transport the thing on my own as a small female was an obstacle. Inflatable kayaks have existed for a while, but you need to have some means of inflating them and then hope you don’t get a puncture. Oru Kayaks offer a sweet spot for a lot of people because of just how lightweight, compact, and portable they are without needing any additional equipment or tools. 

The Beach LT Sport is normally priced just shy of $2,000, which is at the expensive end, to be sure. But if you compare it to other fishing kayaks—which is what this is meant to be—it’s not out of line. That’s especially true when you consider the portability and storage benefits you get from this kayak compared to traditional ones. The Beach LT Sport has its downsides—it doesn’t perform well in windy conditions or in rough water—but it is also an extremely fun kayak in a tiny, easy-to-work-with package. 

More photos of the Oru Beach LT Sport

The Oru Beach LT Sport folded down
When folded up, the Beach LT Sport is remarkably compact. Abby Ferguson
Legs in a kayak going through a narrow canal through a forest.
This kayak can take you to some pretty spots. Abby Ferguson
The fairings and front handle of the Oru Kayak
The fairings offer handles on both sides for easy carrying when you have two people. I did notice some tearing on mine after just a few uses, though. Abby Ferguson
Legs stretched out in the Oru Kayak with another kayak in front on a river.
There is a ton of legroom in the kayak, at least for someone of my height (5′ 6″). Abby Ferguson

The post Oru Beach LT Sport foldable kayak review: Whatever, wherever floats your boat? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best coolers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-cooler/ Wed, 26 May 2021 18:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=367187
A lineup of the best coolers on a white background
Amanda Reed

No matter where your adventures take you, cool down with the best coolers.

The post The best coolers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best coolers on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best hard cooler Aquifer blue YETI cooler YETI Tundra 65 Cooler
SEE IT

This durable hard-shelled option will keep your items cold all day long.

Best soft cooler Black nylon soft cooler Polar Bear Coolers 24 Pack
SEE IT

This lightweight pick has all of the cooling power along with portability.

Best backpack cooler Black TOURIT cooler backpack is one of the best coolers TOURIT Cooler Backpack
SEE IT

Keep your goods cool while on-the-go.

Picture this: It’s a gorgeous 80-degree day, and you and a few of your best friends just arrived at the beach with a cooler in hand. You can’t wait to brush off the week’s work and celebrate the weekend with your friend by cracking into a nice drink. When you reach for the drink, however, it’s totally lukewarm. UGH! Your ice chest hadn’t kept it cold in the 40-minute ride over! Well, the story doesn’t have to end this way. There are plenty of trustworthy and well-functioning ice coolers out there—you just have to know where to look! Read on for some of the best coolers that will ensure you always arrive at your next destination with the important stuff: ice-cold drinks and provisions. 

How we chose the best coolers

Coolers should do their job of keeping drinks and food cold. In order to weed out the lukewarm choices from the ice-cold items, we looked at reviews, recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research. No one wants to reach for an iced cold beverage and be met with a tepid can.

The best coolers: Reviews & Recommendations

The best coolers can keep drinks and food cold for hours while you and your pals/loved ones romp around having a blast outdoors. Here’s what we found.

Best overall: YETI Tundra 65 Cooler

YETI

SEE IT

It’s hard to match the features of this Yeti cooler, with its T-Rex Lid Latches made of heavy-duty rubber that won’t break as well as an interlock lid system and a coldlock gasket to keep heat out and lock in cold. It also features LipGrip handles designed to stay out of the way, and DoubleHaul handles made of military-grade polyester rope. Its Vortex Drain System is leakproof and ensures easy and clean draining. Coming in four fun colors, the YETI Tundra 65 cooler is really worth the investment. If you like Yeti’s insulated water bottles, you will love the Tundra 65 cooler.

Best soft: Polar Bear Coolers 24 Pack

Polar Bear Coolers

SEE IT

One of the greatest issues with soft coolers is sturdiness—but this is not even close to an issue with the Polar Bear Cooler. It features one of the toughest, puncture-resistant liners made of TPU double-coated nylon, which is consumer safe for perishable storage. Plus, it has beautiful stitching with double hemmed seams, a heavy-duty and weatherproofed zipper and a side zipper compartment that can be totally customized with your name or logo! 

Best backpack: TOURIT Cooler Backpack

TOURIT

SEE IT

This cooler bag comes in six colors, has a stylish design, and promises comfort on your back and shoulders with its padded and adjustable straps. This backpack keeps food and drinks chilled for up to 16 hours (freeze packs are needed, though), is durable and leak-resistant, and its ventilated exterior material ensures that your clothes won’t get wet by condensation during your adventure. It has multiple compartments perfect for organization: one main storage compartment for all your provisions, two front zipper pockets, two bottle holders, a mesh pocket on the strap, and even a bottle opener. 

Best with wheels: RovR Wheeled Camping Rolling Cooler

ROVR PRODUCTS EST. 2016

SEE IT

This cooler’s 9-inch, puncture-resistant tires are able to spin fast over rough terrain, including deep sand. The ice cooler with wheels has tons of features like a removable dry bin for deep-freeze storage, a pop-up wagon bin to allow for fewer hauls, and a pull-beside dual handle. Its airtight gasket and high-density foam insulation allow for ice to stay cold for up to 10 whole days. 

Best budget: Coleman Xtreme 5 Cooler

Coleman

SEE IT

This Coleman cooler features Xtreme technology, including an insulated lid and extra wall insulation, and holds up to 100 cans. The closed lid features 4 slots to rest your drinks without spilling, and is perfect to squat down on—it holds up to 250 pounds! Its EZ-clean lid and comfortable handles make this a perfect choice for a no-frills ice chest that will get the job done without breaking the bank.

What to consider when buying the best coolers

Everyone needs a solid insulated cooler that will be there for you for picnics, or if your power goes out and you need to get meat in the freezer stored away fast! To invest in the right ice chest cooler for you, there are a few things to consider: 

The first consideration is size: do you want a large cooler? Or maybe a small cooler? No matter which size you decide on, make sure you have enough space to store all your items, as well as the box itself.

The material and how you’ll carry it are also important factors in this decision. A cooler with wheels will be easy to transport, but that portable cooler will weigh more than similarly sized models without wheels. Additionally, consider where you’ll use your ice chest: soft-sided coolers work well for short trips, picnics, and lunch bags, but not as well for long road trips. 

And then, of course, there’s the price-point. A good model can range from an easily affordable option to a serious investment. As you go up the price point scale, you’ll typically find more unique features. Context matters here: do you go camping often? A camping cooler might be for you. Do you live in a location where the power typically goes out? Look for an electric cooler or plug-in one that can be powered by your car or boat’s 12V outlet. Do you love hosting events? A mini cooler simply won’t do for large gatherings. You’ll want to get what works best for you—not just what’s most popular.

The decision on material: should you buy a hard or soft cooler? 

One of the most key decisions to make when thinking about what ice chest to buy has to do with its material. There are tons of great hard and soft coolers out there, and you have to consider which are the best coolers for you! 

A hard cooler can be counted on to get you through a week-long fishing adventure, a camping trip, or pretty much any outdoor activity that will require your drinks and food to stay cold. Hard coolers are more durable and are generally insulated enough to keep your ice cool for days on end. That said, hard coolers can be very heavy and more expensive.

A soft cooler is great for day trips—maybe a picnic lunch or a beach trip. As the name suggests, they are often made from more malleable, foldable materials like canvas or nylon. Since they are often more lightweight and easy for carrying around, it’s not uncommon to see soft coolers built like a backpack or designed like an extra piece of luggage. Soft coolers typically won’t hold as much as a hard cooler, and might not keep your ice frozen for long periods of time, but they are certainly easy to store and access and are generally less expensive.

For a portable cooler experience

It can be incredibly frustrating to lug a heavy ice chest around. If you’re traveling far, you have other things to worry about than schlepping yours from the car to the campsite. Depending on your outdoor adventure, there are many different types of coolers that can help you avoid this difficult scenario. 

Nowadays, coolers come in all shapes and sizes. If you’re going on a short trek and want to pack picnic gear but still need your hands, consider a backpack cooler. If you’re heading on an RV trip with family, perhaps you want to make sure you have an ice chest with wheels.

For those who need an ice chest in a pinch

As you can tell, there are some awesome ice coolers out there, but many of them come with a hefty price tag. If you are trying to keep your ice frozen, your drinks, and your food chilled, with no other major bells and whistles, it’s certainly possible to find one at a lower price point.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best coolers cost?

Depending on the size and materials, the best coolers can start as low as $20-$50 and go as high as $500. Coolers that have a hefty price tag (say 300 dollars or more), are often worth it. Once you make the investment, you won’t have to buy another ice chest for a long time (if ever again!). Plus, they often have great features that you won’t find on less expensive versions, and sometimes feature a warranty—be sure to check with the manufacturer at the time of buying. 

Q: What are the top 5 coolers?

While ranking favorite coolers is a subjective task dependent on a number of factors, the five coolers listed in this article (YETI Tundra 65 Cooler, Polar Bear Coolers 24 Pack, TOURIT Cooler Backpack, RovR Wheeled Camping Rolling Cooler, & Coleman Xtreme 5 Cooler) are solid choices. 

Q: Which cooler keeps ice the longest?

Most coolers with updated insulation technology are able to keep ice for up to a few days. Depending on the temperature and if the ice chest is located in direct sunlight or not, the maximum days will vary. That said, however, the RovR Wheeled Camping Rolling Cooler is able to hold ice for up to 10 days.

Final thoughts on the best coolers

Every family, group of friends, or even an individual can benefit from having a trusty ice cooler to pull out for that next party or outdoors adventure. Especially with the summer months approaching, it’s time to make sure you’re ready for any situation by checking off the best cooler off of your to-buy list. There are so many options out there, but you certainly won’t go wrong with any one of these five recommended best coolers. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coolers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Solo Stove Pi Prime review: Propane-powered pizza oven supreme https://www.popsci.com/gear/solo-stove-pi-prime-pizza-oven-review/ Wed, 23 Aug 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=564674
Solo Stove Pi Prime with pizza coming out
That's a gluten-free pizza believe it or not. Stan Horaczek

Solo Stove's propane-powered pizza oven is durable, portable, and requires just the right amount of culinary skill.

The post Solo Stove Pi Prime review: Propane-powered pizza oven supreme appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Solo Stove Pi Prime with pizza coming out
That's a gluten-free pizza believe it or not. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Cooking pizza with a wood fire requires a certain amount of artistry. You have to craft the pie itself, but tending to the fire is a skill all its own. The flame lives and breathes as it burns, which was a key selling point for Solo Stove’s first pizza oven, the Pi. Unfortunately, for culinary dunces like myself, that romantic Neapolitan fantasy often ends with sad, burnt pizzas and a call to Domino’s. That’s where the Solo Stove Pi Prime comes in. 

This 30-pound, propane-powered oven doesn’t require wood fire at all. Push the electric starter, and the built-in burner churns out a consistent flame that burns with relentless consistency and ruthless intensity. The end result: Crispy crusts and charred pepperonis that are delicious enough to justify the extra Tums you’ll need to digest them. No practice necessary.

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Overview

  • The follow-up to the original Solo Stove Pi, the Pi Prime only works with liquid propane like you’d use for your gas grill. Wood fire isn’t an option. 
  • It cooks 12-inch pizzas at temperatures up to 900 degrees Fahrenheit on a removable Corderite pizza stone. 
  • It weighs just 30 pounds and comes with a durable cover, so it’s easy to lug around in a typical car trunk.
  • It costs $349 directly from Solo Stove, but we recommend upgrading to the $469 starter kit, which comes with essential accessories that make cooking much easier.

Pros

  • Electric start gets the fire going instantly, and it heats up in less than 15 minutes
  • It reaches extremely high temperatures. We read over 900 degrees when cranked. 
  • It burns roughly one pound of liquid propane per hour when set to max (which you won’t need), so it costs less than $1 per hour to operate
  • Relatively easy to carry around and fits in a typical car trunk
  • Removable pizza stones and stainless steel construction make cleaning simple
  • Cheaper than the fire-based model
  • Accessories allow for cooking other foods besides pizza
  • Monolithic design makes it easier to transport than other pizza ovens with tall chimneys

Cons

  • Stainless steel outer surface gets very hot and stays that way for more than an hour after cooking
  • No built-in thermometer
  • Culinary dorks will tell you how much they like fire better and how the pizza was “totally amazing” when they went to Napoli (which they’ll pronounce in an annoying way)

Verdict

This is a perfect option for cooks who want to spend more time picking ingredients, stretching dough, and actually making pizza instead of fussing around with sticks in a wood fire. It’s simple, portable, easy to clean, and generally a great addition to any quiver of outdoor cooking equipment.

The Solo Stove Pi Prime build

An internal look at the Pi Prime pizza oven
This is what the interior looks like before the first cook. The flame comes from the burner at the back, and the stones are separated to make them easy to take out and clean. Stan Horaczek

If you’re familiar with Solo Stove’s excellent fire pits, the design here should make sense. It’s a stainless steel cylinder with a hole cut in the side to slide the pizzas in. It weighs roughly 30 pounds, so it’s relatively easy to carry around. It stands just 15 inches high and 20.5 inches across, so even my 14-year-old son had no trouble lugging it around on his own. It does require a liquid propane tank, however, so you’ll need to consider the bulk and weight of that if you’re going to transport the Pi Prime.

It looks and feels like a Solo Stove, which is a very good thing in our book. 

The Solo Stove Pi Prime setup

The Pi Prime can sit on any non-flammable surface (it has feet to elevate the hot parts above whatever surface you choose). For my test, I simply sat it on a wall made of patio stone in my yard. But I would recommend getting the dedicated stand to go with it if you can stomach the $250 price. You constantly need to look into the oven to watch the pizzas as they cook quickly, so you want it at a height that doesn’t require endless bending. 

Once you find a spot, the rest of the setup process requires little more than attaching the propane tank via the integrated hose, installing the Corderite pizza stones (which consist of two pieces to make them easier to maneuver), and pushing the electric ignition to get the fire going. 

The Solo Stove Pi Prime performance

Solo Stove Pi Prime with a pizza cooking inside
The stainless steel surface gets messy during the cooking process, but it’s easy to wipe with a damp cloth. Stan Horaczek

You’ll notice the conspicuous absence of a thermometer on the Pi Prime. Solo Stove sells an instant-read infrared thermometer on Amazon and as part of its pizza oven packages instead of integrating a temperature monitor directly into the device. I thought that would be more of a downside than it turned out to be in practice. I started my test by simply turning the gas to medium/high and letting it rip for about 20 minutes before putting in the first pizza. It worked out just fine. 

The burner is localized to the back of the oven, so it’s obviously much hotter back there than it is up front near the opening. As a result, you need to give the pizza constant attention to ensure each quadrant of the pie gets the correct amount of char. This may sound tedious, but pizzas take roughly 90 seconds to a maximum of three minutes to cook at these temperatures. It gives novice cooks like me a chance to get in there with the turning peel (an accessory I absolutely recommend) and really take part in the pizza-making process. After the first pizza, I was totally hooked on the process. I thought that must be how other famous pizza chefs, like Charles Entertainment Cheese, must feel. It’s a rush.

After about seven pizzas, I did need to turn the power down slightly because the heat was getting too intense in the chamber. If you’re going to be doing extended cooks, the infrared thermometer really is a must. The same is true if you plan on doing any proper baking since that process is far less forgiving. 

Once everything is heated up and running smoothly, each pizza takes about 90 seconds from when it first slides into the oven until it comes out bubbling from a 750-degree chamber. Times vary depending on toppings–adding fresh mozzarella takes longer because of all the moisture. Overall, though, it’s very pleasant and meditative. 

Cleanup

The worst part about cleaning the Solo Stove Pi Prime is waiting for it to cool down after you’re done cooking. Once it’s comfortable to touch, you can remove the stones, which come in two pieces so they’re easy to slide in and out of the chamber. The stones are sensitive to water, so you can’t submerge them. You have to scrape the loose particles off and then gently wash them. They will stain—that’s inevitable. But it doesn’t affect the performance.

The rest of the device is very simple to clean. It’s all stainless steel, so you can wipe it with a damp rag and sauce, cheese, and whatever else comes off very easily. The only part that provides any real challenge is the roof of the cooking chamber, which might get some goop on it if your dough bubbles high enough that the toppings touch it. Even that’s relatively quick to deal with, however.

Solo Stove Pi vs. the Solo Stove Pi Prime

Solo Stove Pi Prime-cooked gluten free pizza with arugula and chicken.
Here’s a gratuitous pizza detail. It’s a gluten-free crust with chicken, mozzarella, and arugula (it’s a vegetable). Stan Horaczek

If you’re considering both of Solo Stove’s pizza offerings, the choice should be relatively simple, depending on your desires. Both ovens are nearly identical in size and weight, but the original Pi costs $399, $50 more than the $349 Pi Prime’s retail price. The original Pi can work with propane, but only if you buy the optional burner accessory that you’ll need to install. That adds another $129 to the total cost. 

I’m only really interested in propane cooking, so the choice is obvious for me. If you want the flexibility, it may be worth spending the extra money upfront so you can satisfy your culinary whims. I don’t have culinary whims. I want pizza. That’s what makes the Pi Prime work for me.

So, who should buy the Solo Stove Pi Prime?

For $349, this is one of the most portable, durable, and versatile gas-powered pizza ovens available at the moment. It weighs more than a similar model from its main competitor, Ooni, but it’s also cheaper, and I like the form factor better overall. While some serious cooks may find the lack of wood fire support limiting, I’m grateful for it. And I think other enthusiastic novices will feel the same way. Pizza ovens aren’t worth the money they cost and the garage space they occupy if they’re too annoying to use. The Pi Prime is so simple, quick, and effective that I used it way more than I would have initially thought. Sure, I did slightly burn off my fingerprints when I carelessly touched the stainless steel outer surface that’s clearly marked “hot,” but I also made and ate a bunch of great pizzas. And that’s what outdoor cooking is really all about. Just stock up on Tums when you add it to your cart. Those pepperonis will get you.

The post Solo Stove Pi Prime review: Propane-powered pizza oven supreme appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snowboard helmets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snowboard-helmet/ Thu, 04 Mar 2021 22:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-snowboard-helmet/
person snowboarding down a mountain wearing the best snowboard helmet
Visit Almaty via Unsplash

These will shield your your head from a fall while making sure you still look good.

The post The best snowboard helmets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
person snowboarding down a mountain wearing the best snowboard helmet
Visit Almaty via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Smith Optics Unisex Adult Smith Optics Unisex Adult
SEE IT

High quality, highly rated in a timeless style offers lightweight, warm but breathable protection.

Best smart POC, Obex Spin POC Obex Spin
SEE IT

This high-tech helmet has built-in speakers and a microphone along with Bluetooth technology.

Best budget Smith Optics Holt Smith Optics Holt
SEE IT

Modern unisex helmet with ABS construction.

Before you get to shredding the slopes, you have to make sure you’ve got the best snowboard helmet as part of your snow gear. Snowboarding, like skiing, requires an investment in selecting the right gear. Some gear can be rented but others are better to purchase and bring with you—for example, items that really need to have a personal fit, like snowboard helmets and goggles. Whether you are a beginner or advanced snowboarder, helmets are an essential piece of snowboarding gear and should offer optimal fit, comfort, hygiene, and protection for full, fun, safe days on the slopes.

The best snowboard helmet will fit snugly, fasten with a secure chin strap, and protect you from the cold while allowing for venting and moisture-wicking for added comfort. For safety, your helmet should be certified by the ASTM, and should coordinate and fit seamlessly with your goggles. While there is no actual difference between skiing and snowboarding helmets in terms of practical protection, snowboarders are big on style, and this carries through to snowboard helmets. Ranging in price from around $50 to $350, the market is full of selections for your budget. While some helmets are specifically designed for men, women, or children, many are made to be unisex—and every helmet is made to keep you safe, regardless of who is wearing it.

The best snowboard helmets: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: Smith Optics Unisex Adult

Smith

SEE IT

This is a classic, well-rated unisex snowboard helmet from a leading snowsport industry manufacturer. It features a hybrid SL shell with Aerocore open cell construction to both protect and ventilate. Additional flexibility and comfort come from the adjustable Boa FS360 fit system.

Best for women: Oakley Women Mod1 MIPS

Oakley

SEE IT

This women’s snowboard helmet offers a comfortable ventilated design with removable ear pads and liner. A fidlock style buckle uses magnets to fasten the helmet strap quickly even while wearing gloves. It’s fully rated for safety, and durability.

Best smart: POC, Obex Spin

POC

SEE IT

This is a bluetooth snowboard helmet for tech-minded snow sport enthusiasts. Layers of protection and an EPS liner protect your head from impact, while sliding vents control temperature and reduce overall fogging. Bluetooth-enabled built-in speakers and a microphone allow communication and music right inside.

Best for kids: Bern Kids Winter Bandito Snow Helmet

Bern

SEE IT

This is the best kids snowboard helmet, for those who are not quite ready for adult sizes. The style is trendy and is available in several fun colorways, including all-white with confetti. The helmet has a built-in visor to reduce sun glare and uses EPS Thinshell technology to keep the helmet lightweight.

Best with visor: Giro Orbit MIPS Spherical Snow Helmet

Giro

SEE IT

This is one of the best snowboard helmets, from a well-respected and highly rated brand. This high-end helmet uses MIPS protection as well as a spherical vivid shield for added peripheral vision and protection from glare. A plus is that it can be used with or without eyeglasses. It comes at a higher cost but if you consider it as a two-in-one, it makes more sense.

Best budget: Smith Optics Holt

Smith

SEE IT

This Smith snowboard helmet is a solid option for beginners or budget-minded shoppers. This classic skate-style helmet is unisex. The helmet is designed with a self-adjusting lifestyle fit that offers flexibility to conform to individual head shape for added comfort.

Features to consider when shopping for the best snowboard helmet

Check out our shopping guide to help you select the best snowboard helmet for your budget and style. Whether you want a well-rated, basic unisex helmet or a tricked-out Bluetooth-enabled number, we’ve selected some of the highest-quality helmets on the market.

Looking for something versatile? A unisex snowboard helmet is a must

The best unisex snowboarding helmet should be—not surprisingly—extremely versatile. If you are buying a helmet to casually try out the sport, a unisex style means someone else in your family can use the same helmet (assuming they have a similar-sized head). In fact, most snowboarding helmets are marketed as unisex, because, well, heads are pretty much the same. There is no actual reason to buy a gender-specific helmet other than a simple style preference. The best unisex helmets will come in basic solid colorways and a streamlined modern style. Designed for safety, the best helmets will be designed to absorb impact in case of crashing. Comfort will include the use of breathable liners and vents throughout the helmet to expel hot air.

Looking for a helmet designed for a woman?

While there is no specific anatomical reason to buy a women’s snowboard helmet, sometimes you just want the extra design flourishes. Many women’s helmets are a little more streamlined and less visually bulky.

The best women’s snowboarding helmet will offer style without any compromise to function, safety, and comfort. Like all quality helmets, you will want to find a snug, comfortable fit with some adjustability. Ventilation systems will allow for heat to pass during intense exercise keeping the head warm and dry. And again, all helmets should be rated by ASTM for impact safety.

Do you like to listen to music when you go snowboarding?

It’s hard to imagine a more thrilling experience than listening to your favorite songs comfortably in your helmet while enjoying a pristine day on the slopes. With built-in Bluetooth technology, you can feel a little like James Bond—all this technology is now possible right inside your helmet. Speakers and a microphone are built into the ear pads and allow for not only tunes, but communication, so you can stay connected with others and keep updated on snow and weather conditions. This added communication can keep you safer when you’re out in the mountains, which are notorious for quickly changing weather conditions.

A good Bluetooth snowboard helmet will offer comfortable built-in speakers, along with all the other important safety and comfort features you would want in your snowboarding helmet. Important features to look for are impact safety construction, interior adjustment for optimal fit, soft wicking interior lining fabrics. as well as ventilation.

Interested in less gear? Consider a snowboarding helmet with a built-in visor

If you’re trying to streamline your snow gear, consider a snowboarding helmet that includes a visor. Snowboard helmets that include an integrated shield will not only protect your head, but will also offer protection to your eyes and increased visibility. This unique combination eliminates the need for goggles, thereby reducing the overall amount of items you need to bring for days on the slopes. Another bonus for this style is you don’t have to worry about helmet/goggle compatibility—and the combo allows a quick flip-up/flip-down when you want to expose your face without eye protection.

The best snowboard helmets with visors, also known as integrated shields, will offer top-of-the-line protection and include MIPS (Multi-Directional Impact Protection System) protection. The eye shield should fit seamlessly over the face with or without eyeglasses and provide venting and anti-fogging technology. This combo style offers a practical, futuristic look and can be a good solution for streamlining your snow gear bags.

Best snowboard helmet on a budget: What you get for under $75

Snowboard helmets range dramatically in price. The lowest end can be even slightly under $50, but these are typically the inexpensive children’s helmets or the lesser-known and trusted brands. We suggest choosing a lower-priced model from a well-known and trusted brand, like our pick below.

The best snowboard helmet for less will offer impact protection and durable construction, and be designed to seamlessly fit with goggles. There should also be some degree of adjustability to ensure a comfortable fit, as well as ventilation. Lower-cost helmets may not offer the MIPS protection, which is an added layer designed to increase protection for action sports.

FAQs

Q: How should a snowboard helmet fit?

The best snowboard helmet should fit comfortably, feeling snug but not tight. A good test for fit is to shake your head from side to side and see that it remains in place. Measurements are taken about an inch above your ears around the circumference of your head. The chin strap should fit snugly but allow for comfortable allowance for talking or chewing. Finally, consider the googles along with the helmet, as there should not be a gap between the two.

Q: How often should I replace my snowboard helmet?

Even the best snowboard helmet will show wear and tear over time. It is suggested to replace helmets at least every 5 years. If your helmet is made with EPS (expanded polystyrene) and you crash with it, you should replace it as its form may be compromised. However, if your helmet is made of EPP (expanded polypropylene), it will last several minor impacts before needing replacement.

Q: Is a snowboard and ski helmet the same thing?

Snowboard and ski helmets are essentially the same thing. Both helmet types are designed to protect your head from the elements and from accidental impact. Both helmets should fit snugly, and connect seamlessly to your goggles. The major difference between the two types is style, but there is certainly a cross-over between the two sports.

A final word on shopping for the best snowboard helmet

The best snowboard helmet will offer style, comfort, and full protection for your days on the slopes. Your helmet will keep you safe in case of any impact and also offer ventilation to help keep you head warm and dry.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snowboard helmets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snowboard boots of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snowboard-boots/ Mon, 22 Mar 2021 22:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/story/uncategorized/best-snowboard-boots/
three people with snowboards walking on a snowy moutain
Visit Almaty via Pexels

These boots were made for boarding for beginners and shredders alike.

The post The best snowboard boots of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
three people with snowboards walking on a snowy moutain
Visit Almaty via Pexels

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best men's Ride Lasso Pro Mens Snowboard Boots Ride Lasso Pro Snowboard Boots
SEE IT

This flexing boot comes in regular and wide widths, and it’s fitted with an intuition support wrap liner for maximum comfort and security.

Best Beginner Vans Hi-Standard Men’s Snowboard Boots Vans Hi-Standard Men’s Snowboard Boots
SEE IT

Vans snow boots are super popular with shredders of all levels, and this lace-up pair lets you customize the fit exactly to your liking.

Best Budget Symbolic Ultra Light Black Snowboard Boots Mens Symbolic Ultra Light Black Snowboard Boots Mens
SEE IT

A soft-flex feel and traditional lace-up design combine to make a dependable, straightforward pair of snowboard boots.

The first step to hitting the slopes is to find the right pair of snowboarding boots. After that, it’s the bindings and the board. Unlike ski boots, which are rigid and unforgiving, snowboard boots are flexible and, in general, much more comfortable—a blessing for anyone with wide feet or any podiatric issues, like bunions, corns, or hammertoes. To get you going, we’ve curated the best snowboard boots out there for every level, age group, gender, price point, and style preference around.

How we picked the best snowboard boots

Whether you’re a pro on the powder or just starting out, a successful snowboarding run starts with appropriate snowboard gear, especially when it comes to your feet. Unlike ski boots, snowboarding boots lock in sideways (not frontways) and must be released manually in the event of a fall. That can feel jarring at first, but you get used to it, promise! We looked to top brands for boots that were comfortable, stylish, and affordable for beginners and established snowboarders alike.

The best snowboard boots: Reviews & Recommendations

Best men’s: Ride Lasso Pro Mens Snowboard Boots

Ride Lasso

SEE IT

Many men’s snowboard boots, including these, boast a BOA feature, which means that they’re an easy pull-on style sans traditional laces. These also have micro-adjustable ankles, enabling the perfect fit. Their Michelin soles made out of rubber and phylon are super lightweight.

Best women’s: thirtytwo Women’s Lashed Double Boa

thirtytwo

SEE IT

These women’s snowboard boots have medium flexibility, a 3D molded tongue, a molded footbed with heel cradle and arch support, and a performance backstay to support your spine. Note that anyone used to a traditional lace-up or pull-on style may find it tricky to put these on at first.

Best kids’: Burton Boy’s Zipline Boa ’19

Burton

SEE IT

Little hands can adjust these babies even with their mittens on—how cool is that? A heat-moldable imprint liner will keep their feet nice and warm, and the easy BOA dial lets them easily adjust to the perfect fit. The fabric of the boot is virtually indestructible—perfect for fall-prone kids who may not treat their boots like the treasure they are.

Best BOA: Burton Ion BOA Mens Snowboard Boots

These Burton snowboard boots have a snow-proof internal gusset keeps your feet warm and dry, even after an entire day on the slopes. Something called a Tuff Cuff Lite wraps the ankle and holds your heel in place so that you get the perfect balance of stability and range of motion. Two independent lacing zones allow you to custom-fit the upper and lower portions of these BOA snowboard boots, which is particularly great for accommodating a difference in width between calves and ankles.

Best beginner: Vans Hi-Standard Men’s Snowboard Boots

Vans

SEE IT

Made specifically for those at the beginner or intermediate level, an ultra-cushy footbed makes sure that no matter what, the new boarder in your ranks will at least be comfortable. These Vans snowboard boots also feature an instep lace lockout and internal web harness, which provide extra support—very important for newbies. And the waffle sole looks just like the slip-on surfer Vans you wear during the summer!

Best all-mountain: adidas Tactical ADV Snowboard Boot Mens

Adidas

SEE IT

A heat-moldable foam liner conforms to your feet and keeps these Adidas snowboard boots warm and comfortable, while an inner ankle harness secures your foot inside for a no-slip fit. These promise a smooth, powerful ride. They’re particularly great for anyone who’s not a fan of BOA boots.

Best wide: K2 Maysis Snowboard Boots Wide

One really cool feature of this style—called Harshmellow Dampening—is impact-and-vibration absorption, which results in less foot and leg fatigue while you ride. However, these do run on the stiffer side, so if you prefer a super-flex fit, find another pair.

Best budget: Symbolic Ultra Light Black Snowboard Boots Mens

Symbolic

SEE IT

You get what you pay for when it comes to snowboard boots, and what you don’t get with this pair is a liner or any major cushioning. That said, if the cost is your main concern, with these you still get a medium-stiff flex, 3D molded tongue, and some custom-molded foam for impact.

How to choose the best snowboard boots

To find the best snowboard boots for you, think of yourself like Goldilocks: You want something that’s snug enough to hold your foot in place, but not so tight that it’s distractingly pinchy. You should be able to wiggle your toes comfortably, and when you lean forward, your heel should stay in place. And never, ever forget your socks. (A thin or medium-thickness pair will do.) You also need to make sure that the boots you’re buying are compatible with your board and its bindings. (That’s a whole other issue that includes figuring out the best board width for your shoe size, and how much boot overhang you should have—so if you’re a beginner, consult an expert.)

Who needs snowboarding boots?

If you plan to snowboard with any regularity, buying your own pair of snowboarding boots will ultimately be cost-effective. And if you have an uncommon shoe size or any foot issues that make finding a perfectly fitting pair difficult, buying is smart because it guarantees that you’ll be comfortable during your entire day on the mountain (and not beholden to whatever the rental shop happens to have in stock). The only criteria for the best snowboard boots, whether you’re renting or buying, is that they’re comfortable.

If you’ve never snowboarded before, rent your gear for your first time on the slopes. If you get addicted (and you probably will), once you do the math you’ll likely find that buying your own boots, board, binding, and weatherproof snowboarding gear will save you dough in the long run.

What are BOA snowboarding boots?

Before the new millennium, snowboarding boots were primarily lace-ups. Then BOAs came along and changed the game. Double BOA boots feature two sets of laces: one on the inside that you tighten like traditional laces, and one on the outside that you control with the turn of a knob. (Single BOAs have one knob that controls the tightness of the entire boot.) Fans of BOAs like that tightening doesn’t necessitate glove removal, while some people complain that unless a regular lacing system, tightening isn’t uniform and some parts of the foot can feel insecure. (This is much less likely with a double BOA than a single.)

New to snowboarding? These snowboard boots are for you.

The best snowboard boots for someone who’s been shredding the gnar since birth may not necessarily be ideal for a newbie. In general, those just starting out should look for styles that have a soft to medium flex. Beyond that, the best beginner snowboard boots have the same specs as everyone else: The boots should be comfortable and fit right. (After all, a first-timer who spends the day in foot agony is unlikely to be interested in a second time, so choose your snowboard equipment wisely.)

How do I know if I need all-mountain snowboard boots?

All-mountain boots allow you to snowboard on nearly any type of terrain, and have a medium level of flexibility and mobility. They’re the most common types of boots because of their versatility. If you’re not sure what kind of terrain you’ll be riding on the most or you want the option to try all different parts of the mountain, this is the pair for you.

Do you have extra-wide or pain-prone feet?

Long gone are the days when only those with narrow, symmetrical feet and perfectly unscathed toes were entitled to a comfortable day on the slopes. The widest snowboard boots were made for anyone who wants to hop on a board and just needs a little more room. Take that, tiny feet!

Best snowboard boots on a budget: What you get for under $90

Unfortunately, spending less on snowboard boots means that you get less. Maybe not much less, but the expensive pairs are expensive for a reason: They use quality materials and offer bells and whistles the cheapies don’t. (And the cheapies are only comparatively cheap—you’ll still end up shelling out close to 100 bucks.) If you can spare it and plan to have your boots for a long time, leveling up could be worth it. These are the eBay snowboard boots we’ve found to hold you over if you’re on a budget.

FAQs

Q: What are the most comfortable snowboard boots?

Comfort is, of course, subjective, but typically you want to find a pair with ample cushioning, medium flex (not too soft, not too stiff), and, if you have a wide foot, a boot that truly fits you. Laces also give you slightly more control than BOA styles, because you can make micro-adjustments to how tight you’ve laced.

Q: Are stiffer snowboard boots better?

Stiffer boots might be better, depending on how you plan to use them and your ability level. Flexible boots give you room to maneuver, which can be helpful for beginners but also pros who like to freestyle and jump. Stiff boots are best for intermediate and advanced riders; they give you maximum ankle support and allow you to go super fast.

Q: Are snowboard boots worth buying?

If you play to snowboard a lot, definitely! Rates obviously vary from place to place, but let’s say you rent a pair for 20 bucks and hit the slopes just five times during the season—that’s $100, and for that much money, you could own your own pair. Not only that, owning a pair means that they’re perfectly molded to your feet and nobody else’s.

A final word on shopping for the best snowboard boots

Figuring out which are the best snowboard boots for you isn’t rocket science, but there are some key considerations. The first is deciding whether it’s cost-effective to buy a pair instead of renting (and the answer is yes if you plan to snowboard with any regularity). Beyond that, you’ll want to know whether you prefer lace-ups, single BOA models, or double BOAS; the different kinds of terrains you plan to board on; and whether you prefer a super-flexible soft boot or something a bit more rigid. There are loads of options out there with an infinite combination of features, so find your best boots, then get on out there!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snowboard boots of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best downhill skis of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-downhill-skis/ Tue, 31 Aug 2021 19:07:47 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=393781
Hit the powder with the best downhill skis.
Curt Nichols, Unsplash

Leave no powder uncarved with the best downhill skis on the market.

The post The best downhill skis of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Hit the powder with the best downhill skis.
Curt Nichols, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best beginner ski for kids The Rossignol Experience Pro Skis are the best beginner ski for kids. Rossignol Experience Pro Skis
SEE IT

These skis have the edge to stay in control without sinking into the powder.

Best powder skis The Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis are the best powder skis. Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis
SEE IT

These wide, wooden skis provide extra control for heavier skiers. 

Best budget The Rossignol Smash 7 are the best cheap downhill skis. Rossignol Smash 7
SEE IT

These responsive skis make quick turns and provide great value.

The thrill of hitting the powder makes it hard to resist the call of the slopes. When you’re making those turns on the best downhill skis, you merge with the slopes and become part of a centuries-long tradition. Snow skis have come a long way since the days of strapping wooden boards to the feet and tromping through the snow. Today, different types of skis cater to different ski styles—the carvers and mogul junkies—and conditions—crud, ice, and powder. 

Do you attack the mountain, or do you float above the snow, gliding where the mountain takes you? The skis’ materials, shape, edge design, and weight change how they feel and respond. Consequently, if icy conditions rule your local mountain, you’ll need different skis than if a fresh layer of powder welcomes you on the weekends. Keep reading to get the lowdown on the best downhill skis for the wide range of factors you bring to or run into on the mountain.  

The best downhill skis: Reviews & Recommendations

Best men’s skis: Nordica Enforcer 100 Skis

Nordica

SEE IT

The Nordica 2022 Enforcer 100 Skis feature a carbon-reinforced wood core surrounded by two metal sheets. The carbon fiber reduces the overall weight but gives the ski more strength and responsiveness. The combination of materials, length, and width makes it an excellent choice for powder or groomed runs. Nordica has adjusted the core thickness with each length, creating greater stability at shorter lengths. 

Best women’s skis: BLIZZARD Women’s Black Pearl 88 All-Mountain Skis 

Blizzard Entertainment

SEE IT

A narrower waist and carbon flipcore design give the BLIZZARD Black Pearl 88 excellent stability, especially if you keep your speed entering into the turn. The edges dig into the mountain, making it a better choice for those who prefer carving into groomed runs than riding through the powder. However, it can also handle powder to a depth of about six inches. Overall, it’s a stable choice that lets a woman carve deep trenches all the way down the mountain. 

Best beginner ski for kids: Rossignol Experience Pro Skis 

Rossignol

SEE IT

Rossignol Experience Pro Skis have the materials and design for intermediate junior skiers who are ready to carve or float down the mountain. A medium-width waist keeps it from sinking too deeply into the powder, but the edge provides the cut to stay in control on groomed snow. The flex and rocker support young skiers as they develop their ability to turn, pivot, and stop. 

Best for groomed runs: Rossignol Hero Elite Plus Ti Skis

Rossignol

SEE IT

The Rossignol Hero Elite Plus Ti Skis integrate technology from the company’s race line. The Line Control Technology locks the ski into each turn, letting you dig into the mountain as you carve your line. A narrower waist creates quick turns that let you take on a diverse range of run difficulties, including the elusive double black diamonds. 

Best powder skis: Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis

Blizzard Entertainment

SEE IT

The Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis definitely do not have a trim waist. The wide width gives them the float needed for deep, powdery runs. This powder ski’s mix of paulownia, poplar, and beech wood is lightweight but provides good control. The width of the ski coordinates with the length, making these a good option for taller, heavier skiers who need extra surface area to redistribute their height and weight on the snow.

Best all-mountain skis: Volkl M6 Mantra Men’s Skis

Volkl

SEE IT

The Volkl 2021 M5 Mantra Men’s Skis hold an edge in almost any condition—crud, powder, groomed. They’re relatively lightweight, so your legs don’t wear out on moguls or when hitting the jumps. The M5 has more pop than many all-mountain skis and is more forgiving for those who want to sit back and relax on the mountain. 

Best for moguls: Rossignol Experience 80 CA Men’s Skis

Rossignol

SEE IT

The Rossignol Experience 80 CI Men’s Skis feature a tip and tail that’s slightly flatter than previous models. That gives them the responsiveness to cut over and around moguls with good speed. Their edge provides the right angle to cut into the mogul without slipping. When you keep a tight form and manage your poles, these skis turn well enough to do the hard work for you. 

Features to consider when shopping for the best skis

The best skis for you have a shape that easily lets you carve, a width that floats (or cuts), and a length that keeps you in control. Take a look at what’s and why’s of finding your dream skis so you can hit the slopes.

Size the skis by your age and skill level

Are you a complete newbie, or are you racing to the double-black-diamond runs from the moment you get out of the car? Shorter skis that are narrow at the waist (the portion in the middle) are more forgiving and easier to turn, making them a great choice for beginners. Beginner skis also have more flex. That extra flex makes them more forgiving and responsive should you get off balance or try to tighten your turns. 

Intermediate skiers can look for a wider waist and rockered tip and tail that pull the ends of the skis up. This design feature makes them feel shorter and adds responsiveness when you hit the powder. Intermediate skis are typically a little stiffer to let you really dig into the mountain on hard turns. Advanced skiers need skis with carbon or Titanal that absorb vibration and let you focus on the slope while cruising down trails at higher speeds. 

Age and gender make a difference, too. A woman’s lower center of gravity and wider hips need a different ski shape than a man’s narrower profile. While many skis are labeled unisex, women often get a better fit and responsiveness from a ski specifically designed for them. Children need skis with a lot of flex and forgiveness as they learn a new sport. Skis for younger skiers are also shorter, making turns easier. 

The best skis for groomed trails are designed to carve and hold a turn

The perfect corduroy (‘roy) of a newly groomed run is a glorious beast to conquer. It takes a ski with a deep cut edge and the ability to absorb the vibrations that kind of snow can put out. The edges of these skis dig into the snow, leaving the telltale troughs of a snake trail. 

Skis for groomed runs also need technology to lock them into the curves, holding the shape of the turn until you’re ready to shift into the next turn. Skis that lean toward the groom lovers tend to have medium to narrow waists. A narrower waist lets you shift from one edge to the other for sharper, quick turns. 

If you spend more time searching for deep powder, your ski gear will need to keep up 

When you see skiers in powder up to their waists, it’s hard not to jump in and make a snow angel. However, staying upright in deep powder is a challenge. The right skis can help you float your way through the powder, letting you kick up a good spray with each turn. The best skis for powder have a fatter waist, long length, and full rocker to keep you from sinking too deeply into the snow.

Powder skis feature wide waists that spread out the skier’s body weight. Think of them as the snowshoes of downhill skiing. Look for a medium or multi-radius side cut to help you carve and hold your turns when the powder tries to pull you down. Models with a rocker in the tips and tail help the ski float and turn more readily despite disappearing into fine powder. 

All-mountain skis are a versatile downhill ski that works for both powder and groomed runs 

Beginning and casual skiers often do well with an all-mountain ski. These skis run the middle of the road on width, stiffness, and rocker design. Their edges can cut decent troughs on groomed runs, but they also have enough surface area to provide some float in the powder. 

The key with these skis is to get the right length and width for your size. Taller, heavier skiers need a longer, wider ski that can support their weight and give them control through turns and powder. Smaller skiers can end up fighting a long, wide ski. Stick to a length somewhere between mouth and forehead height when the ski stands on the ground. If you’re new to skiing or like tight turns, opt for a ski in the shorter range for your height. 

Professional skiers who love the thrill of the black diamond should consider investing in a pair of mogul skis

A tightened stance with soft knees lets you glide through moguls with precision. Moguls require a lightweight, responsive ski that won’t wear out your legs faster than the mountain. In general, a model with a narrower waist will provide more responsiveness and the fast turns needed to navigate tight moguls. 

Mogul skis also require an edge that can cut into the snow, so you don’t slide or drift over the bumps. From there, it’s about finding a length that supports your speed and skill level. 

FAQs

Q: How long should downhill skis be?

The length of the downhill ski should correspond with your height, weight, and skill level. Look for a ski that, when standing on end on the floor, reaches between your mouth and your forehead. Beginners should start with shorter skis, and heavier skiers should opt for longer skis. 

Q: What are the best skis for an intermediate skier?

The best skis for an intermediate skier is a ski that’s medium in width and height. These mid-range skis provide a slightly stiffer ride than a beginner ski but let intermediate skiers dig into tougher runs. The Volkl 2021 M5 Mantra Men’s Skis, for example, gives intermediate skiers a chance to take on harder runs as their skills improve.

Q: What is the best downhill ski brand?

The best downhill ski brand depends on your skill level and the conditions you usually ski in. However, some of the most well-known include Volkl, Rossignol, K2, Blizzard, and Nordica. There are many more, but these five have models that continually make the best-of lists. 

A final word on shopping for the best downhill skis

Not much can compete with the feel of crisp mountain air making your eyes water as you glide down a mountain. When you add in the best skis, you’ll get in more runs, experience less fatigue, and focus on the thrill of an adventurous winter sport. Look for a pair of skis that fit your ski style and size, and you’ll be tearing up the runs in no time. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best downhill skis of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best metal detectors for gold in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-metal-detectors-for-gold/ Wed, 22 Jun 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=450212
Best metal detectors for gold composited
Stan Horaczek

Between every modern prospector and that little pocket of bullion, there’s a great metal detector.

The post The best metal detectors for gold in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best metal detectors for gold composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Minelab Equinox is the best overall metal detector for gold. Minelab Equinox
SEE IT

Complete versatility meets exceptional tools for finding gold.

Best for beginners Fisher Labs Gold Bug is the best beginner’s metal detector for gold. Fisher Labs Gold Bug
SEE IT

An easy-to-use detector specifically designed for gold.

Best waterproof XP Deus 2 is the best waterproof metal detector for gold. XP Deus 2
SEE IT

Deep waterproofing meets good penetration and custom profiles.

Glimmering in the soil, just a couple inches beneath the sandy upper strata, is the nugget you’ve always dreamed of … and a few inches above that, a metal detector for gold. With the right metal detectors, you’ll come to the field equipped with the tools needed to find that pocket, seize that seam, and sniff out the deposits that still dot the hills of the United States and beyond. The best detectors are sensitive enough to distinguish between gold and ferrous metals, are often fully submersible, and can even find gold in difficult soils, such as mineralized black sand. Some detectors also come with special features, such as a gold-probability register that shows how likely a nugget might be gold or just a chunk of lead. Whatever your price point, sniff out a doubloon or three with the best metal detectors for gold.

How we chose the best metal detectors for gold

The people who love metal detecting love it for the hunt. If you’ve ever swept sandy shores looking for a little pot of washed-up relics or scoured scree fields in Colorado searching for a glimmering something that’s freshly rolled off the mountain, you know the thrill of the hunt. However, a successful hunt can’t happen without two things: the right know-how and the right tools. We researched numerous models from lots of different leading brands, looking for the best of the best. We took into account metal detectors we’d used, ones that peers had recommended, and ones that users spoke favorably of. Along the way, we did a deep dive into the technology behind our picks.

The best metal detectors for gold: Reviews & Recommendations

Metal detectors come in a few basic varieties, but all follow a general principle: an electric charge is used to create a magnetized wave that is directed at the ground; if this wave comes into contact with metal, the metal begins to vibrate in a specific manner, which can be detected by the device. When the sensor finds metal, it alerts the detectorist via a set of earphones or a moving dial. With the wrong detector for the job, however, you may have strayed past a life-changing chunk of gold and never been the wiser. That’s why when we were compiling this list, we wanted to make sure we could bring an authoritative selection of metal detectors to the table. Here are our picks for the best metal detectors for gold.

Best overall: Minelab Equinox

MINELAB

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With full waterproofing and multiple frequency modes, this excellent gold detector is ready for all valuables in all sorts of environments.

Specs 

  • Operating frequency: Simultaneous 5, 10, 15, 20, 40 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 10 feet
  • Detect modes: Gold, Park, Beach, Field
  • Weight: 2.96 pounds
  • Price: $899

Pros

  • Multiple frequencies and detection modes
  • Solid waterproofing
  • Clear dig tones
  • Superior sensitivity

Cons

  • Somewhat pricey

Sometimes a company just hits on a slice of perfect and if you’re after a personal basset hound for the bullion, then the Minelab Equinox is a detector you can’t afford to ignore. Historically, when you bought a metal detector, you picked a frequency and worked within it, but not so here. The Equinox is one of the most versatile machines out there. With multiple simultaneous frequency responses from 5 – 40 kHz, this detector is as capable of nosing into a patch of gold as it is turning up ancient coins, spearheads, and jewelry—all without committing to a mode in advance. That picture is completed with solid target IDs that keep you from digging up nails when you’re looking for pieces of eight.

The Equinox offers a great combination of automatic settings and options for manual tuning. With its four distinct detection modes, it’s as easy to set it for beach hunting as it is for the mineralized mountain soils where gold is usually found. It also comes with eight custom search profiles and allows you to save the settings you most frequently use. Advanced settings allow you to tweak how much target audio you hear. The LCD display sums it all up concisely with simple controls that let you instantaneously adjust detect modes and frequency. Special accessory coils for specific situations are also available to expand your range.  

Best for beginners: Fisher Labs Gold Bug

Fisher Labs

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This simple prospector’s detector is easy to use and provides great value in mountainous areas where gold is found. 

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 19 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Search coil is waterproof
  • Detect modes: All metal, discriminate
  • Weight: 2.5 pounds
  • Price: $439

Pros

  • Easy to get started
  • Solid auto ground balance
  • Lightweight
  • Viable for other targets beyond gold

Cons

  • Not great for beach hunting
  • Not as much manual control as some would like
  • Doesn’t offer the same depth as more premium detectors

Head for the hills without draining your savings with the Fisher Labs Gold Bug. Optimal for new prospectors, the Gold Bug is easy to use and tuned for gold. With simple controls, you won’t need to stay up late with the owner’s manual before you get out sweeping.

The two-tone detector uses a fixed frequency of 19 kHz and offers an all-metal mode, as well as a discriminatory mode for when the search gets serious. It uses two tones to differentiate metals: a lower tone for ferrous metals like iron and a higher tone for gold. It also features simple, automatic grounding that’s easy to use for new prospectors without constant fiddling. The pro version, on the other hand, allows you to customize grounding and may have slightly better sensitivity. 

Because of this instrument’s tight focus on gold, it works best in the rocky natural environments where gold is found and less well in some other types of environments. It’s not a great option for those who might be searching the beach and, for this reason, it might not be as appealing to budding detectorists who want more versatility. Its waterproofing is also only so-so, with a submersible head but no waterproofing above that. Still, for such a moderate price point, this is a good deal for those who’ve newly got the gold bug. 

Best waterproof: XP Deus 2

XP Metal Detectors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A multi-frequency high-end detector with up to 49 individual frequency settings, simultaneous-frequency mode, wireless headphones and pointer, and impressive waterproofing down to 60+ feet.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 4 kHz – 45 kHz, and simultaneous multi-frequency
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 66 feet
  • Detect modes: Wide discrimination, precise discrimination
  • Weight: 1.65 pounds
  • Price: $1,599

Pros

  • Top-notch waterproofing
  • Generous frequency controls
  • Good wireless headphone and pointer functions
  • Multiple tones for different metals in pulse width modulation (PWM) and square wave

Cons

  • Complex menu system and overall steep learning curve
  • Pricy

Choose your adventure: Snorkel down to a lost shipwreck that’s potentially full of doubloons or scour the mouth of a Canadian basin while your friends sweep the forested banks. Either way, there’s one clear detector for the job. The XP Deus 2 is a formidable submersible detector for serious prospectors that can function up to 60 feet below the surface of the water. 

The XP Deus isn’t just waterproof, however. This high-end multi-frequency detector is capable of 49 individual frequency settings, as well as an impressive simultaneous mode. The 4 – 45 kHz range offers more than enough room for gold. Wide and precise discrimination modes help you further narrow the field, and the machine reports back on the findings with three different tones for ferrous, low conductor, and high conductor metals, in PWM or SQUARE wave. 

The Deus also delivers some impressive modern touches. The system uses a wireless headset and can pair wirelessly with a pointer. The monitor is IP68 certified for water and dust resistance.

The Deus II is not a beginner system (at least not without a lot of work); with so many features packed into one, the detector’s controls aren’t exactly intuitive. Still, the steep learning curve will pay off. With such a wide swath of frequencies available, and with such excellent waterproofing, this is one of the most versatile detectors around.

Best professional: Garrett ATX 

Garrett

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With superior sensitivity even for deeply buried objects, saltwater immunity, and great resistance to interference, this is a PI detector that’s perfect for rugged environments and mineralized soils.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: Unspecified
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 10 feet
  • Detect modes: All metal mode, pinpoint, motion, non-motion
  • Weight: 6.9 pounds
  • Price: $2,380

Pros

  • Pulse induction detects metals deeper
  • Very rugged build
  • Multi-frequency modes for multiple depths and metals
  • Wide sensitivity scale

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Bulky and heavy

A draft horse of the metal detection world, the pulse induction Garrett ATX is a powerful instrument built for deep discoveries in rough environments. Using PI tech, the ATX is built for going deeper and finding gold in rougher locales. 

This is a stacked instrument with lots of modes and capabilities that will become second nature with time. The ATX leverages a multi-frequency mode to cut deeper into the ground and uncover more metal. It features 13 sensitivity modes, a capable ground-balance function that takes mere seconds to calibrate to the soil you’re working with, as well as ground tracking. Together, the ATX easily cuts through salty soil, seawater, and mineralized crusts. The iron check feature is another nice capability that audibly checks whether an item is iron, and the pinpoint feature helps you lock onto and find nuggets that you’d like to investigate.

The ATX is indisputably rugged but it’s also heavy—three times as heavy as some of the other leading detectors we follow. However, it’s also sturdier than most. It’s submersible up to 10 feet and won’t be affected by salt water or dust. All in all, if you want a rugged detector that leads the pack in terms of detection depth, this PI detector is it. You’d have to spend considerably more on something like the ultra-premium Minelab GPZ series with its ZVT tech to exceed it.

Best budget: Bounty Hunter 3410001

Bounty Hunter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a budget price, this easy detector can still find gold.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 6.6 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof coil
  • Detect modes: Discrimination, all-metal, tone
  • Weight: 3.7 pounds
  • Price: $119

Pros

  • Budget price
  • Easy automatic ground presets
  • Two-tone audio discrimination
  • Easy interface for different modes and discrimination dial

Cons

  • Frequency isn’t optimal for gold
  • Finicky in difficult soil and shallow

It is possible to find gold without spending thousands. The Bounty Hunter 3410001 is an affordable metal detector that’s loved by many. While this VLF detector isn’t optimal for hunting gold in deep bush settings, deeply mineralized soils, or salt water, it’s still a great choice for scanning for gold lost near the surface or small gold nuggets in gravel pits or tailings ponds. 

The Bounty Hunter might be inexpensive but it doesn’t lack features. Its control array is simple to use, whether you’re throwing a switch to cycle modes, adjusting sensitivity with a dial, or dialing in the disc/notch control to tune to gold. It features simple automatic grounding presets, three search modes, and a nice target strength meter that won’t make your brow furrow. Its frequency response is lower than optimal for gold but, with the right sensitivity setting and patience, that hasn’t stopped hundreds of users from finding lost wedding rings, gold jewelry, and undiscovered nuggets near the surface. 

With a waterproof coil, this 4-pound detector is capable of following you into multiple environments—even while its build might not be the definition of rugged. Still, at such a great price, it’s one of the most affordable metal detectors out there and a great place to start. Its frequency might not be optimal, and its grounding leaves a little to be desired, but you can still hit the jackpot with the Bounty Hunter by your side.

What to consider before buying the best metal detectors for gold

Before you start prospecting, there are a few considerations to make: 

Versatility

Most metal detectors are tuned to a specific frequency. However, some metal detectors do a better job than others at versatility. If you’re looking for a great metal detector for gold that can also moonlight as a detector for silver, relics, and rare ores, then look around for a more versatile detector that has multiple frequencies or swappable heads.

The methods used to detect metal falls into a few categories. The two most common technologies are very low frequency (VLF), and pulse induction (PI). These technologies both use electromagnetic waves to locate metal.

VLF detectors use a sensor coil and transmitter coil. The transmitter coil emits constant electromagnetic energy at a tuned frequency. When this energy encounters metal underground, it creates an eddy current in the metal that results in a phase shift of the reflected frequency. The sensor coil is then able to read this phase-shifted frequency pattern. VLF detectors make up the majority of metal detectors out there and tend to be the most versatile. However, they don’t do as well in more mineralized soils without calibration. VLF detectors meant for finding gold will usually be tuned to a higher frequency. Some VLF detectors at higher price points are able to emit varying frequencies.

PI detectors, on the other hand, emit rapid pulses of electromagnetic energy. These pulses quickly decay. When the pulses encounter a magnetic object they cause an eddy current to form in it. This magnetic eddy current then causes a measurable delay in the decay of subsequent pulse transmissions. PI detectors do a better job than VLF detectors at picking out gold in more mineralized soils and can generally be effective at ID’ing gold at greater depths. The newer technology is also generally quite expensive but can be worth it for veteran prospectors who want a device that will give them the edge in more difficult terrain. 

Coil size is an important factor in VLF detectors. While smaller coils will generally be more sensitive for gold, larger coils will allow you to scour more ground quickly. Luckily some detectors allow you to swap out coils. These enable you to hone in on a gold-rich area, then switch coils for a more accurate search.

Detection depth varies substantially. PI detectors usually do a better job at detecting gold that’s buried deeper, sometimes up to two feet. Only the higher-priced VLF detectors have the penetration required to find deep gold.

Ground balance is used to tune a detector’s frequency to the mineral you’re after (in this case, gold) and filter out everything else. A properly ground-balanced detector will filter out the frequencies of other minerals and mineralized earth you encounter, and dial you into gold, at deeper levels, and with better accuracy. Many detectors offer automatic ground balancing, while some allow you to fine-tune their balance manually. 

Frequency describes the transmission of electromagnetic waves from your detector. Since gold is a very low conductivity metal, higher frequency transmitters with shorter wavelengths do a better job at spotting it. Most detectors will have one frequency that they are able to transmit, while some have a range. We looked for detectors that transmit at good frequencies for finding gold, generally 14kHz and above.

Price

Metal detectors get expensive quickly. Before you commit to a metal detector, it’s usually a good idea to determine exactly what you want. While there are budget options out there, if you’re serious about looking for gold, an investment in a true prospector-grade detector could be worth it. Pricier detectors are usually better at piercing deep into the soil where worthwhile nuggets of gold remain and won’t get thrown off by deposits of other minerals. Still, gold is hard to find. Many true prospector-grade devices leave most hobbyists priced out. For this reason, it’s a good idea to have a budget in mind before you begin to shop.

Gold-producing environments

While gold can certainly be found with the right time and know-how, you’re unlikely to find any in Central Park. Before you commit to investing in an expensive metal detector for gold, it’s a good idea to plan your prospecting strategy. When you’re starting, it’s generally a good idea to search areas known to produce gold in the past, even if larger hauls might come from remote areas, such as Alaska, Northern Canada, or Western Australia. 

FAQs

Q: How much do the best metal detectors for gold cost?

Metal detectors for gold vary substantially in price. The cheapest metal detector for gold that we think is worth your time will cost about $100, while the highest-end prospector’s detectors can cost close to $10,000. 

Q: Will any metal detector find gold?

Yes. Most metal detectors are capable of finding gold, but some will do a much better job than others. Since gold has rather low conductivity, metal detectors that use higher frequencies will spot gold better than low-frequency detectors. For this reason, most metal detectors for gold have variable frequencies or are tuned for frequencies above 14 kHz. This isn’t an absolute requirement, however, and some lower-frequency models are still certainly capable of hitting that jackpot. 

Q: How deep do metal detectors go?

The depth that metal detectors go can vary substantially. Most cheaper metal detectors only find metal that’s a few inches beneath the dirt. Some of the most powerful detectors can find metal and gold that’s 2 feet underground. Larger nuggets are easier to find at greater depth.

Q: How do I look for gold with a metal detector? 

It can be quite hard to find gold. If you’re just starting out, it’s a good idea to look for gold in places where gold is known to have been found before. Pick your spot and search systematically. When you find a grain of gold, extend your search in that area, traveling in a grid pattern to ensure you cover the entire area. If the gold is naturally occurring then there’s usually more in the area.

Q: Can you make a metal detector for gold?

For a good DIY engineer, a simple metal detector isn’t actually all that hard to make. There are lots of helpful YouTube videos like this one that will help you design your own metal detector with common household items. It should be noted; however, that metal detectors made specifically for finding gold may be considerably harder to make, as the best metal detectors for gold run at higher frequencies than regular metal detectors.

Final thoughts on the best metal detectors for gold

Maybe you lost an engagement ring in the backyard ivy and you need a simple detector to help you get it back. Or maybe you’re a dedicated prospector looking to hit the jackpot in the Canadian Northwest Territories. Whatever your motivation, the best metal detectors for gold give you the tool you need to find gold, whether it’s in the wild, or out on the lawn. Great metal detectors for gold use high frequencies that help you pinpoint low-conductivity metals embedded deep in the dirt, easily filter noise from mineralized dirt, and are rugged enough to work in lots of environments.

For one of the deepest piercing detectors out there, consider the pulse induction Garrett ATX, which is rugged enough to rely on anywhere. If you’ve got an eye for tracking some shekels in the surf, the XP Deus 2 not only has some of the best waterproofing out there, it’ll do a great job in lots of different environments. If you’re just getting your feet wet detecting gold, the Bounty Hunter 3410001 is both affordable and easy to use; it’s a great instrument for those who want to learn the ropes or dig up jewelry from the yard. Finally, the Minelab Equinox is a metal detector that no one can afford to ignore. With superior tech, the Minelab’s completely customizable controls allow you to tune it to excel in any gold-bearing environment.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best metal detectors for gold in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated vests of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-vest/ Wed, 12 Jan 2022 22:42:33 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-vest/
A lineup of the best heated vests
Amanda Reed

Up your game this winter with a heated vest for any outdoor adventure.

The post The best heated vests of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated vests
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for men ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest is the best heated vest for men ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest
SEE IT

With 10 hours of wear time and a convenient USB charging port, this pick can keep you warm all day long.

Best for winter sports ORORO Men’s Fleece Heated Vest is the best heated vest for winter sports ORORO Men’s Fleece Heated Vest
SEE IT

This pick offers breathable fleece and carbon fiber heating elements to keep you at a comfortable temperature.

Best budget PKSTONE Heated Vest for Men & Women Anbero Heated Vest for Men & Women
SEE IT

With adjustable temperatures and a fast-heating design, this unisex heated vest will keep you warm on a budget.

Innovations in winter weather gear like heated vests and other battery-powered clothing are designed to bring amazing warmth without cumbersome extra layers. These pieces give you an extra boost of warmth and comfort and even allow you to customize the temperature and locations where you feel the heat. And they will fit well, promote overall well-being by harnessing heat to improve circulation, and relieve back and shoulder tension with their comforting warmth. Designed using low voltage, they are safe and cannot cause any serious injury to the wearer. They use lightweight wiring and rechargeable lithium-ion batteries to discreetly warm your core while appearing like a typical, stylish outdoor vest. The thin heating elements are fully concealed within the garment and are protected by a waterproof membrane, so you don’t need to worry about rain. Keep reading for the best heated vests that are warm, safe, lightweight, and will work for hours, allowing you to work and play outdoors this winter in style.

How we chose the best heated vests

While some people use the cold as an excuse to spend months mostly inside, this is not the case for all. Grumble less this winter by investing in the right gear to keep you warm and comfortable. To find the best heated vests, we tested them personally, looked at reviews, recommendations, gathered impressions, and conducted thorough research. The last thing we want is to leave you out in the cold with a heated vest that gives a wimpy, tepid hug instead of a warm, cozy embrace.

The best heated vests: Reviews & Recommendations

The best heated vests have strategically placed heat zones to bring warmth to your core, helping you to stay comfortable outdoors longer, no matter how cold it gets. We’ve whittled our choices to a select few who bring the heat in the winter. One of these should leave you as snug as a bug in a rug.

Best overall: Foxelli Heated Vest

Foxelli

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This vest has lots of heating zones, a detachable hood, and is wind-resistant—best of all, it’s machine washable.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 4
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Material: Polyester
  • Temperature settings: Low (95°F), Medium (110°F), High (130°F)

Pros

  • Detachable hood
  • Machine washable
  • Water and wind resistant

Cons

  • Some reviews note problems with the power bank

This rechargeable heated vest is a good option when you need more hours of warmth. The vest can adjust between three heat settings (low/medium/high) to customize comfort level and save on battery life. The vest offers four heating zones at the collar, back, and core, which are a nice addition for cold walks outdoors.

Best for men: ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest

Ororo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It’s tailored to fit the body, and can even charge your phone. Plus, it heats up fast and can last for 10 hours.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 3
  • Battery life: 10 hours
  • Material: Nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (100°F), Medium (120°F), High (130°F)

Pros

  • Quick heating
  • Machine washable
  • Zippered pockets

Cons

  • Might be too tight for bulkier jackets
  • Only a 10-degree difference between medium and high settings)

This heated vest for men is tailored neatly to the body and is machine washable. In seconds, the heating elements warm up the vest, which can be adjusted according to your comfort. It even includes a USB charging port within the vest battery that you can use for your cell phone. The company also sells vests for women, including the quilted heated vest shown below.

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Best for women: Venustas Women’s Heated Vest

Venustas

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A combination of nylon and duck down ensures you won’t face any chills this season.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 5
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Material: Nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (86°F) Medium (113°F), High (131°F)

Pros

  • Lots of heat zones
  • Water-resistant
  • Down adds extra warmth

Cons

  • Heat can be hard to feel through heavier sweaters on lower temperatures

This women’s heated vest is tailored to fit snugly and uses a combination of nylon and duck down with multiple heating elements to provide long-lasting warmth. There are five heating zones, so more areas of your body will remain warm, and you can pick from three heat settings. This vest includes a USB port to charge your smartphone, and you’ll get about 8 hours of battery at the low heat setting and 3 hours at the high heat setting. We’re also fans of the GOBI Heated Vest for Women, pictured below. It’s lightweight, and the wind- and water-resistant material really keeps you warm in the elements.

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Best for winter sports: ORORO Men’s Fleece Heated Vest

ORORO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This heated fleece vest adds an extra layer of coziness while you’re in the great outdoors.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 3
  • Battery life: 10 hours
  • Material: 50% polyester, 50% cotton
  • Temperature settings: Low, Medium, High

Pros

  • Machine washable
  • Phone charging capabilities
  • Heats up fast

Cons

  • Battery is on the heavy side

This ORORO heated vest is a great choice for winter sports enthusiasts as the fleece provides warmth and breathability. Carbon fiber heating elements heat up three body areas quickly, and temperature levels can be adjusted for your comfort, especially when you start sweating. Added perks: It’s machine washable and includes a USB charger for your phone.

Best for outdoor work: ARRIS Heated Vest

Arris

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The heating material is made from carbon fiber, giving you peace of mind when it comes to safety.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 7
  • Battery life: 3-12 hours, depending on temperature
  • Material: Polyester
  • Temperature settings: 5 heat settings: pre-heat (104°F), low (122°F), medium (140°F), high (158°F), very high (176°F)

Pros

  • Size-adjustable
  • Lots of temperature settings with a wide range of temperatures
  • Controllable heat zones

Cons

  • Charger sold separately

This Arris heated vest is a great choice for outdoor work as it offers a wide range of adjustable heat zones and temperature settings. Each of the seven heating zones can be controlled and turned off or on as you move from indoors to outdoors and back again. Additional safety features include powering down if the vest gets too hot. It’s also size adjustable, so you can wear it by itself or over a hoodie by adding or subtracting included panels.

Best for motorcyclists: Gerbing Men’s 7V Battery Heated Vest Liner

Gerbing

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This thin vest liner is slim enough to wear under a jacket for hours of comfort while riding around town.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 3
  • Battery life: 2-8 hours, depending on heat setting
  • Material: Nylon exterior, polyester interior
  • Temperature settings: Max heat: 135°F

Pros

  • Thin and lightweight
  • Can be worn by itself or with a jacket
  • Drop tail for better coverage when riding

Cons

  • Battery short compared to other vests on this list

Don’t let the cold stop you from hitting the road on your motorcycle. This thin, lightweight vest from Gerbing—the OGs of heated motorcycle wear—keeps you warm without the bulk. Three heat zones keep you toasty on the road, and a 2-8 hour battery life means you’ll stay toasty. The company also sells heated jackets in case you’re looking for even more warmth. Passersby in cars will surely go, “That’s a nice motorcycle,” when seeing you wear this heated vest while riding your bike.

Best hooded: NORWELL Men’s Heated Vest

Norwell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The detachable hood lets you decide how you’d like to keep your ears warm—add a winter hat for extra toastiness.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 4
  • Battery life: 6-8 hours depending on heat setting
  • Material: Polyester, nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (77°F), Medium (95°F), High (122°F)

Pros

  • Machine washable
  • Mylar thermal lining
  • Water-resistant

Cons

  • Runs small

Finding a vest with a hood is hard; finding a heated vest with a hood is even harder. This one from Norwell is an easy inclusion on this list thanks to its long battery life, water resistance, and machine-washing capabilities. Plus, the Mylar thermal lining keep you extra, extra warm—perfect when you run out of the house with a half-charged battery and need to make every bit of heat last.

Best budget: Anbero Heated Vest

Anbero

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: At around $50, this unisex pick rivals some of its more expensive counterparts when it comes to the number of heat zones and temperature ranges.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 5
  • Battery life: 6-12 hours, depending on heat setting
  • Material: Cotton, polyester
  • Temperature settings: Low (104-113°F), Medium (113-131°F), High (131°F-149°F)

Pros

  • Inner fleece lining
  • Lots of heating zones
  • Heats up fast

Cons

  • Heating elements on the small side

A great choice for keeping warm outdoors, this Anbero vest offers five heating zones and three temperature settings all with a simple zip-up unisex design. It is machine washable and lightweight, making it a good option for layering.

What to consider when buying the best heated vests

When it comes to finding the best heated vest for cold weather and your next outdoor adventure, you’ll want to learn about the different styles, brands, and features available. We’ve selected some of the best options on the market to keep you warm, dry, and enjoying being outside.

Focus on heated vests that recharge fast

When it comes to getting dressed and out the door, we all want to do it fast and without fuss. This can inevitably take longer in the cold winter months, and you’ll pay the price in comfort when you shortcut this process. With the addition of heated clothing, like heated insoles, you’ll need fewer layers, which saves time—but you want to be sure your vest’s batteries are charged and ready to go. The best heated vests will have batteries that are easy and quick to recharge, heat the vest quickly upon wearing, and offer many hours of warmth and comfort between charges.

In order to get more hours of warmth out of your vest, compare vests based on the type of battery and method of charging, as well as the length of time it takes to heat up. Most models will offer adjustable temperature or zone settings, which will save on battery life and allow you to move the heat around the vest at just the right temperature for your comfort. A nice feature to look for is carbon fibers used as heat elements, as they allow for vests to heat up quickly.

Stay warm while engaging in winter sports

As winter sports enthusiasts know—it’s never too cold out, you just don’t have the right cold-weather gear. The best cold-weather clothing can mean hours more of outdoor time, which is essential for winter sports enthusiasts. They can be a critical extra layer that keep your core warm, and your muscles relaxed throughout your sweat session. Getting extra warmth without extra bulk—like throwing on a pair of heated socks under your snow boots—will provide a full range of motion and keep you in the game.

The best options for winter sports will be lightweight and breathable with adjustable heat settings. The lighter the materials used, the less fatigue you will feel. After some time spent doing vigorous outdoor activities, you may feel both cold and sweaty, so breathable, moisture-wicking fabrics will be an important feature to keep you warm and dry. The best vests for winter sports will have multiple heating zones and customizable heat so you can warm up or cool down as you see fit. Finally, a securely fastened battery pack is essential when engaging in sports.

Look for extra warmth while you work

If your work takes you outside or in non-heated areas, you need to protect yourself from the elements with the best cold-weather gear. These vests will protect your core to keep you safe and warm and can easily coordinate with other work clothes or uniforms or even other heated clothing like gloves or a jacket.

The best vest for outdoor work will be versatile and lightweight. It should be simple and classic in design, with hidden heat elements to make the garment look more work-appropriate. Because the weather can change dramatically when working outdoors, you want to select a vest that features multiple heat zones, adjustable temperature, and the ability to turn certain areas off and on. Adjustable sizing is also a nice bonus, so it can fit under other layers or loosen to wear on top, depending on the day and the nature of your work.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated vests cost?

Depending on the number of heat zones and other materials used, the best heated vests can cost between $50-$250.

Q: Are heated vests safe?

They are definitely safe to wear. Although there are thin electrical wires running through the vest, the voltage is so low that there is no risk of electrocution. The vest is heated with a removable, rechargeable lithium-ion battery that is discreetly sewn into the garment in an accessible location, and they all include a waterproof membrane to keep the wires and battery safe from water. Still, care should be taken to ensure the battery stays in good working order, discarding and replacing if it becomes damaged.

Q: How do I use a heated vest?

Using a heated vest is simple and harnesses battery power to keep you warm. They have thin, lightweight wires placed within the garment and use a low charge to warm up. Some have Bluetooth connectivity so you can power up (or down) the heat by using an app on your smartphone.

Q: Can I wash heated vests?

They can be washed safely when following the manufacturer’s instructions. Typically, the first step will be to disconnect and remove the rechargeable battery, and zip away or seal any connector cables. Be sure to wash your vest with cool water with the machine’s gentle setting. Line drying the garment is usually recommended, with care not to squeeze or wring out the vest so as to keep the delicate wiring inside safe for your next use.

Q: Do I need to wear a jacket with my heated vest?

You don’t! You can keep your arms free when it’s not as chilly and throw on a sweatshirt or jacket once the weather starts to drop. How you’d like to wear your heated vest is up to you.

Final thoughts on the best heated vests

While long underwear has often been the first line of defense for an outdoor adventure, the best heated vests will take things up a notch and provide hours of warmth for your core, fit comfortably, and look stylish without all the bulky layers. With lightweight wiring and multiple heating zones, you can keep warm no matter how long you find yourself in winter weather.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated vests of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best packable rain jackets in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-packable-rain-jackets/ Sat, 30 Jul 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458659
The best packable rain jackets
Stan Horaczek

Because weather is never 100 percent predictable, no matter what the forecast says.

The post The best packable rain jackets in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best packable rain jackets
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Showers Pass Refuge Jacket is the best overall packable rain jacket. Showers Pass Refuge Jacket
SEE IT

The Showers Pass Refuge keeps you dry under the worst conditions.

Best for hiking Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket is the best packable rain jacket for hiking. Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket
SEE IT

The Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket is elastic enough to give you full freedom of movement.

Best for Travel Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket is the best packable rain jacket for travel. Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket
SEE IT

You never know where you might end up, but the Patagonia Torrentshell 3L is ready for anything.

As an all-weather bike commuter, mountain lover, and frequent traveler who rarely allows the elements to deter me from my plans, I always carry around a packable rain jacket. Whether I’m on the road for work or off on an outdoor adventure, it never hurts to have rain gear that is effective, breathable, and light enough to carry around all day. And packable rain jackets compress down to about the size of a large wallet, folding into a pocket or the corner of your bag. Though I see it ideally as a very dynamic piece of clothing, certain rain jackets are better suited specifically for various activities. Depending on your budget, you can find expensive, high-tech jackets loaded with features and basic, reasonably priced ones. A full list of great jackets would be very long, so I’ve narrowed the selection down to what I feel are the best packable rain jackets for every situation.

How we chose the best packable rain jackets

As a person who rides a bicycle everywhere, I’ve been on a perpetual quest for the best packable rain jacket for years now. While I think I’ve pretty much found it, there’s always new technology and updated features to try out. You only know if they do what they say they’ll do after you’ve weathered a storm or three wearing them. As it happens, I work in film and television production, so I spend a lot of time working out in the elements, putting my jackets to the test.

The jackets that made our list provided sustained rain and wind protection while being lightweight enough to pack easily into a pocket or bag. I also considered fit and comfort, especially in the chin guard and hood. Lastly, I looked for special features like a fold-down tail and zippered pockets, which often make a particular jacket stand out from similar designs from other companies.

The best packable rain jackets: Reviews & Recommendations

I have a few favorite packable rain jackets that I use regularly depending on what I’m doing and where I’m going. I found them through working and traveling, using them in all kinds of situations. Many of those jackets made their way onto this list, along with some specialty shells for traveling, cycling, hiking, and other adventures.

Best overall: Showers Pass Refuge Jacket – (Men’s Version)

Showers Pass

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Showers Pass Refuge jacket possesses all the features we want for almost any adventure we dream up.

Specs 

  • Weight: 19 oz (size M)
  • Material: 3-layer Elite waterproof hardshell
  • Price: $295

Pros

  • Fully seam taped
  • Removable hood that fits over a helmet
  • Multiple zippered pockets
  • All outward-facing zippers are waterproof

Cons 

  • Expensive
  • No stuff sack

The Showers Pass Refuge jacket is my go-to for stormy bike commutes, long-distance hiking trips, and wandering around cities in the rain. I seem to find myself caught in unpredictable adverse weather on a pretty regular basis, so I look for rain jackets with special features that make walking around in a storm almost feel enjoyable. 

Most rain jackets, no matter what they’re made from, will eventually allow water through if submitted to a relentless heavy rain that lasts for more than a few hours. The Refuge jacket is effective for all-day light or moderate rain or about three hours of a heavy downpour. When I say downpour, I mean the kind of rain that makes it difficult to see what is right in front of you; the kind that if possible you might want to take shelter from until it’s passed. 

Its enormous zippered side pockets easily accommodate my Samsung Galaxy S21, the reinforced shoulder area is suited for backpack straps, and the hood fits comfortably over a helmet—and stays there while cycling thanks to a drawstring cincher. The Refuge also has a dropdown tail, which comes in handy while biking, or scoping a place to sit during or after a storm. Add in reflective details, core vents, and secure wrist cinchers to keep the wind out and it’s pretty much the best packable rain jacket. 

The purchase of a Showers Pass Refuge jacket even supports their “enjoy all the elements” campaign, an initiative dedicated to providing programs and education to get more people outside. 

Best for hiking: Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket – (Women’s Version)

Rab

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Rab’s Kinetic Alpine 2.0 is the only fully waterproof jacket we’ve found that, because of the stretchiness in the fabric, doesn’t hinder your movement at all, no matter what you may be climbing.

Specs

  • Weight: 13.8 oz (Size L)
  • Material: Recycled polyester with 3-layer membrane
  • Price: $280

Pros

  • 2-way front zipper
  • Zippered inner chest pocket
  • Stretch woven Proflex panels in hips, arms, shoulders, & hood

Cons 

  • Expensive

True to its name, the Rab Kinetic Alpine jacket has been designed thoughtfully and specifically for climbing mountains. Described by the company as a “breakthrough in technology,” the softshell jacket is made from a proprietary material called “Proflex”—a stretchy and breathable waterproof fabric that’s perfect for propelling yourself up the side of a rocky and/or snowy cliff. It’s also engineered to handle scrapes against rough surfaces, like stone or bark, without ripping. I’m rather clumsy and routinely utilize sturdy trees and rock faces to steady myself on both inclines and descents. Despite this, my Kinetic Alpine 2 has yet to suffer any significant damage. 

At the same time, it’s also one of the few rain jackets I’ve worn where I’ve actually forgotten that I had it on. There’s no restriction to movement, even when stretching to reach the next tree root on the way up a muddy embankment. Its hood is also among the most comfortable I’ve ever worn, with a wide chin guard.

All the pockets are equipped with waterproof zippers; the inner chest one being the perfect place to stash small valuables like a credit card, ID, and lip balm (Chapstick definitely classifies as valuable in dry mountain environments). Last but not least, it comes with a stuff sack for easy stowing in your pack.  

Best for travel: Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket – (Men’s version)

Patagonia

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Patagonia Torrentshell 3L packs neatly into its own pocket and can withstand a wide variety of adverse weather situations.

Specs 

  • Weight: 12.5 oz. (Size M)
  • Material: Ripstop nylon with 3-layer H2No Performance shell
  • Price: $149

Pros

  • Pit zip ventilation
  • Self-stuffs into hand warmer pocket
  • Fair Trade Certified
  • Contains recyclable materials

Cons 

  • The recycled nylon fabric gets noisy
  • Small hood may not fit over helmets

For travel, especially across several destinations, Patagonia’s Torrentshell 3L rain jacket has everything you need. It packs into one of the two hand warmer pockets, has pit zips and a comfortable roomy chin guard, and stands up well to rain, wind, and snow. It comes in a variety of stylish colors if you want to deviate from basic black, grey, or white. 

The Torrentshell 3L is also both Fair Trade Certified and made from recycled materials that meet the bluesign criteria. Bluesign technologies, based in Switzerland, focuses on sustainability in the entire textile manufacturing chain to guide brands in creating products with as little negative environmental impact as possible.

One thing to keep in mind: The recyclable nylon fabric of this jacket can be weirdly noisy. It isn’t excessive, but you may not be able to quietly slip on your rain gear to slip out for an early morning hike. 

Best for cycling: Gore Wear C5 Gore-Tex Shakedry 1985

GORE WEAR

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Gore Wear C5 Gore-Tex Shakedry 1985 jacket is the lightest and most packable jacket we found, making it perfect for weight and watt-obsessed cyclists (while also leaving room for more snacks in your back pockets).

Specs 

  • Weight: 3.4 oz. (Size L)
  • Material: Gore-Tex
  • Price: $250 – $300

Pros

Cons 

  • Expensive
  • Really just for cycling

While I don’t consider myself a full-on “roadie” when it comes to cycling, I do my fair share of cycling club road rides around New York City. There are tons of cyclists in the city, many of whom embark on lengthy rides around the New York Tri-State area on weekends. When the rain comes out, so does the Gore-Tex Shakedry.

At a mere 3.4 ounces, its ultralight weight and form-fitting, which is very important for competitive cyclists looking who don’t want to drag from their clothes. The Gore-Tex “Shakedry” material is so thin that it’s almost transparent but is also somehow waterproof and windproof. The Shakedry fabric repels water beads that land on the fabric surface without letting any moisture through. When the rain stops, you can simply shake it dry with a sharp flap and put it back in your cycling jersey pocket.

This jacket is not recommended for use with a backpack, as the straps could damage the fabric. Still, it’s a solid pick even if you prefer your cycle with a motor. And if you’re a commuter looking for a more traditional silhouette that can stand up to light rain and road spray, the PEARL iZUMi Prospect Barrier Jacket is a great choice.

Best lightweight: Outdoor Research Helium Rain Jacket – (Women’s version)

Outdoor Research

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: At only 6.3 ounces, the Outdoor Research jacket is half the weight of most all comparable competitors but still delivers top-of-the-line wind and rain protection.

Specs 

  • Weight: 6.3 oz. (Size L)
  • Material: Nylon with 2.5 layer Pertex Shield
  • Price: $159

Pros

  • Very light
  • Breathable
  • Current version has updated fabric that is 7x more tear resistant than previously

Cons 

  • Only one pocket (chest)
  • May not withstand heavy rain

If you very specifically want the lightest everyday rain jacket possible, consider the Helium by Outdoor Research. It’s much lighter than most of the jackets on our list but still performs well against light rain and wind. Because of the low weight, it’s a popular jacket amongst thru-hikers and long-distance backpackers who count ounces as fastidiously as enthusiast road cyclists.

Between its weight and the fact that it packs into its chest pocket, the Helium is a great everyday carry jacket. On the other hand, that chest pocket is its only pocket, so it offers limited storage.

Best budget: Marmot Precip Eco Jacket – (Men’s version)

MARMOT

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: For around $100, the Marmot Precip Eco is one of the most popular (and effective) jackets we see out on the trail.

Specs 

  • Weight: 9 oz. (Size M)
  • Material: Recycled nylon with 2.5-layer Nanopro
  • Price: $100

Pros

  • Pit zips
  • Stuffs into own pocket
  • Good quality for price

Cons 

  • Runs small

Marmot consistently manufactures quality outdoor gear and sells it for reasonable prices. The Precip Eco jacket may lack some of the advanced bells and whistles found in our top picks, but it performs well and costs less than our top picks. A lightweight jacket that packs easily into one of the pockets, the Precip Eco feels roomy in the shoulders to give you a full range of movement while hoisting your pack on and off. The hood also packs into the collar, which is useful for climbers and cyclists.

While it runs a bit small and has a hood with a narrow chin guard, you’re getting a garment that feels very close to the best of the best, without spending quite so much money.

Things to consider when buying the best packable rain jackets

There’s a surprising amount of technical jargon you should know before picking out a rain jacket. While shopping for one, you’ve likely seen terms like “hardshell,” “softshell,” “taped seams,” and “packable” thrown around a bit, along with claims about how waterproof and breathable a particular garment may be. This isn’t just marketing-driven jargon added to impress. They do really impact how well your jacket can protect you.

If you’re unsure exactly what some of these mean, you’re not alone. Here’s a breakdown of what to look for when looking for the best packable rain jackets:

Hardshell or softshell

As with many things in the apparel and gear industries, there is no universal, absolute definition of “softshell” and “hardshell” jackets, but there are common guidelines that most companies follow. Traditionally, softshell jackets are more breathable, while hardshells offer more prolonged water protection, pack down smaller, and weigh less. 

Hardshell jackets have a stiffer, more rigid feel than softshells, and feature a thicker, 3-layer fabric with a waterproof, breathable membrane sandwiched between its inner lining and a “hard” exterior layer. 

Softshell jackets are made from softer, more pliable material. They’re usually stretchier and more breathable than a standard hardshell, which makes them better for moving around.

At this point, many companies have developed new fabrics that blur these lines, providing the best properties of both in a single jacket. For example, Rab’s Proflex fabric offers the weather protection of a hardshell, with the comfort, stretchiness, and feel of a softshell. 

Nearly all of the jackets on this list are hardshell jackets, as they tend to weigh less and pack into smaller sizes.

Waterproof/breathable fabrics

Most modern rain jackets are constructed with fabric made from two or three different layers of material that are fused together, maximizing protection while keeping them light and breathable. For instance, the 3-layer Elite fabric used by Showers Pass consists of an outward-facing fabric with a durable water-repellent (DWR) finish, backed with a waterproof-breathable membrane laminate. This membrane is covered with microscopic pores that prevent rain-sized water droplets to pass, while allowing moisture from your body through. On the backside of that membrane, a laminate tricot liner to make sure the jacket feels dry against your skin while adding protection for the membrane layer.

Most 2-layer (or 2.5-layer) materials use a charcoal- or cellulose-raised print directly on the membrane instead of a liner layer which allows for a more compact and lightweight jacket (by eliminating one layer.) 

Taped seams, including zippers

Stitching garments together creates hundreds of tiny needle holes in the seams—there’s no way around this when sewing. A well-made rain jacket requires the seams to be taped in order to keep water from getting through these minuscule holes. After sewing, manufacturers fuse thermoplastic tape with heat and pressure over the seams to prevent this. These are called taped seams. Without them, water can easily penetrate the seams.

Fit, including hood

When trying on a rain jacket, look for a Goldilocks fit—not too loose, but not too tight. If it’s snug, the jacket won’t make for an effective top layer over other outerwear like a hoodie or another, not-so-waterproof jacket. If it’s too loose and bulky, the jacket could hinder your mobility. 

For most of us, a just-right fit is slightly larger than that of an average jacket. It won’t ride up over your waist when you raise your arms. You also want the sleeves to be long enough to come well over your wrists so they don’t pull up too high when you reach to grab something.

We prefer a rain jacket with a hood because in cold, inclement weather, keeping your head warm and dry goes a long way in keeping you from feeling like a drowned rat. And a hood keeps the water from getting under your neck and trickling down your back. A well-designed hood has a small visor built in to keep rain out of your eyes and a way to cinch it so that it fits closely to your head. You don’t want to just see the side of the hood every time you turn your head (plus it can be dangerous). If you regularly partake in an activity like climbing or cycling where a helmet is a good idea, make sure the hood will fit over it.

Packability

By definition, the best packable rain jackets should fold or roll up into a very small size that makes it easy to carry around. Many of the jackets on this list stuff into their own chest or hand pocket, though that isn’t a requirement. As long as you can shove it into the last, small, available space in your backpack, that counts as packable. If your jacket doesn’t crumple into its own pocket, you can buy a lightweight “stuff sack” just for that purpose.

FAQs

Q: What does a packable rain jacket mean?

Packable rain jackets are defined by the ability to fold or roll down into a very small size and stuffed into either their own pockets or small carrying sacks. They tend to be lightweight jackets made to protect you from wind and rain when you plan to go out in less-than-ideal weather.

Q: Can you repair rain jackets?

You can repair a rain jacket with tenacious tape, a one-sided vinyl tape made for patching waterproof fabrics, including jackets and tents. Available by the roll, or in pre-cut patches, you simply cut a piece to cover the tear plus an inch on all sides. For added strength, apply a patch on both the inside and outside of the jacket over the tear. Press down from the center out and wait 24 hours if possible before wearing. Many camping and outdoor-focused jacket manufacturers, including Patagonia and Showers Pass, also offer repair services for their products.

Q: How much does a packable rain jacket cost?

A good packable rain jacket can cost anywhere from $60 to $800, all depending on how many features you want. Keep in mind that the most expensive gear on the spectrum is made for scaling mountains and other extremely harsh conditions. A well-made, technically minded jacket should suffice for most people, and that usually costs between $100-$300

Q: Where do I recycle my rain jacket?

The best and easiest way to recycle your rain jacket is to give it away or donate it to an organization that resells or donates used clothing. Many waterproof jackets have coatings or have undergone treatments that make them impossible to recycle through conventional means. That said, some manufacturers, such as Patagonia, accept all their products for recycling.

Final thoughts on the best packable rain jackets

All of these jackets are solid, quality garments that will keep you dry when the skies open up. Finding the best packable rain jackets that are waterproof, comfortable, lightweight, and breathable makes every kind of outdoor activity more fun and comfortable in bad weather, from cycling and climbing to a leisurely walk around the neighborhood.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best packable rain jackets in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
EcoFlow Delta 2 solar generator review: A mobile power unicorn https://www.popsci.com/gear/ecoflow-delta-2-solar-generator-review/ Wed, 16 Aug 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=563346
EcoFlow Delta 2 generator sitting on the ground near a truck tire
Nick Hilden

EcoFlow's 27-pound battery-powered generator has enough juice to keep your whole life going when the grid isn't an option.

The post EcoFlow Delta 2 solar generator review: A mobile power unicorn appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
EcoFlow Delta 2 generator sitting on the ground near a truck tire
Nick Hilden

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The EcoFlow Delta 2 takes everything great about the brand—build quality, reliability, smart features—and puts it in a highly portable, moderate-capacity package. Clocking in at 1,000 watt-hours and just 27 pounds, the Delta 2 is the Goldilocks power station for most users: not too big and not too small. In other words, it provides a decent amount of easy-to-carry juice at a comparatively reasonable $999. There are more expensive, higher-capacity stations out there that are better suited for serious van-life conversions or prolonged home power backup. Still, if you’re looking for a solid amount of power for purposes like camping, short power outages, off-grid job sites, or simply having around for when the outlet is too far, the Delta 2 is an outstanding solar generator option.

EcoFlow

SEE IT

Overview

  • Wattage: 1024Wh
  • Weight: 27 pounds
  • Charge time (from an outlet): 80 minutes
  • Solar capable: Yes, with optional solar panels
  • Ports: 2 USB-A Fast Charge (18W), 2 USB-A, 2 USB-C (100W), 6 AC output (1200W), and 2 DC5521 ports
  • Price: $999

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Charges quickly
  • LiFePo battery lasts many cycles
  • Plenty of outlets

Cons

  • Some users may want to upgrade for more capacity without the need for expansion

Verdict: This highly portable, reliable, fast-charging generator will likely serve most users well for years to come.

The EcoFlow Delta 2 build

The latest in EcoFlow’s Delta series, the Delta 2 shaves a bit of capacity off the previous edition to offer a version that is a little sleeker, a little more portable, and that feels like an all-around better thought-out package.

Its 1000Wh capacity will keep a full-sized fridge going for 7-14 hours or a car fridge on for up to a day and a half. It will charge a phone 89 times or a laptop 16 times. That’s decent power for a part-time van traveler or brief blackouts at home. While it’s not quite enough for full-time van-lifers or extended home power issues, it can be doubled or tripled in capacity via EcoFlow’s expansion batteries, allowing you to more or less tailor its capacity to your needs.

Where it really excels is in terms of design. Its dual, frame-integrated handles make it super light and easy to lug around. A little bigger than a shoebox standing on its side, it’s no hassle to store or pack in a vehicle. Like everything EcoFlow produces, the build quality is outstanding—it doesn’t feel like it will rattle apart like lesser brands. It has a long-lasting battery and feels like a tool you’ll have around for years and years to come.

It can charge fully in just 80 minutes via wall outlet or in 3-6 hours with 400 watts of solar input. For ports, it offers 6 AC outlets, 2 USB-A ports, 2 USB-C, fast-charge ports in both USB-A and -C, and a 12V car plug.

The EcoFlow Delta 2 setup

EcoFlow Delta 2 generator ports
Here’s a look at the ports available for power on this side of the device. Nick Hilden

One of the biggest factors in determining the quality of a portable power station involves how quickly and easily it charges. Plugged into the wall, its 80-minute charge time is pretty fast. If you’re on the go, you could stop for a long cup of coffee and drive away with a more or less full battery.

Many buyers seek a portable solar generator for camping, van life, or RV use. That means they want it to be able to charge via solar with relative speed and ease. The Delta 2 delivers on both. Using one of the company’s 400W panels or a set of 220W, you’ll theoretically have a full charge in as fast as three hours. Maybe if the sun is perfect, but realistically it takes more like five or six as sun conditions tend to be more finicky. For most purposes, however, that will do fine. If you’re camping, just leave the solar array out during the day, and it should remain more or less topped off with no problems.

The EcoFlow Delta 2’s performance

EcoFlow Delta 2 generator screen and USB ports
The display is handy for keeping track of essential variables. Nick Hilden

The capacity and charging times are decent, but I think where the Delta 2 really stands out is in regard to portability and durability. Light and compact, it’s a breeze to move around. Our photos were taken next to a car wheel so you can get an idea of the scale, and as you can see, it’s pretty small for a station of its capacity.

And it’s built tough enough to feel like you could hammer nails with it. Don’t do that—you shouldn’t do that—but it feels like you could. Some other brands feel like pieces will fall off every time you move them. The Delta 2, on the other hand, is solid.

The EcoFlow ecosystem

Another of the main benefits of the Delta 2 is that it’s designed to work with the wider EcoFlow ecosystem of solar, portable, emergency power gear.

Beyond the solar panels, it can be paired with backup batteries or the company’s Smart Generator—a dual-fuel generator that will keep it fully charged in the event of longer power outages. EcoFlow has even released a new car fridge with freezer capabilities, and new devices will likely continue to roll out over time.

So if you’re looking for a power station that can be expanded upon for different purposes, the Delta 2 is a good place to start.

EcoFlow offers a Delta 2 Max version of their popular generator. And while those models offer some upgrades like double the capacity and more powerful AC and DC charging, you’ll be paying a lot more.

So, who should buy the EcoFlow Delta 2?

The Delta 2 doesn’t feel tailored for any particular use but more like a solid jack-of-all-trades power box that can do a little of everything. If you plan on going on camping, van-life, or RV trips lasting 2-5 days and just want to keep a few devices charged and maybe a fridge cool, it will do the job fine. Or, if you live in an area where you experience occasional, short-term power outages, it will keep the essentials going for a few hours. Or, if you’re a photographer looking to charge your camera, drones, and other equipment while off-grid or on the go, this is an outstanding option. In other words, if you need moderate power capacity but high portability, the EcoFlow Delta 2 is a great choice all around.

The post EcoFlow Delta 2 solar generator review: A mobile power unicorn appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best power bank for camping in 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-power-bank-for-camping/ Wed, 16 Aug 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=562407
The best power banks for camping
Stan Horaczek

A fully charged (or solar-compatible) power bank for camping will keep all of your devices juiced without adding extra weight to your kit.

The post The best power bank for camping in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best power banks for camping
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core
SEE IT

This is the ideal mix of capacity, features, bulk, and price for most campers.

Best budget Goal Zero Flip 24 power bank Goal Zero Flip 24 Power Bank
SEE IT

This tiny charger weighs less than a third of a pound and fits in your pack.

Best with light Outdoor Tech Fuel + Charger power bank Outdoor Tech FUEL+ Charger
SEE IT

The built-in illumination can save your in a pinch when your phone is dead.

A power bank for camping can change the way you adventure outside. These days camping tends to involve all manner of devices—lanterns, flashlights, cooking appliances, drones, and, of course, your phone—which means you need to pack along a way to charge them. That’s where power banks come in. Power banks are available in various forms, with different models offering particular features that make them ideal for different purposes. In any case, the best power banks for camping always offer outdoor-ready durability and reliable operation, and we have recommendations for a few outstanding options you can count on when you head off the grid.

How we chose the best power banks

To say that I’ve spent a lot of time under the stars or without cellphone bars would be a major understatement. Over the past 40 years, I’ve spent weeks and even months at a time camped in the great outdoors, and during the latter decades, that meant bringing along plenty of power to keep my devices charged. This has become increasingly important as my location-independent work requires more juice for my laptop, camera, portable WiFi hotspot, drone, and more.

Accordingly, I’ve used power banks of all varieties, from small pocket-sized models to large solar generators. These have spanned everything from the top established brands to new and lesser-known competitors, and I’ve come to recognize those that are all hype and those that deliver true quality. Equipped with this experience, I’ve written about power banks and a range of other outdoor tech for Popular Science, Popular Mechanics, the Daily Beast, Thrillist, and more. In cases where my opinion was split between two products, I typically looked to reviews from real-world customers and a variety of outdoor experts to determine which power banks are truly the best for camping.

The best power banks for camping: Reviews & Recommendations

The recommendations below span a range of forms and sizes, from small power banks that cost a few dozen dollars to hefty power stations that cost a few thousand. Some are intended for short camping jaunts with limited electricity needs, while others are designed for longer trips and larger power demands. Whatever you need to recharge an iPhone or an ebike, you’ll find something suitable on this list.

Best overall: Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Outdoor durability, excellent portability, and solid storage capacity make this an outstanding power bank for camping trips of any duration.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 983Wh
  • Dimensions: 9.86 x 15.25 x 10.23 inches
  • Weight: 31.68 lbs
  • Price: $1,198.95

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Incredible durability
  • Plenty of plugs

Cons

  • Charging rate could be faster

The Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core is an ideal power station for camping for several reasons. Its 983-watt-hour capacity will more than meet the needs of most campers, easily powering small devices and lighting for a long weekend without recharging. Plug in a solar panel or two, and it will keep those same devices going indefinitely. It offers some of the best craftsmanship on the market and is durable enough for hauling around in a vehicle and to and from your campsite. And its squared shape with inlaid handles makes for excellent portability.

In terms of use, the Yeti 1000 Core offers plenty of plugs. Dual AC, USB-A, USB-C, and a single 12V car plug translate into plenty of port options, and its 1,200-watt output capacity is capable of powering just about anything you could need while camping.

Its one drawback is that its recharging rate has fallen behind some competitors, but for use with typical devices—phones, drones, lights, etc.—it will provide more than enough power for a long weekend.

Best for backpacking: BioLite Charge 80 PD Power Bank

BioLite

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Super compact, durable, and capable of charging multiple devices simultaneously, it’s the perfect power bank to toss in your pack.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 74 Wh
  • Dimensions: 6.7 x 3.2 x 1 inches
  • Weight: 1.4 lbs
  • Price: $79.94

Pros

  • Supremely portable
  • Great power capacity
  • Multiple device charging

Cons

  • Some buyers report lifespan issues

The BioLite Charge 80 PD power bank will do pretty much everything you want of a charger while backpacking. It offers an abundance of capacity for such a small package—enough to charge a phone five times, a headlamp or flashlight 16 times, or a tablet twice—and its 18-watt output is strong enough to charge a 13-inch laptop once. It can charge two devices simultaneously via its dual USB-A and single USB-C ports.

I really haven’t found any flaws in the Charge 80. There are a handful of reviews out there from people who complained of a short lifespan, but most users—myself included—report that it’s hardy and reliable. It’s a great backpacking power bank by every metric.

Best for laptops: Goal Zero Sherpa 100AC

Goal Zero

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its excellent balance of capacity, charging capability, and portability, this is the perfect power bank for content creators on the go.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 95 Wh
  • Dimensions: 7.69 x 5.49 x 1.02 inches
  • Weight: 3.19 lbs
  • Price: $299.95

Pros

  • Integrated AC inverter
  • Solar capable
  • Multiple device charging

Cons

  • Wireless charging struggles

A laptop power bank needs to provide two things above all else: AC power inversion (so that it Is actually capable of charging a laptop in the first place) and solid capacity. The Goal Zero Sherpa 100AC delivers on both, plus a bunch of other camping-friendly features. Not only will it charge the average laptop twice, a phone eight times, or a camera over a dozen times, but it can be plugged into a solar panel and recharged if you expect to stay off the grid for more than a couple of days. Multiple ports allow it to charge two to three devices simultaneously, and its build quality is absolutely outstanding.

While the wireless charging doesn’t always do what it’s supposed to—many users report that the 15-watt wireless charging is realistically more like three—every other function works perfectly. For a content creator on the go looking to power a laptop, camera, phone, drone, and other gear, the Sherpa is the ultimate portable pick.

Best for solar (large): Jackery Solar Generator 2000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: No other portable solar power station on the market offers such an outstanding combination of portability, capacity, input/output capability, and solar rechargeability.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,160Wh
  • Dimensions: 15.1 x 10.5 x 12.1 inches
  • Weight: 43 lbs
  • Price: $2,498

Pros

  • Fast charging and outstanding capacity
  • Plenty of ports
  • Can connect to six 200W solar panels

Cons

  • Heavy for its size

Simply put, I love the Jackery 2000 Pro. It does pretty much everything you’d want of a medium-to-large-sized portable power station. While its 2,160-watt-hour capacity is huge—big enough to power a van conversion for 2-3 days—its boxed shape and relatively compact size make it easy to fit into your vehicle. It has plenty of ports and more output capacity than any typical camper could reasonably need. And, having knocked mine around a good bit while on the road, I can definitely attest to its durability.

But if you’re specifically interested in solar capabilities, that’s where the 2000 Pro really shines. Capable of wielding six 200-watt solar panels, it can charge as fast as 2-2.5 hours in ideal sun conditions. That’s lightning fast. So if you plan on setting up camp and then leveraging the sun for a prolonged stay, you won’t find a better option.

Best for solar (small): QiSa Solar Power Bank

QiSa

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its fold-out solar panels and surprisingly large capacity relative to its size, this is a great power bank for off-grid device top-offs.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 194 Wh
  • Dimensions: 6.89 x 4.41 x 1.9 inches
  • Weight: 1.42 lbs
  • Price: $39.99

Pros

  • Foldout solar panels
  • Surprising capacity
  • Weather-proof

Cons

  • Solar charging is gradual

For more humble solar purposes—say to keep a couple of devices charged while out in the woods for the day, or if you want a reliable way to charge up a phone in an off-grid emergency—check out the QiSa Solar Power Bank. Its 194-watt-hour capacity is surprisingly large for such a compact bank and will charge a phone around a dozen times. Multiple ports and effective wireless capabilities allow you to charge up to three devices at once. And its solid weather-proofing holds up under most conditions.

Key here are the four foldout solar panels. While their recharge rate is admittedly gradual—you more or less have to keep them resting in the sun all day for a decent charge—they work fine for keeping your devices topped off over the course of camping.

Best high-capacity: Jackery Solar Generator 3000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Offering paramount power capacity in a decently portable design, this is a great choice when you want big batteries above all else.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 3,024 Wh
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.1 x 14.7 inches
  • Weight: 63.93 lbs
  • Price: $3,999

Pros

  • Top-tier capacity and output capability
  • Fast charging
  • Retractable handle and integrated wheels

Cons

  • Very expensive

When only the biggest box of juice in the biz will do, you want the Jackery 3000 Pro. Its massive 3,024-watt-hour capacity will charge a phone over 100 times, power an electric grill for nearly three hours, or will keep an electric cooler going for days uninterrupted, and its 3000-watt output capability will power pretty much anything. It delivers all the other pluses I mentioned for the previous Jackery, such as plentiful plugs, fast charging, and durable build quality. What’s more, all that is packed into a surprisingly portable unit. At over 60 pounds, it’s not exactly lightweight, but integrated wheels and a retractable handle make it easier to move around.

Greatness does come at a cost. Four thousand bucks isn’t cheap, and the addition of solar panels makes that price climb fast. If you have the budget for it, however, this is the ultimate high-capacity setup.

Best all-weather: Dark Energy Poseidon Pro

Dark Energy

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If there’s a more durable power bank out there, I haven’t seen it.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 50 Wh
  • Dimensions: 6 x 3.25 x .63 inches
  • Weight: .6 lbs
  • Price: $119.99

Pros

  • Insane durability
  • Holds charge for years
  • Included accessories are a nice touch

Cons

  • Low capacity

If you’re one of those outdoor adventure types who tend to push the durability of their gear to the limits, the Poseidon Pro from Dark Energy was designed for you. Supposedly, it can survive being dropped from 50 feet, submerged underwater for 45 minutes, exposed to extreme temperatures, crushed by 1500 pounds, fired upon by a shotgun, or blown up with 1.5 pounds of explosives. So “all-weather” is something of an understatement. It will also hold a charge for over eight years, so it’s ideal for charging up and then throwing in your kit for emergencies. And included accessories—like a 3-foot knitted USB-C cable, leather strap, and Dark Energy’s Carabiner Pro (a carabiner with an integrated knife blade, screwdriver, bottle opener, and window breaker)—bolsters its value.

The battery capacity isn’t exactly enormous—enough to charge a phone a couple of times, a camera once, or recharge a lantern several times—but for a bit of extra power in what may as well be an invincible shell, the Poseidon Pro can’t be beat.

Best with light: Outdoor Tech FUEL+ Charger

Outdoor Tech

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Compact, waterproof, and equipped with a wide, bright light, it pulls double duty as a lamp and battery.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 36.18 Wh
  • Dimensions: 3.8 x 3.8 x 1.1 inches
  • Weight: .59 lbs
  • Price: $49.95

Pros

  • Bright, multi-setting light
  • Super compact
  • Waterproof

Cons

  • Low capacity

With its super compact design, solid weatherproofing, and—most important for our purposes here—highly functional integrated light, the FUEL+ Charger from Outdoor Tech is a great little power bank. The LED lantern offers three modes: normal, high, and SOS flashing. It’s tiny and waterproof, making it perfect for hooking onto your backpack or tossing in your go-kit. It does everything you want for a supremely portable power bank that leans into illumination.

Admittedly the power capacity isn’t all that big—realistically, it will charge your phone once, maybe, alongside use as a lantern—but for a bit of extra power plus plenty of light, it’s an excellent choice.

Best for multi-device charging: Scosche PowerUp 32K

Scosche

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its compact size, decent capacity, and—most importantly—AC plug capability, this is the perfect power bank for portable, multi-device charging.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 116.8 Wh
  • Dimensions: 6.1 x 3.8 x 2 inches
  • Weight: 2.1 lbs
  • Price: $249.99

Pros

  • AC plug
  • Charges up to 4 devices simultaneously
  • Protective case included

Cons

  • No waterproofing

It can be difficult to find pocket-sized power banks capable of charging several devices at once and next to impossible to find one that offers an AC plug. The Scosche PowerUp 32K is almost entirely unique in that it delivers on the latter point. With its four-device capability, it can be switched to charge via USB-C or USB-A, 110-volt AC, or all three at once. It’s pretty small but still delivers decent capacity, and it is capable of charging a phone nine times, a laptop 1.5 times, or a drone 20 times, and it can power a light or USB fan for a full day.

While it doesn’t boast any waterproofing and isn’t exactly designed for rugged outdoor use, the addition of a protective case helps keep it safe, and it’s still a great option for keeping your smaller electrical gear going while camping.

Best budget: Goal Zero Flip 24 Power Bank

Goal Zero

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Affordable yet designed with well-considered camping features, this offers high quality at a low price.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 24.12 Wh
  • Dimensions: 3.7 x 1.63 x .83 inches
  • Weight: .2875 lbs
  • Price: $29.95

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Very compact
  • Solar compatible

Cons

  • Recharging mechanism could be better

Goal Zero has created something special with the Flip 24. While it’s exceedingly affordable—power banks don’t get much cheaper than this—it’s still a well-thought-out piece of puny camping equipment. Super compact, it’s smaller than a deck of cards yet can throw a couple of charges into a phone, lamp, or GPS tracker. It also has an integrated USB tip that can be plugged into a solar panel, making it a great tool for gathering a bit of emergency power while off-grid.

Some users say that charging via a wall outlet—which requires plugging the USB tip into a wall adapter—can be a little tricky, but beyond that, this is a smart yet cost-effective power bank for bringing a little power outdoors.

What to consider when shopping for the best power bank for camping

While many power banks offer relatively straightforward designs, here are still a few things you should consider when choosing the right one for your specific needs:

Capacity

You need a power bank that offers capacity relative to your power needs. If you’re just looking to charge a phone or lantern a few times over the course of a camping trip, you probably don’t need one of the larger power stations. A pocket-sized battery will suffice. But if you’re hoping to stay for longer and use a lot of power, a smaller product simply won’t do the job.

Most power banks rate their capacity in terms of watt-hours or milliamp hours, though when it comes to smaller devices, these numbers themselves don’t tell you a whole lot. A good rule of thumb is that a cell phone (probably the device you’ll charge most often) can be recharged approximately two to three times with 30 watt-hours. You can usually find information on capacity relative to other devices by checking the product description.

Portability

When camping, you want your gear to be as portable as possible. With power banks, that means ensuring you don’t go overkill in terms of power capacity. If you don’t need a big, multi-thousand-watt-hour power station, don’t waste the car space and effort lugging it around. If you do end up going with a larger unit, look for products with helpful features like handles and wheels.

Durability

Anytime you bring electrical equipment into the great outdoors, you should bear in mind the weather and the fact that camping gear tends to get banged around. That means looking for power banks that offer durability and ideally some form of waterproofing.

Durability is hard to assess without time and use, so the best way to judge this before heading into the woods is by reading reviews written by those who have already put a particular product through its paces. Waterproofing is rated via an “IP” code including two numbers (the first for dust-proofing, the second for liquid) ranging from 0-8. A rating of IP67, for example, is completely dust-proof and protected against submersion in water for up to 30 minutes.

FAQs

Q: Is a power bank the same as a portable charger?

Essentially yes. “Power bank” is a catchall term for portable chargers and larger power stations.

Q: Do power banks with wireless charging work with all devices?

No, for a device to charge wirelessly, it must have “Qi” compatibility. Check your device information to determine if it can use wireless charging.

Q: Can a power bank charge any type of device?

No. While smaller 5V power banks can charge most devices with low energy demands—like phones, tablets, cameras, speakers, or USB fans—larger devices like laptops usually require a voltage output of at least 16V-20V. This is less common in small banks, so check product descriptions.

Once you jump up to larger banks like power stations, they’ll typically charge any device you throw at them. Powering larger equipment or appliances can be less certain, so check that a power station’s output is relative to whatever you plan on powering.

Final thoughts on the best power bank for camping

The list above has positioned each product as if it is the only power bank you’ll need for camping, but I’ve found that it’s best to use two or even three banks of different sizes in conjunction. I almost always bring along a large power station for heavier power loads, a pocket-sized bank for carrying while hiking or just using around camp, and a third, smaller bank that I keep charged and stored in my kit in the event of an emergency. Between two or a trio of power banks, it’s pretty easy to cover all your electricity needs while enjoying the great outdoors.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best power bank for camping in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best gallon water bottles in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-gallon-water-bottles/ Fri, 15 Jul 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=455945
Best gallon water bottles
Stan Horaczek

Here’s one way to make sure you drink enough water every day.

The post The best gallon water bottles in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best gallon water bottles
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Yeti Rambler Gallon Jug is the best gallon water bottle overall. Yeti Gallon Jug
SEE IT

Yeti’s stainless steel gallon water jug is rugged and cleverly designed.

Best insulated Hydro Flask Oasis is the best insulated gallon water bottle. Hydro Flask Oasis
SEE IT

Hydro Flask’s 1-gallon Oasis can quench a big thirst after a long day.

Best motivational Fidus Motivational Water Bottle is the best motivational gallon water bottle. Fidus Motivational Water Bottle
SEE IT

The Fidus motivational water bottle has markings to help you hit your hydration goals.

The gallon water bottle is the ultimate hydration vessel. Carrying 128 ounces of liquid, these giant vessels are the perfect companion for balmy beach days, backcountry hikes, and sweaty gym sessions. They’ve also recently grown popular as a way to push yourself to drink more water every day. If your average 40-ounce water bottle just isn’t cutting it, an absolutely immense gallon bottle will ensure you never feel parched again. Chances are, you’ll have plenty left over to share with your friends and family after you absolutely crush those hydration goals. Here are the best gallon water bottles for aspirational drinkers, fitness obsessives, and anyone who wants to catch the big water bottle wave.

How we chose the best gallon water bottles

I consider myself an outdoorsy guy, so I spend a lot of time at the beach, in the mountains, and far away from clean running water. I was particularly excited to look into gallon water bottles since I’ve been thinking about picking one up myself. To make our selections, I performed hands-on testing and did hours of research, surveying critical viewpoints from water-obsessed coworkers alongside user impressions before settling on our picks.

At Popular Science, I cover a little bit of everything. I’ve researched all kinds of products, from the best energy-efficient air conditioners to the best smoke detectors. Before PopSci, I wrote about and reviewed gadgets for over 10 years for sites like iMore, XDA Developers, and CNN Underscored

The best gallon water bottles: Reviews & Recommendations

The type of gallon water bottle you buy depends on how you plan to use it. If you want to keep liquids hot or cold, a stainless steel bottle that’s vacuum insulated is your best option. Otherwise, plastic bottles tend to be more affordable and weigh less. Since there aren’t that many trustworthy brands making gallon water bottles, we feel confident that one of these picks is the best option for you.

Best overall: Yeti Rambler Gallon Jug

YETI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Yeti Gallon Jug features tough stainless steel construction and double-wall vacuum insulation to keep drinks icy cold all day long.

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Height: 15 inches
  • Weight: 4.5 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Clever magnetic lid to store spout cap
  • Double-wall insulation
  • Sturdy handle

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

The Yeti Gallon Jug will keep your water cold if you’re out in the field and away from refills. It’s made of durable stainless steel and features vacuum insulation so that it will keep liquids hot or cold for several hours. It also keeps your bottle from sweating, so surfaces are safe from condensation.

The Gallon Jug’s lid features a sturdy metal handle with soft grip padding, making it easier to carry on long hauls. The lid also contains a neat magnetic design, so users can store the cap when the spout is open. You can also screw the entire lid off for easy cleaning and refills. It’s a clever design that reinforces Yeti’s attention to the small details.

Like all Yeti’s other stainless steel bottles, the Gallon Jug is BPA-free and dishwasher safe. It weighs 4.5 pounds before putting water in it, or over 12 pounds full. That’s heavy on a hike. Still, it is far and away the nicest water bottle of this size.

Best insulated: Hydro Flask Oasis

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Hydro Flask Oasis is big and heavy, but it’ll keep your liquids cold for up to 24 hours or hot for up to 12 hours.

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Height: 14.8 inches
  • Weight: 4.96 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Easy grip base
  • Double-wall insulation
  • Keeps liquids cold for up to 24 hours

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

Like our top pick, the Hydro Flask Oasis is a large, heavy stainless steel bottle with double-wall vacuum insulation that ensures liquids stay cold. Hydro Flask claims water stays chilled in the Oasis for up to 24 hours, making it the perfect companion for the summer months. It’s also rated for hot liquids and keeps coffee, tea, or soup hot for up to 12 hours. It’s an excellent option for skiers who want a piping hot cup of joe after a long day on the slopes.

In addition to its superior insulation, we like the Oasis’ beveled base, which makes it easier to grab and pour. It’s a nice touch that you won’t find elsewhere. On the other hand, the Oasis’ lid doesn’t provide a place to store the spout cap, and the plastic handle isn’t as durable or easy to hold.

Like the Yeti Rambler, the Hydro Flask Oasis weighs nearly 5 pounds and pushes 13 pounds when filled with water. The weight isn’t a significant hurdle if you’re keeping hydrated at home, but the Oasis’ weight could be an issue on a camping trip or climbing up a mountain when every ounce counts.

Best for the gym: Coleman One-Gallon Beverage Cooler

Coleman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Coleman One-Gallon Beverage Cooler features a simple flip-top spout, insulation, and a classic design you remember from childhood.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 12.8 inches
  • Weight: N/A
  • Dishwasher safe: No
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Sturdy design
  • Insulation
  • Flip-top spout

Cons

  • Not dishwasher safe

If you played sports as a kid, you may remember the Coleman gallon jug. Your coach may have brought it along to keep your whole team hydrated, but now it’s just for you.

The fact of the matter is that Coleman still makes a great bottle, and it’s specifically the perfect option for the gym. It has a leakproof lid, flip-top spout, and insulation to keep liquids cold. It’s also incredibly durable and features a handle that makes the Coleman Chiller easy to carry. It’s a simple, classic design that will keep you hydrated through every workout step.

Best motivational: Fidus Motivational Water Bottle

Fidus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For people buying a big water bottle to drink more water, the Fidus Motivational water bottle gives you regular hydration goals.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 13.8 inches
  • Weight: 0.83 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Paracord handle
  • Button cap
  • Available in several colors

Cons

  • No insulation

Drinking a gallon of water in a single day is hard work. As we mentioned, you don’t actually need to do it to stay healthily hydrated. But if you want to, this water bottle from Fidus is a trendy Tritan plastic water bottle with markers and motivational quotes to keep you on track to hit that daily goal. 

The 1-gallon water bottle from Fidus features eight motivational quotes to keep users focused and energized about hitting their water intake goals. It also features a cap that covers the spout and straw, so it’ll stay shielded from dust and particles throughout the day, and comes with a detachable paracord handle for easier carrying. Who doesn’t like a bit of encouragement?

Best budget: Simple Modern Gallon Water Bottle

Simple Modern

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Simple Modern Gallon Water Bottle offers a basic bottle at an affordable price.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 13.8 inches
  • Weight: 1.15 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Silicone straw
  • Button cap

Cons

  • No insulation

The Simple Modern 1-gallon bottle is, just like the brand name implies, a simple gallon water bottle. The dishwasher-safe Tritan plastic bottle comes in a variety of colors, including some calming color gradients like the green-to-purple “Tropical Seas,” and warm coral-to-cyan “Havana.” The best part of the Simple Modern bottle is its lid, which features a silicone mouthpiece with a lockable cover to keep it from getting dirty between sips. Press, Flip, Hydrate. Simple!

What to consider when buying the best gallon water bottles

So let’s get one thing out of the way: You don’t actually need to drink 8 cups of water every day. Giant water bottles have recently seen a surge in popularity, as people see them as a means of motivating themselves to drink more water. While you should never deny yourself water if you’re thirsty, it turns out that you don’t need to push yourself to drink that much.

That doesn’t mean there aren’t good reasons to carry around an absolutely gigantic jug of water. If you frequently go camping or spend long stretches of time away from a clean water source, it pays to bring a lot of water along. 

There aren’t as many manufacturers making gallon water bottles as the standard 32-ounce and 40-ounce options, so there isn’t as much room to get picky about style and design. That said, it still pays to know the essentials of water bottle construction so you can tell the best gallon water bottles from the knockoffs. Once you know where to look—and what to look for—in a gallon water bottle, you’ll find options that offer excellent durability, insulation, and clever designs for comfortable transportation and enhanced hydration.

Material

Most water bottles, no matter the size, are made of durable plastic or stainless steel. You may also find gallon jars made from shatter-resistant glass, but it’s fairly uncommon among bottles made for daily drinking.

Stainless steel water bottles are popular because they’re light but durable. They’re usually made from 18/8 stainless steel, which refers to its elemental composition—18% chromium and 8% nickel. It is considered food safe and is resistant to corrosion and oxidation. Many stainless steel bottles are also vacuum insulated or designed to create a sealed buffer between the liquid in the container and the environment outside the bottle, which reduces conduction and keeps liquids hot or cold for several hours. 

Reusable plastic water bottles offer a great balance of durability and affordability. High-quality plastic bottles are arguably more resistant to superficial wear and tear, though they generally lack stainless steel’s insulation. There is far more variability among the material to make plastic water bottles than there is among stainless steel water bottles. 

When buying plastic, make sure to get a plastic water bottle that’s made from BPA-free Tritan plastic, which is light, ultra-durable, and safe. Some studies suggest that containers made from plastics with bisphenol A, or BPA, can seep into what’s stored in the container and cause adverse health effects, so avoid plastic bottles unless the manufacturer specifies that they use a BPA-free material.

Durability

The gallon water bottle you buy will likely be by your side day and night, so it needs to withstand the pitfalls of everyday use. Stainless steel can get dented and scratched, but it’s pretty resilient over the long run and should last for several years. Stainless steel can also handle sudden temperature changes, making them more versatile than other materials on this list.

Tritan plastic water bottles are generally more scratch-resistant and won’t ding, but are by no means indestructible. Both materials are strong enough to withstand everyday wear and tear, even hiking or running. However, if you’re likely to drop your bottle off a cliff (or off a car’s roof), maybe go with stainless steel.

Weight

Here’s where things get a little tricky. There’s no way around the fact that our stainless steel picks are heavy. When filled up with water, they feel like small kettlebells. We don’t feel like their weight disqualifies them from consideration because, well … a gallon of water is always going to feel heavy. (Remember: A gallon of water weighs approximately 8 pounds.) That said, if you really want to minimize your bottle’s weight, a plastic bottle will generally weigh less than a stainless steel one.

FAQs

Q: How much does a gallon water bottle cost?

Depending on the bottle material, a gallon water bottle can cost between $20-$130.

Q: How often should I clean a gallon water bottle?

Some experts argue that you should clean your water bottle once a day. That may not be feasible for everyone, especially if you’re using your gallon water bottle off the grid. We’d argue that cleaning it a few times per week is a more achievable goal.  What you don’t want to do is go several weeks without washing your reusable bottle. Even if it looks clean, water bottles can build up bacteria over time, so you should clean them often.

Q: Can I put other liquids besides water in a gallon water bottle?

You can put other liquids in your gallon water bottle besides water, but some things are safer than others. For example, you can put hot coffee in the Yeti Rambler, but the company says to avoid using the jug’s lid with carbonated beverages because of potential pressure build-up. For the plastic bottles on our list, you should stick to room temperature or cold water.

Q: How long is water good in a gallon jug?

According to the Centers for Disease Control (CDC), you should replace stored water every six months. If you plan to keep water for an extended period, make sure it’s in an FDA-approved food-grade storage container. If you can’t find a food-grade water storage container, be sure the container has a top that can close tightly, is made of durable, unbreakable materials, and has a narrow neck for easy pouring.

Q: Is it safe to drink a gallon of water per day?

Drinking a gallon of water daily isn’t harmful but you probably don’t need to drink so much for optimal health. Optimal water intake varies from person to person based on a variety of personal and environmental factors, including height, weight, their activity level, and the current temperature. Rather than aiming for “eight cups a day,” simply try and drink water whenever you feel thirsty. 

Final thoughts on the best gallon water bottles

Gallon water bottles are for people who either won’t have access to a water source for a while or need to hit a specific intake goal. Otherwise, their size and weight make them too cumbersome for most people. If you want something easier to manage, you’re better off checking out our picks for the best water bottles. And if you’ve got young ones, there’s our guide to the best kids’ water bottles.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best gallon water bottles in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smokeless-fire-pits/ Thu, 10 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=561939
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

A smokeless fire pit can provide a safe, simple way to get a blaze going for your next backyard get together or camping trip.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 in action Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
SEE IT

It’s simple to light, easy to store, and eradicates smoke.

Best large Tiki smokeless fire pit with a fire going in it Tiki Fire Pit
SEE IT

Gather up to 10 people around this ample fire pit for superior s’mores.

Best for patios Biolite's smokeless fire pit with a fire going inside BioLite Fire Pit+
SEE IT

The mesh sides offer a unique view of the flames inside and nice radiant heat.

The term “smokeless fire pit” almost sounds like an oxymoron. We love a controlled blaze for the light, the shadow, the warmth, and the crackle a fire provides to add a feeling of coziness and comfort to any conversation or gathering. But it’s not all s’mores and scary stories. It always feels like smoke blows right in your face, leaving you with stinging eyes and a nose full of soot no matter where you sit. And that’s if you can get it lit. Building a fire on the ground is tough, and you need a clear, safe space. Luckily, a quality fire pit can mitigate these issues.

These metal containers are built to control the flame and make it easy to start and finish. Not only do they make firing up easier, but they can also add a touch of class or a bit of flash to your patio, camp area, or backyard. A solid fire pit can turn a boring patio or backyard into a great place to spend an evening. Consider this your burn book, a list of the best smokeless fire pits of 2023.

How we chose the best smokeless fire pits

We started with a list of more than 30 models from hands-on testing and critical consensus before narrowing our options to the best we could find. The four main factors we considered were ease and effectiveness of use, aesthetics, value for price, and unique features. Our list represents our top choices, a couple for those who aren’t looking to spend as much money, and some situation-specific choices. After all, everyone’s needs when it comes to a fire pit are different, and it’s important to consider how and where you plan to use your fire pit before you buy it. The “best” is not always the “best for you.” Our list should help you avoid getting more fire pit than you really need, as every one of our picks is recommended.

The best smokeless fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Smokeless fire pits contain and elevate fires. Their design allows air to flow in such a way that it minimizes (and in some cases fully eliminates) smoke. There are different looks and focuses among our choices, so line up your desires as best you can with our recommendations.

Best overall: Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 28.25 lbs
  • Height: 18.5 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Excellent single-piece construction
  • Well-controlled fires with efficient burn
  • Light for the size and quality
  • Attractive, simple silhouette
  • Excellent smoke reduction

Cons

  • The aesthetic doesn’t necessarily fit with some more casual backyards
  • Outside gets very hot


It’s no secret that we think the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 is excellent. In fact, we think it’s the best choice on the market for a smokeless fire pit. The first point for the Solo Stove Bonfire is performance. It heats up quickly and burns efficiently with a stunningly small amount of smoke. The aesthetic is particular: It’s not quite industrial, but it does have a shiny, smooth finish that doesn’t scream “tiki bar” or “family gathering” like some other models, and it’s not uniquely edgy in its stylings. It may not help bring certain patio looks together, but it also doesn’t stand out or bring attention to itself. The look is very “elevated comfort food outdoor cafe.”

Among the mid-sized models we recommend, the Bonfire 2.0 is one of the more portable (though look further down for the real portable star). Twenty-eight pounds is quite light for this category, and while the Bonfire 2.0 doesn’t collapse or disassemble to make it easier to transport, you can use a cloth carrying card to make things a bit easier for a beach trip or some light camping. Wood pellets are best in the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0—that’s true of most circular-basin fire pits—but small firewood also works extremely well. The interior volume of the pit isn’t particularly large, but the burn is so efficient and controlled that the fires tend to outperform the amount of fuel.

The Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 comes at a semi-premium price, but its durable construction guarantees its long-term value. Unless your fire pit needs are particularly portable or particularly large, this is the one to get, the best overall smokeless fire pit.

Best for patios: BioLite Fire Pit+

BioLite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 19.8 lbs
  • Height: 15.8 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece self-assembly with foldable legs

Pros

  • Bluetooth-enabled, battery-powered fan keeps fires going
  • Cool, see-through design
  • Foldable legs make storage easier
  • Battery is USB rechargeable
  • App allows control of the flame size
  • Sized for commercial firewood logs

Cons

  • Foldable legs aren’t particularly durable
  • The aesthetic is specific enough to not be everyone’s cup of tea
  • Rectangular design requires a more specific space arrangement than circular models

The BioLite Fire Pit+ is one of the most unique-looking fire pits on the market, with some interesting tech features. It’s an excellent overall fire pit and a contender for best overall, but it landed in best-for-patio because of its big, open flame, cool look, and innovations. The smoke elimination is not quite as good as a few other models, but it makes up for that.

Let’s look at those innovations first. One of its chief innovations is mesh side panels that allow more heat to radiate out and make the fire easy to observe. This does require a bit more work maintaining the Fire Pit+, but it is worth it for the cool view and unique shadows that are interesting and calming when sitting around the fire pit. Another great feature that really contributes to the comfort at a backyard gathering, and is absent on any other model, is the Bluetooth-enabled, app-controlled, battery-powered fan which controls airflow and can make the flames in the Fire Pit+ larger or small at will. This is simply something that isn’t seen elsewhere and really sets the Fire Pit+ apart. The battery pack, which is removable and charged via USB, gives the Fire Pit+ a retro-futuristic look, but it can be easily hidden on the least-seen side in a patio set-up if needed.

The biggest mark against the Fire Pit+ is the double-edged sword that is its legs. The foldable legs make moving and storing the Fire Pit+ much easier than some other models, but they’re also a bit less strong and stable than the circular or thicker-legged bases that competitors have. This means you can’t overfill the Fire Pit+ with firewood (it can fit standard commercial logs). That’s good advice in general with a fire pit, but particularly vital advice for the Fire Pit+.

The Fire Pit+ offers a unique look, unique control, and an overall very good performance, making it the best patio smokeless fire pit among our recommended ones, and a great complement to patio heaters.

Best large: Tiki Fire Pit

Tiki

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 45 lbs
  • Height: 18.75 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Nice, classic design
  • Lots of space for fuel inside
  • Perfect size for a larger patio

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Works better with wood pellets which can be more expensive than firewood
  • Not intended to be portable; you can’t easily take it to the beach or camping

Most fire pits on this list are great for four-to-six people. The Tiki Fire Pit is much larger and is a better choice if your patio seating is couches and lounges for 8-10 rather than chairs. Additionally, the Tiki Fire Pit has a classic Tiki design, which may be just what you’re looking for in your backyard paradise.

The benefits of the Tiki Fire Pit’s size are the amount of fuel it can use and the length of burn your fire is going to get. Stronger, longer fires mean less time spent tending the flames during your evening get-togethers. Smoke elimination is very good thanks to the airflow design, and the small, strong legs lift the pit enough for performance while not detracting from the pleasing, rounded throwback style. 

The drawback is this fire pit is really not meant for moving around. Forty-five pounds is a lot, and it is large, meaning you will most likely need two people and plenty of space in a truck or van if you want to take this party starter to the beach. Honestly, the Tiki Fire Pit is much better served finding a permanent home on your patio. However, with that heft comes a lot of durability, so the included weather-resistant cover is probably enough to protect your fire pit outside of an extreme situation. 

If your lifestyle means bigger is better, the Tike Fire Pit is probably the better choice among our recommendations, making it the best large smokeless fire pit as far as we’re concerned.

Best stainless steel: Breeo X Series 24

Breeo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 62 lbs
  • Height: 14.75 in
  • Material: Stainless steel (also available in corten steel)
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Extremely strong and durable
  • Sleek look that blends in well with a lot of decor
  • Excellent fire control and smoke elimination

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Extremely heavy

If construction and materials really matter to you, and you want a fire pit that might become an heirloom to pass down to your children, break out the wallet for the Breeo X Series 24. This beautiful, sturdy, heavy, and durable fire pit is not one to travel; the 62 pounds of metal means it doesn’t want to go to the beach or a campground. However, at home you’re not going to get a longer-lasting, better-put-together fire pit.

The “24” in Breeo X Series 24 refers to the diameter of the fire pit’s interior—a considerable amount of space, larger even than the interior of the Tiki Fire Pit. There are 19-inch and even larger models as well. The legs of the Breeo X Series 24 are built-in and incredibly stable. The interior wall sucks up air and creates a wonderful, even secondary flame that shoots out the small holes just below the top of the rim. Visually, the Breeo X Series makes one of the nicest flames on the market.

The price tag is almost as heavy as the pit itself. The Breeo X Series is a premium product at a premium price—two or three times more than a lot of our other recommended models. If you have the means to splurge and believe in buying a product that will last a lifetime, the value is there, even if the initial cost is high.

Big, bold, and built to last, the Breeo X Series 24 is a beast and a beauty in one. For that reason, it’s the best stainless steel smokeless fire pit we can recommend.

Best portable: Solo Stove Ranger 2.0

Solo Stove

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15 lbs
  • Height: 15 in
  • Material: stainless steel
  • Structure: single-piece construction

Pros

  • Lightweight and compact
  • Good flame control and smoke elimination
  • Includes a carrying case
  • Sleek and strong design

Cons

  • Portable but not collapsible; still need a vehicle to transport longer distances
  • Grilling requires additional accessories for best results

If you want a multi-purpose fire pit, portability is really important. We know it ourselves, so we have a guide if this category is the one you are exclusively considering. For those looking at a wider range of options, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is the little sibling of our best overall smokeless fire pit and the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market. Smaller, lighter, and more portable—but no less efficient—the Ranger is a much easier carry than the Bonfire without sacrificing any of the quality.

The Ranger really sings when you add in grilling accessories. The Solo Stove product line’s design gives you a simple, flat top that placing any flat wire grill means producing nice results (though you’ll want to very carefully clean the inside of your fire pit later, as food can create some sticky burnt messes). Some official grilling accessories are available, as well as skewers for s’mores or hot dogs if you look at Solo Stove’s offerings. (However, we recommend a dedicated grill if you’re into cookouts more than casual entertaining.)

For a portable model, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 isn’t particularly light. It’s not meant for trekking but more drive-to-the-national-park-or-beach style portable use. The included carrying case is probably enough for inside storage, but outside storage will need a thicker, more protective case (which is also available to purchase).

If you’re planning to head out with your fire pit a lot, we can heartily recommend the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 as the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market.

Best value: Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit

Innostage

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 33 pounds
  • Height: 18 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction

Pros

  • Two-piece design lets it travel smaller
  • Easy to set up
  • Good airflow for smoke elimination
  • Matte black coloration makes it blend in easily

Cons

  • The silhouette is a bit industrial
  • Clean-up is tougher than with some other brands

You’ll need firewood once you’ve purchased your pit, so buying something that leaves you with some cash left over isn’t a bad plan. For those a bit more thrifty, Inno Stage offers a line of fire pits that don’t quite match the higher-cost models for performance or style but more than do the job for a very reasonable cost.

Inno Stage’s design involves two pieces. When assembled, the larger piece sits on the smaller piece, which acts as the ash pan. For travel or storage, the smaller piece is turned upside down and slots into the larger piece’s basin, taking up less space and becoming easier to carry. This is the most convenient feature of the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but it also results in less efficient burn.

In terms of looks, the Inno Stage is not the most beautiful fire pit. It has a bit of a utilitarian and industrial look, which doesn’t make it a star of the backyard. There’s a trio of options for the finish: chrome, matte black, and faux terracotta. The last is our suggestion; it softens the look a bit. There are also multiple sizes (four in all) depending on your needs.

If you need a highly functional, well-priced fire pit or just want to dip your toe into the world of fire pits without committing too many funds, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit is your best entry point. It’s inexpensive enough to upgrade later without feeling regretful and functional enough to use it for a long time, squeezing every ounce of use out of what we consider the best-value smokeless fire pit.

Best under $100: Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge

Blue Sky

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 23.4 lbs
  • Height: 12.49 in
  • Material: Steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction

Pros

  • One piece tucks into the other for portability
  • Assembly is quick
  • Low price

Cons

  • Not quite as efficient burn as other models
  • Non-stainless steel means it’s a bit less durable and a bit harder to clean

Sometimes, price is the most important factor. If you want to get into the smokeless fire pit game for less than $100, choose the Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge. This two-piece smokeless fire pit has a similar tuck-in-and-carry construction as our best value option, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but an even lower base price. 

The design of the Ridge doesn’t allow air to flow as efficiently as higher-end models, meaning the smoke elimination is less impressive. However, it’s still an incredible improvement over typical fire pits. The matte black finish to the Ridge means it’s unobtrusive, but it’s also not a particularly attractive fire pit. Weight and size make the Ridge easy to move, and you’ll probably want to store it inside and bring it out to use it rather than leave it as patio furniture.

What to consider when choosing a smokeless fire pit

Smokeless fire pits offer a focal point for your patio set-up, allowing you to enjoy cooler days and nights in a comfortable and stylish way. To that end, picking the perfect smokeless fire pit means considering smoke elimination effectiveness, style, size, and durability.

Smoke elimination

When it comes to smoke elimination, all of these models will do an excellent job of minimizing the amount of smoke produced but the fire. This is due to airflow design, which allows for more complete combustion. Smokeless fire pits will have secondary fires popping out of the interior wall of the fire pit’s basin, using up more oxygen and producing very little smoke. The best models do this most efficiently, but even our recommended value and budget models do a great job.

Most of the design elements of smokeless fire pits are utilitarian due to wanting to offer the best possible airflow efficiency. The nicer models are sleep and round, while the budget models tend to have more edges or corners. A few of our models took their look more into consideration: the Tiki Fire Pit and the BioLite Fire Pit+ chief among them. Make sure you like the look of your fire pit if you’re planning to use it when entertaining guests. No matter how great the fire is, if the pit feels out of place and clashes with the motif you’re trying to achieve, you’ll be disappointed with your purchase.

Size

Most of the smokeless fire pits we recommend are medium-sized, built to be used with a smaller circle of people, maybe no more than 6. Portable models are best with 2 or 4. Larger models exist that can accommodate 8-10 people around them, but you’re looking at completely non-portable models at that point. In terms of warmth radius, most of these fire pits will be nice and toasty within 8 feet, but some of the smaller models will need a tighter formation.

Materials and durability

Lastly, durability is important as you want to be using your smokeless fire pit long term. Stainless steel is the material of choice. It holds up well to use and elements and is the easiest to clean. Some steel composite low-end models exist but should probably be avoided.

FAQs

Q: Is a smokeless fire pit really smokeless?

Not exactly. Smokeless fire pits will still produce some smoke. However, the amount of smoke is drastically reduced because the design allows airflow on nearly all sides, causing much more complete combustion. Even the smoke that does make its way out of the fire still won’t find its way into your face.

Q: Do smokeless fire pits give off good heat?

Absolutely. A smokeless fire pit can easily give off 50,000 BTU (British Thermal Units), which is extremely warm within 8 feet and comfortable from 8 feet to 10 feet.

Q: How much does a smokeless fire pit cost?

The ones we recommend can be had for as cheap as $75 on sale, and you could spend up to $1000 on the luxury models when you add in accessories.

Q: What type of fire pit is best?

It really depends on the space you’re most likely to have your fire. If you will almost only use your fire pit on your patio, choose a fire pit that fits the aesthetic of your backyard area. If you want to take your fire pit to the beach, choose a lighter standard-sized fire pit with a carrying case or a very light “portable” model. These will make smaller fires, but your back will thank you. No matter what, it’s best to go smokeless.

Q: Can you put water in a smokeless fire pit?

Do not do this. The holes in a smokeless fire pit can get clogged with wet fire debris, and dirty water will spill out onto whatever surface your fire pit is over. Instead, douse the flames with sand, wait long enough for everything to cool off, dump it, then clean it carefully by hand if necessary.

Q: Is it OK to leave a fire pit burning overnight?

Don’t do this either. First, it’s very unlikely that a fire pit fire will last all night, anyway. It’s simply not big enough, even though it’s protected from wind and moisture within the pit. Second, never leave a fire unattended, even in a relatively safe environment like a fire pit. It only takes one stray ember to cause a tragedy.

Q: Can you burn wood in a smokeless fire pit?

Yes! Most smokeless fire pits are expressly designed for wood. Many work better with wood pellets, but small scavenged firewood or commercial firewood cut into smaller pieces also works well.

Q: What makes a smokeless fire pit smokeless?

The airflow design allows more complete combustion of your fuel (usually wood or wood pellets), and more complete combustion produces less smoke, sometimes so little as to appear “smokeless.”

Final thoughts on the best smokeless fire pits

If you’re looking for a fire pit, smokeless is the way to go. There’s enough variety in the marketplace, with quality throughout, that choosing a model based on your particular needs is more involved than simply choosing the “best” model. From portable to large-scale patio-only models, our recommendations should make sure that your nights are toasty, your shadows flicker, and you enjoy fire whenever you wish.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best insect repellents of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-insect-repellent/ Fri, 30 Apr 2021 20:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=362232
A brown mosquito caught behind a green leaf.
Syed Ali, Unsplash

Don’t let pests run—or ruin—your life. The best insect repellents will keep your skin protected and ward off bug-borne illnesses.

The post The best insect repellents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A brown mosquito caught behind a green leaf.
Syed Ali, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Thermacell makes one of the best insect repellents.best-insect-repellents-thermacell Thermacell Mosquito Repellent E-Series Rechargeable Repeller
SEE IT

No application is required for this wide-range tabletop bug repellent, which offers up to nine hours of protection with each charge.

Best for babies Mosquito wipes to prevent mosquito bites Cutter Family Mosquito Wipes
SEE IT

These towelettes make putting on bug repellent quick and easy and give parents greater application control for small kids that want more playtime.

Best budget DEET OFF spray insect repellent OFF! Deep Woods Insect & Mosquito Repellent
SEE IT

This aerosol spray doesn’t feel greasy or oily upon application.

Whether we’re in the middle of nature or in the comfort of our own homes, biting bugs can wreak havoc on humans and pets, so effective insect repellant is the first defense. It’s a proactive way to keep the rude critters away before these scores of Davids leave their mark on our sensitive Goliath skin … or do even more serious damage. But it can be overwhelming to browse through rows of sprays, lotions, wipes, bracelets, and even electronic bug control options. We’re here to help you find the best insect repellents that really, genuinely work.

How we chose the best insect repellents

What do solar generators, tents, and coolers have in common? They’re all things you enjoy outdoors—or at least you should enjoy outdoors, insect adversaries allowing. That’s why we’d argue that effective repellent is one of the most important things you can pack on a camping trip—without it, you’d be itchy, uncomfortable, and putting yourself at risk of getting a bug from a bug. We turned to reviews, recommendations, and user testing to find the best insect repellents.

The best insect repellents: Reviews & Recommendations

The best insect repellents will help you reduce your calamine lotion and anti-itch cream use. Here are the ones we found:

Best overall: Thermacell Mosquito Repellent E-Series Rechargeable Repeller

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: No application is required for this wide-range tabletop bug repellent.

Specs

  • Volume: .33 fluid ounces
  • Form: Liquid
  • Scent: No
  • Active ingredient: Metofluthrin

Pros

  • Comes with dimmable light
  • No application
  • Long-range coverage
  • Rechargeable

Cons

  • Reviews say refills tend to deplete quickly

This rechargeable mosquito repeller from Thermacell gives you a 20-foot protection zone within 15 minutes. Its refills are long-lasting (12 hours), and the spray-free design makes for a more comfortable gathering. The repeller is designed with a dimmable light that provides from 50 to 200 lumens of light. One charge gets you up to 9 hours of continuous mosquito protection (5.5 hours if you’re also using the light). An interactive LCD panel will let you know the battery status both visually and audibly. The metofluthrin-based repellent is scent-free and has been independently tested and EPA-reviewed for safety. Additionally, it’s covered by a one-year warranty that can be extended two extra years with item registration.

Best for ticks: Thermacell Tick Control Tubes

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These easy-to-use tubes you can spread around your yard provide reliable protection against ticks.

Specs

  • Volume: 24 tubes
  • Form: Tube
  • Scent: None
  • Active ingredient: Permethrin

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • No mess
  • Inexpensive

Cons

  • Some users say mice didn’t use the cotton
  • Cardboard tube may degrade in the wet weather

The prevalence of tick-borne diseases like Lyme, babesiosis, and Rocky Mountain Spotted Fever require another level of protection when you’re spending time outdoors. Thermacell’s’ Tick Control Tubes can help make the job easier. These 24 tubes provide protection for an acre; the company recommends placing them in wood piles, rock walls, gardens, brush, and other areas that attract mice. The tubes contain cotton treated with the insecticide permethrin, and when mice bring the cotton back to their nest, the ticks feeding upon the mice die. Thermacell recommends you use them in spring and summer. Plus, the tubes are biodegradable.

Best picaridin: Sawyer Products 20% Picaridin Insect Repellent

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get 14 hours of protection against bugs with this non-greasy, non-scented lotion bug repellent.

Specs

  • Volume: 4 fluid ounces
  • Form: Lotion
  • Scent: No
  • Active ingredient: Picaridin

Pros

  • Long-lasting
  • Scent-free
  • Repels ticks

Cons

  • Spray not as effective as lotion

This bug repellent is completely fragrance-free and offers a stronger defense against biting flies than most DEET products. The lotion offers longer-lasting protection on skin, while the pump spray lingers longer on clothing. The lotion protects from mosquitos for up to 14 hours and provides eight hours of protection against flies and gnats. The spray provides 12 hours of protection against mosquitos and the same level of protection against flies and gnats. It is non-greasy and dries quickly. Additionally, it won’t damage synthetic coatings, and you can use the spray on clothing, backpacks, and more.

Best for babies: Cutter Mosquito Wipes

Cutter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These wipes make putting on bug repellent quick and easy for more playtime.

Specs

  • Volume: N/A
  • Form: Wipes
  • Scent: Yes
  • Active ingredient: DEET

Pros

  • Non-greasy
  • Clean scent
  • Easy-to-use

Cons

  • Only 15 wipes

These wipes use a 7.15 percent DEET-based formula to keep mosquitoes away. They’ve got a cooling, clean scent, and don’t feel sticky, greasy, or oily on the skin. You can use them on your face, ears, and neck, which usually go untreated. A resealable packet keeps them moist and allows you to take them on the go. They repel against mosquitoes, deer ticks, gnats, biting flies, fleas, and chiggers. You can use it on children two months and older. And, DEET will not damage nylon, cotton, or wool, but it can damage some synthetic fabrics. You’ll have to buy multiple packages for heavy use since each pack only contains 15 wipes.

Best premium: Thermacell LIV Smart Mosquito Repellent System

Thermacell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get on-demand protection season after season with this yard system.

Specs

  • Volume: N/A
  • Form: Liquid
  • Scent: No
  • Active ingredient: Metofluthrin

Pros

  • Wide coverage
  • Customizable placement
  • Effective

Cons

  • Expensive

Protect your entire backyard from mosquitos this summer with the LIV Smart Mosquito Repellent System. You can choose between three, four, or five repellers to place around your property lines, and each kit includes a smart hub, mounts, 24-foot cables, and ground stakes. The amount you receive of each depends on the size of the kit you purchase. Each repellent can last for 40 hours and uses scent-free, heat-activated metofluthrin as its active ingredient. The Smart Hub connects multiple repellers and can be controlled using the LIV+ app. The kits are expensive to purchase (it ranges from $699-$899) and the refills are pricey too—as a six-pack is $120. However, if you want to eradicate bugs from your outdoor entertainment spaces, it might be a worthy investment.

Best for dogs: Wondercide Flea, Tick, and Mosquito Spray

Wondercide

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This plant-based insect repellent smells great and keeps your pooch pest-free.

Specs

  • Volume: 4 fluid ounces; 16 fluid ounces; 32 fluid ounces, 1 gallon
  • Form: Spray
  • Scent: Yes: Lemongrass; peppermint; rosemary; cedarwood
  • Active ingredient: Essential oils

Pros

  • Not harmful to your pet
  • Wide variety of sizes
  • Plant-based

Cons

  • The scent might irritate skin

This flea and tick control is so much more than an insect killer. It uses pet-safe plant-based essential oils to combat pests at all stages of their life cycle. As an added bonus, it won’t harm birds, bees, and butterflies that eat insects that have been treated with the product. You can use it on your pooch, or you can use it on yourself. If your pet has sensitive skin—especially cats—the scent might irritate your pet. Bathe your pet in soap and discontinue use if your pet experiences a negative reaction.

Best budget: OFF! Deep Woods Insect & Mosquito Repellent

OFF!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This long-lasting, non-greasy insect repellent comes in a two-pack for more bang for your buck.

Specs

  • Volume: 4 fluid ounces
  • Form: Aerosol
  • Scent: Lemon
  • Active ingredient: DEET

Pros

  • High DEET concentration
  • Non-greasy feel
  • Scent not overpowering

Cons

  • Propellant can leave a white residue on clothes

This DEET OFF insect repellent approaches the maximum level of protection with a concentration of 25 percent, and it’s especially effective at repelling deadly and/or annoying mosquitoes, along with ticks, biting flies, gnats, and chiggers for long periods of time. Its powder-dry insect-repelling formula protects without feeling oily or greasy, and its lemon scent is light and pleasant. Use caution when spraying on or near fabrics, as its included propellant can leave a white residue. It can be washed off easily, however.

What to consider when buying the best insect repellents

So how do you go about choosing the best insect repellent your money can buy? There’s a wide variety, which vary in effectiveness, application style, and whether their effects are scientifically proven. (Mosquito repellent bracelets, for example, are an option but experts are not unanimously sold on their effectiveness.) 

Before settling on any product, it’s important to read the label and look for one of three key ingredients: DEET, oil of lemon eucalyptus, and picaridin. Some experts are less than enthusiastic about natural insect repellents, like citronella, because their active ingredients aren’t as effective. That doesn’t make them useless, but they’re not ideal as a primary protector; they’re best used in tandem with the stronger stuff. Also, beware of products that combine sunscreen and bug repellent. Since sunscreen has to be reapplied every few hours, you’ll risk overexposing yourself to the chemicals in repellent.

When applying insect control, be sure you cover only exposed body parts, using only the recommended dose. Keep it away from cuts and bruises and, when using it on your face, rub it in using your hands and avoid touching your eyes, mouth, and ears. At the end of the day, wash it off using soap and water, and if you’ve sprayed it onto your clothing, keep them in a separate wash pile. The best insect repellent is also often some pretty harsh stuff: it can damage leather, vinyl, and some synthetics, so proceed with caution when applying bug spray directly to fabric.

DEET vs. picaridin

DEET (N,N-diethyl-meta-toluamide, in case you needed to know for a Jeopardy! question or bar trivia) is the most widely used active ingredient in insect repellent, and it offers a strong defense against mosquitoes, ticks, and some flies. The amount used in most products ranges between 10 percent and 100 percent, with a protection time of two hours to 10. The level of protection maxes out at a concentration of 30 percent, with higher levels only increasing the protection time. Control-release DEET can keep working for up to 12 hours.

DEET, which was developed by the United States Army during the 1940s, is perfectly safe to use if you follow the instructions that come with it. It’s considered the old faithful of the best insect repellent, but you have to be sure to handle it carefully and keep it away from your sunglasses and trekking pole grips since it doesn’t always mix well with plastics. It can also cause some temporary numbness in your lips if it comes into contact with them, so be careful when applying.

Picaridin is the synthetic version of a repellent found in pepper plants, and it’s often mentioned alongside DEET as a prime active ingredient in insect repellent. The maximum protection of picaridin is reached at 20 percent concentration, with spray and lotion forms providing different lengths of protection. In insect repellent spray, it can keep you covered against mosquitoes and ticks for 12 hours and flies for eight. In lotion form, it can protect you from mosquitoes and ticks for 14 hours and flies for eight.

Picaridin has a few advantages over the older competitor, DEET. When dealing with mosquitoes and ticks, picaridin is similarly effective as DEET, and it’s actually a bit more effective on flies. Picaridin also has less of an odor, and when used in the best insect repellent, it doesn’t do any damage to plastics and other synthetics.

Can kids use insect repellent?

According to the American Academy of Pediatrics, insect repellent used on children should not contain any more than a 30 percent concentration of DEET, and insect repellent shouldn’t be used at all on babies younger than two months. Picaridin is also generally safe to use on children, though it can irritate their eyes and skin. To avoid exposing kids to these fairly serious chemicals, you might want to consider an alternative like essential oil insect repellent, but keep in mind that repellents with plant oils as a main active ingredient offer fewer hours of protection than DEET and picaridin products.

To further protect babies from the effects of bugs outdoors, cover their strollers with netting. When applying the best insect repellent to children, adults should follow the same safety guidelines when applying it to themselves.

How do I protect my pets from insects?

Collars, pills, chewables, and drops provide pets with varying levels of pest protection. DEET can be toxic to dogs, especially in large quantities, so it’s best to avoid using DEET insect repellent on dogs, or even on yourself if you’re hanging out with a dog. (They do like to lick skin, remember.) Natural bug repellent is a safer option, but some essential oils are harmful to dogs, so it’s a good idea to check with your veterinarian before using any of them.

The safe list for dogs generally includes citrus, soybean oil, and geranium oil, and you can apply those to their coat or collar. Another option is filling your yard with plants like basil, catnip, lavender, lemon balm, peppermint, and rosemary as a mosquito repellent for dogs. But dog owners beware: Plants such as geranium, citronella, and garlic can be dangerous if eaten by dogs, and if you have a cat, essential oils can be especially toxic, causing an upset stomach and damage to the liver and central nervous system.

How much will you have to pay for bug protection?

The best insect repellent won’t set you back very much—if it’s designed for humans. Solid options can be found for under $10. But specially formulated bug control for pets tends to be a bit more expensive; it can even approach the $100 range. Home systems can also get pricey, and can go for around $600-$700 dollars.

FAQs

Q: What is the most effective insect repellent?

The most effective insect repellent will contain either DEET or picaridin as an active ingredient. DEET has been in use for longer and is more effective as a tick repellent, while picaridin provides a stronger defense against flies. Picaridin also has a milder odor and doesn’t dissolve plastics, as DEET can.

Q: What is the most effective natural insect repellent?

The most effective natural insect repellent is probably lemon eucalyptus oil. It is the essential oil cited most frequently by experts; a 32 percent solution can provide 95 percent protection against them for three hours. Citronella, on the other hand, has a minimal effect at best, when you’re talking about candles and torches.

Q: What smell do mosquitoes hate the most?

The smell mosquitoes hate the most is a relatively lengthy list that includes DEET, lavender, peppermint, citronella, garlic, lime, basil, clove oil, and eucalyptus. Considering how many things they hate, it’s clear they really must love biting humans to overcome all of those scents!

Final thoughts on the best insect repellents

The best insect repellent is likely to include one of the two power ingredients, those being DEET and picaridin. It doesn’t take a high concentration of either to maximize bug control, but the higher the concentration, the longer you’ll be protected. Natural insect repellent is an alternative to these, but they’re not always as effective. Since DEET poses a danger to dogs, natural bug repellents are a better pet option, but you have to be careful to stay away from toxic plants and essential oils that might threaten their health.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best insect repellents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated blankets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-blankets/ Wed, 08 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517407
the best heated blankets composited
Stan Horaczek

The best heated blankets provide comfortable warmth without tons of maintenance.

The post The best heated blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best heated blankets composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best wearable Beautyrest reversible heated blanket on a plain background as one of the best heated blankets Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap
SEE IT

Don’t pretend like you don’t want that wrapped around you.

Best battery-powered Onnetila heated blanket on a plain backdrop The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket
SEE IT

A dedicated battery pack provides warmth without the grid.

Best overall Sunbeam best overall heated blanket Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket
SEE IT

It’s comfortable, durable, and easy to use.

On cold nights, there’s nothing more comforting than getting into a pre-warmed bed thanks to a heated blanket. Heated blankets, sometimes called electric blankets, are just like a regular soft blanket but with wires inside that provide heat when supplied with current. You can even get wireless battery-powered options that allow you to stay warm all night long without the hassle of tangling cords. Whether you opt for smaller single sizes, which are often better at dispersing heat, or share the experience with a large, heated blanket made for two, we have sourced the best heated blankets for you.

How we chose the best heated blankets

The writers and editors at Popular Science have decades of combined experience in writing about, reviewing, and recommending products across a wide variety of categories. For this list of the best heated blankets, we relied on spec comparisons, personal experience, editorial reviews, and user feedback. We prioritize reliability here at Popular Science, so we emphasized models that promise to last several years. While we haven’t tested them for years to guarantee durability, we prioritize brands with solid reputations and models built with long-lasting materials.

The best heated blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

Our picks for the best heated blankets promise to keep you toasty even when it’s cold outside and drafty in your home. Plus, they’re more convenient than sleeping in even the best, most comfortable heated gloves, socks, and vests. If you want to snuggle up for sound sleep, feel cozy without touching the thermostat, you can relax under the warmth of one of our top picks. 

Best overall: Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket

Sunbeam

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester Microfiber
  • Heat Settings: 12
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Dual controllers
  • Easy to use
  • Soft, cozy fabric

Cons 

  • Thin fabric means you can feel the wires inside

Available in a range of colors—including beige, blue, red, and gray—this blanket scored top marks for comfort and durability. To machine wash, simply unplug the remote and toss the blanket in your washer and dryer. 

The dual controllers and large Queen size make it a good choice for couples sharing a bed. You’ll both be able to adjust the temperature and turn it on or off if your partner falls asleep before you. The control remote is also bright and easy to use, even in the middle of the night. It evenly distributes heat to prevent overheating, and the blanket material, although warm, isn’t too heavy. It comes with a five-year limited warranty for peace of mind. The automatic 12-hour shutoff was the longest shut-off from the blankets tested and means you can fall asleep knowing it will turn off by itself. This is our top choice to help you get a restful (and warm) night’s sleep.

Best budget: Beautyrest Brushed Long Fur Electric Throw

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: 100% Polyester
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable price point 
  • Furry fabric offers extra warmth

Cons 

  • Only one size (oversize throw) available 
  • Controller overheats if covered by the blanket

The heating wires are laid throughout this throw in an “S” pattern, evenly distributing heat. Although only available in one size, the oversized 50 inches by 60 inches, it’s perfect for one person to keep warm. Expect heat ranges of 85 to 105 degrees Fahrenheit, although the long fur provides additional warmth as well. You’ll be limited to just three heat settings, but this heated blanket still offers good value for money at such a reasonable price. 

The two-hour auto shut-off provides peace of mind, although if you like to snuggle up while you watch TV before bed, you might need to reset it to keep you warm as you sleep. Some reviewers complained that the lifespan was short, which you should remember when researching heated blankets to buy. As this blanket is on the smaller side, it could be a great option for keeping warm on the couch instead of at bedtime.

Best battery-powered: The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket

Onnetila

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester & Polyester Blend
  • Heat Settings: 5
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Totally portable  
  • Wireless 
  • Modern design

Cons 

  • Battery life is poor on high setting

Instead of a bulky controller plugged into the wall, this portable heated blanket comes with a rechargeable large-capacity battery, not unlike a power brick you’d use to charge your phone. The blanket heats up in just five seconds, providing warmth when you need it most. It folds down to fit any 10 inches by 8 inches space, perfect for stowing in the car or a backpack on the road. 

Once heated, expect 2-8 hours of use, plenty of time to fall asleep soundly. The material is lightweight, machine-washable, and soft to the touch. Although this blanket would work well in bed, it excels as a portable option to keep you warm at sporting events, when traveling, or especially camping or staying in an RV. In fact, it makes a great present for anyone who loves warm gear gifts. However, the five heat settings don’t offer too much variation, and it’s worth keeping in mind that the highest setting will drain the battery considerably. Lower price options are available if a wireless design is not your priority.

Best for couples: Perfect Fit Ultra Soft Plush Electric Blanket

SoftHeat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester Blend micro plush
  • Heat Settings: 10
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Very large size  
  • Individual controls 
  • Small wires and even heat distribution

Cons 

  • Expensive

It’s a perfect solution for couples with different sleep styles and preferences. Not only does it feature separate heating zones and individualized controls, but you can change the temperature silently so as not to wake your sleeping partner. The separate controls mean you can both choose your ideal temperature and sleep soundly. You can also adjust this temperature throughout the night for individualized comfort.

A large easy-to-grasp dial-style controller and a non-slip bottom make this a very accessible device. If you forget to turn it off, an automatic shut-off at 10 hours will keep you safe. This blanket doesn’t feel overly hot to the touch and doesn’t get hot zones as the heat is evenly distributed. It also features very small wires that cannot be felt through the blanket for ultimate comfort while you both sleep. Choose from three colors—sage green, red or beige—to complement your bedding.

Best wearable: Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Plush Fabric
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable  
  • Hands-free design 
  • Heats up quickly

Cons 

  • Control panel is bulky and can be uncomfortable
  • Variations in heat

As a wearable heated blanket, the Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap lets you stay warm while your hands can type, scroll on your phone, or flip between TV channels. It sits on your shoulders just like a shawl with the added luxury of heat which you can control through three different settings. And it’s available in 10 different designs to suit your unique style and fashion sense. It’s also fully reversible with an ultra-soft beige plush fabric on the reverse side. 

The 2-hour auto shut-off prevents overheating. Fully machine washable, this wearable heated blanket provides warmth and comfort to relax anywhere in your home. Because of the range of colors and styles, this blanket would suit teens in particular. Like our top budget pick, also made by Beautyrest, the controller can become quite hot if covered. Simply unplug to machine wash and keep your new favorite blanket clean. 

Things to consider before buying the best heated blankets 

While we’re happy to recommend specific models, we also like to provide some insight into what we consider the essential features that come with your new heated blanket. Here are some features and specs to look for while you’re shopping.

Safety

You might prefer the reassuring heavy feel of a weighted blanket instead of a heated blanket; after all, they don’t suit everyone. If you prefer to sleep wrapped up in a ball or your temperature fluctuates dramatically during the night, a heated blanket might not suit your needs. It’s also important to keep a few safety precautions in mind:

Damaged or frayed wires can make heated blankets unsafe. Get into the habit of checking them regularly and rolling rather than folding your blanket for storage. You should also choose a model with an automatic shut-off to prevent overheating. 

Heat settings 

The more heat settings your heated blanket has, the more you can customize it to your unique (and changing) needs. Depending on the weather, your other blankets and bedding, or the season, adjust the heat setting to suit your sleep habits best. You might also prefer to choose a heated throw blanket over one that you sleep with. 

Pets 

It’s not advised to use heated blankets with pets as they can become overheated and may chew or claw through the wires.

FAQs

Q: Is it safe to sleep with a heated blanket?

If used correctly, heated blankets are perfectly safe to use while sleeping. When selecting your blanket, make sure you choose one with an automatic shutoff so that you can rest easy knowing that you won’t overheat during the night. It’s also important to look after your blanket to prevent wires from shorting and to buy a new one when your blanket gets too old. 

Q: Do heated blankets use a lot of electricity?

Heated blankets are very economical and use very little electricity to run, and certainly much less than a space heater or turning up the thermostat.

Q: Can I wash my heated blanket?

Not all heated blankets can be machine washed, so it’s very important to check the manufacturer details to make sure you’ll be able to clean your blanket properly. 

Final thoughts on the best heated blankets

Heated blankets can be a great way to stay warm on chilly nights, and save money on your heating bills, or just make your bed extra snuggly and cozy. 

If you share a bed with someone else, it’s a good idea to buy an extra large heated blanket and ensure you both have access to the controls to individualize your sleep space to your comfort level. Even if you don’t like to fall asleep with your heated blanket on, you can still use it to warm up your sheets before bed or opt for a wearable blanket to keep warm around the house.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric scooters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/best-electric-scooters/ Tue, 10 Sep 2019 13:20:45 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-electric-scooters/
Save money and have fun getting where you need to go on one of the best electric scooters.

Improve your commute or take a tour of your town.

The post The best electric scooters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Save money and have fun getting where you need to go on one of the best electric scooters.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Segway makes some of the best electric scooters. Segway Ninebot MAX Original
SEE IT

It’s easily portable, uses a dual-braking system, and has pneumatic tires.

Best for kids The Flare by Hover-1 is one of the best electric scooters for kids. Flare by Hover-1
SEE IT

The scooter doesn’t let your kids go too fast, and it offers adjustable handlebars.

Best budget GoTrax makes one of the best electric scooters at a budget-friendly price. GoTrax GXL V2
SEE IT

This affordable model provides a hand brake and solid battery life.

Picking an electric scooter is becoming an increasingly challenging task. While there were just a handful of manufacturers to select from a few years ago, there are now myriad. The benefit of this much broader field is that there are now specialist vehicles for whatever you have in mind, whether that’s zooming past the pedestrians on your commute or doing leisurely laps of the park on a sunny Sunday. The downside, however, is that you’ll still have to sift through the dozens of available models. We sorted through the options to identify the best electric scooters for you.

How we chose the best electric scooters

To compile this list, we extensively researched the offerings of notable manufacturers and insurgent brands, accounting for unique product features and comparable performance levels in key attributes such as top speed and range per charge.

Though traffic laws concerning electric scooters vary from state to state (in Colorado, you can ride some electric scooters on sidewalks, while California requires you to use a bike path, trail, or bikeway), we placed strong focus on safety features, such as headlights, indicators, and tires that gain considerable traction. Other significant factors in our decision-making were battery life and charge time, power, and the overall comfort of the ride.

The best electric scooters: Reviews & Recommendations

We’ve come a long way since the Go-Ped craze of the late 1980s, and the scooters listed showed an array of strengths and weaknesses that make them suitable (or not so suitable) for your needs. While there’s no one-size-fits-all solution in our selection, the variety of available models does mean you can find an electric scooter that appears to be designed with you in mind.

Best overall: Segway Ninebot MAX Original

Segway

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An ambitious model from one of the pioneers in the electric scooter space, the Segway Ninebot excels in every way. Massive range per charge, self-healing tires, and dual shock absorbers for a smoother ride are just some of the impressive features.

Specs

  • Weight: 42.1 pounds
  • Range: 40.4 miles
  • Max speed: 18.6 mph

Pros

  • Fast charging
  • Self-healing pneumatic tires
  • Multiple riding modes
  • Effective on inclines

Cons

  • Expensive

The Segway Ninebot MAX Original seeks to outdo its competitors in virtually every field. It almost succeeds, so we’ve made it our best pick overall, especially for those willing to extend their budget.

With a top speed of 18.6 miles per hour and maximum travel distance of 40.6 miles per charge, the Segway Ninebot MAX Original is both nimble and offers long range, even if few commuters test the limits of its range in a single day. A 20% hill grade, meanwhile, is reassuring for anyone who’s ever had to get off and push on pesky steep inclines.

The scooter boasts best-in-class safety features, including self-healing pneumatic tires and both front and back shock absorbers to reduce ride disruption across uneven sidewalks or bicycle lanes. The Segway Ninebot MAX Original delivers on its sturdy construction. Ample standing room and a grippy platform covered in raised rubber add to the sense that Segway’s flagship model diligently covers all bases.

Best design: Unagi Model One E500

Unagi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A streamlined aesthetic and satisfactory performance make it a standout for anyone looking to pair style with speed.

Specs

  • Weight: 26.5 pounds
  • Range: 15.5 miles
  • Max speed: 19 mph

Pros

  • Impressive design
  • Lightweight
  • Anti-lock brakes
  • Three speed modes

Cons

  • Expensive

Job interview? First date? Sometimes it pays to look the part. And anyone seeking to arrive at significant formal occasions by electric scooter should consider the Unagi Model One E500. Referred to as the “iPhone” of electric scooters, this design-forward ride is the sleekest on the market, and it refuses to compromise for the sake of its looks in most other areas.

The dual 250-watt motors provide competitive power in the category, and a 15-mile per charge range places it squarely among its peers. Three speed modes ensure a comfortable ride speed for users of all skill levels, while an air pocket suspension system for absorbing bumps in the road creates a smoother—and potentially safer—ride.

Front and rear anti-lock brakes, meanwhile, are a key safety feature, while retro-futurists will appreciate the back friction brake that offers a foot braking option. Bright LED lights for visibility in low-light round out the Unagi Model One E500’s comprehensive safety package. For a smart option, read a review of the NIU KQi3 Pro Scooter.

Best for kids: Flare by Hover-1

Hover-1

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A suite of safety features and child-friendly design modifications make the Flare by Hover-1 the go-to electric scooter for younger riders.

Specs

  • Weight: 22 pounds
  • Range: 3 miles
  • Max speed: 8 mph

Pros

  • Safety-conscious design
  • Adjustable handlebars
  • Easy to store

Cons

  • Short range

The safety-first approach taken by Hover-1 equips the Flare with a thumb and brake throttle, disc brakes, an easy-to-read speed and battery display and an LED lighting system for high visibility in low light.

While its modest maximum speed of 8 miles per hour, courtesy of a 100W electric motor, is slower than adult models, it’s fast enough for adventurous kids. It can only be used for about 3 miles before it’ll need another charge—slightly less than its competitors—but it’s a tolerable inconvenience given this model’s strength in other areas.

An easy-to-fold design and lightweight frame also contribute to its family-friendliness, especially for those with limited garage space or multiple scooters to store. Adjustable handlebars give the Flare by Hover-1 longevity for growing riders as well. Multiple available colors and the neat, color-changing LED lighting system that illuminates both the stem and the platform also add playful, exciting touches for kids looking to impress their friends on the block.

Got a kid that’s 8+, and you trust them to travel a lil farther and faster? The Razor E100 has a run time of 40 minutes/range of 6.5 miles, and its 100-watt, high-torque, single-speed, chain-driven motor can reach 10 mph.

Best with seat: Hiboy S2 Pro

Hiboy

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With strong credentials in all areas, the Hiboy S2 Pro is our choice for a seated electric scooter thanks to its ultra-comfortable ride.

Specs

  • Weight: 36.3 pounds
  • Range: 46 miles
  • Max speed: 22 mph

Pros

  • Dual rear suspension
  • Regenerative battery
  • Hiboy app access

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Have to buy seat separately

Whether intended for longer journeys or more relaxed rides, electric scooters with seats are becoming increasingly available from the biggest names in the industry.

The Hiboy S2 Pro is our favorite because it pairs a high-quality saddle and dual rear suspensions that provide best-in-class performance on challenging road surfaces. Built-in headlights, cruise control, and solid performance in both speed and range tests add to the all-round appeal of this commuter model.

Bonus features include the Hiboy app, which allows users to customize speed and cruise control and also provides a secure remote locking function. Meanwhile, the regenerative battery harnesses excess kinetic energy from both downhill rides and braking, adding to the longevity of each charge. The scooter also features LED headlights, taillights, and sidelights, plus a water-resistance rating of IP54.

Best budget: GoTrax GXL V2

GoTrax

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The GoTrax GXL V2 is affordable, water-resistant, folds easily, and competes with higher-priced models on numerous fronts.

Specs

  • Weight: 26.98 pounds
  • Range: 12 miles
  • Max speed: 15.5 mph

Pros

  • Pneumatic wheels
  • Front and rear disc brakes
  • Greater range than most at this price point
  • Lightweight frame that folds

Cons

  • Lower top speed than some competitors

While the GXL V2’s price sits just above the most economical of entry-level models, it stands out for its sheer functionality. It’s light, has an impressive range at 12.5 miles per charge, and its essential features, including a simple, vibrant visual display and an anti-lock dual braking system, are effective and efficient. In some departments, it punches well above its price range, as GoTrax has found a way to build pneumatic tires and disc brakes into a scooter under $300.

It also carries an IPX4 water-resistance rating, which means it is protected from water splashes from any direction. It can handle a little rain, but you won’t want to leave it in inclement weather for too long. It also has air-filled tires instead of solid rubber so that it can generate more traction on slick asphalt.

Naturally, at this price point, certain features are missing, the most prominent being the lack of suspension, meaning those traveling routes in need of maintenance may need to upgrade their choice for a smoother ride. Users favoring portability, though, may see the upside of this omission as a weight-saving opportunity.

Things to consider when buying an electric scooter

Getting around on an electric scooter can save you time and money and be a lot more fun than public transportation. It could also have “positive effects in terms of environmental sustainability.” But to find the model that’s best for you, you should weigh the following factors:

Personal preferences

The first thing to consider when buying an electric scooter is your personal needs and preferences. Fairweather weekend riders may prioritize budget over build quality, while commuters will require a reliable, safe, and possibly water-resistant model. Aesthetic concerns are also worth considering, especially given the spectrum of available designs, from the hefty and unwieldy to the slim and elegant. Commuters may also prefer models that fold up neatly and can be stowed in the corner of an office or taken on public transportation.

Safety

We recommend that all riders consider the safety features of their ultimate purchase. It’s also important to know your local laws regarding the use of electric scooters. Riders who intend to travel at night should ensure their vehicle is equipped with adequate lighting. Some models include app-based remote locking functions, while high-quality displays and tires that can achieve considerable traction may also contribute to owner safety.

Price

The increase in popularity of electric scooters has seen a dramatic rise in available models and, thus, a broad price spectrum. While it is always tempting to opt for the most revered and equipped models on the market, it may make sense for some riders to look into budget options that offer exceptional value for money while still comfortably meeting their rider’s requirements.

FAQs

Q: How much does an electric scooter cost?

Electric scooters vary tremendously in price. Budget models can be found for less than $200, while a top-of-the-range vehicle can easily exceed $1,000 and beyond.

Q: How long does an electric scooter last?

The longevity of an electric scooter is dependent on many factors: intended use, build quality, weather, and rider maintenance. On average, electric scooters can be expected to last between three and five years, or 3,000 to 10,000 miles traveled.

Q: Which brand of electric scooter is best?

Segway has history on its side and continues to excel in an increasingly crowded field. Newcomers are carving niches in the market, though, with brands like GoTrax specializing in budget-friendly options and UNAGI setting the standard for streamlined aesthetics.

Q: What are the disadvantages of electric scooters?

The biggest potential drawback of any electric scooter is unreliable or non-existent safety features, with inadequate lights or brakes being particular areas of concern in models we felt unable to recommend here. Specialized vehicles may forgo certain features in favor of budget, weight, or aesthetics, in which case perceived advantages and disadvantages depend on the individual rider and their demands. For example, leisure riders may deem the Segway Ninebot MAX Original’s range per charge and solid build as surplus to their needs, rendering its price too high.

Final thoughts on the best electric scooters

Electric scooters are undeniably part of the mainstream, appealing to commuters and leisure riders alike for their speedy performance, efficiency, and capacity to be unfolded and ridden at any moment. Our selected models excelled either in specific areas or—as in the case of the Segway Ninebot MAX Original and GoTrax GXL V2—surpassed their peers across the board at their respective price points. First things first, though, decide when, where, and how you plan to ride.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric scooters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best bird feeders of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-bird-feeders/ Thu, 06 May 2021 11:36:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=281081
best bird feeders
Elvis Bueno, Unsplash

The best bird feeders are sure to attract beautiful, feathery flocks.

The post The best bird feeders of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best bird feeders
Elvis Bueno, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for hummingbirds red antique glass bird feeder Perky-Pet 8116-2 Red
SEE IT

This affordable and antique-inspired pick will attract hummingbirds to your yard with its nectar reservoir.

Best window see through bird feeder Nature Gear Window Bird Feeder
SEE IT

Get a glimpse of nature up-close with this see-through window adhesive pick.

Best squirrel-proof bird feeder with clever design Droll Yankees YF-M Yankee Flipper
SEE IT

Avoid your bird feed being eaten by pesky squirrels with slim and impenetrable design.

Birds are fascinating wildlife and endlessly enjoyable to watch. The best bird feeders will not only help support the local bird population, but they will also bring these delightful animals into your yard and into your trees, making bird watching possible from the comfort of your home. Feeders can be especially useful to birds in the late winter and early spring when their natural food sources are scarce. With so many feeders on the market, we’ll explain the differences and help you find a beautiful, durable feeder sure to bring you hours of viewing enjoyment. 

How we picked the best bird feeders

Narrowing down the best bird feeders requires you to consider the types of bird species you want to attract, the frequency of maintenance that is realistic for you, your overall budget, and the best location around your home. Backyard bird enthusiasts know that adding a feeder will not only attract birds, but any other wildlife that thinks they can steal a quick meal. If squirrels are a concern for you, consider a squirrel-proof bird feeder. Nectar-style bird feeders should be drip-proof to prevent unwanted ants and bees. 

Picking the perfect location will also affect how you shop. A bird feeder pole can be installed anywhere, while hanging style feeders require either a tree branch or another structure to allow for hook installation. Choosing a location that will keep your birds safe is important as well: low feeders near bushes can set birds up to be attacked by cats, while hanging feeders too far away from cover can endanger birds from other predators such as hawks. If you want to try and get the closest view you can for birdwatching, consider a window bird feeder which uses a translucent design suction cupped to your window. We’ve selected the best bird feeders on the market for your consideration.

The best bird feeders: Reviews & Recommendations

Attracting birds to your backyard can require some thought, but the payoffs for both kids and experienced bird watchers are immense. Here are the best bird feeders for a variety of situations you may encounter.

Best for hummingbirds: Perky-Pet 8116-2 Red

Perky-Pet

SEE IT

If you want to get the chance to view one of nature’s most amazing small birds zipping around, hovering, or even flying backward (they are the only birds that can), you can add a hummingbird feeder to your yard. The best hummingbird feeders are brightly colored (evidence suggests bright red, yellow, and orange feeders work best),  easy to fill with nectar, and offer a drip- and leak-proof design that only a hummingbird can reach. 

This antique-looking hummingbird feeder comes in several vibrant colors, and holds a sizable 24 ounces of nectar. It’s easy to fill and screw on, although the small opening does require the use of a bottle brush for deep cleaning. Take care when cleaning, as this bottle is actually clear glass that is painted to attract more birds.

Best window: Nature Gear Window Bird Feeder

Nature Gear

SEE IT

Take the squinting and the binoculars out of the equation, and bring the birds to you with the best window bird feeder. Window bird feeders are typically constructed out of clear acrylic and mount directly to your window with suction cups. There really is no closer way to attract birds, other than the birds being inside your home (which we don’t recommend). 

Strong suction cups keep this charming acrylic window bird feeder attached securely to your windows. The feeding tray and house detach for easier cleaning. A circular cutout helps to increase the visibility of birds from inside your home. 

Best for cardinals: Perky-Pet Red Cardinal Bird Feeder

Perky-Pet

SEE IT

If you’re interested in attracting colorful, non-migratory species, consider a cardinal bird feeder. These colorful birds are some of the most awe-inspiring and beautiful species in nature. Local cardinal populations will benefit from the extra food in a feeder particularly in the fall and winter months when their food sources are scarce. 

This feeder holds up to 2.5 pounds of black-oil sunflower seeds, a favorite snack for cardinals. The circular perch design lets cardinals sit and rest while they snack, and the red-on-red color protects, by helping them blend in. A special zinc-plated finish makes this metal design more durable and resistant to rust.

Best squirrel-proof: Droll Yankees YF-M Yankee Flipper

Droll Yankees

SEE IT

There’s a reason why there are so many cartoon scenes about this— it can be downright comical to watch how many inventive ways squirrels come up with to steal food from bird feeders. While amusing, depending on your level of seriousness at attracting birds, it’s important to find a good squirrel-proof bird feeder.

Easy to assemble, this squirrel-proof bird feeder uses weight detection to start spinning the feeder sending any squirrels that make it on, right off again. This squirrel-spinning bird feeder can hold up to five pounds of birdseed and offers four feeding ports.

Best budget: First Nature 3055 32-ounce Hummingbird Feeder

First Nature

SEE IT

Luckily, it doesn’t have to cost a lot of money to feed your neighborhood birds. There are many budget-priced bird feeders on the market that are well-rated and attractive. This is a simple, well-reviewed, affordable hummingbird feeder. This feeder features an extra-wide mouth which makes the reservoir easy to fill and clean, and it can hold up to 32 ounces of nectar.

Things to consider before purchasing a bird feeder

What birds do you want to attract?

Hummingbirds spend their lives searching and consuming food. In fact, they need to drink nectar every ten minutes to maintain their fast metabolism. You can make your own nectar at home using granulated sugar and water, or buy a premade nectar. Hummingbirds can visit 1,000 to 2,000 flowers a day in search of their food, which means that regardless of where the nectar comes from, they will be grateful for the easy energy from a well-stocked feeder. Known for their amazing memories, hummingbirds are able to remember nectar locations and may pay a visit to your feeder during their migrations. 

To make your yard a hummingbird’s paradise, garden experts advise luring the birds with nectar-producing flowers, either planted in the ground or in pots and planters. Once in your yard, they will discover your feeder and will be sure to remember their new feeding spot. It’s best to keep your feeder in the partial shade to avoid any spoiling of nectar. To keep ants and bees at bay, keep the exterior of the feeder clean and dry, and give it a wash every one to two weeks with warm soap and water.

Cardinals are most attracted to food sources that are easy and safe for them to access. A cardinal feeder is typically a cylindrical tube (which is either hung up, or supported from below), or a rectangular style, which includes a wide trough at the base filled with seeds. Platform bird feeders are another option, but these can become overwhelmed with other types of birds as well. Stock your cardinal bird feeder with fresh sunflower seeds to make your red beauties happy and healthy.

Build quality

The best window bird feeders are lightweight, just large enough to house your feeding bluebird, and constructed out of good-quality clear acrylic. Look for window feeders that have a pitched roof design to provide shelter from snow and rain. Another important feature is a feeding tray that includes drainage holes. If any water enters the feeder, it will drain away, which will help prevent the seeds from spoiling. 

Most window bird feeders are not designed to be squirrel-proof, so if that’s a concern you may need to experiment with different windows and heights to try and prevent these crafty critters from leaping or dangling onto the window feeder for stolen snacks. Window bird feeders are usually affordable, and a fun way to experiment with bird watching. Reviewers rave about how much children and house cats enjoy these as well. 

Tired of squirrels stealing your bird seed?

Squirrel-proof bird feeders use a few methods to deter squirrels. Some utilize a simple, metal-made tube feeder with chew-resistant enclosures. Another solution can be pole-mounted feeders, which should be a minimum of six feet off the ground, and far enough away from jump-off points that squirrels can use to leap onto the feeder. Finally, some squirrel-proof bird feeders have an engineered design which uses weight detection, so if a squirrel stands on the feeder the seed port immediately closes. All of these options should help keep your bird feeder safe for only birds.

Looking to attract birds without spending a lot of money?

When it comes to features, you can expect more cost-conscious feeders to be constructed out of less expensive materials like plastic. Also expect the size and capacity to be smaller for budget feeders.

The majority of the best bird feeders for hummingbirds (outside of handmade fancy specialty items) are very reasonable in price, as are the majority of small window feeders. Hanging feeders range from very inexpensive to high priced. The good news is there are a lot of options and especially if this is a new hobby, it can make sense to start off small and see if you enjoy owning, viewing, and maintaining bird feeders in your garden before you invest in the more expensive models.

FAQs

Q: How do I choose a bird feeder?

When choosing a bird feeder, you should consider the type of local birds you are trying to attract to your yard. Certain species prefer specific types of feeders, and will be most likely to visit your yard if you accommodate their preference. For example, sparrows and cardinals are likely to visit ground feeders, while suet feeders are popular with chickadees and woodpeckers. If you are trying to attract hummingbirds, they require a special feeder which dispenses their favorite energy source—nectar. If you want a variety, you can always consider adding a couple of different types of bird feeders.

Q: Are bird feeders good for birds?

Bird feeders are good for birds, as long as you install the feeder in a safe location and offer a fresh, healthy blend of seeds. Bird feeders are especially useful during the times of the year when birds’ natural seed sources are limited like late winter/early spring. It isn’t necessary to feed birds in the summer, although you still can if you enjoy their twittering company year-round.  Safe locations for bird feeders are far enough away from predators, but close enough to another natural shelter that they can take cover if needed. 

Q: What food do birds like the most?

Birds love seeds, grains, and nuts such as black-oil sunflower seeds, white proso millet, peanuts, suet cakes (a mixture that includes beef fat), nyjer seed and cracked corn. While it’s common to see bread crumbs thrown for birds, this is not a good food source for birds as it doesn’t provide adequate nutrients. The humane society advises avoiding chocolate (it is toxic for birds) as well as table scraps which can attract rats.

Our final thoughts on the best bird feeders

The best bird feeders will attract fascinating birds into your yard, while helping your local bird populations thrive. Whether you wish to bring hummingbirds, cardinals, or a variety of local birds to your home, the best feeders will allow for safe, comfortable feeding and keep birdseed fresh. With options in size, color, style, and price, there’s no reason not to start birding right from your own window.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bird feeders of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best grill covers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-grill-covers/ Mon, 07 Aug 2023 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=561438
The best grill covers will help your protect your grill from the elements.

Protect your grill from the elements and during the off months with the help of these durable covering.

The post The best grill covers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best grill covers will help your protect your grill from the elements.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Weber makes some of the best grill covers. Weber 7138 Premium Cover Spirit II
SEE IT

Made of durable waterproof and UV-resistant canvas, this grill cover is an ideal option for compatible grills.

Best heavy-duty Grillman makes the best grill cover that's almost rip-proof. iCOVER Grill Cover 50in, 600D Grill Cover
SEE IT

Blowing debris and powerful storms won’t affect the heavy-duty durability of this grill cover.

Best budget Tvird makes one of the best grill covers at a budget-friendly price. TVIRD BBQ Grill Cover 30-inch Waterproof
SEE IT

This affordable, waterproof grill cover is ideal for protecting small grills.

When the smell of cooking hot dogs and hamburgers is wafting through the air, a grill cover may be the last thing on your mind. But grills are vulnerable to rusting and corrosion caused by rain, sleet, snow, and hot, humid air, so a cover is a must if you want that same satisfaction for multiple seasons. Grills can also be susceptible to UV radiation damage and blowing sand, dirt, and other debris, so it’s important to keep the grill properly protected with thick, durable material to preserve and extend the grill’s life. Here are our recommendations for the best grill covers to keep your grill in good working order for many years to come.

How we chose the best grill covers

Grilling on the porch or patio is a favorite pastime that has led to our team having years of experience with grills, grill tools, and regular grill maintenance. We compiled this list of top products using this extensive experience and a significant amount of product research that focused on selecting the top grill covers from over 30 different options.

Key considerations during the research and selection process included the size, material, maintenance requirements, protective qualities, and any special features that made a product stand out from competitors. The selected products fell into several different size categories to provide a suitable range representing the grill cover sizes that are typically available. This list also includes polyester and canvas grill covers but left vinyl options out due to their propensity for drying, cracking, and fading.

Most grill covers that were considered could be maintained relatively easily with semi-regular cleaning, but we also looked for products that were capable of providing top-level protection against rain, sun, and debris. Some special features that were noted included built-in pockets, vents, and secure straps to ensure that the grill cover would not be blown off of the grill during a storm.

The best grill covers: Reviews & Recommendations

Grill covers should fit comfortably over the entire grill without stretching out the material, but the cover should not be so big that it actually touches the ground. So whether you prefer gas grills or charcoal grills, a cover is an essential grill accessory.

Best overall: Weber 7138 Premium Cover Spirit II

Weber

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Equipped with Velcro fastening straps, this durable grill cover can keep your grill safe during strong storms.

Specs

  • Material: PVC-lined polyester
  • Dimensions: 48 x 17.7 x 42 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, weather-resistant, UV-resistant

Pros

  • Built-in UV inhibitors
  • Fastening straps to secure the grill cover
  • Breathable fabric for increased ventilation
  • Weather-resistant PVC coating

Cons

  • Custom design may not fit all grills

Weber has long been known for producing superior grills and grill accessories, including tools, thermostats, and covers, so it shouldn’t be surprising that this durable product is a top option for individuals with a Weber Spirit II grill. This cover measures 48 inches wide by 17.7 inches deep by 42 inches high and will properly cover most grills that fall within these measurements. However, it should be noted that this grill cover is custom-made for Weber grills, so the cover may not fit all grills, depending on the side table’s shape. 

The Velcro fastening straps can help to secure the cover for a tighter fit or to keep it from flying away during a storm. This grill cover is made with breathable polyester fabric that has been treated with a weather-resistant PVC coating to ensure that the grill cover can protect the grill from rain, sleet, and snow. It can also shield the grill from harmful UV radiation due to built-in UV inhibitors that slow discoloration and block UV rays.

Best heavy-duty: iCOVER Grill Cover 50in, 600D Grill Cover

iCover

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Two built-in handles and adjustable straps help to secure the sturdy, heavy-duty oxford canvas and ensure the grill remains protected in clear, overcast, or stormy weather.

Specs

  • Material: PVC-lined oxford canvas
  • Dimensions: 50 x  22 x 40 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, rip-resistant, UV-resistant, side handles

Pros

  • Fastening straps and handles to help secure the grill cover
  • Heavy-duty PVC-lined oxford canvas construction
  • Concealed air vent to reduce moisture accumulation
  • Multiple sizes available

Cons

  • Custom-fit for top brands, may not fit some grills

To protect your grill from the elements, it’s important to invest in a durable product that can withstand harsh conditions without tearing or leaking. The iCOVER grill cover is made with UV-resistant oxford canvas material that is specifically designed for enduring tough weather so the grill can remain safe. It has an interior PVC coating that waterproofs the material, while the oxford canvas resists tears, rips, and other damage to the exterior.

The grill cover is designed with built-in handles for better control while putting the cover on or taking it off, and it has fastening straps to ensure that the cover will not be blown away during a bad storm. This version measures 50 inches wide by 22 inches deep by 40 inches high, though this product is also available in six alternate sizes. However, this grill cover is designed for Weber, Char-Broil, Nexgrill, and Brinkmann grills, so it may not fit some lesser-known grill brands.

Best rip-proof: Grillman Premium (58-Inch) BBQ Grill Cover

Grillman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With adjustable fastening straps and weather-resistant construction, the durable, rip-proof canvas grill cover is ideal for larger grills.

Specs

  • Material: PVC-lined oxford canvas
  • Dimensions: 58 x 24 x 48 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, rip-proof, UV-resistant

Pros

  • Rip-proof material and stitching
  • Adjustable fastening straps
  • Multiple sizes available

Cons

  • Grill cover may hang on the ground with shorter grills

This Grillman grill cover is made with premium oxford canvas with an interior PVC lining to protect the grill from rain, sleet, and snow. The canvas exterior is resistant to UV rays, but the material and even the stitching are rip-proof, making this grill cover a great choice for yards with a lot of blowing debris. It’s equipped with adjustable fastening straps that help to secure the grill cover during powerful storms. Just put the cover on the grill and tighten the straps to the desired tautness, then secure the hook-and-loop Velcro straps.

Intended to be used with large grills, the cover measures 58 inches wide by 24 inches deep by 48 inches high. Unfortunately, this means that the grill cover may hang on the ground if used with smaller grills, which can lead to an increase in moisture accumulation, mold, and mildew growth. However, the grill cover comes in six different sizes, so a more suitable size may be available.

Best adjustable: Classic Accessories Veranda Water-Resistant Grill Cover

Classic Accessories

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A built-in storage pocket, handle, air vents, elastic hem cord, and adjustable click-close straps give the user a range of features and functions for more effective grill protection.

Specs

  • Material: PVC-lined polyester
  • Dimensions: 52 x 24 x 44 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, UV-resistant, handle

Pros

  • Bound seams increase water resistance
  • Adjustable fastening straps and elastic hem cord
  • Built-in storage pocket, handles, and vents

Cons

  • Vulnerable to ripping and tearing damage

The Classic Accessories grill cover is equipped with adjustable fastening straps with strong plastic click-close buckles to ensure the cover will not slip off the grill once it is secured. This grill cover also has an elastic hem cord that can be tightened around the base of the grill to prevent the cover from sliding and to shield the grill from water that may splash up from the ground. It measures 52 inches wide by 24 deep by 44 inches high and is made with waterproof PVC-lined polyester to protect the grill from rain, sleet, and snow.

The grill cover has integrated vents to improve ventilation and reduce moisture accumulation. It’s also made with a built-in pocket on the front of the cover where accessories, like grill gloves, can be kept safe when the grill is not being used. Padded handles in the top of the cover make it easier to put on or take off. Still, the polyester material isn’t as durable as canvas, leaving the cover susceptible to ripping and tearing damage from blowing debris and careless users.

Best budget: TVIRD BBQ Grill Cover 30-inch Waterproof Grill Cover

Tvird

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Designed with built-in side handles, Velcro fastening straps, and a drawstring to tighten the base, this affordable grill cover is easy to put on but difficult for high winds to dislodge.

Specs

  • Material: Oxford canvas with PVC coating
  • Dimensions: 30 x 26 x 43 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, rip-proof, UV-resistant, side handles

Pros

  • Built-in side handles
  • Fastening straps for a more secure fit
  • Durable, rip-proof canvas
  • Waterproof PVC coating

Cons

  • Small size isn’t suitable for larger grills

The TVIRD grill cover is a premium quality product available at an affordable price because it has a relatively compact size that isn’t suitable for larger grills. However, users with a small grill will get excellent protection from the thick, durable oxford canvas grill cover treated with a PVC coating to increase weather resistance. In fact, this coating makes the grill cover waterproof and resistant to UV radiation, protecting the grill from corrosion, rusting, and discoloration.

The thick canvas material is rip-proof, but it also serves as an insulating layer that helps keep the grill safe during the freezing winter months. It measures 30 inches wide by 26 inches deep by 43 inches high and comes with a storage bag to keep the cover safe and pest-free while the grill is in use. Two large side handles make it easier to put the grill cover on and take it off, though the Velcro fastening straps and the drawstring base can keep the grill cover secure, even during strong winds.

Things to consider before buying a grill cover

When you’re deciding on the best grill cover to protect the grill from inclement weather, it’s key to learn about the most important product factors to select a product that suits your needs. A little extra time considering the size, material, maintenance requirements, and protection capabilities of the grill cover will help you make the right choice.

Size

The reason to have a grill cover is to protect the grill by covering it when it’s not being used. The cover should prevent rain, sleet, snow, and UV radiation from damaging the grill, but for this to occur, it needs to be the right size. If the cover is too small, it won’t be able to fit over the top of the grill, leaving it exposed to the elements. However, it’s also important that the grill cover isn’t too big because the sides and bottom of the cover will hang on the ground, trapping moisture and creating an ideal environment for mold and mildew growth.

The grill cover should completely cover the top and sides of the grill, but it should hang about one or two inches from the ground to allow for proper ventilation. To ensure you invest in the right grill cover, measure your grill from top to bottom and side to side with the side table or side burner fully extended. With these measurements in hand, it will be easier to select an appropriate grill cover, though you may also want to look for custom products that are made specifically for the make and model of your grill. Many grill cover manufacturers design the cover to fit popular models, so you may be able to find an exact match.

Material

The three primary materials commonly used to make grill covers are vinyl, polyester, and canvas. While each material affords the grill some protection, each option has benefits and shortcomings.

Vinyl grill covers are naturally waterproof, so they will provide a substantial amount of protection from rain. Keep in mind, though, that thin vinyl grill covers are prone to drying and cracking under the hot sun, so this material may not be the best for protecting the grill from UV radiation. Also, when the vinyl begins to crack, it exposes the grill to rain, sleet, and snow. That said, these grill covers do tend to be more affordable than canvas options.

Polyester is the most popular material for grill covers because it is affordable and durable, helping to protect the grill for years before needing to be replaced. While polyester isn’t inherently waterproof, it is typically treated with a PVC layer that is designed to resist water, UV radiation, and debris. However, polyester is more susceptible to tearing than thick, canvas grill covers.

Canvas is primarily used to make premium or high-end grill covers, so users can expect to pay a higher price for these products. However, the premium price is well worth it due to the thick, durable construction that’s resistant to rain, sleet, snow, UV radiation, dirt, dust, sand, and other debris. This material can also withstand high- and low-temperature extremes instead of drying and cracking under the hot sun or after being frozen during the winter months.

Protection

Anyone can throw a simple sheet or tarp over a grill to try and keep rain and sun from damaging the metal, but that doesn’t mean that the grill is properly protected. Instead, invest in a grill cover in a size that’s specifically designed for the purpose of protecting the grill. Research grill cover products and consider the various protection capabilities offered by each in order to find the right cover for your grill.

UV-resistant coatings prevent grill cover cracking and fading, while also protecting the grill from extended exposure to the sun. Waterproof coatings keep rain, sleet, and snow from reaching the grill but can also prevent water accumulation outside and inside the grill cover.

Rip-proof grill covers are made with thick, durable material that resists tearing damage. These covers are great for homes with inexperienced users that may be too rough when removing or replacing the cover.

Air vents can be built into the grill cover to increase airflow and reduce water accumulation.

Handles may not seem like they offer a lot of protection, but having one or more handles on a cover does reduce the likelihood of accidentally tearing the cover while removing or replacing it because the handles give the user a purpose-built area to grab and manipulate the cover.

FAQs

Q: How much does a grill cover cost?

The cost of a grill cover depends on the materials it’s made out of, its size, and the protection it provides. A durable custom model from a well-known brand, such as the Weber 7138 Premium Cover Spirit II, costs about $83. A more basic affordable option like the TVIRD BBQ Grill Cover 30-inch Waterproof Grill Cover will run you just $15. The other options on this list are in the $30 to $40 range.

Q: What material is best for a grill cover?

Grill covers are made of several different materials, including vinyl, polyester, and canvas, though the best material for a grill cover is thick, durable, waterproof, and UV-resistant canvas. Canvas grill covers do come at a higher price, but the trade-off is superior grill protection.

Q: Are all grill covers waterproof?

One of the main reasons to have a grill cover is to protect the grill from rain, sleet, and snow. That’s why most grill covers are either made with a waterproof material or are treated with a waterproof PVC coating to ensure that the grill is properly protected against the elements.

Q: Is it better to cover a grill or leave it uncovered?

Although a grill can remain uncovered after use, you should use a grill cover to preserve and protect the grill. Remember, the paint on a grill is vulnerable to peeling and chipping when it is regularly left exposed to the sun, wind, and rain. Once the paint begins to peel, the metal construction is significantly more vulnerable to rusting and corrosion, so it’s better to cover the grill after it has cooled down.

Q: Should a grill cover touch the ground?

Wanting to protect a grill properly may encourage some users to find a grill cover that completely encloses the grill from the top to the bottom. However, the grill cover is actually supposed to end a few inches from the bottom of the grill, and it should not be touching the ground. This gap at the bottom of the cover increases air circulation to prevent water accumulation, which can lead to mold and mildew growth.

Final thoughts on choosing the best grill cover

All the options on our list will help protect your grill from the elements. The thick, durable construction of the Weber 7138 Grill Cover makes this product an excellent choice to keep the grill properly protected. However, the TVIRD BBQ Grill Cover is a more affordable choice that comes with many of the same protective qualities for a smaller grill.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best grill covers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hydroelectric-generators/ Sat, 29 Jul 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559517
Waterlilly turbine
Waterlily

These surprisingly powerful devices can turn the power of running water into current.

The post The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Waterlilly turbine
Waterlily

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best portable waterlily turbine WaterLily Turbine
SEE IT

This model is small enough to carry with you into the wild.

Best overall Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine
SEE IT

This reliable model can power a small home all on its own.

Best budget Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator Water 12V DC 10W Micro Hydro Water Charging Tool Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator
SEE IT

Install it on your pipes and get up to 10W of power.

Hydroelectric generators produce electricity by harnessing the force of running water. This may seem like a novelty or impractical for home use, but you’d be surprised. While hydropower—or the use of the kinetic energy of running water to generate power—has been in use since ancient times, it is most associated these days with massive industrial damming projects, like the Oahe Dam and the Hoover Dam in the United States. But, hydropower can exist on an extremely small scale.

The benefits are obvious: you can generate power from an available resource—running water (with some models, even the water in your home’s pipes). In addition to possibly lowering your energy bills, allowing you to run additional electrical equipment, and potentially providing other benefits, utilizing hydro can take the pressure off the electricity grid, provide electricity if living off-the-grid, and offer backup power in the event of a blackout. Regarding sustainability, generating your own hydropower can reduce your use of fossil fuels and, consequently, your carbon footprint. According to the Department of Energy, about 7 percent of the nation’s electricity (and 37 percent of its renewable electricity) comes from hydropower—but with your own generator, you may be able to help those numbers grow, even slightly. Better yet, unlike large-scale hydroelectric projects, which can be extremely damaging to river ecology, small-scale hydro has relatively minimal effects on the immediate environment. Here are our picks for the best hydroelectric generators.

How we chose the best hydroelectric generators

We looked through about a dozen models to find the top hydroelectric generators. Admittedly, there aren’t a ton of options in the middle. There are a few larger-scale, ultimately stationary models that require a good amount of flow but can usually power a home, as well as tiny models that are best for producing small amounts of power. But we did find a couple of relevant models that—while maybe not meeting all your power needs—can provide extra energy and are particularly useful in a camping or off-grid setting. 

When purchasing a hydroelectric generator, sustainability is primarily in the concept: if you have running water near you, you can access a freely available resource to produce, potentially, a lot of electricity. Again, unlike with massive industrial hydro projects, effects near you should be minimal, and you can take pressure off the grid or other less sustainable energy sources. If you want to get deeply technical about it, you can calculate hydropower that you produce, and compare it to grid power, estimating both the relative cost and carbon impact of the energy you use.

The best hydroelectric generators: Recommendations & Reviews

If you’re on this page, then you likely know exactly what you’re looking for because these are somewhat complex machines that require lots of infrastructure to go with them. We’ve selected the best to fit specific uses, but products always overlap.

Best overall: Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine

Scott Hydro

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is an extremely well-built machine that—even with low head—can reliably power a small home with steady water flow.

Specs

  • Rated at 1500W output (but can reach 2000W)
  • Largely self-cleaning
  • Made in USA

Pros

  • Provides ample power
  • Very sturdy

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Additional components required

If you live near a decent, steady source of running water, this high-quality machine can, once installed, probably provide consistent power for your home year-round. Your electricity bills will be negligible, you will not have to worry about the weather (as you do for solar or wind power), and you can sustainably produce consistent electricity with limited environmental impact.

ABS Alaskan, the maker of this machine, has been making high-quality alternative energy devices for over 30 years, geared toward the conditions in Alaska—a state with over 12,000 rivers—but applicable all over. The Scott Hydro Turbine, with a 1500-watt output, can almost certainly provide the energy you need for your home. While it requires a steady flow of water, it only needs a 20-foot drop in “head” (a term explained in our “Things to consider …” section near the bottom)—relatively small given the power provided. Once installed, it’s very easy to maintain—it is effectively self-cleaning, using the water flow, with only three rotating components.

On the con side, these units are pricey, and installation does take some work, requiring a relatively simple water diversion and a small shelter to protect the unit. You’ll also need an electric connection kit, not to mention batteries (if intending to store power). But once it’s up and running, it can provide lasting, sustainable power for years.

Best value: Energy Systems and Design Watter Buddy

Energy Systems and Design

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a modest price and small size, the Watter Buddy can provide a non-insubstantial 200W of power.

Specs

  • Type: Generates DC power via rectifier
  • Weight: 8 lbs

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Multiple nozzle sizes provided to match flow

Cons

  • Likely cannot provide all your power needs

The Watter Buddy is an innovative machine from Energy Systems and Design, a Canadian company providing off-grid hydro solutions for four decades. While the company produces a couple of larger (and more expensive models), the Watter Buddy meets you in the middle. For a modest price, it can provide a considerable amount—though probably not all—of your power needs. But don’t discount 200W. Whether you need supplementary off-grid power, are looking for electricity for a small workshop, or have other relevant needs, with steady water flow, this machine can do a lot—potentially lessening your reliance on a traditional electric generator. And you don’t have to be off-grid—this can even be effectively used with traditional household pipes.

This product is convenient in a few other ways. Multiple nozzle sizes allow you to match the flow you use to generate power easily. A built-in rectifier converts from AC to DC power, allowing electricity produced to be easily sent to batteries or compatible devices. Finally, its very small size allows you to move it around conveniently as needed.

Best portable: WaterLily Turbine

WaterLily

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The WaterLily Turbine is easy to set up and use anywhere you can access running water, providing charge capabilities for both 12V and USB devices.

Specs

  • Produces up to 2A (on 12V output); or up to 3A (via USB output)
  • 10 ft. charge cord
  • 1 km/h minimum water flow required

Pros

  • Can charge cellphones, battery banks, lights, and more
  • Under 3 lbs.

Cons

  • Likely can’t provide for all power needs

For something easily transportable but extremely reliable, check out the WaterLily Turbine. This innovative little device can be set up virtually anywhere you have running water, producing (at highest power) up to 15 W. With good flow, a small device (cellphone, camera, etc.) should charge at roughly the same rate as it would if plugged into a traditional wall outlet. The WaterLily also offers unique accessories, including its WindLily attachment, which allows you to convert the device to harvest wind energy, and its SolarLily panels, which allows for a solar harvesting component.

In terms of sustainability, again, a small hydroelectric generator has the virtue of harnessing natural flow with minimal ecological impacts. According to the company, using a WaterLily can provide the equivalent power of 50 AA batteries in a day. The company also looks to promote its values by collaborating with organizations that help deploy WaterLily turbines in the developing world.

Best budget: Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator

Yosoo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a very affordable price, this small Yosoo generator reliably generates up to 10 W of power and can be used on your household pipes.

Specs

  • 12V, 10W output
  • 3.2 oz
  • Made in China

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Reliable, steady

Cons

  • Provides very limited power

The Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator is a small, handy device that neatly hooks up to the pipes in your home. For an extremely affordable price, you can use water that, in most cases, should flow through your pipes anyway to generate a little extra electricity. It’s not useful for big devices, but it can provide additional capacity for lightning, charging for phones or other devices, or similar uses that require comparable power.

While this generator may not make a huge difference if you’re tied into the grid, it can be very handy if you live off-grid, where every little bit of power matters. Keep some lights on, charge up your phone or radio, or fulfill other needs based on existing water flow. 

Best lightweight: Beduan Micro Water Turbine Generator

Beduan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is another small, inexpensive, and simple option that can provide some extra power in your home.

Specs

  • 3.17 oz
  • 12 V, 10 W
  • 0.5” G thread

Pros

  • Very light
  • Affordable
  • Easy to install

Cons

  • Provides limited power
  • Can be noisy

This small device from Beduan provides another handy way to generate a little extra power from water running through a pipe, like a shower or through a hose. Its recommended water flow for full power is about 26 L/min, and with 10 W, you can provide a little extra power to charge a small device or power a light. While that certainly won’t be enough to run your washing machine or fridge, it can still be helpful—again, especially in off-grid situations, where power may be limited.

In practice, this little device from Beduan can make a handy addendum to your stock of energy-efficient tech. It makes up for its limitations by being both extremely affordable, as well as lightweight and easy to install.

Best off-grid: PowerSpout TRG

PowerSprout

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a high-caliber model that comes in high-head, medium-head, and low-head options, with the capacity to provide substantial off-grid power.

Specs

  • Head range is 6.6 to 100 feet
  • Maximum flow 254 gpm
  • 16.9×16.1×13.8”

Pros

  • Customizable to different types of flows
  • Relatively affordable given power provided

Cons

  • Can be challenging to set up

PowerSpout is a New Zealand-based company that offers an assortment of hydroelectric generators. We’ve linked to their medium-head option here, but they also make a high-head and low-head model. This variety is great, allowing you to carefully select the right model for your given conditions. Bear in mind, though, that setup can be tricky, and it is best to buy from a dealer.

The PowerSpout TRG is a high-quality machine that—for a pretty modest price—can generate 1.6 kW daily with adequate flow. The company even notes that “stacking” units is an option for generating additional power. The turbine will come with pretty much everything you need for setup, and by ordering from a dealer, you can go over your system specs to be sure you are prepared to easily get it up and running. While these are ideal for off-grid setups, they can be ordered such that the system voltage can easily be tied into the grid. In short, a great model for all situations.

Best small: Suneco 500W Hydro Turbine

Suneco

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If your water flow has decent head, this fairly small turbine can produce a decent amount of power that can cut down your electricity budget or provide extra off-grid power.

Specs

  • Rated for 12-18 m. head
  • Output: 500 W
  • Weight: 27 kgs.

Pros

  • Consistent, fairly substantial power
  • Good safety protection

Cons

  • Requires considerable head to generate power

Suneco Hydro has been developing micro hydro turbines since 1991—and they have several options. The 500W hydro turbine is a modest size that slots in right in the middle; it’s not too large or expensive but is substantial enough to make a difference in terms of power provided.

This particular model, weighing in at 27 kgs., is small enough that you can most likely set it up yourself. While it requires a somewhat considerable 12 m. of head to generate power, if you have the setting for it, it can make a great option for an on or off-grid property. However, it should be noted that Suneco Hydro is based in China, which can mean longer shipping times, and may potentially involve more challenges when working with customer service.

What to consider when shopping for a hydroelectric generator

Many factors go into choosing the ideal hydroelectric generator. How bulky is the generator? Is it portable? How much water does it require to run? How much power does it generate? Where can it be run? Can you set it up yourself? Depending on your needs—whether you want it for the home, a workshop, or for use when out in the backcountry—you will probably hone in on particular products.

Size

Hydropower comes in many sizes. According to the Bureau of Reclamation, for instance, the Hoover Dam generates 4 billion kilowatt-hours annually. On the far opposite end of the spectrum is pico hydro, which can generate up to 5 kW of electricity. The next most substantial type of hydro is micro hydropower, which generates up to 100 kW of electricity. (Hydropower continues up in size after that—encompassing mini hydro, which produces 100 kW to 1 MW of electricity, small hydro, and so on—but virtually any system for use on an individual scale will fall into the micro or pico category.) 

Keep your needs in mind. If you’re looking for something to use while camping, you’ll want to focus on the smallest and lightest end of the spectrum; if you want to power your house from the creek that runs through your property, you may need a sizable generator. 

Water source

While hydropower is conventionally associated with large rivers, any flow of water can potentially produce hydropower. The output could possibly offer more power than you think. Two terms are useful to know to understand how to calculate hydropower’s potential output. “Head” denotes the height gradient over which water moves from input to output; “flow” is the amount of water going through the system. These two numbers can be used to calculate the rough power output of a system.

How does the water source come in? Naturally, heavier running water over steeper terrain generates more power. If you have a substantial stream on your property, it’s very possible that you can generate a considerable amount of electricity from it. But hydropower can work even on a tiny scale. For instance, some systems are built to run off the water in your pipes. When looking for a personal hydro system, give consideration to the source of the water—and also consider seasonal factors, like whether a stream tends to dry up in the summer.

Generator type

According to the Department of Energy, “reaction” and “impulse” turbines are the two main classes of hydro turbines. Hydropower is not terribly complicated, but for the purposes of home use, you mainly need to determine what fits your particular setting.

The main difference between the two is that reaction turbines generate energy based on water pressure, while impulse turbines generate energy based on water velocity. Impulse turbines are best with high head and low flow (while reaction turbines are the inverse). Impulse turbines are more common in microhydro settings, although propeller turbines are a type of reaction turbine that can be used for microhydro.

FAQs

Q: How much do hydroelectric generators cost?

In a generator, the cost of a generator will be correlated with its power output. The most miniature, portable generators—which may produce only a few watts, can be reasonably priced. Larger generators surveyed, provided they have access to a steady water supply, may be able to power your home—and more. But these ones can cost several thousand dollars and may require supplementary equipment, like inverters, wiring, and batteries. Of course, you can always save and look for refurbished options on sites like eBay, Amazon Renewed, and others. 

Q: What size hydroelectric generator do I need?

It all depends on your needs! If you want one that provides enough power to charge your phone, one of the smallest options above might be sufficient. If you want to generate most of your home’s electricity via a hydro generator, you may need one producing 1000W or more.

Q: Can you power a house with a hydroelectric generator?

It depends on your power needs, the amount of water flow you can access, and the size of your generator. According to ABS Alaskan, the average American home without electric heat uses about 1000W consistently (less than the 1500 W put out by their Scott Hydro Turbine—meaning that device could power an average house). You can add up the wattage used by regularly running devices in your home—refrigerator, lights, washing machine, etc.—and compare them to the output of your generator.

Q: Will I need to purchase any additional equipment?

Sometimes. If you want to store power, you must purchase batteries, typically lead-acid or lithium. Both options are fairly expensive, but once purchased, they can usually last many years. Depending on the model, you may also need an inverter or other equipment to bring power from the generator to batteries or appliances. Be sure to check the specs on whichever generator you end up purchasing.

Q: What can I do with my hydro or old generator when it no longer works?

With good care, your hydro generator should last many years. Because these units tend to be specialized and each model is unique, check with the dealer or manufacturer about cleaning and maintenance instructions to ensure the machine lasts as long as possible (some, like the Scott Hydro 1500 W Water Turbine, are largely self-cleaning once set up.)

If your new hydro generator will replace your gas generator, you may be looking for ways to recycle your old machine. LoadUp is one company that can help recycle your old gas generate, salvaging as many valuable materials as possible. Some scrap companies, like Rockaway Recycling, may pay cash for old generators. Reaching out to scrap yards near you may suggest other ways to salvage usable materials from your generator.

Final thoughts on the best hydroelectric generators

If you’re looking for a serious way to generate consistent hydropower from a decent amount of flowing water on your property, check out the Scott Hydro 1500 W Water Turbine. If you’re looking for a smaller and more portable option, the WaterLily Turbine is a great choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best garden kneelers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-garden-kneelers/ Fri, 28 Jul 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559827
The best garden kneelers allow you to tend to your flowers and vegetables more easily.

Take the strain out of tending your flowers and vegetables with these handy helpers.

The post The best garden kneelers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best garden kneelers allow you to tend to your flowers and vegetables more easily.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Tomcare makes one of the best garden kneelers. TomCare Garden Kneeler
SEE IT

This multi-use kneeler bench features a sturdy steel frame, thick padding, and extra storage pockets for more comfortable gardening.

Best ergonomic Vertex makes one of the best gardening kneelers with an ergonomic design. Vertex Garden Rocker Comfort Kneeler Bench
SEE IT

Made from rust-proof and easy-to-clean plastic, this kneeler bench has an ergonomic design to make kneeling and sitting more comfortable.

Best budget Gorilla Grip makes one of the best gardening kneelers at a budget-friendly price. Gorilla Grip Thick Kneeling Pad
SEE IT

Thick, lightweight, and affordable, this kneeler pad is an inexpensive antidote to sore knees from gardening.

Gardening can be relaxing, but hours spent kneeling and hunched over can strain on your knees and back—unless you have garden kneelers, that is. These useful accompaniments provide padding between your knees and the ground to make kneeling more comfortable during long days of digging, planting, and weeding. Protect your knees and encourage better posture with the best garden kneelers ahead.

How we chose the best garden kneelers

As a home and garden writer (and someone who has pulled up my fair share of weeds), I know that the best tool in the shed is the most usable one. A garden kneeler doesn’t need to be fancy to be functional, but a worthwhile pick will always be comfortable and durable.

I looked through over 20 garden kneeler pads, seats, and knee pads to narrow down these top picks. Through extensive product research and paying mind to online reviews, I chose products that feature high-quality materials and supportive designs. To cater to a range of home gardeners, I chose kneelers that can support knees and backs through a long gardening day, so you’ll be more comfortable whether you’re a newer plant parent spending an hour in the garden or an old pro out there all weekend.

To ensure comfort, I chose kneelers with thick padding or an ergonomic shape to cushion and support the knees properly. When it comes to support, material is just as important as design. All of the picks on this list feature sturdy materials like high-density foam, steel, or high-quality plastic.

I prioritized low-compression padding and higher weight capacities to ensure the kneeler won’t sag or collapse with use. Plus, these materials are easy to clean and will last beyond a couple of planting seasons. Lastly, a garden kneeler shouldn’t empty your wallet, so we kept affordability in mind.

The best garden kneelers: Reviews & Recommendations

Garden kneelers are available in a few common types: kneeler pads, kneeler seats or benches, and knee pads. They have one main function: they prevent you from kneeling directly on hard or muddy ground. Creating a soft and stable surface, they can help prevent sore knees and backs. Beyond the garden, these kneelers also come in handy for other odd jobs, like cleaning the floor and repairing appliances.

Best overall: TomCare Garden Kneeler

Tomcare

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This garden kneeler bench boasts a multi-purpose design and can be used as a kneeling pad, portable bench, and a spot to hold tools while you garden.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Seat
  • Dimensions: 10.6 inches x 21.7 inches x 18.9 inches
  • Material: Steel frame and EVA foam padding

Pros

  • Sturdy steel frame
  • Foldable design is easy to store and transport
  • 330-pound weight capacity

Cons

  • Can only be used on relatively flat surfaces

With this two-in-one kneeler from TomCare, you get a comfortable kneeler or a supportive seat in one handy product. This garden kneeler bench features a sturdy steel frame with EVA foam padding. The frame provides support for sitting and standing up from kneeling, while the thick foam padding offers a comfortable seat and keeps knees protected when used as a kneeler.

The foldable design saves storage space and makes the kneeler easy to carry around the yard. When it’s time to garden, just fold the legs out into place to hold up to 330 pounds of weight. Measuring 10.6 by 21.7 by 18.9 inches when extended, this kneeler is a suitable size for most gardeners.

To keep gardening tools within reach, this kneeler has two storage bags: one large pouch for gloves and tools and a small pouch for slimmer items. The multi-purpose design makes this kneeler an excellent choice to prevent yard work discomfort.

Best ergonomic: Vertex Garden Rocker Comfort Kneeler Bench

Vertex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a contoured seat, large cushioned kneeler pad, and a unique rocker foot, this sturdy kneeler bench is designed with ergonomics in mind.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Seat
  • Dimensions: 13 inches x 26 inches x 18 inches
  • Material: Plastic

Pros

  • Comfortable, contoured seat
  • Plastic build is corrosion- and rust-resistant
  • Ergonomic rocker foot

Cons

  • Kneeler padding is thin
  • Some users may find the rocker design unstable

Stave off gardening aches and pains with this ergonomic kneeler bench from Vertex. This kneeler is made from contoured plastic and is designed to keep gardeners comfortable when digging, weeding, and pruning.

When used as a bench, the kneeler features a large, contoured seat and a handy rocker foot. The slightly curved foot allows for a gentle rocking motion, so the bench can move with you as you work. This rocking angle reduces strain on your arms, legs, and lower back when you reach toward your garden bed.

An oversized, padded kneeling surface helps keep knees supported and off the ground when used as a kneeler. The sturdy legs also work as easy-up handles to help with standing up from kneeling.

This mid-sized kneeler bench measures 13 by 26 by 18 inches and supports up to 220 pounds. Since this kneeler is made from plastic, it’s naturally waterproof, rust-, and corrosion-resistant. The smooth finish is easy to keep clean; mud and dirt rinse right off.

Best large: Ergodyne ProFlex 385 Large Kneeling Pad

Ergodyne

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Made for contractors and professionals, this kneeler pad is larger than your average garden mat and made of durable rubber foam, which provides water- and dirt-resistant padding.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Pad
  • Dimensions: 16 inches x 28 inches x 1 inch
  • Material: Foam rubber

Pros

  • Large area provides a sizeable surface for kneeling and working
  • Foam rubber is compression-resistant
  • Beveled, striped edges prevent the pad from becoming a tripping hazard

Cons

  • At 1-inch thick, this pad is thinner than some comparable options

Designed for contractors, this large kneeler pad from Ergodyne comes with a handy range of extra features not found in your tropical garden mat. A larger kneeling pad provides more space to shift around while tending to your garden, without fear of your knees slipping off the pad. It measures 16 by 28 inches and is 1-inch thick.

In addition, this water- and petroleum-resistant mat is made of closed-cell foam rubber. The sturdy foam is compression-resistant and non-conductive to protect your knees all day. The dense foam also makes the mat easy to clean when it inevitably picks up dirt and mud in the garden.

A beveled safety edge with bright warning stripes prevents this mat from becoming a tripping hazard in the garden or garage, while a built-in handle makes it more convenient to carry and store at home. The mat is large enough to cushion other parts of your body as well—such as your elbows, shoulders, or hips—when doing home or car repairs.

Best knee pads: NoCry Professional Knee Pads

No Cry

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Made for contractors and construction workers, these tough, padded knee pads will protect busy gardeners from sore knees and rough terrain.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Knee pads
  • Dimensions: Universal size, fits knees up to 22 inches in circumference
  • Material: Gel core, foam padding, PVC outer

Pros

  • Heavy-duty design prevents aching knees and scrapes from kneeling
  • Suitable for use on uneven surfaces
  • Comfortable neoprene straps with slip-buckle clips

Cons

  • Knee pads are somewhat stiff, which may lead to discomfort

Gardening knee pads are ideal for projects that involve a lot of moving around, like planting a large number of seedlings and other large landscaping projects. Once strapped on, they’re a hands-free solution to prevent sore knees. With these premium knee pads from NoCry, there’s no need to move a pad or seat around—these comfortable pads always come with you.

The knee pads feature a gel core and EVA foam padding for soft support. The outermost layer is a thick PVC cap to prevent scrapes and punctures. Adjustable neoprene straps provide a firm and secure fit, even while walking. The ergonomic design hugs the knee to prevent the pads from sliding around. Instead of securing with velcro, which can weaken over time, these pads feature quick-release slip-buckles to lock the pads in place.

These durable knee pads aren’t just for gardeners: they’re suitable for contractors and are heavy-duty enough for working on concrete, hardwood floors, and construction sites. This means the pads are more than reliable enough for any gardener to ensure that no sharp roots or rocks poke through.

Best budget: Gorilla Grip Thick Kneeling Pad

Gorilla Grips

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This kneeler pad is affordable without sacrificing quality, made from dense, 1.5-inch thick foam that provides firm, long-lasting support.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Pad
  • Dimensions: 11 inches x 17.5 inches x 1.5 inches
  • Material: High-density foam

Pros

  • Thick 1.5-inch padding
  • Built-in handle
  • Made from ultra-durable and firm high-density foam

Cons

  • Foam has little give and may feel hard to some users

This thick and durable kneeler pad from Gorilla Grip provides affordable knee padding for avid gardeners. Made from 1.5-inch thick high-density foam, it’s an excellent pick for gardening and other household tasks.

The firm foam has little give—which may make it feel hard to some users—but the high-density material won’t compress or lose its bounce over time. Built to last through tough conditions, Gorilla Grip boasts that their kneeler won’t break down, even when used outdoors on rocks, rubble, or damp areas. The dense foam also makes this pad water-resistant, which prevents the pad from absorbing excess water and mildewing. The textured outer layer is easy to clean and dries quickly. This long-lasting design makes this kneeler even more affordable since it’s built to last for several gardening seasons.

A built-in handle makes this pad easy to carry around the garden. It’s super lightweight, thanks to its all-foam construction. Measuring 11 by 17.5 by 1.5 inches, it’s well-suited for any home gardener.

Things to consider before buying a garden kneeler

Gardening can be tough on your joints, but with a good garden kneeler, you can prevent sore knees and a strained back. The best garden kneelers are comfortable, supportive, and convenient to use, providing ample cushioning while you tend to your garden. When choosing a garden kneeler, consider the kneeler type, padding, and ease of use.

Type

Two main types are available: garden kneeler pads or garden kneeler seats. Kneeler pads are simple, inexpensive, and very lightweight basic pads made of thick cushioning material (usually foam). Benches or seats feature a padded cushion for resting your knees atop a sturdy frame that you can flip over to use as a small seat. Though less common, you can also find garden knee pads, which are protective knee coverings that strap onto each leg.

Padding

The best garden kneelers feature firm padding materials that are supportive but soft. The padding is usually made of high-density foam. High-quality padding will keep its shape and provide a stable kneeling surface while also offering some give for comfort. Padding thickness is a key feature to look for; thick padding (an inch or more) prevents painful rocks and roots from poking your knees.

Ease of use

A good garden kneeler is easy to carry and set up. Look for kneelers with a carrying handle or a simple, fold-out design, which make it simple to carry the kneeler to the garden and set up in a matter of seconds. If you’re looking for a combined kneeler and seat, make sure to consider weight capacity, which can range from 150 to over 300 pounds. Easy-to-clean and corrosion-resistant materials are ideal so you can quickly wipe off the kneeler before storing.

FAQs

Q: How much does a garden kneeler cost?

The cost of a garden kneeler depends on its form and what it’s made of. The cost ranges from about $20 for a simple pad like the Gorilla Grip Thick Kneeling Pad to $55 for a bench like the Vertex Garden Rocker Comfort Kneeler Bench.

Q: What is a garden kneeler used for?

A garden kneeler provides cushioning between your knees and the ground to make it more comfortable to kneel. They are useful for garden work but can also be used for a range of home tasks like cleaning floors and repairing cars or appliances.

Q: What are garden kneelers made of?

Most garden kneelers feature high-density foam for the right balance between padding and support. Kneeler seats often have a durable but lightweight metal or plastic frame.

Q: How do I clean my garden kneeler?

Most garden kneelers are easy to clean by wiping with a dry cloth. When needed, use a damp cloth or gentle scrubber for muddy spots.

Final thoughts on the best garden kneelers

A good garden kneeler is a worthy investment for dedicated home gardeners; these inexpensive tools can help prevent sore knees and aching backs. For most gardeners, the TomCare Garden Kneeler is a well-rounded, multi-purpose choice. This garden kneeler bench functions as a kneeler and a seat, plus it includes a couple of storage pouches to keep your tools within easy reach.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garden kneelers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
You need this $28 dog pool on sale at Amazon right now https://www.popsci.com/gear/dog-pool-keep-cool-amazon-deal/ Fri, 28 Jul 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559856
Amazon dog pool deal pattern
Jecoo

Just imagine you and your pooch chilling in this super-cheap dog pool on a super-hot day.

The post You need this $28 dog pool on sale at Amazon right now appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Amazon dog pool deal pattern
Jecoo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

It’s hot outside in just about every sense of the word. Sweltering, sweaty, records-breaking, dangerously hot. It’s tough on humans, but it’s also hard on our favorite furry pals. But that doesn’t mean they want to stay inside all day. Right now, Amazon has this super-popular dog pool on sale for just $28. That’s a 30 percent discount when compared to its normal $40 price. Plus, it ships for free if you have Amazon Prime. Grab one of these pools. Then pour a drink, call your pooch, and float in a cool pool of water until mosquitos drain you of all your blood.

Jecoo Dog Pool for Large Dogs 63″x12″ $28 (Was $40)

Jecoo

SEE IT

Even the cheapest and most basic above-ground pool meant for humans requires an annoying amount of prep and setup. This pool, however, makes it very simple. Unfold the ultra-tough PVC pool and simply fill it with the hose. The sides have stiff panels that keep it upright and won’t get completely destroyed if your dog scratches at them. It’s just 12-inches deep, so you can lounge to get covered by water, but even small breed dogs can play without having to paddle their little hearts out.

Once you’re done chilling in the pool, drain the water through the simple spout. The whole thing folds up nice and flat so that you can stick it on a shelf in the shed in-between uses rather than leaving it on the yard and murdering a big, ugly circle of grass in your lawn.

Here are more hot deals for keeping cool:

The post You need this $28 dog pool on sale at Amazon right now appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best portable fire pits of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-portable-fire-pits/ Thu, 27 Jul 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559552
The holes in the top spit small flames out during the burn on the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
Stan Horaczek

Be a modern-day Prometheus by taking a fire pit where and when you want to heat up crisp nights (or cook up dinner).

The post The best portable fire pits of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The holes in the top spit small flames out during the burn on the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 best overall portable fire pit Solo Stove Ranger 2.0
SEE IT

It’s extremely powerful yet controlled and compact, producing wonderful heat and light without unruly smoke.

Best design Snow Peak Pack & Carry Fireplace best designed portable fire pit Snow Peak Pack & Carry L Fireplace
SEE IT

Minimalist and modern, with a fold-flat design, it’s easy to carry and set up and can be transformed into a communal hearth/cooking centerpiece with additional accessories.

Best for backyard Yaheetech multifunctional square patio table portable fire pit with spark screen and waterproof cover Yaheetech Multifunctional Fire Pit Table
SEE IT

If you want something welcoming that matches the aesthetic of patio furniture, this is the platonic ideal for elegant al fresco entertaining.

Portable fire pits are life. Literally, human beings’ harnessing of fire as a tool—a source of warmth, cooking, and protection—is one of the things that helped us survive to become the society we are today. And while it might now be hyperbole to say fire, specifically, is life, it’s at least extremely useful and enjoyable. There’s a primal allure to a flickering flame and an aesthetic pleasure from the shadows, the crackling sounds, and—if your fuel is right—even the smell. But having an outdoor fire can be a pain. If you’re at home, you must install a dedicated, built-in fire pit. If camping, you must set up somewhere with a clear and safely built campfire space. Or do you? With one of our best portable fire pit picks, a lot of the hassle of having an outdoor fire—whether for ambiance, warmth, or cooking—is handled, leaving you to bask in the warmth of family and friends (and contained, maintained flames, of course). 

How we chose the best portable fire pits

We compared the specs and reviews of two-dozen portable fire pits before narrowing our list to the best of the best, juggling customer consensus, reviewer preference, and personal experience. Careful attention was paid to portability, style, capacity, safety, and secondary features to come to our conclusions. Considerations were made for use at home or while camping. We considered fire type (wood-burning/gas/propane), best uses (warmth/cooking/ambiance), and price. Eventually, a pecking order emerged, but you can rest assured that every pick on this list is straight fire, with every one of these products being a solid buy and an easy recommendation.

The best portable fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Portable fire pits contain and elevate fires, allowing you to place them in nearly any open area. Some even come with features that make grilling or containing smoke beyond easy. So embrace the ways of our ancient ancestors and fire up one of the best portable fire pits of 2023.

Best overall: Solo Stove Ranger 2.0

Solo Stove

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15 lbs
  • Height: 12.5 inches
  • Material: 304 stainless steel
  • Structure: non-collapsible, single form

Pros

  • Lightweight and compact
  • High-quality well-controlled flame that eliminates most smoke
  • Strong stainless steel construction
  • All-in-one design improves strength
  • Round design is stylish and silver surface is chic
  • Included carrying case makes transportation easier

Cons

  • All-in-one design makes it difficult to pack
  • Grilling or lifting requires separately-purchases accessories

The smaller brother of the Solo Stone Bonfire 2.0, our favorite smokeless fire pit, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is more portable but not less powerful. One of the first things that stands out about the Ranger is its sleek, circular design. This fire pit would fit right in at an elegant rooftop cocktail bar with its clean silver cylinder design. (And would add a similar touch of class to your backyard or car-camping set-up.) Even the flame comes out looking stylish, with the high perforations allowing small flamers to flicker out, ringing around the larger central flame. 

It’s extremely controlled yet powerful, producing wonderful heat and light without being or feeling dangerous. Firestarting is done the typical way, but the contained cylinder makes it even easier by shielding the fledgling flickers from wind and moisture. Following the included instructions is best, but even a lazy “throw some wood on top of a lit bit of kindling” can sometimes work because of the efficient design. Lighting the fire is the only time smoke is ever an issue, as the airflow traps and eliminates any puffs after that point.

Once the fire starts, you don’t want to touch the fire pit; the sides heat up as you might expect. As always with fire, this isn’t a product or practice to use around unsupervised children or pets. Once all the smoldering has subsided, however, the updates to the 2.0 design make cleaning much easier, placing the ash on a removable pan (one of many touches greatly appreciated in our full review of the Bonfire 2.0). With its combination of style, function, lightweight (15 pounds is low for this category), and efficient control of flames and smoke, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is about as good as a portable fire pit gets.

Best for the backyard: Yaheetech Multifunctional Fire Pit Table

Yaheetech

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 26 lbs
  • Height: 15 inches
  • Material: metal alloy
  • Structure: non-collapsible, single form

Pros

  • Elegant, patio-appropriate design
  • Ample fire area
  • Included iron mesh cage for both aesthetics and to prevent embers from blowing
  • During the summer, you can fill the bowl with ice and beverages (or shrimp and crab legs, veggies and dips … that’s up to you)

Cons

  • Not weatherproof, but comes with a fitted protective cover.
  • Not smokeless
  • Not compact or collapsible

When it comes to backyard fire pits, looks matter a lot. You want a fire pit that feels welcoming and matches the aesthetic of your patio furniture. Yaheetech’s 32-inch metal table is the platonic ideal for when you’re doing some elegant al fresco entertaining. Square, with a decorative rock pattern on the top, it’s an eye-catching centerpiece but also highly functional. The basin for the fire is significantly lifted, letting heat radiate out and even slightly down, warming those toes on breezy evenings, while rails prevent little ones from getting too, too close to the bottom. The mesh spark guard completes the aesthetic. 

It’s classic, cute, and fits a backyard vibe. Style and price are the main selling point of this model, as there’s no fancy smokeless airflow design or foldability features, but it is relatively light and can easily be put in a flat-bed trunk, van, or SUV for a trip to the beach or park. One warning: while it can handle fire, it’s not impervious to all the elements. It isn’t waterproof but comes with a cover that it so, after use and cooldown, protect it appropriately from the elements.

Looking to upgrade your conversation pit with one click? You can buy a $1,599 7-piece patio furniture set with matching 55,000 BTU propane fire pit—we’re not going to judge, but we are going to ask to be invited over.

Best for camping: Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit

Specs

  • Weight: 7.2 lbs
  • Height: 15 inches
  • Material: aluminum
  • Structure: collapsible / disassembled

Pros

  • Extremely light-weight and portable
  • Vertical collapsed design is easy to pack
  • Extremely large burn area
  • Smoke-eliminating mesh holds up to 125 pounds
  • Designed with leave-no-trace fires in mind

Cons

  • Any grilling needs an accessory kit that reduces portability and adds weight
  • Mesh and heat shield are a bit hard to clean
  • Mesh requires that fires be more wide than tall
  • Function over fashion, may not look great in a backyard set-up

For serious campers—specifically those who don’t need to grill—two things are extremely important: lightweight portability and environmentally sound design. The Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit is designed with campers in mind, offering a lifted, full-size fire for warmth and light that leaves little to no impact on the ground below it or the area around it. The size and weight when collapsed are impressive: about the size of a camping chair. Despite that, when assembled, the Pop-Up Fire Pit offers one of the largest burn areas of all our portable models, two feet by two feet. One drawback is that the metal mesh that holds the wood needs a pretty equal distribution of weight to avoid tearing or warping–fires must be wide more than tall.

Grilling is possible with additional accessories, but the primary function of the Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit is warmth and light with a minimal footprint, and it delivers in spades. The portability requires assembly, and while it isn’t the fastest—likely around 3 minutes—it’s simple and straightforward. If your main goal is roughing it, this one will make it a little less rough.

Best for grilling: Front Runner BBQ/Fire Pit

Front Runner

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 17.4 lbs
  • Height: 12.2 inches
  • Material: 3CR12 stainless steel
  • Structure: disassembled / flat-packed

Pros

  • Built-in grill is convenient and excellent at distributing heat
  • Flat-pack design makes it extra easy to pack in a vehicle
  • Sturdy design and excellent flame containment
  • Grid-lifting tools are included

Cons

  • 17-pound weight makes its portability more truck-based than backpack-based
  • Requires a good bit of maintenance as grease and food will build up on the grill surface
  • Designed for use with a specific brand of pick-up storage box and may not fit all vehicles as well with other brands

Designed for grilling and transportation with a truck, the Front Runner BBQ/Fire Pit has a rugged design with sharp corners and strong geometry. However, that angularity is also in service to its easy-to-assemble flat-packed portable form, as it is a series of interlocking metal panels that can be put together in less than a minute even by an amateur outdoors explorer. The top is already a high-quality grilling grate, which is the main selling point of this model: it cooks well without any need for pricey accessories. The stainless steel is one of the highest grades we’ve seen in this category, which should help the Front Runner hold up if it ends up jostled around in the backwoods.

One drawback is that while it packs flat, it’s still quite large and heavy—a trade-off for its durability. The panels are meant to be placed into a Wolf Pack or Wolf Pack Pro pick-up truck storage container, not a backpack, making this less ideal for trekking and more for family camping (check our camping grill guide for smaller, cheaper options).

Best propane: Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit

Bond Manufacturing

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 18 lbs
  • Height: 14.65 inches
  • Material: stainless steel / metal
  • Structure: non-collapsible, locking lid

Pros

  • Propane-ready
  • Locking lid acts as carrying handle
  • No assembly required
  • Auto-ignition function makes starting fires simple

Cons

  • Need for separate propane tank increases weight and space
  • Awkward shape means it’s a carry-from-the-car kind of portable

For some of us—I’m looking at you, Hank Hill—propane is simply the best option for heating (or grilling). That’s where the Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit comes in. The gas burns clean, and stones are used for both aesthetics and to help contain the flames. The gas allows for a consistent 50,000 BTU output. The consistency of gas is one of its main benefits over wood. Wood’s heat can come and go as the fire gets stronger or weaker. Gas also means no ash, charred wood, or other debris left over when you’re done enjoying your fire. Simply turn off the gas, wait for the stones and fire pit to cool down, lock in the lid, and carry the fire pit away.

Unfortunately, the convenience of propane is undercut by the need to bring a tank of the stuff. That means an additional 20 pounds and a rather large object to take on your beach, tailgating, or camping trip. If your main purpose is backyard use, this is less of an impediment. The Aurora is sturdy but also a bit hefty, so if your campsite is a hike away, it may not make it up the mountain with you. But for close and consistent flame sources for propane pros, it’s an easy recommendation.

Best design: Snow Peak Pack & Carry L Fireplace

Snow Peak

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 12.1 lbs
  • Height: 12 inches
  • Material: stainless steel
  • Structure: collapsible / flat-pack

Pros

  • Clever and stylish collapsible design
  • High-quality stainless steel
  • Easy set-up
  • Packs flat

Cons

  • Requires additional accessories to grill
  • Somewhat small capacity

The minimalist principles and clean lines of Japanese design have done it again! The Snow Peak Pack & Carry L Fireplace is beyond slick in its balance of form and function. Its collapsible design leaves it in a nice, flat shape that, at 12 pounds, is quite easy to carry. When set up—which is a cinch—it’s got a striking modern design with sharp lines complemented by swooping legs. Additional purpose-built accessories Fireplace Grill Bridge L and Fireplace Grill L can transform this cute fireplace into a Takibi grilling solution and even the centerpiece of a packable dining table, but it will add cost and space. This spiffy fireplace/fire pit comes courtesy of Snow Peak, a Niigata, Japan-based company whose camping gear is as cool and covetable as it is useful.

The tradeoff is the relatively small fire area the Pack & Carry offers. Some pre-cut wood might be too large and require further whittling. The fire produced might be too small for a large gathering but is perfect for a solo adventure or intimate getaway.

Best value: Inno Stage Portable Smokeless Fire Pit

Inno Stage

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 16 lbs
  • Height: 12.5 inches
  • Material: 304 stainless steel
  • Structure: two pieces

Pros

  • Airflow design allows for smoke reduction
  • Three sizes of the same design available for different size needs
  • Matte black finish keeps fire pit looking clean
  • Price/performance ratio is high

Cons

  • Designed for wood pellets rather than traditional firewood
  • Somewhat bulky design partially alleviated by carrying case

Sometimes you don’t want to go full force into a product category, and that’s where a value choice like the Inno Stage Portable Smokeless Fire Pit comes in. This baby isn’t much of a step down from fire pits twice its price, and offers a few innovative ideas that really up its value. First of all, the airflow design eliminates a lot of smoke while the fire is going. Secondly, the two-part design makes it relatively easy to set up and store, though the bulky shape isn’t the easiest to carry. (The carrying case certainty helps.) At under $100 for the medium size, the investment is minimal.

The biggest drawback is its design is meant to be used with wood pellets or very small pieces of wood. Purchased firewood is probably too big for this baby, and scavenged firewood will have to be cut down considerably. Therefore, you’ll need to include a bag of wood pellets in the car if you plan to use the Inno Stage on any trips. At home, this is much less of a drawback, of course. Wood pellets tend to burn very evenly and efficiently and impart specific aromas (which is why they’re popular with grillmasters).

The matte black finish is probably the most clean-looking of the options for the Inno Stage, but there’s also a chrome option and a faux terra cotta option as far as colors go. For grilling, the design is such that simply buying a disposable grill and laying it over the top is likely one of the better solutions. If you want strong performance without much of an investment, the Inno Stage Portable Smokeless Fire Pit is a great entry point into the world of portable fire pits.

Best budget: UCO Flatpack Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit

Specs

  • Weight: 3.2 lbs
  • Height: 13.5 inches
  • Material: 304 stainless steel
  • Structure: collapsible / flat-pack

Pros

  • 30-second set-up
  • Extremely light
  • Folds flat for easy portability

Cons

  • Can’t handle a lot of weight on or inside it 
  • Needs a nice, flat surface for stability
  • Grilling space is not particularly large

For those who want the lowest-cost solution for a very small gathering, there’s the UCO Flatpack Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit. As a grill, this one offers the least capacity and stability of any of our recommended models. Heavy cooking accessories such as a Dutch oven as a serious no-no, and even overloading the grill surface could result in some warping. However, a grilled dinner for one is more than doable. As a heat-and-light-only solution, the UCO Flatpack is actually really strong for its price. It’s the lightest of all our models, and it folds flat, meaning it’s very easy to carry. The assembly from flat is quick and simple, definitely taking less than a minute. Best of all, it’s a fraction of the cost of some other pits on our list. If you want features, versatility, and long-term durability, you may want to look elsewhere. But if you want a cheap, solid solution for personal use, the UCO Flatpack gives way more than it costs.

What to consider when choosing a portable fire pit

The first thing to consider when choosing a portable fire pit is how portable you need your fire pit to be. “Portable” is relative when it comes to this category and can be as simple as “is not built into a patio” to as versatile as “collapses and can easily be attached to a backpack. Many of these models are meant for transport via vehicle—RV or truck especially—and are not appropriate for camping that involves long hikes away from a car. The lighter, collapsible models are the only ones you’ll want to look at if you’re truly planning to do some wilderness camping. If your main desire is for a fire pit to be used in backyard gatherings, the style will really matter. It’ll be frustrating if your fire pit has a utilitarian design when your patio furniture is more casual and tropical. And for those who want a portable grilling solution, remember that many of these models don’t include grilling accessories in the base package, so that will add cost, weight, and space, eating into the whole “portability” factor.

Price

The next thing to consider is how much you’re willing to spend. If you want to stay under $100, there are really only two models to consider (our best value and our best budget). If you’re willing to go to $200, many more models open up.

Fuel

Lastly, fuel type is important. The vast majority of these fire pits are intended for use with commercial or scavenged firewood. A few want pellets or gas. All these fuels will need to be carried with or stored near the fire pit or found at the beach/campsite you plan to use the fire pit.

FAQs

Q: Which fire pit gives off the most heat?

Wood burns hotter but less consistently than gas. Gas will produce flames in the same place at roughly the same intensity as long as you don’t change the gas output, while fire flares up and dies down, and wood collapses, making the fire change over time. But for pure heat, wood is the way to go.

Q: Will a 50,000 BTU fire pit keep you warm?

Whether a 50,000 BTU fire pit is ample to keep you warm depends on your distance from the fire pit. These fire pits are relatively small, and you’ll need to be relatively near them to really feel the warmth. Fire heat dissipates very quickly in air, where the energy can move in any direction. While 50,000 BTUs (British Thermal Units) will keep you warm when you’re within a few feet of the fire, stretch that distance to several meters and you won’t feel it as much. Things depend on the climate and any enclosure, but in still, open air, 50,000 BTUs will be hot from within 8 feet, comfortable from about 8 to 10 feet away, and not warm from over 10 feet.

Q: How do I make my fire pit hotter?

Oxygen increases a fire’s heat output because oxygen is what the fire consumes to grow. Get air to the base of the fire, particularly using a bellows, and your fire will increase its heat output. Also, good fire design with nice dry logs that are the right size to burn is important. Check out some YouTube videos on building fires in fire pits to get a sense of what you should be looking for both in your wood and your set-up.

Q: How do you keep a fire pit burning all night?

If it’s gas, just ensure you have a big enough gas supply. If it’s wood, you want dry, seasoned wood, not wet or green (young) wood. Many of these fire pits also come with heat shields that act as a reflector, distributing the heat that would normally travel down from the fire back up toward it, which helps keep the fire active. Make sure there’s enough wood to burn through in a lattice-like pattern. When your fire starts, use smaller pieces of wood, and add in larger ones later that will take longer to consume. Also, a dry, cool, but not cold night with minimal wind helps a lot. Lastly, certain types of wood burn more slowly, chiefly oak and maple.

Q: Is it OK to leave a fire pit burning overnight?

If you’re not going to check on it, do not leave a fire pit, or a fire of any sort, burning overnight. Fire is extremely dangerous, and while these fire pits are well-made, a small defect can become a major problem overnight. Keeping an eye on your fire ensures you can cut any problems off and douse the fire before it becomes a problem.

Q: What is hotter: coals or flame?

Flame is hotter, as it has more access to oxygen that lets it reach higher temperatures—assuming the flame is coming from the same source that the coals are made from.

Q: Do you put sand in a portable fire pit?

Portable fire pits do not need sand in them.

Q: Are fire pits good for winter?

If there’s just cold and no snow, yes. However, high moisture content in the area can make it very difficult to keep a fire going.

Final thoughts on the best portable fire pits

A portable fire pit will add a touch of class to a backyard gathering or a source of heat and food on a camping trip. You can grill in the summer, cut the chill in fall, manage the cold in winter, or set the mood in spring. That cozy fire feeling can be yours anywhere, so if you’re interested in fanning the flames in your own life, grab whichever of our recommended models fits your needs.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable fire pits of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get $100 off the best pool vacuum at Amazon and clean out bugs, not your savings https://www.popsci.com/gear/aiper-cordless-pool-cleaner-amazon-deal/ Wed, 26 Jul 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559181
A pool vacuum overlayed on a fancy pool
Amanda Reed

Splash into the final month of summer and keep your pool crystal clear with this AIPER cordless pool vacuum deal on Amazon.

The post Get $100 off the best pool vacuum at Amazon and clean out bugs, not your savings appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A pool vacuum overlayed on a fancy pool
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We are in the hot throes of summer, with a splash in cooling chlorinated water the rare respite. However, your pool might look less poetic and placid with bugs and leaves occupying it—and they didn’t even pay for a pass to dive in! Suck up those freeloaders of nature with 30% off an AIPER Seagull Plus Cordless Pool Vacuum at Amazon.

AIPER Seagull Plus Cordless Pool Vacuum $279.99 (Was $399.99)

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

This rechargeable pool vacuum is one of our favorite pool vacuums and is so decked out in high-tech features that it barely requires your help to get the job done. Equipped with four motors and a gyroscope, the Aiper Seagull Pro cleans up to 3,200 square feet in the three hours of battery power it gets from each charge. This cordless model’s internal gyroscope provides smart navigation that allows the Seagull Pro to map the floor and walls of a pool. The powerful motors offer 130GPM (gallons per minute) of suction while bottom brushes sweep out leaves, dirt, and other debris. The Seagull Pro also cleans walls and the waterline and it’s programmed to stop near a pool wall when the battery starts to drain. Plus, it only takes 1.5 hours to charge up. Essentially, all you have to do is drop it in the pool and watch it do all the work.

If you’re looking for an even cheaper option, the AIPER Cordless Robotic Pool Cleaner is 40% off—down from $299.99 to $179.99—and includes many of the same features as the Seagull Pro. It runs for 1.5 hours and has the same cordless capabilities as its Pro sibling. Nice!

Take advantage of this deal before it dries up—just like your pool when September hits.

Here are more refreshing pool, patio, and hot tub deals:

The post Get $100 off the best pool vacuum at Amazon and clean out bugs, not your savings appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best coolers for camping in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-coolers-for-camping/ Wed, 15 Mar 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=519056
The Best Coolers For Camping
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Bring these coolers on your next camping trip to keep your food (and beverages) cool and fresh.

The post The best coolers for camping in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best Coolers For Camping
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler
SEE IT

RTIC’s Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler its the sweet spot between performance, aesthetics, extra features, and price.

Best electric GOsun Chill Cooler GOSun Chill Cooler
SEE IT

GOSUN Chill Cooler can keep your perishables cold without ice—and it can even run on solar power.

Best budget East Oak Cooler East Oak 45 Quart Cooler
SEE IT

If cost is your concern, East Oka’s 45 Quart Cooler is the cream of the crop.

A well-built, long-lasting cooler for camping will keep your food and drinks cold for hours when you’re away from a power outlet, convenience store, or other modern luxuries. It needs to be rugged enough to get taken in and out of the back of a car, trekked to a campsite, and exposed to rain, snow, sunshine, bugs, and anything else you’ll find out in the wilderness. If your current camping cooler is looking a little long in the tooth, isn’t big enough for the length of your trip, it’s time for an upgrade. Here are some of the best coolers for camping in a wide range of styles for every budget.

How we chose the best coolers for camping

There are a glut of coolers available on the Internet, but the starting point for the recommendations below started with some of our other stories. The commerce team Popular Science has already covered the best coolers and cooler bags available for all uses. Many of the metrics—size, capacity, price—that went into determining the top picks in those stories were also important here. We paid attention to options from the top brands, and were able to conduct some in-person testing to supplement our research.

Coolers can get expensive very fast—we feel the price is worthwhile since this is a piece of gear that should literally last you decades—but we made sure our selections were relatively affordable. This mentality was a through-line throughout this entire story, not just something we cared about when choosing our budget pick. Overall, you’ll find camping coolers that provide the right mix of performance and value without sacrificing either.

The best coolers for camping: Reviews & Recommendations

Camping has experienced a mainstream renaissance lately, driven in part by the continuing effects of the COVID-19 pandemic and our collective desire to be out in the world but away from crowds. When outdoor trips were seen one of the few safe summertime activities, people began investing in camping gear, especially tents and water filters. People are still discovering (or rediscovering) the benefits of spending time outdoors, known in some circles as “nature therapy.” There are a lot of fancy camping gadgets, but a camping cooler is deliberately low tech—at least in most cases. Companies have put a lot of effort into creating materials that insulate your food and drinks for longer periods of time without adding too much weight or bulk. There’s always going to be a tradeoff between size and capacity vs. portability, so it’s important to strike the right balance for your specific needs. Many of the camping coolers you’ll see below are available in multiple sizes, which was done by design. We want to make sure everyone’s needs are met regardless of their situation.

Best overall: RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler

RTIC

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 27.01 x 17.28 x 16.54 inches
  • Weight: 13.4 pounds
  • Capacity: 54 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Closed-cell foam
  • Price: $219.99

Pros

  • Excellent weight to capacity ratio
  • Three inches of insulation
  • Price

Cons

  • No separate built-in compartments

If we could only recommend one camping cooler to suit everyone’s needs, RTIC’s Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler is far and away the best choice. The company considered every angle of this cooler, and engineered one of the best pieces of outdoor gear we’ve ever seen regardless of the category.

The cooler’s 52 quart capacity allows it to hold up to 60 pounds of ice or 70 cans with no ice according to RTIC, which is more than enough space to hold everything you’d need for a two day camping trip. This is one of the biggest camping coolers we’re recommending, but thanks to RTIC’s engineering, it’s also one of the lightest. Despite its three inches of closed-cell foam insulation, it weighs roughly half as much as its competition. This will make a huge difference when transporting the cooler to and from your house.

Little touches, like the T-latches that keep it securely closed, non-skid rubber feet, marine-grade nylon rope handles, and the ability to slip in an optional divider to separate food and drink make it even more appealing. We’re even happy to see RTIC offers this camping cooler in six colorways, so you’re not stuck with a plain white one. We wish RTIC included their divider with this cooler—it’s only $7 on their site—but beyond that we couldn’t find much fault with the Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler.

If you’re looking for a big, light, relatively inexpensive cooler for camping, boating, tailgating, or other all-day outdoor activities, don’t hesitate to pick one up.

Best electric: GOSun Chill Cooler

GOsun

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 23.5 x 16 x 19 inches
  • Weight: 30 pounds
  • Capacity: 42 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Close cell polyurethane foam
  • Price: $649

Pros

  • Built-in compressor keeps items cool without ice
  • Can be run off solar power
  • Separate compartments for fridge and freezer items

Cons

  • You have to remember to charge it
  • Price

GOsun’s Chill Cooler is the most high-tech option we’re recommending, and while its price is high, it’s arguably the most efficient choice. That’s because it has a built-in refrigeration system, which continually keeps its chamber at a pre-set temperature between -4 and 68 degrees Fahrenheit. This means you won’t have to dedicate any space to ice to keep its contents cool. The cooler’s temperature is managed by a touch panel on top, which is flanked by USB-A ports and a DC cigarette lighter, so you can charge your phone and other devices on-the-go.

The Chill Cooler’s greatest strength is the ability to keep its contents cool, but its high-tech design comes with one downside: the need to keep it charged. Yes, you’ll need to plug in your cooler, which would make the Chill Cooler a no-go for camping if not for GOsun’s ingenuity. You can connect this cooler to an external battery pack or go fully off the grid by plugging it into GOsun’s Outdoor Solar Table. If you’re camping during sunny summer days, and don’t use the Chill Cooler’s cooling features continuously, you shouldn’t have too many issues with it running out of juice.

There aren’t very many electric coolers available, but GOsun’s Chill Cooler stands out in this category because of its innovative design.

Best with wheels: YETI Roadie 60

YETI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 23.7 x 19.9 x 20.5 inches
  • Weight: 29 pounds
  • Capacity: 63 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Polyurethane
  • Price: $500

Pros

  • Ultra-durable
  • Highly portable given its size
  • Periscoping handle for easy manuverability

Cons

  • Price
  • Weight

YETI is arguably the best-known premium cooler brand, and it’s brought all the design chops that make its sedentary gear popular into a wheeled version. The $500 60 Quart cooler is one of the biggest—by capacity—camping coolers we’re recommending, and it’s the most expensive non-electric model, but you’re getting what you pay for.

The biggest benefit to getting a YETI cooler is its durability—they’re literally bear proof thanks to their insulation and well-made latches. If you make the investment, you should be able to keep this cooler for life. One of the biggest potential pain points for a wheeled cooler is, well, their wheels, which are going to come into contact with tough terrain very often. YETI says it uses single-piece tires, which should be able to handle prolonged exposure rocks and dirt just fine.

Portability is the main reason to get a wheeled cooler, and the Roadie 60 excels in this area. Its squat-but-deep design offers the same capacity as a traditional cooler in a more compact form. The Roadie 60’s telescoping handle will reach high enough at its maximum height to be comfortable to roll around, but will contract to the point where it’s out of sight when it’s not needed.

Yes, the YETI Roadie 60 is expensive, but if you want the highest quality rolling camping cooler around and are able to stretch your budget, you won’t find a better option.

Best large: Driftsun 75 Quart Insulated Cooler

Driftsun

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 33.5 x 18.5 x 18 inches
  • Weight: 32 pounds
  • Capacity: 75 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Rotomolded thermoplastic
  • Price: $249.99

Pros

  • Excellent ice retention
  • High capacity
  • Built-in bottle opener

Cons

  • Large size comes with added weight

If a high-capacity camping cooler is what you crave, Driftsun has you covered with its ultra-large-but-relatively-inexpensive Insulated Cooler. Its 75 quart capacity will comfortably hold dozens of cans with room to spare ice. Driftsun is also confident in this cooler’s insulation, and says it can keep ice solid for up to 10 days—more than enough time for a week-long camping trip if you’re strategic about how long you keep it open. This level of performance is also possible because of the cooler’s locking latches, which will keep it firmly shut.

This may be the largest camping cooler we recommend, but it’s not the heaviest—even amongst non-electric models. We considered portability very strongly when selecting a camping cooler in this category because nobody want to carry it around if it’s too heavy. Many of the coolers in this guide have a capacity of between 50 and 60 quarts, and while a 75 quart option may not seem like a big difference, the ability to carry around the same number of cans with ice is a big deal for long trips. Some of Driftsun’s little extras, like a built-in bottle opener make it a little nicer to use, too.

If you need a big cooler for longer trips—or ones with a larger party—Driftsun’s 75 Quart Insulated Cooler is the way to go. There’s enough space to satisfy the thirst of a big crowd without being too unwieldy to use. This camping cooler’s affordable price is just icing on the cake.

Best soft cooler: Hydro Flask 26L Day Escape Soft Cooler

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 14.5 x 14.5 x 10.3 inches
  • Weight: 3.2 pounds
  • Capacity: 27 Qt.
  • Style: Softshell
  • Materials: Polyester
  • Price: $179.95

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Relatively high capacity
  • Features straps and handles

Cons

  • Can’t hold as much stuff as hard shell coolers

If your idea of a camping trip is a one night stay at a campsite for two or three people, there isn’t much of a reason to pack a big hardshell cooler—Hydro Flask’s 26L Day Escape Soft Cooler will more than satisfy your needs. The soft cooler is ultra light, but the insulation Hyrdro Flask uses can keep its contents cold for up to 27 hours according to the company.

Because of the cooler’s relatively small size, you’re likely going to fill it to the brim, and Hydro Flask has accounted for this by offering side handles in addition to a strap, which can make it easier to carry for two people. This seems like a little touch, but it can make a big difference. Additionally, the Day Escape’s strap can be removed and reattached in such a way that you can carry it as a cross-body strap.

We’ve tried some of Hydro Flask’s soft coolers in the past, and one of the features that’s always struck us is the quality of their zipper. This is essential for a soft cooler, because a faulty zipper will let warm air inside, or let liquid leak out. We’re happy to say this has never been an issue for us. If you’re confident that your next camping trips will be short and sweet, and you’d like to be as unencumbered as possible while you’re exploring nature, Hydro Flask 26L Day Escape is the ideal cooler.

Best budget: East Oak 45 Quart Cooler

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 28.25 x 15.75 x 18.25 inches
  • Weight: 16.32 pounds
  • Capacity: 45 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Polyurethane Foam
  • Price: $108.99

Pros

  • Round shape
  • Secure latches
  • Price

Cons

  • No wheels

East Oak’s cooler has more going for it than its unique, circular shape. In our tests, the cooler could keep beverages cold for a couple of days when its lid was securely fastened to its base using its two latches. This performance is due to the cooler’s insulation, which is three-inches thick at its thickest point. Our second-favorite feature of this cooler was its draining port, which was conveniently located toward the bottom of the cooler and pointed at an angle. The company promises “no-tilt draining” and actually delivered.

The immediate difference you’ll notice between East Oak’s cooler and our other recommendations is its shape. In our experience, this shape made the cooler easier to move around with one person—when empty—while its handles were comfortable enough to grip for two people to move around while full. It may have a slightly lower capacity than most of our recommendations, but we found East Oak’s cooler to have enough room to keep five or six people satisfied for an afternoon. Boaters, tailgaters, and frequent campers alike will find a lot to like about this cooler.

You won’t find a better cooler than East Oak’s at its price range, and frankly it should be considered right up there with fare from better-known companies.

What to consider when shopping for the best coolers for camping

Size

A cooler’s physical size—including weight—is the first factor to think about when picking the right camping cooler. This isn’t a piece of gear you’re going to want to upgrade on a regular basis. Our recommendations run the gamut, but most of them are roughly two feet wise, and a food and a half wide and deep. A cooler in that size range will weigh roughly 15 pounds when empty. Also consider the amount of space you have in your car, which will likely be packed with a lot of other gear, and on the campsite.

Capacity

A camping cooler’s capacity is measured in quarts, and determines how much space there is inside for your food and drinks. Many companies illustrate the capacity of their cooler by saying how much ice and how many cans it can hold. These rough metrics can be a big help in figuring out which cooler is right for you, so don’t disregard them even if you plan on packing liquid in bottles and dedicating part of its space to food.

Style

Camping coolers come in all shapes and sizes, but we’ve broken them down into two styles: hardshell and softshell. We’ve elected to primarily focus on hardshell coolers in large part because this is the most traditional type. We also have an entire guide to insulated cooler bags—the official name for softshell coolers—so you’re covered if you prefer this style. Softshell coolers look like a tote bag and are a lot more portable, but they can’t hold as much stuff. The solution for multi-day camping trips with a lot of hiking to and from a central camping spot may be to get one of both.

Materials

When possible, we’ve called out the materials companies have used to make their coolers. This has the biggest impact on their ability to keep your perishables cold for extended periods of time. Naturally, coolers with thick insulation will be larger and weigh more, so keep that in mind if portability is your priority.

Price

You can spend a lot of money on a camping cooler, but we’ve made sure most of our recommendations fall under $300, so they’re accessible to the highest number of people. That said, we didn’t shy away from more expensive models if they had a differentiating feature that justified the higher cost.

FAQs

Q: How much does a cooler for camping cost?

This will depend on its size and extra features, but you should expect to pay under $300 for most camping coolers we recommend.

Q: How do I know what size cooler I need?

You can use the cooler’s size and capacity guide to help determine the size of cooler that works best for you. If you’re a frequent camper who plans on taking more people with you, opt for a larger option than you need today.

Q: Are soft or hard coolers better for camping?

This depends on the length of your trip. If you’re a single or two-person team going on a day trip, a soft cooler may work best for you thanks to its portability. If you’re part of a larger multi-person party who’s going to be away for several days, a hard cooler is the way to go.

Q: How long do camping coolers stay cold?

This depends on its materials, the amount of insulation used, and how much ice is inside. If you use a lot of ice, there’s no reason the cooler shouldn’t keep your food and drinks cool for a couple of days.

Q: Will a cooler keep things cold without ice?

This depends on the temperature of the perishables you put inside of it. The cooler’s insulation will reduce the amount of hot air that reaches your perishables, but it won’t be as effective as it would be with ice inside.

Q: Are camping coolers worth it?

Yes. If you’re going on a long outdoor trip, a camping cooler is essential for keeping beverages and perishable food from reaching unsafe temperatures.

Final thoughts on the best coolers for camping

The right camping cooler should last a lifetime, which is more than we can say for most gear produced these days regardless of the category. Advancements in materials and manufacturing, driven by demand, has allowed companies to make big investments in this space. Outdoor activities never go out of style, and the upside is you can use your camping cooler in your backyard, at a tailgate, or even extra fridge space if you’re hosting a party. These auxiliary purposes can help make larger, more expensive camping coolers a little easier to justify, especially if you live in a place where the climate is moderate or warm year-round.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coolers for camping in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best chainsaws of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-chainsaw/ Thu, 29 Apr 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=284644
The best chainsaws on a rock
Stan Horaczek

Cut your project down to size with the best chainsaws for yard maintenance.

The post The best chainsaws of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best chainsaws on a rock
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Worx Nitro 40v chainsaw Worx Nitro 40V Chainsaw
SEE IT

This user-friendly chainsaw is practically maintenance-free.

Best small Black and orange cordless electric chainsaw Worx WG322 
SEE IT

Powerful chainsaws can come in small sizes—take this one from Worx.

Best budget Black, gray, and red electric chainsaw Oregon CS1500
SEE IT

Simply take this pre-assembled chainsaw out of the box to use.

A chainsaw is one of those invaluable power tools that you find yourself using more often than you might have expected. Sure, it will cut down a tree, but it can do even more to make your life easier. Trimming overgrown hedges, wayward tree branches, or landscape timbers; cleaning up storm damage; and doing demolition before a remodeling project are just a few of the times when a chainsaw could be the best tool for the job. And chainsaws are not always heavy, loud, or gas-powered. Big, powerful gas saws have their place, to be sure, particularly for long days cutting up big logs out in the woods. But there are many times when a clean, quiet electric saw would be a better choice, like when you only want to trim a few branches around the yard. Read on as we consider the qualities that go into a quality pick and see our best chainsaws for various uses.

How we chose the best chainsaws

We looked at critical reviews and user recommendations, then performed heavy research (and some heavy chores) to narrow down our list of the best chainsaws. We considered important factors—like size, weight, fuel source, max cutting diameter, and bar length—to curate a list of the top chainsaws that can cut through various shrubs and trees for ultimate usability.

The best chainsaws: Reviews & Recommendations

These top-rated chainsaws are a cut above the rest—pun intended. From cordless options to electric and gas-powered varieties, the best chainsaw is perfect for you and your backyard needs (like clearing anything standing between you and an above-ground pool). Read on to find sharp chainsaws at a smart price.

Best overall: Worx Nitro 40V Chainsaw

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15.3 lbs
  • Bar length: 16
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 24 inches

Pros

  • Responsive throttle
  • Flexible battery system
  • Chain is easy to install and adjust
  • Self-lubricating chain
  • Relatively quiet considering its power

Cons

  • Works with two batteries, so you’ll want to charge both

Worx offers a number of very versatile tools in its Nitro series, and the chainsaw is no exception. The 16-inch bar is ideal for most typical users who don’t need to go chopping through Middle Earth-style forests. A pair of sturdy grips give both of your hands a comfortable place to rest and lots of control over the tool as you’re using it. During our testing, we chopped through tons of 3- to 4-inch sticks and some larger, full-grown trees. With two powerful batteries installed, it quickly gets up to speed, and we barely had any issues with kicking or getting stuck.

Worx has one of the most flexible battery systems on the market at the moment, and this tool relies on a pair of batteries (that charge simultaneously in one charger). The batteries give the chainsaw a nice balance, which is important when you’re wielding a tool that can quickly cause carnage when mishandled.

Installing and adjusting the chain is simple, and it self-lubricates as you run it, so it doesn’t require much in the way of maintenance. We spent several hours cutting away with this tool and ran into almost no issues, which is exactly what we’re looking for.

Best battery life: CAT 60V Max Chainsaw

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 13.02 pounds
  • Bar length: 16 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 30 inches

Pros

  • Large battery capacity adds extra cutting time
  • Efficient motor provides more power and lasts longer
  • Only requires one battery that charges quickly
  • Balanced and easy to hold

Cons

  • 16-inch bar won’t tackle the biggest trees
  • Other battery systems have more compatible devices

This single-battery model relies on a chunky 60V cell to provide the juice it needs to slice and dice through trees, shrubs, and whatever else may get in its way. During our test cuts, we hacked through everything from small branches to medium-sized tree trunks without issue.

It’s electric, so the throttle response is all but instant. As soon as you pull back the trigger, the chain quickly gets up to speed. The brushless motor inside this model promises 72.2ft of travel per second, which is on par with the most powerful 16-inch models we’ve tested.

The wide nose helps fight off kickback. We only managed to make it kick once or twice, but the Cat has a built-in safety feature that immediately cuts the engine when that happens. It’s handy and comforting. A dial adjustment system keeps the chain tight. We didn’t have any issues with the hand-tightened screw coming loose, but it’s worth checking each time you use it to ensure everything is tight.

Overall, this is a very well-balanced chainsaw that provides more uptime per charge session. That’s handy if you’re only doing longer, more sporadic cuts.

Best gas: ECHO CS-590-20 Timber Wolf

Echo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Feel better about your ecological impact with this California Air Resources Board (CARB) compliant gas chainsaw.

Specs

  • Weight: 16.1 lbs.
  • Cutting time on one charge: N/A
  • Bar length: 20 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 35 inches

Pros

  • Responsive throttle
  • Translucent fuel tank
  • Long-lasting, sharp chain

Cons

  • A bit on the heavy side

This saw is loaded with premium features, including a dual post chain brake to keep you safer, a clutch-driven oiler to reduce bar oil consumption, an engine air pre-cleaner to help the engine last longer, a heavy-duty toolless air filter, and removable bumper spikes for better control. It’s built with a premium vibration-dampening system to reduce user fatigue. Includes a ⅜-inch pitch, .050-gauge chain, and 20-inch bar.

Best cordless: Greenworks G-MAX 40V 16-Inch Cordless Chainsaw

Greenworks

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: One charge warrants 90 minutes of use and 100 cuts—that’s a lot of trees to cut.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.36 lbs.
  • Cutting time on one charge: 90 minutes
  • Bar length: 16 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 15 inches

Pros

  • Lots of run time
  • Universal battery for other Greenworks products
  • Brushless motor

Cons

  • Chain needs frequent re-tensioning

With a 90-minute runtime per charge, this cordless chainsaw will make up to 100 cuts between charges. Features of this Greenworks chainsaw include toolless chain tensioning, an automatic oiler, a push-button start, and an efficient brushless motor. The battery works with more than 50 tools in the Greenworks outdoor power equipment line.

Best small: Worx WG322 

WORX

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fast, clean cuts don’t have to come in large packages, and this compact chainsaw is proof.

Specs

  • Weight: 6.19 lbs.
  • Cutting time on one charge: 2 hours
  • Bar length: 10 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 8 inches

Pros

  • Automatic chain tension and lubrication system
  • Separate pole attachment can cut high branches
  • Battery compatible with other Worx power tools

Cons

  • Battery drains fast
  • Best for small jobs

This cordless 20V small chainsaw includes convenient innovations such as automatic chain tensioning, automatic chain lubrication, and a battery compatible with dozens of Worx power tools. Features a 12.5-feet-per-second chain speed that cuts through branches quickly and smoothly. Weighing in at only 6.2 pounds, this Worx chainsaw works hard but won’t tire you out.

Best budget: Oregon CS1500 

Oregon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Pull this pre-assembled electric chainsaw out of the box and you’re ready to trim branches in your yard.

Specs

  • Weight: 12.6 lbs.
  • Cutting time on one charge: N/A
  • Bar length: 18 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 17 inches

Pros

  • Pre-assembled
  • Little to no maintenance required
  • Lots of safety precautions in place

Cons

  • Instructions are a must-read

Electric chainsaws are not known for feature upgrades, but this Oregon chainsaw includes three significant improvements, including a chain brake for safety and an upgraded oiling system for smoother operation. The other feature of note is the PowerSharp chain that lets you sharpen the blade in only 3 seconds without removing it. This electric chainsaw comes pre-assembled and ready to start cutting right out of the box.

What to consider when buying the best chainsaws

If you’ve already stopped in your local hardware store to check availability, you may have noticed a somewhat limited range of options. Often these places carry only one or two brands, with a heavy focus on gas chainsaws. Buying a chainsaw online is a great way to see the full options. Whether you need a gas, corded electric, or battery-powered chainsaw, you’ll find an excellent range of options. Read on for what you need to know before clicking “add to cart.”

Are you looking for professional quality and power for long days in the woods?

Gas chainsaws are the tool of choice for those who regularly spend long days cutting up big logs away from the house or shop. They offer lots of power to cut through the thickest tree trunks and are limited only by the fuel tank size. Often the user needs a break before the saw runs out of gas. Engine size is expressed in cubic centimeters of displacement (CC), ranging from about 24 to 60 CC in residential models. The larger the engine, the longer the bar and chain it can power, with sizes of 14, 16, 18, and 20 inches commonly available.

Is clean and quiet operation something you value?

Corded electric chainsaws offer unlimited clean, quiet power anywhere within the length of an extension cord. Electric is also an excellent choice for indoor home improvement and DIY projects. Electric saws are significantly quieter and lighter than gas saws and offer impressive power. Plus, they require almost no maintenance other than topping off the bar oil and sharpening the chain. Most utilize either a 12 or 15-amp electric motor. Guide bars on these saws come in 10-, 12-, 14-, 16-, 18-, and 20-inch lengths. The shorter bars are convenient for detailed work in and around shrubbery or landscape trees that could be subject to accidental cuts, scuffs, and scrapes from longer bars.

Battery power offers total mobility with zero emissions

A cordless saw could be a great choice if weight is not much of an issue. The battery pack makes the saw heavier, but mobility improves. In enclosed spaces where an extension cord would cause a trip hazard, cordless would be the safer choice. Cordless chainsaws offer the benefits of clean, quiet electric saw performance without being attached to the outlet. And if you’re worried you’re going you’ll run out of powered packs during an extended job, take along a portable generator so you can swap out and recharge them.

Guide bar sizes include 4- and 6-inch mini saws, as well as more conventional 10-, 12-, 14-, 16-, 18-, and 20-inch lengths. Battery power is expressed in a combination of voltage (V) and amp hours (Ah) ratings. Voltage represents the total available power, while amp hours indicate the runtime. Often these saws are part of larger tool lineups from the same brand that use the same batteries, so it’s pretty easy to have an extra power pack available for extended work time. 

Smaller is better for detailed work in thick vegetation

With the right tools, yard maintenance, and home improvement can become much easier. For many users, the handiest cutter to use around the home is a small chainsaw—often a lightweight corded electric model. A short to mid-size bar in the 12- to 16-inch range is often adequate and, in many cases, most convenient while working around hazards like fences, house siding, landscape lighting, and plants you wish to protect from scars. And it makes a perfect complement to (if not a replacement for) a hedge trimmer.

FAQs

Q: Which brand of chainsaw is the best?

There are lots of great chainsaw brands with long histories of excellent quality. Which brand of chainsaw is the best is a subjective question that would eliminate many best-in-class brands. Some brands known for outstanding products for home users include Echo, Stihl, Oregon, Poulan Pro, Husqvarna, Remington, Greenworks, Worx, and more.

Q: What chainsaws do professionals use?

Professional loggers and others who cut wood all day, every day, go for more power, less weight, and premium parts with tougher alloys. Many manufacturers offer separate lines for residential/farm work and professional work. 

Q: How much does a chainsaw cost?

This depends on its size and features, but our recommendations cost between $108 and $419.

Final thoughts on the best chainsaws

Whether pruning a hedge, cleaning up fallen limbs, or stocking up a woodshed, a good chainsaw is an essential tool for you. The best chainsaw may not be the biggest, fastest, strongest one you can find. It could be the quiet one, the lightweight one, or the one with the lowest maintenance requirements. If you know you’ll only use it once yearly to trim the bottom of the Christmas tree, an electric saw would be perfect. But if you need to thin your 10-acre woodlot, a top-rated powerful gas saw is probably the best choice. If you enjoy working with quality power tools, and you take care of them as they require, the best chainsaw will provide many years of satisfaction.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best chainsaws of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best golf balls of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-golf-balls/ Fri, 21 May 2021 18:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=365690
A man playing golf into a large green area with a golf stick and gloves into his hands.
Courtney Cook, Unsplash

Rounding out all you need to know when shopping for the best golf balls

The post The best golf balls of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A man playing golf into a large green area with a golf stick and gloves into his hands.
Courtney Cook, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best low-spin Titleist best golf ball ball best overall Titleist Velocity Golf Balls
SEE IT

This pick allows you to hit farther and with less spin.

Best practice balls A round yellow ball with triangle black holes into it. SKLZ Limited-Flight Practice Golf Balls
SEE IT

These regulation-size practice balls allow you to practice your swing with a limited flight capacity of 45 yards.

Best tour-performance A red with black lines box with golf balls into it. Callaway Chrome Soft
SEE IT

With fast ball speeds, low spin, and distance control, these balls will have you hitting like a pro.

Modern golf balls have come a long way since their hand-carved wooden predecessors of the 14th century. Today’s rubber and plastic models offer so many unique features that they might as well be customized to fit each individual player. So how do you know if you need TaylorMade balls or Titleist balls? Low-spin golf balls or tour-performance models? Practice golf balls or cheap balls? Finding the best golf balls for you can be nearly as challenging as the game itself. But like a good caddy, we’ve done the advance work on your behalf and present our suggestions so you can get right into the swing of things. 

The best golf balls: Reviews & Recommendations

Best low-spin: Titleist Velocity Golf Balls

Titleist

SEE IT

If you’re looking for low-spin Titleist golf balls that’ll have you out-driving the rest of your foursome, the Velocity measures well ahead of the competition. Built to get every yard, this Titleist pick features a high-speed LSX core that jumps off the clubface and a cover with a tiled 350 octahedral dimple pattern that enhances flight and reduces slicing. As with most low-spin balls, the Velocity trades touch around the greens for added distance, but it’s still plenty soft enough for average golfers. Plus, matte green, orange, and pink color options add extra style with those extra yards.  

Best tour-performance: Callaway Chrome Soft

Callaway

SEE IT

There are few things more satisfying in golf than watching your wedge shot spin back toward the cup, and the Chrome can beeline for the pin with the best of them. A Dual SoftFast Core gives these Callaway golf balls an ultra-soft feel, and a stiff casing and thin, firm outer core, reinforced with graphene, provide premium touch. Still, these soft Callaway balls also offer plenty of distance thanks to a large inner core and urethane cover that are designed to reduce spin on full swings. 

Best for the average golfers: Srixon Soft Feel

Srixon

SEE IT

The best golf balls for average golfers balance distance and feel, control and cost, and that’s exactly what you get with these Srixon balls. The two-piece ball generates medium spin, and the resilient core gets progressively softer as it moves inward, which allows for more yardage off the tee without giving up touch around the greens. The Soft Feel’s low-compression design also minimizes mistakes, meaning you don’t have to wander as far into the trees if you don’t catch it squarely. These balls also give your game a lift with a durable shell that features a 338 Speed Dimple Pattern, reducing drag and keeping your shot in the air longer.

Best practice balls: SKLZ Limited-Flight Practice Golf Balls

SKLZ

SEE IT

Sure, no practice golf balls perfectly replicate the real thing. But these limited-flight plastic trainers can definitely give you some solid reps if you can’t make it to the range. They are regulation size and fly about as well as you could expect from a plastic option, without making you walk too far to chase them—they max out at about 45 yards. The material is said to be dent-proof, but they are plastic balls that you strike with metal clubs, after all, so don’t be too surprised if they don’t last forever, or if you happen to lose them—the half-black color design has a way of disappearing in tall grass. 

Best budget: TaylorMade Distance Plus Golf Balls

TaylorMade

SEE IT

For less than a buck a ball, these TaylorMades provide plenty of performance. The reactive core generates low spin, and the aerodynamic dimple pattern reduces resistance, maximizing yardage down the fairway. Like most cheap golf balls, this two-piece ball doesn’t have that Tour-quality touch, but if all you need is something to knock out there for your next game of skins, these TaylorMade ones are the perfect match. 

Things to consider when shopping for the best golf balls

Just as a few simple pointers can straighten out a slice, a few simple considerations can help you find the best golf balls. For starters, they are made in three main types: distance golf balls, low-spin golf balls, and tour-performance golf balls. Distance options feature a large core and thin cover that allows the ball to jump off the clubface. Low-spin balls create more accuracy by reducing sidespin on shots not hit squarely, as well as more distance by lowering trajectories and increasing roll. And performance golf balls help lower-handicap players shave strokes with multiple-layered cores that can be manipulated to hit stinging line drives off the tee and high-arcing irons from the fairway. (Swing hard and you activate the inner core, maximizing distance; swing easier and you only compress the outer core, generating more spin.)

Covers are another consideration. Surlyn is the more common shell material: It’s durable and scratch-resistant, while efficiently transferring energy during impact to increase yardage. Urethane is softer and is used on high-performance golf balls because it provides a better feel, particularly around the greens. Pay attention to a cover’s dimple patterns, as well. Some designs reduce drag, some increased height, others affect spin.

Finally, feel should factor in, which is a bit of a touchy subject because feel can refer to different things. Often, when someone talks about soft golf balls, they are talking about a low-compression golf ball that effectively squishes at impact, limiting spin and increasing yardage. Comparatively, high-compression balls hold their form, requiring faster swing speeds for the ball to really bounce off the clubface, but rewarding players who know how to shape their shots. Still, because golf ball cores have evolved greatly beyond the days of wound-up string, it’s no longer easy to make a straightforward compression comparison between one ball and another. Confusing matters more, a soft cover on a golf ball can create a soft feel off the club, meaning some measurements of softness actually have nothing to do with compression and everything to do with “touch,” which refers to a golfer’s perceived control of the ball, especially in the short game.  

Don’t worry if your head is spinning with thoughts of ball rotations, or if you don’t feel like you’ve quite gotten to the heart of which core type is right. Compare the different types of golf balls as you Read on for more ideas on how to find the best balls for you. 

Do you want to hit it farther and straighter?

To sports fans or casual golfers, spin sounds like something everyone who tees it up should aspire to. The best shooters in basketball put beautiful rotation on the ball, baseball pitchers who are on their game are said to be spinning a gem, and pros on the PGA Tour can wow galleries with backspin on the green. But spin is not actually something every golfer should look for when shopping for balls. In fact, for many golfers, low-spin balls are the way to go because they add distance, increase accuracy, and are often more durable than high-performance balls. How is this possible? Low-spin options produce the right amount of backspin to sail above the fairway without climbing so high in the sky that they lose forward momentum. What’s more, limited spin prevents a poorly struck shot from traveling too far off line—so if you hit a slice, it won’t be nearly as wicked as it would be with a high-spin golf ball. When you do hit it into the rough and brush, and maybe onto a cart path or two, low-spin balls are less likely to be damaged, since they typically have tough, hard shells. If you’re a golfer who knows how to bend a drive around a dog leg or fold a fairway metal into a stiff wind, you should opt for a higher-performing ball, but if you’re a golfer looking to add length and keep it in play, shop low-spin balls.

Is your game Tour ready?

For players who consistently score in the 70s, the right golf ball can be the difference between a number in the red and the black. Tour-performance balls feature multilayered cores that skilled players can use to their advantage. Off the tee, fast swing speeds will compress the ball to its inner core, designed to spin less than the outer core. That outer layer is activated on softer swings, when players have a short iron or wedge in hand and want a higher shot with more backspin to help the ball land softly on the green. 

The covers of tour-performance balls are typically made with urethane, designed to create a soft feel off the clubface that enables more touch. That’s a huge benefit for low-handicap players, but those who shoot in the 90s are probably better off with cheap balls that won’t damage as easily.

The Titleist Pro V1, with its patented Drop-and-Stop greenside control, is perennially revered as a standout on Tour. But other options, including Callaway golf balls, are making a serious run at the title of best balls used by the pros.  

Mid-handicappers benefit from balls that offer distance and control

The best balls for average golfers are plenty long off the tee and soft around the greens. They are also inexpensive enough that you won’t feel obligated to send out a search party every time you knock an errant drive into the trees. An average golfer should look for ones with medium compression, limiting spin on drives but not limiting it so much that the ball won’t spin backward off irons or wedges.  

Does your game need some yard work?

In an ideal world, you’d probably hit a large bucket of balls every day. But in our busy lives, getting to the range isn’t always possible. Plastic or foam training balls bring the range to your backyard, letting you work on your swing while the charcoal is lighting. The best practice balls mimic the flight of real ones reasonably well, without all of the carry. After all, there are only so many times your neighbor will tolerate you sending a shot over the fence. Training balls should also be durable, or at least as durable as you can expect from an imitation of the real thing. On average, plastic practice balls with holes are more durable than solid plastic balls or practice balls made of foam.

Looking for cheap golf balls? There’s plenty to like under $15

Even if you aren’t the kind of golfer who measures a round by how many balls you lost (rather than how many strokes you took), cheap golf balls could still be for you. You can easily get plenty of performance for half the cost of a mid-range ball. Less expensive balls won’t provide the touch and versatility of more expensive balls, but they should provide plenty of distance. Budget balls are typically two-piece balls with a low-spin core and hard shell—just what you need to help keep it in play and keep it in better condition, even when you do, inevitably, find the rough. 

FAQs

Q: What is the best golf ball in 2021?

The best option in 2021 is the golf ball that seems to top the list every year: the Titleist Pro V1. Favored by many professionals, these Titleist ones improve your distance and increase your control, which is exactly why they cost about $5 per ball. 

Q: Which golf balls are best for high handicappers?

The best balls for high handicappers are two-piece, low-spin balls. Limited spin means the ball won’t travel as severely off-course on mishits. Plus, less spin means less height, which translates to more distance. 

Q: Do softer golf balls go further?

In general, softer balls go further because low-compression cores create less spin. However, at high swing speeds, soft golf balls deform at impact, costing energy and reducing ball speed—and, therefore, yardage. 

Related: Looking for more beginner-friendly options? Have a ball looking through these

The final word on shopping for the best golf balls

The best golf balls will help maximize your game. If you’re a higher handicap player, you’ll benefit from low-spin golf balls that increase distance. If you’re a lower handicap player, you’ll depend on performance balls that provide more touch. And no matter how good you are, consider tossing a set of practice balls into your cart, because even if you play your rounds with the perfect ball, you can always find a way to get better. 

The post The best golf balls of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best above-ground pools in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-above-ground-pool/ Thu, 12 Aug 2021 13:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=387936
The best above-ground pools composited
Stan Horaczek

You don’t need to dig up the lawn to transform your yard into a private resort or kid-friendly water park.

The post The best above-ground pools in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best above-ground pools composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for serious swimmers The Intex Above-Ground 32-Foot by 16-Foot by 52-Inch Pool is the best above-ground pool for lap swimmers. Intex Above-Ground 32-Foot by 16-Foot x 52-Inch Pool
SEE IT

Spacious pool for real swimming.

Best overall An Intex pool is the best overall above-ground pool choice for more backyards Intex Ultra XTR Frame Round Above Ground Outdoor Swimming Pool Set
SEE IT

It’s durable, attractive, and relatively easy to set up.

Best for babies and pets The YAHEETECH Foldable Swimming Pool is the best above-ground pool for babies and pets. YAHEETECH Foldable Swimming Pool
SEE IT

The whole family can enjoy this easy-to-store pool.

Taking a dip in your own pool is the dream of many homeowners, and thanks to affordable, easy-to-install above-ground pools, it’s never been easier to attain. In-ground pools require industrial construction equipment and cost more than some cars. However, an above-ground pool is a simple way to add fun to just about any backyard. Today’s above-ground models come in a wide variety of styles, materials, and sizes. A large rectangular above-ground pool is great for summer parties. Smaller, inflatable, oval above-ground pools are perfect for young children. If you’re looking for an inexpensive way to stay cool, the best above-ground pool turns your property into an at-home vacation destination.

How we chose the best above-ground pool

Our splashy selections are based on personal testing, research, recommendations, reviews, and user impressions. Next to our grills, above-ground pools are one of our favorite al fresco accessories. We culled through specs and perspectives until we narrowed down the choices to ones that fit every yard and need.

The best above-ground pools: Reviews & Recommendations

Ordering a pool online may sound like trying to get a haircut via email. But today’s pools are user-friendly, and the product descriptions clearly state the sizes and dimensions to give you a good idea of what the final product looks like. So use our guide to help you find the swimming pool that fits your backyard, can fit your pool float of choice, looks great next to your inflatable hot tub, and has the style and features you want in a warm-weather oasis. Just don’t forget the sunscreen while you’re shopping!

Best overall: Intex Ultra XTR Frame 14′ x 42″ Round Above Ground Outdoor Swimming Pool Set

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Capacity: 3,357 gallons
  • Dimensions: 14-feet
  • Water depth: 42 inches

Pros

  • Set up takes less than an hour
  • Included sand filter

Cons

  • Bottom is hard to flatten out when filling with water
  • Unless you’ve got a deck around it, the ladder can be tough for people to climb over

The circular Intex Ultra XTR Frame 14-Foot by 42-inch above-ground pool holds 3,357 gallons of water. This particular pool is perfect for families who want a durable, stylish place to swim in their backyard. The sturdy frame takes less than an hour to set up. Assembly requires no tools, as the galvanized steel braces snap together easily. You’ll want some extra hands to help with the process, but it goes quickly and easily.

The included sand filter pump works well enough to keep the pool clean. Sand comes separately, so make sure you buy the correct product to get it working correctly. I’ve seen horror stories of incorrect sand grain sizes wrecking pumps. The pump was the trickiest part of the pool to put together, but if you pay close attention to the instructions, you’ll be fine.

The lining and walls are stronger than other options on the market. Intex claims that it’s 50 percent tougher than its other pool liners. This model is a bit undersized for adults, but if you are looking for a place to float around, it’s our top pick. We only tried this smaller model, but you can upgrade to larger circular pools—16-18-, or 26-foot—or to a larger rectangular model that is 24 feet long, 12 feet wide, and 52 inches deep if you want to swim around or fit more people.

Best for serious swimmers: Intex Above-Ground 32-Foot by 16-Foot by 52-Inch Pool

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This saltwater above-ground pool brings water workouts to your backyard.

Specs

  • Capacity: 14,364 gallons
  • Dimensions: 384 x 192 x 52 inches
  • Water depth: 45 inches

Pros

  • 90-minute set up
  • Feel of an in-ground pool

Cons

  • Must supply own salt

As above-ground saltwater pools go, the Intex pool is a backyard beast, measuring 36 feet in length and just over four feet deep. That’s long enough to accomplish a genuine swimming workout in your own private lap pool. The steel frame safely holds 14,364 gallons of saltwater. You will need to supply your own salt, though. The included sand filter pumps out 2,650 gallons an hour and makes maintenance simple. If you have the space and want an above-ground model with the feel of an in-ground one, the Intex saltwater pool is your best bet.  

Best for families: Intex 28211EH 12-Foot by 30-Inch Above-Ground Pool

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fun for the entire family is less than an hour away with this above-ground pool.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1,718 gallons
  • Dimensions: 144 x 144 x 30 inches
  • Water depth: 24 inches

Pros

  • Set up takes less than an hour
  • Included filter

Cons

  • Small for adults
  • Lasts less than five years

The circular Intex 28211EH 12-Foot by 30-Inch Above-Ground Pool holds 1,718 gallons of water. That makes this a great choice for kids who want a fun, safe place to splash. You can set it up in less than an hour, and the included filter pump works well enough to keep the pool clean. The lining and walls feel strong, and the supports are tough enough to handle a kid’s birthday party. That said, this pool may not hold up after five years of heavy use. Luckily, the price point is low enough that even if you get a few seasons of swimming in, it’s worth the money. This model is a bit undersized for adults, but your kids and their friends will have a blast in this simple Intex pool.

Best for babies and pets: YAHEETECH Foldable Swimming Pool

YAHEETECH

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Sturdiness and durability make this small above-ground pool baby- and dog-proof.

Specs

  • Capacity: 106 gallons for XXL
  • Dimensions: 63 x 63 x 12 inches
  • Water depth: 12 inches

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Versatile

Cons

  • Side panels will cave in if not on a flat surface

You can’t get an Olympic workout in the YAHEETECH Foldable Swimming Pool. In fact, it’s less of a pool than a very large puddle. But for toddlers and dogs, this affordable pool is a lot of fun. The material is strong enough to handle a rowdy Schnauzer and soft enough for your young kids to bump into. The shallow one-foot depth is safe for wobbly kids just learning to walk, though parent supervision is ALWAYS required. As an added bonus, you can use the pool as a sandbox or ball pit. (Or to soak your weary feet.) If you’re looking for the cheapest and easiest way to add summer fun to your outdoor space, this dog pool/baby pool is a fantastic and versatile option. 

Best budget: Intex Swimming Pool, Easy Set, 8 Feet by 30 Inches

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fast setup with minimal tools required makes this above-ground pool perfect in a pinch.

Specs

  • Capacity: 639 gallons
  • Dimensions: 96.06 x 96.06 x 29.9 inches
  • Water depth: 23 inches

Pros

  • No chemicals
  • Inflatable

Cons

  • Small

Inflatable pools are the easiest to set up and maintain. As far as small above-ground pools go, this Intex swimming pool is the best of the blow-ups. The small, eight-foot diameter pool holds 639 gallons of water—not enough for a pool party, but plenty of room for one or two people. This pool is great for impromptu soaks after a hard day. There are no chemicals to change or filters to clean. You don’t need to snap support rods together or unfold pool covers. When you want to take a dip, inflate and go. There are holes for optional pumps, but this pool is best enjoyed as simply as possible. No need to add electricity and filtration to this solo backyard pool party. (For best results, use it in conjunction with a cocktail and ukulele.) 

What to consider when shopping for the best above-ground pool

Choosing an above-ground pool is easier than you may think. These swimming pools are designed for simple installation and minimal maintenance. Your biggest decision will be size and style. But before taking the plunge, know the do’s and don’ts of choosing an above-ground pool.

Picking the right pool size

Above-ground pool sizes are the first thing to look at when shopping for the best pool. Small, inflatable above-ground pools that hold less than 1,000 gallons of water are the easiest to use. Just inflate it when it’s time to swim and drain it when the party’s over. You don’t have to worry about any filters or chemicals. It’s basically a backyard bathtub, which is ideal for small kids. 

Large above-ground pools that hold more than 1,000 gallons of water will require more maintenance. These pools remain filled with water all season, so a filter and chemicals are needed to keep the water crystal clear and algae-free. There is more upkeep involved with the larger models than the inflatable swimming pools. However, with that said, the daily and weekly maintenance of these large above-ground models is very easy. And compared with the upkeep of a costly in-ground pool, above-ground pool maintenance is a breeze. Large above-ground pools can hold anywhere from 8,000 to 15,000 gallons of water, and they may stretch over 30 feet long. 

Reminder: Don’t forget to check the depth. While above-ground models are typically shallower than in-ground pools, they can still be too deep for small children or unsure swimmers. (Children can drown in as little as 1 inch of water.) The larger swimming pools can reach depths of about 4.5 feet. Smaller pools can be a mere three inches deep. 

Type of above-ground swimming pool

After you decide on a size, it’s time to think about what kind of above-ground pool you want: Inflatable, steel frame, resin frame, aluminum frame, hybrid, or semi-inground. Don’t worry—it’s not as complicated as it sounds. 

Inflatable pools are self-explanatory: Blow it up, fill it with water, and you’re good to go. 

Steel frame above-ground models are held together with vertical steel supports. The walls and floor of the pool can be plastic, vinyl, or resin. These swimming pools are strong, but they’re also heavy and may rust. Steel also gets hot in the sun. Aluminum-frame pools are lighter than steel-frame pools, but to prevent oxidation, the aluminum needs some love and care—and a protective coating. 

Resin above-ground pools are made of strong plastic. They are lighter than steel frame pools, and they won’t rust. They can also take a heavy beating without getting a dent, but they do cost more.

Hybrid pools use multiple materials to create a strong pool that will last. Resin is used to keep things light and cool. Steel supports keep everything in place. These hybrid models offer the best of both worlds, and they are less expensive than resin pools. 

Semi-inground pools are a more permanent solution. Also known as radiant pools, these pools are built with a strong wall of stone or vinyl that matches the outdoor decor. They are designed to fit your specific home, so you have customizable options you don’t get with off-the-shelf pools. However, they are expensive and permanent. The upside: Radiant pools look like stylish in-ground swimming pools.

Pool placement

While above-ground pools are versatile, they can’t be placed just anywhere. Inclines are a no-no, as even the slightest hill can push water against the walls of the pool, causing uneven pressure on the sides and liner. Spreading a few bags of sand across the area can help even things out. 

When installing an above-ground model, you must comply with local building codes and regulations. This usually means you can’t place a pool near power lines or too close to property lines. 

You will also need to factor in two to three feet of perimeter space for unobstructed access to the pool. You want a large, flat, open area of grass, sand, or dirt. Don’t put it on concrete or brick. Stay away from trees. And only install it on a deck if the deck is pool-ready and designed for the job.

Saltwater pool vs. chlorine

Most above-ground pools use harsh chemicals like chlorine to keep the water clear. But a saltwater above-ground pool is the safer alternative. While saltwater pools still need cleaning chemicals, they don’t use nearly as much of the stuff. Saltwater pools are becoming popular for those who want to use fewer chemicals and don’t want to be burdened with maintenance. Swimming in saltwater also feels better. The lower chemical content means the water is not as harsh on your eyes and skin. 

Saltwater above-ground pools are just as easy to set up as other types of pools. And you can also buy a conversion kit that turns standard chlorine pools into saltwater pools.

Installation

Once again, inflatable above-ground pools are the easiest to install. Use a pump to fill the pool with air, then add water. The installation is a bit more involved when using a pool made of vertical supports. While each pool will have its own set of instructions, they can usually be set up within an afternoon and don’t require extra power tools if everything snaps in place snugly. But you will need a helping hand or two to avoid frustration. Make sure the spot is level, lay out the various parts, and understand how the liner attaches to the swimming pool. Take your time, and you should have no trouble installing the pool. 

FAQs

Q: What’s the deepest above-ground pool available?

The deepest above-ground pool available is the Intex 36-Foot by 16-Foot by 52-Inch Above-Ground Pool. The four-foot depth may not seem like a lot, but in the world of above-ground pools, it’s tough to find deeper floors. You can buy specially made above-ground pools with a depth up to six feet, but these are only available from pool-installation companies. And when you go that deep, you must make sure the walls, liner, and supports can handle the water pressure. Even for standard above-ground pools, manufacturers will recommend you only fill the pool to 90-percent capacity. This gives you enough room to get in and swim without dumping gallons of water off the sides.

Q: Are above-ground pools expensive to maintain?

Above-ground pools are not too expensive to maintain. The biggest cost is cleaning chemicals and filter replacements. There are also a few up-front costs you must think about, such as getting a ladder, a pool cover, pool skimmer and net, and other essential pool accessories. You will also need an inflatable hot dog raft because swimming without one causes chronic summer sadness. Saltwater pools are cheaper to maintain, but you’ll still need to pay for salt. And some above-ground models come with filter pumps that are underpowered, so upgrading to a more efficient pump is recommended. All said, it’s still cheaper than an in-ground pool or country club membership.  

Q: How long do above-ground pools last?

Above-ground pools do not last forever. They are temporary warm-weather fun. The liners of even the best above-ground pool will not last much longer than five years. The liners can be replaced, but the pool structure itself—the supports and walls—are only meant to last 15 years at the most. That’s a good reason to keep a close eye on your budget. If a $700 pool lasts 15 years, that’s still only $50 a year. You can get more life out of the permanent, radiant above-ground pools that have a strong wall built around the perimeter, but these pools are costly to install. 

Final thoughts on the best above-ground pools

With the best above-ground pool, your backyard becomes a fun zone. From large rectangle above-ground pools for swimming laps to small oval above-ground pools for parties, you can find a great new way to stay cool this season. With an eye on size and shape, zoom in on the model that fits your needs. Whatever style you choose, swim safe and always supervise children. Also, consider making the jump to a saltwater above-ground pool for a more natural, soothing swim. Whatever you choose, one of these pools will transform your home into a neighborhood oasis.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best above-ground pools in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best bird-watching binoculars in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/best-bird-watching-binoculars/ Wed, 28 Aug 2019 14:08:58 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-bird-watching-binoculars/
Get up close to eagles, owls, hawks, and more with the best bird watching binoculars.

Get to know your local avian neighbors.

The post The best bird-watching binoculars in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Get up close to eagles, owls, hawks, and more with the best bird watching binoculars.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Celestron Skywatcher is one of the best pairs of birdwatching binoculars. Celestron 71009 SkyMaster
SEE IT

The Celestron SkyMasters combine ultra-sharp focus and 15x magnification for optimal viewing.

Best ergonomics Nikon makes the best birdwatching binoculars that are ergonomic. Nikon Prostaff Binoculars
SEE IT

Lightweight and comfortable, the Nikon Prostaffs can withstand long sessions with ease.

Best budget Tasco makes some of tbe best birdwatching binoculars at a budget-friendly price. Tasco Essentials 8×42
SEE IT

The Tasco Essentials provide bright images with life-like colors in a small package.

The thrill of spotting a beautiful bird never gets old, especially when you’ve got binoculars for bird watching to see every feather in detail. If you’re new to birding, binoculars will help you see more from a single location. The best bird-watching binoculars capture light and color to make it feel like you could reach out and touch the feathers with your finger. Binoculars come in a wide range of prices, from ones that will make you wonder if you’re buying a small car to ones that are easier on the wallet. A pair that fits your budget, birding habits, and hands will let you spot birds like never before. Keep reading to get our views on the best bird-watching binoculars and get a few tips before buying.

How we chose the best bird-watching binoculars

For a serious birder, binoculars are an investment, whereas a casual amateur doesn’t need quite the same features. But both users want the same thing: the ability to see birds with accurate colors and clear images. To meet that need, I judged the binoculars based on their image clarity, brightness, focus speed, close-focus performance, ergonomics, and weight.

Clarity and brightness: Clarity and brightness come down to the lens and prism design and their coatings. Coatings help target colors and reduce reflection to increase the light that enters the binoculars.

Focus speed: Birds move fast; binoculars that quickly focus mean you still get to see your target.

Close-focus performance: If you’re lucky enough to get within 10 feet of a bird, you want to be able to get even closer with your binoculars.

Ergonomics and weight: You might have to wait a long time for a bird to appear. Good ergonomics will make the experience easier on your hands and shoulders, and lighter options make them easier to hold while watching and waiting.

The best bird-watching binoculars: Reviews & Recommendations

If you enjoy seeing birds up close, you’re in good company. According to a 2016 U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service survey, more than 45 million people identified as birders in the United States, and that number is believed to have increased during the pandemic. Whether you’re looking for a premium model with high-quality optics or binoculars you can easily toss into a backpack, there’s a pair that will suit your needs below.

Best overall: Celestron 71009 SkyMaster

Celestron

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Equally well-suited for both expert and novice birders, the Celestron SkyMaster binoculars offer top-of-the-line features at an accessible price.

Specs

  • Magnification: 15x
  • Lens: 70mm
  • Weight: 3.28 pounds

Pros

  • Large center focus dial for ultra-sharp focus
  • 15x magnification for detailed viewing
  • Eyeglass-friendly eyecups

Cons

  • Quite heavy

Ready to get up close to your favorite birds? The Celestron 71009 SkyMaster binoculars boast a 15x magnification level that brings you closer to nature than ever before. The large objective lens allows you to catch every moment, even in low-light conditions, and the rugged textured finish helps stabilize your grip.

Beyond these amazing attributes, Celestron has included many thoughtful additions. Your package includes an objective lens cap, tripod, and adapter for your binoculars. Note that this pair is quite heavy, weighing a hefty 3.28 pounds. For best function during extended bird-watching adventures, it’s recommended to use these with a tripod. For more options, check out our guide to the best binoculars for hiking.

Best close focus: Maven B1 10×42

Maven

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: The Maven can get crystal-clear close focus and includes focus adjustments that are a cinch to do, even when you’re freaking out about being super close to a new bird.

Specs

  • Magnification: 10x
  • Lens: 42mm
  • Weight: 1.76 pounds

Pros

  • Easy to adjust focus
  • Extra-low dispersion glass maximizes available light
  • Excellent clarity and color at close distances

Cons

  • Can be hefty for smaller users

The Maven B1 features impressive focus that’s a cinch to use. This pair also features extra-low dispersion glass that resists reflection to maximize the amount of light that enters the binoculars. For you, more light means better clarity and color even as conditions start to dim.

While we love this model for its close focus, the Maven is definitely up there with the top binoculars for distances as well. A wide field of view makes it easier to spot small, quick birds. This model is completed with a durable casing to protect them from the elements and comes with a microfiber storage bag.

Best premium: Olympus 10×50 Binoculars

Olympus

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: You’ll be able to count every feather with the wide field of view and magnification power of these Olympus binoculars.

Specs

  • Magnification: 10x
  • Lens: 50mm
  • Weight: 1.88 pounds

Pros

  • Wide field of view
  • Aspherical lenses
  • Responsive focus wheel

Cons

  • Zoom lever can be difficult to operate

If you’re ready to take your bird watching to the next level, consider the Olympus 10×50 Binoculars. This pair boasts incredible optical clarity with zero chromatic aberration. The wide field of view means that even the smallest avian friends appear as sharp, bright images, with excellent color rendition and contrast.

Equally excellent for daytime or nighttime observation, these binoculars feel as good as they look. The body is coated in a protective rubber, adding a tactile edge to the equipment. Paired with the smooth hinge and included case, neck strap, and lens covers, this option will make you feel like a bird-watching pro atop your own Mt. Olympus.

Best ergonomic: Nikon Prostaff Binoculars

Nikon

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Nikon’s cutting-edge technology, paired with the comfort birders crave, makes the Prostaff Binoculars an instant classic.

Specs

  • Magnification: 8x
  • Lens: 42mm 
  • Weight: 1.43 pounds

Pros

  • High-reflective mirror-coated prisms
  • Shock resistant
  • Waterproof
  • Compatible with tripods

Cons

  • No image stabilization

The Nikon Prostaff Binoculars are excellent for a devoted birder. Featuring turn-and-slide rubber eyecups and a specialized long eye relief design, they’re a perfect fit for all birdwatchers, including those who wear eyeglasses. This lightweight pair sits easily in hand, while rubber armoring provides shock resistance. They’re also waterproof, so in the event of an accidental rainstorm, your hearty binoculars should be OK.

The high-reflective mirror-coated prisms provide excellent light transmission, while nitrogen gas means fog and mold will not form inside the optical system. Even in foggy or darkening conditions, you can spot your favorite species in crisp detail with true-to-life colors. Nikon’s trusted technology allows this pair to rise above the rest when it comes to ergonomic comfort and design.

Best for travel: Celestron – Nature DX 8×42 Binoculars

Celestron

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: At 12.1 ounces, these lightweight binoculars are easy to stow into a backpack but come with premium features and protection.

Specs

  • Magnification: 8x
  • Lens: 42mm
  • Weight: 3.28 pounds

Pros

  • High-quality optics
  • Waterproof
  • Lightweight
  • Protected by rubber

Cons

  • Expensive

These binoculars are comfortable, light, and easy to handle. Whether you’re watching shorebirds flock or are fascinated by pigeons fighting over a french fry on the other side of the street, you’ll enjoy both a wide field of view at a distance and a sharp focus close-up.

Best waterproof: Bushnell H2O Waterproof/Fogproof Roof Prism Binocular

Bushnell

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: These waterproof binoculars are rugged and great for taking on the water.

Pros

  • Waterproof 
  • Durable
  • Fog-proof
  • Eyecups good for people who wear glasses

Cons

  • Heavier than some models

This pair is a good value all on its own. For intrepid birders in boats or braving wet conditions, the waterproof and fog-proof features make them a fine choice to pack alongside your rain jacket. People who wear glasses will appreciate the adjustable eyecups.

Best budget: Tasco Essentials 8×42

Tasco

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: The Tasco Essentials has just enough of everything for the beginner birder and won’t put you over a tight budget.

Specs

  • Magnification: 8x
  • Lens: 42mm
  • Weight: 1.45 pounds

Pros

  • Multi-coated lenses improve resolution and brightness
  • Compact size and lightweight
  • Weather-resistant housing

Cons

  • Slow to focus

The Tasco Essentials 8×42 may not have the focal speed and crystal clarity of some of the more expensive models on our list, but they’re impressive in their price range. A lightweight design and weather-resistant housing create binoculars for those who don’t want to get weighed down while on more rugged birding adventures.

Prism and lens coatings create clearer images and offer good brightness at this price point. You might have to wait a little longer at dawn and dusk for the best visibility, but you’ll get great views without investing an arm and a leg in your binoculars. Where you’ll see a big performance difference with this model is that they are much slower to focus. However, be patient, and you’ll get your views.

Things to consider before buying bird-watching binoculars

Binoculars have numbers like 10×42 or 8×42 after the name. The first number is the magnification, and the second is the diameter of the objective lens. (The objective lens is the one closest to the bird.) The objective lens can give you a good idea of how big the binoculars are. Larger lenses also gather more light for brighter, clearer images.

Field of view

Birds are small, so you need to balance magnification with field of view. Birdwatchers tend to prefer 8x magnification for its wider field of view over the extra magnification offered with 10x models.

Lenses, prism design, and coatings

Lenses and prisms with high-tech coatings help focus colors and capture light to provide clear, accurate images. These coatings and lens designs are often why two pairs of binoculars may look the same on the outside but have hundreds of dollars difference in their price. On the inside, the more expensive binoculars have extra coatings that focus on colors for better accuracy and allow more light to enter the lens. That helps create brighter images and clarity from one end of the lens to the other.

FAQs

Q: Which is better: 10×42 or 8×42 binoculars?

Binoculars with 10x magnification offer a closer view. However, they also have a smaller field of view, which could make it hard to spot the bird. Most birders prefer 8x binoculars because they get good magnification with a wider field of view.

Q: How do I choose bird-watching binoculars?

Start with your budget, then look for a pair that’s comfortable to hold and easy to focus. You should be able to reach the focus while holding the binoculars to your eyes. Next, consider the specs, like the magnification, field of view, and coatings. These will determine the clarity of the images, color, accuracy, and brightness.

Q: How much does a pair of bird-watching binoculars cost?

The cost of binoculars ranges from more than $1,000 for a premium model like the Olympus 10×50 Binoculars to less than $100 for the wallet-friendly Tasco Essentials 8×42.

Final thoughts on bird-watching binoculars

If you’re ready to invest in binoculars to use for every bird outing and conditions, the Olympus Binocular 10×50 are the ones. This pair’s color, clarity, and brightness outshine their price point. However, if you’re on a more conservative budget, the Tasco Essentials 8×42 provides great viewing with a smaller price tag.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bird-watching binoculars in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best sunscreens for face in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-sunscreen-for-face/ Tue, 25 May 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=366171
A woman and children splashing their feet in water with the best sunscreen
Yulianto Poitier, Pexels

Sensitive skin? Oily skin? No matter your type, upgrade your skincare routine with the best sunscreen for face use.

The post The best sunscreens for face in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A woman and children splashing their feet in water with the best sunscreen
Yulianto Poitier, Pexels

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best mineral The Olita Mineral Sunscreen SPF 30 Lotion is our pick for the best mineral sunscreen. Best mineral: Olita Mineral Sunscreen SPF 30 Lotion
SEE IT

This sunscreen is made with zinc oxide, and organic ingredients that go easy on aquatic life.

Best for sensitive skin Pipette mineral sunscreen is the best sunscreen for face Pipette Mineral Sunscreen Broad Spectrum SPF 50
SEE IT

This sunscreen contains zinc oxide, is SPF 50, and is safe enough for babies.

Best drugstore Neutrogena sheer mineral sunscreen is some of the best drugstore sunscreen for race Neutrogena Sheer Zinc Face Mineral Sunscreen
SEE IT

This affordable option is sheer, is SPF 50, and is fragrance- and paraben-free.

We’re often told how important sunscreen is to protect against skin cancer and premature aging, but finding the right facial sunscreen can be a difficult task. The search for the best face sunscreen is especially challenging if you have sensitive skin that will react to standard products. Luckily, many brands have designed lightweight sunscreen formulas that nourish your skin while also protecting you against harmful UV rays. Whether you’re a sunscreen veteran or getting ready to dip your toe in the pool, we’ll help you discover the best sunscreen for faces.

The best sunscreen for face use: Reviews & Recommendations

Say goodbye to the days of greasy hands, white residue, and oily formulas! Whether you have sensitive skin or are prone to acne, there’s a sunscreen that will fulfill your needs.

Best mineral: Olita Mineral Sunscreen SPF 30 Lotion

Olita

SEE IT

Formulated like a lightweight lotion, this sunscreen utilizes zinc oxide as a protective outer barrier with broad-spectrum SPF 30. Made from organic ingredients that won’t do damage to aquatic life and vitamins and antioxidants that nourish your skin, this sunscreen also resists water for up to 80 minutes.

Best for sensitive skin: Pipette Mineral Sunscreen Broad Spectrum SPF 50

Pipette

SEE IT

This 100-percent mineral sunscreen contains non-nano zinc oxide, provides broad-spectrum SPF 50 protection, and is the best sunscreen for sensitive skin. The Pipette mineral sunscreen is fragrance-free, glides on easily, and won’t leave a white cast. It’s safe enough for babies, so you can be sure that your skin will love it too.

Best for oily skin: Supergoop! Unseen Sunscreen

supergoop

SEE IT

With a gel texture and oil-free formula, the Unseen Sunscreen provides broad-spectrum SPF 40 protection without leaving a trace, making it our pick for the best sunscreen for oily skin. Guaranteed to blend with every skin tone, this transparent sunscreen glides on seamlessly and creates a velvety finish. Supergoop! sunscreen is also oxybenzone-free, avoiding an ingredient found in many chemical sunscreens that is toxic to coral reefs.

Best for acne-prone skin: EltaMD UV Clear Facial Sunscreen

EltaMD

SEE IT

This EltaMD sunscreen combines both zinc oxide and niacinamide for broad-spectrum SPF 46 coverage, protecting from harmful UVA and UVB rays while reducing inflammation and improving discoloration. The sunscreen is non-greasy, fragrance-free, oil-free, paraben-free, sensitivity-free, and noncomedogenic, and its key ingredients work together to boost your skin’s health. Available in tinted and untinted, this is the holy grail of acne-friendly sunscreen.

Best drugstore: Neutrogena Sheer Zinc Face Mineral Sunscreen

Neutrogena

SEE IT

The Neutrogena Sheer sunscreen provides UV protection with 100-percent mineral zinc oxide and broad-spectrum SPF 50, making it the best drugstore sunscreens on the market. This sheer, dry-touch sunscreen is free of fragrances, parabens, and oil, and leaves a breathable and lightweight matte finish. Lounging in the pool all day? This facial sunscreen is also sweat- and water-resistant for up to 80 minutes.

Features to consider when choosing the best sunscreen for face use

Sun safety is not just cosmetic: It’s about your health. With the best face sunscreen you can lower the risk of sun damage and skin cancer. The American Academy of Dermatology recommends that everyone use a broad-spectrum protection sunscreen with SPF 30 or higher. Sunscreen isn’t just for beach days, either. Even on cloudy days, the sun’s UV rays can damage your skin, and you really should be using daily sunscreen as a part of your routine.

With that in mind, you need to choose a sunscreen that works with your unique skin type. Thanks to the rise in facial sunscreen popularity, there are a variety of products available to work with your skin, not against it. If you have typically dry skin, your dream sunscreen will likely incorporate a boost of hydration. If you’re on the other end of the spectrum and facing high oil production, you will likely enjoy a sunscreen with a matte finish.

The best sunscreen for face use complements your skin and keeps you safe in the sun. We know that building a skincare routine with the best products can be confusing and overwhelming, so we’ve done the research to match you up with the right sun protection.

What is mineral sunscreen?

The majority of mineral sunscreens contain zinc oxide or titanium dioxide, which deflect UV rays. While mineral sunscreens create a physical barrier that prevents UV light from penetrating your skin, chemical sunscreens allow UV rays to absorb into your skin before they dissipate. Both sunscreens are effective at shielding you from sun damage, but they do have their differences in application. A con to mineral sunscreens is that they are thicker and don’t immediately absorb into your skin in the way chemical formulas do. Fortunately, sunscreen technology has come a long way in the past decade, and many brands have designed sheer mineral sunscreens that leave little to no white cast. Here’s our pick for the best mineral sunscreen that works with every skin tone.

What is the best sunscreen for sensitive skin?

If your skin is quick to react to new products, you might be concerned about adding sunscreen to the list, especially one with a chemical formula. Mineral sunscreens are a good option for those with sensitive skin who are prone to allergic reactions, redness, and irritation. There are, however, a few factors to keep in mind when shopping for sensitive skin. We know scented skincare is all the rage, but when choosing a sunscreen you will want to ensure that yours is fragrance-free, as synthetic fragrances can irritate sensitive skin types. You will also want to select a product that has minimal ingredients and is designed to be gentle.

What is the best sunscreen for oily skin?

If your skin is on the oily side, you know that finding the right sun protection can be a nightmare. Sunscreens are notoriously oily products, and you don’t want to accidentally choose one that increases your oil production. Thankfully, there is sunscreen for oily skin that guards your skin without weighing it down. Chemical sunscreens with a clear gel texture are wonderful for people with oily skin that want to avoid the weight of mineral sunscreens. Instead of physically blocking the sun, chemical sunscreens soak into your skin, transform UV rays into heat, and then release them. The best facial sunscreen for oily skin is going to be transparent, anti-shine, and oil-free.

What about the best sunscreen for faces with acne-prone skin?

We know that those with acne-prone skin might shy away from sunscreen, but there are plenty of acne-friendly sunscreens for you to choose from. Not only is it essential that you include sunscreen in your regimen, but sunscreen will also help prevent scarring and hyperpigmentation caused by sun exposure. The best sunscreen for acne-prone skin will be noncomedogenic and some can even contain acne-fighting additives. Yes, some sunscreen can protect you from UV rays while soothing and maybe even treating acne at the same time, so do more for your pores.

What can I pick up at the drugstore for under $15?

Facial sunscreens can get wildly expensive, especially for a product that requires everyday use. You might be looking for an affordable face sunscreen, or maybe you prefer to grab UV protection on your way to the water. While many drugstore sunscreens are too oily and thick, there are a few options that will provide lightweight protection without breaking the bank. Keep in mind that some drugstore sunscreens are not as advanced and might leave a white cast.

FAQs

Q: Is it good to put sunscreen on your face every day?

Absolutely, and you should be doing that. UV rays can still harm you on overcast days, and sunscreen is most effective when applied daily, even if you’re spending all your time indoors.

Q: Is SPF 30 or 50 better for the face?

The best SPF for faces is hard to put an exact number on. However, sunscreen with SPF 30 or SPF 50 are both adequate defenses against UV rays. SPF 30 blocks 97 percent of the sun’s UVB rays, while SPF 50 blocks slightly more. It is more important that you apply your sunscreen exactly as directed by the product description. This includes applying the proper amount and reapplying it throughout the day, especially if you are sweating or swimming. No sunscreen can completely block UVB rays, and sunscreen should not be your only defense against the sun. On bright sunny days, make sure you take frequent breaks in the shade, and wear clothes and sunglasses that prevent exposure.


Q: Can you use sunscreen as a daily moisturizer?

You can definitely use sunscreen as a daily moisturizer. There are moisturizers that contain UV protection, but you can also just purchase a facial sunscreen that has moisturizing elements. This works especially well for people with oily skin that don’t want an extra layer of hydration. The Pipette sunscreen we recommended contains squalane, which is a lovely emollient that mimics your skin’s natural oils.

The final word on the best sunscreen for face use

We hope that you will never spend another second in the sun without sunscreen by your side. Sun protection is important, and so is choosing products that accommodate sensitive, oily, or acne-prone skin. The best face sunscreen works with your skin type and keeps it safe, all day and every day.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best sunscreens for face in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
90+ deals to upgrade your outdoor space: Spas, tools, fire pits, coolers, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/patio-backyard-outdoor-deals-2023/ Sat, 22 Jul 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=558156
Patio deals for 2023 composited
sta

Save on everything to upgrade your outdoor living experience no matter how big your space is.

The post 90+ deals to upgrade your outdoor space: Spas, tools, fire pits, coolers, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Patio deals for 2023 composited
sta

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

As July comes to a close, it’s tempting to start thinking about going back to school (and how to get the best deals on those educational essentials). But let’s not get ahead of ourselves. There’s still plenty of opportunity to chill in your yard (or whatever outdoor space you can access). You might as well make the most of it. Right now, you can get some excellent deals on just about everything built for the backyard. These bargains range from coolers and furniture to pools and hot tubs. Whether you have a massive yard or a tiny plot of communal outdoor space, you’ll find something to improve your warm evening hangs in these entertainment investments, maintenance must-haves, and other accessories for your al fresco oasis.

Pools and pool accessories

Lighting

Tools and hoses

Shade

Coolers

Fire pits

Bug and pest control

Furniture and storage

Outdoor speakers

Hot tubs and spas

Saunas and cold plunge tubs

We try to keep prices current, but, like everything on Amazon, they’re subject to change.

The post 90+ deals to upgrade your outdoor space: Spas, tools, fire pits, coolers, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best sunscreens of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-sunscreen/ Wed, 26 May 2021 13:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=367496
Stay safe from the sun this summer with one of the best sunscreens.

When it comes to keeping skin safe, one sunscreen does not fit all. Here are the best UV protection options for you and your family.

The post The best sunscreens of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Stay safe from the sun this summer with one of the best sunscreens.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best tinted EltaMD sunscreen is the best tinted sunscreen for face EltaMD UV Daily Tinted Face Sunscreen Moisturizer
SEE IT

Skip the foundation with this tinted sunscreen that evens out your skin tone while providing broad-spectrum protection of SPF 40.

Best spray Supergoop! best sunscreen to spray Supergoop! PLAY Anti-Oxidant-Infused Body Mist
SEE IT

This eco-friendly non-aerosol spray is kind to reefs and comes with natural soothing ingredients like vitamin C and green tea extract.

Best budget best sunscreen on a budget Two Peas Organics Mineral Sunscreen Lotion
SEE IT

This affordable sunscreen provides broad-spectrum SPF 40-50 protection and is safe for the whole family.

Whether you’re heading out to the beach or just taking a walk around the neighborhood, sunscreen is a must. The shelves are stocked with a broad spectrum of sprays and lotions that can be overwhelming. Fortunately, though, you can find UV protection for a range of situations and skin types. Whether you’re choosing sun protection for yourself or your family, the best sunscreens will keep you safer in the sun.

The best sunscreens: Reviews & Recommendations

First and foremost, a premium sunscreen should protect skin from harsh UV rays, but there are some other important factors to consider when making your selection. From tattoo-friendly lotion choices to a dermatologist-favorite best face sunscreen, these are the best sunscreens to keep your skin protected all summer long.

Best mineral: Olita Mineral Sunscreen SPF 30 Lotion

Olita

SEE IT

Mineral sunscreens are a great pick for the impatient—as soon as you put it on, you’re good to head out the door, whereas chemical sunscreens need to seep into the skin for up to 30 minutes before becoming effective. Olita’s mineral sunscreen uses zinc oxide to protect your skin from UV rays, and its chemical-free ingredients are safe for marine life (so feel free to hop into the ocean as soon as you slather this on). It’s SPF 30 (double the FDA’s recommendation of SPF 15), and it absorbs quickly. Plus, the travel-sized tube will make it through TSA hassle-free so that you can protect yourself on any trip. 

Best tinted: EltaMD UV Daily Tinted Face Sunscreen Moisturizer

EltaMD

SEE IT

EltaMD tinted sunscreen, with broad-spectrum SPF 40, protects your skin against harmful UVA and UVB rays from the sun. This best face sunscreen lotion contains hyaluronic acid, which helps to reduce fine lines and boosts moisture retention. The doctor-approved, mineral-based product is lightweight and non-greasy, which means it rubs into your skin easily and can be worn with or without makeup. This best tinted sunscreen keeps your skin tone even and protects your face from the elements whether you’ve planned an active day at the beach or you’re just relaxing by the pool.

Best spray: Supergoop! PLAY Antioxidant-Infused Body Mist

Supergoop!

SEE IT

This Supergoop! SPF 50 body mist tops the best spray sunscreen list for many reasons. Reef-friendly, broad-spectrum, and infused with natural ingredients like vitamin C, plus green tea and acai extracts, you can trust you’re protected from harsh UVA and UVB rays while the refreshing scent transports your mind to a tropical oasis (if you’re not already there). As an added bonus, the mist can be sprayed on wet skin, so you don’t have to wait to apply once you get out of the water. It’s also sweat-resistant for up to 80 minutes.

Best transparent: Supergoop! Unseen Sunscreen

Supergoop!

SEE IT

The Supergoop! Unseen Sunscreen is the stuff of legend for good reason (so great that Trader Joe’s introduced a comparable Daily Facial Sunscreen SPF 40 that sells out almost as quickly as it hits the shelves). On a safety level, its SPF 40 rating makes it ideal for everyday protection. But, it’s the sunscreen’s cosmetic benefits that really seal the deal—it’s sheer, so it won’t leave a white cast no matter how much you put on. It also works well as a makeup primer, and while it has a silky matte finish, it still catches some light for a healthy glow. If you’re looking for a mineral formula, you can also try the Supergoop! Mineral Sheerscreen (though some users say it leaves a white cast). 

Best for tattoos: Tattoo Care Sun Protection

TATTOO CARE

SEE IT

Tattoo sun protection is an increasing concern for people from all walks of life. This dermatologically tested choice, suitable for all skin types, contains natural ingredients, including calendula, cocoa butter, jojoba, and vitamins A and E—all proven to provide multiple skincare benefits. The lotion offers two layers of protection for both your skin and your body art—a 30 SPF with UVA and UVB broad-spectrum sun filter, plus a unique formula that moisturizes your tattoos to ensure they won’t dry out, crack, or fade.

Best for babies: Blue Lizard Baby Mineral Sunscreen

BLUE LIZARD

SEE IT

Blue Lizard Baby Mineral Sunscreen is paraben- and fragrance-free, making it a great choice for your baby’s sensitive skin. Active minerals and ingredients such as zinc oxide and titanium dioxide offer broad-spectrum SPF 50+ protection against harmful UV rays for your little ones, while leaving out potential toxins like oxybenzone and octinoxate in order to protect the planet’s endangered coral reefs. Your kids will love the Elmo-themed bottle, while you appreciate the 80 minutes of water and sweat resistance!

Best budget: Two Peas Organics Mineral Sunscreen Lotion

Two Peas Organics

SEE IT

With Two Peas Organics Mineral Sunscreen, you’re getting a lot for an affordable price. The combination of all plant-derived, certified organic ingredients with SPF 50 broad-spectrum UVA and UVB protection makes this product a superior choice while remaining wallet-friendly for families on a budget. Two Peas is water- and sweat-resistant for up to 2 hours, plus it offers protection and peace of mind about what you’re applying to your child’s skin. Pro tip: This product contains zinc oxide, which helps to prevent sunburns, but it may require some extra time to rub in.

Things to consider when purchasing the best sunscreen

At baseline, a good sunscreen must protect your skin from harmful UV rays. The label should specifically indicate that the formula protects from both UVA (aging) and UVB (burning) rays—otherwise known as “full-spectrum” sunscreen. The best sunscreens not only have SPF levels of 30+, but they also moisturize your skin. Depending on how active you are during a day in the sun or how frequently you go in the water, look for a lotion that is also sweat- and water-resistant. Beyond that, different people will have different skincare and sun-protection needs, so let’s think about goals, health, and lifestyle values and highlight some options. 

Tinted vs. untinted

Dermatologists suggest wearing sunscreen every day, so look for a formula that fits into your daily skincare regimen and, if necessary, one that you can wear under makeup. Tinted sunscreens may be a good option for some people. The best tinted sunscreen will easily smooth into your skin and even out your complexion; no foundation or concealer needed.

Eco-friendliness

Many brands are now developing lotions without oxybenzone and octinoxate, which can be harmful to the beautiful coral reefs in our oceans. Eco-conscious consumers should look for the words “reef-safe” on sunscreen packaging. To further protect the environment, some spray bottles are now non-aerosol-free. And, if you find applying suntan lotion tedious, you might want to consider including spray sunscreen. You may have to work a bit harder to ensure you have full coverage, but it’s a good choice for speedy applications and for those who like to stay active.

Skin sensitivity

Individuals with tattoos will want the best sunscreen that works to keep their body art protected so it doesn’t fade over time. You definitely didn’t spend hours in the chair for that ink to last less than a lifetime.

Babies and toddlers will naturally have more sensitive skin than adults, so the best sunscreen for them has high coverage and is paraben- and fragrance-free. And if you have kids and don’t want to lug 10 different lotions in your beach bag for every family member, there are also options that will work for the majority of your crew.

Ingredients

If you want an organic option, seek out natural ingredients. Many brands, even ones on a budget, now contain vitamins A, C, and E, as well as cocoa butter, green tea extracts, and more beneficial additions. That is great news for your skin because you’re not only getting the UV protection you need from these products, but also boosting moisture and possibly reducing fine lines, too.

FAQs

Q: Can I use sunblock every day?

The short answer is yes, and dermatologists strongly suggest you do. UV rays can damage the skin on sunny or overcast days, so the best way to protect yourself is to wear sunblock. If you don’t want that traditionally sticky sunscreen feel on your skin every day, choose a product that is non-greasy, oil-free, and is absorbed like a moisturizer. And, to be extra conscientious of sun damage, combine your SPF with your UPF clothing.

Q: Which SPF is best for your face?

Dermatologists recommend using an SPF of at least 30, which blocks 97 percent of UVB rays. Recent research indicates that SPF higher than 50 will only offer marginally better protection; wearing one that is over 50 may even encourage you to stay out in the sun longer. The most important aspects of sunscreen application are how you apply it (liberally) and how often you wear it (follow directions on the bottle, but it should be daily).

Q: How long does sunscreen last?

The FDA requires sunscreens to keep their original strength for at least three years. Most sunscreen bottles will include an expiration date and should not be used past that date. Ingredients in sunscreen can go bad; you’ll know it’s time to toss it if the lotion has a watery consistency. 

Final thoughts on shopping for the best sunscreen

No matter your skin type—oily, acne-prone, or sensitive—there is a best face sunscreen lotion or best spray sunscreen, etc. out there created specifically for your needs. No matter how active you are and what ingredients appeal to your sense of health and wellness, the best sunscreen will offer maximum protection against UV rays and won’t irritate your skin, nor will it break the bank. Now get out there, get vitamin D, and don’t forget to reapply!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best sunscreens of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hydration packs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-hydration-pack/ Wed, 23 Jun 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=371549
A lineup of the best hydration packs on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We found water backpacks to stave off dehydration during your favorite outdoor activities, including cycling, biking, and running.

The post The best hydration packs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best hydration packs on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Osprey Raptor 10 Bike Hydration Backpack is overall the best hydration pack. Osprey Raptor 10 Bike Hydration Bike Backpack
SEE IT

This pick includes a 2.5-liter water bag that doubles as a comfortable day backpack with even weight distribution, hip belts, and a helmet lock attachment.

Best for runners The TETON Sports Trailrunner 2.0 Hydration Pack is the best hydration pack for runners. TETON Sports Trailrunner 2.0 Hydration Pack
SEE IT

With straps and shoulder pads, this hydration pack secures against the body to prevent movement while running.

Best on a budget The Water Buffalo Hydration Pack is the budget pick for best hydration pack. Water Buffalo Hydration Pack
SEE IT

Equipped with plenty of pockets for storage, adjustable straps, and ultra-light material, this pack doesn’t sacrifice quality for its affordable price.

Staying hydrated is important for any outdoor enthusiast, so hydration packs are essential if you’re in it for the long haul. In warm climates and the hot summer months, easy access to water is a must when you’re exerting yourself outdoors. Strenuous activity in the sun can quickly lead to dehydration, a surefire way to find yourself sitting out the next ride, run, or hike. But it isn’t easy to lug around jugs or bottles of water. Long-distance runners, hikers, cyclists, and other outdoor adventurers want to move around unencumbered, and that’s where the best hydration pack can come in. Hydration bags come in the form of backpacks or waist packs (like a fanny pack) that contain a reservoir for water storage, so you can strap your water supply to your body and get on the road or the trails. We tracked down five of the best hydration packs for outdoor athletes, so if you thirst for options, read on. 

How we chose the best hydration packs

Many of us at PopSci are bonafide Sporty Spices. We bike, hike, and maybe even ice skate. Some of us also use treadmill desks, under-desk bikes, standing desks, walking pads, and more to keep moving while working. And we’ve spent time with plenty of smart home gym equipment. With all that gear at hand, we personally tested hydration packs while also asking experts and looking at reviews and recommendations to separate the leaders of the (hydration) pack from their dry opponents.

The best hydration packs: Reviews & Recommendations

Hydration backpacks come in different styles tailored to running, hiking, or biking/cycling. One of our choices should help you stay hydrated on your next adventure—don’t be afraid to leave that insulated water bottle in the car.

Best overall: Osprey Raptor 10 Bike Hydration Bike Backpack

Osprey

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bladder size: 2.5 liters
  • Sport: Biking
  • Weight: 1.6 lbs.
  • Backpack size: 10 liters

Pros

  • Lots of extra features like hip pockets and helmet attachment
  • Can also be used as a day pack
  • Large bladder size

Cons

  • Bag is not waterproof and doesn’t include a rain cover

Designed as a bike pack, the Osprey Raptor 10 Bike Hydration Backpack includes a 2.5-liter hydration bag and can also be used as a day-hiking backpack. Even weight distribution, hip belts, the LidLock helmet attachment, and a sleek look make the Osprey Raptor our pick for the top hydration pack.

Best for hikers: CamelBak Fourteener 26 Hydration Pack

CamelBak

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bladder size: 3 liters
  • Sport: Hiking
  • Weight: 2.3 lbs.
  • Backpack size: 26 liters

Pros

  • Large bladder and backpack capacity
  • Lots of back support
  • Overflow pocket to store an extra layer or other stashables

Cons

  • Expensive

The CamelBak Fourteener 26 Hydration Pack is designed for long hikes on hot days. Its reservoir holds 3 liters of water, and it’s designed with dual wing belts and an inner cargo belt to take the weight off your shoulders. More than a hydration backpack, the Fourteener also boasts 23 liters of cargo capacity for snacks, sunscreen, and other important hiking gear.

Best for bikers/cyclists: Thule Vital Hydration Pack

Thule

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bladder size: 2.5 liters
  • Sport: Biking
  • Weight: 1.15 lbs.
  • Backpack size: 6 liters

Pros

  • Retrakt magnetic hose system
  • Large enough to carry a bike pump and repair kit
  • Low center of gravity

Cons

  • Chest strap sits high depending on body type

The hands-free design of the Thule Vital 6 Hydration Pack is perfect for bikers and cyclists who need to hydrate mid-ride. Thule’s Retrakt magnetic hose system automatically returns the drinking hose to its place after each sip, so riders always know where to find it. Bikers and cyclists can carry up to 2.5 liters of water and 6 liters of additional storage for a pump and repair kit.

Best for runners: TETON Sports Trailrunner 2.0 Hydration Pack

ETON Sports

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bladder size: 2 liters
  • Sport: Running
  • Weight: .9 lbs
  • Backpack size: 2liters

Pros

  • Low-profile design
  • Lightweight and sturdy
  • External pocket for items that need to be within reach

Cons

  • Can chafe parts of your body if not covered by clothing

Runners love the lightweight TETON Sports Trailrunner 2.0 Hydration Pack because of its secure fit. Straps and shoulder pads adjust to fit your body, preventing uncomfortable jostling during your run. The Trailrunner also comes with a free 2-liter bladder, and its intake hole is wide enough for ice cubes—perfect for keeping cool on a summer run.

Best budget: Water Buffalo Hydration Pack

Water Buffalo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Bladder size: 2 liters
  • Sport: Hiking, running, cycling
  • Weight: 7 ounces
  • Backpack size: 12 liters

Pros

  • Extremely lightweight
  • Splashproof nylon
  • Multi-purpose

Cons

  • No seal between twist cap and bag on bladder

The Water Buffalo Hydration Pack holds up to 2 liters of water and has several pockets for storing other essential items so that it can be used for a run, a bike ride, or even as a small hiking backpack. Its Oasis Hydration bladder is designed to keep water fresh and clean while also preventing pesky leaks. With fully adjustable straps, splashproof nylon, and ultralight material, the Water Buffalo will keep you hydrated even if you’re on a tight budget.

What to consider when buying the best hydration packs

There are plenty of designs available for different sports, so you can choose the best hydration pack depending on the type of activity in which you’re participating. Packs come in two main designs. The first is the waist pack, which belts around the waist and has slots for one or more water bottles. The other is the hydration backpack, which straps to your back and contains a reservoir, or water bladder. The bladder is connected to a long straw, so you can sip from the pack without taking it off your back.

Hydration backpacks typically hold more than waist packs. A standard water bottle holds roughly 0.5 liters of water, so that’s about the capacity you can expect from a waist pack. Backpacks come in different capacities, ranging from 0.5 liters to 3 liters of water. Stocking up on as much water as possible might seem like a great idea for a long bike ride on a sweltering day, but don’t forget all that water comes with extra weight—one liter of water weighs over 2 pounds. Water weight is just one of the considerations when searching for the best hydration pack.

Which activity will you be using the hydration bag for?

The first thing to consider when shopping for a hydration bag is that most are tailored to a specific activity. Hiking hydration backpacks are usually bulkier and provide more space for storage. Biking/cycling hydration packs tend to offer features for hands-free drinking. Running hydration packs are thinner and lightweight and often come as a vest. While many hydration bags are adequate for cross-training, they tend to lean toward one sport or another, so bear that in mind.

How much water do you want to carry in your hydration bladder?

Water weight is an important consideration when choosing the best hydration pack for you. A seasoned hiker going for a day-long climb might do best with a larger, 3-liter hydration bladder. A marathon runner, on the other hand, might prefer a less cumbersome waist pack that holds a single bottle the runner can sip from between water stations (where they can also refill).

What other features do you want in an outdoor backpack?

Before making a purchase, consider what extra features the outdoor backpack offers. Some hydration backpacks come with similar features to daypacks, with extra pockets and loops for storage. This is optimal for carrying snacks on long treks when you’ll need to fuel up along the way. Other features of the outdoor gear may include shut-off bite valves to prevent leaks, disconnecting tubes to simplify refills, and multiple portals for easy straw placement.

How comfortable is the day pack for you to carry?

Finally, make sure you feel comfortable carrying the day pack. If possible, try it on to ensure the hydration backpack fits properly on your body. Give it a test run while you’re biking, running, or hiking—something comfortable while you’re standing still doesn’t always feel so great when it’s jostling around during a run. Check that the backpack has a hip belt (most do) to relieve pressure on your shoulders. 

FAQs

Q: How much does a hydration pack cost?

Depending on size and features, a hydration pack can cost between $25-$200.

Q: What hydration bag does the military use?

Although there is no one official hydration pack that the military uses, CamelBak prides itself on being a favorite among the armed forces. CamelBak offers a line of gear suitable for military use to keep forces hydrated and has even worked with the military to research turning the CamelBak design into a backpack that could hold oxygen. If you’re looking for a military-grade hydration bag, a CamelBak backpack is a top choice.

Q: How big of a hydration bladder do I need?

How thirsty are you? In all seriousness, how big of a hydration bladder you need depends on the activity you’re doing, how long you’re active, and other factors (including the color of your urine). CamelBak provides a hydration calculator to analyze these factors and determine the water necessary to keep you at peak hydration. Remember to drink water throughout the day and use a hydration bladder to supplement the fluids lost during exertion.

Q: Is a hydration pack worth it?

Staying hydrated is one of the most important things you can do for your body, and it’s often the most overlooked. A hydration pack is absolutely worth it to keep a water source close by during physical activities. There’s no better way to stay hydrated and cool on a long run, hike, or bike ride. In addition, many hydration backpacks provide more than just hydration—most come with additional storage space where you can organize tools, repair kits, phone, credit cards, sunscreen, a packable rain jacket, and other essentials for easy access. If you’re unsure if you need a hydration bag, start with a budget option and see how it suits you. Then you can decide whether to invest in a higher-end hydration pack. 

Final thoughts on the best hydration packs

One of the best ways to keep your body going during strenuous activity is to keep it hydrated! Athletes who ignore their water intake may begin to experience symptoms of dehydration, which include feeling fatigued, dizzy, and light-headed. Making hydration part of your fitness routine will help you run faster, bike farther, or enjoy a longer hike on a sunny day. There’s no excuse for being thirsty when you’ve got the best hydration pack, tailored for a specific sport, as part of your outdoor gear. Choose one that’s right for you, get out there on the trails, and don’t forget to drink up as you drink it all in!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hydration packs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best inflatable kayaks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-inflatable-kayaks/ Thu, 20 Jul 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=557807
Set sail on one of the best inflatable kayaks.

Get out on the water without extra hassle and hardware with the help of these easy-to-transport blow-up boats.

The post The best inflatable kayaks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Set sail on one of the best inflatable kayaks.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Advanced Elements makes the best inflatable kayak overall. Advanced Elements AdvancedFrame Convertible Inflatable Kayak
SEE IT

This versatile one-seat or tandem watercraft is rugged and customizable.

Best for whitewater Driftsun makes the best inflatable kayak for whitewater. Driftsun Rover Inflatable Tandem Whitewater Kayak
SEE IT

A Class III-ready tandem kayak that will fit in your trunk.

Best budget Intex makes the best inflatable kayak that's budget-friendly. Intex Explorer K2 Kayak
SEE IT

An entry-level inflatable kayak ready for the open water that comes ready with everything you need.

Inflatable kayaks provide versatility on and off the water. These kayaks ensure you can easily transport your kayak from one location to the next, whether in the back of your car or over a rocky border between lakes. Designed with rugged, airtight vinyl, polyesters, and tightly woven materials, they are sure to keep afloat. Propelled with double-bladed paddles, kayaks offer excellent mobility on the water. Whether you’re a touring kayaker looking for a lightweight portage kayak that can take you from the Gulf of Saint Lawrence to Vancouver Island by water and foot, or you’re a dedicated angler looking to plow the bayous of Louisiana for the biggest catfish you can noodle, there’s a watercraft that will fit your budget and bearings. Read on for tips on finding the best inflatable kayaks for your water expeditions.

How we chose the best inflatable kayaks

To pick the best inflatable kayaks, we looked at over 20 kayaks from various makers, looking for a few important factors and filtering our choices through our experience with outdoor adventuring and our expertise as tech reviewers.

Weight: Most folks looking for an inflatable kayak instead of a traditional kayak will be doing so out of weight concern. The best inflatable kayaks require little carry weight and can support hundreds of pounds. This can be useful whether you’re carrying your kayak as a pack craft or simply looking for a boat that’s easy to stow in the back of the family Prius. We prioritized kayaks that weigh under 50 pounds and can support hundreds (sometimes up to 500 pounds).

Seating: While kayaks were traditionally designed as single-seat water crafts, many of today’s inflatable kayaks offer up to three seats. We made sure to include both traditional single-seat kayaks and multi-seater group kayaks, which allow you to fit a boat for the whole family in the back of your car.

Material: We looked for kayaks that are rugged enough to have good longevity and tough enough to keep up in rough water. For our higher-end picks, we wanted kayaks with enough material strength to go as long as you do, whether you’re angling for bass or touring the coast of Newfoundland. For fishing kayaks, we wanted particularly tough builds, as hooks, cleaning knives, and sharp fins can make quick work of cheap inflatables. That’s why we looked for 1000+ denier fabric or its equivalent.

Extra features: Inflatable kayaks come in many different builds. Fishing kayaks often come with rod holders and fish rulers. Many of these boats (especially touring models) have racks to attach a backpack (or to strap a waterproof speaker for those stretches of river that demand a soundtrack). We highlighted kayaks that include inflation tools, especially for higher-end kayaks. We also prioritized models with quick inflation, de-inflation, and drains.

The best inflatable kayaks: Reviews & Recommendations

If you’ve got wanderlust for the rivers and waterways of the world, inflatable kayaks are some of the more mobile paddle-driven boats around. Historically built with animal hide and driftwood, and often waterproofed with seal fat, kayaks have changed quite a lot in their material builds while maintaining an overall similar design of paddle and hull. Today’s kayaks borrow from an ancient lineage of boatbuilding developed by the native peoples of North America and Greenland. Here are our favorites for a range of uses.

Best overall: Advanced Elements AdvancedFrame Convertible Inflatable Kayak

Advanced Elements

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its rugged aluminum frame, configurable seating arrangement that can support solo or tandem, and three layers of puncture-proof support, this is a versatile buy.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 15 feet x 32 inches
  • Folded Dimensions: 35 x 21 x 12 inches
  • Weight: 52 pounds
  • Capacity: 550 pounds
  • Materials: Nylon, plastic, aluminum

Pros

  • Customizable
  • Rugged
  • Supports one or two paddlers with three configurations

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Doesn’t include paddles or pump with purchase

If you’re after a truly versatile inflatable kayak, look no further than the AdvancedFrame Convertible Inflatable Kayak by Advanced Elements. An internal aluminum skeleton protects the bow and stern and ensures your kayak keeps its shape. It’s paired with triple-layered fabric and a main air chamber encased in its own layer of protection, making this kayak a durable option.

Advanced Elements designed this boat for conversion, and that’s easily achievable. You can quickly switch out the deck layout for solo closed deck, open-deck tandem, or closed-deck tandem. With a setup that takes under 10 minutes, you’ll be out on the water in no time.

However, this boat has a few issues to consider before you purchase. It doesn’t come with either paddles or an inflation pump. Unless you already own an inflatable kayak that you can plunder for the right pump and paddles, you’ll need to budget for the rest of the required accessories before you take this kayak out to the lake. It’s also heavy and doesn’t come with a backpack, so don’t expect to take this kayak with you on long portage expeditions between rivers.

That said, for most users, this is still the best overall inflatable kayak on the market for its tough design that will ensure years of boating, its heavy weight capacity, ease of use, and conversion potential for solo or group expeditions.

Best for fishing: Sea Eagle 385fta Fasttrack Inflatable Kayak Pro Angler

Sea Eagle

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With thick reinforced material that can stand up to fish hooks, a rod stabilizer, and even a fish scale on the side, this inflatable angler’s kayak can go wherever the fish are found.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12 feet 6 inches x 3 feet
  • Folded Dimensions: ‎36 x 15 x 20 inches
  • Weight: 45 pounds
  • Capacity: 635 pounds
  • Materials: Nylon

Pros

  • Rugged build with quadruple overlapped seams that won’t puncture with misplaced fish hooks
  • Supports up to 3 people
  • Seven-minute inflation time
  • Convenient rod holder built right in

Cons

  • Expensive

One of the most rugged boats on the market is the Fasttrack Inflatable Kayak Pro Angler by Sea Eagle. This premium inflatable kayak is made of 1000 denier woven nylon tough enough to withstand fish hooks, fins, and maybe even an alligator bite! An angler addition to the Sea Eagle line, it comes with built-in rod placements and a fish scale.

The Pro Angler’s 635-pound max load means it’s ready for three paddlers, so you can take friends or the kids on their first adventure or just you and your icebox loaded with fish (or anything else you might put in an icebox). It’s got a Class II whitewater rating, which means you can take this kayak into some tight situations. And at just 45 pounds, you don’t need a boat rack to take this to the water; you might not even need a truck.

All in all, the Sea Eagle Pro Angler is a decked-out fisherman’s dream kayak that’s versatile enough for multi-day excursions. Plus, without the toxic smell of gasoline and the drone of a motor, you’ll catch more fish than ever.

Best for whitewater: Driftsun Rover Inflatable Tandem Whitewater Kayak

Driftsun

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This whitewater kayak inflates rapidly, features a camera mount, and ships with its pump and paddles included.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.5 feet x 3 feet 2 inches
  • Folded Dimensions: ‎24.5 x 21 x 10 inches
  • Weight: 28 pounds
  • Capacity: 600 pounds
  • Materials: PVC

Pros

  • Self-bailing drain plugs
  • Rugged floor that’s easy to grip
  • Class III rapid ready
  • Comes with paddle and pump included
  • Very stable

Cons

  • Drainage could be better for rapids

If you love a thrilling trek down rapids, the Class III-ready Driftsun Rover is primed for adventure. Class III certification isn’t common in inflatable kayaks, but this isn’t a common inflatable kayak. Made of 1000-D layered PVC, this kayak is designed with a high-pressure drop stitch floor that creates a rigid bottom that’s easy to grip with your feet. It also enables this kayak to bounce off rocks and maintain enough stability for dicey whitewater. The Driftsun Rover also features a detachable rear skeg that can quickly be removed for whitewater yet provides great tracking on the open river.

The boat’s 600-pound carry weight and two seats mean that this boat isn’t just for whitewater. With its thick build, it’s ready for just about any aquatic setting you choose. Be warned, though, that with drainage open, you may be sitting in a bit of water. It doesn’t drain as well as could be desired, especially in whitewater. But overall, the Driftsun Rover is an impressive and versatile whitewater kayak that will take you most places you want to go. If Class III isn’t enough, Driftsun claims that the boat is also ready for Class IV, but we say, please be careful.

Best for touring: Sea Eagle Razorlite

Sea Eagle

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a higher-than-average psi, a rigid bow and stern, and a weight of 35 pounds in its folded backpack form, this inflatable kayak is ready for the journey.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12 feet 10 inches x 28 inches
  • Folded Dimensions: ‎22 x 22 x 12 inches
  • Weight: 35 pounds
  • Capacity: 500 pounds
  • Materials: PVC

Pros

  • Rigid bow and stern molds for excellent tracking
  • Folds into a 35-pound backpack
  • Rugged frame
  • Adjustable foot braces

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Open deck design means that ocean breakers could be trouble

A true touring kayak, the Sea Eagle Razorlite is ready for the long haul. This performance-speed kayak comes with a high overhead cost, but for anyone serious about long water treks, it’s well worth it. With a 500-pound capacity, this kayak is suitable for hauling provisions for long camping expeditions, and at only 35 pounds when folded into its carrying backpack, it’s suitable for hauling as well.

Made entirely of semi-rigid, drop stitch material, the Razorlite fills to a higher psi than most inflatables. It also features a rigid bow and stern (for which it’s named) that deliver excellent tracking. Adjustable foot braces set into the inner sides help for long paddling sessions. These features, combined with the boat’s light weight, make for an incredibly fast kayak.

This is a kayak for long island camping trips on boundary waters, portage through Canada’s lake and river network, racing your friends, or camping across the Everglades. The one downside of the boat is its open deck design and lack of solid, self-bailing drains limit its versatility in choppy water. That means that while this boat is certainly seaworthy, it’s not ready for surf, and heavy waves on the ocean could prove dangerous. However, if you’re not an oceanic coast dweller and you’re looking for an incredibly quick and versatile touring watercraft that inflates, look no further than the Razorlite.

Best budget: Intex Explorer K2 Kayak

Intex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With two seats, an included pump and paddle, and 400 pounds of capacity, this is a kayak for starters.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.25 feet x 3 feet
  • Folded Dimensions: 13.5 x 23.13 x 16.25 inches
  • Weight: 30.6 pounds (35 pounds with accessories)
  • Capacity: 400 pounds
  • Materials: Polypropylene

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Everything included
  • Easy assembly and disassembly

Cons

  • Not reinforced
  • Isn’t suitable for open water, and could prove dangerous in more rigorous performance settings

With the Explorer K2 Kayak, Intex offers a yellow jacket-hued inflatable lake boat that easily fits in the back of your car. Suitable for calm rivers, ponds, and lakes, this boat supports up to 400 pounds, making it an excellent day-trip-ready adventure kayak for you and a friend. This isn’t a kayak with which you’ll be riding waves off the coast of Greenland. However, if you’re looking for a decent starter kayak to get your feet wet, then the Intex Explorer is a good option.

The Explorer offers a pretty straightforward design. It features two wide-mouthed Boston nozzles for inflation and deflation. This is achieved with the included pump. The boat is shorter than many other inflatable kayaks at just a little over 10 feet. Tall people may not find this boat comfortable for extremely long use, but it’s a generally comfortable boat overall.

Made of polypropylene, this boat isn’t as sturdy as some. However, for most users, in mild conditions, it can go and go. With a 90-day warranty, it’s worth taking it out a few times to make sure everything is in working condition before the warranty period is over. In the end, it’s a budget boat, and that low price tag might not account for toughness and longevity, but with a decent build overall and everything included, for those just getting into kayaking or looking for an easily deployed pond kayak to stow in the back of a car, the Intex is a great buy. If you’re looking for an even cheaper version for solo paddling, the Intex K1 is also worth a look.

Things to consider before buying an inflatable kayak

Before you buy an inflatable kayak, it’s worth fully considering what the investment will mean for you.

Inflatable vs. standard

Inflatable kayaks offer many benefits over traditional kayaks. Packing down to small sizes when deflated, these kayaks usually fit easily into the back of a car. Some even pack down to backpack size and are easily worn on one’s shoulders. This makes inflatable kayaks far easier to use for most boaters. Rather than having to install a boat rack onto the top of their vehicle, inflatable kayak owners can simply load their kayak into the trunk. However, this versatility does come with a price. Inflatable kayaks generally aren’t as rugged as hard-body kayaks. The best inflatable kayaks often offer good longevity over many years of use; however, they still mostly don’t deliver the same longevity and impermeability of a hard plastic pontoon hull.

Budget

It’s especially important to consider your budget when purchasing an inflatable kayak. As these kayaks are meant to be inflated and deflated and packed into small spaces many times over their lifespan, they come with more opportunities for surface punctures, wear, and damage than some other types of products. When looking for a budget kayak, consider the quality of the material and how likely it is to rip or tear over its lifespan. While some higher-end kayaks cost hundreds of dollars more, they may last for years longer than the less expensive models. Some very cheap models are made out of the same types of materials you might find in a pool float and likely can’t be trusted to last for many seasons. In fact, some cheaper inflatable kayaks may not even be legally used in national and state park waterways. It’s important to do your research before you buy, and make sure you’re purchasing a kayak that can last as long as you expect it to.

Versatility vs. dedicated use

When buying an inflatable kayak, it’s often a good idea to consider whether you need a dedicated use boat or something you can use for many different situations. Some kayaks offer inherent versatility, allowing you to rig them as two-seaters or one. Some kayaks are dedicated angler’s kayaks and are particularly good for that function, but may have features that make them expensive or less useful to other users. Kayaks with self-bailing drains designed for whitewater might get you significantly wetter while boating than others. Consider the features you need when you’re shopping for an inflatable kayak.

FAQs

Q: How much does an inflatable kayak cost?

The cost of an inflatable kayak depends on its features. A high-end touring model, such as the Sea Eagle Razorlite, which features a rigid bow and stern for long-distance touring, costs about $1,000. At the other end of the price scale, the budget-friendly but less durable Intex Explorer K2 Kayak costs just over $150.

Q: Are inflatable kayaks any good?

Many inflatable kayaks are just as good as solid hull kayaks. The best inflatable kayaks offer many benefits over solid body kayaks, and they’re much easier to transport.

Q: Do inflatable kayaks puncture easily?

High-quality inflatable kayaks are made of tear- and puncture-resistant fabric that will get you out on the water repeatedly. While the cheapest inflatable kayaks may puncture, the best inflatable kayaks are capable watercraft that are as sturdy as they are versatile.

Q: How long does it take to inflate an inflatable kayak?

Many of the best inflatable kayaks inflate in well under 10 minutes. Some inflate in about five. It’s worth checking how a kayak is inflated and whether the tools to do so are included with your purchase.

Q: What is denier fabric?

Denier measures the fiber thickness in a given weave. As it applies to waterproof material, high-denier fiber uses thicker threads and, when tightly woven, creates a tougher fabric that’s puncture-resistant and more resistant to water and air passing through it.

Final thoughts on the best inflatable kayaks

Inflatable kayaks offer versatile boating options. They can easily deflate and pack into small spaces yet often deliver surprisingly robust performance. The best inflatable kayaks can be performance touring machines, excellent versatile fishing boats, or even white water-capable sports craft. The AdvancedFrame Convertible Inflatable Kayak is the best inflatable kayak for most boaters, and its customizable one- or two-seat build and aluminum interior frame ensure it will keep its tracking on point. Whatever your needs, if you’re a boater, there’s an inflatable kayak out there for you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best inflatable kayaks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best camping chairs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-camping-chairs/ Tue, 18 Jul 2023 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=557307
Take a breather in the outdoors with one of the best camping chairs.

Whether you're headed to the backcountry or to a concert, these chairs let you carry compact, convenient seating.

The post The best camping chairs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Take a breather in the outdoors with one of the best camping chairs.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Helinox makes the best camp chair overall. Helinox Chair One Original Lightweight
SEE IT

Balancing exceptional comfort and super lightweight packability, the Chair One is a perfect camp chair for most.

Best for big and tall people Coleman makes the best camp chair for big and tall people. Coleman Big-N-Tall Quad Chair with Cup Holder & Side Pocket
SEE IT

This affordable chair supports up to 600 pounds and features a pocket to protect your cellphone when it rains.

Best high-end YETI makes ones of the best camp chairs that's high-end. YETI Trailhead
SEE IT

 With its rugged and comfortable build, the YETI Trailhead is a camp chair that’s meant to last.

Camp chairs make roughing it a lot more comfortable. These weather-resistant, lightweight chairs are designed to be slung over a shoulder, rolled into a pack, or even clipped onto a belt. Ideal for people fishing along the banks of a Carolina estuary, plein air painters looking to give Thomas Cole a run for his money, backpackers section-hiking the Adirondacks, or simple car camping trips with the family, camp chairs come in many designs that favor any number of outdoor uses. While many camp chair designs are available, the chairs most commonly come in folding varieties with cup holders on their arms, as folding stools, or sometimes as folding rockers or loveseats. Some are designed to be lightweight, while heavier options tacitly demand car camping. Read on for a rundown of the best camp chairs for every occasion.

How we chose the best camping chairs

With so many camp chairs available, I looked for a few specific criteria to determine which ones really deserve a place in your pack (or car trunk). To inform my picks, I used my years of experience camping around America with countless camp chairs. As I write this article, I’m actually sitting on my GCI Outdoor Packseat (my pick for the best camp stool), which I often use at the home office when my body needs a break from my desk chair. Each pick was compared to similar camp chairs from other manufacturers to ensure they’re a true best camping chair.

Build quality was of utmost importance in my picks because who wants to buy a camping chair that falls apart after one day at the beach? However, rugged builds are often heavier, and total weight is another important factor. Some of the better complex camp chairs, such as camp rocking chairs that use pistons, are heavy enough to prohibit them from being really useful for packing in. But heavier builds didn’t always result in a cut, as these can still be great car or RV camping accessories. Features like extra drink holders are also nice in a camping chair. Lastly, real weatherproofing and a rugged build are major bonuses because who doesn’t want to sit in the middle of a river in a lawn chair?

The best camping chairs: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re looking for a premium camping chair with a cup holder so you can kick back in the backyard or a compact model you can add to your camping essentials, our roundup provides a range of choices to suit your needs.

Best overall: Helinox Chair One Original Lightweight

Helinox

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A lightweight camp chair that’s compact enough to pack on a longer trek and comfy enough that you’ll want to car camp with it, too.

Specs

  • Weight: 2.1 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 320 pounds
  • Dimensions: 20 x 21.5 x 25.5 inches

Pros

  • Only two pounds
  • Aluminum alloy foundation provides sturdiness
  • Shock-corded poles make it easy and quick to assemble

Cons

  • Low enough to the ground that it could be hard getting in and out for some
  • Somewhat pricey

The Helinox Chair One deserves a spot at the head of any camping chair best-of list. This two-pounder is small enough to easily find a place in a camping backpack, yet it is also comfy enough to justify keeping on hand for non-ultralight day use. Using aluminum alloy poles that are shock-corded like a tent’s, the Helinox jumps into shape when you pull it out of the bag, making for an especially easy setup when organizing your campsite after a long day hike. It’s also rated for 320-pound capacity, so it’s sturdy enough to hold most campers (plus their dogs).

With a ten-inch seat height, this chair isn’t very high off the ground. This can prove troubling for folks with bad knees. But the low height is usually justified by the chair’s lite weight. For a higher seat height, Helinox makes an (also superb) Sunset Chair with a significantly higher back and neck/head rest, though it comes in at 3.25 pounds. If you’re not interested in backpacking, then it’s probably the better buy.

Another great chair by Helinox that any serious backpacker must consider is the Helinox Chair Zero Ultralight. At just 1.2 pounds and 13.5 inches packed, it’s an incredibly lightweight backpackers’ chair that you can justify carrying for weeks in the woods.

If you’re looking for a great camping chair, whether for backpacking or beach lounging, don’t commit to the contents of that shopping cart until you give Helinox’s line of camp chairs a look.

Best premium: YETI Trailhead

YETI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With an exceptionally rugged build and great comfort, the YETI Trailhead is a camp chair meant to last.

Specs

  • Weight: 13.3 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 500 pounds
  • Dimensions: 10.2 x 8.3 x 43.3 inches

Pros

  • Supremely comfortable
  • Very sturdy with high weight certification
  • UV resistant

Cons

  • Expensive

Cornering the high end of the camp chair market is the YETI Trailhead. With a locking frame that can support up to 500 pounds in its very comfortable proprietary “flexigrid” fabric, the Trailhead supports aching bodies back from long hikes.

The chair features a UV-resistant design to ensure that it can weather prolonged exposure to the elements. It comes with a drink holder that you can attach to either the left or right armrest rather than incorporating a drink holder into the arm. It’s a chair made for longevity, and at its price point, it guarantees delivery. It’s a solid investment if you’re looking for a stylish and comfortable chair to last for years.

Best for big and tall people: Coleman Big-N-Tall Quad Chair with Cup Holder & Side Pocket

Coleman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This budget-friendly chair supports up to 600 pounds and comes with a cup holder and water-resistant cell phone sleeve.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.6 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 600 pounds
  • Dimensions: ‎39 x 6.75 x 7.95 inches

Pros

  • Wide seat supports up to 600 pounds 
  • Sturdy
  • Comes with water-resistant cellphone holder
  • Affordable

Cons

  • No head or back support
  • Heavier than some other chairs

Finding comfortable seating can be challenging when you have a large frame, but Coleman can help with its Big-n-Tall Quad Chair. This camp chair’s seat is 18 inches off the ground, making it easy to get in and out of. The seat is wider than most at 7.5 inches and supports up to 600 pounds. It also comes with the features you expect in a camp chair, including a cup holder and carrying case. And if you get caught in a storm, its water-resistant cellphone sleeve and seat drain system will protect your phone (and your bottom) from moisture.

Best compact: CLIQ Portable Camping Chair

CLIQ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This nylon camp chair folds down to the size of a bottle yet can support up to 300 pounds.

Specs

  • Weight: 3.5 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 300 pounds 
  • Dimensions: ‎22 x 22 x 26 inches

Pros

  • Can easily tuck into bag or luggage
  • Lightweight
  • Easy to set up

Cons

  • May be hard for some to get out of
  • No cup holder or arms

Looking for a chair that you can take from camping to a concert (or vice versa)? CLIQ’s Portable Camping Chair folds down to the size of a water bottle, making it easy to stick in a backpack or carry around in (and from/to) the car. And it sets up in a snap … make that a click. At 3.5 pounds, this aircraft-grade aluminum, ripstop ballistic nylon chair is lightweight, yet once you set it up, it can support up to 300 pounds. That said, its convenience does mean you sacrifice a few common features in camp chairs, such as a cup holder (for that, along with a headrest, you’ll need to opt to pay more for the CLIQ high-back lounge chair and sacrifice portability for transportability).

Best stool: GCI Outdoor Packseat

GCI Outdoors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This tri-leg pack stool slips into a carry bag for easy portability.

Specs

  • Weight: 1.4 pounds
  • Seat height: 20 inches
  • Weight capacity: 250 pounds
  • Dimensions: 3.9 x 4.3 x 15.7 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Folds for great portability
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Could be sturdier

The GCI Outdoor Packseat stands out as a comfortable, highly portable stool to take into the outdoors; and it’s still ready for active tasks, like fishing, birdwatching, or sketching. With three shock-corded legs that break down for easy portability in its shoulder-slung pack, the 1.4-pound packseat is a highly mobile stool. It’s got a tri-cornered seat that’s quite comfortable to perch on. The legs are reinforced with a lower tear-resistant fabric connector that keeps the stool sturdy and capable of supporting its 250-pound weight capacity.

I actually sub my pack seat out for my desk chair on long writing days when I need to change up my posture. It’s great to keep in the car trunk for an easy carry-in stool for park visits or to bring along for watercolor sessions in the park. While I haven’t taken my Packseat backpacking, it’s light enough that I could justify it for a one- or two-night trip. It doesn’t feel like it will last forever, but it’s going strong after almost a year of use with no signs of deterioration.

Best rocking: GCI KickBack Rocker Chair

GCI Outdoors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its well-designed piston system, the KickBack is incredibly comfy.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.6 pounds
  • Seat height: 17 inches
  • Weight capacity: 250 pounds
  • Dimensions:

Pros

  • Extremely comfortable
  • Great rocking sensation

Cons

  • Too heavy for packing in

The GCI KickBack Rocker Chair takes a novel approach to seating. Designed with pistons instead of curved rails, the KickBack’s rear legs are firmly planted, while still allowing you to comfortably rock. It’s an innovative design for a rocking chair, but one that’s especially well suited to the uneven terrain you’ll find in many campgrounds.

When you fold it up, the KickBack is easy to sling over your shoulder; however, its 10-plus pound weight makes it impractical for packing in. But this chair isn’t meant for backpackers. Paired with an RV and a mobile grill, you’ll bring the experience of the back deck along for the ride.

At a rented beach house one summer, I had a great experience rocking back and forth in the KickBack and staring up at the stars at night. It’s a relaxing chair that allows you to bring the comforts of a home with you, wherever your car or camper takes you.

Best budget: Coleman Camping Chair With Built-in 4 Can Cooler

Coleman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This value camping chair is both rugged and well-equipped.

Specs

  • Weight: 10 pounds
  • Weight capacity: 325 pounds
  • Dimensions: 38.3 x 13.5 x 3.1 inches

Pros

  • Cooler can fit up to four cans with a drink holder on the opposing arm
  • 24-inch-wide full-sized chair can support larger people
  • Easy to fit in trunk
  • Very affordable

Cons

  • Not practical for carrying on hikes
  • Not the most durable out there

The Coleman Camping Chair is a classic found in campsites around America. That’s because the Coleman just can’t be beat at its price point. With a four-can cooler on one arm and a classic mesh drink holder on the other, the Coleman is locked and loaded to accommodate your beverage needs. It doesn’t fold down to a tiny packable size ready for multi-day backpacking excursions, but for car camping, sports events, or the beach, it’s chair enough for almost anybody with a car trunk.

Folded up in its bag, the Coleman measures 38 inches long and weighs 10 pounds; it slings over the shoulder for easy transport. It’s not the most rugged camp chair out there, but its alloy supports, and polyester seating material are quite weatherproof. The low asking price also ensures that you won’t need to worry too much about affording a replacement if it breaks after a few years. All in all, the Coleman is a solid budget camp chair available for a very reasonable asking price.

Things to consider before buying a camping chair

To find the best camping chair for your needs, you should take into consideration these factors:

Type of camping

Perhaps the most important factor to consider when strategizing what sort of camp chair you need is what type of camping you go for. If you’re collecting the gear you’ll need for multi-day backpacking treks into the mountains, looking for as light a chair as possible is better. Ultra-light chairs are available that weigh about a pound or less. Folks looking for chairs to bring with them on RV trips may not need to focus on weight as much; they can afford to bring heavier chairs that emphasize comfort or look for special features like rocking pistons.

Comfort and height

For older hikers and those with joint issues, a chair that doesn’t put too much stress on your body can be an absolute salvation on the trail. Hikers with bad knees will likely want to look for chairs with a higher seat height, as they will be easier to get in and out of. Chairs with ergonomic details like a headrest or neck support can be very helpful, as well as chairs made of malleable fabric that avoids pressure points.

Price

Camp chairs come at many price points. Not everyone needs to spend $300 on a camp chair. Often, good camp chairs can be bought for well under $50. Sometimes higher-priced chairs guarantee more dependability and comfort. Paying more upfront can give you a chair that you’ll be able to use for years, saving you money in the long run.

FAQs

Q: How much does a camping chair cost?

The cost of a camping chair depends on the features it provides. Our high-end pick, the YETI Trailhead, cost $300 at time of publication. If you’re not looking to spend that much, our budget-friendly pick, the Coleman Camping Chair With Built-in 4 Can Cooler, costs $35.

Q: Do I need a camp chair?

While many campers make do with logs or boulders, a camp chair can be an excellent creature comfort to retreat to after a long day on the trail. They can relieve pain in aching joints, and give you a place to sit off the wet ground. All in all, camp chairs make your camp feel more like home.

Q: Is YETI Trailhead worth the price?

 The YETI Trailhead is a supremely comfortable camp chair designed for long-term use and longevity. The hefty price tag comes with a promise that you’ll be using your YETI for years of outdoor relaxation.

Q: Is an ultralight camp chair worth it?

Ultralight camp chairs are great additions to a backpacker’s gear list. Many hardcore trekkers must prioritize lightweight gear that will take up as little room as possible in their hiking pack. Some ultralight chairs weigh as little as one pound and fold to very small dimensions. The Helinox Chair Zero Ultralight, at 1.2 pounds, is an excellent option for backpackers who want to pack some comfort.

Q: What’s the most comfortable camp chair?

The YETI Trailhead is an extremely comfortable camp chair, but with its piston rockers, the GCI KickBack Rocker Chair is the most comfortable camp chair I’ve ever sat in. The Helinox Sunset Chair is another high-backed camp chair that delivers excellent comfort while being light enough to pack in.

Final thoughts on the best camp chairs

Camp chairs are like a portable patio that can join you in the wilds of the world. The best camp chairs are easy to set up anywhere and are ready for whatever conditions you find yourself in. Some camp chairs prioritize lightweight builds, while others lay on features and comfort. The best camp chair for most users is the Helinox Chair One, which delivers excellent comfort with a very light frame that’s easy to pack on day trips. For those who want to prioritize creature comforts, the GCI KickBack Rocker Chair is a great mobile rocking chair. At the same time, the pricey YETI Trailhead is a supremely comfortable and sturdy static chair. Hardcore trekkers, on the other hand, may want to consider the Helinox Chair Zero Ultralight.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best camping chairs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hiking gear of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hiking-gear/ Fri, 14 Jul 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=556988
Smartwatches photo
Amanda Reed

Tell the indoors to take a hike while you take a long, relaxing, and much-needed trek equipped with this essential gear.

The post The best hiking gear of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Smartwatches photo
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A pair of gray low hiking boots on a blue and white gradient background Salomon X Ultra 3 GTX Men’s Hiking Shoes
SEE IT

A great hike starts with a good sturdy pair of shoes.

Best headlamp A black BioLite headlamp on a blue and white background BioLite 800 Pro Headlamp
SEE IT

A long-lasting light that has a bevy of settings.

Best budget A Coghlan's 1985 Carabiner Compass on a blue and white background. Coghlan’s 1985 Carabiner Compass
SEE IT

Simply attach to your pack for easy navigation.

Hiking is a great way to elevate your mood (and body) and change your outlook(s), letting you change gears from the daily grind and get lots of endorphins. Nature makes you happy, and exercise makes you happy, so why not kill two birds with one stone? You can find hiking trails all around you, even if you’re a city slicker. A great hike starts with being prepared. That means getting a good sturdy pair of hiking shoes, snagging your favorite pack to carry what you need, and bringing a water bottle to stay hydrated—and that’s just the basics. The best hiking gear can help prepare you to get out and get your heart rate up, but not get lost in the wilderness.

How we chose the best hiking gear

We took what we learned from past camping stories—from camping grills to headlamps to techy gadgets—and expanded our judging from there. We thought about what we’d put into our packs—and what we already throw in there—and sought out products that fit those categories. We also looked at reviews and recommendations.

The best hiking gear: Reviews & Recommendations

One of our choices should help you tuck your phone away while you make your way to get some much-needed air.

Best overall: Salomon X Ultra 3 GTX Men’s Hiking Shoes

Salomon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 14 ounces
  • Best for: Single-day hikes

Pros

  • Breathable
  • Waterproof
  • Can go from hike to work and back

Cons

  • Narrow
  • Run hot

A great hike starts with what you put on your feet. These shoes are fit to hit the trails or wear to work—the traction is excellent on all terrains, thanks to its Descent Control Technology, which helps safely descend from tough descends. Don’t worry about stepping in puddles—these shoes are waterproof, thanks to Gore-Tex. Additionally, a protective mudguard protects the lateral and medial sides of your feet from muddy trails. Anti-debris mesh prevents debris from being trapped between your foot and the footbed. An EnergyCell midsole—made from high-performance EVA foam—reduces shock when you hike, which makes them extra comfortable. They’re a bit narrow, so you might want to size up or snag the wide version of the shoe. Plus, they run hot, meaning they might not be the best for use in warmer climates—those with sweaty feet, beware. The comfort outweighed our feet getting sweaty, which was bound to happen anyway. You can always wear wool hiking socks to help wick away moisture. And you can always opt for a true boot with more ankle support (we’ve put some solid miles on the Vasque Men’s Breeze Waterproof Hiking Boots, for one) if you’re going for a longer hike with more elevation changes and uneven terrain.

Best for dogs: Ruffwear Front Range Day Pack

RUFFWEAR

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 9 ounces
  • Best for: Single-day hikes; weekend hikes

Pros

  • Radial cut saddlebags
  • Padded handle
  • Multiple colors

Cons

  • Pricey

If it doesn’t fit in your pack, try fitting it in your dog’s pack. Ruffwear is our favorite brand for rugged, well-constructed dog harnesses and backpacks, and the Front Range Day Pack tops the charts. A great model for mid-range activity, this pack comes in four sizes and fits dogs with a chest measurement between 17 and 42 inches. Five adjustment points mean you can further customize the fit, and foam-padded construction will continue to keep your dog comfortable. A vertical chest strap and cushioned belly strap improve stability, and a padded top handle means you can help your adventure buddy navigate tricky areas on the trail. 

The saddlebags feature a radial cut, weight-forward design, creating compression to keep each side close to your pup’s body and maintain balance. Inside each bag, a stretchy mesh pocket keeps treats, bags, and bowls organized. You can attach a leash to three points: a tow loop, webbed chest loop, and back V-ring. Available in three colors, the Front Range backpack is perfect for everyday use. It can fit all the essentials for a day hike or long walk without being unnecessarily bulky.

Best headlamp: BioLite 800 Pro Headlamp

BioLite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 5.3 ounces
  • Best for: Single-day hikes; weekend hikes; thru-hiking

Pros

  • Rechargeable
  • Long-lasting
  • Red light option

Cons

  • Learning curve to controls

We’re fans of BioLite for many reasons: we think one of these headlamps is an excellent camping gadget thanks to its internal tech, and they’re rechargeable. The lamp delivers 800 lumens for 150 hours on low; seven hours on high; and eight hours on reserve. A Run Forever cord lets you connect a power bank for even more runtime. A moisture-wicking headband keeps you dry and cool, and integrated electronics prevent slipping and bouncing. A push on the back gives you 30 seconds of max brightness, and Constant mode gives you full illumination sans auto-dimming. There’s a bit of a learning curve if you’ve never used a BioLite headlamp, but it’s one of the best on the market once you get over it. If 800 lumens seems like overkill, consider its lower lumen cousin, the BioLite 325 headlamp, which maxes out at—you guessed it—325 lumens.

Best backpack: TETON Sports Explorer Internal Frame Backpack

TETON

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 5 lbs.
  • Best for: Weekend hikes; thru-hiking

Pros

  • Rugged
  • Built-in bladder for water
  • Sleeping bag compartment

Cons

  • For more experienced hikers

If this isn’t your first time at the camping rodeo, consider this advanced hiking backpack from TETON. Multipoint adjustments and compression straps give you a near-custom fit. Angled water bottle containers, a sleeping bag compartment, and exterior pockets let you pack precisely and keep anything handy (like a granola bar or phone) within reach. A water-repellant exterior and rain cover means your stuff will stay dry in wet conditions. The pack also comes with a lifetime warranty, but you hopefully shouldn’t need it thanks to its durable construction.

Best watch: Garmin epix 2 Pro

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 2.22 ounces
  • Best for: Single-day hikes; weekend hikes; thru-hikes

Pros

  • Lots of sizes and colors
  • Rugged
  • Built-in flashlight
  • Safety features and health tracking

Cons

  • Setting and customizations can be overwhelming

Garmin’s epix watch has been one of the standards for hiking, trail running, and ultra-marathons since its initial release in 2015. The new epix 2 Pro is even more advanced and capable, offering a nearly endless list of features, sensors, and settings. For starters, it comes loaded with a plethora of activities to track, from the basics like hiking, running, and cycling to strength training, surfing, hunting, and more. You’ll also get lots of training tools to help improve your fitness, including Endurance Score, Training Status, Recovery Status, VO2 Max measurements, and more.

As with most Garmin multisport watches, the epix Pro gets a robust list of sensors for health and activity tracking. It offers the essentials for hiking, including a barometric altimeter, compass, and GPS. But it also provides advanced multi-frequency positioning for accurate location data, which allows you to use the watch for navigation purposes. You can even upload specific courses to keep you on track during events. And it offers weather maps to allow you to check the radar for precipitation, cloud cover, wind, and temperature. Something we love about top-of-the-line Garmin watches (this one, as well as the fēnix 7 Pro below) are the maps. Loads of preloaded maps, which look crisp and detailed on the always-on AMOLED screen (available under scratch-resistant sapphire glass or slightly-less-resilient Corning Gorilla Glass, if you want to save $100).

One thing we especially love about this adventure watch is that it is available in three different case sizes—42mm, 47mm, or 51mm—making it more suitable for a wider variety of wrists. It’s important to keep in mind that the case size does impact battery life. For example, the 51mm version offers up to 31 days in smartwatch mode compared to 10 days for the 42mm. So you’ll have to choose whether form factor or less frequent charging is most important to you. 

All sizes of the epix 2 Pro come with an LED flashlight that’s built into the side of the watch. It is surprisingly useful in day-to-day life but is also a game changer when navigating in the woods after dark. It does drain the battery faster, of course, but it is really nice to have. And the Red Shift Mode makes it easier to see the watch at night without blinding yourself or impacting your sleep cycle.

Best water filter: LifeStraw Peak Solo

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 4.48 ounces
  • Best for: Single-day hikes; weekend hikes; thru-hikes

Pros

  • Helps keep you hydrated safely
  • Clips easily to pack or belt
  • Can be fitted to a standard water bottle

Cons

  • Can only filter up to 2,000 liters of drinking water

Lifestaw’s smallest filter is also its most versatile and easiest to use, thanks to 28mm threading. That means you can attach the filter to a standard water bottle and drink through it like a straw. Or, you can use it as a squeeze filter to filter water into a different container. Using the Peak Solo, you can fill a 1L bottle in 20 seconds—that means more time hiking and less time corraling everyone’s water bottle to fill. If you don’t want to throw it in your backpack or glove compartment, it comes with a loop to attach a carabiner to clip to a keychain or pack. Our favorite feature is its effectiveness: it protects against It offers protection against 99.999999 percent of bacteria (including E.coli and Salmonella), 99.999 percent of parasites (including Giardia and Cryptosporidium), and 99.999 percent of microplastics. It also meets the US EPA and NSF P231 drinking water standards for removing bacteria and parasites. Read more of what we have to say about it.

Best insulated water bottle (with a filter): LifeStraw Go Stainless Steel Water Filter Bottle

LifeStraw

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 18-22 ounces
  • Best for: Single-day hikes

Pros

  • Included carabiner
  • Clean water anywhere
  • Dishwasher safe

Cons

  • Heavy

If you’d rather kill two birds with one stone, consider the LifeStraw Go Stainless Steel Water Filter Bottle. Its Titan Renew and membrane microfilters protect against parasites, microplastics, chlorine, organic chemical matter, dirt, sand, and cloudiness, while also improving taste. Specifically, LifeStraw’s membrane microfilter removes 99.999999% of bacteria, 99.999% of parasites, 99.999% of microplastics, silt, sand, and cloudiness. It meets NSF 42 standard for chlorine reduction and meets U.S. EPA & NSF P231 drinking water standards for the removal of bacteria and parasites. This means you can also have access to clean water internationally. The carbon filter costs around $10 to replace and the replacement two-stage membrane filter costs around $25. However, these filters only need replacing every 1,000 gallons—that’s a lot of lake water. Although it’s heavier than other insulated water bottles and only comes in one size, we think the benefits of clean water anywhere outweigh these cons.

Best budget: Coghlan’s 1985 Carabiner Compass

Coghlan’s

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: .6 ounces
  • Best for: Single-day hikes; weekend hikes

Pros

  • Clips to belt or backpack
  • Body made of metal
  • Luminous directional markers

Cons

  • Doesn’t work if tilted more than eight degrees

A compass is one of the most important camping gadgets using some interesting-yet-simple tech. Compasses determine where “north” is thanks to its attraction to Earth’s southern magnetic pole, which is near its most northern geographic point. Magnets! They’re cool! Anyway, we love this simple and cheap compass for its durable aluminum construction and luminous directional marks to navigate in low light. Throw it on your pack or attach it to your belt loop to help determine where you’re going. It’s a tool you’ll most likely always bring with you on a trip, and you can’t beat its size and price.

What to consider when buying the best hiking gear

Knowing what you need to bring with you while hiking can prevent you from overpacking and having a heavy pack. Plus, it means that you won’t overspend on stuff you won’t use. Here’s what you should consider before clicking “add to cart.”

Hike length

If you’re going for a short hike or a single-day hike, you don’t need to bring what you would bring on a weekend hike or thru-hike. The longer the hike, the more stuff you’ll need to bring—and you’ll have to do some planning and locate your resupply points. A shorter hike is great for unwinding, while a longer, more strenuous hike can be mentally and physically taxing. Knowing how long you’ll be hiking will help you pack accordingly.

Pack weight

If you’re going on a thru-hike or hiking a long distance, you don’t want to wear an overpacked backpack that weighs you down, slows you down, and could make you tired faster. However, you don’t want to pack too light and miss some essentials. Hiking backpacks are built to distribute weight evenly, and many hiking-specific items are made with weight in mind. Knowing how much each item weighs can help you stay comfortable on your hike.

Experience level

If you’re a beginner hiker, you should at least have a good pair of shoes, something to carry essentials, a water bottle, and some sunscreen. If you’re a more experienced hiker going on longer trips, you can upgrade to a larger pack and incorporate hiking poles and water filters into your packing list. Which is to say, the more experienced you get, the more technical you can get gear-wise.

FAQs

Q: What gear should I have for hiking?

It depends. For a day hike that’s less than two hours, you should have a hiking pack; weather-appropriate clothing; food; water; navigation tools; a first aid kit; and a knife or a multitool. Longer hikes will require a tent, a headlamp, extra clothes, and some sort of firestarter.

Q: What are the best clothes to wear for hiking?

Fun fact: You don’t need technical clothes to hike. They help, but aren’t required. Wear comfortable and sturdy pants that help you move freely; a moisture-wicking top; a warm jacket for colder hikes; a rain jacket or one that’s waterproof and breathable; a brimmed hat or head covering to stop ticks and bugs from getting up in your business; sunglasses to keep the sun out of your eyes; and most importantly, study shoes.

Q: How do I pack a hiking backpack?

Although there is no right way to pack, a well-packed pack helps you reach items easier and will feel balanced on your hips. You want to keep mid-weight items at the very bottom, and heavy items right at mid back of the pack. Light items go in the middle front of your pack, and you can use the top lid for small essentials like your headlamp or first aid kit. Use the hip and side regions for on-hand essentials like your phone, snacks, or water bottle.

Final thoughts on the best hiking gear

Hiking is an excellent way to unplug and get some exercise while you’re at it. However, you want to be prepared—you don’t want to get lost in the woods. Remember to start small if you’re new to hiking—all you need is a durable pair of closed-toe shoes, a water bottle, an easy-to-follow trail, and something to hold your belongings to get started. You can invest in more technical gear as you hike more. After all, better to hike a short distance than never to have hiked at all.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hiking gear of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best camping grills of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-camping-grills/ Fri, 14 Jul 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=556941
A lineup of the best camping grills
Amanda Reed

Fight fire with carefully controlled fire in a camping grill that makes whipping up a mean meal easier than setting up your tent.

The post The best camping grills of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best camping grills
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Coleman RoadTrip 285 Coleman RoadTrip 285 Portable Stand-Up Propane Grill
SEE IT

Wheels make this grill even more portable.

Best gas Best natural gas grills Magma Magma Products Newport II Infrared Gourmet Series Gas Grill
SEE IT

You can grill on a boat with this gas grill.

Best budget The Fire Sense Black Notebook Charcoal Grill is the best budget pick. Fire Sense 60508 Notebook Charcoal BBQ Grill
SEE IT

A no-fuss, packable, easy-to-use grill.

If you’re looking to cook outdoors fast, you’ll want to snag a camping grill. Sure, cooking on a fire is fun, but it does require its own gear to make it possible (hello, mountain pie makers). And it also means you have to build a fire to get food going—that’s not always possible, depending on the weather. You also get consistent results when cooking on a camp grill. It’s also worth mentioning that cooking on a camp grill is easier than cooking with fire: simply light the fuel and get to scrambling those eggs. The best camping grills give you an easy way to cook breakfast, lunch, and dinner without having to fight the fire.

How we chose the best camping grills

We primarily focused on propane, gas, and charcoal grills, since you may not have access to electricity out in the wild (unless you’re also lugging along a solar generator). If you decide to go electric, consider packing one of the best solar generators to power your grill. Size, weight, and grilling area were also major considerations—you don’t want to have too small a cooking surface for a large meal. We also looked at reviews and recommendations and tested some of these grills on our own camping adventures.

The best camping grills: Reviews & Recommendations

If stocking up on freeze-dried camping food isn’t your jam, consider whipping up a meal you made yourself with the best camping grills. All of our picks are solid options that you’ll be happy purchasing. It’s worth mentioning that if you’re going to bring food to cook, you’ll need a good cooler for camping to keep everything fresh.

Best overall: Coleman RoadTrip 285 Portable Stand-Up Propane Grill

Coleman

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 46.67 lbs.
  • Dimensions: ‎30.25 x 19.19 x 16.13 inches
  • Grilling area: 285 square inches
  • Fuel type: Propane

Pros

  • Multiple burners
  • Steady cooking
  • Large grilling area

Cons

  • Heavy

Say goodbye to managing the uneven heat of a campfire flame. This Coleman portable gas grill provides up to 20,000 BTUs of steady cooking power from three adjustable burners underneath 285 square inches of cooking space. That’s enough room for a full dinner for four, fitting five burgers and several skewers of veggies at once. And yet this camping grill packs up nicely. It’s heavy at more than 45 pounds, but its handy legs and useful side tables fold down into a wheelable package, much like a rolling suitcase. 

Best tabletop: Weber Q2200 Portable Propane Grill

Weber

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 42.5 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 15.5 x 51.4 x 19.5 inches
  • Grilling area: 289 square inches
  • Fuel type: Propane

Pros

  • Porcelain-enameled
  • Durable
  • Lots of cooking space

Cons

  • Heavy

At 19.5 inches deep and 51.4 inches wide (with the side tables extended), the Weber Q2200 Portable Propane Grill can fit all of dinner and still leave room for all the fixings. The 280 square inches of cooking space can fit 12 burgers, while the single burner, with push-button ignition, can put out 12,000 BTUs of power. The body on this Weber grill is porcelain-enameled for durability and heat retention, while the cast-iron cooking grates spread the heat evenly and prevent those burgers from sticking. It’s a hefty 42.5 pounds, but moving it to and from the car can just be arm day.

Best gas: Magma Products, Newport II Infrared Gourmet Series Gas Grill

Magma

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 20 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 22.5 x 11.63 x 11.63 inches
  • Grilling area: 162 square inches
  • Fuel type: Natural gas or propane

Pros

  • Can use natural gas and propane
  • Portable
  • Foldable legs

Cons

  • Decent heat performance

If you need a grill that can go anywhere—from hills to valleys to the backyard—the Newport II from Magma Products is a versatile option. At home, you can plug it into your natural gas system when you’re not camping. Its folding legs and numerous mounting options make it ideal for just about any on-the-go grilling situation. You can even mount it to your boat rail for safe grilling at sea.

Accordingly, it’s built to handle the weather. Its stainless steel body won’t rust in the rain, and its hermetically sealed thermometer won’t corrode due to salt water. At the same time, its turbo burner/dual-element combustion system is designed to stay lit in heavy winds. Heat distribution can be somewhat inconsistent, but as far as durable, portable camping grills go, it’s an outstanding option.

Best charcoal: Fox Outfitters Original Folding Charcoal BBQ Grill

Fox Outfitters

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 4.5 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 13 x 12.5 x 8.6 inches
  • Grilling area: 107.5 square inches
  • Fuel type: Charcoal

Pros

  • Light and small
  • Quick assembly
  • Legs keep the grill stable

Cons

  • Not for large meals

Camping means you have to lug tents, sleeping bags, and fuel for the grill. The Fox Outfitters Folding Charcoal Grill could actually be the easiest part of your haul. The 4.5-pound stainless steel grill folds into a carrying bag no bigger than a briefcase. Of course, you will need to cart the charcoal. You’ll also need to assemble the grill, but Fox Outfitters—and Amazon reviewers—say this can be done in less than a minute. Out of the bag, the charcoal grill stands at 17.5 x 13 x 8.5 inches, offering enough room for two large steaks with veggies on the side. 

And if you want to go ultra-premium and maximize your minimalism, you can pick up the Snow Peak Takibi Fire & Grill. This collapsible, durable steel fireplace, featuring a streamlined Japanese design, transports conveniently in a nylon bag and lets you create a gathering from the beach to the backyard. Preparing a meal or just making memories? The Takibi sits in perfect harmony with the Jikaro Fire Table and can be a camping centerpiece.   

Best budget: Fire Sense 60508 Notebook Charcoal BBQ Grill

Fire Sense

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 8 lbs.
  • Dimensions: 17.53 x 11.82 x 14.18 inches
  • Grilling area: 204 square inches
  • Fuel type: Charcoal

Pros

  • Portable
  • Included carrying case
  • Cheap

Cons

  • Not for large meals

You can get a pretty great tabletop charcoal camping grill for just $30. The 18-inch by 13-inch by 13-inch portable grill folds up and is easy to carry or stuff in a camping bag. You can fit four burgers on the grill with room left over for veggies and hotdogs. Plus, this mini grill is easy to set up, fill, and light. For being a budget model, the Fire Sense is the best grill for the money and is the perfect size to throw in the back of the car.

What to consider when buying the best camping grills

A great camping grill is made of all kinds of ingredients—here’s what to put on your shopping list:

Charcoal vs. propane vs. electric

Charcoal delivers great barbeque flavor. However, charcoal grills can be more dangerous and require lugging a supply of briquettes. Portable gas grills are easier to use and provide greater control, but they don’t provide quite the same BBQ flavor. A propane canister is likely to weigh less than a bag of charcoal. Electric grills are the easiest to use, but you may not have access to an outlet or a portable generator.

Portability

Portability is key when buying a camping grill. Too large of a grill means you might have to sacrifice other camping essentials to make it fit. Too heavy a grill means you’ll have to spend even more energy taking it out of a car—energy you may not want to spend after a long day on the road getting to the campsite or exploring the beautiful nature around you. Smaller grills with wheels or their own carrying cases will give you more space in the car and prevent your hanger from turning into pure anger when you can’t get the grill out of the car.

Material

If you’re going to get a camping grill, it has to stand up to the weather. That means it should be relatively rustproof. Stainless steel and aluminum can handle the elements without immediately showing signs of wear. However, we do recommend keeping your grill away from water and snow as much as possible.

FAQs

Q: What’s the best way to clean a camping grill?

Hose down the grill to get rid of ash. Then, grab plastic gloves and dish soap or degreaser and start scrubbing. Then, rinse and dry completely before using again.

Q: Can a grill rust?

It depends. Food residue and grill material can lead to rusting. For example, you might be prone to rusting if it’s not made of stainless steel or aluminum. As long as you clean your grill after you come back from your camping trip, you should be good.

Q: Which is better for camping: a griddle or grill?

We say a grill is better, as you don’t need to season it. A griddle is great for cooking outside. A camp grill is great for saving space. Plus, nothing beats the taste of something grilled.

Final thoughts on the best camping grills

A camping grill lets you have a home-cooked meal away from home. They’re more reliable to use than a campfire, which will be out of commission if it’s raining. Plus, they allow you to cook lots of food at once to feed everyone at camp. There’s no need to search for tinder and kindling when you can simply turn on the grill. Your next outdoor meal is only a knob turn away, the only move you’ll want to make after a long day of hiking, fishing, or swimming at the lake.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best camping grills of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar generator deals to shop right now https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-solar-generator-deals/ Tue, 14 Feb 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=512024
Jackery Explorer 300 solar generator
This affordable generator is small enough to keep around the house or camper. Stan Horaczek

These portable power stations often feature steep discounts to save you money now and hassle later.

The post The best solar generator deals to shop right now appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery Explorer 300 solar generator
This affordable generator is small enough to keep around the house or camper. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

You may not think about a solar generator until you really need one. And once you’ve been put in that position, you’ll never want to be without one. Charged via the mains or optional solar panels, these portable power stations store power to keep your appliances and devices in action when plugging into the grid isn’t an option. That can happen during an emergency with power outages or simply an intentional trip out into the wilderness away from the email notification sound that has been tormenting you day in and day out for years now.

While solar-compatible generators aren’t cheap, manufacturers regularly offer solid discounts on some of their most popular models, including many of our specific recommendations for the best solar generators. We’ll update these deals regularly, but be sure to check the actual price on the product pages before checking out, as they change frequently. Often these are the Amazon Deal of the Day and are only offered for a limited time—so if you see something too good to pass up, act fast!

Also, note that many solar generator deals often require applying a digital coupon, which typically appears as a check box under the product’s price on the Amazon page. So make sure you don’t miss out on the deal by neglecting to check the box.

Jackery solar generator deals

Jackery is one of the most prolific manufacturers in the solar generator game, and they also offer some of the steepest discounts. We’re big fans of the durability and capacity of Jackery portable power-all solutions, like the Explorer 2000, and if you’re looking for versatility and reliability, you will be too.

Jackery 1800W Generator Explorer 1500 and SolarSaga 100W Panel $1,615 (Was $1,998)

Jackery

SEE IT

Bluetti solar generator deals

EF Ecoflow solar generator deals

Anker solar generator deals

The post The best solar generator deals to shop right now appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Splurge on a pool or other summer upgrades with these last-minute Prime Day deals https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-pool-hot-tub-deals-2023/ Wed, 12 Jul 2023 17:14:35 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=556219
Save big on an above-ground pool and accessories this Prime Day,

These Amazon Prime Day deals save hundreds on pools, pool accessories hot tubs, ice baths, outdoor TVs, and more.

The post Splurge on a pool or other summer upgrades with these last-minute Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Save big on an above-ground pool and accessories this Prime Day,

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We’re deep into summer and temperatures are soaring. Fortunately, it’s Prime Day, so you can take advantage of big savings to buy that above-ground pool, or upgrade to a robot vacuum so you can spend less time cleaning and more time swimming. Take advantage of the sales before the sun sets on Prime Day.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

INTEX 26325EH Ultra XTR Deluxe Above Ground Swimming Pool Set $794.79 (Was $1,299.99)

Intex

SEE IT

If you’re in the market for an above-ground pool that’s more substantial than an inflatable but is still easy to set up and take care of, consider this option from Intex. The company has a well-earned reputation for solid pool offerings. The Ultra XTR features three-ply, puncture-resistant and UV-resistant PVC and a frame that locks into place. This round pool holds 5,061 gallons of water and comes with a filtration system that lets you filter, backwash, rinse, recirculate, and drain the water from the pool. The included steel ladder makes getting in and out easy. It’s backed by a 2-year warranty. And you can save more than $500 this Prime Day. 

More Prime Day above-ground pool deals

Prime Day deals on inflatable hot tubs and ice baths

Prime Day deals on pool vacuums & lights

Prime Day deals on outdoor TVs & toys

More Prime Day deals

The post Splurge on a pool or other summer upgrades with these last-minute Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Don’t miss out on saving $200 on Celestron telescopes and binoculars with these last-minute Prime Day deals https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-celestron-telescope-deals-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 09:40:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=553676
Save big with these Prime Day deals from Celestron and Unistellar.

Take advantage of these stellar deals from Amazon to enjoy stargazing with the whole family.

The post Don’t miss out on saving $200 on Celestron telescopes and binoculars with these last-minute Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Save big with these Prime Day deals from Celestron and Unistellar.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

There’s plenty to see in the night sky this summer, from super moons and meteor showers to Saturn and Mercury. A good telescope or pair of binoculars makes it easier to see these celestial objects up close. And if you want these prime opportunities at prime prices, you can save big on premium optical gear from Celestron and Unistellar during Prime Day. But take advantage of these deals before this stellar sale disappears with the dawn.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

Celestron NexStar 127 SLT Mak Telescope $447.33 (Was $639.95)

Celestron

SEE IT

Stargazing is fun to do as a family, and the Celestron NexStar 127 SLT Mak Telescope makes it easy to explore the night sky for adults and kids alike. This computerized telescope comes equipped with a database of more than 40,000 stars, galaxies, nebulae, and more to get you started. Celestron’s SkyAlign feature makes this telescope easy to set up, and the StarPointer red dot finderscope will help you focus on specific objects. What also sets this telescope apart is its large 130-mm aperture, which will allow you to see Saturn’s rings and Jupiter’s clouds up close. And with all these features, the Celestron Nexstar 127 is compact and easy to transport at 11.4 pounds. 

More Prime Day telescope deals

Prime Day deals on binoculars and monoculars

Prime Day deals on stargazing accessories

More Prime Day deals

The post Don’t miss out on saving $200 on Celestron telescopes and binoculars with these last-minute Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get this 12,000-watt gas backup generator for 40% off during Amazon Prime Day https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-duromax-dual-fuel-generator-deal-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 20:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=555665
DuroMax Dual Fuel generator header
DuroMax

This powerful dual-fuel generator runs on either fuel or propane and it's heavily discounted for Amazon Prime Day.

The post Get this 12,000-watt gas backup generator for 40% off during Amazon Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
DuroMax Dual Fuel generator header
DuroMax

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

NOTE: While the dual-fuel generator below is sold out, there is still a 12,000-watt gas-powered generator for $799, which is 38 percent off of its regular $1,399 price. Still a very solid deal. You can buy it here. Many of the links on solar generators are also still good for the moment.

Original post: You don’t think you need a backup generator until you really need a backup generator. And while it can be painful to spend considerable cash on something you hope you don’t have to use, you’ll be glad you did in an emergency. Amazon Prime Day has many excellent generator deals on solar generators from Jackery, EcoFlow, and Bluetti. But, if you’re looking for something more traditional and flexible that lets you run longer for less, this Duromax 13,000-watt dual-fuel model fits the bill and is 40% off its regular price.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

SOLD OUT: DuroMax XP13000EH Dual-Fuel Portable Generator 13000 Watt Gas or Propane Powered Electric Start-Home Back Up $899 (was $1,499)

The dual-fuel designation means this powerful generator can run off traditional gasoline or liquid propane. Its outlet selection includes one 120/240V 50A heavy-duty outlet, one 120/240V 30A twist lock outlet, one 120V 30A twist lock outlet, and two 120V 20A household outlets. With 13,000 watts of maximum output and 10,500 running watts, this model offers enough power to keep full-sized appliances working when the grid goes down. Plus, the 8.3-gallon fuel tank won’t need constant refills during a long outage. While some Prime deals offer phony savings, this model typically sells for $1,399 or even more on a normal day, so this is a very legit discount. Jump on it before it sells out (or before a tree takes out your power lines).

The best solar generator Prime Day deals

In case you’re looking for a solar backup battery, here are some of the best deals out there for Prime Day right now:

The post Get this 12,000-watt gas backup generator for 40% off during Amazon Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best last-minute YETI cooler and drinkware Prime Day deals https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-yeti-cooler-drinkware-deals-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 10:10:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=554880
The Best YETI Drinkware and Cooler Deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Keep yourself cool this summer with YETI's hot Prime Day deals.

The post The best last-minute YETI cooler and drinkware Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best YETI Drinkware and Cooler Deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

YETI has earned itself a sterling reputation for coolers durable enough to survive bear attacks and drinkware that keep drinks hot and cold for hours. Its luxe containers are always worth the asking price, but you can save a lot of money by picking some up on Prime Day. YETI has discounted a wide cross-section of its offerings, so wine, beer, hard seltzer, and ole-fashioned zero-proof water drinkers alike will find the exact piece they’re looking for at a discount.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

YETI Tundra 45 Cooler $227.50 (Was $325)

YETI

SEE IT

We like all the YETI gear we’ve been able to test, but its coolers have always blown us away with their build quality and performance. The company’s 45 Liter cooler can hold up to 26 cans (with an ice ratio of 2:1) and keep them cold for days. It can achieve this level of performance due to its three inches of insulation and tight interlock lid system with T-Rex latches. Once you’re done camping or tailgating, you can easily empty the cooler using its vortex drain system. For your convenience, the cooler can be carried by either a pair of side grips or handles. The Tundra 45 is the last cooler you’ll ever need, and Amazon’s Prime Day discount makes it even easier to pick over less performant alternatives.

The best YETI cooler and drinkware Prime Day deals

The post The best last-minute YETI cooler and drinkware Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Last-minute Jackery solar generator Prime Day deals: Save more than $1,000 https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-jackery-generator-deals-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 09:05:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=554766
The Best Jackery Solar Generator Prime Day Deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Portable power that packs a punch at a great price.

The post Last-minute Jackery solar generator Prime Day deals: Save more than $1,000 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best Jackery Solar Generator Prime Day Deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Nobody likes to think about needing to get power during emergency situations, but that’s where Jackery’s Prime Day 2023 deals come in handy. The company’s portable generators can help keep your devices topped up for several days, and its solar panels will enable you to recharge the generator indefinitely—weather permitting. While this type of gear has been primarily used by campers, these deals bring it down to reasonable prices for use at home. Keeping a generator in your closet or garage means you’ll know exactly where to turn if the power goes out. It’s always better to be safe than sorry, and Jackery’s Prime Day deals make it easier than ever to stay prepared.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

Jackery Solar Generator 2000 PRO Capacity with 2X SolarSaga 200W $1,999 (Was $3,599)

Jackery

SEE IT

All of Jackery’s Prime Day 2023 deals are impressive, but we like this bundle of its Solar Generator 2000 Pro and a pair of SolarSaga panels. The high-capacity, long-lifespan lithium iron phosphate (LiFePO4) generator is powerful enough to power a coffee maker for three continuous hours. It has more than enough capacity to recharge your smartphone, tablet, and even a laptop several times over. The generator is packed with ports, including two USB-A, two USB-C, and three AC outlets exposed on its front face. An LCD screen shows its current power level along with how much energy is being absorbed—either through an outlet or solar panels—or outputted. The included solar panels can fully charge the Solar Generator 2000 in under eight hours under the right conditions. One of our favorite features with this solar generator is its handle, which makes it easy to carry around a campsite or up and down stairs at home. This bundle is an investment, but you’ll be thankful to have made it each time you’re in a place without easily accessible power.

The best Jackery solar generator Prime Day deals

You can also save on Bluetti Solar Generators for Prime Day

The post Last-minute Jackery solar generator Prime Day deals: Save more than $1,000 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best last-minute EF ECOFLOW generator Prime Day deals https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-ecoflow-generator-deals-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 12:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=554643
The best ECOFLOW Generator Deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

You'll get the power you need at an unbeatable price.

The post The best last-minute EF ECOFLOW generator Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best ECOFLOW Generator Deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Campers, travelers, and the perpetually prepared should all take note of EF ECOFLOW’s deals on solar generators and related gear. The company has slashed the prices on its best gear for Prime Day 2023, which makes right now the best time to invest in portable power stations or solar panels. These items come in handy during emergencies—multi-day blackouts, for example—or when you need some juice during a long trip in a rural area. Regardless of your power needs, ECOFLOW has you covered.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

EF ECOFLOW Solar Generator DELTA2 with 220W Solar Panel $999 (Was $1,649)

Ecoflow

SEE IT

ECOFLOW is known for its portable generators and solar panels, so it makes sense that its best Prime Day 2023 deal is a bundle that includes both of them. The DELTA2 is a 1024 Watt Hour generator with 15 outlets, including four USB-A ports and a standard AC port. The generator holds enough juice to fully recharge a smartphone up to 89 times or run a refrigerator for up to 14 hours. These specs are only helpful in extreme circumstances but speak to the DELTA2’s power. ECOFLOW says the battery technology in this generator allows you to charge it over 3,000 times before it needs to be replaced. This basically translates to around a decade of daily use. You can recharge the DELTA2 by plugging it into an outlet, but it also supports charging via a solar panel. The 220W panel ECOFLOW included in this bundle can recharge it in roughly six hours under ideal conditions. A foldable stand built into the solar panel’s case makes it easy to prop up at the best possible angle.

The best EF ECOFLOW generator Prime Day deals

The post The best last-minute EF ECOFLOW generator Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Become the pitmaster you’ve wanted to be with this Amazon Prime deal on the Meater Block https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-meater-block-deal-2023/ Wed, 12 Jul 2023 20:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=556190
Meater Block
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

You can chill while this gadget monitors what's on the grill.

The post Become the pitmaster you’ve wanted to be with this Amazon Prime deal on the Meater Block appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Meater Block
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Cooking meat—especially an expensive cut on a special occasion—can feel daunting, especially if you’re not used to working with it. The Meater Block credibly solves this issue entirely. Its four wireless meat probes can track the doneness of your meat and send the data to your phone over WiFi or Bluetooth. It takes into consideration the carryover cooking time too and alerts you when to take it off the grill (or from the oven) so you get perfect results every time. And you can save over $100 now, thanks to a Prime Day deal.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

Meater Block $239.95 (Was $349.95)

Meater

SEE IT

The Meater Block is so appealing because it’s totally easy to use. Stick a probe into the meat you’re cooking, set your preferred temperature, and get to cooking. Setting up the device is similarly simple; either connect it to your home’s Wi-Fi network or connect to the individual probes over Bluetooth. Meater’s individual probes can only support Bluetooth, which is fine but limits your range. WiFi connectivity allows you to walk away from your grill, which is especially helpful for longer cooks like smoked brisket. Meater’s app—available for both iOS and Android—is simple to use, with large text and charts to show how much longer your food has to cook.

I like cooking meat on the grill, and the Meater Block has taken a lot of the guesswork out of when it’s done. I’ve never been good at determining that by feel, and sticking a thermometer into the meat mid-cook always releases some of its juices, which feels like a waste. It doesn’t hurt that the block is also aesthetically pleasing, especially next to a grill, which makes me inclined to grab it more frequently than not. Don’t skip this Prime Day deal if you’ve been too scared to grill for a crowd or shy away from filets or ribeyes for fear of messing them up.

More rare and well-done (in a good way) Prime Day grilling deals

The post Become the pitmaster you’ve wanted to be with this Amazon Prime deal on the Meater Block appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Solo Stove’s Bonfire 2.0 is one of our favorite fire pits—and it’s cheaper than ever on Prime Day https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-solo-stove-bonfire-2-deal-2023/ Wed, 12 Jul 2023 19:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=556382
Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 in action
The fire licks out above the rim, but it barely smokes. Stan Horaczek

This deal is almost too hot to touch. Almost.

The post Solo Stove’s Bonfire 2.0 is one of our favorite fire pits—and it’s cheaper than ever on Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 in action
The fire licks out above the rim, but it barely smokes. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

No backyard or porch is truly complete without a smokeless fire pit, which provides a focal point for guests and acts as a vehicle for s’mores. Solo Stove’s Bonfire 2.0 is one of the best smokeless fire pits we’ve ever tried, and it’s $95 cheaper than normal on Amazon, thanks to a Prime Day deal. This brings the Bonfire 2.0 down to just $249.99, its lowest price ever on the site.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 $249.99 (Was $344.99)

Solo Stove

SEE IT

After conducting hands-on testing, we found the Bonfire 2.0 extremely easy to set up and use, even if you’ve traditionally floundered at starting a traditional campfire. Its stainless steel frame is perforated on the top and bottom, giving air an easy escape. The result is a “smokeless” fire, which offers heat without stinging your eyes. Having a constant source of fresh air also feeds the fire, making it easier to light and keep lit. You should be good to go if you have a couple of logs, paper, and a match or lighter. Additionally, the top of the fire pit curves inward, keeping flames from spreading outward and lashing at you.

As the fire burns, ash from your wood falls into a bottom pan, which can be easily removed once it’s completely gone out and cooled. This low-maintenance cleanup makes the Bonfire 2.0 more appealing since you can focus on enjoying the fire instead of dreading dealing with the ash. While the fire pit is ultra-efficient, it doesn’t burn through wood as quickly as you might think. We found a few logs—which provide heat and flames until they’re basically disintegrated—can last us several hours. Our only mild complaint about the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 was its premium—but absolutely reasonable—price. Solo Stove’s Prime Day deal eliminates that issue and makes the fire pit an absolute no-brainer.

Wondering what to do in the backyard when it’s not bonfire time? Here are tons of deals and ideas:

The best Prime Day deals on outdoor TVs & toys

The best Prime Day above-ground pool deals

The best Prime Day deals on inflatable hot tubs and ice baths

The best Prime Day deals on pool vacuums & lights

The post Solo Stove’s Bonfire 2.0 is one of our favorite fire pits—and it’s cheaper than ever on Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Amazon Prime Day Thermacell deals: Save on mosquito repellents that actually work https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-thermacell-deals-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 11:10:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=554408
Thermacell mosquito repellents composited
You can choose your protection radius and battery life. Stan Horaczek

These devices are as cheap as a Citronella candle and a lot more effective.

The post Amazon Prime Day Thermacell deals: Save on mosquito repellents that actually work appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Thermacell mosquito repellents composited
You can choose your protection radius and battery life. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Mosquitos can ruin a beautiful summer night outdoors faster than a noise complaint or spoiled potato salad. Thermacell’s clever repellent devices rely on rechargeable batteries and undetectable diffused liquid to create a mosquito-free dome around you and your pals. The devices are small, portable, rechargeable, and affordable. And these Amazon Prime Day Thermacell deals make them positively irresistible. Unless you really like scratching bug bites. Then you can do your own thing.

Thermacell Mosquito Repellent E-Series Repeller with 20’ Protection Zone and 9-hour battery $29.98 (Was $49)

Thermacell

SEE IT

This is the most robust Thermacell model that Amazon has on sale for Prime Day. It lasts for up to nine hours on a single charge, and it creates a 20-foot mosquito-free zone around the device. I’ve used one of these (and its previous versions) for several summers now, and I consider them essential outdoor gear. It’s small, silent, and effective. If you don’t need a full nine hours of coverage, you can save $10 more and get the 5.5-hour battery models listed below. The light blue one is the cheapest. I’m not a big fan of the color, but I’ll put up with it to save the extra $3.

Thermacell Patio Shield Mosquito Repeller in dark blue $12.99 (Was $20)

Continuing with the trend of some Thermacell colors checking in cheaper than others, this dark blue model of the 15-foot mosquito barrier is an extra $2 cheaper than the rest of the colorways. For $12.99, it’s worth it to grab a couple of these to keep in the car or anywhere else you might find yourself trying to chill out without mosquitos constantly vying for your delicious blood.

While you’re buying stuff for outside, maybe pick yourself up a grill for the patio. There are some great deals on Char-Broil models for Prime Day.

The post Amazon Prime Day Thermacell deals: Save on mosquito repellents that actually work appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Kick back and save on backyard gear from Bliss Hammocks this Prime Day https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-bliss-hammocks-deals-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 10:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=554293
Outfit your backyard this Amazon Prime Day with these deals.

Get big savings on zero-gravity chairs, a hammock, and accessories this Amazon Prime Day.

The post Kick back and save on backyard gear from Bliss Hammocks this Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Outfit your backyard this Amazon Prime Day with these deals.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

It’s summertime, and the living is easy when you have some great outdoor furniture to relax in. Bliss Hammocks has several variations of their zero-gravity chair on sale, along with a stylish portable hammock this Prime Day. You can save up to $80 that you can devote to supplies for your next backyard cookout. 

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

Bliss Hammocks Wide XL Gravity Chair $82.07 (Was $96.56)

Bliss Hammocks

SEE IT

If you’re looking to kick back poolside or on the patio, this zero-gravity chairsby Bliss Hammocks will make relaxing easy. This durable steel, cotton, and PVC chairs reclines and come with a pillow for maximum comfort. They also feature a canopy to protect you from the sun and a drink tray that can hold two beverages and an iPad. What else could you need? And for Prime Day, you can save $34 on the set. 

More Prime Day deals from Bliss Hammocks

More Prime Day deals

The post Kick back and save on backyard gear from Bliss Hammocks this Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Amazon Prime Day golf deals: Save up to $150 on Callaway clubs and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-callaway-golf-deals-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 09:35:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=554379
Callaway golf Amazon Prime Day Deals 2023
Get everything you need except the skill. Stan Horaczek

Save on everything you'll need to head out onto the course (except for the skills).

The post Amazon Prime Day golf deals: Save up to $150 on Callaway clubs and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Callaway golf Amazon Prime Day Deals 2023
Get everything you need except the skill. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

You have to save money where you can when you’re just starting with golf. These Amazon Prime Day Callaway deals can help in that department. These deals cover affordable balls (which is good because they often mysteriously end up in the water), as well as complete club sets and even a solid rangefinder. Here are the best Amazon Prime Day Callaway deals to take advantage of right now.

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

Callaway Golf Capital Stand Bag $159 (was $199)

Callaway

SEE IT

If your bag is looking kinda ratty, it’s probably time for a new one. This stand bag has five compartments with two full-length dividers. It also has five ideally placed pockets for easy access. The stand holds the bag up when you put it down, while a double-strap system makes it easy to lug around. This is a great all-around bag no matter what your game is like.

Callaway 16-piece Strata Men’s Right-Handed Complete Golf Set $479 (Was $599)

Callaway

SEE IT

Callaway isn’t some thrown-together store brand you’ll find at the local big box. These are real Callaway clubs meant for golfers looking to get into the game without spending John Daly’s annual Diet Coke budget on a new set of sticks (he famously drank 28 cans every day for years). This kit includes:

  • A stand bag
  • Driver
  • 3 wood
  • 4 and 5 hybrid clubs
  • 6-9 irons
  • Pitching wedge and sand wedge
  • Putter
  • Four head covers for the woods and hybrids

Grab a box of balls, a handful of tees, some sunscreen, and a beverage, and you’re ready to head out onto the course.

These clubs are designed specifically for beginners. The 3-wood, for instance, offers more loft and a bigger sweet spot to help get the club airborne when hitting it off the fairway. As you improve your game, you can upgrade each piece of this kit to match your playing style. Or, you’ll likely have to replace your putter after you snap it over your knee for missing a three-footer. What a beautiful game.

Women’s clubs

Two-dozen Callaway Hex Soft Golf Balls White $34 (Was $43)

You’ll need a lot of golf balls when you’re starting out. In fact, you might need a lot of golf balls for your entire golf career. They end up in the lake, in the woods, and sometimes in your dog’s mouth. These beginner-friendly balls maximize distance while keeping a soft feel that allows for touch around the greens. Plus, they’re very affordable, so it won’t feel nearly as bad as hitting a $5 Titleist into the drink.

Callaway 300 Pro Rangefinder $169 (Was $190, but retails for $299)

A reliable rangefinder will tell you the distances you need, so once you figure out how far you hit each club, you can tell which one will give you the best chance at a low score. It’s durable, portable, and looks kinda like a spy device from a ’90s movie.

If you’re spending a lot of time out on the course, you might also want one of these Thermacell mosquito repellers which are also on-sale for Prime Day.

The post Amazon Prime Day golf deals: Save up to $150 on Callaway clubs and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best reusable water bottle deals from Contigo, Yeti, Hydro Flash & more for Prime Day https://www.popsci.com/gear/prime-day-water-bottle-deals-2023/ Tue, 11 Jul 2023 10:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=554840
A lineup of water bottles on sale for Prime Day.
Stack Commerce

Replace lost reusable water bottles of yore this Prime Day with major savings on some of the most popular brands.

The post The best reusable water bottle deals from Contigo, Yeti, Hydro Flash & more for Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of water bottles on sale for Prime Day.
Stack Commerce

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We’ve all been through it: You get off the bus/subway/car and go on your merry way. Then, at your destination—or hours later when you’re home—the devastating realization washes over you: I left my water bottle/travel mug on the [insert least favorite public transport line]. Thankfully, considering the recent heatwaves, you can get reusable water bottles and coffee travel mugs from Contigo, Yeti, Camelbak, and more on sale this Prime Day and get a replacement, or stock up for the inevitable re-losing. Since they ship with Prime, you won’t even need to leave your house to get one. Look at what happened the last time you left the house (maybe it’s time to invest in some of the home-gym equipment that is also on sale right now).

All of these Prime Day deals require an active Amazon Prime Membership. You can sign up here for a free 30-day trial.

Contigo West Loop Stainless Steel Vacuum-Insulated Travel Mug $17 (Was $25.99)

Contigo

SEE IT

This receptacle from Contigo is our best budget pick for the best coffee travel mug. And, thanks to Prime Day, you get it even cheaper at $17, down from its usual $25.99 price. It’s leak- and spill-proof and can fit in most car cup holders and under most single-serve coffeemakers. Simply press the Autoseal button to open the lid’s mouth hole and take a sip. Additionally, a button lock stops any accidental Autoseal button presses. Plus, as the name “Easy-Clean Lid” implies, the lid is easy to clean, and there are no small parts to misplace when throwing it in the dishwasher. You can even get a Contigo travel mug two-pack for 24.99—47% off its $47.49 price.

Here are more water bottle deals we found for Prime Day

Stanley

Hydro Flask

Yeti

Contigo

Bubba

The post The best reusable water bottle deals from Contigo, Yeti, Hydro Flash & more for Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Jackery Solar Generators are on sale right now on Amazon for Prime Day https://www.popsci.com/gear/amazon-jackery-deals-2022/ Wed, 28 Dec 2022 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=502342
Jackery amazon deals
Jackery

Save up to 40% on Jackery solar generators that could save you in a pinch.

The post Jackery Solar Generators are on sale right now on Amazon for Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery amazon deals
Jackery

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Whether you’re preparing for weather-induced power outages or just looking for a way to power your devices in an RV or off-grid camping situation, out the current deals on Jackery solar generators. The 240Wh model charges smaller devices like smartphones, tablets, and even laptops. It’s considerably beefier than any simple charging bank and can keep the whole family’s devices juiced up during a power outage. Right now, it’s just $168 (down from $299), which is even cheaper than it was on Black Friday.

Jackery

SEE IT

If you need more juice, the 1,002Wh generator provides enough power to keep larger appliances running in an emergency. So, if you’re trying to keep a fridge full of food from going bad or you’re trying to keep the internet up and running for essential communication, this little box of lightning bolts can help. Amazon has it for $799 right now, down from its regular price of $1,099.

In addition to the actual generators, Amazon is currently offering deep discounts on the optional SolarSaga panels that go with them. Right now, you’ll pay just $209 instead of the normal $299 price tag. These efficient panels fold up for easy storage, which makes them suitable for use in an RV and other tight spaces.

Here’s a list of everything that’s on sale right now:

The post Jackery Solar Generators are on sale right now on Amazon for Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar generators for 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-solar-generators/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=421868
The best solar generators including Jackery 2000 Pro, Anker 767 and the EcoFlow
Stan Horaczek

Tap the power of the sun to meet your power needs wherever you may roam.

The post The best solar generators for 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar generators including Jackery 2000 Pro, Anker 767 and the EcoFlow
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Jackery 2000 Plus front panel close-up Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus
SEE IT

This is a solid all-around mix of features and affordability.

Best for camping Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core Portable Generator Review Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core
SEE IT

This powerful pack is easy to transport to a site.

Best for homes EcoFlow Delta Pro portable generator review EcoFlow Delta Pro
SEE IT

This is the pick if you need lots of scalable capacity.

If you’re camping and want to charge up your lantern, phone, or other devices, a solar generator sure would be convenient. Or perhaps you’re van-living your way across the country, and you need to work on the go and keep your conversion electrified—yet another solid case for a solar-powered generator. Whatever the case, few things are as useful in today’s tech-driven world as a source of reliable, renewable power. The best solar generators can reliably and sustainably meet various energy needs, and we’re here to help you find the right one for you.

How we chose the best solar generators

As an avid outdoorsman, I’ve had the opportunity to test an extremely wide range of outdoor gear, including mobile and off-grid electrification equipment like solar-powered generators, as well as inverter and dual-fuel generators. These became particularly essential when the pandemic forced my travels to become domestic rather than international, which prompted me to outfit a van for long-term road-tripping. 

To bring my work along for the ride, I needed a constant power source to charge my laptop, a portable fridge, lighting, and a myriad of devices and tools … even ebikes. As a result, I’ve tried all the leading portable power stations (and plenty that aren’t leading, too), so I know precisely what separates the best from the blah. I’ve written all about it (and other outdoor tech) for publications, including the Daily Beast, Thrillist, the Manual, and more. There were cases when my own opinion resulted in a tie, and I, therefore, looked to reviews from actual customers to determine which solar generators delivered the most satisfaction to the most users.

The best solar generators: Reviews & Recommendations

The solar generators on this list span a wide range of budgets, from a few hundred dollars to a few thousand. They span several use cases, from camping to a backup for your home. Only you know all the factors that make one of these the best solar generator for you, but we think that one of these will get the job done.

Best overall: Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It offers just about everything from our previous best overall pick with the added benefits of LiFePO4 battery power.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,042.8Wh (expandable up to 24,000Wh)
  • Output capacity: 6,000w
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.7 x 14.1 inches
  • Weight: 61 pounds
  • Price: $2,199

Pros

  • Charges quickly
  • Very high output that can run power-hungry devices
  • Built-in wheels and handle
  • Clear display
  • Four AC outlets
  • Expandable with extra batteries
  • Long life batteries

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Slightly less capacity than our previous pick

As new solar generators hit the market, many come toting new lithium iron phosphate (LiFePO4) batteries instead of the familiar lithium-ion batteries that came before. LiFePO4 offers a few advantages, including a much longer lifespan as you charge and discharge them. They’re also safer and often faster to charge. They do typically add some weight, however. Just about all of those modifiers apply here in the form of the Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus.

The Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus can power current-hungry devices at up to 6000w, so even if you want to power a welder, you can. The battery will only last you about a half hour doing this (we tried it), but it does work, and that’s more than many other models can say. I also got to test the Explorer 2000 Plus during a real power outage. It kept our router running for several hours to maintain connectivity.

This model has 2kWh of storage built-in, but you can expand that capacity with extra external daisy-chained batteries. It gives a total max storage of up to 24kWh—enough for a serious off-grid job. The optional solar panels charge the battery quickly and efficiently. Jackery claims roughly two hours of charging time via the optional solar panels, and I found it took more like 2.5 hours, but that includes battling some passing clouds. With two straight hours of direct sun, it could likely get the job done.

A look at the Jackery 2000 Plus solar generator with its handle extended
The Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus handle and integrated wheels make it considerably easier to move around. Stan Horaczek

At 61 pounds, this is considerably heavier than the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro, which weighs nearly 20 pounds less. But, the integrated wheels, handle, and chunky grips to either side of the box make it very easy to lug around. Everyone in my family could easily set it in the back of my wife’s Honda Civic.

The switch to LiFePo4 also means that this unit will last a long time before the battery degrades beyond its usable range. The company claims it will take 4,000 cycles before the battery life degrades to 70 percent. We obviously haven’t had time to test that yet, but that is the nature of LiFePo4, so it will almost certainly last longer than a lithium-ion model at least.

Still great: Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This Jackery solar generator delivers the best blend of capacity, input/output capability, portability, and durability.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,160Wh
  • Input capacity: 1,200W
  • Output capacity: 2,200W (4,400W surge)
  • Dimensions: 15.1 x 10.5 x 12.1 inches
  • Weight: 43 lbs
  • Price: $2,498

Pros

  • Fast charging and outstanding capacity
  • Durable and easy to use
  • Plenty of ports
  • Can connect to six 200W solar panels

Cons

  • Heavy for its size

The biggest portable power station from Jackery, a leading solar generator manufacturer, the Explorer 2000 Pro offers a tremendous 2,160 watt-hours of power, making it capable of charging a full camping setup for a few days. When plugged into six 200W solar panels, an upgrade over the four-panel setup available on the Jackery Explorer 1500, you can fully charge this portable power station in just 2-2.5 hours. That’s less than half the time of the smaller model.

On top of all that, it’s extremely user-friendly. Numerous output ports ensure that you can plug in a wide range of devices and electrical equipment. Its functions are highly intuitive, and the digital display is easy to understand. Like other Jackery generators, it’s incredibly durable, too. The one potential downside is its weight: At 43 pounds, it’s a bit heavy for its size. Even so, for all the power you can store, and the rapid-charging time, the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro will keep the lights on wherever you need power.

For more on the Jackery Explorer 2000 Pro, check out our full review.

Best high-capacity: Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 3,024Wh
  • Output capacity: 3,000W
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.1 x 14.7 inches
  • Weight: 63.9 pounds
  • Price: $2,799

Pros

  • Ample power storage for long trips or outages
  • Sturdy handles and wheels make it easy to move
  • Smooth design makes it easy to load and unload
  • High peak output for power-intensive tasks
  • Lots of ports for connectivity

Cons

  • 200W solar panels can be klunky
  • Relatively pricey

This is the big sibling to our best overall pick. Inside the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro, you’ll find 3,024Wh of power storage, which is enough to power even large devices for extended periods of time. It can charge a high-end smartphone more than 100 times on a single charge. It can also power full-on appliances in an RV or emergency situation.

Despite its large capacity, we learned firsthand that the Jackery Explorer 3000 Pro is relatively easy to move around. Sturdy handles molded into its case make it easy to pick up, while an extending handle and wheels make it easy to roll around at the campsite or any other location.

It can charge in less than three hours from a standard outlet or, under optimal conditions with the 200W solar panels, it can fill up as quickly as eight hours. That full solar array can get large and unwieldy, but a smaller setup can still provide ample charging if you don’t need to max out the capacity daily.

This portable power station offers the best of everything we loved about the Explorer 2000 Pro, there’s just more of it. When you’re living the van life, powering an RV, or trying to ride out a power outage, more is definitely better if you can justify the extra cost.

Best for frequent use: Anker 767 Portable Power Station Solar Generator

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High capacity and fast charging make this long-lasting battery a solid everyday driver.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,048Wh
  • Output capacity: 2,400W
  • Dimensions: 20.67 x 9.84 x 15.55 inches
  • Weight: 67.3 pounds
  • Price: $1,999

Pros

  • Charges up to 80% in less than two hours
  • Solid output and storage capacity
  • Optional battery pack doubles capacity
  • LiFePO4 batteries survive more charge cycles than traditional models
  • Plenty of ports
  • Built-in handle and wheels for transport

Cons

  • Heavy for its capacity
  • No USB-C in for charging

Anker has equipped its massive portable power station with LiFePO4 batteries, which stand up much better to repeat charging and discharging over the long term than common lithium-ion cells. Anker claims it can charge and discharge up to 3,000 times before it reaches 80% battery health compared to 500 in a similar lithium-ion setup. While I haven’t had the chance to run it through 3,000 cycles, LiFePO4 batteries have a well-earned reputation for longevity. 

Regarding overall performance, the Anker 767 does everything you’d want a unit with these specs to do. The bad weather has given me [Executive Gear Editor Stan Horaczek] ample chances, unfortunately, to test it in real-world situations. 

The built-in battery offers a 2048Wh capacity and pumps out up to 2,400W. It does so through four standard AC outlets, an RV outlet, two 120W car outlets, two 12W USB-A ports, and three 100W USB-C ports. 

I used it during a blackout to keep our Wi-Fi running while charging my family’s devices. Filling a phone from zero barely makes a dent in the power station’s capacity, and it ran the router for several hours with plenty of juice left. 

In another instance, it powered our small meat freezer for four hours before the power came back on with some juice still left in the tank. It does what it promises. 

There are a few nice extra touches as well. Built-in wheels and an extendable handle allow it to roll like carry-on luggage. Unfortunately, those are necessary inclusions because it weighs a hefty 67.3 pounds. It’s manageable but definitely heavy compared to its competition. 

The Anker 767 is compatible with the company’s 200W solar panels, which fold up for easy transportation. I mostly charged the unit through my home’s AC power, a surprisingly quick process. The 767 Portable Power Station can go from flat to more than 80% charge in less than a half hour with sufficient power. It takes about two hours to get it fully juiced. 

Anker also offers a mobile app that connects to the power station via Bluetooth if you want to control it without actually going over and touching it.

Best for camping: Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Thanks to its outstanding portability, high storage capacity, and Yeti’s famous durability, the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core is great for packing along for camping or van-living. 

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 983Wh
  • Input capacity: 600W
  • Output capacity: 1,200W (2,400W surge)
  • Dimensions: 9.86 x 15.25 x 10.23 inches
  • Weight: 31.68 lbs
  • Price: $1,198.95

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Incredible durability
  • Rapid recharge rate
  • Plenty of plugs

Cons

  • Expensive for its size/capacity

Yeti is long-renowned for making some of the best outdoor gear money can buy, so when the company launched its Goal Zero line of solar generators, it was no surprise that they turned out to be awesome. While the whole line is great, the 1000 Core model’s balance between capacity and portability makes it perfect for taking on the road and going camping.

While the 1000 Core has a third less capacity than our top pick, it charges up faster, making it a great option for rapid solar replenishment. That said, its capacity is no slouch, offering 82 phone charges, 20 for a laptop, or upwards of 15 hours for a portable fridge (depending on wattage). Suffice to say, it’s more than capable of powering your basic camping gear.

Beyond its charging capabilities, the Goal Zero 1000 Core excels at camping thanks to its hearty build quality. Built super tough—like pretty much everything Yeti makes—its exterior shell provides solid protection.

The biggest issue it presents is the cost. Like pretty much everything Yeti produces, its price tag isn’t small. While there are other 1000-level solar generators for less, this one offers a great balance of power storage and portability.

For more on the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core, check out our full review.

Best for off-grid living: Bluetti AC200 Max

Bluetti

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Thanks to its high solo capacity and ability to daisy-chain with additional batteries, the Bluetti AC200 Max is perfect for bringing power off the grid.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,048Wh standalone, expandable up to 8,192Wh
  • Input capacity: 1,400W
  • Output capacity: 2,200W (4,800W surge)
  • Dimensions: 16.5 x 11 x 15.2 inches
  • Weight: 61.9 lbs
  • Price: $1,999

Pros

  • Massive capacity
  • Daisy-chain capability
  • Lightning-fast input capacity
  • 30A RV plug and two wireless charging pads
  • Surprisingly affordable for what it offers

Cons

  • Pretty heavy
  • Fan can get loud, especially in hot weather

You’ll be hard-pressed to find a solar generator better suited for living off the grid for an extended period than the Bluetti AC200 Max. It boasts a substantial 2,048Wh capacity, allowing you to power your whole life off it longer than most portable generators. Even better, you can daisy-chain multiple Bluetti batteries, expanding its capacity to a massive 8.192Wh. That’s flat-out enormous and translates into the ability to power a full-sized fridge for over a day or several hours of air conditioning. For the more modest needs of people who are used to living off a generator, it will last for a very long time.

At the same time, the AC200 Max has an outstanding input capacity of 1,400W. That means you can plug in a pretty hefty array of solar panels to replenish its stores quickly. This allows you to keep your off-grid setup going with little to no interruption. It also features some specialty charging options, including a 30A plug, which lets you plug it directly into an RV, and multiple wireless charging pads for smaller devices.

Fastest charging: EcoFlow Delta 2 Max

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Whether it’s solar or AC power, you can get 80% of a charge in an hour or less.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2048Wh (expandable to 6,000Wh)
  • Output capacity: 3,400W
  • Dimensions: 19.8 x 9.5 x 12.01
  • Weight: 50.71 lbs
  • Price: $2,000

Pros

  • Very fast charging over solar or mains
  • Relatively compact
  • Not as heavy as we might have expected
  • Long-lasting batteries
  • Scalable by connecting two extra batteries
  • Advanced temperature management for safety

Cons

  • Solar panels are pricy
  • Still heavier than non-LiFePo4 models

Plug this 2048Wh battery pack into up to 1,000 watts of solar panels, and you can get an 80 percent charge in just 43 minutes. That’s blisteringly fast compared to other models. Plug the unit into the wall and you’ll go from zero to 80 percent in just 1.1 hours, which is still fairly speedy when it comes to soaking up electricity. That extra time can make a huge difference if you only have limited opportunities to top off your solar generator. We managed to get above 80 percent in just under an hour without perfect sun conditions here in Upstate New York.

In addition to its quick charging skills, the EcoFlow Delta 2 Max offers an impressive array of connectivity, including six AC outlets, which is more than many larger models offer. That’s good if you want to run many devices or chargers simultaneously. If you need more capacity, you can add two extra external batteries to give it a total storage of 6Wh.

At 51 pounds, this isn’t the lightest solar generator in its category, but like the other EcoFlow generators, it has chunky handles on top that make it easy to lug around. Everyone in my family could easily get it in and out of the back of our Honda CR-V without issue. Though, it doesn’t have wheels, so you will have to actually carry it around or put it on a cart.

Ultimately, this feels like a very high-end device. The fast charging is wonderful. The display is clear and relatively bright (though it could be brighter). And it offers a wide array of connectivity.

Best for homes: EcoFlow Delta Pro

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The EcoFlow Delta Pro delivers the standalone and expandable power capacity necessary to power your entire home.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 3,600Wh standalone, expandable up to 25,000Wh
  • Input capacity: 6,500W
  • Output capacity: 3,600W (7,200W surge)
  • Dimensions: 25 x 11.2 x 16.4 inches
  • Weight: 99 lbs
  • Price: $3,699

Pros

  • Enormous capacity
  • Daisy-chain capability
  • 30A RV plug
  • Lightning-fast input capacity
  • Wi-Fi and Smartphone connectivity

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Expensive

If you’re looking for the best solar generator for home backup in the event of a power outage, the EcoFlow Delta Pro stands apart from the pack, thanks to an unrivaled power and output capacity. The Delta Pro alone packs a 3,600Wh wallop, and you can expand that to 25,000Wh by chaining it to extra EcoFlow batteries and generators. That’s a ton of power and it has the substantial output capacity necessary to power an entire house worth of electronics when you need it to.

The Delta Pro also offers a companion app for iOS and Android that allows you to monitor energy usage, customize its operation, and monitor and manage a number of other elements.

While it’s not overly large for what it does, the Delta Pro is a heavy piece of equipment. It has wheels, so it is technically portable, but this is meant to be put down in a home or other semi-permanent site. Given its size and power, it’s also a much more expensive device, especially if you’re springing for the add-ons. As the best solar power generator to provide backup power for your entire home, however, it’s worth every penny. 

Best portable: Anker 545

Anker

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it makes the cut: If you’re looking for highly portable power, the Anker 545 delivers.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 778Wh
  • Input capacity: 240W
  • Output capacity: 770W
  • Dimensions: 11.81 x 8.03 x 7.28 inches
  • Weight: 18.2 lbs
  • Price: $559.99

Pros

  • Lightweight and compact
  • Plenty of capacity
  • Built-in lights

Cons

  • Slower input capacity

When portability is a priority, the Anker 545 offers the compact size and reduced weight you’re looking for and packs fairly substantial power to boot. Roughly the size of a shoebox and lighter than a case of beer, it’s easy to pack along with camping gear and move around without too much effort.

To get something so light, though, you have to compromise on power. The Anker 545 has a capacity of 778Wh and an output capacity of 770W, which is plenty of power for keeping your devices charged. Specifically, that should provide about 55 phone charges, 10 for a laptop, or 38 for a camera. Unfortunately, the outlets only output at up to 500W, so it cannot power more demanding devices like hair dryers or electric stoves.

That said, the Anker 545 has some bells and whistles, including an integrated flashlight and ambient light. All told it’s a solid option if you need a highly mobile generator.

Best budget: Jackery Explorer 300

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: With its reasonable capacity, compact size, and solid build quality at a low price, the Jackery Explorer 300 is a great budget pick.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 293Wh
  • Input capacity: 90W
  • Output capacity: 300W (500W surge)
  • Dimensions: 9.1 x 5.2 x 7.8 in
  • Weight: 7.1 lbs
  • Price: $250

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Durable
  • Portable
  • Reasonable capacity

Cons

  • No flashlight
  • Slower input capacity

Though it isn’t quite as impressive as our top picks for best overall and best high-capacity, Jackery’s smaller Explorer 300 solar generator is super compact and lightweight with a decent power capacity for its price. Less a mobile power station than an upscale power bank, the 7-pound Jackery Explorer 300 provides plenty of portable recharges for your devices when you’re camping, on a job site, driving, or just need some power and don’t have convenient access to an outlet. Its modest 293Wh capacity isn’t huge, but it’s enough to provide 31 phone charges, 15 for a camera, 6 for the average drone, 2.5 for a laptop, or a few hours of operation for a minifridge or TV. A built-in flashlight would have upped its camping game somewhat, but at $300 (and often considerably less if you catch it discounted), this highly portable little power station does a lot for a little.

We tested this portable power station for several months, and it came in handy numerous times, especially during the winter when power outages abound. At one point, we had it powering two phones, a MacBook, and a small light.

The built-in handle makes it very easy to lug around. It feels like carrying a lunch box. The screen is easy to read, and the whole package seems fairly durable. Our review unit hasn’t taken any dramatic tumbles yet, but it has gotten banged around in car trunks, duffle bags, and other less-than-luxurious accommodations with no issues. If you catch one of these on sale, get it and stick it in a cabinet. You’ll be extremely glad to have it around when the need arises.

What to consider before buying the best solar generators

Over the past few years, solar generators have exploded onto the market. There are now dozens of different brands that largely look more or less the same at a glance. The fact is there are only a few standouts amidst a sea of knockoffs. Here’s what to look for to ensure you’re getting a great one:

How much power can it store?

A portable solar generator comes in an extremely wide range of sizes, but a generator’s size doesn’t automatically make it capable of storing a lot of power. In fact, most are disappointingly limited and unable to store much more juice than a portable charger.

To properly check a generator’s storage, you must look at its capacity, measured in watt-hours (Wh). One watt-hour is the equivalent of 1 watt flowing over the course of an hour. The best solar generators offer capacities of several hundred and sometimes several thousand watt-hours. That doesn’t mean, however, that it will provide power for several hundred or several thousand hours. Any generator will ultimately last a different amount of time, depending on what’s plugged into it.

It’s easy to predict how long a generator will last when you use it to power one thing. For example, if you were to power a 100-watt bulb using a power station with a capacity of 500 watt-hours, it would stay lit for five continuous hours. Add a portable fridge that requires 50 watts per hour, your phone which uses 18, a mini-fan that uses three … you get the picture. The more capacity, the better.

Charging capability

No solar generator will hold a charge forever, so you want one capable of charging as quickly and easily as possible. This is where we put the “renewable” into “renewable energy.”

All of the power stations included in this roundup can be charged by connecting them to solar panels (hence the designation “solar generators”). Still, you also want to look for the ability to charge via other sources like wall outlets and your vehicle’s 12-volt plug. This ensures that you can charge up whether you’re off-grid in the sun, plugged in while preparing at home, or using your dash socket on the go.

You must also monitor a model’s charging input capacity, measured in watts (W). For example, a solar-powered generator with a max input of 100W can take in a continuous flow of up to 100 watts, which is about the minimum that you’ll reasonably want to look for. Most of the generators below have input capacities of at least a few hundred watts when charging via solar, so a few 50- to 200-watt solar panels will max them out.

Output capability

Solar generators need to keep the power coming in and going out. The best solar generators can simultaneously charge all your intended devices via whatever plugs are necessary.

Any portable power station worth your money will have a high output capacity so you can charge many devices, even if they require a lot of juice. A generator’s maximum output should be much higher than its max input. While a particular model might only be capable of taking in a few hundred watts at any given moment, it will usually put out exponentially more. At a minimum, you’ll want a generator that can put out 300 watts at a time, though you’ll want at least 500 for larger tasks.

The best solar generators should also offer a variety of output plugs, including AC outlets, USB-A, USB-C, and even 12-volt DC outlets like the one in your vehicle dash. This ensures you can charge several devices simultaneously regardless of their plug. The number of ports you’ll need will vary depending on how many devices you need to power, but it should have at least a couple of AC outlets and a few USB-A ports.

Portability

While portable battery sources have been around for a while now, over the past several decades, they’ve been pretty heavy, unwieldy things. One of the most exciting aspects of the latest generation of solar generators is that they’ve become much more physically compact. 

Suppose you plan on taking a generator camping or working it into a van conversion where every square inch matters; well, size and weight become major considerations. All of the products we’ve recommended are about the size of one or two shoeboxes—three at the most. The lightest is about the weight of a 24-pack of soda, while the heaviest is 100 pounds. Most fall somewhere between 30-60 pounds.

If you’re using your generator as a more or less stationary source of backup power at home, portability isn’t a huge issue. Still, we generally recommend keeping weight and size in mind; You never know when you’ll need it for something other than a backup. (Plus, who wants to lug around something heavy and awkward if they don’t have to?) 

Another consideration regarding portability involves the necessity for accessories, which can impact how easy it is to move and use your generator. Some generators, for example, require a lot of removable battery packs, which can be a hassle when you’re on the go or packing a vehicle. All of the inclusions on our list require some accessories—you can’t get solar power without connecting cables and solar panels—but they work well with minimal add-ons.

Durability

As with any product you expect to last, durability and all-around quality craftsmanship are essential. This is especially true if you plan on lugging your generator around on camping and road trips. Many subpar power stations are made from cheap components and flimsy plastic that doesn’t feel like it will hold up under the rigors of the road.

Durability isn’t something you can determine by reading a spec sheet off the internet. You’ve actually got to take the generator out, use it a bunch, and see how it holds up. I’ve verified the durability of these recommendations via a combination of my own actual field tests and reviews culled from countless real product owners.

Related: Best electric generators

FAQs

Q: What size solar generator should I get?

It’s easy to underestimate how much capacity you need. A 1,000 watt-hours might sound like a lot, but if you’re going to power a converted van with a portable fridge, lights, and occasional phone and laptop top-off, that 1,000 watt-hours will go faster than you expect. I used a setup like this and know from personal experience that you should always overestimate how much power you’ll need.

A generator with a capacity under 1,000Wh can keep electronics charged. A larger one with 1000-1500Wh should be the minimum for road trips where you’ll need it to last multiple days between full charges. For a house or worksite where you expect to use some serious energy—like a full-sized refrigerator or power tools—you’re going to want to start looking at the biggest possible power stations that can be daisy-chained to external batteries.

If you want to get precise, there is an equation:

1. Estimate how many hours you’ll need to power various devices. For example, if you want to power two light bulbs for 2 hours: you need 4 hours of operation.

2. Add up the total wattage necessary: the two bulbs are 60 watts each, so you need 120 watts.

3. Multiply these together to find the total watt-hours needed: 4 x 120 = 480. So, in this case, you’d need at least a 500Wh solar generator. 

That might sound like a lot for two lightbulbs, but remember that, in most situations, you won’t really be powering 60-watt light bulbs for hours on end. You’ll be charging phones and laptops for an hour here or there, cooling a fridge that kicks on and off every once in a while, using power tools in short bursts, and whatnot.

Q: How many years will a solar generator last?

Most modern generators are rated to last upwards of 25 years. The best-designed power stations are pretty sturdy, with few to no moving parts, so they should likely keep kicking for a long time, provided that you care for them properly. I’ve been pretty rough with a few of mine, and they show no signs of stopping.

Q: Can I run my house on solar power only?

Yes and no. While it’s absolutely possible to power your house with solar power, you’re unlikely to do so with a portable solar generator unless you use several at once while limiting your power usage. The largest of our recommendations—the EcoFlow Delta Pro—will come fairly close when bolstered with extra batteries. If the power goes out, you’ll be able to keep your fridge cold and use basic electronics for a couple of days without recharging. With quality solar panels, good sunlight, and smart energy usage, your power should theoretically go uninterrupted.

Final thoughts on the best solar generators

We’re living in a “golden age” for portable solar generators. When I was a kid, and my family was playing around with solar gear while camping in the ‘90s, the technology couldn’t charge many devices, so it wasn’t all that practical. 

By contrast, the solar generators we’ve recommended here are incredibly useful. I’ve relied on them to power my work and day-to-day needs while road-tripping nationwide. They’re also great when the power goes out. When a windstorm cut the power at my house for a couple of days, I was still working, watching my stories, and keeping the lights on. 

We haven’t even scratched the surface in terms of the potential offered by portable, reliable, renewable, relatively affordable power. What we can do now is already incredible. The potential for what may come next, though, is truly mind-blowing.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar generators for 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar birdbaths of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-solar-birdbaths/ Wed, 30 Jun 2021 18:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=376389
best solar birdbaths
Make your backyard and avian attraction with solar birdbaths. Unsplash, Anthony DELANOIX

Solar birdbaths offer an energy-efficient way for birds to sip water, cool their feathers, and maintain their flight agility.

The post The best solar birdbaths of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best solar birdbaths
Make your backyard and avian attraction with solar birdbaths. Unsplash, Anthony DELANOIX

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Bathing is an almost universal behavior among avians, yet scientists are still trying to understand the evolutionary advantage of clean feathers. While birds enjoy a good washing, they don’t splish and splash in just any mud puddle. They’re attracted to gently moving water that’s relatively clean. That’s where solar birdbaths enter the picture. 

Solar power saves energy, eliminates cords, and, importantly, creates a quieter water pump: Birds can get skittish around new or loud noises. Some solar birdbath models also feature a battery that stores energy to power the water fountain after the sun goes down or on cloudy days. Birdbaths are a stand-alone way to attract birds to your yard, but they also make a great companion for a bird feeder. Once feathered friends call your yard home, they help boost the health (and attractiveness) of your yard by eating harmful bugs and weed seeds and pollinating plants. 

The best solar birdbaths: Reviews & Recommendations

Best for gardeners: VIVOHOME Outdoor Bird Bath and Solar Powered Round Pond Fountain

Amazon

SEE IT

This attractive birdbath includes a solar-powered water pump. The pump shoots water into the air anywhere from 12 to 20 inches to attract feathered friends. It also comes with multiple fountain heads to change up the water patterns, prompting birds to come back for more. The weatherproof polyresin’s antique copper finish looks classy, but it’s lightweight, so you can relocate it from your garden to your patio at any time.

Best for modernists: Solar Bird Bath Fountain Pump

Cloudy days won’t slow down the flow of this pump, thanks to an onboard 3000mAh battery. This one charges in both sunny and partly cloudy condistions . Eight different nozzles change up the aquatic experience, spraying a maximum of 27 inches into the air.

Best for other birds: MUMTOP Outdoor Glass Birdbath Solar Birdbaths with Metal Stand

Amazon

SEE IT

Birds of a feather flock together? That’s the idea behind this glass birdbath bowl inspired by the peacock. The bowl’s bright colors and mesmerizing pattern offer a vibrant addition to your yard. Solar power keeps water moving, but it also provides fuel for LED lights, so the birdbath acts as a decorative feature day or night. The 18-inch bowl holds enough water to attract birds, yet doesn’t overtake the yard. 

Best for techno birds: AISITIN 6.5W Solar Fountain with LED Light

Amazon

SEE IT

Transform a pond, bowl, or bucket into the birds’ favorite bathing spot with a floating, Technicolor island. This model runs on either solar energy or a battery that holds up to 7 hours of running time after the sun goes down. It includes four stabilizers to center it in a bucket or bowl, or it can float in a pond. Eight nozzles provide different spray heights and shapes, allowing you to adjust it to your (and the birds’) preferences.

What attracts birds to birdbaths? 

Feathers serve several important purposes. They give birds insulation, waterproofing, and act as decoration to attract a mate. Consequently, maintaining the health of those feathers is important to keep birds alive and thriving. Almost all bird species regularly take a dip, but little research has been done on why birds bathe. There are several working theories behind the behavior, starting with the same reason people bathe: cleanliness. 

Birds replace their feathers once or twice a year. However, the fronds collect dirt and bacteria and break down over time. Bathing removes soil and oils that may get in the way of flight, waterproofing, and insulation. Water can also help remove mites and bacteria that degrade the feathers. 

A 2012 study of European starlings suggested that birds with clean feathers were more efficient fliers. What’s more, the scientists found that starlings that didn’t regularly bathe were less able to perceive threats and could be prone to long-term stress. 

Scientists haven’t pinpointed all of the benefits of clean feathers, but they may also offer a survival advantage. In one 2009 study, bathed birds were more likely to eat food despite the threat of a predator, suggesting that they knew their agility could help them escape danger. 

However, birds have their standards and don’t usually bathe in a muddy puddle. They prefer slow, moving water that’s generally cleaner. Birds also prefer shallow water; in depths of up to two inches, they can maneuver and wash in relative safety. 

Do birds care about solar energy? 

Birdbaths equipped with solar-powered water pumps have qualities birds like, even though the avians’ preference may not be a conscious one. Solar pumps may be surrounded by solar panels or connected to them via a cord. In the case of designs surrounded by solar panels, the entire unit fits inside the birdbath’s basin. Those that connect via a cord have the water pump in the basin and the solar panels outside of the basin. 

The panels absorb energy from the sun and turn it into power that fuels the pump.  Some models, hybrids, can also run off of solar or a standard power outlet. Hybrid models work well in areas where cloud cover may frequently block enough solar energy from reaching the panels. 

Related: Best bird feeders: Enjoy a backyard filled with birdsong

The post The best solar birdbaths of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best headlamps for hiking of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-headlamps-for-hiking/ Sun, 09 Jul 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=554434
A lineup of the best headlamps for hiking on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keep your hands free for essentials and your path illuminated for safety during your next hike.

The post The best headlamps for hiking of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best headlamps for hiking on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A black BioLite headlamp on a blue and white background BioLite 800 Pro Headlamp
SEE IT

A hefty, powerful light in a sleek, bounce-free body.

Best for thru-hiking The PETZL, NAO + Programmable, Rechargeable Headlamp with 750 Lumens on a blue and white background PETZL NAO + Programmable Rechargeable Headlamp
SEE IT

Long hikes are no match for this portable headlamp.

Best budget An Energizer LED Headlamp Pro260 on a blue and white background. Energizer LED Headlamp Pro260
SEE IT

Spend less than $15 on a headlamp that punches above its weight.

Sometimes holding a flashlight just ain’t it—that’s why you need a headlamp made for hiking. These ultra-durable, long-lasting pieces of camping gear are absolutely essential when headed on your next big trek. Sure, your hikes may be planned for the day, but what about nighttime? No one wants to burrow through their pack for a beer, build a tent, or trip on a tree root in the dark. You’re also missing a chance to walk under the stars and pick out constellations or see the sunrise from a summit if you decide to only hike during the day. After you get home, you can even use your hiking headlamp as a reading lamp or light source when you have to walk the dog at night. So pull up your socks, soak yourself in bug spray, and snag one of the best headlamps for hiking.

How we chose the best headlamps for hiking

I consider myself at least 25% of an outdoors person, thanks to many years of Girl Scout camp, summer trips to my grandpa’s hunting cabin, and staying on campgrounds in the family camper. A headlamp was essential to hikes, night trips to the latrine, and even helped me out as I barreled through the Twilight book series when I couldn’t sleep (like all hot girls, I famously have trouble falling asleep). To narrow down our choices for the best headlamps for hiking, we looked at reviews and recommendations and threw some options on our big heads to test.

The best headlamps for hiking: Reviews & Recommendations

Your phone flashlight isn’t the best illumination source while trying to step over tree roots and rocks on a slightly muddy path. One of our choices should help you light the way, whether you’re walking to the fridge at night or traversing the great outdoors.

Best overall: BioLite 800 Pro Headlamp

BioLite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 5.3 ounces
  • Lumens: 800 lumens
  • Battery life: 150 hours on low; 7 hours on high; 8 hours on reserve
  • Waterproof rating: IPX4

Pros

  • Rechargeable
  • Long-lasting
  • Red light option

Cons

  • Bit of a learning curve

We’re fans of BioLite for many reasons: we think one of these headlamps is an excellent camping gadget thanks to its internal tech, and they’re rechargeable. The lamp delivers 800 lumens for 150 hours on low; seven hours on high; and eight hours on reserve. A Run Forever cord lets you connect a power bank for even more runtime. A moisture-wicking headband keeps you dry and cool, and integrated electronics prevent slipping and bouncing. A push on the back gives you 30 seconds of max brightness, and Constant mode gives you full illumination sans auto-dimming. There’s a bit of a learning curve if you’ve never used a BioLite headlamp, but it’s one of the best on the market once you get over it. If 800 lumens seems like overkill, consider its lower lumen cousin, the BioLite 325 headlamp, which maxes out at—you guessed it—325 lumens.

Best ultralight: Nitecore NU25 UL

Nitecore

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.59 ounces
  • Lumens: 750 lumens
  • Battery life: 45 hours
  • Waterproof rating: IP66

Pros

  • Eight light modes
  • USB-C charging
  • Long light throw

Cons

  • Expensive

“Light as a feather, stiff as a board,” goes the old creepy slumber party game played many times by preteens huddled in a platform tent. At 1.59 ounces, this headlamp is not feather-light to a magical degree, but it is the lightest of all our choices on this list. It has a 210-foot light throw, meaning you can see the path ahead and then some. Its IP66 waterproof rating means it’s dust-tight and water-resistant against powerful jets. Four hundred lumens is the Goldilocks number of lumens (not too bright but not too dull), and Lock-out Mode ensures the lamp doesn’t turn out while in your pack. Options for spotlight, floodlight, and red light round out its most desirable modes. Despite being lightweight, it won’t levitate off your head, unlike Jenny after that particularly frightening “Light as a feather, stiff as a board” round.

Best for thru-hiking: PETZL NAO + Programmable Rechargeable Headlamp

Petzl

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 6.3 ounces
  • Lumens: 750 lumens
  • Battery life: 70 hours
  • Waterproof rating: IPX4

Pros

  • App connectivity
  • Rechargeable
  • Top strap helps keep it on your head

Cons

  • IP rating could be better

This light looks right out of the Star Wars universe, and we think it would survive a stroll in Tatooine, thanks to its hefty stats. It’s IPX4 rated, meaning it won’t be affected by splashes in all directions and sweat—perfect for when you’re on a particularly grueling or rainy leg of your hike. Reactive Lighting technology automatically adapts to ambient light when the sun starts to rise. Bluetooth technology lets the light wirelessly connect to your smartphone and check burn time in real-time. Seven hundred fifty lumens gives you a powerful, strong beam, and a combo wide- and focused- beam gives you proximity lighting and long-range vision. A top strap keeps everything secure while you bike or hike.

Best for kids: Black Diamond Spot Lite 200 Headlamp

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.9 ounces
  • Lumens: 200
  • Battery life: Not rechargeable, uses 2 AAA batteries
  • Waterproof rating: IPX8

Pros

  • Great IP rating
  • Ergonomic
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Non-rechargeable

You don’t need an entire shopping spree at your local camping store outpost to get a high-powered, long-lasting headlamp for your camper who is about to head out on their first camp trip ever. And even if you’re not shopping for a kid, this option is great to put into your glove box in case of an emergency. Two hundred lumens is a great amount of light for walking back to camp after dinner in the dining hall, and an IPX8 rating means it will survive a drop in the puddle. Its many light settings include full strength in proximity and distance modes, dimming, strobe, red night-vision, and lock mode. If you’re shopping for an older kid growing into their outdoorsy own, we also have other recommendations for Scout-friendly headlamps. However, with these specs, we think this model will grow with them as they take on harder hikes and higher climbs.

Best budget: Energizer LED Headlamp Pro260

Energizer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 3.52 ounces
  • Lumens: 260 lumens
  • Battery life: 35 hours in low mode
  • Waterproof rating: IPX4

Pros

  • Lots of light settings
  • Long light throw
  • Cheap

Cons

  • Non-rechargeable

Don’t discount Energizer! They’re our best budget pick in this headlamp story, and now they’ve taken the spot again in this one. It illuminates up to 260 feet, which is remarkable considering the price. It comes with an adjustable strap, pivoting head, and compact design, with a water-resistant IPX4-rated body. Seven light modes, including red light mode, let it run with the more expensive choices on this list; you even change the light intensity from 100%-10% and turn your headlamp off immediately without clicking through additional cycles. Although it’s non-rechargeable, it comes with three AAA batteries, meaning you don’t have to root through your battery bag.

What to consider when buying the best headlamps for hiking

From different difficulties to varying experience levels, no two hikes are the same. Same with the gear your should pack for your excursions. Here is what you should think about before snagging a new headlamp.

Duration of hike

Are you going on a half-day jaunt? Or are you using your headlamp for a serious months-long hike on the Appalachian Trail? A shorter hike rated Easiest or Modest means you can get away with something that runs on batteries, is less impact-resistant, and has shorter battery life. Anything considered Moderately Strenuous, Strenuous, or Very Strenuous means you may want to consider one that’s rechargeable (which you can recharge while staying at a trek-in lodge) and very long battery life.

If your hike is longer and you’ll chill out at camp for the night instead of a trek-in lodge, a headlamp is a great way to illuminate the entire tent and keep your hands free as you build a fire or search for kindling.

Weather conditions

If it’s going to be wet and rainy, consider upgrading to a headlamp that has a good IP Rating, which indicates its Ingress Protection against solids and liquids. IPX4 should be the minimum IP rating you consider for your headlamp, and hikers who are going to traverse more extreme conditions should consider something that’s IPX7 or IPX8 rated.

FAQs

Q: How many lumens do I need for a headlamp for hiking?

You should look for a headlamp that has at least 300 lumens if you’re using it to hike. Anything less is better for walking the dog at night or for novice young hikers tagging along with their more-experienced parents.

Q: Is white or yellow light better for hiking at night?

Technically, neither. Red light is actually the best light for hiking at night since it affects your night vision less compared to white or yellow light. It’s a matter of preference otherwise.

Q: How important is a headlamp in hiking?

We think it’s very important to bring a headlamp when hiking. It keeps your hands free and makes you more agile and efficient. But, if you’re going on an overnight camping trip, a headlamp is a must-have—no one wants to set up a tent in the dark.

Final thoughts on the best headlamps for hiking

Headlamps for hiking are made to illuminate your path as you enjoy a lovely traverse under a beautiful starry night. They also have many uses when the hike ends and you’re back at home—use time after sundown to get through your “to be read” pile, banish dark dog walks into the light, and wear one to see what the heck is going on under the hood of your car. Tell flashlights to take a hike after you snag one of the best headlamps for hiking.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best headlamps for hiking of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best beach chairs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-beach-chairs/ Mon, 10 May 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=363408
best beach chairs
Şahin Sezer Dinçer, Unsplash

Chillout, wherever you are, with the best beach chairs on the market.

The post The best beach chairs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best beach chairs
Şahin Sezer Dinçer, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Blue floral backpack beach chair Tommy Bahama Backpack Cooler Beach Chair
SEE IT

A built-in cooler and flip-over pillow let you fully relax at the beach.

Best travel Desert stripes beach hammock with steel stand and carrying bad Best Choice Brazilian-Style Hammock
SEE IT

This hammock easily folds for even easier transportation.

Best budget Yellow light weighted beach and camping chair Coleman Camping Chair
SEE IT

Keep it simple with this lightweight, inexpensive beach chair.

We’ve all done it: We go to the beach, bringing only a towel. “I can shape the sand into a sort of ground chair,” we tell ourselves, but it never really works out that way. So, instead of sinking into disappointment, grab a chair. The best beach chairs will allow you to enjoy the scenery, while also being durable and portable. Whether you’re on the best beach in the Pacific or in your yard next to the baby pool, take time to find the right size, style, and type of chair to best suit your needs.

How we chose the best beach chairs

When you’re shopping for the best beach chair, you want to be sure to snag a chair that will bring you hours of comfort, be durable enough to last at least through the summer, and be lightweight and collapsible for easy transport. Finding the best beach gear means asking yourself how and where you will be spending your time. If you plan on camping in a rustic, wooded coastal area, it may make sense to bring a portable beach hammock or easy-to-carry camping beach chair. If you have a smaller car or will be traveling on public transportation to your beach destination, you’ll want to opt for a smaller, low-profile beach chair—all the better if it has backpack straps.

The best beach chairs: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: Tommy Bahama Backpack Cooler Beach Chair

Tommy Bahama

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Aluminum, steel, fabric
  • Dimensions: 25 x 24 x 30 inches  (D x W x H)
  • Weight: 4.44 pounds

Pros

  • Features built-in cooler
  • Choose from five reclining positions
  • Backpack design makes it easy to carry

Cons

  • Some users had issues with closing the chair and it squeaking

This Tommy Bahama beach chair is a folding chair that you can carry as a backpack. At just 4.44 pounds, this adjustable beach chair is lightweight, but allows for five reclining positions. (It also features a pillow for sneaky naps.) But what truly sets this folding beach chair apart is the cooler built into the back, which allows you to store up to six cans. Kicking back at the beach couldn’t get much easier. Looking for some coverage? Check out our guide to the best beach tents.

Best for seniors: Amazon Basics Outdoor Zero-Gravity Lounge Folding Chair

Amazon Basics

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Textilene, steel
  • Dimensions: 31.5 x 26 x 33.9 inches (D x W x H)
  • Weight: 17.8 pounds

Pros

  • Encourages circulation
  • Provides neck support
  • Durable

Cons

  • May be hard to get out of
  • Heavier than other models

Well-designed zero-gravity chairs can be good for your health, making them a solid choice as a beach chair for seniors. They allow users to lift their legs above their heart, encouraging circulation. And many, like this beach lounge chair from Amazon Basics, provide a pillow for your head and padded armrests. This reclining beach chair is also made to stand the test of time and weather, thanks to rust- and weather-resistant materials.

Best travel: Best Choice Brazilian-Style Hammock

Best Choice Products

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Fabric and metal
  • Dimensions:118.75 x 48 inches ( L x W)
  • Weight: 30 pounds

Pros

  • Choice of 12 beautiful colorways
  • Sturdy construction
  • Comes with a case for portability

Cons

  • May be heavy for some to carry long distances

Nothing embodies the breezy spirit of summer like a hammock. So why not get one you can take with you wherever you travel? This Brazilian-inspired beach hammock comes with a stand, as well as a carrying case. The stand disassembles with no tools needed, so you can pack up and move it around if necessary. Plus, it’s built for two. This de facto travel beach chair also comes in 12 eye-catching striped colorways, too, if you want to coordinate with your bathing suit. You can also transport it with the help of one of the best beach wagons.

Best lightweight: Helinox Sunset Chair

Specs

  • Material: Aluminum, polyester
  • Dimensions: 28.5 x 23 x 38.5 inches (D x W x H)
  • Weight: 3.25 pounds

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Small footprint
  • Works in a range of settings
  • Comes in a range of colors

Cons

  • May not be a good fit for larger users
  • No reclining

If only everything in life was as easy as setting up a Helinox chair. Sometimes the best feature of a beach chair is that it doesn’t kill your back when you’re slogging it over the hot sand searching for a spot on the beach. At 3.25 pounds, the Helinox Sunset Chair is not only one of the most lightweight beach chairs, but this option packs all kinds of beach-friendly features, including UV-resistant ripstop fabric and a zippered carrying case. You can select from options with or without pockets. Plus, it’s originally designed for camping, so it can do double duty. And it comes in nine colorways, from black to rainbow bandanna.

Best budget: Coleman Camping Chair

Coleman

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Synthetic fabric, alloy steel
  • Dimensions: 29.5 x 10.7 x 3.5 inches (D x W x H) 
  • Weight: 6 pounds

Pros

  • Easy on the wallet
  • Lightweight
  • Comes with cup holder and pocket

Cons

  • May be difficult for some people to get out of
  • Some assembly required

This Coleman chair is the most budget-friendly of the bunch, but that doesn’t mean it skimps on the essentials. We’d expect nothing less from this trusted outdoor brand. Highly rated, this  powder-coated steel, low-profile chair weighs in at only 5.3 pounds. It also comes with its own carrying bag for easy transportation and includes a mesh pocket in the back for your towel and some beach reading, and a cup holder to keep you hydrated on the hot sand.

Things to consider when buying the best beach chairs

There are also some extra features to beach chairs that might make your day all the more relaxing, from cooler packs to cup holders and cellphone pouches. For ultimate comfort, there are even zero-gravity-style chairs, which allow you to recline and raise your feet.

Looking for a chair and backpack combo?

A day at the beach will include, at minimum, a comfortable chair, a few snacks and drinks, and your towel. The easier it is to carry all of this, the more easy and carefree your day will be. A backpack beach chair includes straps that make carrying your beach haul incredibly easy. Look for backpack chairs that are adjustable, allowing for reclining flat for naps, or sitting upright for eating and watching the waves. The best backpack beach chairs—these will be folding chairs—will have some fun extras built in to help you relax and minimize the overall amount of beach day packing you need to do. Look for built-in pillows, cup holders, and more; our recommendation even includes a foldable towel rack.

Looking for a chair that will be comfortable for your back?

The best beach chairs will be comfortable for all-day lounging and relaxing. So-called zero-gravity chairs distribute weight evenly and allow you to recline so that your legs are above the height of your heart. These are just about the comfiest patio chairs out there, and some of them will work just as well on the sand. In order for a zero-gravity chair to work as a folding beach chair, it must be fully collapsible and be made from durable, UV-resistant materials. Be sure to check with the manufacturer for size guides and weight limits. Some zero-gravity beach chairs even have extra features like padding, cup holders, and canopies to shade you from the sun.

Prefer a beach hammock

Few images conjure up quintessential relaxation more than stretching out in a hammock. While it may seem silly to bring a hammock to a crowded public beach, you’d be surprised how often you can use one on vacation: wooded beach areas, parks, lakes, and forests are all ideal for hammocks. The best beach hammock will be lightweight and easily packed, with a device that makes it easy to construct. Most portable hammocks are designed to hang between two trees, but if that doesn’t seem likely, you can find one with a stand, too. In that case, look for a stand that’s designed to be taken apart and transported. Often these stands even come with a travel bag with a shoulder strap to make carrying and moving easier. With their flexible fabric design, hammocks are a great choice if you think you might want to catch a nap. 

Looking for a chair that’s easy to carry?

For most of us, going to the beach involves lugging. You’re going to have to carry stuff—a lot of stuff—down to the sand. The best camping chairs are designed with this obstacle in mind. These have to be lightweight, because they’re going to be carried, sometimes over long distances. Nobody has to know that you’re actually reading a book on the beach, not trekking through the wilderness, in a camping beach chair. Look for camping beach chairs with tall backs; not all have this, and you’ll want to rest your head. Consider materials that are both washable and ventilated for warm summer days. 

Looking for beach chairs on a budget? 

Fortunately, there are plenty of budget folding beach chairs on the market. You’ll have to give up some features and styles; don’t bank on grabbing a zero-gravity chair or one with a high-tech folding camping frame for under $50. But there are still great options. Make sure to look for UV-resistant materials, which will keep the fabric from stretching and becoming brittle in the sun. These chairs may be affordable, but that doesn’t mean you want to replace them too often.

FAQs

Q: Are zero-gravity chairs good for the beach?

Zero-gravity chairs are good for the beach, but not all of them. These chairs are typically made of tough, weather- and water-resistant materials, and, of course, they’re super comfortable. But some of these chairs can be exceedingly heavy, which really reduces their utility as beach chairs. Look for UV-resistant fabrics, a lightweight (ideally 12 pounds or less), and rust-proof coating on any metal bits.

Q: Why are beach chairs so low to the ground?

Beach chairs are low to the ground to allow for more stability and comfort. When seated on top of the sand, the surface is soft and sometimes uneven, which can make things a bit…tippy. When low to the ground, your center of gravity also moves lower, making it harder to topple over. Plus, lower chairs have less material, which makes them more portable.

Q: Are camping chairs good for the beach?

The best camping chairs are a great choice for the beach because they are designed to be lightweight, foldable, and easy to carry. But make sure you really look at them: some camping chairs are too minimal, more like stools, and your use case is less about minimizing the weight of a camping pack and more about comfort and relaxation.

Final thoughts on the best beach chairs

The best beach chairs will allow you to kick back, relax, and enjoy a full day at the beach. Whether you want to indulge in a zero-gravity chair to feel like a vacationing astronaut, set up a portable hammock, or just grab something lightweight for a long walk to the shore, you’ll find something here to make your beach day great.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best beach chairs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best bike helmets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-bike-helmets/ Sat, 14 Aug 2021 20:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=388677
Hit the road with the best bike helmets.
Coen van de Broek, Unsplash

Ride safely and in style while wearing the best bike helmets.

The post The best bike helmets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Hit the road with the best bike helmets.
Coen van de Broek, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall POC Sports' Myelin is one of the best bike helmets overall. POC Sports Myelin Helmet
SEE IT

This sleek helmet is designed for disassembly so you can recycle the components once you’re done using it. 

Best for kids The Giro Scamp is the best bike helmet for kids. Giro Scamp
SEE IT

Dependable, safe, and easy to use right out of the box for kids as they grow.

Best budget The Giro Register MIPS is the best bike helmet on a budget. Giro Register MIPS
SEE IT

This options is affordable, comfortable, and safety-certified.

Whether you’re commuting to work or teaching your kid how to ride, wearing a bike helmet is essential. Wearing one reduces the risk of head injuries by 85 percent, according to a Cleveland Clinic report. In addition to serving as a safety feature, these helmets can also protect you from the weather and look great doing so. We’ve rounded up some of the best bike helmets for adults and kids to ride in safety, comfort, and style.

The best bike helmets: Reviews & Recommendations

More than just a form of exercise, biking is a lifestyle. Whether for pleasure, fitness, commuting or errands, bike riding is a great, sustainable way to get around. As more cities open up streets and widen bike lanes, biking culture has skyrocketed.  Plus, choosing to bike helps to cut down on carbon emissions and assists in saving the environment. With the increase in biking, you do need to be sure you are following local laws and taking precautions to keep yourself safe. Here are our recommendations for helmets to serve a range of needs.

Best overall: POC Sports Myelin Helmet

POC Sports

SEE IT

Specs

  • Materials: Polycarbonate (exterior), polystyrene (interior)
  • Weight: .77 pounds
  • Sizes: Small, medium, large

Pros

  • Can be recycled
  • Sleek design
  • Available in 5 colorways

Cons

  • Expensive

Biking requires more gear than sports like running, and equipment like helmets often head to a landfill after 5 to 10 years of use. But POC Sports’ Myelin Helmet, which was one of PopSci’s winners for Best of What’s New 2022, is designed to let you recycle it when you’re done. The helmet starts out with adhesive-free assembly and a fabric outer shell that’s made from recycled material. Once you’re done using the Myelin, cutaway fasteners let users break the helmet down into pieces that can be recycled. The helmet also comes with a protective lining, easy-to-use snap adjuster, and comes  in five cool colorways (Epidote Green, Granite Gray, Lead Blue, Sapphire Purple, Uranium Black).

Best road: Giro Aether Spherical Adult Road-Bike Helmet

Giro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Materials: Polycarbonate, EPS foam
  • Weight: 1.5 pounds (small)
  • Sizes: Small, medium, large

Pros

  • Designed with MIPS protection that reduces potential impact to the brain
  • Lightweight
  • Excellent ventilation
  • Comes in 12 colorways

Cons

  • Some users questioned the quality of materials
  • May be uncomfortable

The Giro Aether Spherical Adult Road-Bike Helmet is the best road-bike helmet. It’s a lightweight, comfortable road helmet with 21 wind tunnel vents and internal channeling to keep you cool, whether you’re commuting or racing. Dual-density EPS foam liners with MIPS (Multi-Directional Impact Protection System) protection are integrated for added comfort and safety. Increase your sense of security with one of the best bike lights.

Best mountain: Smith Optics Forefront 2 MIPS

Smith

SEE IT

Specs

  • Materials: Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS), Koroyd 
  • Weight: 11 ounces
  • Sizes: Small, medium, large

Pros

  • Comes with MIPS protection
  • Designed with internal and exhaust ports for ventilation
  • Made with visors you can adjust in three positions
  • Available in 23 colorways

Cons

  • One user said helmet was damaged upon arrival

The Smith Optics Forefront 2 MIPS is a full-coverage helmet that offers MIPS protection with eyewear/goggle integration. AirEvac channels help ventilate without fogging up eyewear. You may also want to consider one of the best electric mountain bikes.

Best for kids: Giro Scamp

Giro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Materials: Polycarbonate shell, EPS liner
  • Weight: 1 pound
  • Sizes: Extra small, small

Pros

  • Designed with MIPS system for safety
  • Kids can wear for many years
  • Features pinch-guard strap for comfort

Cons

  • Several colorways have been discontinued

A lightweight helmet with a dial-adjust system and optional MIPS technology, the Scamp is easy to fit and use right out of the box. This kids’ bike helmet doesn’t boast exotic designs or too many bells and whistles, but it’s a solid option that delivers value and protection at a great price. Once you’re done riding, you can stow your gear in some of the best bike storage.

Best budget: Giro Register MIPS

Giro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Materials: Polycarbonate, EPS liner
  • Weight: 1.58 pounds
  • Sizes: Universal Adult, Universal Extra Large

Pros

  • Uses MIPS system for safety
  • Comes with dial that adjusts for better fit
  • Designed with 22 vents

Cons

  • Some users had issues with the fit and components as they arrived

The Giro Register MIPS helmet offers a MIPS design that helps reduce the risk of concussion. With a lighter weight design and plenty of ventilation, this helmet should be comfortable to wear for longer days on your bike.

Things to consider when searching for the best bike helmet

There are a few important considerations to make before shopping for cycling helmets. The best bike helmet will be the one that works for your lifestyle. There are subtle differences between road bike helmets, mountain bike helmets, dirt bike helmets, and those used for leisurely rides. With helmets ranging in price from around $50 to $300, it’s important to understand what features you need and want. 

First and foremost, you must consider fit. In order for a helmet to perform, it needs to fit securely. Helmets should fit over the head snuggly and sit level on the head. The chin straps should be snug, allowing only enough room for one finger. You can measure the circumference of your head with a soft tape measure and then check with the bike-helmet manufacturer for guidance on the correct size helmet to order. It’s important not to assume you are the same size universally, as various brands size their helmets differently.

All the top brands offering reputable helmets will provide data on their safety standards and testing. The U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) provides certification for helmets that pass the federal safety standard. In addition, independent safety testing is provided through the Snell Foundation, and helmets will be listed as Snell-certified. 

Another safety feature to consider is a helmet equipped with MIPS (Multi-Directional Impact Protection System). This design incorporates a special liner that fits against the head. MIPS offers added protection from the most common type of ground crashes, which involve impact from an angle. 

Commuting

When you use your bike for commuting, you’re typically in more controlled surroundings, like paved roads (ideally in designated bike lanes). Road-biking offers a few unique characteristics that make sense to address with the helmet designed for these situations. The heat-island effect (urban areas that experience higher temperatures) plays a role here, so look for helmets that offer superior ventilation—no one wants to show up to the office drenched in sweat.

Another feature to look for in road helmets is a lightweight construction. A lighter helmet is going to be the most comfortable. Keep in mind, though, that sometimes high-quality, lighter-weight materials can add to the cost. But comfort is worth it, especially when you use a helmet frequently. 

Finally, all the best road helmets must pass safety standards and be fully certified. Additional features to consider for road helmets are designs that address aerodynamics (get to work faster!), as well as the add-on feature of MIPS.

Off roading

Trail riding, mountain biking, or off-road biking all require a few extra features that aren’t found on all bike helmets. When you are riding in nature on uneven terrain, you are facing dappled light from tree coverage, unpredictable surfaces like gravel, fallen branches, and mud, and the possibility of falling onto sharp objects. One could argue that road biking seems more dangerous because of the threat of high-speed impact or car crashes, but the obstacles encountered when mountain biking can be just as or potentially even more dangerous simply due to unpredictability. For that reason alone, mountain biking demands the best helmets designed with nature in mind.

The biggest noticeable difference you will find is that helmets for mountain bikes are designed with a visor. The visor is essential on mountain bike helmets because it protects you from a myriad of obstacles. First, it offers shielding from sunlight and rain. Second, it provides added protection from unexpected low-lying branches. Seeing clearly is a priority for mountain biking. 

Mountain bike helmets require even more vents than road helmets because the overall ride is slower, which means less airflow to keep you cool. You will find that mountain bike helmets are built up with extra padding to protect from sharp object impacts and falls over the handlebar. While road riders strive for speed and seek aerodynamic designs, mountain bike helmets eschew sleekness for extra padding. Finally, for some downhill-style mountain biking, you will find helmets with goggle integration or ones designed with full face shields.

Age of user

Each year, an average of 26,000 children are admitted into emergency rooms for brain injuries related to bicycle riding. These are scary numbers, and they should drive home how important bike helmets are. 

The use of bike helmets has been shown to reduce the risk of head injury by at least 45 percent. They can reduce brain injury by 33 percent, facial injury by 27 percent, and fatal injury by 29 percent. In California, there are laws stating that anyone under the age of 18 must wear a helmet while riding a bike, skateboard, or scooter and parents may be fined if they don’t. 

Finding a helmet that fits properly is just as important as wearing a helmet in the first place. An ill-fitting helmet won’t do much to protect your child, so it’s vital to know what to look for. You should always have your child try a helmet on, as different manufacturers may size their helmets differently. Beyond that, check for certification from the CPSC, and get a helmet that fits your child at that moment. These are not the kinds of items that you want them to “grow into.” The helmet should fit snug all around their head. It shouldn’t move side to side or front to back;  it should sit level and low. There should be room for only one or two finger-widths above the eyebrows.

Seasonality

Not unlike surfing, bike riding is usually considered a warm-weather activity. It’s something to get you out and about when the sun is shining and the skies are blue. But among the truly dedicated and hardcore, there exists bike gear that allows you to pursue your passion all year round, regardless of weather conditions. 

Anyone who has tried to strap a stubborn helmet over a toque on a frigid day can appreciate the need for a cold-weather helmet. They will ensure that you don’t have to pick protection over comfort or vice versa when heading out into the wild. And while it might be tempting to simply, say, use a snowboarding helmet to pull double duty, it’s wiser to invest in a separate cold-weather bicycle helmet. Snowboarding helmets are typically too bulky and don’t provide enough ventilation for your head. Their extra padding and size can feel unwieldy when you’re biking. The ideal cold-weather bike helmet would provide some kind of lining, with ear flaps and vents that can be opened or closed while riding. They are usually much lighter weight, as well.

Price

Safety is paramount when selecting a bicycle helmet. The best budget bicycle helmet will not skimp on safety ratings and testing standards. While you can find bicycle helmets online for under $20, we recommend avoiding the cheapest models and opting instead for a highly rated budget model. With an average price range between $20 and $300, you can find a safer budget helmet for between $50  to $100.

FAQs

Q: What should I look for when buying a bike helmet?

The best bike helmets offer impact absorption, a sturdy retention system, and a comfortable, snug fit. Helmets that are designed with MIPS are important in keeping you safe in case of an accident. Lighter-weight helmets with ventilation systems make wearing your helmet a more comfortable and pleasant experience,  especially for long rides. Most importantly, be sure the helmet you choose fits properly in order to receive all the safety benefits.

Q: Are cheap helmets safe?

When shopping for a bike helmet on a budget, you might be wondering if cheap bike helmets offer the same protection as high-end models. The good news is less-expensive bike helmets can be safe. That said, it’s important to research whether the bike helmet comes with a U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission label. Safety standard testing will help you understand the level of protection provided. Keep in mind that very inexpensive or “cheap” helmets can be fakes and offer poor levels of protection. To avoid this possible issue, always buy bike helmets from reputable brands that guarantee safety standards. Expensive helmets can be more costly because they use lighter-weight materials and offer greater ventilation, which is more for comfort than safety.

Q: Are mountain bike helmets safer?

Mountain bike helmets are often safer than helmets designed for the road by virtue of having more padding. These helmets are designed with thicker materials and have more protection at the base of the skull and top of the neck area to protect bikers from uneven, rocky terrain. The biggest differences between the two types are that road helmets usually don’t have visors, are lighter in weight, and provide greater ventilation to account for the added heat from asphalt. If you are looking for one helmet for both mountain biking and road biking, it would be a safer bet to buy a mountain bike helmet. However, if you are mostly riding casually on the road, it might be most comfortable to purchase a lighter-weight road helmet with lots of ventilation.

The final word on the best bike helmets

There’s really no two ways about it—bike helmets are a necessity no matter your age, skill level, or bike-related activity of choice. Investing in comfortable protection just makes sense, and you have a broad range of options when it comes to price, design, and intended usage. Being aware of how you ride, where you ride, and the weather conditions around where you live will all help you narrow down your choices to find the right fit for you and your family of bike riders. Being as safe as you are comfortable is a very achievable (and worthwhile) goal.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bike helmets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>